The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutA09-0034 fire alarm submittal package �. - s �,� , ,T � K � . � '� `� , �.� '�`,•�,.,��, �- �^� -.,�: �� ° . .,. . , . .: �� _ � �.,� ',�'#;�'r�i+��;�� a 4'� , .�'�� -�#: ,,; � ,.�'�"`�8•�, ''.t:a . ` .��9� r .', x�E . ,��°r"�� T:. �� _ -- i , i .., .• : . � �['� . :a,,' .,. ''�`'i �,� .a,�i ' � `� ,s�.�+r .�� ., "� _:�.:+yee�.N . .� ��R-`- .��ir'j,� �r�'� i ��"w...,�.�.�.�.._ � �. � R� Y � o n� ¢. .�'r'„ ,'f•.� �a�.�^��"ir. p p. iy'��i � �� I I' � ,, � � y•� � ',;L�....-. r � . �� •, ,k.+ iy�� y �� . •. +,; • f '��" '+,� j��. .,�, ,T��. i e' , , . �. �..t fM`��':ai. � �*�y\w,..J,, i 4. . _ l�'��...� SO�LA�� FIRE ALARM SUBMITTAL PAC KAG E Prepared By: Johnson Controi 10289 West Centennial Road Littleton, CO 80127 Prepared For: Town of Vail Fire Department BCER Engineering Solaris E Light �_.,_ ,.:_.,.:..�.._,,.sa____._,,.�_._..�.��..�.....,�._._.Y... � ,. _ ,_.�._._.__. i{�i��VICV�E� ❑ RE'd`i5E raI�SD RE�UBMIT �� 9EJECTEO ❑�,4AK�COr�AECTIONS NOTED ��p�TM� s nrrections or comments mad2 on the shop v�" �� drawings during this review do not re!ieve contractor r o v e d a s Submitted 0 ��m compliance with requirements ot the drawings A approved as Noted C� S O L A R I S � � � �!=p�'fic�tions Th.is check is �nly for review o f � , � ttie design concept of the 'iance w�th the information ¢,� �..� Q � �ments. The contractor is �+7� � ��"' `� �and correlating ail quanfities � ; r � �,�,fabrication pracesses anti T�' c> � �7!� T �scruc.�on;coordinating his work with pa�; O� ■' , �,��!"r�ades,and performing his work in a sa�e��. . :i;...�'cry manner. ; BCER ENGINEERING,INC. 1. TOV Fire Department Pracess " naie .�?•�cf7 By i: � 2. TOV Requested Information `"�` 3. JNCA-2 (Network Control Annunciator) Operations Manual 4. Bill of Material including Specific Device Models Numbers 5. Components of Voice Evacuation and Fire Command Center Equipment 6. Manual Fire Alarm Stations and Notification Appliances 7. Conduit, Raceway, Junction Boxes, Terminal Cabinets, Device Backboxes, Fittings, Hangers and Mounting Hardware 8. Smoke Detectors, Heat Detectors, Monitor Modules, Control Modules and Relay Modules � � 9. Standby Batteries : � : "`� _ 10. Any Other Material � . ;, , � � � � M �� .. ; � D (� �r . ;, �, � I P 7 � +��{ � � �4A1�� ! r f• �` . . ' . � . � - � L+.b.,.' " �, t� . : . .. ' . � . , � l:. � TOVI�IV C�� V'�IL � .. � � `�� . ` '� �� _ _. �4�.�..� . .:� _ _�_,._.. ____., .� E "( �` ' -� BY DAN JUCHARTZ �,y� �`4i �wa� �`�'a . - . � THE W��TZ COMPANY o�POp RE6/SlF �;�`:Q <'� ,;1�,;. _ ...... MAY 2 y 200� o.,;.��cKn£�•�•��^a � • F•: . r :a �. ��G�GI� Thts check does not ui any+�ay i��e�e t'ne su5conttactor or sup �• pI�erof itscontractural responsibilit�es includmRwithout.limita :p 33259 • '.L�� d t'wn all of iis responsibility to verify aecuracy oi quantiUes and . • • � dimensions. �J�� _ ��• : �b�21- o�_ . ' s�e�n�� •. . , ' � „ � A�,E. �� , �..�0� �G �- �-�.��- vu� +�e � .fbeq c�8_.. Qeacr eEi` Fire Department Process For Commercial & Residential Fire Alarm Systems Commercial and Residential Fire Alarm shop drawing requirements at the time of submittal must include the following: X A Colorado Registered Engineer's stamp X Device locations on reflected ceiling plans X Reflected Ceiling Plans (RCP) X Typical device wiring diagrams X Battery calculations X Battery calculations X A list of specific device model numbers X Equipment cut sheets of each type of devi�e X The number of each type of device X Information indicating the specific zones -,�u _X Circuit diagrams X Point to point wii-ing diagram X Wiring type, size and number of conductors X The sour�e of AC power circuits X Fire alarm panel locations X Knox Box location X Information indicating monitoring method and monitoring agency X Information regarding property managers and contact numbers X Owner's primary residence location and contact numbers X Instructions for fire alarm system operations and any pertinent code numbers for proper operations This check list has been provided to ensure that our review process may be handled in a timely manner. I have read and understand the above listed submittal requirements: Project/Street Address: �t.ARtS �`1� �5'� ME,�1Dow VRiv� Contractor Signature: ��,✓,r��-µ t3,a�� .s s �, Date Signed: 5�2o�oq SOLARIS TOWN OF VAIL REQUESTED INFORMATION SOURCE OF AC POWER Panel ELP-4EA, Circuits 9, 11 and 13 KNOX BOX LOCATION The Knox Box is located at the Main Entrance. See Page FA3. MONITORING METHOD AND MONITORING AGENCY Monitoring Method - Ademco Contact ID Monitoring Agency - ROC Phone: 1-800-7�3-4524 Email: CG-ROCOSNAC�jci.com PROPERTY MANAGEMENT AND CONTACT NUMBERS Dan Feeney Solaris Property Owner, LLC 2211 North Frontage Road Suite A Vail, CO 81657 Office: 970-479-7566x104 Cell: 970-390-6493 PROPERTY MANAGERS AND CONTACT INFORMATION Same as Above INSTRUCTIONS FOR FIRE ALARM OPERATION AND CODE NUMBERS Alter Status Code - 11111111 Operations Manual is attached SOLARIS VOICE EVACUATION MESSAGE Voice Tvpe Female —Accent TBD by owner Emerqencv Evacuation Messaqe Two —Temp Horns (4ULAW) "May I have you attention please, may I have your attention please, a fire has been reported in the building, a fire has been reported in the building, please proceed to the nearest stairway and exit the building, do not use the elevators" Two — Temp Horns (4ULAW) Rspeat M�ssage All Clear Messaqe Two —Temp Horns (4ULAW) "Attention, your attention please, the building emergency condition has been cleared, you may return to your normal activities, the building emergency has been cleared, you may return to your normal activities" Two — Temp Horns (4ULAW) � Solaris Bill of Materials Appliances uantit ET70-24MCW-FW White Speaker Stobe 342 ET70-W White Speaker 423 ET90-24MCC-FW White Ceiling Mounted Speaker 1 RSS-24MCW-FW White Strobe 21 ET70WP-24135W-FW White Weatherproof Speaker Strobe 2 MTWP-2475W-FR Red Weatherproof Horn Strobe 1 Devices uantit 2951 J Intelligent Smoke Detector 980 5951 J Intelli�ent Heat Detector 34 5600 Mechanical Heat Detector 153 B210LPJ Smoke/Heat Detector Base 445 B501BHT-2 Standard Sounder Base 569 JBG-12LX Intelligent Manual Pull Station 78 JBG-12L Conventional Manual Pull Station 5 M300-MJ Intelligent Monitor Module 43 M300-DJ Intelligent Dual Monitor Module 118 M300-RJ Intelligent Relay Module 76 RA-400Z InnoviarFlex Duct Detector 2 M500X Intelligent Isolation Module 24 DSM Sync Module 1� Panel Components uantlt IFC 320-2 16 JDVC- Digital Voice Command 1 DAA-50- Digital Audio Amplifier 14 JNCA-2 Network Control Annunciator 1 UDACT- Universal Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter 1 PS-8 Power Supply 8 XP-6C Six Circuit Supervised Control Module 8 � � J HNSON COIVTR LS I � � ; � 3 Network Control Annunciator J N CA-2 Instruction Manual Document 52�70 � 8/6/2007 � �: "� Fire Alarm System Limitations While a fire alarm system may lower insurance rates, it is not a substitute for fire insurance! An automatic fire alarm system—typically made up of Heat detectors do not sense particles of combustion and smoke detectors,heat detectors,manuai pull stations,audible alarm only when heat on their sensors increases at a predeter- warning devices,and a fire alarm control panel with remote mined rate or reaches a predetermined level. Rate-of-rise notification capability—can provide early warning of a develop- heat detectors may be subject to reduced sensitivity over time. ing fire. Such a system,however,does not assure protection For this reason,the rate-of-rise feature of each detector against property damage or loss of life resulting from a fire. should be tested at least once per year by a qualified fire pro- The Manufacturer recommends that smoke and/or heat detec- tection specialist. Heat detectors are designed to protect tors be located throughout a protected premise following the property,not life. recommendations of the current edition of the National Fire IMPORTANT! Smoke detectors must be installed in the Protection Association Standard 72(NFPA 72),manufacturer's same room as the control panel and in rooms used by the sys- recommendations,State and local codes,and the recommen- tem for the connection of alarm transmission wiring,communi- dations contained in the Guides for Proper Use of System cations,signaling,and/or power. If detectors are not so Smoke Detectors,which are made available at no charge to all located,a developing fire may damage the alarm system,crip- installing dealers. These documents can be found at http:// pling its ability to report a fire. www.systemsensor.com/html/applicat.html. A study by the Audible warning devices such as bells may not alert people Federal Emergency Management Agency(an agency of the if these devices are located on th�other side of closed or United States government)indicated that smoke detectors partly open doors or are located on anotfier floor of a building. may not go off in as many as 35%of all fires. While fire alarm Any warning device may fail to alert people with a disability or systems are designed to provide early warning against fire, those who have recently consumed drugs,alcohol or medica- they do not guarantee warning or protection against fire. A fire tion. Please note that: alarm system may not provide timely or adequate warning,or simply may not function,for a variety of reasons: • Strobes can,under certain circumstances,cause seizures in people with conditions such as epilepsy. Smoke detectors may not sense fire where smoke cannot reach the detectors such as in chimneys,in or behind walls,on • Studies have shown that certain people,even when they roofs,or on the other side of closed doors. Smoke detectors hear a fire alarm signal,do not respond or comprehend the also may not sense a fire on another level or floor of a building. meaning of the signal. It is the property owner's responsi- A second-floor detector,for example,may not sense a first- bility to conduct fire drills and other training exercise to floor or basement fire. make people awase of fire alarm signals and instruct them on the proper reaction to alarm signals. Particles of combustion or"smoke"from a developing fire may not reach the sensing chambers of smoke detectors • In rare instances,the sounding of a warning device can because: cause temporary or permanent hearing loss. • Barriers such as closed or partially closed doors,walls,or A fire alarm system will not operate without any electrical chimneys may inhibit particle or smoke flow. power. If AC power fails,the system will operate from standby batteries only for a specified time and only if the batteries have • Smoke particles may become"cold,"stratify,and not reach been properly maintained and replaced regularly. the ceiling or upper walls where detectors are located. Equipment used in the system may not be technically com- • Smoke particles may be blown away from detectors by air Patible with the control panel. It is essential to use only equip- outlets. ment listed for service with your control panel. • Smoke particles may be drawn into air returns before Telephone lines needed to transmit alarm signals from a reaching the detector. premise to a central monitoring station may be out of service The amount of"smoke"present may be insufficient to alarm or temporarily disabled.For added protection against tele- smoke detectors. Smoke detectors are designed to alarm at phone line failure,backup radio transmission systems are rec- various levels of smoke density. If such density levels are not ommended. created by a developing fire at the location of detectors,the The most common cause of fire alarm malfunction is inade- detectors will not go into alarm. quate maintenance. To keep the entire fire alarm system in Smoke detectors,even when working properly,have sensing excellent working order,ongoing maintenance is required per limitations. Detectors that have photoelectronic sensing the manufacturer's recommendations,and UL and NFPA stan- chambers tend to detect smoldering fires better than flaming dards. At a minimum,the requirements of NFPA 72 shall be fires,which have little visible smoke. Detectors that have ion- followed. Environments with large amounts of dust,dirt or izing-type sensing chambers tend to detect fast-flaming fires high air velocity require more frequent maintenance. A main- better than smoldering fires. Because fires develop in different tenance agreement should be arranged through the local man- ways and are often unpredictable in their growth,neither type ufacturer's representative. Maintenance should be scheduled of detector is necessarily best and a given type of detector monthly or as required by National and/or local fire codes and may not provide adequate warning of a fire. should be performed by authorized professional fire alarm Smoke detectors cannot be expected to provide adequate �nstallers only. Adequate written records of all inspections warning of fires caused by arson,children playing with should be kept. matches(especially in bedrooms),smoking in bed,and violent explosions(caused by escaping gas,improper storage of LimibC1-2-2007 flammable materials,etc.). 2 JNCA-2 Manual— P/N�2570:C 8/6/2007 Installation Precautions Adherence to the following will aid in problem-free installation with long-term reliability: WARNING-Several different sources of power can be Like all solid state electronic devices,this system may connected to the fire alarm control panel. Disconnect all operate erratically or can be damaged when subjected to light- sources of power before servicing. Control unit and associ- ning induced transients. Although no system is completely ated equipment may be damaged by removing and/or insert- immune from lightning transients and interference,proper ing cards,modules,or interconnecting cables while the unit is grounding will reduce susceptibility.Overhead or outside aerial energized. Do not attempt to install,service,or operate this wiring is not recommended,due to an increased susceptibility unit until manuals are read and understood. to nearby lightning strikes. Consult with the Technical Ser- CAUTION-System Re-acceptance Test after Software vices DepartmenY it any problems are anticipated or encoun- Changes:To ensure proper system operation,this product tered. must be tested in accordance with NFPA 72 after any pro- Disconnect AC power and batteries prior to removing or gramming operation or change in site-specific software. Re- inserting circuit boards. Failure to do so can damage circuits. acceptance testing is required after any change,addition or Remove all electronic assemblies prior to any drilling,filing, deletion of system components,or after any modification, reaming,or punching of the enclosure.When possible,make repair or adjustment to system hardware or wiring.All compo- all cable entries from the sides or rear. Before making modifi- nents,circuits,system operations,or software functions known �tions,verify that they will not interfere with battery,trans- to be affected by a change must be 100%tested. In addition, former,or printed circuit board location. to ensure that other operations are not inadvertently affected, at least 10%of initiating devices that are not directly affected Do not tighten screw terminals more than 9 in-Ibs. Over- by the change,up to a maximum of 50 devices,must also be tightening may damage threads,resulting in reduced terminal tested and proper system operation verified. contact pressure and difficulty with screw terminal removal. This system meets NFPA requirements for operation at 0-490 This system contains static-sensitive components. C/32-120°F and at a relative humidity 93%±2%RH(non- Always ground yourself with a proper wrist strap before han- condensing)at 32°C±2°C(90°F±3°F). However,the useful dling any circuits so that static charges are removed from the life of the system's standby batteries and the electronic com- body. Use static suppressive packaging to protect electronic ponents may be adversely affected by extreme temperature assemblies removed from the unit. ranges and humidity. Therefore,it is recommended that this Follow the instructions in the installation,operating,and pro- system and its peripherals be installed in an environment with gramming manuals.These instructions must be followed to a normal room temperature of 15-27°C/60-80°F. avoid damage to the control panel and associated equipment. Verify that wire sizes are adequate for all initiating and indi- FACP operation and reliability depend upon proper installation. cating device loops. Most devices cannot tolerate more than a Precau-D1-9-2005 10%I.R.drop from the specified device voltage. FCC Warning WARNING:This equipment generates,uses,and can Canadian Requirements radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits used in accordance with the instruction manual may for radiation noise emissions from digital apparatus set cause interference to radio communications.It has been out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Cana- tested and found to comply with the limits for class A dian Department of Communications. computing devices pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules,which is designed to provide reasonable Le present appareil numerique n'emet pas de bruits radi- protection against such interference when devices are oelectriques depassant les limites applicables aux appa- operated in a commercial environment.Operation of this reils numeriques de la classe A prescrites dans le equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interfer- Reglement sur le brouillage radioelectrique edicte par le ence,in which case the user will be required to correct ministere des Communications du Canada. the interference at his or her own expense. HARSH�"', NIS'"', Notifier Integrated Systems�"', NOTI•FIRE•NETT", and ONYXWorks'"' are all trademarks; and FlashScan�, NIONO, NOTIFIER�, ONYX�,UniNetOO,VeriFireO,and VIEWO are all registered trademarks of Honeywell Intemational Inc.Echelor�is a registered trademark and LonWorksT"' is a trademark of Echelon Corporation.ARCNETO is a registered trademark of Datapoint Corporation.Microsoft�and WindowsOO are registered trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation.LEXAN�is a registered trademark of GE Plastics,a subsidiary of General Electric Company. 002007.All rights reserved.Unauthorized use of this document is strictly prohibited. �;: JNCA-2 Manun!— PM�2570:C 8/6/2007 3 Documentation Feedback Your feedback helps us keep our documentation up-to-date and accurate. If you have any com- ments or suggestions about our online Help or printed manuals, you can email us. Please include the following information: • Product name and version number(if applicable) • Printed manual or online Help • Topic Title(for online Help) • Page number(for printed manual) • Brief description of content you think should be improved or corrected • Your suggestion for how to correct/improve documentation Send email messages to: FireSystems.TechPubs@honeywell.com Please note this email address is for documentation feedback only. If you have any technical issues, please contact Technical Services. � 4 JNCA-2 Manual P/N 52570:C 8/6/2007 Table of Contents Section1: About this Manual...................................................................................................8 1.1: Standards and Specifications.........................................................................................................................8 1.2: UL 864 Ninth Edition Compliance................................................................................................................8 13:Programming Features Subject to AHJ Approval.........................................................................................9 1.4:Related Documentation .................................................................................................................................9 1.5:Notes,Cautions,and Warnings....................................................................................................................10 1.6: Conventions.................................................................................................................................................11 Section2: Overview................................................................................................................12 2.l:General Description.....................................................................................................................................12 2.1.1:JNCA-2 Features...............................................................................................................................I_i 2.1.2:Compatibility with NOTI•FIRE•NGTT"' Panel Nodes......................................................................13 2.2:JNCA-2 and Displayless Panels..................................................................................................................14 2.3:JNCA-2/IFC2-640 Standalone Application...............................................................................................15 2.4:JNCA-2 Board Layout.................................................................................................................................16 2.�:JNCA-2 Keypad Layout..............................................................................................................................17 2.6:JNCA-2 Components...................................................................................................................................17 2.6.1:JNCA-2 Basic Components...............................................................................................................17 2.6.2:EIA-232 Optional Devices................................................................................................................17 2.6.3:ElA-485 Annunciator Devices..........................................................................................................17 2.6.4:Other Optional devices......................................................................................................................18 Section3: Installation.............................................................................................................20 3.1:Preparing for Installation.............................................................................................................................20 3.2: Installation Checklist...................................................................................................................................20 3.3:CAB-4 Series Cabinet..................................................................................................................................21 : 3.4:JABS-2D Cabinet........................................................................................................................................22 3.5: CHS-M3 Chassis.........................................................................................................................................23 3.5.1: Layout................................................................................................................................................23 3.5.2:JNCA-2 Mounting.............................................................................................................................2� 3.5.3: Memory-Backup Battery...................................................................................................................24 3.5.4:Option Boards....................................................................................................................................25 3.6:CA-2 Chassis Assembly..............................................................................................................................26 3.7:JNCA-2/IFC2-640 Standalone...................................................................................................................27 3.8: Retrofits.......................................................................................................................................................27 3.9: �'orm-C Relays on the JNCA-2 ...................................................................................................................27 3.10:Network Communications Module............................................................................................................28 3.11: Connecting Power Sources and Outputs...........................................................................•----....................29 3.11.1:Overview.........................................................................................................................................29 3.11.2:Connecting the Power Supply.........................................................................................................29 3.11.3:Checking AC Po�ver........................................................................................................................30 3.11.4:Power Considerations When Servicing...........................................................................................31 3.12:UL Power-limited Wiring Requirements...................................................................................................32 3.13: Installing Printers.......................................................................................................................................32 3.13.1: Printer[nstallation Sequence...........................................................................................................33 3.13.2:Configuring the Printer....................................................................................................................34 3.14: Connecting a PC for Programming............................................................................................................35 3.15:Annunciator Key Switch(JAKS-1B)........................................................................................................35 3.16: Security Tamper Switch.............................................................................................................................3� 3.17: ACS Devices and the JNCA-2...................................................................................................................36 Section4: Operation...............................................................................................................37 4.1: The Keypad..................................................................................................................................................37 4.1.1: Fixed Function Keys..........................................................................................................................37 � 4.1.2: Special Function Keys.......................................................................................................................38 J1VCA-2 Manual - P/N�2570:C 8/6/2007 5 Table of Contents 4.1.3: Soft Keys..........................................................................................................................................38 4.1.4: Diagnostic Indicators and Controls...................................................................................................38 4.2:The LCD Display........................................................................................................................................39 4.2.1: Basic Screen Navigation:The Main Menu........................................................................................40 4.2.2: Event Counts Display........................................................................................................................41 4.2.3: Multiple Event List............................................................................................................................43 4.2.4:Local and Node History Display.......................................................................................................44 4.2.5:Read Status........................................................................................................................................49 4.2.6: Program/Alter Status.........................................................................................................................53 4.2.7: Printer Functions................................................................................................................................53 4.3: Events...........................................................................................................................................................57 4.3.1:About Events.....................................................................................................................................57 ° 4.3.2:Types of Events.................................................................................................................................57 43.3: Event Handling..................................................................................................................................58 Section5: Programming .......................................................................................................60 5.1: Security Access............................................................................................................................................60 5.1.1: Master Password................................................................................................................................60 3.1.2: User Password...................................................................................................................................60 �.1.3:Unprotected Functions.......................................................................................................................61 �.1.4: Key Switches.....................................................................................................................................62 �.2:The Program/Alter Status Menu..................................................................................................................62 5.3:Alter Status Menu........................................................................................................................................63 �3.1:Alter Status Menu Options................................................................................................................63 5.3.2: Disable/Enable...................................................................................................................................64 5.3.3:Changing Detector Sensitivity...........................................................................................................65 5.3.4: Clear Verify Counters........................................................................................................................66 5.3.�:Clear History......................................................................................................................................67 53.6:Walk Test...........................................................................................................................................68 �.3.7: Change Time/Date.............................................................................................................................69 5.3.8:Control On/Off...................................................................................................................................70 �.4:Node Program Menu ...................................................................................................................................71 �.4.1:Node Program Menu Options............................................................................................................72 �.4.2: Edit Point Labels................................................................................................................................72 5.4.3: Edit Node Label(for a Remote Node)...............................................................................................73 5.5: Panel Program Menu....................................................................................................................................74 �.�.1: Network Parameters...........................................................................................................................74 - 5.5.2:Network Mapping.............................................................................................................................. � �.53: Panel Settings.....................................................................................................................................76 5.5.4: Panel Timers......................................................................................................................................79 5.5.5: LCD Display......................................................................................................................................80 5.5.6:ACS Programming.............................................................................................................................80 5.5.7: Supervision........................................................................................................................................87 5.5.8: MORE Menu.....................................................................................................................................88 5.6: Point Program Menu....................................................................................................................................89 5.7: Delete Programming....................................................................................................................................90 Appendix A: Power Supply Calculations .............................................................................91 AppendixB: Menu Hierarchy.................................................................................................92 Appendix C: Wire Requirements...........................................................................................93 Appendix D: Display and Control Center(DCC)..................................................................94 AppendixE: Regional Settings .............................................................................................95 E.1: Singapore.....................................................................................................................................................9� E.2:Chicago........................................................................................................................................................96 E.3: Australia......................................................................................................................................................96 6 JNCA-2 Manual— P/N 52570:C 8/6/2007 Table of Contents Appendix F: UL 8th Edition Panel Applications...................................................................98 F.1:Conversions Common to UL 8th Edition Panels.........................................................................................98 F.2: I FC-1010/2020.............................................................................................................................................99 F.3: I F C-4 00......................................................................................................................................................101 F.4: I FC-200......................................................................................................................................................102 Index.......................................................................................................................................103 � JNCA-2 Manual— P/N�2570:C 8!6/2007 � Section 1 : About this Manual 1 .1 Standards and Specifications The JNCA-2 has been designed to comply with standards set forth by the following regulatory agencies: • Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 864 • NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code • CANiliLC-5527-99 Siandard for Control Units for Fire Alarm Systems • ULC S524 Standard for the Installation of Fire Alarm Systems The contents of this manual are important and must be kept in close proximity of the hardware. If building ownership is changed,this manual and all other testing and maintenance information must also be passed to the current owner of the facility. A copy of this manual was shipped with the equipment and is also available from the manufacturer. QWARNING: Improper installation,maintenance,or lack of routine testing could result in system malfunction. QCAUTION: Read all bundled documentation for detailed instructions on upgrade/downgrade installation information. 1 .2 UL 864 Ninth Edition Compliance This product has been certified to comply with the requirements in the Standard for Control Units and Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems, UL 864 9th Edition. The following products have not received UL 864 9th Edition certification and may only be used in retrofit applications.Operation of the JNCA-2 with products not tested for UL 864 9th Edition has not been evaluated and may not comply with NFPA 72 and/or the latest edition of UL 864.These applications will require the approval of the local Authority Having Jurisdiction(AHJ). • JNCA Network Control Annunciator • IFC-640 Fire Alarm Panel • IFC-3030 Fire Alarm Panel • IFC2020/IFC1010 Fire Alarm Panel • IFC-400 Fire Alarm Panel • IFG200 Fire Alarm Panel • PRN-4 and PRN-5 Printers • Keltron Printer � g JNCA-2 Manual— P/N 52570:C 8/6/2007 Programming Features Subject to AHJApprovad About this Manual 1 .3 Programming Features Subject to AHJ Approval This product incorporates field-programmable software.The features and/or options listed below must be approved by the local AHJ. This product incorporates field-programmable software.In order for the product to comply with the requirements in the Standard for Control Units and Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems,UL 864,certain programming features or optio�s must be limited to specific values or not used at all as indicated below. Program Feature or Option Permitted in UL 864?(Y/N) Possible Settings Settings Permitted in UL 864 AC Fail Delay Timer Yes 0,or 1-12 hours 0,or 1-3 hours 1 .4 Related Documentation The table below provides a list of documents referenced in this manual,as well as documents for selected other compatible devices. Table 1 Related Documentation Compatible Conventional Devices(Non-addressable) Document Number Device Compatibility Document 51922 Device Compatibility Technical Bulletin LIT-445180 Off-line Programming Utility Document Number VeriFire'"^Tools CD help file download from IFC-Fire.com Cabinets&Chassis Document Number CAB-3/CAB-4 Series Cabinet Installation Document 15330 Battery/Peripherais Enclosure Installation Document 50295 BMP-1 Blank Module Plate Installation Document 51008 NCA/640-2-KIT 52893 NCA-2RETR0 Kit 52152 ABS-2D PID 52032 Control Panels and Power Supplies Document Number IFC2-3030 Installation,Programming and Operations Manuals 52563,52564,52565 IFC2-640 Instailation,Programming,and Operations Manuals 52835,52836,52837 IFC-320 Installation,Programming and Operations 52858,52860,52859 IFC-3030 Instaliation,Programming and Operations Manuals 52024,52025,52026 IFC-640 Installation,Programming and Operations Manuals 51864,51865,51866 AMPS-24/E Power Supply Manual 51907 Networking Document Number Noti•Fire•Net Manual,Network Version 4.0&Higher 51584 NCM-W/F Installation Document 51533 IFW Intelligent Fire Workstation Manual,Network Version 5.0&Higher 52028 JNCA Network Control Annunciator 51868 System Components Document Number JDVC and DAA Digital Audio Manual 52567 DAA Digital Audio Amplifier Instruction Sheet 52410 AA Series Audio Amplifier Manual 52526 � Johnson Controls Voice Alarm System Manual 51869 JNCA-2 Manual— P/N 52570:C 8/6/2007 9 About this Manual Notes, Cautions,and Warnings Table 1 Related Documentation Annunciator Control System Manual 15842 Annunciator Fixed Module Manual 15048 ACM-8R Annunciator Control Module Manual 15342 ACM-8R Annu�ciator Control Module Technical Bulletin LIT-445125 LDM Series Lamp Driver Annunciator Manual 15885 LDM Lamp Driver Modules Technical Bulletin LIT-445161 SCS Smoke Control Manual(Smoke and HVAC Control Station) 15712 � RPT-485W/RPT-485WF EIA-485 Annunciator Loop Repeater Manual 15640 TM-4 Installation Document(Reverse Polarity Transmitter) 51490 UDACT Manual(Universal Digital Alarm Communicator/Transmitter) 50050 UZC-256 Universal Zone Coder Manual 15216 UZC-256 Programming Manual 15976 1.5 Notes, Cautions, and Warnings This manual contains notes,cautions,and warnings to alert the reader as follows: � NOTE: Supplemental information for a topic,such as tips and references. QCAUTION: Information about procedures that could cause programming errors,runtime errors,or � equipment damage. QWARNING: Indicates information about procedures that could cause irreversible equipment damage, irreversible loss of programming data or personal injury. � �p JNCA-2 Manual— P/N 52570:C 8/6/2007 Conventions About this Manual 1.6 Conventions This manual uses the following conventions as listed below: When you see Specifies Exampie text in small caps the text as it appears in the n1n[tCH T�tvtE is a selection that appears in LCD display or on the the LCD display;or Press the ENrea key control panel tex[in quotes a reference to a section or a "3tatus Change"specifies the Status LCD menu screen Change section or menu screen bold text [n body text,a number or Press 1;means to press the number"1"on character that you enter the keypad italic text a specific document JNCA-2 lnstallation Manua! a graphic of the key In a graphic,a key as it ES� appears on the control panel Press I� means to press the Escape key � NOTE: Where used in this manual, IFC2-640 refers to both the IFC-640/E and the IFC2-640/E unless otherwise noted. The term IFC2-3030 refers to both the IFC-3030 and the IFC2-3030 unless otherwise noted. The term IFC-320 refers to the IFC-320, IFC-320/E,and IFC-320(C)unless otherwise noted. � JNCA-2 Manual— P/N 52570:C 8/6/2007 1 1 � Section 2: Overview 2.1 General Description The JNCA-2 Network Control Annunciator provides a text-based display and control device for a NOTI•FIRE•NETT"'system. The JNCA-2 uses a 640-character LCD(16 x 40),a high-speed 32-bit microprocessor,flash memory and a rubberized QWERTY keypad. It can display all events from a NOTI•FIRE•NETT"'system and can co-exist with other JNCA-2s,JDVC Series, IFWs,and IFC2- 3030,IFC2-640,and IFC-320 fire alarm control panels(FACPs). � NOTE: The JNCA-2 is compatible with NOTI•FIRE•NETT"'version 5.0 and higher. i—J Figure 2.1 gives simplitied overview illustrations of typical applications for the JNCA-2. IFC-320 Networked NCM . System iFC2-sao NCM � . NCM JNCA-2 Noti-Fire-Net - NCM JDVC NCM � IFC2-3030 Remote Display Displayless _ - - NCM IFC2-320 for displayless 1FC-640 Ncnn IFC2-640 or � . Noti-Fire-Net IFC2-3030 � JNCA-2 NCM , - NCM � IFC2-3030 IFC2-640 Display for Standalone IFC2-640,Direct NuP N U P JNCA-2 Connection Display for oA� Standalone Optional Style 7 return IFC2-640(IIOt IFC2-640 NUP JDVC IFC-64O Wltll DAA DAA �� DAA � 1 2 32 JDVC and Digital Audio JNCA-2 NUP DVC-AO AA Series Audio Amplifiers ow evel ana og XPIQ,etc. LOOp. audio Figure 2.1 Block Diagram, Typical JNCA-2 Applications 12 JNCA-ZManua!— P/N52570:C 8/6/2007 General Description Overview 2.1.1 JNCA-2 Features • Notifier Universal Protocol(NUP)compatible • Optically isolated EIA-232 printer interface • EIA-485 ACS annunciator interface • Piezo electric sounder • 640-character, 16 row X 40 column Liquid Crystal Display(LCD) • Ten"soft keys"that point to current choices on the LCD. • 11 Status LEDs indicate: -Power -Fire Alarm -Pre-Alarm -Security -Supervisory -System Trouble -Other Event -�Signals Silenced -Point Disabled -CPU Failure -Controls Active • �upport for a custom"system-normal"bitmap graphic • Support for a 160-charac±er display • Nonvolatile Real-Time Clock(RTC) • Power supply supervision with AMPS-24 power supply • Acknowledge(Local,Network-wide or single node) • Signal Silence(Network-wide or single node) � • System Reset(Network-wide or single node) • Lamp Test(Local to JNCA-2) • Read Status(any point on a node) • Alter Status(any point or selected node) • 4000 Event History capacity • 1000 Alarm History capacity • Display and Control Center participation/indication 2.1.2 Compatibility with NOTI•FIRE•NETT'" Panel Nodes FACP Network Board IFC2-640, IFC-640 NCM-W/F IFC-320 NCM-WF IFC2-3030 NCM-W/F JDVC Series NCM-W/F Note:To be compatible with the JNCA-2, all networked nodes must be running NOTI•FIRE•NETT"'version 5.0. Table 2.1 NOTI•FIRE•NETT"" Compatible Fire Panels � JNCA-2 Manua[— P/N 52570:C 8/6/2007 13 Overview JNCA-2 and Displayless Panels To NOTI•FIRE•NETr"' ► . . . . p B � � @ � ♦ � �1 ID � �. a ❑ /❑ � R �p�. � Q' '� ` o0000 � °LHJ ._. _ o ❑ 10 � `� � O► /❑ � 0 _� �� NUP2 NUP7 aoaocoaccc o o � JNCA-2 � � - - ��3��a'z' ❑0000❑ooaa o a o �� -�: O❑O❑❑��❑O0�❑ ❑ ❑ NUP poR �� ❑❑�❑0�❑OO � ❑ ❑ "` `F — u E � 3 � o` _�8;: ° 0 NCM-W ¢ NGM-Y/ U Z Figure 2.2 JNCA-2 Network Connection Overview 2.2 JNCA-2 and Displayless Panels When there is a displayless IFC2-640 or IFC2-3030 on Noti-Fire-NetT"',the JNCA-2 acts as a remote display. ,-- —,\ r� .. ��. � �� — �� \ �� ,i L: � � � � I q 1 . I � �� A I I�' ��: 1 � � � j� NUP � � ��#-•.. a �� ',! / ---�_o i—�----� �� —'' l Displayless Panel � i�/�' � i � / / / � '• � Noti-Fire-NetT"' j � i 1 � et � � � � NCM-W � � � °T ° {Nl 00 _ - - - � � 3 CIA�_ .arJ �� c�i "�h, �� m C7N <� : S.7 m° �AN'.:��.� -.v� -�c � � E o �f��l�I�.G'� �.—J � � 3 ��L"5�� .ZS� � .J � ° F1�L��Czc.tla.�.��.[=3L�'� .� � 1� <°o �l�f 3�i�� rn.=-��.p�+'1 ._.� -� o ___ N O O U NCM-W Z Figure 2.3 JNCA-2 and Displayless Panels � 14 JNCA-2 Manual P/N�2570:C 8/6/2007 JNCA-2/IFC2-640 Standalone Application Overview 2.3 JNCA-2 / IFC2-640 Standalone Application The JNCA-2 can mount in a chassis in the same cabinet as the IFC2-640 panel and connect directly to it via the NUP ports using the NUP cable(P/N 75577,included);with this option,NCMs are unnecessary.Refer to Section 3.7,"JNCA-2/IFC2-640 Standalone"on page 27 for instructions on how to use the NCA/640-2-KIT for this installation. Connect the NUP cable from J1 on the JNCA-2 to J1 on the[FC2-640 panel.Make this connection only when using the JNCA-2 as the IFC2-640 display.Refer to Figure 2.4. If the JNCA-2 and IFC2-640 are used as a stand-alone pair,each device must be programmed separately using VeriFireT"'Toois in its off-line programming mode. Because the�'eriFireT"'Toals computer also uses the NUP port,the IFC2-640 and JNCA-2 must be temporarily disconnected for prob amming. If the IFC2-640/.fNCA-2 pair is connected to a network,there are two additional options for programming:either connect the VeriFireT"'Tools programming PC to the NUP port on the NCM board,or program the IFC2-640 through another network node. Refer to the VeriFireT"' Tools on-line help for details. � NOTE: Use a NUP cable to connect the two NUP ports(J1 on the JNCA-2 and J1 on the IFC2- 640).Make this connection only when using the JNCA-2 as the IFC2-640 display. � — — � � a,e:.F�a;�-�� \ � � IFC2-640 in chassis � � � � '� � � � 1� � � � � � � � � ' .o �i�fii��p.ee__... ..._..__- �NUP / Connection JNCA-2 in chassis i�— .I � �- k _� � a ..'.k..,.... _�� / � �, � a � Y E �_:. ��I w 3 ._ ..._ _._..�� Q p _ z.,i Z� 0 :�.L - �. . �,.�N � � i... .... •-- .` � n ,-,.>....��..�... . _. .. .. : -_. ... ._____._._-___ - J i Figure 2.4 The JNCA-2 as the IFC2-640 Display � NOTE: This system design is required for Canadian standalone applications. � JNCA-2 Manual— P/N 525�O:C 8/6/2007 �5 Overview JNCA-2 Board Layout 2.4 JNCA-2 Board Layout Fib re 2.5 shows JNCA-2 circuit board layout;descriptions of the components follow in the next sections. Note:Relay circuits are power-limited only if TB7 ACS(power-limited,supervised) connected to a power-limited signal source. Relays are rated for 2A@30VDC.See page 27. T69 Future Use T61 SECUR/ALARM Relay T62 SUPV/ALARM Rela USB � T65,left side.Printer(isolated) T63 Trouble Relay Future Use T65,CTX/CRX Keltron T84 Alarm Relay� printer supervision (TBS,CTX&REF,No connection) � � `�' �� ` s :� o xuv ," . ��—C _ =I c a; g __r__ t On , ' J1,Netw ��----------------------- �% �-�-----},_� _--_______� �� Connectio � j _ (NUP), � �� n� Cabie P/N a:-a i .�,, ,.z a=.""" �;y 75556 E� � D;�, ��>�, � ��`'�-------- ----- -- P ry --------------=�.�:: � � � SW1 Security � i i i SW2 Su erviso i , � � ' i i "`"'"�,�� i J6 Security switch connection �' �^°�° m ;�-i J5 Trouble bus connection � J2 LCD , i i , � � connection , i � � � ;;5�� J4 Backlight � � � "a =�= connection ' i � ,. � °� i � � .� _ s� I ybr°,�--------------------------------------------3E;.� � M° i _ I i Jt3 � � I a ■ 1 : i � i . I $ ■ � ■ I � !s r g t j F"' ��_3�� °„' E , Y - , x c�� f. I �ty9 ' � . +�3?. '�°'„„� 3 �;,– - ----a...o– + ��,,,, . --- � -----�-- � =ttiw. '--------- '- ------ ----- �-'-- Q�J� Bn �� N Test fixture � 0 onnec ion a J13 Power connections z (non-power-limited). Lithium battery for backup of on- See page 29. LED status board memory(See page 24) indicator,factory use only. Refer to page 38 for TB6-Accessory power. keypad indicators. J9 Keypad Connection See page 29. Figure 2.5 JNCA-2 Board Layout � 16 JNCA-2 Manual -- P/N�2570:C 8/6/2007 JNCA-2 Keypad Layout Overview 2.5 JNCA-2 Keypad Layout The keyboard figure below illustrates the basic layout.The keypad is described in detail in the operation section of this manual, in"The Keypad"on page 37. Soft Keys �.e.,fi. ,�.-, ��.�.,.�. � ;- �.e.,.�. - :_ Status � `� °• g�""� � Multi-line - Keed Function IEDs y _' LCD Screen .�`�.•� �� - - � _. c .E� J .��.,..- i��l��l �' � ��-��s� r� s� � si a*� -� (�� .� � Q O�� (��C C !° � °;' P It l %� . -i Special Function Alphanumeric Keys = —�� L,�� i�� j�s� o' fF c x� � K' .� r (j'� � �;��a� _�� KeyS M ..Z JX I,�;I'i CII`�I�.N I M �.SPRCE � uraa I I ��I � Figure 2.6 The JNCA-2 Keypad 2.6 JNCA-2 Components 2.6.1 JNCA-2 Basic Components The JNCA-2 assembly includes the following components:JNCA-2 motherboard,QWERTY keypad with[.CD display,and NUP communications cables(#75576 and 7�5?7)used when connecting the JNCA-2 to other NUP-compatible devices. 2.6.2 EIA-232 Optional Devices The JNCA-2 supports the following optional printer and display devices: PRN series printers and Keltron printer connecting to the JNCA-2 via EIA-232 interfaces. PRN Series Printer.This is an 80-column,9''x 11"tractor-feed printer that can be located up to �0 feet(1�.24 m)from the Fire Alarm Control Panel(FACP). The PRN series prints a record of all system events and status changes within the network monitoring system. It also time-stamps the printout with the current date and time. Keltron Printer.The VS4095 is a two-color(red/black),40-column,24 VDC printer that mounts in a separate cabinet next to the FACP. The VS4095 meets UL fire and security requirements for an ancillary device. � NOTE: Refer to the appropriate manual for detailed information on any of the above EIA-232 devices. 2.6.3 EIA-485 Annunciator Devices The JNCA-2 can be used to monitor annunciator devices and Annunciator Control System(ACS) modules. ACS modules connect ro the JNCA-2 using an EIA-485 ACS Mode connection. The JNCA-2 can support up to 32 annunciator devices. ACS devices use LED arrays to show the status of points or zones within the network monitoring system. Annunciator points are programmable from the JNCA-2 interface. The following annunciator modules(and their corresponding expander �, modules)are supported by the JNCA-2: JNCA-2 Manual— P/N 52570:C 8/6/2007 1� Overview JNCA-2 Components ACM-8R.The Annunciator Control Module-8R provides the control panel with a mappable relay control module. Relays can be selected for mapping anywhere in the system memory(in groups of eight). The ACM-8R provides eight Form-C relays with SA @125 VAC(resistive)or 5A @30 VDC(resistive)or 2A @125 VAC(inductive)contacts. It tracks any group of eight zones within the system. ACM-16AT and AEM-16AT. The Annunciator Control Module-16AT has 16 red alarm and 16 yellow trouble LEDs. The Annunciator Expander Module-16AT expands the ACM-16AT by 16 annunciator points. Up to three of these expander modules can be supported by an ACM-16AT,for a maximum of 64 annunciator points. ACM-24AT and AEM-24AT. The Annunciator Control Module-24AT ha�24 calor programmable on/alarm LEDs(set to red,green,or yellow)and 24 yellow trouble LEDs. An ACM-24AT can support up to three Annunciator Expander Modules(AEM-24AT)for a maximum of 96 points. ACM-32A and AEM-32A. The Annunciator Control Module-32AT has 32 red alarm LEDs and a system trouble LED. The Annunciator Expander Module-32A expands the ACM-32A by 32 annunciator points,for a maximum of 64 points. ACM-48A and AEM-48A. The Annunciator Control Module-48A has 48 color programmable on/alarm LEDs(set ro red,green,or yellow). The corresponding expander module expands the ACM-48A by 48 points for a maximum of 96 points. LDM-32 and LDM-R32. The Lamp Driver Annunciatar Module-32 provides 32 alarms or 16 alarm and 16 trouble lamp driver outputs,corresponding to 32 annunciator points that can be connected to external devices like custom graphic annunciators. The Lamp Driver Annunciator Module expander module expands the LDM-32 by 32 annunciator points,for a maximum of 64 points. SCS-8 and SCE-8. The Smoke Control Station(SCS-8)module uses eight groups of four annunciator points for fan shutdown control or other heating,ventilation or air conditioning functions. The Smoke Control Expander(SCE-8)module expands the SCS-8 by eight groups of four annunciator points. SCS-8L and SCE-8L. The Smoke Control Lamp Driver Station(SCS-8L)module uses eight groups of four annunciator points for fan shutdown control or other heating,ventilation or air conditioning functions. The SCS-8L must be mounted in a custom graphic annunciator paneL The Smoke Control Expander(SCE-8L)is used to expand the SCS-8L by eight groups of four annunciator points. UDACT. The Universal Digital Alarm Communicator/Transmitter transmits system status to UL listed Central Station Receivers via the public switched telephone network. TM-4. The Transmitter Module provides a means for an FACP to control Alarm,Trouble and Supervisory reverse polarity outputs(15mA,24VDC nominal)or a Fire Municipal Box Trip output. All output circuits are supervised. The TM-4 mounts easily in standard module locations within the cabinet or external boxes. Refer to the Transmitter Module TM-4 installation document far further information and installation instructions. � NOTE: For details on any of the above annunciator modules, refer to the appropriate manual. 2.6.4 Other Optional devices NCM-W and NCM-F. The Network Communications Module provides a means for connecting specific Johnson Controls fire alarm control panels to NOTI•FIRE•NETT"'. There are two types of NCMs available:NCM-W for connecting nodes with twisted pair wire and NCM-F for connecting nodes with fiber-optic cable. An NCM is required when networking the JNCA-2. � �g JNCA-2 Mcmual— P/N�2�70:C S/6/2007 J1VCA-2 Components Overview VeriFire'"'Tools. VeriFireT"'Tools is an off-line programming and test utility that is Windows� based. The installer can create the program for a control panel from any PC running the VeriFireT"' Tools software,test the program,store a backup file,then bring it to the site and download from a laptop into the paneL VeriFireT"'Tools can also be used to create a custom graphic for the main screen of the JNCA-2. IFW Work Station. The IFW is a PC application with text and graphics display capability of all network events and points. It is compatible with release 5.0 and higher of the NOTI•FIRE•NETT"' system. UZG256.The Universal Zone Coder is a circuit board,used for NAC coding applications,that provides three NAC output circuits and up to 256 zone codes. Refer to the UZG256 Uriver•sal Zone Coder and UZC-256 Programming manuals for further information and installation instructions. STS-1.A Security Tamper Switch can be connected to the JNCA-2 and installed in its cabinet(e.g., CAB-4 series backbox). The STS-1 can then be used to monitor the door and indicate a door tamper condition whenever the door is opened. RKS-1.The Remote Key Switch provides external access security for the control switches on the JNCA-2. AKS-1B.The Annunciator Keyswitch enables/disables the JNCA-2 keypad. RPT-W/F/WF. RPT series repeaters can be used to boost the data signal between network nodes, extending data communication distance in NOTI•FIRE•NETT"'systems. Each RPT has two LED indicators notifying the user that data has been received. RPT-485W/WF. RPT-485 series repeaters extend EIA-485 distances. � JNCA-2 Manual- P/N 52570:C 8/6/2007 19 � Section 3: Installation 3.1 Preparing for Installation Choose a location for the JNCA-2 that is clean,dry,and vibration-free with moderate temperature. The area should be readily accessible with sufficient room to easily install and maintain it.There should be sufficient space for cabinet door(s)to open completely. Carefully unpack the system and inspect for shipping damage.Count the number of conductors needed for a1l devices and find the appropriate knockouts.(Refer to Section 3.12"l1L Power- limited Wiring Requirements"for selection guidelines.) Before installing Che fire alarm system,read the following: • Review the installation precautions at the front of this manual. • Installers should be familiar with the standards and codes specified in Section l.l "Standards and Specifications". • All wiring must comply with the National and Local codes for fire alarm systems. • Do not draw wiring into the bottom 9 inches(22.86 cm)of the cabinet except when using a separate battery cabinet;this space is for internal battery installation. • Review installation instructions in Section 3.2"Installation Checklist". /� WARNING: Risk of irreparable equipment damage U Make sure to install system components in the sequence listed below. Failure to do so can damage the control panel and other system components. QWARNING: Risk of irreparable equipment damage Wear a static discharge strap on wrist to prevent equipment damage. 3.2 Installation Checklist The checklist that follows contains references to information included in other manuals; see Section 1.4"Related Documentation"for document part numbers. Task Referto: 1. Mount the cabinet backbox to the wall. Section 3.3"CAB-4 Series CabineY'and Section 3.4"JABS- 2D CabineY' 2. Attach JNCA-2 to chassis Section 3.4 "JABS-2D CabineY', Section 3.5"CHS-M3 Chassis", and Section 3.6"CA-2 Chassis Assembly" 3. Attach option boards(e.g. network • Section 3.5.4"Option Boards"and Section 3.4"JABS-2D communications modules and other Cabinet" devices of the same size)to chassis. • Installation document for the specific device 4. Complete backbox/chassis mounting. Section 3.4"JABS-2D CabineY', Section 3.5"CHS-M3 Chassis", and Section 3.6"CA-2 Chassis Assembly" 5. Wire Relays Section 3.9"Form-C Relays"on page 27 6. Attach &wire other system components ❑Digital Voice components Digital 1/oice Control Manual, etc. ❑Annunciators and other ACS devices ACS Manual, etc. ❑Printer or other output device(s) Section 3.13"Installing Printers" ❑Network devices Noti•Fire•Net Version 4.0&Higher Manual, and/or Installation document for specific device(s) Table 3.1 Installation Checklist (1 of 2) Zp JNCA-2 Manual— P/N 52�70:C 8/6/2007 CAB-4 Series Cabinet Installation Task Refer to: 7. Calculate the proper battery rating. Main Power Supply Manuai 8. Install main power supply&batteries. Section 3.11 "Connecting Power Sources and Outputs" Run cable to main&optional power Section 3.12 "UL Power-limited Wiring Requirements" supplies, DC power outputs,relays,etc. QWARNING: Do not activate power at this time. Do NOT connect batteries. ❑Main power suppiy. Main Power Supply Manual 88-100/200 Cabinet Instal(ation Instructions 9. Check that all mounting holes are secured to insure a proper Earth Ground connection. 10. Connect wire shielding to Earth Ground. 11. Remove insulator from lithium battery Section 3.5.3"Memory-Backup Battery" on JNCA-2. 12. Appiy AC power to the control panel by placing the external circuit breaker to the ON position. Do NOT connect batteries until AC power is checked (see next step). 13. Check AC power. Section 3.11.3"Checking AC Power" 14. Connect the batteries using interconnect cable as described in power supply manual. 15. Install the dress panels, doors and CAB-3/CAB-4 Series Cabinet Installation Document covers. 16. Program the JNCA-2. Section 5, "Programming", on page 60 17. Field test the system. Table 3.1 Installation Checklist (2 of 2) 3.3 CAB-4 Series Cabinet This section provides instructions for mounting the CAB-4 Series backbox to a wall. Follow these guidelines when mounting the backbox: Locate the cabinet backbox on a surface that is in a clean,dry,vibration-free area.The top should be located so that all operational buttons,switches,displays,etc.are easily accessible and/or viewable to the operator-usually no more than 66 inches(1.7m.)above the floor.Allow sufficient clearance around the cabinet for the door to swina freely,and for easy installation and maintenance of equipment. • Use the four holes in the back surface of the backbox to provide secure mounting(See Figure 3.1). • Mount the backbox on a surface that is in a clean,dry,vibration-free area. QCAUTION: Unless you are familiar with the placement of components within this backbox,only use the knockout locations provided for conduit entry. Follow the instructions below. L Mark and pre-drill holes for the top two keyhole mounting bolts. 2. Select and punch open the appropriate knock-outs.(For seLeetion guidelines,see Section 3.12 "UL Power-limited Wiring Requirements".) 3. Using the keyholes,mount tlle backbox over the two screws. 4. Mark the location for the two(ower holes,remove the backbox and drill the mounting holes. 5. Mount the backbox over the top two screws,then install the remaining fasteners.Tighten all fasteners securely. 6. Feed wires through appropriate knockouts. 7. Install JNCA-2 and other components according to this section,before installing hinges and �� door(see CAB-3/CAB-4 Series Cabinet lnstallation Docicment). JNCA-2 Manua! P/N 52�70:C 8/6/2007 �� i [nstallation JABS-lD Cabinet CAB-4 Series backbox, D-size(four-row) CAB-4 Series backbox, A-size(one-row) (1 d 6 6 I Keyholes ; 2 places i , a a f� PAounting holes a 0 0 � Chassis- i � I 2 places a �, Chassis- mounting � mounting studs o =- studs � (2 per row of o (2 per row of backbox) m backbox) � � a m a U Figure 3.1 Backbox-Mounting Holes and Chassis-Mounting Studs 3.4 JABS-2D Cabinet To mount a JNCA-2 in an JABS-2D cabinet,follow the directions in the illustration below. 1.Secure the JABS-2D 3.Install four.75 in. JABS-2D to the CHS-2D a #4-40 female � wall using the two � aluminum standoffs c keyholes on its o (included,p/n 42042) Standoffs � back wall. � to chassis.Align i,� (3 NCM-W/F over them, Screws ° � and secure with four �, • � Hex�t�s • �• 4-40 x.25"long `�C:, \ � screws(included,p/n � � , � � 2.Align CHS-2D '��;� , � 38134). I� ° � \ � chassis over studs ��\\, NOTE:NCM-WF �`�'� \��' on the back wall of � ' 7 must be installed in � �� ;� % ��', the cabinet and � �� NCM-W/F � � � � �r, _._. �� the left position in the , secure with two 8-32 ��\ . �� chassis,as shown.It i��"" � �� ,% hex nuts(included "�� r � can not be installed in •- � i with chassis,p!n ��\;\'�,.,.��v / the right position. �, 36047). ��. � ��, l ; \� % CHS-2D Brackets 4.Install three 4-40 x.625" ,� °� aluminum standoffs(included, �C,� ° ' p/n 42129)to the CHS-2D Standoffs 3 3 3 overhanging brackets. Align �� ;I �� JNCA-2 over these standoffs � ; �� , �� and secure with three 4-40 x � z Z z .25"long screws(included,p/n I `�� I °�°°� 38134). _; �T �; m m m T�,�,.� , a a a � �'`.t` ,�' i� ! <�y ' Screws ;"�;�� `�'�� i�� 5.Close dress � r/ piate. /�q ��`r:. r �'��`� � 6.Close door. �:i:�; Figure 3.2 JNCA-2 Mounting in JABS-2D Cabinet �i 22 JNCA-2 Manual— P/N 52570:C 8/6/2007 CHS-M3 Chassis Installation 3.5 CHS-M3 Chassis 3.5.1 Layout The JNCA-2 mounts in chassis CHS-M3 in the to row of the cabinet.The JNCA- Four positions P on chassis 2 occupies the left half of the chassis CHS-M3 0 � 2 3 4 (positions 1 and 2,see Figure 33). Positions 3 and 4 of CHS-M3 can hold up ° � to iow�layers of equipment including I� annunciators and option boards.See 0 Figure 3.4 for possible configurations of � these four layers. � � • The BMP-1 Blank Module Plate covers � unused positions and also provides a \ � o location to door-mount some option -� Q �� Positions 1 and 2: � boards(see BMP-1 Product Lnstallation CPU � � Drawing for details). Q N Positions 3 and 4: c=i Four layers of equipment Figure 3.3 Chassis CHS-M3 Layers 1&2&3 mounted to Layers 18�2&3 mounted to Layers 1&2 mounted to PEM studs on chassis PEM studs on chassis PEM studs on chassis � � � � U O a 0 M � N S U Layer 4 mounted to Layer 4 door-mounted Layer 4 mounted to PEM PEM studs and tab-slot studs and tab-slot;Layer 3 suspended from Layer 4 Figure 3.4 Configuring Equipment in Chassis Positions 3 and 4 of CHS-M3 (Side View) 3.5.2 JNCA-2 Mounting Mount JNCA-2 into positions 1 and 2 of CHS-M3 as follows;equipment may be mounted to the chassis before or after the chassis is mounted in the backbox. 1. Attach three 1-15/16"(4.92 cm)aluminum male/female 4-40 standoffs(P/N 42076,included with JNCA-2)to chassis as shown in Figure 3.5. 2. Slide circuit-board tabs into slots on chassis as shown in Figure 3.5. 3. Place the board over the stand-offs so that mounting holes line up with those on the chassis. Secure all stand-offs with 4-40 screws provided(P/N 38134). � JNCA-2 Manua! - P/N 52570:C 8/6/2007 23 Installation CHS-M3 Chassis 1-15/16"(4.92 cm)aluminum male/female 4-40 standoffs at positions indicated 0 Chassis-mounting slots \ y O o � 0 0 JNCA-2 � o mounting slots � � , \ � , 0 � \ . � � � � . �, � � _ U Figure 3.5 Standoffs on Chassis CHS-M3 QCAUTION: It is critical that all mounting holes of the JNCA-2 are secured with a screw or stand-off to insure continuity of Earth Ground. Mounting Chassis in Backbox Align chassis-mounting slots with chassis-mounting studs(see Figure 3.1 and Figure 3.5 for locations). Secure with nut&lock-washer provided with chassis. 3.5.3 Memory-Backup Battery The lithium battery on the CPU provides backup of the JNCA-2's on-board memory BT, `_,� 3 during power loss.The JNCA-2 ships with '\ _ L an insulator to prevent the battery from � ) o discharging.To preserve the battery,the � ° insulating tube should be left in place as long as possible before applying AC power. Lift clip gently while Dot ed line indicates removing battery location of insulator If the insulator is not removed before applying AC power,the control panel will show a trouble situation. This battery's shelf-life should exceed 10 years,but if for some reason it fails,the control panel will show a troubte when powered up.To replace the lithium battery(P/N 31004, RAYOVAC Lithium 3V BR 22335): 1. Make a full backup of all system settings to prevent loss of all programming data. 2. Disconnect all power sources. 3. Disconnect wiring and remove JNCA-2 from backbox(3 screws at top, lift board tabs out of slot)and remove keypad(4 screws on back,LCD display stays atCached). � 24 JNCA-2 Manual— P/N 52570:C 8/6/2007 CKS-M3 Chassis [nstallation 4. Remove battery from under clip(use fingers,because screwdriver could dar¢components) and insert new battery. QCAUTION: The battery used in this device may present a risk of fire or chemical burn if mistr�d. Do not recharge,disassemble, heat above 212°F(100°C),or incinerate. Replace�lery with Notifier P/N 31004 only.Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explo�. 5. Replace keyboard,reinstall JNCA-2 into chassis,and reconnect wiring. 6. Follow system power-up procedures. 7. Dispose of used battery promptly.Keep away from children. Do not disassede and do not dispose of iv fire. 3.5.4 Option Boards If installing option boards Attach stand-offs for on the CHS-M3,connect option boards here... ..and here them at this time.As described in Section 3.�.1 0 � "Layout",up to eight �^ ��-� '—' __ __ __ `=5 � d� — — option boards can be � �� — _ , __ _ mounted in CHS-M3 to � '� o � . the right of the JNCA-2. fI �'°�� ; U There are no slots in the first(back)Cwo layers,but option boards with tabs m � � (such as NCM-W)will ��_----7 ° � � 9 still fit in those positions. � �! V �-- '--� " , � � �—_�_ ' _—� � - N Mounting � _�-�� - _ _ U Procedures �--�f=� When applicable,slide tabs at 1. [nstall four 1 inch bottom of option boards here... ..and here (25.4 mm)female stand-offs onto the Figure 3.6 Mounting Option Boards iniS-M3 chassis(P/N 42040, induded with chassis)as shown in Figure 3.6. 2. Place the first option board over the stand-offs so that holes line up. 3. If no more option boards will be mounted in that position,securely fasten allt�d-offs with screws(provided with module). If mounting a second or third option board,�h another layer of stand-offs and repeat steps 2-3. Note: Set the switches on an option�'d before mounting another layer in front of it. 4. For the top(fourth)layer of option boards,slide the tab at the bottom of the bdl into the slots on tlle chassis,and lay the board back onto the top of the chassis so that the sis line up with mounting holes on the option board.Securely fasten all stand-offs with screwgovided with module. � JNCA-2 Manunl-- P/N 52570:C 8/6/2007 25 Installation CA-2 Chassis Assembly 3.6 CA-2 Chassis Assembly The JNCA-2 will mount into a CA-2 chassis Back plate assembly-along with a JDVC or JDVC-EM, < Microphone micro hone and o tional tele hone handset- �NCA-2 ,1 and P P P half-chassi as part of an audio command center �``�{ handset s-T,, well installation. —'.,m�, - �i �;��_.=� i �,�� The CA-2 is a two-row assembly consisting of �,� � ; � s �i � I • a back plate that attaches to the backbox ', 3 • two half-chassis,each of which takes up ch�ssisalf- ��\ � ;f i E \'- N the left half of a backbox row �� ,� ;� � • a microphone and telephone handset well �� I � U • a microphone. _,,,�� The JNCA-2 mounts in the upper left corner. Figure 3.7 CA-2 Chassis Assembly (Refer to Figure 3.7 and Figure 3.8.)Mount the JNCA-2 to its half-chassis without removino the half-chassis from the back plate.Refer to "Memory-Backup Battery"on page 24 for removal of insulator. CA-2 half-chassis for JNCA-2 JNCA-2 �� \ � a � �� I F�� . \i� �I, ;� � I�a� ,,%� I� ' �� \�\ ; � �.� }�� \ ,-„'� �. � � a � ��, �� °°��1;� g ,,1,`�,, ° � � � � � � ' � � ��:, � �� ;:� � �.o �� .. �� ,� ',�� °v � E Q d �� 3�E ,.,4�..,� \�\'^ � � o,u w � ` 9 L b N aoo Fasten with four 4-40 screws(P/N 38134� �OL Slide the tabs at the bottom of included with JNCA-2)as indicated. the JNCA-2 into the outer Q QN slots at the bottom of the Z Z� chassis. Figure 3.8 Mounting the JNCA-2 onto the CA-2 Half-chassis Refer to the JDVC manual and CA-2 product installation document for installation of the JDVC microphone and handset into the CA-2. � 2( JNCA-2 Manua!— P/N 52570:C 8/6/2007 JNCA-2/IFC2-640 Standalone Installation 3.7 JNCA-2 / IFC2-640 Standalone The JNCA-2 may be mounted over a disp(ayless[FC2-640 using the hardware from attachment kit p/n NCA/640-2-KIT. Refer to Figure 3.9. Attach annunciator to panel with standoffs and screws from the attachment kit. •Six 632 x 1/4 SEMS screws,p/n 38067. •Two 4d0 x.625 long,.187 H male/female aluminum standoNs,p/n STEP 6 42729. � •Bonom brecket,p/n�8756. � Connect the JNCA-2 to •7op bracket,p/n ie755. _ ��Y�A the control panel via the STEP 5 ,',� p�� NUP Pable from J1hon Fasten the top bracket to � the annunciator to J1 on the FC2-640 chassis wiih . � the panel. the last two screws. • � o � STEP 2 . � � Screw the two ' `� IFC2-640 ' aluminumstandoffs ropb chassis �� into the top bracketi�.' ac�et �� O �� 0 Qe \q��m;� a 0 B0� • o �,n Srd�ao 0 � � r'� ns � � °°a ; \�.'� 7'haac 3 ; � 4e� ` - ; � '� , J7 NUP port m � STEP 4 ° �� ✓� o Carefully slide the � JNCA-2 into the sfots in the bottom bracket. � STEP 3 �O STEP 1 Attach top bracket to the 4 Attach the bottom bracket to the[FC2-640 JNCA-2 by aligning its � � chassis using two of the screws. standoffs over the holes at the top of the JNCA-2 � and fastening with two of the screws. Figure 3.9 JNCA-2 on a Displayless Panel 3.8 Retrofits The NCA-2RETR0 kit provides hardware to change the footprint of a JNCA-2 to fit on older dress panels. Refer to the NCA-2RETR0 Production lnstallation Document. 3.9 Form-C Relays on the JNCA-2 The panel provides a set of Form-C relays.These are rated for 2 A at 30 VDC(resistive): • Alarm-TB4 • Trouble-TB3 • Supervisory-TB2 • Security-TB 1 The Supervisory and Security contacts can also be configured as Alarm contact�by setting switches SW 1 and SW2 away from the factory default positions shown in Figure 3.10. � JNCA-2 Manua[ P/N 52570:C 8/6/2007 27 Installation Network Communicalions Module Cg s a SW1 set to Security O a SW2 set to Supervisory eo r+c c eo Nc c � xo Nc c � eo ec c Move switch to opposite position to convert to E Alarm relays. 3 } swz� swi� a w AURMSUPV AIARMSENR � T825EL TB15EL 0 M 0 � Figure 3.10 Form-C Relay Connections 3.10 Network Communications Module If networking two or more control panels(including JNCA-2s),each one requires a Network Communications Module;a wire version and a fiber version are available. The NCM-W/F can be installed in the CHS-M3 immediately to the right of the main circuit board. It can also be installed in a CA-2 behind the JDVC or JDVC-EM,as described in the JDVC Digital Voice Command Manual.Note that two network communications modules are necessary-one each for the JNCA-2 and the JDVC-so the second NCM-W/F must be installed in a separate chassis within the cabinet(A DAA chassis provides a convenient slot for an NCM to the right of the DAA board.Refer to the JDVC/DAA manual.) Connect J1 on the JNCA-2(Figure 2.5 on page 16)to J2 or J3 on the NCM�whichever is closest) using one of the network cables provided. • Cable 7�576 is for use with an iv`CM mounted next to the JNCA-2. � • Cable 75�77 is for use with the JNCA-2 connected to the IFC2-640. See the NOTI•FIRE•NET'"'Manual and NCM lnstal[ation Document for system configw-ation information. � NOTE: One NCM is required per NOTI•FIRE•NETTM node: •Do not share an NCM with a JNCA-2 and an FACP • Do not connect two NCMs together via NUP ports(NUP to NUP) If you wish to mask the NCM's appearance in the cabinet,install a BMP-1 blank plate over it. 1. Mount the NCM-W/F in the selected position. If another board is going to be mounted in the slot immediately in front of it,use stand-offs to secure it in place.Otherwise use the screws provided. 2. Connect J1 on the JNCA-2 to J3 on the NCM using the network cable provided(P/N 755�6). Do not connect two NCMs via NUP ports(aka NUP to NUP). 3. Connect Channei A and/or Channel B as described in the NCM Insta[lation Document. � NOTE: See the Noti•Fire•Net Uersion 4.0&Higher Manual and NCM Installation Document for system configuration information.See the BMP-1 Product Installation Drawing if considering mounting the module(wire version)behind a blank module plate in a dress plate or annunciator backbox. 28 JNCA-2 Manual— P/Iv'S2570:C 8/6/2007 Connecting Power Sources and Outputs Installation 3.11 Connecting Power Sources and Outputs QWARNING: Remove all power sources to equipment while connecting electrical components. Leave the external, main power breaker OFF until installation of the entire system is complete. QWARNING: Several sources of power can be connected to the control panel.Before servicing the control panel, disconnect all sources of input power rncluding the battery.While energized,the control panel and associated equipment can be damaged by removing and/or inserting cards, modules,or interconnecting cables. 3.11.1 Overview Complete all mounting procedures and check all wiring before applying power. Electrical connections include the following: • Primary power source.+24VDC,delivered through: • AMPS-24/AMPS-24E main power supply.If AMPS-24/E is mounted in a separate cabinet, power-supply wiring must be in conduit(for cabinet placement information see the AMPS-24/E manual. • the IFC2-640 or IFC-320 on-board power supply. • a supervised+24VDC power supply that is UL/ULGlisted for fire protective service. • Secondary power source.+24 VDC from batteries,installed in the cabinet with the JNCA-2's power supply(or in an optional battery cabinet). Secondary(battery)power is required to support the system during loss of primary power. • Accessory power for peripheral devices.When the JNCA-2 is not powered by the IFC2- 640,TB6 can be used to supply+24 VDC power to devices within the same enclosure as the JNCA-2.If those devices have outputs,the outputs must be power-limifed. � NOTE: The JNCA-2 ships with an insulator to prevent its lithium battery from discharging.To preserve the battery,this insulator should be left in place as long as possible before applying AC power. Refer to"Memory-Backup Battery"on page 24. Some installers may find it convenient to remove the insulator before mounting all equipment. � NOTE: If using multiple power supplies with one set of batteries, refer to main power supply manual for connection requirements. 3.11.2 Connecting the Power Supply AMPS-24/E Connect J13 Power on the JNCA-2 to TB2 on AMPS-24/E with Cable 75637(see Figure 3.11). This cable is 20 feet long and must run in conduit between the backbox containing the fire alarm control panel and the backbox containing the AMPS-24/E. See AMPS-24/E manual far full details and installation precautions. � JNCA-2 Manua! — P/N�2570:C 8/6/2007 Zy Installation Connecting Power Sources and Outputs In order to conserve batteries,connect AC power and check it before connecting batteries. Follow the procedures specified in the power supply manual. Cable 75637 AM PS-24 Main Power J13 on Supply JNCA-2 � ■ � _ °' ,� � � � ■ ° � 3 T62000000 0000T66 v � ■ � n� n + �(�iv + n + n a � �c�s�cCOn� < <�<� � 113 � POWER o � � D n � � � Figure 3.11 DC Power Connections: Main Power Supply IFC2-640 or IFC-320 Power Supply To power the JI��CA 2 using the IFC2-640 or IFG320, make the power connections according to Figure 3.12.Set JNCA-2 power-supply supervision to the IFC2-640 or[FG320 node number,as described in Section 5.5.7"Supervision". Note that the JNCA-2 will report AC power failure from the IFC2-640 or IFC-320 power supply. Cable 75636 24V N RST 24V RST t t - �� J13 on JNCA-2 TB7 on IFC-640 � � � T610 on IFC2-640 or IFC-320 ` � E � ■ 3 Non-resettable Power �� ■ a i.^m� o -�.�''� ■ �°o N � • Z N ry il1 Q rowEC U Z Figure 3.12 Connecting Power from the IFC2-640 3.11.3 Checking AC Power Table 3.2 contains a checklist for checking the system with AC power applied to the main power supply: QCAUTION: While checking AC power, make sure batteries are not connected. � 30 JN'CA-2 Manual--- P/N 52570:C b/6/2007 Connecting Power Sources and Outputs Installation Component Status JNCA-2 The green Power indicator will come on when power is coming from the main power supply.The yellow Trouble indicator wiil come on until batteries are connected. Main power supply The green AC indicator will come on when AC is supplied. The yellow Trouble indicator will come on until batteries are connected. Table 3.2 AC Power Checklist 3.11.4 Power Considerations When Servicing When servicing the JNCA-2,perform the following steps before removing or connecting any power or supervisory cables: • Remove battery/secondary power. • Remove AC power. • Wait 60 seconds. • Remove all EIA-48�connections. Qj WARNING: Several different sources of power can be connected to the JNCA-2. Disconnect all sources of power before servicing. This device and associated equipment may be damaged by removing and/or inserting cards,modules or interconnecting cables while this unit is powered. This damage may adversely affect the operation of this control unit, but its effect may not be readily apparent. �� JNCA-2 Manual— P/N 52570:C 8/6/2007 31 Installation UL Power-limited Wiring Reguirements 3.12 UL Power-limited Wiring Requirements Power-limited and non-power-limited circuit wiring must remain separated in the cabinet.All power-limited circuit wiring must remain at least 0.25 inches(6.35 mm)from any non-power- limited circuit wiring.All power-limited and non-power-limited circuit wiring must enter and exit the cabinet through different knockout and or conduits.To maintain separations easily,it is recommended that non-power-limited modules are grouped together.For example,use a separate row or designated side of the enclosure so that power-limited and non-power-limited wiring do not cross. Install tie wraps and adhesive squares to secure the wiring. For a quick reference to control panel circuits,refer to Figure 2.5 at the start of this manual.The power-limiting label inside your cabinet door identifies which compatible modules have power- limited or non-power-limited wiring. Nonpower-limited circuit (Assumes relay is connected to a Power-limited Side-View non-power-limited signal source) circuits ,� I � I �� ;� � ( i i ^ � �: i ; �� JNCA-2 �� '! NCM-W i � ��: �_' ■� i■ � • ■� i�� : ■�� ;�■ �, ��: � oaoc0000c�c ❑ ol; � i aoo�000cca ❑ o a;: ❑oao_aa�c000 ❑ ❑;. i �oco�ooao� ❑ a�; ' Power-limited — , -- I circuits � i ^ Z ( 1 E � � 3 3 c i � � M N � U I �� Z I IN � n �� Separating non-power-limited and power limited circuits within the backbox with adhesive squares figure 3.13 Typical Wiring in a Four-row Backbox Some devices(such as the ACM-8R)are power-limited only when connected to power-limited sources.When one of these devices is connected to a non-power-limited source,the powervlimited marking must be removed,and at the time of installation,each non-power-limited circuit connected to these modules must be identified in the space provided on the cabinet door label. � NOTE: Relays are power-limited only when connected to power-limited sources for the relay outputs. 3.13 Installing Printers This section contains information on connecting a printer to the CPU and for setting the printer options.The basic steps are as follows: 1. Make custom cable&connect it from printer to EIA-232 terminal on the JNCA-2. 2. Connect printer's power supply. � 3. Configure printer settings as described in printer documentation. 32 JNCA-2 Manual P/N 52570:C 8/6/2007 Installing Printers Installation ■Overview: PRN Printer The PRN provides a printed record(80 columns on standard 9°x 11° f��;_`-�_ tractor-feed paper)of all system events(alarm,trouble)and status �� . - changes within the system.The control panel can be configured to '��,,'N� `�f ,�� time-stamp the printout with the current time-of-day and date for each \ \�� ° � event.The printer can be located up to 50 feet(15.25 m)from the control panel. Installation and configuration instructions follow. ■Overview: Keltron Remote Printer(Model VS4095) The VS409�is a two-color(red and black),40-column,24 VDC printer that :�---_._ can print up to�0 messages in 90 seconds.This printer connects to the EIA- �- �� -;� 232 T[i5 on the CPU and to the+24V screw on TB6 of AMPS-24/E,and , � �� 3 mounts in a separate cabinet next to the control panel.The VS4095 meets I�_�'__-��_ : ' � � UL fire and security requirements for an ancillary device per UL 864,8th Li., ;=�,-; ',,� � Edition(Refer to"UL 864 Ninth Edition Compliance"on page 8 for more - - information); it is not ULGlisted.For more information on the Keltron printer,contact the manufacturer(Keltron Corp.,Waltham,MA). Installation and configuration instructions follow. 3.13.1 Printer Installation Sequence 1. Fabricate a custom cable to connect a printer to the system. Length of the cable will vary with each installation,but should not exceed a maximum length of�0 feet(1�.24 meters). Printer must be installed in the same room as paneL Using overall foil/braided-shield twisted-pair cable,properly connect one end to the DB-25 Connector(provided)using the wiring specifications shown in Figure 3.14. 2. Tighten clamp on connectar to secure cable.Connect the four open leads of the custom cable to the TBS terminal block on the CPU as shown in Figure 3.14. DB-25 connector on DB-25 connector on Keltron Printer VS4095/5 PRN Series Printer Keltron Printer VS4095/5` power connections' 7 32 7 432 000000 000 0 000000 00 o DC IN+ DC IN- 00000 00 00000 0 0 Note:Outputs are power-limited. �+ Z A (l D �< � < � 3 � � a � O � p A o � m PT1( PRX REF Cflf(i5lCRX REF Y �' y � o M � � c� �°y �.°� °n TB5 on JNCA-2 TBS on JNCA-2 TB6 of AMPS-241E *Note:VS4095/5 is not ULC-listed. Figure 3.14 Printer Connections 3. If installing a Keltron Printer VS4095/5,connect 24 VDC non-resettable power from a UL-listed power supply to the Keltron printer as shown in Figure 3.14(14 AWG). 4. If instaLling a PRN series printer,plug it into your AC power source.Note: PRN printers require a 120 VAC,50/60 Hz primary power source.If required for the fire alarm system contiguration(for example,a Proprietary Fire Alarm System),a remote printer requires a secondary power source(battery backup). Because a secondary power source is not provided, use a separate Uninterruptable Power Supply(UPS)that is UL-Listed for Fire Protective Signaling. 5. Plug the DB-2�connector end of the custom cable into the EIA-232 port of your printer. �, Tighten securely. JNCA-2 Manua!— P/N 52570:C 8/6/2007 33 . Installation /nstalling Printers 6. Configure the printer as described in Section 3.13.2"Configuring the Printer". 3.13.2 Configuring the Printer Refer to the documentation supplied with your printer for instructions on configuring your printer. PRN Printer Settings Set the printer options(under the menu area)according to the settings listed in Table 33. Option Setting Option Setting UR Adjust 0 Menu Lock ON Font HS Draft Language English CPI 10 CPI Paper LPI 6 LPI Single Skip 0.0 Form Adjust 12/72 Trac 1 ESC Character ESC Form Adjust 12/72 Emulate FX-850 Trac 2 Bidirectional Copy ON Form Adjust 12/72 Auto Sheet Feeder I/O Form Adjust 12/72 Interface Serial Auto Tear OFF Buffer 40K Serial F-Eject OFF Baud 9600,4800,2400 Form Length Format 8 Bit,None, 1 Stop Trac 1 Protocol' ENQ/STX Lines 66 CG-TAB Graphic Standard 10.5" Trac 2 Character Set Standard Lines 66 Country E-USA ASCII Standard 10.5" Select Zero ON Barcode Off Auto-CR OFF Barmode Unsecured Auto-LF OFF `Protocol:When printing in graphics mode,set I/O Serial Protocol to"Robust XON/OFF". Table 3.3 PRN Setup Options Keltron Printer VS4095/5 Settings The printer communicates using the following protocol: • Baud Rate Supervised and – Supervised mode: 2400 Supervised Unsupervised Unsupervised – Unsupervised mode: 300 SP1 On Off SP1 On Off SP2 On Off (Supervision is a programmed 1 X 1 X 1 x setting;refer to the Panel 2 X 2 X 2 X Programming section of the 3 X 3 X 3 X Programming Manual for 4 X 4 X 4 X instructions.) 5 X 5 X 5 X • Data bits: 8 6 X 6 X 6 X • Parity: None 7 X 7 X 7 X • Stop bits: 1 s x 8 x s x Set the printer D[P switches SP1 Table 3.4 Keltron DIP Switch Settings and SP2 according to settings in Table 3.4. � 34 JNCA-2 Manua!— P/N�2�70:C 8/6/2007 Connecting a PCfor Programming Installation 3.14 Connecting a PC for Programming A PC running the VeriFireT"'Tools programming utility can upload and download the operating program of the control panel when attached to J 1 Network/Service Connection(NUP)or to the second Network/Service connection on an attached NCM-W/F.Refer to the VeriFireT"'Tools CD for instructions. � NOTE: Download operations that change the basic program of the control panel must be performed by responsible service personnel in attendance at the control panel.After downloading a program,test the control panel in accordance with NFPA 72. 3.15 Annunciator Key Switch (JAKS-1 B) Some jurisdictions allow one node on a network to control the network at a time;one way to meet this requirement uses JAKS-1 B or Connector J6. For details,refer to Section 5.1"Security Access" and your local Authority Having Jurisdiction. The JAKS-1B can provide access security for the control switches on the JNCA-2. When key switch monitoring is enabled as described in the Programming Section 5.5.7"Supervisiod',the JNCA-2 keypad can only be used when the JAKS-1 B key is inserted and unlocked. JAKS-1 B The JAKS-1B kit includes a key switch and hardware for mounting to the JABF-4B. The JAKS- 1B switch mounts to theJABF-4B trim plate as shown in Figure 3.15. Plug the switch leads from the JAKS-1B into Connector J6 on the JNCA-2. When a JAKS-1 B is installed and enabled,the key must be inserted and turned for the keypad to be used. � ��.� �q:,� , , '�F,� ��'��---- d ..�-' �e � � s� a �P � F o B � � � • E i "' � 3 �r , x�`'�� ;�s a��r:,,,. m Installing JAKS-1 B on J6 and Trim Plate(Rear View) � Figure 3.15 Connecting JAKS-1 B on J6 3.16 Security Tamper Switch A security tamper switch(STS-1)installed in the cabinet door will indicate a door tamper condition whenever the door is open. If the JNCA-2 indicates a Security alarm,you can acknowledge, silence or reset the condition from the JNCA-2. There are two options regarding the tamper switch: • If the JNCA-2 is in its own cabinet,the tamper switch can be installed on the cabinet and connected directly to the JNCA-2. • If the JNCA-2 is mounted in the same cabinet as the control panel,the tamper switch can be connected to the FACP. .lNCA-2 Manual— P/N 52570:C 8/6/2007 35 Installation ACS Devices and the JNCA-2 3.17 ACS Devices and the JNCA-2 The JNCA-2 can be used to monitor Annunciator Control System(ACS)modules and can support up to 32 ACS annunciators. ACS devices use LED anays to show the status of points or zones within the network monitoring system. Annunciator points are programmable from the JNCA-2 interface. EIA-485 circuit characteristic JNCA-2 impedance of twisted pair wiring TB� should be approximately 120 ohms. ,a, - �=r, ei „-------------------- - �_.. ...�... ._.'`1�'Iril' & (s(oi i a o �i: '_"`-lL"'� ' l� I ._"'�___"""'�__�,�--____`_L`-'_ --�------------� , I� � �I � _' _ �------ -------------'---'- -..@, i � _ I ' ' I, � � u�� I i ...� � ' ❑�II�^-^-.._ I � � � �e i; °�i - 3 : � ' ; �..1�.. � �� 1 , � . r�: ' .f j • ' ' ' ;!'. �� '� '::I � � T 0______ _________ _________ _�. i = 1 �� ' � .. � i �; i � ! I' � - n � � � � ° �'�i£� E . . � � � �' —�r� m . . I __ .I � I � �! � � P f �8 ! i� � � < , a � ._•----� ------°----' g------..� i� m ;r � w `_—� . �r-�-- !'-----------------'I T62 on T62 on TB1 on ACM-16AT ACM-32A ACM-24AT Figure 3.16 JNCA-2-to-ACS Connection Refer to the appropriate ACS manual for EIA-48�circuit ratings and limitations. � NOTE: Some ACS devices will have two 2-pin connectors adjacent to each other,one for JNCA- 2 connections and one for connecting to the next ACS device. 36 JNCA-2 Manual — P/N�2570:C 8/6/2007 � Section 4: Operation This chapter covers basic operation of the JNCA-2 and control features available to the operator using the JNCA-2's keypad and 640-character LCD display. 4.1 The Keypad The keypad includes the Status LED indicators,soft keys,alphanumeric keys,fixed and special function keys.The alphanumeric portion of the keypad is in standard QWERTY format.This keypad is functional mainly when an entry is requested by the system.Othena�ise,pressing the keys results in no entry.. �I= NOTE: Key functions are as described below unless the Display and Control Center(DCC) option is enabled and the DCC is at another location.When this panel is not the DCC on a network, permission must be granted from the DCC before Signal Silence,System Reset, Acknowledge or Drill can be performed at this panel.Pressing one of these keys will automatically send a permission request to the DCC. � NOTE: When key switch monitoring is enabled,the keypad is usable when the JAKS-16 is unlocked. Soft Keys � °� --__.__�� ..o.,. s � -- . . - ��.E.�a. i ;; ,� s � i I �� Status � � ° � Fixed Function �w i LEDs �;� � � � ,.�^�.'� Keys EE.,,E i € w::�. r;: I �..,n..�o �� N! �..- �:w,.� -- �a�.�.� a 1 2��9 4 �� . i6 � �b� 9r �:�'. I E �w�ui t:.. �;��., �� :�, ,� � �� , � �c fwl;i e R i:' r, �u� `_��f o i�P?" f .�..� »' Special Function 3 w�(s�'��° �Fi� ��c� "��' '';�� '-'I � -±�� .. i'�� I�@yS � d I�IIIZI%X C V�I B N�.��.M� SPAC¢.� ��_ � _ ra �1 O O M Figure 4.1 The QWERTY Keyboard Interface 4.1.1 Fixed Function Keys The nine keys aligned along the upper right edge of the keypad/display are fixed function keys. ACKNOWLEDGE-Press this key to acknowledge an off-normal event displayed on the screen. Use to respond to a new alarm or event. SICNAL SILENCE-Press this key to turn off all control modules that have been programmed as silenceable. (all nodes mapped to JNCA-2). SYSTEM RESET-Press this key to clear all latched alarms and other events as well as turn off event LEDs. If alarms or other off=normal events exist after reset,they will resound the system and relight the LEDs. Unacknowledged events will not prevent reset from functioning. The System Reset key will not immediately silence active outputs.[f the Control-by-event programming JNCA-2 Manual P/N 52570:C 8/6/2007 37 I Operation The Keypad condiCions for the output are not met after reset,the output will deactivate.(Typically 30 seconds local, 60 seconds network.) DRILL HoLD 2 SEC.-Press this key,holding it down for 2 seconds,to activate all silenceable fire output circuits(all nodes mapped to JNCA-2). LAMP TEST-Press this key to test the LED indicators on the left of the keypad and the piezo. Pressing the key longer than 5 seconds will display firmware version numbers on the display screen. BATTERY LEVELS-Press this key to display battery voltage. F[RE ALARM scao[,[,inisPLnY Scroll through a list of events of these types, SECURITY SCROLL/DISPLAY each of which will appear on the display once SUPERVISORY SCROLL/DISPLAY the associated button is pushed.The OTHER TROUBLE SCROLL/DISPLAY EVENT SC[toLL/n�sp►.nY key also scrolls between prealarm and disabled events. OTHER EVENT sCROr.LintSrLnv 4.1.2 Special Function Keys At the bottom of the keypad are the special function keys. Arrow Keys-Pressing these keys navigates through the programming fields on a display screen by advancing or reversing the cursor position. -�-,-Keys-Use these keys to scroll forward to the next selections(+)or back to previous selections,on the display screen.The keys are used when setting parameters in JNCA-2 data tields, such as choosing a device type as a filter for requesting a Node History. 4.1.3 Soft Keys The ten keys to the right and left of the display function to select commands that appear on the display. Each soft key points to a line of text on the LCD screen;a particular soft key will select the item in that corresponding line of text. The currently selected item will flash,serving as a cursor. Each screen has different information,and each key changes function to suit the screen. Beneath each screen in this manual is a description of the function of each soft key. 4.1.4 Diagnostic Indicators and Controls The JNCA-2 keypad has eleven LED status indicators that light to annunciate cconditions. Refer to Table 4.1 for the list of LED indicators and their descriptions. Indicator Color Description CONTROLS ACTIVE Green Illuminates when the JNCA-2 assumes control of the network as primary display.(See Appendix D,"Display and Control Center (DCC)". POWER Green Illuminates when AC power is within normal operating limits. FIRE ALARM Red Illuminates when at least one fire alarm event exists. It flashes when any of these events remains unacknowledged. PRE-ALARM Red Illuminates when at least one prealarm event exists. It flashes when any of these events remains unacknowledged. ,� Table 4.1 Status LED Indicator Descriptions 38 JNCA-2 Manual— P/N 52570:C 8/6/2007 The LCD Display Operation Indicator Color Description SECURITY Blue Illuminates when at least one security event exists. It flashes when any of these events remains unacknowledged. SUPERVISORY Yellow Illuminates when at least one supervisory event exists. It flashes when any of these events remains unacknowledged. SYSTEM TROUBLE Yellow Illuminates when at least one trouble event exists. It flashes when any of these events remains unacknowledged. OTHER EVENT Yellow Illuminates for any category of event not listed above(example- Critical Process Monitor,Telephone Ring-In,etc.) SIGNALS SILENCED Yellow Illuminates if the JNCA-2 Signal Silence key has been depressed or if any other node sends a Network Silence command. It flashes if some points on a node are silenced. POINT DISABLED Yellow Illuminates when at least one disabled device exists. CPU FAILURE Yellow Illuminates if there is an abnormal hardware or software condition. The panel is out of service when this LED is illuminated or flashing. Contact technical support. Table 4.1 Status LED Indicator Descriptions 4.2 The LCD Display The home screen is displayed when no alarms or troubles exist. It will display a message at the top which says"SYSTEM NORMAL." The LCD display is a 640-character screen, 16 lines x 40 characters. The user can customize the JNCA-2 home screen. In a System Normal message,Line one displays the local JNCA-2's 40-character custom node label saved in non-volatile memory(created under the JNCA-2's Program/Alter Status menu or downloaded from VeriFireT"'Tools); Line 2 states"System Normal"; and Line 4 contains the local JNCA-2's node number. The Main Menu is accessible using the corresponding soft key in the lower right of the LCD display. A text label should be drawn into the custom bitmap b aphic so that it is also visible on the graphic screen. The Main Menu screen is also selectable from any other screen unless unacknowledged events exist. This allows the user,for example,to disable a point while a fire alarm exists. JNCA-2 Manual— P/N 52570:C 8/6I2007 39 Operation The LCD Display If an event occurs,the Event Counts screen will be displayed automatically,displaying a count of different acknowledged and unacknowledged events as discussed in Section 4.2.2"Event Counts Display". You can select Multiple Event List to instead display a list of all events,sorted as discussed in Section 4.2.3"Multiple Event List". 40-characters across 1 NODE LABEL FOR LOCAL JNCA-2 2 SYSTEM NORMAL �� 4 i�' 10 � �1 �01A TUE f1AR 1� ,'c006 ��' 5 _) ��'; 6 � �� Thi are of the s een an cont , -1 7 l u 9 P ' r—, 16 lines 8 down 9 I,� a custom ra hic downloaded from VeriFire Tools � 10 � Draw your custom "Main Menu"or"See Menu Items" � �C: 11 � indicator in the graphic. —J 12 ,� 1 i i4 ►�� l C; 15 ��...�, � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � — 16 ��I; MAIN MENI�� (—' � Soft Keys MAIN MENU Selection Figure 4.2 LCD with Main Menu Selection 4.2.1 Basic Screen Navigation: The Main Menu The main menu is a navigational screen that navigates to the selected submenu. The different options are as follows: EVENT COUNTS DISPLAY-accesses the Event Counters screen where all events are listed by event type. (See Section 4.2.2"Event Counts Display"on page 41.) MULTIPLE EVENT L1ST-displays events simultaneously in groups of eight. These lists can be scrolled forward and back. (See Section 4.2.3 "Multiple Event List"on page 43.) HISTORY DISPLAY-navigates to the History Main Menu screen,where the user can view the history of remote nodes on the NOT[•FIRE•NETT"'system or the JNCA-2 local history. (See Section 4.2.4"Local and Node History Display"on page 44.) READ STATUS-navigates to the Read Status Point Select screen,where you can specify a point and obtain detailed information about it.(See Section 4.2.�"P�ead Status"on page 49.) PROGRAM/ALTER STATUS-programs the system and changes fundamental configuration settings. Examples include: change time/date,disable/enable point,change detector sensitivity, and change point label. A password is required.(See Section 5,"Programming",on page 60.) PRINTER FUNCTIONS-prints reports of events and configurations. (See Section 4.2.7"Printer Functions"on page 53.) There are several JNCA-2 features that require the user to specify a device address or point,such as Read Status or History Display. 40 JNCA-2,'L/anual-- P/N 52570:C 8/6/2007 The LCD Display Operation • If a device does not exist at the selected address,an"INVALID POINT"error message will display for 3 seconds and then return to the point-select screen. Press"NEXT POINT"or "P2EVIOUS POINT"ro read the next/previous programmed point of that type.An error message will indicate if there are no further devices of that type programmed. �j NOTE: If attempting an operation on a point on an IFC-320, IFC2-640,or IFC2-3030,the JNCA- �-1 2 will display the error message"INVALID POINT-SELECTING NEXT POINT'and automatically select the next valid point. • The selected point must already be mapped in local JNCA-2 programming or else the error message"NODE NOT MAPPED"will display. If the selected point is on a remote node, both that node and the local JNCA-2 must be on-]ine or the error message"NODE OFF- LINE"will display. �Main menu:System Normal NODE LABEL FOR LOCAL NCA SYSTEM NORMAL When system I —� status is normal, � �' I� Line 1 displays the �� 11 : 5 8 � 4 2 A T U E M A R 14 , 2 0 0 6�� local node label. � �, EVENT COUNTS DISPLAY READ STATUS (�!� (—� � PROGRAM/ALTER STATUS I n ��:� (—� MULTIPLE EVENT LIST PRINTER FUNCTIONS i�! ��; �� HISTORY DI3PLAY GRAPHIC SCREEN I �,i l'�.! I� �-►Main menu:Uncleared event in system Line 1:Event summary Line 2:Point label for the affectedhardware ACKNOWLEDGED FIRE ALARM Line3:1stpositionin DETECTOR ADDR 32 CBEzonelist. Zone 3 Z003 SMOKE (PHOTO ) Line4:Date/time ;I� 09 : 48 : 35A TUE MAR 14 , 2006 N239L01D032 ��',. and point number �10 : 3 2 = 12 A T U E M A R 1 4 , 2 0 0 6�� of event. �.� �! i�J'; EVENT COUNTS DISPLAY READ STATUS l_':I 1---__. Figure 4.3 JNCA-2 Main Menu 4.2.2 Event Counts Dispiay The Event Counts screen,accessed from the main menu,can be displayed any time regardless of whether events exist. This screen is automatically displayed whenever an off=normal event is present, unless the JNCA-2 is in programming mode. However,the JNCA-2 will always display a Fire A(arm,even during programming mode. The two lines directly be(ow the screen header display current counts of the six types of off-normal events,acknowledged and unacknowledged. In addition,a Telephone Ring-[n on the[FC2-640 and IFC2-3030 panels will cause the Event Counts screen to be automatically displayed and the following message to be displayed in reverse text: EMERGENCY PHONE-RINGING-ANSWER PHONE JNCA-2 Manual— P/N 52570:C 8/6/2007 41 Operation The LCD Display When the phone message first appears,it will be flashing and the buzzer will be sounding. The Ring-In must be acknowledged to cfear these conditions. Refer to Figure 5.26 on page 78 for additional information. � NOTE: In Canadian mode,the operator must press a key to display the Event Counts screen. The JNCA-2 will prompt by showing the message"PRESS ANY KEY" Main menu �Event counts display FIRE ALARM Total#ofevents, DETECTOR ADDR 32 byeventtype , Zone 3 Z003 SMOKE (PHOTO ) i� �9 : 46 : 44A TUE MAR 14 , 2006 N239L01D032 �; EVENT COUNTS — Ifthesystemhasno ;�: FIRE ALARMS : 001 PREALARM = 000 TROUBLE � 000 unacknowledged ( SUPERVISORY: 000 SECURITY : 00� OTHER = 00❑ i events,the word �' � � 09 : 48 : 10A TUE MAR 14 , 2006 N004� "ACKNOWLEDGE" � doesnotdisplay. I�( CKNOWLEDGE SIGNAL SILENCE � I� r---� I + MORE INFORMATION SYSTEM RESET ( This option will �a' I�' display only when �___ moreinformationis i-� pROGRAM/ALTER STATUS MAZN MENU available for a read- ;o; � status screen. Figure 4,4 Event Counts Display Acknowiedge If there are no unacknowledged events,the ACKNOWLEDGE soft key will not be shown. In Figure 4.4,an arrow indicates where it will appear if there are unacknowledged events. More Information The MORE INFORMATION option is displayed when an off-normal event occurs for an input device. It is not displayed if the event is an output point or a system trouble(that is,an event not associated with any speciYic point). This option is shown in Figure 4.4 to demonstrate where it is once the event occurs. Press the MORE[NFORMATION sofi key to navigate to the Read Status screen,which shows more detailed information about the displayed event. For details on the Read Status feature,refer to Section 4.2.5"Read Status". Program/Alter Status The soft key PROGRAM/ALTER STATUS allows a user with the proper access level to change various JNCA-2 settings. Examples include change time/date,disable/enable point,change detector sensitivity,and change point labeL This option is not visible if an unacknowledged event is present. The PROGRAM/ALTER STATUS functions are password protected and require the proper access level as defined by the system administrator. For details on the Program/Alter Status menu option,also present in the Main Menu,refer to Section 4.2.6"Program/Alter Status"on page 53. This option is not present if there are unacknowledged events that are higher priority system troubles(Alarm, Supervisory, Security),or Pre-alarm.. Signal Silence Use this command to turn off all devices that are mapped to the JNCA-2 and programmed as Silenceable. I � 42 JNCA-2 Manual— P/N 52�70:C 8/6/2007 I The LCD Display Operation System Reset Use this command to clear all latched alarms and other events and turn off event LEDs of nodes that are mapped to the JNCA-2. Main Menu The soft key MAIN MENU returns user to the Main Menu screen.This option is not visible if an unacknowledged event is present. 4.2.3 Multiple Event List To access the Multiple Event List,press the corresponding soft key option from the Main Menu. The resulting list shows all events that have occurred after the event displayed at the top of the screen,which is the most recent acknowledged event. � NOTE: If an unacknowledged event comes in, it will remain on this screen,and the JNCA-2 will display"PRESS ANY KEY"on the screen header on line 5. Pressing any key, including navigational keys,will navigate to the Event Counts screen,where you must acknowledge the event(s). Screen Navigation • The SCROLL DISPLAY hard keys scroll through the list of active events. You can also scroll through events by pressing the up/down arrow keys directly above the<ENTER>key. The up and down arrows will scroll the cursor through the list. The event at the top will remain at the top. If the event at the top of the screen is sequenced in such a way that it would normally appear in the list,the display will skip over it,and the numbers will be out of sequence.(Figure 4.5 shows events 3-9 in sequence.) • The NEXT SELECTION/PREVIOUS SELECTION hard keys will scroll to the next or previous event after the event shown at the top. This event will then be displayed at the top of the screen,and the list will show the events following the event just placed at the top. • Highlight an event in the list by moving the cursor with left/right arrows,and press ENTER to bring that event to the top.The list will then show the events following the event you just placed at the top. • Output activations are not displayed,but they are put in History if reporting is enabled. This is configured via the Programming/Alter Status option. • To switch this screen between USA standard priority and CANADIAN priority in terms of the order of event classes displayed,select PROGRAM/ALTER STATUS, PROGRAM MENU, SETTINGS.Within an event class,events will be displayed in time order with the first listed event being the first event received.See Section 5.53"Panel Settings"for more details on the JNCA-2 SETTINGS menu. • Eight events can be displayed on the screen at one time. If the first event is not displayed in the list,a FIRST EVENT soft key option will be available in the lower left of the screen which will display this first event and the next seven following. � JNCA-?Manual— P/N 52570:C 8/6/2007 43 Operation The LCD Display Main menu These node and point labels are programmed into �+Multiple Event List the JNCA-2(see Section 5"Programming"). This is the time oftheevent FIRE ALARM displayed above it. D E T E C T 0 R A D D R 3 2 BecausetheFIRST— Zone 3 Z003 SMOKE HOTO ) EVENToptionis �I 09 = 46 = 44A TUE MAR 14 , 2006 N239L01D032 � present,this event `-'� P R E S S A N Y K E Y intheupper-leftis 2 ALM MODULE ADDR 1M0�1 - thesecondeventin�I 3 ALM MODULE ADDR 1M002 (� thesequence. l� 4 ALM Detector L�1D042 � 1 SUP MODULE ADDRESS 101 II—)) 2 SUP DETECTOR ADDR 1D051 �� l 1 TBL DETECTOR 99 1 SEC Module L09M001 I� ALARM : 0004 SUPERVISORY � 0002 TROUBLE � 0�01 �I�" � ❑9: 48 : 10A TUE MAR 14 , 2006� '� i Thisisthe It__7 RST EVENT MAIN MENU � current time. Figure 4.5 Multiple Event List- Fire Alarms Sample Screen 4.2.4 Local and Node History Display The History Menu is accessed from the main menu screen by pressing the HISTORY DISPLAY soft key. The JNCA-2 will then display the History Select menu. Main menu 'y History display �� ,'i� HISTORY SELECT �C I� LOCAL HISTORY � ��_ (C �� NODE HISTORY �1_ � n �i �I -:� BA�K �� I I_< <— Figure 4.6 History Select Menu � NOTE: It is not possible to display or print the history for prealarms or disabled points exclusively. Local History When you select this option,the Local EIistory Select menu appears(see Figure 4.7 on page 4�). The soft keys ALL EVENTS,ALARMS ONLY,TROUBLES ONLY,SUPERVISORY ONLY,and SECURITY/OTHERS are used to select the type of history to be viewed. Options will not appear if their associated history queue is empty. The TIME/DATE INTERVAL and POINT RANGE � options allow the user to select only events within those given parameters. 44 JNCA-2 Manual— P/N 52570:C 8/6/2007 The LCD Display Operation Main menu �+History display �Local history �� ;'� HISTORY SELECT �C; ��, - !�' ALL EVENT3 SECURITY/OTHERS i�l I� ALARMS ONLY TIME/DATE INTERVAI I� .:] il.�: TROUBLES ONLY POINT RANGE C ��—, :�I ; 3UPERVISORY ONLY BACK I�;j Figure 4.7 Local History Select Screen For example,if a user selects TROUBLES ONLY,a screen similar to the full screen in at the top of Figure 4.8 may be displayed. All Trouble events are shown in descending date order(from most recent to least recent). Event details are displayed in the middle area marked off by separating lines. Details include the event type,node number,node location as defined by the operator,device type, and the date and time of the event. The user can scroll through the Trouble event history by pressing the NEXT EVENT or PREVIOUS EVENT soft keys. PRINT TROUBLE HISTORY will print the history of the selected event type. Pressing the BACK key will return to the History Main menu. Main menu �+History display �-►Local history �+Troubles only � TROUBLE HISTORY C'I �, TROUBLE �313 OF 0313 � i�' TROUBLE INVALID RESPONSE i�J ��—�, DETECTOR 99 11 I� 3MOKE (ION) �,, �`�� 9 � 47 � 32A TUE MAR 14 , 2006 N235L01D099 � '�� NEXT EVENT PRINT TROUBLE HISTORY �� 1�=,� �C i PREVIOUS EVENT BACK �—� ;�' I�,; �-+Alarmsonly ALARM HISTORY C) � �� ALARM 0168 OF 0168 �j II__�I CLEARED FIRE ALARM �(� MODULE L01M001 �� -- Zone 04 Z004 MONITOR --� —� 09 � 50 � 29A TUE MAR 14 , 2006 N045L01M001 —� NEXT ALARM PRINT ALARM HISTORY I`—'I f-��\ / i� _ ;i Figure 4.8 Event History Sample Display � JNCA-1 Manual— P/N 52�70:C 8/6/2007 45 Operation The LCD Display Local History: Time/Date Interval Selecting the TIME/DATE INTERVAL soft key on the Local History Select Screen filters events for display wiYhin a specified time/date interval. • The user will be prompted to enter a start/end time and date. The keypad will be used to enter/edit the data in each field. • The default start time is 12:00 a.m.of the current day,and the default end time is the current date and time. This allows a default printing of all events for the current day. • The default event type is ALL EVENTS. To scroll through event types,press the EVENT TYPE soft key. Choose between ALL EVENTS,ALARMS ONLY,TROUBLES ONLY, SUPERVISORY ONLY,SECURITY ONLY,or OTHER ONLY. Once you have set the parameters,press the ACCEPT soft key. Press the<ESC>key to exit the current field without saving any changes. Press the<ESC>key twice to return to the previous menu. • NEXT/PREVIOUS FIELD hard keys will move the cursor to the next/previous parameter field (the arrow keys will perform the same function). • The soft key BACK will return to the History Main Menu. Once you press the ACCEPT key,events within the set parameters will be displayed as shown in Figure 4.8. When viewing events within a time/date interval, if more than one event exists,a counter will indicate which event is displayed and the total number of events. If there are no events of the specified type available within the specified range,the message"HISTORY FILE IS EMPTY"will be displayed. The soft keys NEXT EVENT and PREVIOUS EVENT are used to scroll througt�events. PRINT HISTORY will print the history for the specified parameters. Main menu 4 History display �Local history �-+Time/date interval TIME & DATE RANGE SELECT '� IC; I��,' START TIME = �, : �OA TIIF ❑a/1,4/�6 �I�� i—,� �t--,'j "Eventtype" j(-1 END TIME � 12 : 59P THU ❑3/16/06 � cycles through: �� `� •Allevents YPE � ALL EVENTS A{CEPT —� •Alarms only i i�, (�'i •Troubles only , �,J •Supervisory only B A C K •Security only ;� �I � •Other only ':I�J'; _L�%) Figure 4.9 Time/Date Range Select Screen Local History: Point Range Selecting the PO[NT RANGE soft key on the Local History Select screen sets a range of device points for event display as shown in Figure 4.10 on page 48. • From the Local History Select screen,press the POINT RANGE soft key(see Figure 4.10). • Enter a start point by typing in the node identifier directly,or by pressing the corresponding soft key to toggle through device types. The four device types are Detector, Module, Panel Circuit,and Bell Circuit,in that order. Enter the end point in the same way. The default range is N001 LO1 D001 for the start point,and N240B04 for the end point. � 46 JNC,4-2 Mnnual P/N 52570:C 8/6./2007 The LCD Display Operation • The Event Type default is ALL EVENTS. To filter the history file by event type,use the EVENT TYPE soft key to scroll through event types. Once you have set desired parameters, press the ACCEPT soft key,and the JNCA-2 will display all events within those parameters. Press the<ESC>key to exit the current field without saving any changes. Press the<ESC> key again to return to the previous menu. • The soft key BACK will return to the previous menu. As with viewing the events within a time/date interval,when viewing events within a specific point range,if more than one event exists,a counter will indicate which event is displayed and the total number of events. The user has options to PRINT EVENTS IN RANGE and view the PREVIOUS/NEXT EVENT(when multiple events exist). The following is a sample point range inquiry: Start Point: NOOILO1M001 End Point: N001 LO 1 B04 Event Type: All Events This example requests a history of all events on Node one only, Loop one only,for all modules, panel circuits and bell circuits. Since the start point specifies module device addresses(M001), detectors would not be included in this query as they are first in the device type order. Figure 4.10 shows how this inquiry would appear on the screen. Ordering of devices on a node: l. Node One,Loop One Detectors, Modules,etc. 2. Node One, Loop Two Detectors, Modules,etc. 3. Node One Panel Circuits 4. Node One Bell Circuits 5. Node Two,Loop One Detectors,Modules,etc. 6. Node Two,Loop Two Detectors, Modules,etc. '7. Node Two Panel Circuits 8. Node Two Bell Circuits etc... � NOTE: If the Start and End Point nodes are not consecutive,e.g.the Start Point is Node 1 and the End Point is Node 3 or above,the JNCA-2 will display all event types on all nodes between the Start Point and End Point. JNCA-2 Manual— P/N 52570:C 8/6/2007 47 Operation The LCD Displuy Main menu �°�� History display �Local history �Poin!range POINT RANGE :��li � I ,�i� (� In', START POINT : �� ` � NOOlL01•M0�1, (MODULE ) •--_=' END POINT : (I�I N001B10❑ (BELL CKT ) �� (�' EVENT TYPE � A V NTC ACCEPT �� i'� I� l�-1 i- �' ��\ BALK ( ;i L__; Figure 4.10 Point Range Select Screen Node History When you select this option from the History Select menu(see Figure 4.6 on page 44),you can display or print event details for a specified node. Enter the node number in the NODE HISTORY N field,then press the corresponding soft key. The local JNCA-2 must be on-line,and the node selected must be mapped in the local JNCA-2's programming. The choices from the Node History menu are: • ALL EVENTS • ALARMS ONLY For example,if a user selects ALL EVENTS,a screen similar to that of Figure 4.11 on page 49 will be displayed. In this example,the first four lines show the System Normal message,the date and the time. The screen specifies the node on which the event or events occurred,and displays the event counter,which in this instance would show all events in descending date order(from most recent to least recent). Event details are dispLayed after the event counter. Details include the event type,node address,node location(which is custom defined by the operator),device type,and the date and time of the event. The user can scroll through the event history by pressing the soft keys NEXT EVENT or PREVIOUS EVENT. PR[NT EVENT HISTORY will print the history of the selected node. Pressing the BACK key will return to the History Main menu. � NOTE: For use with IFC2-640, IFC-320, IFC2-3030,and JDVC nodes. 48 JNCA-Z Manunl - P/N 52570:C 8/6/2007 i The LCD Display Operation Main menu �History display �Node history for Node 003 ALL EVENTS �� ALL EVENTS � N003 �I 00�4 OF 0017 � '�: ��J I�' SYSTEM RESET �`J �� INITIATED BY N�87 I` �i 09 � 18 = 07A THU MAR 16, 20�6 N�03 � �� I�: NEXT EVENT �C! .—� r—,� i��! PREVIOUS EVENT BACK �I I ' __� `J ,--- Figure 4.11 Event Details Sample Screen 4.2.5 Read Status The P.ead Status menu option provides the user with status information about devices and modules attached to a remote node. It is for use across a network only. If a JNCA-2 is used to perform a read status on itself, only ACS point status is valid. To display status for a device,select Read Status from the main menu,then enter the device's address in the Point field and press Accept. If no event is present,the default format will be that of a detector(see Figure 4.12 on page�0). [f there is an acknowledged event in the display area,that address will be the default. This allows the user quick access to the point being displayed. Selecting a point is a two-step process: L I'ou must first choose the device type,which is shown in parentheses. Scroll through device types by pressing the soft key corresponding to the POINT SELECT tield. 2. Once you have the device type selected,enter the device address in the NxxxLyyDzzz address field. After you have set all parameters,press the ACCEPT soft key to accept or<ESC>to cancel the request. Once the JNCA-2 reads the point,it will display the Read Status screen(see Figure 4.13). Eollowng are the possible types from which to choose,depending on your control panel. � � Detector-i.e.,smoke or heat detection. Module-Used for monitoring and controlling devices, SLC loops. • Panel c�rcuit- For direct monitonng and controlling. • Bell circuit(NAC)-Fire panel control outputs for horns,sirens,and similar devices. (Not available to IFC2-3030.) • 7one-A group of points. • Logic zone-A zone based on an equation.(Available to IFC-320,IFC2-640,and IFC2-3030.) Logic Zone format is ZLxxxx,where xxxx=0001 - 1000. • ACS Point-A point associated with any ACS annunciator point (Available to IFC2-3030 and JNCA-2.) • PAM point-A Prioritized Audio Matrix(PAM)point(the programmed address of the intersection between an audio input and output in the PAM)in a JDVC or JDVC-EM-refer to the JDVC manuai for more information).The format is NxxxlyyyyAzzSn,where xxx=the �rwrr� JNCA-2 Manual— P/N�2570:C 8/6/2007 49 � Operation The LCD Displav JDVC or JDVGEM node number,yyyy=the audio input number,zz=the DAA-�025/E or DAA-5070{E address on the Digital Audio Loop(O1 through 32),and n=the DAA speaker circuit(1 through 4). • Release zone- Used to release chemicals to aid in fire suppression.(Available to[FC320, IFC2-640,and IFC2-3030.) • Special Zone-Special zones as provided by particular fire alarm control panels • T'rouble Zone-Zone based on an equation that includes a system trouble.(Available to IFC2- 3030.) • DAA SPEAKER CKT-A DAA-5025/E or DAA-�070/E audio ampliYier speaker circuit point. The format is NxxxAyySn,where xxx=the JDVC or JDVC-EM (Digita(Voice Command) node number, yy=the DAA address on the Digital Audio Loop (O1 through 32),and n=the DAA speaker circuit(1 through 4). If a device does not exist at the selected address,an Invalid Point error message will display. Press '`NEXT PO[NT"or`'PREVIOUS PO[NT"to read the next/previous programmed point of that type. If communicating with an[FG320, IFC2-640,or IFC2-S030,the JNCA-2 will automatically proceed to the next point.(n either case,an error message will indicate if there are no further devices of � that type programmed. Main menu 4 Read status NODE LABEL FOR LOCAL NCA DisplayArea SYSTEM NORMAL (—'. �C', � Node� •��j POINT SELECT � Point Field �.'_,'� I,`J 1 Select the device 5 E L E C T : typebyscrolling ('—t Nxxxt y�rDzzz ( DETECTOR ) ( through them with �� (`—'� the POINT SELECT soft key. Then, ;�� i enter the device ��!j �' addressinthisfieid NEXT POINT ACCEPT to dis la details for i I�i (�;, that point and press ; ��! Accept. Figure 4.12 Read Status Point Select Screen Main menu �-+Read status �Acceptapoint ACKNOWLEDGED FIRE ALARM DETECTOR ADDR L01D032 i; ZONE 003Z003 SMOKE (PHOTO ) �� 9 � 48 � 35A TUE MAR 14 ,20�6 N239L01D032 �i �� 1 E SS : N0�3L01D051�� '' UTOMATIC CTIVE (�;� This shows 'i�� 5 1 ��—i'. PointCoMroi ' � Z 03 Z0�3 SUP L (PHOTO ) �� ,9 Z�03 , '; Thisshows '�� 1 VALUE = �OOi OF ALARM , OOOi OF PREALARM � PointStatus 2 ALARM = 8= 2 • 12i , PREALARM = 8= 1 • 33i (� ;I� 3 ACTION/STATUS : NONE/VERY CLEAN I_j'. `=' 4 PEAK � 142i VERIFY COUNT = 03 CO-OP : CTR 5 �09 � 56 � 27A TUE MAR 14 ,2006�� I 6 i' � ); <<.- . __ � � , Figure 4.13 Read Status Details -Smoke Detector Point Installed on an IFC-320 or IFC2-640 50 JNCA-2 Mnnua!-� P/N 52570:C 8/6/2007 The LCD Display Operation Figure 4.13 shows a sample status screen for a smoke detector point. Following is an explanation of the screen elements: • Lines 1-4 can be any present event message or the System All Normal message. • Line� is the screen header. It will display the current address of the point being read. The area between the separator lines,lines 6-14,shows all information concerning the selected point,which is N003LO1D051 in the example above. • Line 6 displays two statistics: —Point Control: Automatic-the point is being controlled automatically by the panel. Manual-a status change has caused the point to go off of automatic control. Forced-the point has been forced into another state by an outside source(such as another network node). Disabled-the point is disabled. —Point Status: Active-the point is currently in an off-normal state. Inactive-the point is currently reporting no events. Pre-alarm-the point is in pre-alarm. Inputs: i.e. Detectors, Monitor Modules, Zones, etc. If the point is in normal condition and the STATUS is Auto,the display shows: AUTOMATIC INACTIVE (State = Normal ) AUTOMATIC ACTIVE (State = Active ) AUTOMATI� PREALARM (State = PreAlarm) If the point is in nonnal condition and the STATUS is Disable,the display shows: DISABLED INACTIVE (Tracking State = Normal ) DISABLED ACTIVE (Tracking State = Active ) DISABLED PREALARM (Tracking State = PreAlarm) If the point is in Troub!e condition,the display shows: TROUBLE <TROUBLE STATUS> If the point is in Trouble condition and the STATUS is Disable,the display shows: DISABLED <TROUBLE STATUS> Outputs: Control Modules, Bell Circuits, Notification Appliances, etc. If the point is in normal condition and the STATUS is Auto,the display shows: AUTOMATIC OFF (State = Normal ) AUTOMATIC ON (State = Active) If the point is in normal condition and the STATUS is Disable,the display shows: DISABLED OFF (Tracking State = Normal ) DISABLED ON ( Tracking State = Active ) If the point is in Trouble condition,the display shows: TROUBLE <TROUBLE STATUS> If the point is in Trouble condition and the STATUS is Disable,the display shows: DISABLED <TROUBLE STATUS> If the point is in normal condition and the STATUS is Force,the display shows: MANUAL OFF ( State = Normal ) MANUAL ON (State = Active ) • Lines 7-8 specify the user defined loop,zone,and device type. • Lines 9-10 display all the CBE zones that contain the current point being read;these lines only appear for smoke detectors. JNCA-�Mnnual— P/N 52570:C 8/6/2007 51 Operation The LCD Display • The percent values in Line 11 (VALl1ES)represent the amount of smoke detected by the device. [f these values are above a certain percentage chamber value,the panel will give a prealarm warning,then an actua( fire alarm. • Line 12(ALARM)displays detector sensitivity levels for Alarm and Prealarm,both of which range from one to nine,one being the most sensitive. These tevels can be set via the JNCA-Z Programming menu. • Line 13 (ACTION/STATUS) is the maintenance status of the device. The message that appears in this field depends on the drift compensation value. A detector will automatically compensate for environmental contaminates and other factors over time,until the tolerance value has been exceeded. The FACP will signal a trouble condition when this level has been reached. When READ STATUS is performed for a detector,the displayed message is based on the percentage of the drift compensation tolerance that is used(see Table 4.2). Message Drift Compensation°/a Description NoneNery Ciean Less than 50 No action necessary.The detector readings are near ideal. None/Fairly Clean 50-69 No action necessary.The detector will activate at the selected sensitivity level. Needs Cleaning 70-79 Clean the detector soon.The detector may cause a false alarm because it has reached the drift compensation tolerance value. Needs Immediate 80-100 Clean immediately!The detector is a false alarm Cleaning risk.The drift compensation tolerance value has been exceeded. Table 4.2 Drift Compensation Messages/Actions • Line 14 shows PGAKS,which is the highest value read by the device. Also shown is VER[FY COLJNT,which displays how many times the panel detected an alarm. This verification aids in differentiating false alarms from actual ones by showing repeated alarm events that have come in on this device. The last element on this line is Detector Cooperation(DET CO-OP: CTR in Figure 4.13). Detector cooperation is when multiple detectors exist in close proximity and are programmed to operate together in order to make smoke detection more accurate. The text after the colon can be an abbreviation denoting detectors used together to detect smoke. Refer to Table 4.3 for detector cooperation abbreviation descriptions. NOTE: Verify Count is only available for detectors that support the feature. • Line 15 displays the current time and date. <+ NEXT SELECTION>and<-PREVIOUS SELECTION>hard keys will scroll to the next/previous point,respectively. To return to the previous screen,press the BACK soft key. Abbreviation Description NONE Detector used alone ABV Current detector and the one above(preceding) BLW Current detector and the one below(following) CTR Current detector and the ones above and below Table 4.3 IFC-320 and IFC2-640 Detector Cooperation Abbreviations � NOTE: To print a poinYs status, use the PRINT SCREEN special function key located near the bottom right of the keypad. � 52 JNCA-2 Manual P/N 52570:C 8/6/2007 � The LCD Display Operation The IFC2-3030 Read Status Screen The Read Status screen for a point on an IFC2-3030 is similar to the IFC-320/IFC2-640 display, except in cases of an active/incoming event lines 6-9 of the[FC2-3030 screen display an[FC2- 3030 user defined message, such as an operator response directive,and a"MORE [NFORMATION"soft key will be a�aitable for the input point. The information in lines 1-4 displays the current or most recent event message. The information in lines 6-9 references a device for which information has been requested. The ACK STEP D[SPLAY hard keys may be used to scroll through the details on all other off-normal points. Lines 11-14 details the status and settings of the device referenced in lines 6-9. The one difference is on Line 14;for Detector Cooperation(DET CO-OP),the fFC2-3030 uses the corresponding detector number instead of an abbreviation when this feature is in effect. In the example below,the event displayed is for Detector L01 D0074(displayed on(ine 7 at the left),and the detector to which it is linked for detector cooperation is detector 003(displayed as D003 on line 14 at the right). Main menu �+Read status �Accept 1 ACKNOWLEDGED FIRE ALARM 2 DETECTOR L02D032 �� 3 Zone Z003Z003 SMOKE ( PHOTO ) i � 4 09 � 48 : 35A TUE MAR 14 ,2006 N239L02D032 C' � 5 �READ ADDRESS � N081L01D074�� !�i 6 AUTOMATIC INACTIVE �' '; 8 Detector L01D074 l i�''. Zone Z001 Z001 SMOKE ( PHOTO ) � J � 9 Z001 , i IU 1° �i ' ��; 11 VALUE � �OOi OF ALARM , OOOi OF PREALARM �� 12 ALARM = 8= 2 • 12% , PREALARM � 8= 1 • 33% (—� inI 13 ACTION/STATU EP.Y CLEAN ��i: �' 14 PEAK = O ' � CO-OP � D0�3 Verify count status � 15 10 : 0 0 = 0 5 A T U E M A R 1 4 , 2 0�6�� (� � displays here if '� B A C K �l—I,' enabled Figure 4.14 Read Status Detaiis-Smoke Detector Point Installed on an IFC2-3030 4.2.6 Program/Alter Status For a complete discussion of Program/Alter Status features,see"Programming"on page 60. 4.2.7 Printer Functions Select the Printer Functions option from the main menu to print reports of current setrings. Actual configuration is accomplished via the Program/Alter Status menu. For details on the actual JNCA- 2 programming options,refer to'`Programming'on page 60. � NOTE: Pressing the Print Screen key at any time will capture the current LCD screen. If a printer is not installed on the system,the JNCA-2 will return to the main menu. JNCA-2 Manunl -� P/N 52570:C 8/6/2007 53 Operation The LCD Dispiny Main menu � �Printer Functions � PRINTER FUNCTIONS i��I , � �'I I�', PR06RAMMING �� (I� ACTIVE POINTS ACS PROGRAMMING ��i __J ��'' WALK TEST i I�� L ��,� -, I�� BACK `I`-.J' Figure 4.15 Printer Functions Menu JNCA-2 Programming Reports This printer functions option allows the user to print a report of current JNCA-2 configuration settings. When you select the PROGRAMMING soft key,the JNCA-2 will bring up menu screens showing the various reports that can be printed. Note: When you select an option and print the report,the display returns to the main menu. Main menu �Printer functions �Programming PROGRAMMING j� NETWORK PARAMETERS LCD DISPLAY �;'� �� NETWORK MAPPING �,��''�� SETTINGS � i�1' TIMER3 MORE i l-1' I—'; EVENT MONITORING BACK (( �� il=', Figure 4.16 Options for JNCA-2 Programming Reports (Screen 1) 54 .lNCA-2 Manual— P/N 52S70:C 8/6/2007 The LCD Dispiny Operation Main menu �Printer functions �-+Programming �More PROGRAMMING �� SUPERVISION EVENT LOGGING �— �i t'�"� � i i i�; BACK I� i--� Figure 4.17 Options for JNCA-2 Programming Reports (Screen 2) Network Parameters-Prints a report containing the local JNCA-2's node number,whether it is using Style 4 or 7 wiring,its node label(if defined),channel A and B thresholds,and IP ACCESS setting. (See the NOTI•FIRE•NE7`'"'Manun!for an explanation of network functions.) *x�xxsNETWORK PARAMETERS****x�:xx:*:xx****x*::�a�x�x*sxx*►:�xx***x*�**x�*x*�x�xa NODE� 102 STYLE� STYLE 4 NODE LABEL= NCA-2 CHA A• THRESHOLD� HIGH CH B- THRESHOLD� HIGH IP ACCESS� OFF xxx*****�x::***:x*t*:x*x*xx:xx�xx*��rxxxxxx*xxxx:*xx**:xx:x**xx�xxxx*xxxx*�xxxt* Figure 4.18 Printer Functions: Network Parameters Report NetH�ork Mapping-This report lists the remote nodes which this JNCA-2 unit has been programmed to monitor and/or controL Remote nodes not in this list will be ignored by the JNCA-2 unit. x*****NETWORK MAPPING*xxx�*x***x�x:�:::*:xxx*x::**�x*�*x:�**zxx*xxxx��:**x��s*x 003 0�9 019 083 095 153 215 235 239 �x*x*�**t�*x��*xx***x*��xx**�**x*�:r::x��xxxxx�xx****xx:xx�*x�***x::�*::*t�*�*x* Figure 4.19 Printer Functions: Network Mapping Report Settings-Prints a report of the JNCA-2 Settings screen.(See Section 5.�.3 `Panel Settings".) x:�s*xPANEL SETTINGSx�***�xx:*:xx*xxx*x�x:xx*�***:**�**:**:**xx***z�x**�xx**xx� LOCAL CONTROL= YES TROUBLE REMINDfR� YES PIEZO= ON POWERMANAGEMENTMODE� OFF EVENT ORDERING� USA DISPLAY ADDRESS= YES DCC PARTICIPATION: NO REGIONAL SETTING� DEFAULT Telephone Ring-In Annunciation�NO �*x*xtxx��x�****xxx*x**�***�x*x��*xx:txx*x**:xx*�**xx�xxtxs�*xx:xxxts***xtx*x*� Figure 4.20 Printer Functions: JNCA-2 Settings Report Timers-Prints a report of the JNCA-2 time settings for Auto Silence and AC Fail Delay. *x�*:xTIMERS**x�*****��***�*xx�*xxr:*x:xxx�*xx*xxt**�*sxx�*x****::x**x:�*x:x** AC FAIL DELAY� 8 HOURS AUTO SILENCE= OFF �xx**x�x:s��****x*�::xx*****x:*xx*x�**xxx�xx*x****x�x*�*�*�****a:*::***xxx*x**** Figure 4.21 Printer Functions: JNCA-2 Timers Report � JNCA-2 Mnnual �- P/N 52570:C 8/6/2007 5� Operation The LCD Display EvenY Monitoring-Prints a report of the settings for event monitoring. x�xx�tEVENT MONITORING�*xxxxx*xz*��txt�xt*x:xx��**xxxx*�ax*xx*xx*�tx*s:t:*xxxx� FIRE ALARM� YES SECURITY: YES OTHER: YES SUPERVISORY= YES TROUBLE= YES PREALARM� YES DISABLED POINT� YES x*�**a:x:x:x*xx��:a�*�x**x***�*xxx��x��*��x:xxx*x*xx�:*rx**x**�*x*x**xxx*xx:**�: Figure 4.22 Printer Functions: JNCA-2 Event Monitoring Report LCD Display-Prints a report showing the brightness settings of the display,whether its backlight is on,and language of the display. :x:*:xLCD DISPLAY******x:t*�**xxaxxxx*xt:*xxx**x�xx**xxxx*x:�*****xts**x:xx:xx*: LCD ZNTENSITY= 040 BACKLIGHT� ON LANGUAGE= ENGLISH xx::x**x**:sxxsx*xxx:xx:�x:xt*x:::x*xz*x::*x��xsx*�**x:�**x:x*x****x**xxxx*xx*xx Figure 4.23 Printer Functions: LCD Display Report ACS Programming-Print a list of all installed ACS devices and their types(64-point,96-point, UDACT,TM4,etc.) xx*zxtINSTALLED POINTS:xxtxxx�x****�*xx:tx8�**::x:***zx:**xxx*xxx*xxsx**x*t*x::* BOARD 01= 96 PT MONITOR N102P01•1 NO�OA01P01 zx*x*x*x****xxxx:x�*�xxxx��x�xxxx:***x�**z�:�xx*�s::�**�x***xsx**:x*xx�*�*:x*xx* Figure 4.24 Printer Functions:ACS Installed Points Report ACS Installed Points-Print a list of ins�talled ACS devices,their rypes,and their programmed points. **x***ACS POINT PROGRAMMINGxr*****�a:x**xxxxx:**x*x�:�*xs:*�x:*xxxx��xxx*x:x*x:* BOARD 03� 64 PT POINT 01� ACKNOWLEDGE POINT 02� SILENCE N000 POINT 03= RESET N000 POINT 04= DRILL N000 **x****�x*a:**x�xxx:::*****�:*x**xxxxxx�*x�xt�x��*x�:xx**x:**xxx*zx�x�x:**xr�*xx Figure 4.25 Printer Functions: ACS Installed Points Report Supervision-Print a report showing whether there is supervision for the power supply and tamper input,and what type of printer is being used.When there is power supply supervision,the power supply node will be displayed. ****x*SUPERVISION:*�x**x:*xx*�*x::*x�xxx*:xxx�**�:*�***�x**x:x*zax*xx*xxxxxx:*xz MAIN PS NODE� N000 PRINTER: 80-COLUMN Tamper Input� NO AUXILIARY TROUBLE= NO xx*�xx**x�*�:*x***�**tx��x�*�:::x�*x**xx*xx�**�xxx�*xxa**xxxz:x*xx***xtx*x***z: Figure 4.26 Printer Functions: Supervision Report Event Logging-Prints a report of the JNCA-2 Event Logging settings for Non-Fire Activations and Output Activations. xt*x:�EVENT LOGGINGs*��xx*�*xt**�**��xxxxxxxxx:xx��x*:x�**�xx�*xxzxx*x*a**��**� NON-FIRE AACTIVATIONS�NO OUTPUT ACTIVATIONS� NO *xa:xx*�*��::�:*xx*xr�x��*xx*xxxxx�x:tx�xxxxtxxxx*�s��*xxx*:***xxx*�:x�*x**�*x Figure 4.27 Printer Functions: JNCA-2 Output Activations Report Active Points Reports This printer functions option shows active points direcdy from the alarm queues. The SECUR(TY and OTHER queues are combined in one printout. Only buttons which have active events are visible. Pressing one of these buttons will print the report and return the user to the main menu. It � is not possible to select all queues for printout at the same time. 56 JNCA-?Manual - P/N 52570:C 8/6/2007 Event.s Operation Main menu �Printer functions �Activepoints NODE LABEL FOR LOCAL NCA SYSTEM NORMAL I%1 � — Node� ! ACTIVE POINTS REPORT (� ;�; i'—�_' ALARMS ONLY PREALARMS U— if �(_J. i TROUBLES ONLY DISABLED POINTS I I !�; ;I� ❑'' SUPERVISORY ONLY ACTIVE OUTPUTS �-, r � !�._�' I_�___'; Figure 4.28 Printer Functions: Active Points Report Menu Walk Test Reports This printer functions prints a report of the last walk test performed. �***+�WALK TES7 RESULTS*****t**sxz�x#sx*r�:�xx�xrsse***xxt�z+�rxxxMSxsrt+**xts*� TEST TROUBLE NO ANSWER DETECTOR 73 Z�03 Sf10KE(IOM) 02=54�04P TUE MAR 14,2�06 N001L�1D073 TE3T FIRE AIARM ROOM 101 1ST FLOOR Z001 HEAT(ANALOG) 02=54:31P TUE MAR 14,2006 N�01L�1D003 TEST FIftE A�ARf1 R0011 221 2ND FLOOR Z001 SECl1RSTY 02�54�59P TUE MAR 14.2006 N0�1L01M004 TEST ACTIVE LAB 3RD FLOOR Z004 CONTROL 02�55=�9P TUE MAR 14,2006 N001L01M005 xtrx:EVENTS*rrrxr:zx:xx:*x**taas*�:*trrs:sr*:axrxtt#rs�xxxr*r+xx:r*xr+xx<sx.xr�: � Figure 4.29 Printer Functions:Walk Test Report 4.3 Events 4.3.1 About Events An event is any change in the status of a device,a transfer of information between a device and the JNCA-2,or a transfer of information between two devices. Some of these events are considered background and housekeeping events and are not seen by the user under normal circumstances. These events may appear,however,during a Walk Test operation. The events that are of primary concern to the operator are those identiYied as Off-Normal Events. An off-normal event is an event which indicates activity or change in condition that requires the attention and/or response of an operator. Examples of possible off-normal events are: • Activation or change in condition of a monitoring device(Smoke A(arms, Fire Alarms,etc.). • System troubles,such as network problems,device supervision problems,etc. 4.3.2 Types of Events Events which come into the JNCA-2 and are displayed on the LCD screen can be divided into seven fundamental categories: • Fire Alarm Events-Events issued by fire alarm initiating devices such as pull stations,smoke � detectors,and sprinkler systems. • Pre-Alarm Events-Prealarms are precursors to fire alarms; a fire detector device issues this event when its level surpasses the programmed limit. �. JNCA-2 Mctni�al P/N 52570:C 8/6/2007 57 Operation El�ents • Security Events-Events issued by security devices such as motion detectors,glass break detectors,and door contacts. • Supervisory Events-Supervisory alarms are special alarms to indicate an action that has functionally disabled a key device(for either fire protection or security). An example would be an event generated if the water valve is shut off for a sprinkler system. • Trouble Events-Trouble events indicate a functional problem with a device on the network. Examples of trouble events include a device going off-line,a battery low or no power event,a clogged head on a smoke detector,etc. • Other Events-Events which do not fit the other categories,such as Critical Process or Life Safety. • Disabled/Enabled E��ents- Events resulting from enabling or disabling a device. 4.3.3 Event Handling When an off-normal event is sent to the JNCA-2 from an FACP or ACS device,it must be acknowledged either at the JNCA-2 or locally at the panel. Acknowledging an event performs the following functions: • Silences the Piezo sounder on the JNCA-2. • Transfers the event to the JNCA-2's History buffer. • Sends a network event to the associated panel. How to Acknowledge an Event When an event comes in,the JNCA-2's alarm will sound a specific pattern depending on the event type. The event type will be displayed in the upper left corner of the screen. The ACKNOWLEDGE option will appear,also displaying the event type. This option will flash along with the appropriate LED indicator. Once you press the ACKNOWLEDGE soft key(or the ACKNOWLEDGE Fixed Function key,the upper left message will change to'`acknowledged.'' � NOTE: If the device initiating the event has become disabled in such a manner that it can no longer communicate over the network,the JNCA-2 message will display"Local Acknowledge"in the upper left corner, indicating the event has been acknowledged at the JNCA-2 only. For details on operator response to various events,refer to the pertinent FACP or ACS manual. Figure 430 on page 59 and Figure 4.31 on page 59 are examples of screens displaying an incoming event and an acknowledged event,respectively. Events can be scrolled by pressing the appropriate hard key. Events are displayed and logged in the history. When additional unacknowledged events exist,the first four screen lines advance to the next highest priority unacknowledged event,and this process repeats. After the history log is full, the next event that gets logged causes the least recent event in the(og to be dropped. Block Acknowledging The default settings for all event types,with the exception of fire alarms, is Block Acknowledgment. Fire Alarms are always acknowledged on a point-by-point basis. I � $8 JNCA-Z Manua!- P/N 52570:C 8/6/2007 Events Operation This is the type of This is the point address event that occurred. on which the event � occurred. This is the time/date of the event. FIRE ALARM Detector L01D�74 Thisisthe Zone Z�01 Z001 SMOKE (PHOTO ) currenttime/date. � 10 : 01 � 01A TUE MAR 14 ,2006 N081L�1D074 ��! EVENT COUNTS � FIRE ALARMS : 005 PREALARM = 0�0 TROUBLE � 002 � i�; SUPERVISORY : 002 SECURITY = 001 OTHER : 000 ��'; ��10 : 44 : 54A TUE MAR 14 ,2006�� ' CI ACKNOWLEDGE FIRE ALARM SIGNAL SILENCE I� �I�� MORE INFORMATION SYSTEM RESET " U �—� �.� �L='- Figure 4.30 An Unacknowledged Event � NOTE: When there are no unacknowledged events or if the System is Normal,the ACKNOWLEDGE soft key will not be visible. NOTE: For detectors, modules and panel circuits connected to the IFC2-3030,custom action i messages are displayed for the"MORE INFORMATION"soft key on the events screen. Other types of points and FACPs display the"READ STATUS"soft key. This is the type of event that has been acknowledged;it includes some detail about the event. ACKNOWLEDGED FIRE ALARM DETECTOR ADDRESS 32 ZONE 3 Z003 SMOKE (PHOTO) I�� 09 = 48 � 35A TUE MAR 14 ,2006 N239L01D032 I�'i'' EVENT COUNTS �— � FIRE ALARMS : �004PREALARM � OOOOTROUBLE � 0001 � SUPERVISORY : 00025ECURITY : 0001 OTHER � 0000 ;�� <<�; ��09 � 50 � 36A TUE MAR 14 ,20�6�� I�I SIGNAL SILENCE I__j' ;��ij SYSTEM RESET �_i' This is the current � -_ time/date. � �:, PROGRAM/ALTER STATUS MAIN MENU I —, — Figure 4.31 An Acknowledged Event JNCA-2 Manua!— P/N 52570:C 8/6/2007 Sy Section 5: Programming 5.1 Security Access The JNCA-2 has two password levels:master and user.There is one master password,which grants access to all system programming.There are nine user passwords,each of which may be assigned access to the proo amming change menus,the alter status menus,or both.A user password does not give access to or allow change to any password parameters,not even its own.Only the master password will allow access to ali password change screens. The panel arrives with factory default settings of 00000000 for the master password,and 11111111 for one user password.These should be changed immediately. Follow the steps below to change the factory settings: 1. Press PROGRAM/ALTER STATUS at the Main Menu screen. 2. Using the keyboard,enter eight zeroes(00000000)after ENTER PASSWORD . 3. Press the ACCEPT soft key. 4. Press the PANEL PROGRAM MENU soft key. 5. Press the PASSWORD CHANGE soft key. 6. Select MASTER PASSVI�'ORD to set the primary password,or select USER PASSWORD to set user permission levels. NOTE:Only the master password can be used to create or change passwords. Main menu �-+Program/alter status menu y PanelProgram menu y Password change I � CHANGE PASSWORD ��I C �1' MASTER PASSWORD l�: j��) USER PASSWORD �,: j�i ��! � ��j BACK �;\', Figure 5.1 Change Password Screen 5.1.1 Master Password Press the MASTER PASSWORD Sof't Key and type in the new password that will replace the factory default password:there can be up to eight alphanumeric characters. Press the enter key on the keyboard. RE-ENTER PASSWORD wili appear. Retype the password for verification.Press ACCEPT to save the new password. Press<ESCAPE>or<BACK>to exit without saving changes. 5.1.2 User Password f � 1. Press the USER PASSWORD soft key. 60 JNCA-2 Manual— P/N 52570:C 8/6/2007 Security Access Programming 2. Press the USER soft key to scroll through the nine user password numbers. When this key is pressed,the rest of the display wi11 update to reflect information for each new record.Stop at the password number to be updated. 3. Press the MODE soft key to select the user`s level of access.Levels are as follows: 4. PROCRAM/ALTER S7'ATL'S Gives access to both the Program Change Menu and the Alter Status Menu. 5. ALTER STATUS Gives access to only the Alter Status Menu 6. NONE Gives no access.Use to deactivate an existing password. 7. Press the REFERENCE soft key to enter an alphanumeric label to identify the user(maximum 20 characters). This is used only as a reference and is not used by the JNCA-2 for any functions. 8. Press ENTER and type in a new password at the prompt(up to 8 alphanumeric characters). Press ENTER again and re-type the password at the RE-ENTER PASSVv'ORD prompt for verification. 9. After entering all password information and retyping the password at the prompt,press the ACCEPT soft key to save all the password information. � NOTE: Only the master password has rights to change user passwords. Main menu �Program/alter statu�menu �Panel program menu �+Password change �User password �Enter user&mode �Enter password �Re-enter password USER PASSWORD L� (—j C USER � 1 REFERENCE : f1ary L-�' Il�l! ENTER PASSWORD � ******** l�i' R�E-ENTER PASSWORD = Ii ; �` Passwords are casesensitive. i� MODE � PROGRAM/ALTER STATUS ACCEPT n ,i�j� !�I ' I�I;C' BACK --- Figure 5.2 Change User Password 5.1.3 Unprotected Functions Operators without a password can do basic tasks; if a key switch is installed on J6 and enabled,a key is required to enable the keypad.The operator can perform the fol(owing keypad or menu- displayed functioi�s: • Acla�owledge alarms,troubles,and restorations(clears). • View acknowledged alarms and troubies. • Silence the sounding of fire alarm notification appliances. • Simultaneously reset all panels which are associated through programming. � • Point Read Status for network devices and local JNCA-2 annunciator points. JNCA-2 Manua! P/N>2570:C 8/6/2007 6L i Programming The Progrum/Alter Status Menu • Test the JNCA-2 LED indicators and Liquid Crystal Display(LCD). • View or print the event history stored in nonvolati(e memory. If the main operator of the system requires access to a function which is password protected, contact the Johnson Controls local branch office that installed the system for the required password(s). 5.1.4 Key Switches A JAKS-1B Annunciator Key Switch is required for each JNCA-2 unless the JNCA-2 is installed in a lockable cabinet such as a CAB-4 series backbox. The JAKS-1 B is used to enable and disable the JNCA-2 keypad.(see Section 31�"Annunciator Key Switch(JAKS-IB)"). In some jurisdictions,only one JNCA-2 may have the keypad enabled at any given point in time;all other JNCA-2 keypads must be disabled using the JAKS-1 BIf an IFW is installed on the network,each JNCA-2 keypad must be disabled by enabling key switch monitoring for the JNCA-2 and locking the JAKS-IB. A wiring diagram is provided in Section 3.15,"Annunciator Key Switch(JAKS- 1B)",on page 35. 5.2 The Program/Alter Status Menu Press PROGRAM/ALTER STATUS on the Main Menu screen.The user must enter a password/user[D of up to eight digits to advance to the Alter Status Menu or Program Menu. If the password does not match a password in the database,an encrypted version of the master password will be shown. Access to Program/Alter Status menu registers as a"Programming Mode"trouble and is tracked in event history. � NOTE: All events are annunciated during programming.If one of the annunciated events occurs, the JNCA-2 will exit the Programming screen and go to the Event Counts menu with the exception of troubles.Troubles will sound the piezo, but will not cause an exit to the Events Counts Screen. Main menu �Program/alter status PROGRAM/ALTER STATUS ENTRY SCREEN II� ENTER PASSWORD � ******** �� ;o:� ��: io► �� ACCEPT ;�; �' —�. r- , —�i � BACK �� `�i — Figure 5.3 Alter-Status Password Screen After a valid password is entered,the JNCA-2 will navigate to the PROGRAM/ALTER STATUS ENTRY screen. There are three possible menus,which are detailed in the upcoming sections: • ALTER STATUS MENU(Section 5.3 on page 63) • NODE PROGRAM N (Section�.4 on page 71) 62 JNCA-2 Mcinesal— P/N 52570:C 8/6/2007 Alter Statzrs Menu Programming • PROGRAM MENU(Section 5.5 on page 74) • POINT PROGRAM MENU The password access(evel determines which of these menus will be displayed. For example,a user who was not set up to have programming rights,will only be allowed to access the Alter Status Menu.The master password always gives full access to all three options. Main menu �Program/alter status PROGRAM/ALTER STATUS ENTRY MENU �� l'�, ;�� ALTER STATUS MENU (� �I NODE PROGRAM : �� LC; ,� �I � PANEL PROGRAM MENU ACCEPT �!, ;� , �..._......._., � ; POINT PROGRAM MENU BACK � � .� _-- Figure 5.4 Program/Alter Status Entry Menu � NOTE: Access to ACS board labei screen is by selecting local JNCA-2 node only. 5.3 Alter Status Menu 5.3.1 Alter Status Menu Options After you enter the correct password/user ID and press the ALTER STATUS soft key from the Program/Alter Status menu,the JNCA-2 navigates to the screen with menu options shown in Figure 5.5. BACK or<ESC>will return to the PROGRAM/ALTER STATUS ENTRY screen discussed in"After a valid password is entered,the JNCA-2 will navigate to the PROGRAM/ALTER STATUS ENTRY screen.There are three possible menus,which are detailed in the upcoming sections:"on page 62. 1�� JNCA-2 Manual-- P/N 52570:C 8/6/2007 �3 Programming Alter Status Menu Main menu �-+Program/alter status �Alter status T R 0 U B L E PROG MODE ACTIVATED NODE LABEL FOR LOCAL JNCA-2 I�� 10 � 48 : 52A TUE MAR 14 ,2006 N009 �; ALTER STATUS MENU iI_�JJj DISABLE/ENABLE WALK TEST �u; I�� DETECTOR SENSITIVITY CHANGE TIME/DATE (�,�; CLEAR VERIFY COUNTS �p_p_Q CONTROL ON/OFF � ^i (�, U l ,--_, —�. �' CLEAR HISTORY BACK �� ; Figure 5.5 Alter Status Menu 5.3.2 Disable/Enable Disable/enable individual control points on.a remote fire panel node. It is for use across a network only;not for use with display nodes such as the JNCA-2 or IFW. Figure�.6 is displayed when you select DISABLE/ENABLE from the Alter Status Menu. Identify which point(s)to disable/enable. (f there is an event in the display area,that address�vill be the default. This allows you to quickly read the point being displayed. [f no event is present,the default format is that of a detector. To scroll through device types,press the POINT SELECT soft key. When you have selected the desired device type,enter the device address,then press the ACCEPT soft key to accept the entry or<ESC>to exit. The soft key BACK will also exit without saving. The JNCA-2 will display the Enable/Disable screen. If the point does not exist or the node is off-line,the JNCA-2 will display an error screen. This screen will be displayed for three seconds and return to the previous screen. After selecting a point,the JNCA-2 will display that point and give the option of enabling or disabling it. If the point is enabled,the corresponding option is not visible,letting the user know the cw-rent setting of that point. To exit the screen without changing the enable/disable status,press BACK or the<ESC>key. Main menu �Program/alter status �Alter status �Disable/enabte point T R 0 U B L E PROG MODE ACTIVATED NODE LABEL FOR LOCAL JNCA-2 �� ',�� 10 : 48 � 52A TUE MAR 14 ,2006 N009 II !,; POINT SELECT �`�J II�' POINT SELECT : �': �' NxxxLU.yDzzz (DETECTOR ) Types of points � � available vary I depending on � ` � FACP.(see "ReadStatus"on ,i�l', NEXT POINT A�CEPT iC:i page 49 for � panel limitations. — � PREVIOUS POINT BACK i�,. !J�', � �, __ ; Figure 5.6 Alter Status: Disable/Enable Point, Point Select 64 JNCA-Z Manual— P/N 52570:C 8/6/2007 Alter Stadus Menu Programming Main menu 'y Program/alter status '�+Alter status '�Disable/enable point T R 0 U B L E �+Accept pROG MODE ACTIVATED —I NODE LABEL FOR LOCAL JNCA-2 —�, ' �� 10 � �4 : 11A TUE MAR 14 ,2006 N009 il�';' i�� DISABLE/ENABLE : N081L�1D�74�� -� AUTOMATIC INACTIVE ' ;�I' Detector L01D074 �I^'' �=' Zone Z0�1 Z001SMOKE (PHOTO ) `—� � Z001 , ' �(_—_, i!=� VALUE3 : 000% OF ALARM , 000% OF PREALARM ��=' If the oint is i�J'; � Disabled,thiswill '� �� read ENABLE �—_ instead. ii �', DISABLE BACK ( �� ; Figure 5.7 Alter Status: Disable/Enable Screen � NOTE: Disabling a point could compromise fire protection,and the system will prompt you to confirm the change. 5.3.3 Changing Detector Sensitivity � NOTE: For use with IFC-320, IFC2-640,and IFC2-3030 nodes. Selecting DETECTOR SENSITIVITY will display the corresponding menu screen. It is identical to the Point Select screen shown in Figure�.6,except the header will read SENSITIVITY POINT SELECT. Press the POINT SELECT soft key to scroll through and choose the desired device type. [n the POINT: NxxxLyyDzzz field,enter the address of the point you wish to change. If an event for a detector is in the display area,that address will be the default. This allows you to quickly access the point being displayed. The NEXT SELECTION/PREV[OUS SELECT[ON soft keys will increment to the next Node#or next device on the loop. The loop number will automatically increment when the last device on the loop is passed. After the last loop number and detector number are reached,the display will issue an informational message indicating that there are no more devices. Once you type the desired address,select ACCEPT to display the Detector Sensitivity screen,or hit<ESC>to exit. If a device does not exist at the selected address,an Invalid Point error message will display. Press '`NEXT POINT"or`PREV[OUS PO[NT'�to read the next/previous programmed point of that type. If communicating with an IFC-320,IFC2-640,or IFC2-3030,the JNCA-2 will automatically proceed to the next point In either case,an error message will indicate if there are no further devices of that type programmed. The selected point must already be mapped in local JNCA-2 programming; if the selected point is on a remote node,both that node and the local JNCA-2 must be on-line. � JNCA-2 Manual— P/N 52�70:C 8/6/2007 65 Yrogramming A[[er Status Menu When the JNCA-2 reads a valid point,its details are displayed in the resultant screen(Figure 5.8 on page 66). One is most sensitive;nine is least sensitive.To alter one of the four settings,press the corresponding soft key; Figure 5.9 on page 66 shows the screen's format. Main menu �+Program/aiter status �+Alter status �Detector Sensitivity TROUBLE PROG MODE ACTIVATED � NODE LABEL FOR LOCAL JNCA-2 I,�� ' 10 : 04 : 11A TUE MAR 14 ,2006 N0�9 �C, ADDRESS = N081L01D074 AUTOMATIC INACTIVE i I� Zonec��Or01L01D074 Z�01 SMOKE ( PHOTO ) �� ,�_ )� �' I� ,� ALARM OCCUPIED ALARM UNOCCUPIED I�: SENSITIVITY = 8 SENSITIVITY = 8 Note:Some types !f—? � �I PREALARM OC ..UPIED PREALARM UNOCCUPIED (Ci ofpointshave �'- SENSITIVITY = 8 SENSITIVITY = 8 `� fixed values and therefore will not �-1', B A C K ,` , allow sensitivity 'I I� changes. Figure 5.8 Alter Status: Detector Sensitivity TROUBLE PROG MODE ACTIVATED NODE LABEL FOR LOCAL . `' ; 1� � 04 � 11A TUE MAR 14 ,2006 f N009 � '�� Example: ADDRESS : N081L01D074 AfarmOccupied ;,�; � AUTOMATIC INACTIVE �l� � Detector L01D074 fl�, � Zone Z001 Z001 SMOKE (PHOTO ) �--- ir �� A�ARM OCCUPIED �I��' 1= 0 • SOi , 2= 0 • 73i �� 3= 0 • 96% , 4= 1 • 19% ; ��j', 5= 1 • 43% , 6= 1 • 66% ACCEPT i��: 7= 1 • 897. , 8= 2 - 12% il,=-�, 9= 2 . 35i , BACK iI li _�' I� _, Figure 5.9 Setting Detector Sensitivity: Alarm Occupied 5.3.4 Clear Verify Counters Prior to an a(arm,a detector may go through a verification sequence to make sure it is not a false alarm. From the Alter Status menu,once you type in a node address and press the CLEAR VERIFY COUNTERS soft key,the screen in Figure 5.10 is displayed. This action wil( reset verification counters for that node,preventing an inaccurate verification reading if an alarm is subsequently activated. � NOTE: For use with IFC-320, IFC2-640, and IFC2-3030 nodes. 66 JNCA-2 Manual— P,�N 52570:C 8/6/2007 Alter Status Menu Programming Main menu �Program/alter status �+After status �Clear verify counters TROUBLE PROG MODE ACTIVATED NODE LABEL FOR LOCAL JNCA-2 � 10 � 48 = 52A TUE MAR 14 ,2006 N009 Ij��,, ��LEAR VERIFY COUNTERS� _.—_, II � NODE ADDRE55 = Nxxx � r�'' (I� THIS WILL CLEAR ALL VERIFY COUNTEftS �j'; �� CLEAR COUNTERS �', NOTE:For remote nodes �; �. only. i �( B A C K �� J:, Figure 5.10 Alter Status -Clear Verify Counters 5.3.5 Clear History Select Clear History from the Alter Status Main Menu,then choose JNCA-2 HISTORY or NODE HISTORY N . The JNCA-2 will navigate to the Clear History menu,where there are three options: ALARM HISTORY,which clears only the alarm history buffer, EVENT HISTORY, which clears only non-alarm events in the history buffer,and ALL HISTORY,which clears both the alarm buffer and the event buffer. Once you clear a history buffer,the data is not recoverable. BACK or<ESC>will return the user to the Alter Status menu. Refer to Figure S.11 on page 67. � NOTE: For use with IFC-320, IFC2-640,and IFCZ-3030 nodes. Main menu �Program/alter status �Alter status �Clear NCA History T R 0 U B L E PROG MODE ACTIVATED NODE LABEL FOR LOCAL JNCA-2 ��-- ;UI 10 � 48 : 52A TUE MAR 14 ,2006 N009 ��, CIEAR NCA HISTORY �I�I; C', :-, �_ II I ALARM HISTORY II�', i—_', NOTE: Node I�! EVENT HISTORY C history options are i � ; ALARM HISTORY or ALL HISTORY. '-- � I i� �I ALL HISTORY BACK �� Figure 5.11 Alter Status -Clear JNCA-2 History � JNCA-2 Manual - P/N�2570:C 8/6/2007 b� Programming Alter Stntus Menu 5.3.6 Walk Test When connected to an FACP that supports the function(e.g.IFC2-640 and IFC2-3030),the JNCA- 2 walk test allows you to remotely test all active alarms on the monitoring network. There are two types of tests: Basic and Advanced. The advanced test allows you to retain Control-By-Event (CBE)and Cooperative-Control-By-Event(CCBE)actions. � NOTE: Network zones and network logic zones may be used as part of a logic equation; network trouble zones may be used as part of a trouble equation. CCBE(Cooperative Control-by- event)is the term used to refer to programming over the network in this manner. To perform a walk test,select the corresponding option from the Alter Status menu. • BAS[C/ADVANCED-Toggles between the basic and advanced Walk Test. When ADVANCED is selected,there is an END TEST option. END TEST is not an option for the basic test. • SILENT/AUDIBLE-future use. • PARAMETER-Toggles between NODES and LOOPS(LOOPS is for use with IFC2-3030 only). Selecting NODES in this field allows multiple nodes to be tested(see Figure 5.13 on page 69). If NODE is selected,you will have an ALL NODES option,allowing you to put the entire network into Walk Test mode. NOTE: This is limited to the nodes mapped to the JNCA-2. • DISABLE ACS BOARDS-allows the user to disable ACS annunciation of the events generated by the walk test. • ACCEPT-applies the settings and advances to the Start/End Test screen. BACK will return the user to the previous screen without performing the test. � NOTE: For use with IFC-320, IFC2-640, and IFC2-3030 nodes. � NOTE: The JNCA-2 normally does not display point activations for various type codes that are unrelated to an alarm event,such as the NONFIRE type code. When in Walk Test mode, however,the JNCA-2 wiil display activations for these types of points as TEST events. Main menu �Program/alter status menu �Alter status menu �--�Walk Test TROUBLE PROG MODE ACTIVATED � NODE LABEL FOR LOCAL JNCA-2 '� 10 : 48 � 52A TUE MAR 14 ,2006 N009 �� WALK TEST i�', BASIC/ADVANCED : ADVANCED IC; (�Il SILENT/AUDIBLE : AUDIBLE �C,' i�� PARAMETER = NODES ACCEPT ��_; '�','', DISABLE ACS BOARDS � � BACK I�—J I �,, Figure 5.12 Walk Test Menu 65 JNCA-2 Mnnual — P/N 52�70:C 8/6/2007 I Alter Status Menu Programming The settings selected from the Walk Test Menu are displayed below the screen header. Up to 10 items may be selected for each test. The formats are as follows: Nodes=Nxxx Loop=f�IxxxLyy The START TEST soft key begins the test using the parameters entered. Once a test has been started,the header will change from WALK TEST SELECT to WALK TEST IN PROGRESS. ABORT will terminate the current test and exit to the Walk Test menu. In Advanced mode,NEXT TEST will end the current test sequence and start a new one. Walk Test results are sent to the printer and to History. The event will be listed as'`TEST..." Main menu 4 Programlalter status menu �Alter status menu 4 Walk Test �Accept TROUBLE PftOG MODE ACTIVATED NODE LABEL FOR LOCAL JNCA-2 � Thissample � 10 � 48 � 52A THU MAR 14 ,2�06 N009 �'� screenshows WALK TEST SELECT awalktestfor .�—�? SETTINGS � ADVANCED , AUDIBLE ,NODES two nodes. �', �� N�81 ,N0�3 , , IUJ , , , , , , �,�i , , , "Next TesC'is ;; only available in ��; � Advancedmode START TEST ALL NODES after a Walk Test �— �, hasbeenstarted. ;I�, NEXT TEST ABORT �[�J`,i� Figure 5.13 Walk Test Select Screen The advanced test provides more information for the operator by allowing him/her to track the activation of a single input point/zone to the set of points that responded to the activation across the portion of the networked points specified at the start of testing. The operator will be allowed to set activation and response times to be included for each set of points. 5.3.7 Change Time/Date Select the CHANGE TIME/DATE option from the alter status menu to access this feature. This allows you to change the system time and date. The current time and date will be displayed using the selected format. Use the keypad to enter the numeric values for the following fields: Hour, A.M.or P.M.(A or P),Minute,Month,and Year. The system automatically displays the day of the week regardless of format. • The TIME FORMAT soft key will toggle between the following format choices: HH:MM AM/PM H:MM AM/PM HH:MM H:MM Note: The H:MM format w�ill replace/eading zeros in the hour with n sperce character. • The DATE FORMAT soft key will toggle between US (MM/DD/YY)and European (DD/MM/YY)format. JNCA-2 Manual— P/N 52570:C 8/6/2007 by Programming Alter Status Menu • The TIME ZONE soft key toggles between 34 time zone selections. The selection of time zone also has an inherent selection for whether daylight saving is in effect and the switch-over time. For example,USA EASTERN and[ND[ANA EAST are the same time zone,except [NDIANA EAST does not change times with the Daylight Saving Time(DST)changes in the spring and fall. • The ACCEPT key will implement the changes shown. • The BACK soft key will return to the Alter Status Menu screen without making any changes. Main menu �Program/alter status menu �Alter status menu �Change time/date TROUBLE PROG MODE ACTIVATED � NODE LABEL FOR LOCAL JNCA-2 � 1� : 48 : 52A TUE MAR 14 ,2006 N009 C;I �} CHANGE TIME/DATE � �� TIME/DATE : 11 : 22A 03/14/06 ( I C1 [C� 'I i� TIME FORMAT = HH : MM AM/PM �� I� ��' DATE FORMAT = MM/DD/YY ACCEPT � ,��. I ', TIME ZONE : L1SA EASTERN BACK � „ i �; ;i .._____� Figure 5.14 Change Time/Date 5.3.8 Control On/Off Control On/Off enables you to control a point on a remote node. It is for use across a network only; not for use with display nodes such as the JNCA-2. Press the POINT SELECT soft key to scroll through device types. The NEXT SELECTION/PREVIOUS SELECTION soft keys will increment to the next/previous Node number or device on the loop. When you have selected the desired device type,enter the device address,then press the ACCEPT soft key to accept the entry or<ESC>to exit. The soft key BACK will also exit without saving. After selecting the point,the JNCA-2 will display it and give the following options: FORCE ON and FORCE OFF. lf the point is currently on,the FORCE ON option is not visible,letting the user know the current setting of that point. � NOTE: Control on/off is for use across a network oniy. � _ � 70 JNCA-2 Manual- P/N 52570:C 8/6/..007 Node Progrum Menu Programming Main menu y Program/alter status menu �Alter status menu �-'Control on/off TROUBLE PROG MODE ACTIVATED ;;�I NODE LABEL FOR LOCAL JNCA-2 � 10 : 04 : 11A TUE MAR 14 ,2006 N009 C'i CONTROL POINT SELECT ,�: � 'I�: � II_�: POINT SELECT = C� Typesofpoints �—J NOOOL01M�01 (MODULE ) available vary depending on � FACP.(see �� "Read Status"on page 49 for �n'. panel limitations. ��--J �i NEXT POINT ACCEPT ;=�1 � 1 !. il J! BACK �:) Figure 5.15 Control On/Off Point Select Main menu �Program/aiter status menu �Alter status menu �Control on/off �Accept TROUBLE PROG MODE ACTIVATED NODE LABEL FOR LOCAL JNCA-2 � 1� � �4 = 11A TUE MAR 14 ,2006 N0�9 CI� ,, �CONTROL ON/OFF : N095L02M001�� Node type i` � determines ��' AUTOMATIC OFF I�i numberandformat MODULE ADDRESS 201 � of available zones. �� Z 0 0 , � Z�0 R E L A Y �� , , �i _-- ' i�—', _f'; FORCE ON �CI Toggles between Force on and � I ;1 Forceoff j�l BACK — ,� J Figure 5.16 Control On/Off Screen 5.4 Node Program Menu The NODE PROGRAM menu is available to make changes to point or node labels. I � JNCA-2 Mnnua! P/N 52570:C 8/6/2007 �� Programming Node Program Menu 5.4.1 Node Program Menu Options Main menu �Program/alter status menu �+Node program menu (Remote node selected) NODE PROGRAM �J I� j�i EDIT POINT LABELS l____J — (—. ❑ EDIT NODE LABEL (I:�) �� IC' �-- �-;j ;� BACK ( i Figure 5.17 Node Program Menu, Remote Node Selected Main menu �Program/alter status menu �Node program menu (local NCA selected) �! C�j POINT LABEL SELECT ,— - _ � ��',' jI POINT SELECT : � �l A01 ( ACS BOARD ) (�-=�� I �' ;!_j'; NEXT POINT A�CEPT C�I ;�l' PREVIOUS POINT BACK ' ' ��J �i Figure 5.18 Node Program Menu, Local JNCA-2 Selected 5.4.2 Edit Point Labels This option allows you to name and/or provide an abbreviated description for individual points. 1. Select the point on the node that you wish to edit,then press the ACCEPT soft key. 2. Once the Edit screen is active,change the point label and/or the extended point label by using the alphanumeric keys to enter the desired text. 3. Press the ACCEPT key to implement the changes,or BACK to exit without changing anything. � NOTE: Not applicable for changing the label of other network annunciators on the network. �, 72 JNCA-Z Mam�al— P/N 52�70:C 8/6/2007 Node Program Mem� Programming Main menu �Program/alter status menu �Node program menu(Remote node selected) �Edit point labels OnIFC2-3030, EDIT LABELS this area is used ;; � (�' forthepanefs `! POINT : N081L01D001��UC Il`,i custom action message —' ' (� ��', �I (— —� �� POINT L EL � Detector L01D001 I�;� �, i 20characters �j �' � EXTENDE LABEL � ACCEPT � �—. ,—, 12 characters . �I �I BACK � �i Figure 5.19 Node Program Menu: Edit Point Labels 5.4.3 Edit Node Label (for a Remote Node) A node label is designed to give more descriptive information about a node than j ust its number. This label can be changed in the JNCA-2 if the user has access to this menu. To access this feature, select NODE PROGRAM MENU N ,enter the desired node number in the N field,then select EDIT NODE LABEL. Line 4 displays the node number that you will be labeling. Type in a description of up to 40 characters.. Press ACCEPT to implement this,or select BACK or<ESC> to exit this screen without making any changes. Main menu �Program/alter status menu �-�►Node program menu(Remote node selected) 4 Edit node label When the screen comes up,this will E D I T L A B E L display the current .r—1 �• node label for a � N 0 D E � 0 0 3 l�;i remote node. Enter the new ;,_, �—; label�ame,and '; pressACCEPTto �`� EDIT NODE LABEL I. _I makethechange. J NODE LABfL FOR A REMOTE NODE � I� ; I �, i,� �I �� ACCEPT � I:_;� I I=;j �-___-� 8 A C K (----� I; Figure 5.20 Node Program Menu: Edit Node Label � NOTE: To edit the node label for the local JNCA-2, see Figure 5.22 on page 75. JNCA-2 Manual P/N�2570:C 8/6/2007 73 Programming Pnnel ProRrnm Menu 5.5 Panel Program Menu The Program menu options adjust the general operational settings for the local JNCA-2: how it communicates over the monitoring network,how it handles events,display settings, password configurations,etc. For example,with EVENT MONITORING you can control what event types will be monitored. If multiple JNCA-2s exist on the network,a user may not want all of them to monitor all types of events. In this case,one JNCA-2 could monitor alarm events,and another one could monitor status events like trouble and enable/disable events. To bring up a menu,activate the keypad and press the soft key next to the option. Main menu �Program/alter status menu �Panel program menu PANEL PROGRAM MENU ��, ,�i NETWORK PARAMETERS LCD DISPLAY ��II _, ��j' NETWORK MAPPING ACS PROGRAMMING (�II j� PANEL SETTINGS SUPERVISION �C�I I�i', PANEL TIMERS MORE (Cj� �[�'', EVENT MONITORING BACK II_I� J Figure 5.21 Program Menu " 5.5.1 Network Parameters Use the following soft keys to select the corresponding field and make changes for that JNCA-2 network setting(refer to Figure 5.22 and Figure 5.23 on page 75): • NODE NUMBER allows you to change the JNCA-2 node number. NOTE: Make sure you do not assign the JNCA-2 a node number already being used by another monitoring device. • NODE LABEL allows you to edit the local JNCA-2's custom label. This appears in Line 1 as part of the"all-systems normal"message when there are no active events,and in Line 3 of an active-event summary. There is a 40-character maximum. NOTE:This is the local node label; to change a remote node label,see Section 5.4.3"Edit Node Label(for a Remote Node)"on page 73. • STYLE: selects the style as STYLE 4 or STYLE 7. • CH A THRESHOLD sets the channel A threshold to HIGH or LOW. (See the NOT!•FLRE•NE7�"'Manua!for an explanation of this network function.) • GH B THRESHOLD sets the channel B threshold to HIGN or LOW. (See the NOTI•FLRE•NE7''"'Mamral for an explanation of this netwark function.) • [P DOWNLOAD allows you to enable VeriFire software downloads through the internet. (This setting will not affect VeriFire downloads via non-internet connections). Pressing the IP DOWNLOAD soft key will display a screen with the following options: IP ACCESS:OFF-disables internet access for VeriFire downloads � IP ACCESS:ON -enables internet access for VeriFire downloads [P ACCESS:TIMED-enables internet access for two hours,then times out to disabled � NOTE: Enabling IP Access allows VeriFire downloads over the internet through a Noti-Fire-Net Web Server(JWS-2). � �: 74 .INCA-1 Mnnual— P/N�2570:C 8/6/2007 Pane!Program Menu Programming Main menu �Program/alter status menu �Panel program menu �Network parameters NETWORK PARAMETERS CNODE = 17�� C.' Network node , --, numberforthe ! � NODE LABEL : � local JNCA-2. �_� �`— ' NODE LABEL FOR LOCAL NCA '-� Descriptivenode STYLE � STYLE 7 IP ACCES3 label for the local `= �� JNCA-2. ;I�� CH A • THRESHOLD : H.jS�1i ACCEPT �` `_, ,� ;�]; CH B - THRESHOLD : L.4..W. BACK I�i t Figure 5.22 Program Menu: Network Parameters Network parameters 41P Download IP DOWNLOAD C �� `---') IP ACCESS : 4�� (`_' Internet Access for VeriFire downloads: ;�; �� Off=Disabled �� On=Enabled � Timed=Enable for I� ((�` 2 hours " --- `�n' ACCEPT �—� ;��,� I,�' (� BACK 'l JI �—_' Figure 5.23 Network Parameters: IP Download � NOTE: Use of an IP Access setting other than OFF is subject to the approval of the local AHJ. 5.5.2 Network Mapping The JNCA-2 can be programmed to monitor only a select group of nodes on the NOTI•F[RE•NETTn'system. Consequently,the JNCA-2 would only control or monitor those nodes, ignoring messages received from any other nodes on the network. This mapping feature � does not affect time synchronization w�ith the JNCA-2;therefore,if the JNCA-2 is the master time keeper of the network, it will transmiC the time-synchronization message to all nodes on the network,whether or not they are being monitored by the JNCA-2. JNCA-2 Manua!- P/N 52570:C 8/6/2007 ?� i Programming Panel Program Mem� There are IS ofthese screens covering nodes i through 240. Each screen will have 16 nodes on it. The up and down arrow keys are used to select which node to edit. When a field is selected,the NEXT SELECTION/PREVIOUS SELECTION keys will toggle between OFFLINE/ONLINE, MAPPED/UNMAPPED. • OFFLINE-The node is not communicating on the network. • ONLINE-The node is communicating on the network. • MAPPED- Events are annunciated by the JNCA-2. • UNh1APPED(blank)-Events are ignored by the JNCA-2. NEXT navigates to the next screen in the sequence. The last screen will not have a NEXT key. BACK will go to the preceding screen in the sequence or to the Node Programming menu if the current screen is the first one in the 1�-screen seyuence. ACCEPT implements any changes that have been made up to this point and returns the user to the Node Programming menu. AUTO PROGRAM will consult the internal map of which nodes are on the network and automatical(y set all 240 Nodes according to the map,regardless of which screen is being shown. The results will not be saved to flash until the ACCEPT key is pressed. Main menu �-+Program/alter status menu �Panel program menu �+Network mapping NETWORK MAPPING I��)` — SCREEN 01 OF 15 001 � OFFLINE / 002 : OFFLINE / � 003 � ONLINE /MAPPED 004 : OFFLINE / I�� 005 = 0FFLINE / 006 � OFFLINE / (�' ;Ui 007 = 0FFLINE / 008 = 0FFLINE / l__.I'' 0�9 : ONLINE /MAPPED 010 = 0FFLINE / � I�� 011 : OFFLINE / 012 : OFFLINE / � �� 013 : OFFLINE / 014 � OFFLINE / (�j 015 = 0FFLINE / 016 : OFFLINE / n� AUTO PROGRAM ACCEPT �'j � ��; NEXT BACK (( l__::_� Figure 5.24 Program Menu: Network Mapping 5.5.3 Panel Settings General JNCA-2 preferences can be set from this program screen. • LOCAL CONTROL-Press this soft key to toggle between Yes and No.This option disables (No)or enables(Yes)local panel control of the Signal Silence,System �eset,and Drill Fixed Function keys,as well as SIGNAL SILENCE,SYSTEM RESET,and ACKNOWLEDGE soft keys. A setting of No(disable)turns the panel piezo sounder off,oven-iding the next field if PIEZO is set to ON. Default: Yes. • PIEZO- Press to toggle between Off and On.This option enables(On)or disables(Offl the panel piezo from sounding when alarms or troubles occur. Default: On. • DISPLAY ADDRESS-Selecting NO instructs the JNCA-2 not to display the node and point in the event at the top of the screen. Selecting YES displays ali node and point information defined from the JNCA-2 Node Program menu options. 76 ./NCA-2 Manual— P/N�2570:C 8/6/2007 Panel Program Menu Programming • EVENT ORDERING-Switches between USA and CANADA ordering. USA priority events come in on the Event USA Canada Counts screen and Canada priority events Fire Fire come in on the Multiple Event List screen Security Supervisory Refer to Table 5.1. Supervisory Troub�e • REMINDER MENU- These reminders Trouble Prealarm occur daily at 11:00 AM(not configurable). Local reminders restart the Prealarm Disabled JNCA-Z piezo and require re- Disab�ed acknowledgement of trouble events. Table 5.1 USA and Canadian Proprietary reminders re-send trouble Event Ordering messages across the network. Remote reminders cause connected ACS devices to re-display trouble conditions. Main menu �-+Program/alter status menu �Panet Program menu �+Panel settings �� PANEL SETTINGS I�� LOCAL CONTROL � YES REMINDER MENU ❑' �n PIEZO : � MOP.E �; �ol �. �(�� EVENT ORDERING � t1SA ACCEPT � ;!�1' �; C r(�i DISPLAY ADDRESS � YES BACK U �—, �� Figure 5.25 Panel Program Menu: Panel Settings The Reminder Menu Press the REMINDER MENU soft key to select Trouble Reminder or Telephone Ring-In Annunciation. • Trouble Reminder- Press this soft key to toggle between the two possibilities: YES:Choose this to initiate a daily 11:OOAM reminder that there are uncleared troubles in the system.The reminder will appear on the screen and will sound a piezo(if the piezo is enabled). NO:Choose this if no reminder is desired. Default:YES • Telephone Ring-[n Annunciation-toggles enable between YES and NO. If enabled, Telephone Ring-In will provide an audible and visible indication that a fire fighters telephone circuit has been activated,indicating a call-in from emergency response personnel. � NOTE: Enabling Telephone Ring-In supervision will indicate an active telephone circuit from any IFC2-640 or IFC2-3030 panel on the network. JNCA-2 Manual— P/N 52570:C 8/6/2007 �� Programming Yanel P�rogrnm Menu ACKNOWLEDGED FIRE ALARM Detector LD1D074 ACKNOWLEDGE Zone Z001 Z001 SMOKE (PHOTO ) flashesuntilphoneis �� 10 � 01 � 01A TUE MAR 14 ,2006 N081L01D074 � acknowledged �� E V E N T C 0 U N T S � (answered) i FIRE ALARMS � 0�5 PREALARM � 00� TROUBLE � 002 I�; SUPERVISORY : 002 SECURITY : 001 OTHER : 0�1 +I Message flashes. �10 : 4 4 : S 4 A T U E M A R 1 4 ,2 0�6� `�' I �ACKNOWLEDGE SIGNAL SILENCE j�j • , SYSTEM •RESET �I' �—, �. ! PRO�RAM/ALTER STATUS MAIN MENU ( �; l_—� Figure 5.26 Telephone Ring-In Panel Settings 2 (MORE) Menu Pressing M o R E at the Panel Settings screen brings up the following screen. Main menu �Program/alter status menu �►Panel Program menu �Panel settings �+More PANEL SETTINGS I� REGIONAL SETTINGS C: ��; - io �L�JI DCC PARTICIPATION : �!Q �i � ACCEPT ;�` �i (�; DEFAULT SETTINGS � BACK �; Figure 5.27 Panel Settings 2(MORE) DCC Participation-toggles the Display&Control Center supervision between YES and NO. See Appendix D,'`Display and Control Center(DCC)"for details. QCAUTION: On system utilizing the DCC function,all locations that can participate in DCC should be set to YES. Regional Settings-Press this soft key to proceed to the Local Settings screen.Press Che soft key to scroll through the selections.The Default is that there are no special local settings.Refer to Appendix E,"Regional Settings",on page 95. 7$ JNCA-2 Manucil P/N 52570:C 8/6/2007 Pnne(Program Menu Programming Default Settings-Press to activate JNCA-2 default settings for the following: � Program setting for. Default: Local Control Yes Piezo On Trouble Reminder Yes Event Ordering USA Display Address Yes DCC Participation No Regional Settings Default Table 5.2 Programming Defaults 5.5.4 Panel Timers Use the soft key(or the arrow keys)to select a setting to change: • AUTO SILENCE changes the auto silence timer. The range is from 10, 15,or 20 minutes (OFF=disabled).Default:OFF • AC FAIL DELAY changes the time delay between an AC failure event and switching of the Trouble relay. Hour settings are as follows: 1 -12 hours. Default: 8 hours � NOTE: Use of an AC FAIL DELAY setting other than 0, 1,2,or 3 is subject to the approval of the local AHJ. • SILENCE [NHIB[T:Press to enter a value from 0(disabled)to 5 minutes.This software timer disables the SIGNAL SILENCE key function for the time entered when a fire alarm occurs.The timer starts at the first alarm only;it does not restart with each new aLarm.Defauit:0 � DEFAULT TIMERS(Press the M 0 R E key to access)activates default settings for the following: Program setting for: Default: uto i ence AC Fail Delay 8 hours Silence Inhibit 0 Table 5.3 Timer Defaults Main menu �Program/alter status menu �Panel Program menu �Panel Timers TIf1ER5 I'� - �,' � l�� ;� i� � __� - i ! AC FAIL DELAY 3 HOURS MORE f�f �; SILENCE INHIBIT : 00 : 0� A�CEPT ;,i� C�! �---.. ,^ ;(�; AUTO SILENCE � OFF BACK ��; i_._�; I Figure 5.28 Panel Program Menu: Timers JNCA-?Manunl P/N 52�70:C 8/6/2007 79 Programming Panel Program Menu 5.5.5 LCD Display Selecting LCD DISPLAY from the Programming menu will allow you to alter the display's appearance by modifying brightness(intensity)and by turning the backlight on or off. Refer to Figure 5.29 on page 80. • BRIGHTER-decreases the LCD intensity(darker). The decrease wil] increment by approximately 4%. • DARKER -increases the LCD intensity(brighter). The increase will increment by approximately 4%. • DEFAULT -selects the factory default setting. • CURRENT -selects the intensity setting that was in effect when the screen was accessed. • LANGUAGE-cycles among available languages. (Note: For Hebrew,also set the printer for graphics mode;see Section 5.5.7"Supervision�on page 87). • BACKLICIiT-cycles among the following options: ON EXCEPT AC FAIL,OFF,or ON. The<NEXT SELECT[ON>and<PREVIOUS SELECTION>selection function keys will also toggle between these states. While this screen is in effect,the intensity of the display will match the value shown on the line below the screen header. Press ACCEPT to implement changes or BACK to exit without saving. Main menu � �-►Programlalter status menu �+Panel program menu �+LCD display LCD DISPLAY I� �. LCD INTENSITY � 5�% (�I'. 'LJI BRIGHTER DEFAULT t__ _� ��I DARKER CURRENT �, _� . /� LANGUAGE � FNGL7c_H ACCEPT �' i��; — BACKLIGHT � ON FXCEPT AC FAIL BACK � :��_i ([ ;' Figure 5.29 Program Menu: LCD Programming 5.5.6 ACS Programming The ACS device is a remote,limited control device used by the JNCA-2;the function of each ACS point is defined at the JNCA-2. The JNCA-2 can be programmed to allow an ACS device to perform a varieYy of tasks,such as silencing a specific node,or a network-wide function,such as silencing all panels on the network that are mapped to the JNCA-2. You use an ACS device when you do not need the depth of functionality of a JNCA-2,or when you wish to perform JNCA-2 � functions remotely without having to go to the JNCA-2's physical location. ACS devices are connected to the JNCA-2 via the EIA-485 ACS mode connector(TB3). Multiple ACS devices can be connected by daisy-chaining to the previous ACS device. � 80 �CA-2 Manual — P/N�2570:C S/6i2007 Pane!Program Menu Programming You can move the cursor between fields with the up and down arrows. Press the ANNUNC[ATOR TYPE soft key to scroll through the fol(owing list of types. Stop at the appropriate type. Type: Used for: NONE (Nothing installed) 64 PT 64-point annunciation 64SYS 64-point annunciation,with first 8 points reserved 64SVC* 64-point service mode for Two Level Bypass 96DCC 96 point annunciation to be used with multiple Command Centers 96PT 96-point annunciation 96SYS 96-point annunciation,with first 8 points reserved 96SVC* 96-point service mode for Two Level Bypass UDACT UDACT TM4 TM-4.(The TM-4 has the option to program the reverse polarity/relay outputs.) AMG** AMG-1 FSCS Smoke control modules set for FSCS mode HVAC Smoke control modules set for HVAC mode IJZC 64-point UZC programmed for monitor type only Press ACCEPT to save any conTiguration changes or BACK to exit without saving. The POINT PROGRAMMING soft key navigates to the point programming menu. *Two Level Bypass:When an ACS board is programmed as a 64SVC or 96SVC type,the operator must enter the Program/Alter Status mode of operation before pressing any push buttons to control points on these boards. If a push button is pressed while not in the Program/Alter Status screen, and no unacknowledged events exist,the password screen will automatically be displayed so the operator can enter the Program/Alter Status mode. **AMG Type Programming: An AMG(Audio Message Generator)at address 32 can be programmed by the JNCA-2 for only the Page function. AMGs at any other address cannot be programmed at the JNCA-2. � NOTE: The local JNCA-2 is not available as a target node for ACS point mapping;only remote devices can be targeted. Smoke Control Devices Smoke Control Devices must be set as Firefighters Smoke Control Station(FSCS)or Heating, Ventilation and Air-Conditioning(HVAC)annunciator types. [n addition to its 64 smoke control points,when an SCS device is operating in FSCS mode,there are 32 additional points which function as alarm points(Points 65 through 96). They can be mapped to a zone or point to send the SCS device into a fire alarm state when any of the additional 32 points is activated. Any of the 32 � JNCA-2 Manual— P/N 52570:C 8/6/2007 g 1 .__ Programming Panel Program Menu alarm points that are used must be set to MONITOR mode from the panel. Any of these points that are not used can be set to NONE. Refer to the Smoke Control System Manua!for further information on smoke control devices. Main menu �Program/alter status menu �Panel program menu �ACS programming A�S PROGRAMMING I� (�I Il_J� A01 � LIDACT A02 = 64PT A03: 96PT A04 �T_fLy_ f�J`I A05 � �LSZ A06 : � A07 : �LQ A08 = �LQ i n(—�� A 0 9 � flLQ. A 10 : �Q A 11 � �LQ A 12 � �lQ i A 13 � I1LSZ A 1 4 : tjQ A 15 : �LQ A 16 � � �i A17 � �LQ A18 � �Q A19 : �LQ A20 : jQQ �IA21 � I1LSZ A22 � �Q A23 � � A24 � � (��' `� A25 : I�LQ A26 : � A27� �Q A28 � � ��___J A29 � tLQ A30 : �LQ A31 � �L2 A32 : � �� , I,�l: ANNUNCIATOR TYPE ACCEPT I_,, ,—�. �__....., i�I POINT PROGRAMMING BACK I�I', Figure 5.30 Program Menu:ACS Programming ACS Point Programming Press the PO[NT key and enter the ACS point number. The format is as follows: AxxPyy A=ACS device number, P=point number NE?CT POINT and PREVIOUS POINT will go to the next and previous points. Use the JNCA-2 to program the ACS device's functions. The MODE key cycles among the various ACS mapping modes. The possibilities are as follows: ACS Point Function: Explanation Mode None The point is not programmed. No messages are sent from or received at this point.LEDs at this point do not light. Control The point will change the state of up to eight control modules OR,(for IFC2- The Point Active LED is lit if a 3030 only)up to eight general zones,when its button is pushed. corresponding mapped point is Selecting this point mode will bring up the Control Point Select screen,where active.The Status(trouble)LED is lit the points that will be controlled by this button can be selected. when a point or zone is disabled or in trouble. NOTE: For some board types(96PT,96SYS,96SVC,64PT,64SYS,64SVC),up to eight outputs may be activated or deactivated with this point type. Monitor The point will show the current status of a specified source point or zone. The Point Active LED is lit if the corresponding mapped point or zone is active.The Status(trouble) LED is on if that point or zone is disabled or in trouble.If the point has a button,it has no effe�t when pushed. Table 5.4 ACS Point Mapping: Explanation of Point Modes (1 of 3) �*� 82 JNCA-2 Manuul— P/N 52570:C 8/6/2007 Panel Program Menu Programming ACS Point Function: Explanation Mode Telephone This point supports telephone functionality when mapped to a telephone point Both the Point Active LED and the on a NUP panel.Press the button to connect the mapped point with the Status(trouble)LED wili flash if a telephone station. telephone has been placed in the jack at the mapped telephone point. Othenvise,the Point Active LED is lit if the corresponding point or zone is active.The Status(trouble)LED is lit if that point or zone is in trouble or disabled. Disab�e This point will e�able/disable a specified point,zone or logic zone on an IFC- The Point Active LED is lit if the 3030. corresponding mapped point or CAUTION:When a disabled output is enabled,it will be affected by conditions zone is active.The Status(trouble) existing in the system that would normally affect it.For example,when a LED is lit if that point or zone is condition exists in the system that would normally turn the output ON,the disabled or in trouble. output will turn ON when it is enabled. Acknowledge This point will act like an Acknowledge soft key or button on the panel, The Point Active LED is lit when acknowledging a single fire alarm event or block acknowledging other events there are any fire alarms in the when its butto�is pushed. system.The Status(trouble)LED is lit when there are troubles in the system. Silence This point will silence the silenceable outputs on one panel or all panels that are The Point Active LED is lit if all mapped to the JNCA-2,depending on programming. silenceable outputs have been silenced.The Status(trouble)LED is lit if not all silenceable o�tputs have been silenced after the button is pushed. System This point will reset one panel or all panels that are mapped to the JNCA-2, No LED will ever light at this point. Reset depending on programming. Drill This point will initiate a fire drill when its button is pushed for one panel or all The Point Active LED is lit if a panels that are mapped to the JNCA-2,depending on programming. corresponding mapped point is active.The Status(trouble)LED is on when a point of zone is disabled or in trouble. Enable This point will cause the associated input(a JDVC's Telephone,RM-1,AUX A The Point Active LED is lit if a Paging or AUX B)to become an active audio source on Noti-Fire-Net.The user may corresponding mapped point is then choose to activate specific PAM points on remote Digital Voice Commands active.The Status(trouble)LEO is to use this network input,or to perform a paging function such as ALL CALL on when a point or zone is disabled from this input. or in trouble. All Call This point will activate ALL CALL.(Speaker Circuits will be turned on according The Point Active LED is lit if a to programming.) corresponding mapped point is Mapping can include either all nodes(program the node=0)or a single node active.The Status(trouble)LED is (program the node=the node number.) on when a point or zone is disabled or in trouble. NOTE: Re:AMG-1- If the ALL CALL function is programmed for a Node 0 ACS point in a specific JNCA-2,pressing the ALL CALL button will activate the AMG-1 s and Speaker circuits on nodes that are mapped into that JNCA-2,as modified by any Page functions programmed into the AMG-1 mapping at address 32. All Call This point will,when pressed after an"Enable Paging From_"button,allow The Point Active LED is lit if a Minus ALL CALL MINUS paging(Page Inactive Areas)from the source(Telephone, corresponding mapped point is RM-1,AUX A or AUX B).The Special Paging Function map programming at active.The Status(trouble)LED is the JDVC will receive the page function. on when a point or zone is disabled or in trouble. Page Evac .will,when pressed after an"Enabie Paging"butto�,allow PAGE EVAC paging The Point Active LED is lit if a from that source(Telephone,RM-1,AUX A or AUX B). The Special Paging corresponding mapped point is Function map programming at the JDVC will receive the page function. active.The Status(trouble)LED is on when a point or zone is disabled or in trouble. Table 5.4 ACS Point Mapping: Explanation of Point Modes (2 of 3) � JNCA-2Manuu!— P/N 52570:C 8/6/2007 83 Programming Panel Pr-ogram Menu ACS Point Function: Explanation Mode Page Alert ...will,when pressed after an"Enable Paging"button,allow PAGE ALERT The Point Active LED is lit if a paging from that source(Telephone,RM-1,AUX A or AUX B).The Special corresponding mapped point is Paging Function map programming at the JDVC will receive the page function. active.The Status(trouble)LED is on when a point or zone is disabled or in trouble. Shadow Supports direct shadowing of ACS points when the JNCA-2 communicates with The lights on the ACS points will an IFC-1010/2020 or IFC-300/400.Complete annunciator programming at the shadow the Iights on the mapped FACP local to the point to be shadowed must be complete before JNCA-2 ACS poi�t,except any flashing shadow programming is performed.The lights on the ACS points will shadow sequence may be different. the lights on the mapped ACS point,except any flashing sequence may be different. Page Use this mode only when ACS point A32 is programmed as AMG.This function The Point Active LED is lit if a allows the user to define a group of NOTI•FIRE•NET'""control panels to corresponding mapped node is function as one"system"for the purpose of Fire Fighter's Telephone and ALL active.The Status(trouble)LED is CALL paging.An ACS point in the range of A32P1 -A32P64 may be on when a point or zone is disabled programmed as PAGE. The source for this point is a single node address. If or in trouble. either an ALL CALL or Fire Fighter's Telephone's remote ALL CALL PAGE is active,the JNCA-2 will only command the programmed list of nodes to participate. NOTE: If none of the points A32P01-A32P64 are defined as the page function,the JNCA-2 will command the entire list of mapped nodes to participate. Table 5.4 ACS Point Mapping: Explanation of Point Modes (3 of 3) SAVE will save the current point programming without exiting the menu. Press NEXT to advance to the next ACS address for configuring. Main menu �►Program/alter status menu �-+Panel program menu �ACS programming 4 Point programming (Control selected) ACS POINT PROGRAMMING � �I POINT = A01P01 �' When MODE is CONTROL,press � theSOURCEsoft ' i MODE � CONTROL `-�; key to enter or view Source information.See S 0 U R C E : �: Figure 5.32. Format of point � i I N T S A V E address and � � number of available sources j�i p R E V I 0 U S P 0 I N T B A C K lU; vary depending on --- — mode and node. Figure 5.31 ACS Point Programming Screen � 84 JNCA-2 Manua!— P/N 52570:C 8/6/2007 Pane!Program Mem� Programming Main menu y Program/alter status menu �Panle program menu �ACS programming �-+Point programming (Contro.Point Select) CONTROL POINT SELECT i� � I'� Enter the control ��', � source(s)in these eight fields. �� Control sources � may be SLC - r� modules,panei ��1 � circuit modules, �; IFC2-3030 generalzones, ��! pOINT SELECT ACCEPT or Prioritized �- , � Audio Matrix points. Press this soft key to toggle through the device point address formats. Figure 5.32 ACS Source Programming Screen Control mode source field entries may be: • SLC modules in the format NxxxLyyMzzz.xxx=FACP node number,yy=the SLC loop number,zzz=module SLC address. • Panel Circuit modules in the format NxxxPyy.z.xxx=FACP node number,yy=panel circuit module number,z=panel circuit pushbutton number. • Prioritized Audio Matrix(PAM)speaker points,in the format Nxxx[yyyyAzzSn.xxx=the JDVC node number,yyyy=the input number in the PAM,zz=the DAA address on the Digital Audio Loop(Ol through 32),and n=the DAA speaker circuit(1 through 4). • General zones in the format Nxxx7yyy.xxx=FACP node number,yyy=General zone number(Z001-7.999),not Z000.Zone 0 is not valid For ALL CALL,ALL CALL MINUS, Qj CAUTION: Do not mix general zones with other source types for an ACS control Point. Program up to eight general zones OR up to eight other control point types.. PAGE EVAC,and PAGE ALERT modes,enter the node number of the DVC where the source is connected.These modes are used in conjunction with ENABLE PAGING mode. ACS LED Designations The LEDs on an ACM-16AT or ACM-24AT each have a user defined meaning,depending on how the JNCA-2 is programmed. For each point programmed in JNCA-2,the annunciator has two lights. The colors of these lights may vary depending on the model of the annunciator. On the ACM-24AT,the colors of the lights may be dynamically reprogrammed. We will use the designation`state' for the top light,and`status' for the bottom light. Program each point in one of the following ways: 1. ACKNOWLEDGE • The state light is on if there are any ftre alarms in the system. • The status light is on if there are any troubles in the system. • Other types of events are not annunciated at the ACS board level. JNCA-2 Manual— P/N 52570:C 8/6/2007 �5 Programming Punel Program Menu • Pressing the button is analogous to pressing the`ACKNOWLEDGE' soft key of the JNCA- 2,i.e.either one fire alarm will be acknowledged,or troubles and so forth will be block acknowledged. The lights will continue to blink until all conesponding events are acknowledged. 2. SICNAL SILENCE-There are two cases:the node number may be 0(all mapped nodes)or the node number may be a specific node. a. All Mapped Nodes-This reflects the silence status as shown on the.►I��CA-2 silence light. • Neither light is ever on. • Pressing the button attempts to silence all mapped nodes. b. Specific Node-This reflects the silence status of a single node. • Neither light is ever on. • Pressing the button attempts to silence the single node. 3. SYSTEM RESET-There are two cases:the node number may be 0(all mapped nodes)or the node number may be a specific node. a. All Mapped Nodes • Neither light is ever on. • Pressing the button attempts to reset all mapped nodes. b. Specific Node • Neither light is ever on. • Pressing the button attempts to reset the single node. 4. DRILL-There are two cases:the node number may be 0(all mapped nodes)or the node number may be a specific node. a. All Mapped Nodes • The state light is on if any mapped node has entered the drili state. • The status light is never on. • Pressing the button attempts to drill all mapped nodes. b. Specific Node • The state light is on if the node has entered the drill state. • The status light is never on. • Pressing the button attempts to drill the single node. 5. DISABLE • The State light is on if the corresponding point or zone is active. • The status light is on if the corresponding point or zone is either disabled or in trouble. Note that for most panels,the state light will not be on when the point is disabled(however,this can vary in different panels). • Pressing the button will modify the state of the point or zone as follows: -If the point is enabled,pressing the button will disable it. -If the point is disabled,pressing the button will enable it. 6. MONITOR • The State light is on if the corresponding point or zone is active. • The status light is on if the corresponding point or zone is in trouble or disabled. • Pressing the button has no effect. 7. CONTROL • The State light is on if any of the corresponding points or zones are active. � 86 J1VCA-2!14anual -� PM�2570:C 8/6/2007 Pane!Program Menu Programming • The status light is on if any of the corresponding points or zones are in trouble or disabled. The light will also be on if any of the points or zones in the group fail to activate. • Pressing the button will modify the state of the point or zone as follows: -If the point or zone is currently active,pressing the button will deactivate it -If the point or zone is currently inactive,pressing the button will activate it � NOTE: Attempts to change the state of a point or zone in this manner may be overridden by some system settings,such as a panel auto-silencing an output after a certain amount of time,or CBE equations based on events at another network node. 8. ALL CALL-The node number is a specific node: • The status light is on if the node has entered the all call state. • [f Node 0 is selected,the status light is on if any of the nodes are active. 9. ALL CALL MINUS,PAGE EVAC,PAGE ALERT • The status light is on when the program function is active. • The state light is on if the point is in trouble. 10. TELEPHONE • Both lights will flash if a telephone has just been placed in the jack. Otherwise,the State light is on if the corresponding point or zone is active. • The status light is on if the corresponding point or zone is in trouble or disab(ed. • Pressing the button wiil activate or deactivate the telephone circuit. 11. SHADOW • Lights on the ACS points will shadow(mimic)the lights on the mapped ACS point,except any flashing sequence may be different. 12. PAGE • Intended for JDVC,not LED annunciators;the state and status light are not applicable. 5.5.7 Supervision The Supervision screen allows you to make supervision settings for various ancillary devices.The EIA-232 and E[A-485 ports are unsupervised,but a programmed JNCA-2 will detect loss of communication with the device(s)on these circuits. • MAIN PS NODE: -To enable supervision of the JNCA-2's main power supply,enter the node number where the power supply is located.If the JNCA-2.is powered by its own power supply,the node number will be the same as the JNCA-2.node numbec (f power supply supervision is not desired,enter 000. Default=000. • PRINTER:-Press to scroll through the types of printer supervision: N 0 N E, 4� �0 L U M N, 4 0 COLUMNSUPERVISED, 8000LUMN, 8000LUMNSUPERVISED, 40GRAPHIC, 80 GRAPHIC, 80 GRAPHIC SUPERVISED.TheprinterwillnotbeactiveifNONEisselected.lf a S U P E R V I S E D selection is made,the printer will be supervised.Default= N 0 N E. • AUXILIARY TROUBLE REPORTING: -Press to toggle between YES and N0.Choose Y E S if a trouble bus cable has been attached at J5.Default: N 0 � • TAMPER INPUT:-Selections are YES, N0,and AKS-1. Default=N0. Y E S/N 0 reports(Y E S)or does not report(N 0)a tamper situation at the panel cabinet door (as determined by an STS-1 tamper switch.Section 3.16,`'Security Tamper Switch" provides installation information. A K S-1 should be selected when using an AKS-1 key switch connected to the panel cabinet door(which allows the oeprator to use Signal Silence, Reset, Drill and Acknowledge functions when a key turns the lock to"Enable).Section 3.15 provides installation instructions. ,INCA-2 Manual— P/N 52570:C 8/6/2007 g� Programming Punel Program Menu Main menu y Program/alter status menu �-�+Panel program menu 4 Supervision SUPERVISION �� MAIN PS NODE � Il,Il�_ �; ' PRINTER : fl�-COLUMN . n� C � . ��i u; nl AUXILIARY TROUBLE REPORITING :�_ ACCEPT �', �—i ��—i i i TAMPER INPUT : p1Q BACK ��, �: Figure 5.33 Panel Program Menu: Supervision 5.5.8 MORE Menu Pressing"MORE"at the Panel Program Menu will bring up the Event Logging screen. Main menu �Program/alter status menu �-+Panel Program menu �More EVENT LOGGING �I� NON-FIRE ACTIVATION = _�Q �; 'Oj OUTPUT ACTIVATION = �LQ �; I�1 Ii�! ;o C: _ , � ;�n: �: Figure 5.34 Panel Program Menu: More Press the appropriate soft key to toggle between YES(log the event activation)and NO(do not log the event activation. � gg JNCA-2 Manunl - P/N 52570:C 8/6l2007 Point P�rogram Menu Programming 5.6 Point Program Menu The point program menu allows the programmer to change the volume setting on any networked JDVC or DAA.The setting will affect the analog output circuits on the DVC,the speaker output circuits on the DAA,as well as auxiliary inputs A and B on the JDVC. Main menu 4 Program/alter status menu �-►Point Program Menu �+Point Program This screen displays P 0 I N T P R 0 G R A M M E N U amplifier point 00, �� (�I, which will program i' ��--' the volume settings through the JDVC to ; p 0 I N T S E L E C T �' allaudiooutputson� Np7gAA00 ( AMPLIFIER ) ��- its node. A cursor provides �I the means to type � !-JJ in a single amplifier pointifdesired. i i NEXT POINT ACCEPT �; Press to scroll to thenextor PREVIOUS POINT BACK previous amplifier� `I—l' point. Figure 5.35 Point Program Menu Press ACCEPT when the desired point is displayed.The Audio Volume Control screen will appear. AUDIO VOLUME CONTROL � POINT � N078pA00 �—!;; l�l MASTEft VOLUME =� �� . II� AUXILIARY VOLUME �],� �( '. l� �--' ACCEPT ( � , U r _ �, BACK �', �. Figure 5.36 Audio Volume Control M A S T E R V 0 L U M E: -This field can set the volume for all audio outputs at the JDVC node.When the audio amplifier point is set to 0�,as it is in Figures 5.35 and 536,the setting affects all audio outputs on the JDVC node(this includes aLl outpuCs on the JDVC and all its DAAs). When a specific DAA point is entered at the point program menu(for example,N 0 7 8 A A�)the M A S T E R VOLUME setting will apply to the audio outputs at that DAA(the DAA with its address set to 01). Set this field to any volume setting from 0 (of�to 15 (high). Default: 15 A U X I L I A R Y V 0 L U M E: -This field sets the volume for JDVC inputs AUXA(background music from various sources or a telephone paging source)and AUXB(AMG-1 input).The field does not appear if a specific DAA address has been entered.The DAAs have onboard volume control for AUXA and AUXB inputs.Set this field to any volume setting from 0(of�to 15(high).Default: 15• � A C C E P T -Press to program the displayed volume. JNCA-2 Rlanuul— P/N 52570:C 8/6/2007 89 Programming Delete Programming 5.7 Delete Programming The following menu aflows complete or partial clearing of programming. Main menu �Program/alter status menu 4 Delete Programming DELETE PROGRAMMING ��I I ;� C'; - ---. i�l C�EAR : PANEL CLEAR ALL PROGRAMMING ! l� —� � CLEAR ACS �:! �� L--1 �,—i ACCEPT �� I� C'; I�—� B A C K �Ji I� Figure 5.37 Delete Programming C L E A R A L L P R 0 G R A M M I N G - Press to remove all panel and ACS programming information. Pressing this key removes everything except passwords.A conftrmation screen will display asking the user to confirm the deletion command. Pressing this key causes a reboot. i L E A R: P A N E L -Press to remove al l programmed panel setting information from control panel memory.This does not remove ACS programming. A confirmation screen will display asking the user to confirm the deletion command.Pressing this key causes a reboot. C L E A R A C S-Press to remove all ACS programming from panel memory.A confirmation screen will display asking the user to confirm the deletion command. Pressing this key causes a reboot. � � 90 JNC,4-2 Manual— P/N 52�70:C 8/6/2007 Appendix A: Power Supply Calculations Primary,Non-Fire Alarm Primary,Fire Alarm Current Secondary,Fire Alarm Current(Amps) (Amps) Curre�t(Amps) x[current x[current x[current Category Qty draw]= Total Qty draw]= Total Qty draw]= Total JNCA-2-backlight ON [ ] x[0.400]_ [ ] x[0.400]_ [ ] x[0.400]_ JNCA-2-backlight OFF [ ] x[0.200]_ [ ] x[0.200]_ [ ] x[0.200]_ NCM-W/F [ ] x[0.110]= [ ] x[0.110]= [ ] x[0.110]= RPT-W,RPT-WF,RPT-F [ ] x[0.017]= [ j x[0.017]= [ ] x[0.017]= RPT-485W [ ] x[0.047]_ [ j x[0.047]_ [ ] x[0.047]_ RPT-485WF [ ] x[0.049]_ [ ] x[0.049]_ [ ] x[0.049]_ ACM-24AT,ACM-48A [ ] x[0.016 j= [ ] x[0.070]_ [ ] x[0.016]_ AEM-24AT,AEM-48A ( ] x[0.002]_ [ j x[0.056]_ [ ] x[0.002]_ ACM-16AT,ACM-32A [ ] x[0.040)_ [ J x[0.056)_ [ j x[0.040]_ AEM-16AT,AEM-32A [ ] x[0.002 ]_ [ ] x[0.018 ]_ [ ] x[0.002 ]_ ACM-8R(refer to Doc.15342) [ ] x[ ]_ [ ] x[ ]_ [ ] x[ ]_ LDM Series(refer to Doc.15885) [ ] x( ]_ [ ] x[ ]_ [ ] x[ ]_ SCS-8(refer to Doc. 15712) [ ] x[ ]_ [ ] x[ ]_ [ ] x[ ]_ Number of Annunciator LEDs illuminated during non-fire alarm conditions ACM-16AT,ACM-32A [ ] x[0.016 j= [ ] INCLUDED [ ] x[0.016 J= AEM-16AT,AEM-32A [ ] x[0.016 ]_ [ ] ABOVE [ ] x[0.016 ]_ UDACT [ j x[0.100 ]_ [ ] x[0.100 ]_ [ ] x[0.100 ]_ Sum each column for totals Primary,non-alarm Primary,alarm total: Secondary,non- total: alarm total: � J1VCA-2 Manual P/N 52570:C 8/6/2007 91 I Appendix B: Menu Hierarchy � Read Status(see page 49) Alter Status(see page 53) • Disable/Enable • Detector Sensitivity • Clear Verify Counts • Clear History • Walk Test • Change Time/Date • ControlOn/Off • Back Node Program ...for specified remote node(see page 71) • Edit point labels • Edit node labels • Back Program/Alter Status ...for specified ACS point on local JNCA-2(see page 71) (see page 53) • ACS label • Back JNCA-2 Program(see page 60) • Network Parameters • Nelwork Mapping • JNCA-2 Settings • Reminder Menu • JNCA-2 Timers • Event Monitoring • LCD Display • ACS Programming • Supervision • Password Change • Point Program • Back Main Menu More Information (see page 40) Program/Alter Status Event Counts Display Signal Silence (s�page 41) System Reset Main Menu Multiple Event List First Event (see page 49) Main Menu Local History(see page 44) • All Events • Alarms Only • Troubles Only • Supervisory Only History Display • Security/Other (see page 44) • TimelDate Interval • Point Range • Back Node History(see page 48) • All events • Alarms only JNCA-2 Programming Reports(see page 54) • Network Parameters • Network Mapping • JNCA-2 Settings • JNCA-2 Timers Printer Functions • Event Monitoring (Print reports) • LCD Display (see page 53) • ACS Programming • ACS Point Programming • Supervision • Back Active Points(see page 56) Walk Test(see page 68) 92 JNCA-2 Mnnua!— P/N 52570:C 8/6/2007 Appendix C: Wire Requirements Distance Circuit Type Circuit Function Wire Requirements (ft/m) Typical Wire Type EIA-485 Connects to ACS Twisted-shielded pair with a 6,000/1,829 16 AWG(1.30 mm ) (power limited) modules,or TM-4 characteristic impedance of (max)� (e.g.Belden 9860) Transmitter 120 ohms 18 AWG(0.75 mmz)minimum EIA-232 Connects to Printers,or Twisted-shielded pair. 50/15.24(without 16 AWG(1.30 mm ) (power limited) PC 18 AWG(0.75 mm2)minimum modem) (e.g.Belden 9860) Table C.1 Wire Requirements *In ACS mode,the distance is the total length of the EIA-485 cable from the JNCA-2 to the last device on the circuit. � � JNCA-Z Manua!— P/N�2570:C 8/6/200'7 93 Appendix D: Displa� and Control Center (DCC) A Display and Control Center(DCC)is a display locarion which can respond to events occurring at other participating locations.While there may be multiple Display and Control Centers on a network,an individual location can only accept the commands of one DCC at a time.The user's actions at any participating station,panel,or remote display determine which location will be the DCC. When the JNCA-2 is not the Display and Control Center,pressing Signal Silence,System Reset, Acknowledge or Drill will automatically send a permission request to the current DCC.The DCC must release control of the node to the requesting JNCA-2 before the key will be processed. If no DCC already exists,the key is processed and the acknowledging panel or station assumes control. Unless specifically denied authorization,the JNCA-2 will assert control over any JNCA-2,IFC2- 640,IFC-320, IFC2-3030, IFC-3030 and IFW node that is mapped to it. When it assumes control, the CONTROLS ACTIVE LED on the keypad will illuminate. Pressing an ALL CALL,PAGE ACTIVE EVAC AREAS,PAGE ACTNE ALERT AREAS,PAGE INACTIVE AREAS or ENABLE TELEPHONE PAGE button on a DVGKD that has been programmed to participate in DCC with the JNCA-2,will cause permission to be requested ACS points programmed on an annunciator with a type of 96DCC will also cause permission to be requested. Partial control is also possible,where one or more of the nodes denies authorization and one or more nodes allows it to assert control. DCC participation is set on the JNCA-2 Settings screen under the JNCA-2 Programming menu(see "Panel Settings"on page 76). QCAUTION: On systems utilizing the DCC function, all locations that can participate must be enabled. QCAUTION: When re-booting a JNCA-2 that is participating in DCC,wait until system is completely initialized before sending DCC commands to a remote node. � 94 JNCA-2 Manual-� P/N�2570:C 8/6/2007 Appendix E: Regional Settings The panci pr-ugramming R E�I O N A L S E T T I N G S choices,available through the Panel Settings(2) screen(refer to page 78)are described below.The R E 6I0 N A L S E T T I N G S screen(Refer to Figure E.1)allows scrolling through the available choices by pressing the soft key.Choices are CH[CAGO,S[NGAPORE, AUSTRALIA or Default(no special regional settings). Main menu �-+Program/alter status menu �Panel Program menu �+Panel settings �More LOCAL SETTINGS RE6IONAL SETTINGS : SINGAPORE II �; I �C� I l� �; �. O! �_�' �� I��; �i� �� , Figure E.1 Regional Settings Screen E.1 Singapore The REGIONAL SETTING choice of SINGAPORE: • Does not turn ON the System Trouble LED or the System Trouble relay for disabled points. • Does not turn ON the System Trouble LED,the System Trouble relay,or the piezo when Drill is initiated. • Turns ON keypad LEDs,PCB LEDs,and all ACM-24/48 LEDs during Lamp Test. • Requires the user to initiate the start of the application when the panel boots/reboots.The CPU Failure LED will be ON until the user initiates startup.(Refer to Figure E.2.) • Will sound the piezo when local control is set to OFF. � TROUBLE LOADING • • NO SERVICE �, LAKEVIEW GENERAL HOSPITAL I`�� N083 IUj -- BOOT�OADER � �—',I i`=�I �; �� 11 = 58 = 45A WED AUG 23, 2006 �� _l IC; CPU HAS REBOOTED !��:! I� �(�� CONTINUE ABORT �! ' l� � �__._, � � �—� User should select CONTINUE User should select ABORT to to initiate applications. abort applications. Figure E.2 Singapore Application Initiation JNCA-2 Manual— P/N 52570:C 8/6J2007 95 Regional Settings Chicngo E.2 Chicago The R E G I 0 N A L S E T T I N G choice of C H I C A G 0 disallows local dri 11 or signal silence. • The DRILL and SIGNAL SILENCE keys at the panel will not function. • Annunciator Control Modules and SLC modules given a drill or signal silence Mode or Type Code will not ailow Local drill or signal silence initiation. • Events must be acknowledged prior to system reset. E.3 Australia The R E G I 0 N A L S E T T I N G choice of A U S T R A L I A al lows support of the Australian Smoke Control Module,SCS-8AU. � � 96 JNCA-2 Manual— P/N 52�70:C 8/6/2007 Notes � � � JNCA-2 Manual- P/N�2570:C 8/6/2007 97 Appendix F: UL 8th Edition Panel Applications The JNCA-2 is compatible with the FACPs in this appendix that have software as described in Table F.1. Display differences and programming requirements are noted in each section. FACP Compatible with JNCA-2 at Software Level: IFC-200 Rev.3.02 or greater IFC-400 Rev.3.65 or greater IFC-2020,IFC-1010 SIB,DIA,CPU Rev.4.0 or greater Table F.1 Software Compatibility Use of the JNCA-2 with these FACPs is subject to AHJ approval. Refer to"UL 864 Ninth Edition Compliance"on page 8. F.1 Conversions Common to UL 8th Edition Panels Device Trouble Types Device trouble types for the lFC-200, [FC-400 and IFG1010/2020 FACPs will be displayed on the JNCA-2 as follows: FACP Device Trouble JNCA-2 Displays: Invalid Reply No Response Low Chamber Value<20%of alarm level Low Threshold Maintenance required>80%of alarm level Maintenance Alert Sensitivity High Maintenance Alert Sensitivity Low Maintenance Alert Open Circuit Open Circuit Short Circuit Short Circuit Point Trouble General Trouble Detector Failed Chamber Test Detector Failed Test Drift Compensation Error Maintenance Alert Verification Count Overflow Verify Count Over 20 Security Tamper Security Tamper Security Invalid Reply No Response Table F.2 JNCA-2 Device Trouble Display Detector Sensitivity JNCA-2 screens that display detector sensitivity translate the IFC-200, 1FG400 and[FC- 1010/2020 FACP levels as follows: FACP Sensitivity Level JNCA-2 Displays Sensitivity Level: Low Sensitivity 9 Medium Sensitivity 5 High Sensitivity 1 Table F.3 JNCA-2 Detector Sensitivity Display � 98 JNCA-2 Manual— P/N 52570:C 8/6/2007 IFC-10I0/2020 UL 8th Edition Panel Applications F.2 IFC-1010/2020 Device Point Types The device types for this panel will display according to the JNCA-2 in Table F.4. IFC-1010/2020 Device �NCA-2 Displays: IFC-1010/2020 Device �NCA-2 Displays: Point Type Point Type HEAT(ANALOG) HEAT TROUBLE GEN TROUBLE FIXED THER D HEAT(FIXED) TROUBLE FORC GEN TROUBLE MON NORM CLD NC MONITOR FIXED PHOT D SMOKE(PHOTO) SPRNKLR MNTR SPRINKLER SYS PAGE TELE PAGE FORM C RELAY RELAY MON PULL STA PULL STATION POWER(CONV) CONTROL MONITOR PAGE TELE PAGE TRBLES PEND TROUBLE PEND ION DUCT DET SMOKE(DUCT i) TRBL MONITOR TROUBLE MON NON ALARM NON FIRE CMX CONTROL CONTROL FORMC MANUAL RELAY CMX FORM C FORM C RESET SYSTEM MONTR SYS MONITOR NON ALM MON NON FIRE DACT CONNECT GEN TROUBLE GN ALARM EVC GEN ALARM SPRVSRY MNTR TRACK SUPERV GN ALARM GEN ALARM SMOKE ION HP SMOKE(DUCT I) GN ALARM FORC GEN ALARM SMOKE ION LP SMOKE(DUCT I) GN WATER FLW GEN ALARM SMOKE(COMBO) SMOKE(MULTI) GN TRBL FORC GEN TROUBLE SMOKE(PHON) SMOKE(PHOTO) GN WAT FORC GEN ALARM SMOKE(IONV) SMOKE(ION) GN SUPR FORC GEN SUPERVIS Table F.4 JNCA-2 Display for IFC-1010/2020 Device Point Types Annunciator Point Types The annunciator types for this panel will display according to the JNCA-2 Column in Table F.�. QCAUTION: When using the JNCA-2 to annunciate points on the IFC-1010/2020 over the network,enable state reporting in the IFC-1010/2020 panel for control module points and"NONA"NOA"module points.Othervvise,any changes in the state of these points on the FACP will not be annunciated over the network to annunciator points mapped to the JNCA-2. 1.Choose option"1=PSYS"from the FACP programming menu for partial system programming. 2.Choose option"6=EXTEQ". 3.Answer YES to the following questions: •DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE THE CONTROL MODULE STATE REPORTING? •DO YOU WANT TO REPORT CONTROL MODULE STATE CHANGES? •DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE THE"NONA'%"NOA"MDULE STATE REPORTING? •DO YOU WANT TO REPORT"NONA'T'NOA"MODULE STATE CHANGES? OR,if completely programming the panel: 1.Choose option"2-FSYS". 2.Answer YES to the following questions: •DO YOU WANT TO REPORT CONTROL MODULE STATE CHANGES? •DO YOU WANT TO REPORT"NONA'%NOA"MODULE STATE CHANGES? IFC-1010/2020 �NCA-2 Displays: IFC-101012020 �NCA-2 Displays: Annunciator Point Type Annunciator Point Type AMAN MANUAL AMON MONITOR AAST ACKNOWLEDGE AINP MONITOR ASGS SILENCE ACON CONTROI Table F.5 JNCA-2 Display for IFC-1010l2020 Annunciator Point Types JNCA-2 Munual-- P/N 52S70:C 8/6/2007 y9 UL 8th Edition Panel Applications lFG1010/2020 IFC-1010/2020 �NCA-2 Displays: IFC-1010/2020 �NCA-2 Displays: Annunciator Point Type Annunciator Point Type ARES RESET ATEL TELEPHONE ALMP NONE ASUP MONITOR AZON MONITOR AFCM CONTROL ADET MONITOR Table F.5 JNCA-2 Display for IFC-1010/2020 Annunciator Point Types � � � 100 JNCA-Z Manual— P/N 52570:C 8/6/2007 IFC-400 UL 8th Edition Panel Applications F.3 IFC-400 Device Point Types The device types for this panel will display on the JNCA-2 as follows: IFC-400 Device Point �NCA-2 Displays: Type HEAT(ANALOG) HEAT MULTISENSOR SMOKE(MULTI) SUPERVISORY TRACK SUPERV SILENCE SIL SWITCH SYSTEM RESET RESET SWITCH EVACUATE EVACUATE SW BURGLAR ALA SECURITY L COMB.MONITOR SMOKE(MULTI) Table F.6 JNCA-2 Display for IFC-400 Device Point Types System Troubles There is one FACP System Trouble that displays differently at the JNCA-2.. IFC-400 System Troubie JNCA-2 Displays: PROG.MODE ENTERED PROG MODE ACTIVATED Table F.7 JNCA-2 Display for IFC-400 System Trouble Read Status Read Status of Special Function Zone 7 on the IFC-400 is not supported. Disable/Enable Disable/Enable of zones on an IFC-400 is not supported. Control ON/OFF Control ON/OFF on the IFC-400 is not supported. Shadow Points Shadow points are not supported on an IFC-400. MONITOR and CONTROL ACS points can not look at output modules,bell circuits or panel circuits on an IFC-400. Auto-Acknowledge A Network Adaptor Module(NAM)connected to an IFC-400 wiLl auto-acknowledge an event on the panel.The panel then shows the event as acknowledged,and this event can not be acknowledged again at the panel since it has already been acknowledged locally.The JNCA-2 or another display node must be used for acknowledgement. I � � JNCA-2 Manual— P/N 52570:C 8/6/2007 101 UL 8th Edition Panel Applications lFC-200 F.4 I FC-200 Device Point Types The device types for this panel will display on the JNCA-2 as follows: IFC-200 Device Point Displayed at JNCA-2 Type as Device Point Type: HEAT(ANALOG) HEAT BURGLAR ALA SECURITY L SUPERVISORY TRACK SUPERV SILENCE SIL SWITCH SYSTEM RESET RESET SWITCH EVACUATE EVACUATE SW Table F.8 JNCA-2 Display for IFC-200 Device Point Types System Troubles There are tw�o FACP System Troubles that display differently at the JNCA-2. IFC-200 Displayed at JNCA-2 as: System Troubies NO DEVICES INSTALLED NO DEV.INST ON L1 PROG.MODE ENTERED PROG MODE ACTIVATED Table F.9 JNCA-2 Display for IFC-200 System Troubles Read Status Read Status is not supported on the IFC-200. Disable/Enable DisableiEnable on an IFC-200 is not supported. Control ON/OFF Control ON/OFF on the IFC-200 is not supported. Shadow Points Shadow points are not supported on an IFC-200. MONITOR ACS points can not look at output modules,bell circuits or panel circuits on an IFC- 200. Auto-Acknowledge A Network Adaptor Module(NAM)connected to an[FG200 will auto-acknowledge an event on the paneL The panel then shows the event as acknowledged,and this event can not be acknowledged again at the panel since it has already been acknowledged locally.The JNCA-2 or another display node must be used for acknowledgement. ,� l02 .lNCA-2 Manua!— P/N�2570:C 8/6/2047 Index Numerics B 38134 screw 23, 26 backboxes 42040 standoff 25 mounting 21 42076 standoff 23 backlight 80 banner graphic see graphic screen A Battery Battery calculations 91 Abbreviations battery detector cooperation 52 memory-backup battery 24 AC fail delay 79 Battery Levels 38 AC power,see your power supply manual 30 Block aclaiowledge 58 Acknowledge BMP-1 23 Acknowledging an event 58 ACS LED 85 C Acknowledge soft key 42 Acknowledged Event-Sample 59 cabinets 23 ACM-8R 32 CAUTION ACS Connections 36 Do not mix general zones with other source ACS LED designations types..... 85 Acknowledge 85 On systems utilizing the DCC function,all All Call 87 locations that can participate must ALL CALL MINUS 87 e enabled. 94 Control 86 Read all bundled documentation..... 8 Disable 86 The battery used in this device may present Drill 86 a risk of fire or chemical burn..... Monitor 86 25 Page 87 Unless you are familiar with the placement PAGE ALERT 87 of components.... 21 PAGE EVAC 87 When re-booting a network annunciator Reset 86 that is participating in DCC, wait Shadow 87 untiL.. 94 Silence 86 While checking AC power,make sure bat- Telephone 87 teries are not connected. 30 ACS LEDs 85-87 CBE and CCBE 68 ACS mapping modes 82 Change Time/Date 69 ACS point prob amming 82 channel A&channel B threshold 74 ACS point shadowing 87 chassis ACS point types 49 CHS-M3 23 ACS Programming 80-87 Clear history 67 ACS pro�ammuig report see Printer Report 56 Clear verify counters 66 Active points report see Printer Report 56 clearing latched alarms 43 Added NCA/640-2-KIT name 27 Control On/Off(Controlling a point on a remote AKS-1 B see Key switch node) 70 alarm relays see relays 27 Controt-By-Event (CBE) and Cooperative-Con- ALL CALL trol-By-Event(CCBE)68 Node 0 83 conesponding soft key 38 Alphanumeric keyboard,function of 37 cursor 38 Alter Status Menu Options 63-71 custom message,see Node label AMG Type Progamming 81 Arrow Keys,about 38 p Audio Volume Control 89 auto pro�am 76 DAA Digital Audio Amplifier 50, 89 auto silence 79 DAA SPEAKER CKT 50 JNCA-2 Manua! PlN 52�70:C 8/6l2007 l03 E-N Index DC also see power 30 checklist 20 DCC 78, 94 preparation 20 DCC,see Display and Control Center insulator for memory-backup battery 24 default passwords 60 Invalid Point enor message 50 Detector cooperation 52 Invalid point error message 41, 65 Detector sensitivity 65 IP DOWNLOAD 74 Device types 49 Diagnostic indicators 38 J Display&Control Center 78 Display address 76 J 1.see Security tamper switch Display and Control Center 37, 94 J8•see Key switch DRILL HOLD 2 SEC.fixed function key 38 1AKS-16 see Key switch DVC Digital Voice Command 49, 89 JNCA-2 Board Layout 16 E K Edit Node Label(Remote node) 73 Keltron printer, see printers 34 Edit Point Labefs 72 Key switch 35 electrical connections 29 supervision 87 Error message keypad 37 Invalid Point 50 Invalid point 41, 65 L Node not mapped 41 LAMP TEST key,about 38 Node off-line 41 language 80 Point does not exist 64 LCD Event Monitoring report see Printer Report 56 Configuring LCD appearance and back- Event ordering 77 light 80 Events display 39 Event Counts screen 41-43 LCD display menu option 80 Event handling 58 LCD display report see Printer Report 56 Event ordering 77 LEDs Event types�7 Annunciator LED functions 85-87 LED indicator descriptions 38 F LOCAL CONTROL 76 FIRE ALARM SCROLL/DISPLAY fixed funo- Local history 44-48 tion key 38 logic equation 68 Firmware version numbers,to view 38 Fixed Function Keys,functions of 37 M format 37 main menu Formatting time/date 69 Main menu 39, 40-57 Form-C relays see relays 27 Main Menu soft key 43 mapped node 86 G mapping,ACS 82 graphic screen 39 Master Password 60 Menu hierarchy 92 H More Information soft key 42 mounting History select screen 44 backboxes and doors 21 Local history 44-48 Multiple Event List 43 Node history 48-49 N � NCM-W/F [FC2-3030 mounting 28 Read status 53 network mapping 75 [nputs,reading status 51 Network Mapping report see Printer Re- installation port 55 104 JNCA-1 Manual— P/N 5257G:C 8/6/2007 � [ndex �—S network parameters Printing configuration settings see also Network Parameters 74 Printer report 54 Network Parameters report see Printer re- Printers port 55 PRN Printer settings 34 networking 28 printers 32, 33,34 Node 0 priority 43, 58, 77 ALL CALL 83 Program Menu 74, 74-88 Node history 48-49 Program/Alter Status Node label soft key 42 Local NCA("All Systems Normai") 74 Program/Alter Status Menu 60-88 Remote node 73 Menu access 62 Node not mapped error message 41 Programming menu option 54 Node number 74 Node off-line error message 41 Q Node Program Menu 71-73 nonpower-limited circuits QWERTY keypad 37 UL wiring requirements 32 NOTI•FIRE•NETTM 13 R Read status 49-53 Q Regional Settings 95 OTHER EVENT SCROLL/DISPLAY fixed relays 27 function key 38 Reminder menu 77 output relays Remote node 73 see also Form-C relays 27 controlling a point 70 specitications 27 Reset soft key 43 output relays see relays 27 Ring-In 41 Outputs,reading status 51 S P screen navigation 17, 37, 40-57, 76, 81, 92 PAM Prioritized Audio Matix point 49 SCS devices 81 Panel Program Menu 74 Security 60 passwords security access levels 60, 63 security relays see relays 27 changing passwords 60-62 Security access 60 deactivating a password 61 SECURITY SCROLUDISPLAY fixed function factory default 60 key 38 PC connection 35 Security tamper switch 3� Point does not exist error message 64 selecting a field 17,37, 40, 76, 81 Point labels,editing 72 setting network node 74 Point range 44, 46 Settings Power NCA-2 settings report see Printer Report Connecting power supplies 29-30 55 Power supply calculations 91 settings power 29 settings program screen 76 AC power checklist 30 Shadowing ACS points 87 AC power connections also see your power Shunt Plug supply manual 30 J 1.see Security tamper switch DC power connections 30 .1g•see Key switch installation steps 29 SIGNAL SILENCE fixed function key 37 power-limited wiring requirements 32 Silence soft key 42 specifications 29 Smoke control 81 print screen Soft key 17,37 print screen 52 Soft Keys,functions of 38 Printer Special Function Keys 38 Printer Functions Menu �3-57 Status LEDs 38, 85-87 printer report 54-57 STS-1 see Security tamper switch JNCA-Z Manua[ P/N 52570:C 8/6/2007 105 T—Z Index Style-setting wiring style 74 while connecting electrical com- Supervision 56 ponents.... 29 key switch 87 Risk of irreparable equipment damage...20 Supervision menu 87 Several sources of power can be connected Supervision report see Printer Report 56 to the control paneL Before ser- Supervisory and Security contacts vicing, disconnect all sources of configuring as Alarm contacts 27 input power.... 29,31 supervisory relays see relays 27 wiring SUPERVISORY SCROLL/DISPLAY fixed nonpower-limited wiring requirements 32 function key 38 UL nonpower-limited wiring requirements System Normal message 74 32 System Reset if Silence Inhibit Timer is running 37 Z silencing active outputs 37 SYSTEM RESET fixed function key, Zone types 49 about 37 T Tamper switch see Security tamper switch Telephone Ring-In 41, 77 threshold,Channels A&B 74 time time synchronization 7� Time/date change 69 Time/date interval 44 Tim�:s report see Printer Report 5�, 56 trouble relays see relays 27 TROUBLE SCROLL/D[SPLAY fixed function key 38 Two Level Bypass 81 Types of events�7 U UL nonpower-limited wiring requirements 32 UL requirements 32 Unaclrnowledged Event-Sample 59 upload/download software 35 User Password 60 V vectored node, see mapped node 86 VeriFireT"'Tools 35 VERIFY COUNT 52 Verify counters 66 Volume Control,DAA and DVC 89 W Walk test 68-69 walk test report 57 WARNING Do not activate power at this time..... 21 [mproper installation,maintenance,or lack of routine testing...... 8 Remove all power sources to equipement 106 JNCA-2 Manual P/N 52�70:C 8i6/2007 � � i � JNCA-2 Manual— P/N 52570:C 8/6!2007 l07 i � J HNSON CONTR LS Controls Group www.johnsoncontrols.com 507 E. Michigan Street P.O. Box 423 Release C Milwaukee, WI 53201 Printed in U.S.A. � Voice Evacuation and Communication Equipment: Solaris Voice Evacuation Message JVDC Digital Voice Command DAA-50 Digital Audio Amplifier JCNA-2 Network Control Annunciator UDACT Universal Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter � jci-7045:b J DVC Series � ;� D�gital Vo�ce Command ,�t��'1C1�(�(1 ,,,�,��,� ��C��f�?�S * �_ � . __ . . ,.., General �,�� The JDVC is the heart of an integrated, full-featured Audio � Command Center. The JDVC Digital Voice Command com- bines the capabilities of a powerful digital audio processor, an �� - event-driven audio message generator,and a router. Designed � �` � �, for use with DAA series Digital Audio Amplifiers, each JDVC � supports a dedicated audio network with up to eight channels ''�'� of audio, five channels of firefighters' telephone, and control �,� � � and supervision for up to 32 DAA series amplifiers. Twisted- � pair wire, muiti-mode fiber, or single-mode fiber media options �-� , are supported. Larger audio systems incorporating hundreds F�'�� ' g of amplifiers can be created by networking additional JOVC units via NOTI•FIRE•NETr"' � �" ��„ The JDVC may be networked with IFC-640, IFC2-640, IFG `'x 3030, or IFC2-3030 panels via NOTI•FIRE•NET with a JNCA-2, or used in a stand-alone panel configuration with an IFC2-3030 or IFC2-640 Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP). When used as an Audio Command Center with Emergency Paging capability, the optional JDVC-KD Keypad Display is required. NOTE: Unless otherwise noted, the term JDVC' refers to the JDVC-FM,JDVC-EMF,and JDVC-EMSF models. JDVC Features Shown using CA-2 mounting option, CAB-C4, and ADDR-C4 door. • Listed to UL Standard 864,9th edition. • Programmable from NUP port using JVeriFireO Too/s with: level audio.Selectable AGC,user control of audio level,and -JDVC-EM:up to 32 minutes of standard quality or 4 min- audio supervision are supported. utes of high quality digital audio storage of user-selected/ • Associated JNCA-2 supports NOTI•FIRE•NET applica- created messages and tones. tions. -JDVC-EMF: EM features; supports multi-mode fiber-optic • Multiple audio command centers supported via media. NOTI•FIRE•NET. -JDVC-EMSF: EM features; supports single-mode fiber- . Distribution of one channel of standard-level paging audio optic media. on NOTI•FIRE•NET. • Up to 1000 audio sequences. • Three stand-alone, non network mode options: • Message prioritization. -IFC2-3030(NUP to NUP)digital and analog. • Equations support flexible programming for distribution of _IFC2-640(NUP to NUP)analog. messages. -IFC2-640 with JNCA-2 (NUP to NUP to NUP) digital and • Etectrically isolated digital audio ports for direct connection analog. with up to 32 DAA amplifiers. Style 4 or 7 configurations supported. • Push-to-talk relay. • DCC (Displey 8nd Con[rol Centef) Cepebilitie5 when u5ed ' Isolated alarm bus inpu[,to be used for backup activation of with optional JDVC-KD. alarm messages when normal digital communication is lost. • FireFighters'Telephone Riser. • Local paging microphone option. Installation Options • Remote microphone option. The JDVC provides flexible installation options based on two • Broad All-Call functionality when used with JDVC-KD chassis options: the CA-1 or the CA-2 (one-row or two-row (JDVGKeyboard Display):All Call,Page Active Evac Areas, audio chassis). Both these chassis mount into size"B","C",or Page Active Alert Areas, Page Inactive Areas. "D"CAB-4 Series cabinets. The CA-2 must be installed in the top two rows of the cabinet. The DPA-1 dress panel is used • Auxiliary input for 12 VP-P analog low-level audio sources. With chassis CA-1. The DPA-26 dress panel is required for Includes user audio level adjustment feature. the CA-2 chassis. • Auxilary input accepts external audio sources such as tele- phone paging or background msuic. Hi impedance input Specifications accepts 600 ohm, line level, 1.41 VRMS, or 1 Vp-p Iow • 24 VDC power (TB1): 24 VDC, 1.0 A, non-rese[table, power-limited by the source. Recommended wiring: 14 to 22 AWG (2.08 to 0.326 mmz)twisted-pair. • Digital audio ports, wire media, A and B (TB2, T63): Maximum distance per segment is 1900 feet(579.12 m) on jci-7045:b•4/2/08—Page 1 of 6 Belden 5320UJ (18 AWG, TP) FPL cable: 18 AWG (0.821 • MEA approved:file 232-06-E Vol. III. mmz) twisted-pair, foil-shielded, power-limited. Consult wir- • City of Chicago approved: High Rise, Class 1,Ciass 2. ing documentation provided in document P/N 52916ADD:C . City of Denver approved. Addendum to JDVC and DAA Manuals. • pS6 Corporation approved(Singapore). • Digital audio ports, single- and multi-mode fiber-optic RXA,TXA, RXB, and TXB (J100,J101,J102,and�ios): product Line Information ST�style, supervised. Mul[i-mode fiber-optic cab!e: 50/125 or 62.5125 micrometers. Single-mode fiber-optic cable: 9/ JDVGEM: Digital Voice Command, digital audio processor 125 microme[ers.Attenuation of cabling between two nodes with message storage for up to 32 minutes of standard quality (fiber-optic circuits are point-to-point) must not exceed the (4 minu[es at high quality)digital audio. following maximum attenuations:4.2 dB for multi-mode with JDVC-EMF: Digital Voice Command, digital audio processor 50/125 micrometer cable C� 850 nm. 8.0 dB for multi-mode with message storage for up to 32 minu[es of standard quality with 62.5/125 micrometer cable @ 850 nm. 5.0 dB for sin- (4 minutes at high quality) digital audio. Supports multi-mode gle-mode with 9/125 micrometer cable @ 1300 nm. fiber-optic ports, requires DAA-5025F, DAA-5070F, or DAA- • Auxiliary input A(AUX A,TB4): Signal strength from low- 7525F. level analog audio input: 1 VRnns maximum. Optional super- JDVC-EMSF: Digital Voice Command, digital audio processor vision is selectable through programming. Recommended W�th message storage for up to 32 minutes of standard quality wiring: 18 to 22 AWG (0.821 to 0.326 mmz) twisted-pair. �4 minutes at high quality) digital audio. Supports single-mode Auxiliary input must be in the same room as the JDVC. fiber-optic ports, requires DAA-5025SF, DAA-5070SF, or DAA- • Remote microphone interface(TB9): Recommended wir- 7525SF. ing: 14 to 22 AWG (2.08 ro 0.326 mmz)twisted-pair.Power- �DVGKD: Keypad for local annunciation and controls; status limited. Maximum distance between remote microphone LEDs and 24 user-programmable buttons. and DVC: 1000 feet(300 m). JDVC-AO: Optional JDVC Analog Output board provides four • Push-to-talk interface (TB10): Dry contact. Recom- analog output circuits for use with AA or XPIQ Series amplifi- mended wiring: 14 to 22 AWG (2.08 to 0.326 mmz)twisted- ers. Four-channel operation supported. Pai� CA-1:Chassis,occupies one tier of a CAB-4 Series enclosure. • Alarm bus (TB12): Power-limited by source. Recom- The left side accommodates one JDVC and a JDVC-KD mended wiring: 14 to 22 AWG (2.08[0 0.326 mmz)[wisted- �°Ptional); and the right side houses a CMIC-1 microphone and its well(optional). pair. CMIC-1: Optional microphone and microphone well assembly • FFT riser(TB13):Power-limited output.Class A(�tyle Z)or used with the CA-1 chassis. Class B (Style Y) operation. Style Y two-wire connections CA-2:Chassis assembly,occupies two tiers of a CAB-4 Series require a 3.9K ohm, 1/2 watt resistor (P/N K-3.9K). Maxi- enclosure.The left side accommodates one JDVC mounted on mum wiring resistance (including individual telephone zone a half-chassis and one IFC2-3030 or JNCA-2 mounted on a [o last handset)permitted is 50 ohms, 10,000 feet(3048 m) half-chassis. The right side houses a microphone/handset maximum wiring dis[ance at 12 AWG (3.31 mmz) to last Well. The CA-2 assembly includes a microphone. DPA-2B handset. dress plate is required(below).JADDR Series doors with two- • Auxiliary input B (AUX B, TB14): Signal strength from tier visibility are available for use with the CA-2 configuration: low-level analog audio input: 12 VP-P nominal, 15 VP-P maxi- JADDR-64,JADDR-C4,JADDR-D4 (below). mum. Optional supervision is selected through program- DPA-2B:Dress plate required for CA-2 chassis assembly. ming. Recommended wiring: 14 to 22 AWG (2.08 to o.326 TELH-1: Firefighter's Telephone Handset for use with the mmz)twisted-pair. JDVC when mounted in the CA-2 chassis.Order separa[ely. • Optional DVC-AO analog audio output circuits (TBS, �ADDR-B4:Two-tier-sized door designed for use with the CA- TB6, TB7, and TB8): Supervised, power-limited outputs. 2 chassis configuration. JADDR Series doors are similar to Signal strength: +12 V nominal, +15 V maximum. Recom- CAB-4 Series"DR"doors, but a clear window space exposes mended wiring: 18 AWG (0.821 mmz) maximum, twisted- the top two tiers of the CAB-4 enclosure. Use an SBB-B4 pair. Maximum impedance:66 ohms. backbox with the JADDR-B4 (see data sheet JCI-6857). JADDR-C4: Three-tier-sized door designed for use with the Standards and Codes CA-2 chassis configuration.JADDR Series doors are similar to The Digital Voice Command , JDVC-EM, JDVC-EMF, and CAB-4 Series"DR"doors, but a clear window space exposes the top two tiers of the CAB-4 enclosure. Use an SBB-C4 JDVC-EMSF comply with the following standards: backbox with the JADDR-C4 (see data sheet JCI-6857). • NFPA 72 2002 National Fire Alarm Code. JADDR-D4: Four-tier-sized door designed for use with the • Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 864,9th edition. CA-2 chassis configuration.JADDR Series doors are similar to • Underwriters Laboratories of Canada (ULC) ULGS527-99 CAB-4 Series"DR"doors, but a clear window space exposes Standard of Control Units for Fire Alarm Systems. the top two tiers of the CAB-4 enclosure. Use an SBB-D4 backbox with the JADDR-D4(see data sheet JCI-6857). Listings and Approvals DPA-1: Dress panel, can be used with the CA-1 chassis when configured with a JDVC,JDVGKD, and CMIC-1. The listings and approvals below apply to the JDVC-EM, DPA-1A4: Dress panel, used with the CA-1 chassis when the JDVGEMF, and JDVGEMSF Digital Voice Command. �n CMIG1 is not used. Provides mounting options on right two some cases, certain modules may not be listed by certain bays for two ACS annunciators, or for blank plates. approval agencies, or listing may be in process. Consult fac- tory for latest listing status. • UL Listed:file S1570. • ULC Listed:file S1570. • FM Approved. • CSFM approved:file 7170-0554:154,file 7170-0554:150. Page 2 of 6—jci-7045:b•4/2/08 Stand-Alone IFC2-3030 with JDVC � ` �� , �� h��. ,JG�'tJ�-�SE.11� V �J�il� '� _ �. ... .. «. ,t �Q�� h = AUX ln�t A —,.,m_ I��Q [ c<��a*u.R � � ��:�,� 1,.�'J�F+" I r�ux�n�� C#8ma!A�rd3o ' Saurt� ( � �� ,. . ; � � (��A FtM•1 t ,.�..,: � t�w +�;��a � �LC 1 � �� : �. u.,. � � ,;.. ti-•' � r�;�n � pp - �.�� _ `" E i{ � .xi�% `»�� j7045tlia11P9 : �� i Networked � JDVC with ��`�"� . f � � �� ' JNCA-2 � � �_�,,,, r_a�: .�[�rc. �-$,..M.. 4v'�C-�[� -� � � � o,�,,� - _ _ _ ... _ .�. _ AUE��t)LC?C1P r�s��rt��t��r' ��F.� .: � SI,.0 I_OaP . _..__ ��; �, FFT �F�G'r� RI�ER 4.��r3E .FN�A-� ��: ' �� , RISER j'�P' � � _ � �aovc. ��x.:.��: � ...._ � �vc-�cr ��a � _ _ .�, .� :� .� ,� �,. _ -� : � AUt�lf)�.t�f)P ,,,��1�uU jci-7045:b•4/2/08—Page 3 of 6 � Standalone IFC2-3030 with JDVC-AO ,,,,,,�.,,,,�,,,,,,,,,,,�„��o.,�,., � ,,., . ., _. ,�cPUZ-a��a� �---� <. ; ; � �� vc aa y �. .:: � SLC DY�-KD ;. �� +�� ;� ,, �� . _ _ � ;o � 3, � � rr e � wa i 4 l� 1 . ._. _ ....,R.......,., ... ... . SE.� ! • � , Q ANALt�G Atl�10 CIRCUi"�'S . . . � � � � � (trn�rrt T}VC-i0.C3� � � � � e � ei � � � � i � � � GLA��u 1�I�.�Tt.IF��I ! (t�pt��natj i � Y ! ! t i t ,,..� .�...-;-. ' � �.��i " __� z� � � 3 \„ �F�' *3��{ �.,,:....... .r..._.. r � � r w„� ; CO�tiI�'RAI. ` = M�OC?�JL� AA•A�AAP �: � �� v\:.\•�� \� .... .. ... ... j76aSdia31P9� Page 4 of 6—jci-7045:b•4/2/08 Stand-Alone IFC2-640 with JDVC SLC � �...,.�. E: � , �. JNCA 2 � ` , _ ..��.��„�.,,��..�� 9�,� � � � � JDVC � � �.,�� MSOOFPJ M500FPJ IFC2-640 �a �� , �. (Displayless) ��` �� FFf Riser(From JDVC) 1 � Digital Audip Loop � �.- ��,�� ,� � pAA "� FfT Riser(From DAA) __�� . ,,..,m, ,. DAA �;� � �Y 7045tliac�pg M500FPJ MSOOFPJ �_ jci-7045 b•4/2/08—Page 5 of 6 Standalone IFC2-640 with JDVC-AO ... �� IFC2-640 � � . .;, � �� JDVC J D VC-AO JDVC-KD e � t � SLC � +� � • � � x � ; ;` � ; 4 ANALOG AUDIO • � * � CIRCUITS (from JDVC-AO) � � t � � r � � i � f � � y � � CLASS A RETURN a (optional) r � � � � i : � �� XPIQ . � . � " - CONTROL ' ��..� ___.__ _____ MODULE AA-A M P i � 7o45tlia5.jpg JVeriFire�is a registered[rademark and NOTI•FIRE•NET'"^ is a trade- mark of Honeywell Intemational Inc.ST�is a regis[ered trademark o(AT&T. 02008.All rights reserved.Unau[horized use of this document fs strictly pro- hibited. This document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. �� We try ro keep our product information up-to-date and accurate. We cannot cover all specific applications or anticipate all requirements. < All specifications are subject to change without notice. ;_"; ' Made in the U.S.A. For more information,contact Johnson ConUols Field Support Center. 507 East Michigan Street,Milwaukee,WI 53202 wwwjohnsoncontrols.com Page 6 of 6—jci-7045:b•4/2/08 jci-7046:b DAA-50 Series �� ;� ��Dig�tal Audio Amplif�ers �(?�C15(�("� ,� �Cl1'l�l'+C��S GENERAL x � `�. The DAA-50 Series Amplifiers are multi-featured Digital �� Audio Amplifiers designed for audio networks of up to 32 DAA - ��"'"� �;�;; �"` amplifiers terminating at a JDVC Digitai Voice Command. �, �_� �f ; � � " ��q_. Each DAA is capable of accessing and processing one of up to '� '¢,,�� ;;, eight audio channels on the JDVC audio loop, amplifying the y° �. � ` signal, and distributing it via four Class B or two Class A out- �� :-� �� '� �� puts at 50 watts. DAA-50 amplifiers can store backup alarm � �� and trouble messages, and provide an adjustable background �`'�� , s �� music input. An optional Firefighter's telephone riser on each '� �� ,- �""' DAA-50 amplifier supports FFT communications risec Each �� DAA-50 incorporates a powerful digital signal processor, a �� `��a- � �� charging power supply, a 50 watt amplifier, built-in audio NAC 7046phrij�� °�' outputs, and a chassis which mounts in a single row of CAB-4 and EQ Series cabinets. An optional battery chassis mounts two 12.0 AH ba[teries in the same standard chassis row. FEATURES Batteries for the DAA may be installed in any of the Following configurations: • Listed to UL Standard 864,9th edition. • In a CHS-BH1 optional ba[tery chassis. The CHS-BH1 bat- • 50 W total output power at 25 VRMS (DAA-5025 series)or tery chassis will hold two 12.0 AH batteries, and mounts on 70.7 VRMS(DAA-5070 series) the left side of the DAA chassis,so that the DAA and batter- • Multiple versions provide connection options for twisted-pair ies are contained in a single cabinet tier. wire,single-mode fiber,and multi-mode fiber media • In the battery row (bottom) of the CAB-4 Series cabinet, or • Two Class A high-level audio outputs; or alternately, four in the bottom row of an EQ Series cabinet. Class B outputs supported. Outputs dynamically share the • In a cabinet adjacent to the cabinet that holds the DAA,with 50 W-the total power can be dedicated to a single output if connections in conduit. External battery charging is sup- required. ported. • Audio output activation via network control-by-�vent equa- tions resident within the JDVC SPECIFICATIONS • Two digital audio ports support Style 4 or 7 configurations. • Auxiliary input for 12 Vp-p analog low-level audio. DAA-PS POWER SUPPLY BOARD • Auxiliary input for 1 VRMS, to be used for background ' AC power(TB1): 115 - 120 VAC, 60 Hz input, 4.5 A maxi- music input,an interface with a telephone paging source,or mum; or for"E"versions, 220 - 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz input, other compatible audio sources. Audio levels can be Z•3 A maximum. Recommended wiring: 12 to 14 AWG adjusted by end user. Continuous supervision for active �1.6 mm O.D.)with 600 VAC insulation DAA output circuits. • Battery connections(T63): Supplied cable connections to • Programmable through JVerifire Tools. batteries. • Up to two minutes of standard quality backup digital mes- DAA-5025l70 BOARDS sage storage (from a JVerifire Too/s message library, or Digital audio ports,wire media,A and B(TB2,T63): � created by the installer)for use in the event of communica- , Maximum distance per segment is 1900 feet(579.12 m)on tion loss. Belden 5320UJ (18 AWG, TP) FPL cable: 18 AWG (0.821 • Power supply and battery charger capable or supporting up mm2) twisted-pair, unshielded, power-limited. See wiring to 26 AH batteries documentation, P/N 52916ADD: C Addendum to JDVC and • Battery charger disable provides battery sharing option for DAA Manuals. Electrically isolated ports support Style 4 or one or more DAA-50 amplifiers or with a charging power 7 wiring. supply • Digital audio ports, "F" versions: Digital audio loop con- • Isolated alarm bus input,to be used for backup activation of nectors A and B support multi-mode fiber. Maximum attenu- alarm messages when normal digital communication is lost ation is 4.2 dB for multi-mode with 50/125 micrometer cable • Relay contacts that will activate on a trouble condition pro- @ 850 nm; 8.0 dB for multi-mode with 62.5/125 micrometer vide an option for redundant annunciation to a local panel cable @ 850 nm. • Digital audio ports,"SF"versions: Digital audio loop con- INSTALLATION nectors A and B support single-mode fiber.Maximum atten- uation is 5.0 dB for single-mode with 9/125 micrometer The DAA arrives from the factory already installed on its chas- cable @ 1300 nm. sis. The DAA mounts in one tier of any CAB-4 Series or EQ , Alarm bus(T64): Power-limited by source. Recommended Series cabinet; the DAA tier can be covered using a DP-1 B �„�iring: 14 to 22 AWG (2.08 to 0.326 mm2)twisted-pair dress panel,ordered separately(CAB-4 Series only). jci-7046:b•4/2/08—Page 1 of 2 � • Trouble bus(T65): Dry contact. Recommended wiring: 14 pRODUCT LINE INFORMATION to 22 AWG (2.08 to 0.326 mmz)twisted-pair DAA-5025: Digital Audio Amplifier(50 W, 25 VRMS), assem- • FFT riser (T613): Power-limited output. Class A (Style Z) bly with DAA-PS power supply board, shipped mounted to its or Class B(Style Y)operation.Style Y two-wire connections chassis. require a 3.9K ohm, 1/2 watt resistor (P/N R-3.9K). Maxi- mum wiring resistance(including individual telephone zone DAA-5025F: Digital Audio Amplifier (50W, 25 VRMS), multi- to last handse[)permitted is 50 ohms, 10,000 feet(3048 m) mode fiber, assembly with DAA-PS power supply board, maximum wiring distance at 12 AWG (3.31 mmz) to last shipped mounted to its chassis. handset. DAA-5025SF: Digital Audio Amplifier (50W, 25 VRMS), sin- • Auxiliary input A(AUX A,TB9): Signal strength from low- 9�e-mode fiber, assembly with DAA-PS power supply board, level analog audio input: 1 VRMS maximum. Optional shipped mounted to its chassis. supervision (selected through programming). Recom- DAA-5070: Digital Audio Amplifier (50 W, 70.7 VRMS), mended wiring: 18 to 22 AWG (0.821 to 0.326 mm2) assembly with DAA-P5 power supply board, shipped mounted twisted-pair. Auxiliary input must be in the same room as to its chassis. the DAA. DAA-5070F: Digital Audio Amplifier(50 W, 70.7 VRMS), mul- • Auxiliary input B(AUX B,T68): Signal sVength from low- timode fiber: assembly with DAA-PS power supply board, level analog audio input: 12 Vp-p nominal, 15 Vp-p maxi- shipped mounted to its chassis. mum. Optional supervision (selected through DAA-5070SF: Digital Audio Amplifier(50 W,70.7 VRMS),sin- programming). Recommended wiring: 14 to 22 AWG (2.08 91e-mode fiber, assembly with DAA-PS power supply board, to 0.326 mm)twisted-pair. shipped mounted to its chassis. • Speaker circuits (T610, TB11, TB12, and TB13): Power- limited outputs. 50 watts dynamically shared among the 220-240V�IC VERSIONS four outputs. Supervision determined by programming. DAA-5025E: Digital Audio Amplifier (50 W, 25 VRMS, 240 Recommended wiring: 14 to 22 AWG (2.08 to 0.326 mmz) VAC), assembly with DAA-PS power supply board, shipped [wisted shielded pair. mounted to its chassis. • End-of-line resistors: For Class A: 10K ohm, 1/2 watt, P/N DAA-5025FE: Digital Audio Amplifier(50 W, 25 VRMS),multi- R-10K.For Class B:20K ohm, 1/2 watt, P/N R-20K. mode fiber, 240 VAC, assembly with DAA-PS power supply board,shipped mounted to its chassis. STANDARDS AND CODES DAA-5025SFE: Digital Audio Amplifier(50 W, 25 VRMS), sin- The DAA-50 Series Digital Audio Amplifiers compty with the gle-mode fiber, 240 VAC,assembly with DAA-PS power supply following standards: board,shipped mounted to its chassis. • NFPA 72 2002 National Fire Alarm Code. DAA-5070E: Digital Audio Amplifier (50 W, 70.7 VRMS, • Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 864;9th Edition. 240VAC), assembly with DAA-PS power supply board, • Underwriters Laboratories of Canada (ULC) ULC-S527-99 shipped mounted to its chassis. Standard of Control Units for Fire Alarm Systems. DAA-5070FE: Digital Audio Amplifier (50 W, 70.7 VRMS), • Part 15 Class A of the conducted and radiated emissions as multimode fiber, 240 VAC, assembly with DAA-PS power sup- required by FCC. ply board,shipped mounted to its chassis. DAA-5070SFE: Digital Audio Amplifier (50 W, 70.7 VRMS), LISTINGS AND APPROVALS single-mode fiber, 24o VAC, assembly with DAA-PS power supply board, shipped mounted to its chassis. These listings and approvals apply to the basic DAA-50 Series Digital Audio Amplifiers. In some cases, certain modules may ACCESSOR/ES not be listed by certain approval agencies, or listing may be in DP-1 B: Dress panel;covers one tier of CAB-4 Series cabinet. process.Consult factory for latest listing status. • UL Listed:file S635. CHS-BH1: Battery chassis; holds two 12.0 AH batteries. Mounts on the left side of DAA chassis. • ULC Listed:file S635. • FM Approved • CSFM approved:file 7170-0028:223, 7170-0028:244. • MEA approved:file 232-06-E, 128-07-E(wire only). • City of Chicago approved: High Rise,Class 1,Class 2 . • City of Denver approved. • PSB Corporation approved(Singapore). 02008.All rights reserved.Unauthorized use of[his document is strictly pro- hibited. This document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. ;�� We try to keep our product information up-to-da[e and accurate. •�� We cannot cover all specific applications or anticipate all requirements. r . .�µ�� All specifications are subject to change without notice. "� Made in the U.S.A. For more information,contact Johnson Controls Field Support Center. 507 East Michigan Street,Milwaukee,WI 53202 www.johnsoncontrols.com Page 2 of 2—jci-7046:b•4/2/08 jci-7047:b 1 JNCA-2 J' -,' � Network Control Annunciator �ohnson �� .�� CO(lti'OIS General The JNCA-2 is a second-generation Network Control Annunciator ' for the NOTI•FIRE•NETT"' network, compatible for use with nodes such as the IFC2-3030, IFC-3030, IFC-320, IFG640 and '�I� IFC2-640 fire alarm control panels,as well as first-generation JNCA Network Control Annunciators. Additionally, the JNCA-2 may be - '� configured with JDVC Series products (JDVC, JDVGEM, JDVC- �. == ��- ��,� EMF, and JDVGEMSF)to create one or more Digital Audio Com- _r� � , mand Centers on NOTI•FIRE•NET. The JNCA-2 provides sys- -.; ■,;' tem control and dispiay capabilities for all, or for selected network � �' ;,� nodes. �. ;, .=;. �� The JNCA-2 display consists of a 640-character backlit LCD dis- y� . -_ =•--='- play, and a control interface consisting of"soft"keys used to navi- a " gate screen menus,"hard"keys with fixed control functions, and a ��;° �� -i� QWERTY keypad. �`� When connected to one or more networked panels the JNCA-2 pro- vides network control and status/history display capabilities. It may also be configured as the Primary Display for displayless nodes on the network. � Hardware Features JNCA-2 in JABS-2D backbox • Listed to UL Standard 864,9th edition. • Full supervision of all inputs and network integrity. • Enhanced-format 640-character LCD display with backlighting. • ACS bus for LED or graphic annunciators(EIA-485). • New history filters for report displaying and printing: All • Optically isolated printer intertace(EIA-232). Events, Only Alarms,Only Troubles, Only Supervisory, Only, • 11 LED status indicators: Power,Controls Active, Fire Alarm, Security,Time Interval,Point Range. Pre-Alarm, Security, Alert, Supervisory, Troubie, Signal, . Fully programmable node-mapping subsystem. Silence,CPU Failure,Point Disabled,Other Event. • Advanced/Basic Walk-Test program. • Alphanumeric QWERTY rubber keypad. • Timer control for Auto Silence,AC Fail Delay. • Four status reiays:Alarm,Trouble,Supervisory,Security(Form-C). . Meets Canadian ULC display requirements. • Nonvolatile real-time clock can be synchronized with network . Environmental adjustment controls to maximize LCD legibility. by master node. • Meets NFPA requirements for Firefighter Smoke Control Sta- • Optional Security Keyswitch enable Keypad functions. tion(FSCS)and HVAC. • Optional Security Tamper switch. • Supports up to 32 remote ACS annunciators and modules. �JNCA-2 Indicators and Controls • Requires 24 VDC,and a network connection. • RDP port for LCD-160 or terminal mode LCD-80. LED IND/CATORS NOTE: NCA-2 Firmware version 14.0(and higher)can support . PowER (green) illuminates when 24 VDC power is applied; LCD-160 on the RDP port, or LCD-80 in terminal mode, but not LED goes out if power is removed and JNCA-2 is using a bat- both at the same time. tery. • CoNTRO�s ACnvE (green) illuminates to indicate that the Function Features JNCA-2 control functions are active. • Individual Enable/Disable or Group Enable/Disable local for � FIRE ALARM (red) illuminates when at least one fire alarm networked compatible panels. event exists; flashes when any of these events remain unac- • Control ON/OFF networked compatible panel control points. knowledged. • Read Status networked compatible panel points and zones. ' PRE-ALARM (red) illuminates when at least one pre-alarm event exists; flashes when any of these events remain unac- • Network paging control/HVAC control requires SCS series. knowledged. • Network-wide:Acknowledge,Silence,Reset. • SECURirv(blue) illuminates when at least one security event • Lamp Test(local to JNCA-2). exists; flashes when any of these events remain unacknowl- • History Buffer(1000 Alarm events;4000 System events). edged. • Print JNCA-2 programming and history reports. • SuPERVisoRV(yellow) iiluminates when at least one supervi- • Report status of networked panels and their respective fieid sory event exists (i.e., sprinkler valve off normal, low pres- devices to a central station via a single UDACT. sure,fire pump running,guard's tour, etc.);flashes when any • One Master level, nine User level passwords.The Master can of these events remain unacknowledged. assign each User access levels(programming,alter status). • SvsTEM TROUe�E(yellow) illuminates when at least one trou- • Interactive Summary Event Count display,event handling package. ble event exists; flashes when any of these events remain unacknowledged. • Online programming and alter-status programs. . QTHER EVENT (y2110W) iiluminates for any category of event • Intuitive user guidance program including interactive soft keys. not listed above; flashes when any of these events remain • Enhanced Read Status/Alter Status displays. unacknowledged. jci-7047:b1 •03/02/09—Page 1 of 2 • Si�Nn�s Si�ErvCEO(yellow) illuminates if the JNCA-2 Silence ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS key has been pressed or if any other node sent a Network The JNCA-2 may be powered from a Main Power Supply AMPS- Silence command;flashes if only some points on a node are 24(E)(see data sheet JCI-6883)mounted in a seperate cabinet silenced. (see specifications below);or from any UL Listed non-resettable I • Pomr Disne�eo(yellow)illuminates when at least one disable p4 VDC source from a compatible fire panel (see panel data exists on the network or in the system. sheets).The battery on the JNCA-2 motherboard is for RTC and • CPU Fni�uRE (yellow)activated by the watchdog timer hard- SRAM; holds the history memory through power failure. ware, indicates an abnormal hardware or software condi- Replacements are available (P/N 31004). Power source: 1) tion. Contact technical support. AMPS-24(120 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 4.5 A maximum) or AMPS-24E F/XED FUNCT/ON KEYS (240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 225 A maximum) power supply; 2) the IFC-640, IFC2-640 and IFC-320 on-board power supply;or 3)a • ACKNOWLEDGE supervised+24 VDC power suppiy that is UUULC-listed for fire • SIGNAL SILENCE protective service. The current of the JNCA-2is 400 mA with • SYSTEM RESET backlight and 200 mA with the backlight off. • DRILL • FIRE ALARM SCROLL/DISPLAY Agency Listings and Approvals • SECURITV SCROLIfDISPLAY These listings and approvals apply to the JNCA-2. In some • $UPERVISORY$CROLIJ�ISPLAY C8S@S,certain modules or applications may not be listed by cer- • TROUBLE SCROLL/DISPLAY tain approval agencies,or listing may be in process.Consult fac- • OTHER EVENT SCROLUDISPLAY tory for latest listing status. The five keys labeled ScRO�UDisP�a.v allow the user to scroll • UL/ULC Listed:file S1570. through messages for the particular event type. For example, • FM approved. pressing the FiRE Av�RM Scao��/DisPU�v key will scroll through • MEA approved:232-06-E Vol.2. all fire alarm events,as details of each are shown in the display a�ea or me�rvcn-z. Product Line Information NOTE: The OTHER EVENT SCROLUDISPLAY key 81S0 SCfOIIS between Pre-Alarm and Disabied events. JNCA-2: Network Control Annunciator. Requires a NCM-W or NCM-F network communications module for networking. In • AcKNOw�eoGe–press this key to acknowledge off all active direct connect applications NCM not required. events. • Si�NA�Si�eNCe–press this key to turn off all control mod- NCM-W, NCM-F: Standard Network �ommunications Mod- ules, notification appliance circuits, and panel output circuits ules. Wire and multi-mode fiber versions available. See JCI- that have been programmed as Silenceable. 6861. • Svsrenn ResET – press this key to clear all latched alarms HS-NCM-W/MF/SF/WMF/WSF/MFSF: High-speed network and other events and turn off event LEDs. communications modules. Wire, single-mode fiber, multi- • DRILL HOLD 2 SEC—Pf@SS thlS kBy, holding it down for two mode fiber, and media conversion models are available. See seconds,to activate all silenceable output circuits. JCI-60482. SPECIAL FUNCTION KEYS JABS-2D: Annunciator Backbox, Surface, black. Mounts one • PRiN'r ScaEeN – press this key to print what is currently on JNCA-2 and one NCM-W/-F. the L�D screen. JABS-2DR:Same as above,but red. • LaMP TesT–press this key to test the LED indicators on the CHS-2D:Chassis, required whenever the JNCA-2 is mounted in left of the keypad and to check firmware revision numbers. an JABS-2D(R). • NEXT SELECTION/PREVIOUS SELECTION—th@S@ kByS hc"8 US2d CHS-M3:Chassis,mounts a JNCA-2 in a single row of a CAB-4 . when setting parameters in JNCA-2 data fields;for example, Series cabinet. choosing a device type as a filter for requesting a Node His- tory. CA-2: Chassis,Audio, 2 rows. Mounts a JNCA-2 and the JDVC • BarreRr LEVe�–press this key to display voltage and charg- Digital Voice Command in two rows of a CAB-4 Series cabinet. ing current level for system batteries. Displays levels for local DP-DISP: Annunciator Dress Plate. Dress plate is used when AMPS-24(E) or AMPS-24(E)connected to associated IFC2- JNCA-2 is mounted in the top row of a CAB-4 5eries cabinet 3030 or IFC-3030 node. with a CHS-M3 chassis. � NCA-2RETR0: Kit for retrofit mounting the JNCA-2 to a DP- Specifications DISP dress plate. Temperature and humidity ranges: This system meets NFPA NCA/640-2-KIT: Mounting kit for directly mounting the JNCA-2 requirements for operation at 0°C to 49°C(32°F to 120°F); and to JCPU2-640 chassis. at a relative humidity (noncondensing) of 85% at 30°C (86°F) LCD-160: 160 character LCD annunciator per NFPA, and 93% *_ 2% at 32°C ±2°C (89.6°F t 1.1°F) per LCD-80:80 character LCD annunciator ULC. However, the useful life of the system's standby batteries TR-ABS2D:Trim ring for semi-flush mounting of ABS-2D and the electronic components may be adversely affected by extreme temperature ranges and humidity. Therefore, it is rec- ommended that this system and all peripherals be installed in an environment with a nominal room temperature of 15°C to 27°C (60°F to 80°F).Product weight is 3 Ibs(1.36 kilograms). NOTIFIERO is a registered trademark and NOTI•FIRE•NETTM'is a trade- mark of Honeywell International Inc. �009 by Noneywell Intemationa�Inc.All rights reserved.Unauthorized use of this document is strictly prohibited This document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. We try to keep our product information up-to-date and accurate. �� We cannot cover all specific applications or anticipate all requirements. All specifications are subject to change without notice. ` Made in the U.S.A. For more information,contact Johnson Controls Field Support Center. 507 East Michigan Street,Milwaukee,WI 53202 www.johnsoncontrols.com Page 2 of 2—jci-7047:b1•03/02/09 i JCI-60047:A u�acT J HNSON Universal Digital Alarm CONTR L� Communicator Transmitter General The Universal Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter (UDACT) is designed for use on the JCI IFC-3030, IFC-2020/ � � 1010, IFC-640, IFC-400 and FC-2000 Fire Alarm Control Pan- J8� els. In addition, it is also designed for use on the Intelligent = ��,q0�7,�, p�� pHZ QO ,.. �° Network Annunciator (INA), software release 2.8 or higher. f ,,, �M°°�M When used in conjunction with the INA, JNCA, and JNCA-2 3 �° � ; [� � �� the UDACT can report the status of all control panels on �!� � L; ^° o` NOTI•FIRE•NETT"'.The UDACT transmits system status to UL listed Central Station Receivers via the public switched tele- 5�O ��_�� phone network. The UDACT is compact in size and may be mounted externally ❑�Ea ��=�u^�F^� in a separate cabinet. EIA-485 annunciator communications O �E�°�^� �'w�s°°° bus and regulated 24-volt connections are required. CLEAR 7EST �MO�E The UDACT is capable of transmitting the status of software O O O Q O zones(Alarm and Trouble),System Trouble,Panel Off-Normal, Supervisory, Bell Trouble, Low Battery, and AC Fail. The ��0� UDACT is capable of transmitting all of the zone and point sta- Q Qe Q Q� tus associated with each panel. O Q O O O When the UDACT is used with the IFG2020/1010, IFC-3030, ° O i l � IFC2-3030,JNCA, and JNCA-.2 it is capable of reporting up to ° '��""°� JS� 2,040 points. Reporting may be in the form of points or zones � i (refer to the UDACT manual for specific reporting parametersl. UDACT The first 568 points transmitted may be programmed for a vari- ety of types, including fire, waterflow, supervisory, etc. Remaining points transmitted are for fire alarm only. • Annunciation of UDACT Troubles including: loss of phone NOTE:Descriptions regarding point capacity, listed above, are for lines,communication failure with either Central 5tation,total receivers which receive in Ademco Contact ID format. See chart communiCations failure. on page 2 for compatible receivers. • Troubleshoot Mode convprts keypad to DTMF touchpad. • Individual LEDs for: Power, EIA-485 Loss, Manual Test, Features Kissoff, Comm fail, Primary Line Seize, Secondary Line • Maximum of 14 point trouble messages transmitted per Seize and Modem Communications. hour. • Open Collector relay driver for Total Communrations Fail- • Dual phone lines. ure or UDACT troubls. • Dual telephone line voltage detect. • Real-time clock. • Surtace Mount Technology. • Extensive transient protection. • Compact in size:6.75"x 4.25"(17.145 x 10.795 cm). • Simple EIA-485 interface to host panal. • euilt-in programmer. Agency Listings and Approvals • Built-in 4-character red 7-segment LED display. • Manual Test Report function. In some cases, certain modules may not be listed by certain approval agencies, or listing may be in process. Consult fac- • Manual Transmission Clear function. tory for latest listing status. • Mounts in a separate enclosure(ABS-8RB or UBS-1). . UL Listed: S635 • Communicates vital system status including: . ULC listed:CS100 —Independent zone fire alarm. • MEA:317-01-E4;345-02-E Vol. II;232-Oo-E Vol. II —Independent zone non-fire alarm. • CSFM: 7170-0554:142; 7105-0554:143; 7165-0554:149; —Independent zone trouble. 7170-0554:150 —Independent zone supervisory. • INDUSTRY CANADA: —AC(mains)Power Loss(programmable). • FCC: —Low Battery and Earth Fault. • FM Approved(IFC-400, IFC-640, IFC-3030) —System Off-Normal. —12 or 24 hour test signal. Installation —Abnormal Test Signal per new UL requirements. When used with the System 5000, the UDACT can mount in —EIA-485 Communication Bus Failure. any far back(front module with expander allowed) position of the CHS-4 chassis. JCI-60047:A•11/14/06—Page 1 of 3 When used with the IFC-3030,Fc-2o2o,FC-1010, IFC-640,or Ordering Information IFC-400,the UDACT mounts in a CHS-4 or CHS-4M2 module position. UDACT: Universal Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter. Includes operating and programming instructions, and mount- In ali cases, the UDACT can mount remotely (up to 6,000 ft./ ing hardware. 1828.8 m)in an ABS-8R or UBS-1 backbox. MCBL-7: DACT phone cord,7 ft(2.13 m)long(two required). C0111111UtllCatlOil FOt't11atS ABS-8RB: Metal enclosure for exiernally mounting UDACT up to 6,000 ft./1828.8 m from host FACP. 9.94"H x 4.63"W x • 3+1 Standard •4+1 Standard •4+2 Standard 2.50"D(cm:25.248 H x 11.760 W x 6.350 D). • 4+1 and 4+2 Ademco Express •Ademco Contact ID UBS-1: Metal enclosure. Includes viewing window and NOTE:Ademco Contact ID must be used for independent zone optional relay mounting capability. reporting. R-10E: SPDT Form-C relay. Contacts rated for 10 A@ 115 Required Software vAC.Connects to open collector reiay driver. • IFC-200 English EPROM'=73609(or higher) R-20E: DPDT Two Form-C relays. Contacts rated for 10A @ 115 VAC.Connects to open collector relay driver. • IFC-400 EPROM'_#AFP4R2.0(or higher) FBD-1: Ferrite bead kit. Use for remote mounting only. • IFC-320=ALLIFG640=ALL • FC-2000 EPROM`=73610(or higher) ROM1-UDACT: EPROM upgrade kit. • FC-2020/1010`=Release 6.6(or higher) • IFC-3030=ALL � • IFC2-3030=ALL � ABS-8R6 • JNCA=ALL � � for remote mounting • JNCA-2=ALL � ° [9.94"(25.2476cm)H x • INA=2.8 or higher � , 4.63"(11.7602cm)W x 'NOTE:Presently the UDACT is not capable of AC Fail delay(per II � �� 2.5"(6.35cm)D] NFPA standards)when used with the AA series Amplifier,APS-6R � Power Supply,or the XP Transponder. �i Type Mode Feature I; � ' � Ademco Contact ID format only) Use Type Mode to identify � � i reports to Central Station as: I I � I • Fire Alarm • Burglary � I � il i �• Supervisory • 24 hour Non-Burglary � � • Pull Station • High Temperature o 0 • Heat Detector • Low Temperature ��,� • Waterflow • Low Water Pressure ��555s°5 • Duct Detector • Low Water Level • Flame Sensor • Pump railure '�5'�b�hm, � • Smoke Zone � � � � � � `� x Electrical Specifications �� R��. �� i � Ar�,� ,�. Standby current:40 mA. Current while communicating:75 mA. Maximum current while communicating and with open collec- ' " tor output activated: 100 mA. j � � � Voltage: Regulated 24 volts. Range:21.2 to 28.2 volts. � � � � :�; � ��y, UDACT � shown in UBS-1 Page 2 of 3—JCI-60047:A•11/14/06 � � L M m p N `� O � O � _�S tA Q O 0 C O N y c- C.1� M 'O Q> V� w � d i y �� RN Format# d,�, yo° U V �°-°1a �°o N �� (Addresses 16&42) Q� N� H m O� �� N� h� 0 +1 A emco xpress 1 4+2 Ademco Express X X X(8) X 2 3+1/Standard/1800/2300 X X(2) X X(4) X X(5,6) X X 3 (NOT USED) 4 3+1/Standard/1900/1400 X X(2) X(4) X X X 5 (NOT USED) 6 4+1/Standard/1800/2300 X X(2) X X(4) X X(5) X X 7 (NOT USED) 8 4+1/Standard/1900/1400 X X(2) X(4) X X X 9 (NOT USED) A 4+2/Standard/1800/2300 X X(2) X X(4) X X(5) X X B (NOT USED) C 4+2/Standard/1900/1400 X X(2) X(4) X X X D (NOT USED) E Ademco Contact ID X X X X F (NOT USED) (1) With 685-8 Line Card with Rev.4.4d software. I(2) With 9002 Line Card Rev.9035 software,or 9032 Line Card with 9326A software. (3) Rev.4.0 software. (4) FBI CP220F6 Rec-11 Line Card with Rev.2.6 software and a memory card with Rev.3.8 software. (5) Model 6500 with Rev.600 software. (6) Model 6000 with Rev.204 software. (7) With Rev.B control card at Rev. 1.4 software and Rev.C line card at Rev. 1.5 soft- ware. (8) Model 2 only. (9) Version 1.62 software. � NOTI•FIRE•NETTM'is a trademark of Honeywell International Inc. 002007 by Honeywell International Inc.All rights reserved.Unauthorized use of this document is strictly prohibited. This document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. �� We try to keep our product information up-to-date and accurate. ��«�� We cannot cover all specific applications or anticipate all requirements. ��=� Atl specifications are subject to change without notice. " ""°� �� =� Made in the U.S.A. For more information,contact Johnson Controls Field Support Center. 507 East Michigan Street,Milwaukee,WI 53202 www.johnsoncontrois.com Page 3 of 3—JCI-60047:A•11/14/06 . Manual Fire Alarm and Notification: JBG-12LX Series Manual Fire Alarm Pull Station JBG-12L Conventional Manual Pull Station E70 Series Speakers and Speaker Strobes Series RSS&RSSP Strobes and Strobe Plat�s Weatherproof Appliances—Series ASWP Series SM and DSM Sync Modules � � JCI-60079:b JBG-12LX �� -,' i Addressable Manuai Pull Station )ohnson � �� Controls General < :-;� �� The JBG-12LX is a state-of-the-art, dual-action (i.e., requires ;,. � � two motions to activate the station)pull station that includes an ¢� " ' �� =��,� addressable interface for use with compatible Johnson Con- �� ;� �, � �� r trols control units which support CLIP mode or FlashScanO � �' �� protocol. Because the JBG-12LX is addressable, the control �'�� '�� panel can display the exact location of the activated manual station. This leads fire personnel quickly to the location of the ; ��- alarm. � ' �� - Features �� • Maintenance personnel can open station for inspection and address setting without causing an alarm condition. • Built-in bicolor LED, which is visible through the handle of r �" '' ,.., the station, flashes in normai operation and latches steady red when in alarm. • Handle latches in down position and the word"ACTIVATED" � � appears to clearly indicate the station has been operated. � ��,� � ��: � • Captive screw terminals wire-ready for easy connection to � �,�'� ��,�x:� �� , , �� _ SLC loop(accepts up to 12 AWG/3.25 mmz wire). �� '�'° ' • Can be surface mounted (with SB-10 or SB-I/O) or semi- ' flush mount�d. Semi-flush mount to a standard singie- gang,double-gang,or 4"(10.16 cm)square electrical box. The JBG-12LX • Smooth dual-action design. Addressable Manual Pull Station • Meets ADAAG controls and operating mechanisms guide- lines (Section 4.1.3{13]); meets ADA requirement for 5 Ib. �nstallation maximum activation force. The JBv-12LX will mount semi-flush into a single-gang, dou- • Highly visible. ble-gang, or standard 4" (10.16 cm) square electrical outlet • Attractive shape and textured finish. box, or will surface mount to the model SB-10 or SB-I/O sur- • Key reset. fa�e backbox. If the JBG-12LX is being semi-flush mounted, • Includes Braille text on station handle. then the optional trim ring (BG12TR) may be used. The SG12TR is usually needed for semi-flush mounting with 4" • Optional trim ring(BG12TR). (10.16 cm)or double-gang boxes(not with single-gang boxes). • Meets UL 38, Standard for Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes. Operation • Up to 99 JBG-12LX stations per loop on CLIP protocol sys- pushing in, then pulling down on the handle causes it to latch tems. in the down/activated position. Once latched, the word"ACTI- • Up to 159 JBG-12LX stations per loop on FlashScan�pro- VATED" (in bright yellow) appears at the top of the handle, tocol systems. while a portion of the handle protrudes from the bottom of the • Dual-color LED blinks green to indicate normal on Fiash- station.To reset the station,simply unlock the station with the Scan�systems. key and pull the door open.This action resets the handle;clos- ing the door automatically resets the switch. Construction Each manual station, on command from the control panel, Shell, door, and handle are molded of durable LEXAN� (or sends data to the panel representing the state of the manual polycarbonate equivalent)with a textured finish. switch.Two rotary decimal switches allow address settings (1 —159 on FlashScan�systems, 1 —99 on CLIP systems). Specifications Architectural/Engineering • Normal operating voltage:24 VDC. $pecifications • Maximum SLC loop voltage:28.0 VDC. Maximum SLC loop current:375µA. Manual Fire Alarm Stations shall be non-coded, with a key- � operated reset lock in order that they may be tested, and so • Ambient Temperature:32°F to 120°F(0°C to 49°C) designed that after actual Emergency Operation, they cannot • Relative Humidity: 93%±2%RH(noncondensing) at 32°C be restored to normal except by use of a key.An operated sta- ±2°C(90°F±3°F) tion shall automatically condition itself so as to be visually • For use indoors in a dry location detected as activated. Manual stations shall be constructed of red-colored LEXAN (or polycarbonate equivalent) with clearly visible operating instructions provided on the cover. The word JCI-60079:b•10/20/2008—Page 1 of 2 _ FIRE shall appear on the front of the siations in white letters, SB-10: Surface backbox;metal. 1.00 inches (2.54 cm) or larger. Stations shall be suitable for SB-UO: Surtace backbox;plastic. surface mounting on matching backbox SB-10 or SB-I/O; or semi-flush mounting on a standard single-gang, double-gang, BG12TR: Optional trim ring. or 4" (10.16 cm) square electrical box, and shall be installed �7021: Keys,set of two. within the limits defined by the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) or per national/local requirements. Manual Stations NY-Plate: New York City trim plate shall be Underwriters laboratories listed. Manual stations shall connect with two wires to one of the con- AgenCy LiStitlgS a17d Appt'oVa�ls trol panel SLC loops. The manual station shall, on command In some cases,certain modules or applications may not be from the control panel,send data to the panel representing the listed by certain approval agencies,or listing may be in pro- state of the manual switch. Manual stations shall provide cess.Consult factory for latest listing status. address setting by use of rotary decimal switches. . UL Listed:S1570 The loop poll LED shall be clearly visible through the front of . ULC Listed:S1570 the station.The LED shall flash while in the normal condition, MEA:67-02-E and stay steadily illuminated when in alarm. � • CSFM:7150-0554:135 Product Line Information • FM Approved JBG-12LX: Dual-action addressable pull station. Includes key locking feature. �— 1_Q, �O o � o s; O�. �� ?� �.` z� ' p p. � 1 )a� t�F �` i; , � � -�l' � �i �Q � o Detail of �, ., i' �� ,' BREAKAWAY TAB* � 1 % 9� � •� 5 k�.�. � ..Q� 9� �.. .�., . . �1_E B � s 15 0 ..... __-. ,i I Ly �� ' V �� ; 14 7 -i;C , � � � ' i .u t3 . 2 ...._ i�� , 12 � 9 -- 3 z3 � I�?:�, � � � 11 4 .,, 4 �c_�____.._.._� 10 . 5 , . { 5 Back of station without door ; e $ , s = 9 $ � s Terminal Connections: „ _... : ; 1 SLC(-);2 SLC(+) � -__ .e !�-^^�,�5 ,, r� �, _ ��i -r- � � � LED , , , " i �I I � _ ,- - _ , _ ; � ' ; — ROTARY DECIMAL SW/TCHES � ��€: � .. ��'� � ��?� � �_ `Remove tab to select i 1 — ' , addresses above 99(FlashScan __ -- i , _ � , ,��a�`�`" systems only). � -- -_ : - , ' � �e�e��.y��` -� " � E — 3 � - „ / v �� O _�� _ ' v� _ �. N -' �. �:! ` ...: _....... �. � Cover open to show easy access to miniature monitor module, rotary switch,and UL label. Patented: FiasnScanc� is a registered trademark ot Honeywell International Inc. U.S.Patent No.D428,351;6,380,846;6,314,772;6,632,108. LEXANCw is a registered trademark oi GE Plastics,a subsidiary ot General Electric Company. 002008. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use ot this document is strictly prohibited. This document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. We try to keep our product information up-to-date and accurate. We cannot cover all specitic applications or anticipate all requirements. All specifications are subject to change without notice. Made in the U.S.A. For more information,contact Johnson Controls Field Support Center. � 507 East Michigan Street,Milwaukee,WI 53202 www.johnsoncontrols.com Page 2 of 2—JCI-60079:b•10/20/2008 JCI-60068:A2 JBG-12L i� ;,� t, /' Non-Coded Conventional Manuai ,�(��1C15t�1'1 f'� ,�t Fire Alarm Pull Station ��,��r�(� General The JBG-12L is a cost-effective,feature-packed,non-coded man- � �� ual fire alarm pull station. The JBG-12L provides Johnson Con- �� 9� trols fire Alarm Control Panels (FACPs), as well as other �� manufacturers'controls, with a manual alarm initiating input sig- �� r �'�� x �� , �� , nal. Its innovative design, durable construction, and multiple �� mounting options make the JBG-12L simple to install, maintain, \�;'' and operate. �. � Features �� " � • Dual action. �� • Aesthetically pleasing,highly visible design and color. � • Attractive contoured shape and light textured finish. �� ,�., • Meets ADA 5 Ib.maximum pull-force. � �` • Meets UL 38,Standard for Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes. ��"� �� . � �� ,� �''�,�z' • Easily operated, yet designed to prevent false alarms when � = bumped,shaken,orjarred. r = �1tt. • PUSH IN/PULL DOWN handle latches in the down position to s .. .;. ; ll"` - clearly indicate the station has been operated. „ = • The word "ACTIVATED" appears on top of the handle in bright yellow,further indicating operation of the station. • Operation handle features white arrows showing basic opera- tion direction for non-English-speaking persons. Qpgrat1011 • Braille text included on finger-hold area of operation handle and across top of handle. The JBG-12L manual pull station provides a textured finger-hold • Station can be opened for inspection and maintenance with- area that includes Braille text.In addition to PUSH IN and PULL out initiating an alarm. DOWN text,there are arrows indicating how to operate the sta- Product ID label viewable by simply opening the cover;label tion,provided for non-English-speaking people. • is made of a durable long-life material. Pushing in and then pulling down on the handle activates the • The words"NORMAL"and"ACTIVATED"are molded into the normally-open alarm switch.Once latched in the down position, plastic adjacent to the alarm switch(located inside). the word"ACTIVATED"appears at the top in bright yellow,with a • Four-position terminal strip molded into backplate. portion of the handle protruding at the bottom as a visible flag. Resetting the station is simple:insert the key,twist one quarter- • Terminal strip includes Phillips combination-head captive 8/32 turn, then open the station's front cover, causing the spring- screws for easy connection to Initiating Device Circuit(IDC). loaded operation handle to return to its original position. The • Terminal screws backed-out at factory and shipped ready to alarm switch can then be reset to its normal(non-alarm)position accept field wiring(up to 12 AWG/3.1 mm2). manually(by hand)or by closing the station's front cover,which • Terminal numbers are molded into the backplate,eliminating automatically resets the switch. the need for labels. • Switch contacts are normally open. $peeifieations • Can be surface-mounted (with SB-10 or SB-VO) or semi- flush mounted. Semi-flush mount to a standard single-gang, PHYS/CAL SPECIFICATIONS: double-gang,or 4"(10.16 cm)square electrical box. • Backplate is large enough to overlap a single-gang backbox pull station SB-I/O SB-10 cutout by 1/2"(1.27 cm). • Optional trim ring(BG72TR). Height 5.5 inches 5.601 inches 5.5 inches (13.97 cm) (1423 cm) (13.97 cm) • Models packaged in attractive, clear plastic (PVC), clam- 4.121 inches 4222 inches 4.121 inches shell-style, Point-of-Purchase packages. Packaging includes width ��O.a7 cm) (10.72 cm) (10.47 cm) a cutaway dusUpaint cover in shape of pull station. 1.39 inches 1.439 inches 1.375 inches Depth �3.53 cm) (3.66 cm) (3.49 cm) Construction 5�o4d�m.�b� • Cover, backplate and operation handle are all molded of ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS: durable polycarbonate material. • Cover features white lettering and trim. Switch contact ratings:gold-plated;rating 025 A@ 30 VAC or VDC. • Red color matches System Sensor's popular SpectrAlertp Advance horn/strobe series. JCI-60068:A2•04/22/OS—Page 1 of 2 ENG/NEER/NG/ARCH/TECTURAL SPECIFICAT/ONS Manual Fire Alarm Stations shaii be non-code,with a key-oper- ated reset lock in order that they may be tested, and so designed that after actual Emergency Operation,they cannot be restored to normal except by use of a key.An operated station shall automatically condition itself so as to be visually detected as activated.Manual stations shall be constructed of red colored LEXAN(or polycarbonate equivalent)with clearly visible operat- ing instructions provided on the cover. The word FIRE shall appear on the front of the stations in white letters, 1.00 inches (2.54 cm)or larger.Stations shall be suitable for surface mount- ing on matching backbox SB-10 or SB-I/O;or semi-flush mount- ing on a standard single-gang, double-gang, or 4" (10.16 cm) square electrical box, and shall be installed within the limits defined by the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) or per national/local requirements.Manual Stations shall be Underwrit- ers Laboratories listed. Agency Listings and Approvals The listings and approvals below apply to the JBG-12L pull sta- tion. In some cases, certain modules may not be listed by cer- tain approval agencies, or listing may be in process. Consult factory for latest listing status. • UL Listed:file S1570. • CSFM approved: files 7150-0554:134, 7165-0554:149 (IFC- 3030,IFC2-3030),7170-0554:150(IF�-3030,IFC2-3030). • FM approved. • MEA approved:file 67-02-E. • Patented: U.S. Patent No. D428,351; 6,380,846; 6,314,772; 6,632,108. Product Line Information JBG-12L: Dual-action pull station with 6P5T N/O switch,screw terminal connections,key lock. SB-10: Surface-mount backbox,metal. SB-I/O: Surface-mount backbox,plastic. BG12TR: Optional trim ring for semi-flush mounting. 17021:Keys,set of two.(Included with key-locic pull stations.) 390' (3.531 i Dimensions �__ �_—_ � Wire Leng?h I Stnp Gauqe � — r; � I i.000" I Ii I —J,zeao� I �' I 0 750"� � ('.9Q5) � I ;.s�e° �'� i;13.97Q1 E I; 3 4 E : �CT� I n I I � SpectrAlerlOO Advance and System SensorOO are registered trademarks of Honeywell I nternational I nc. 002008. AII rights reserved. Unauthorized use of this document is strictly prohibited. This document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. , We try to keep our product information up-to-date and accurate. We cannot cover all specific applications or anticipate all requirements. a� All specifications are subject to change without notice. Made in the U.S.A. For more information,contact Joh�son Controls Field Support Center. 507 East Michigan Street,Milwaukee,WI 53202 www.johnsoncontrols.com Page 2 of 2—JCI-60068:A2•04/22/08 COOPERNotification � Series E7Q Speakers and Speaker Strobes �� `�� r .i:�-� �= � � . ��^�� , �';' SERIES E70 � �� _- STROBE SERIES E90 SERIES E90 r'�SERIES E70 STROBE SPEAKER �°F SPEAKER Description Features The Wheelock Series E Low Profile Speakers and Speaker Strobes , Approvals include: UL Standard 1971, UL Standard 1480, are designed for high efficiency sound output, with dual voltage New York Cit MEA California State Fire Marshal�CSFM), !25i70 VRMS) capability and field selectable taps from 1!8 to 2 y� �' ` watts. The low profile dssign incorporates a speaker mounting plate Factory Mutual(FM)and Chicago(BFP) See approvals by for faster and sasier installation. Each model has a built-in level model in Specifications and Ordering Information adjustment#eature and an aesthetic two(2)screw grille cover. • ADA/NFPA(ANSI compliant The Series E Speaker Strobe models incorporate the Low Current • Complies with OSHA 29 Part 1910.165 draw Series RSS Strobes. • Wall mount models are available with Field Selectable Strobe optians for wall mount models include 1575 or Wheelock Candela Settings of 15/30/75(110cd or 1351185cd(Multi- patented MCW multi-candela strobe with field selectable candela Candela models),or 1575cd(Single Candela model) settings of 15l30/75/110cd or the high intensity MCWH strobe with . reilin mount models are available with field selectable field selectable 135/?85cd. cand a settings of 15130/75/95cd or 115/177cd (Multi- Ceiling mount models are available in Wheelock patented MCC candela models) multi-candela ceiling strobe with field selectable intensities of . Strobes produce 1 flash per second over the regu►ated 15/30/75/95cd or the high intensity MCCH strobe with field voltage range selectable 115/177cd. Series E Speakers and Speaker Strobes provide high audio • 24 VDC with wide UL"Regulated Voltage" output with clear audibility and are designed to meet the critical using filtered DC or unfiltered VRMS input voltage needs of the life safety industry for effective emergency voice . Synchronize using the Wheelock Sync Modules or panels communications, tone signaling and visible signaling to alert the with built-in Wheelock Patented Sync Protocol hearing impaired. The strobe portion of all Series E Speaker Strobes may be ' Field selectable taps for 25 or 70 VRMS operation from 1/8 watt up to 2 watts synchronized when used in conjunction with the Wheelock SM, DSM Sync Modules, Wheelock Power Supplies or other ' High efficiency design for maximum output at minimum � manufacturers panels incorporating the Wheelock Patented Sync Wattage across a frequency range of 400 to 4000 HZ Pratocol. Wheelock synchronized strobes offer an easy way to • Fast installation with IN/OUT screw terminals using#12 to comp�y with ADA recommendations concerning photosensitive #18 AWG wires epilepsy. Series E Speaker Strobes are UL Listed for indoor use under Standard 1971 (Signaling Devices for the Hearing-Impaired)and Standard 1480(SpeakerAppliances),and use a Xenon flashtube with solid state circuitry enclosed in a rugged LexanO lens to provide maximum reliability for effective visual signaling. All inputs are supervised and employ IN/0UT wiring terminals for fast installation using#12 to#18 AWG wiring. Color options for the Series E Speakers and Speaker Strobes are red,white and nickel plated. � r FM �� MEA �r APPROVEU S5391 151-92-E 7t25-C785:152 7320-0785:134!Speaker) I NOTE:AII CAUTIONS and WARNINGS are identified by the symbol A.All warnings are printed in bold capital letters. A WARNING: PLEASE READ THESE SPECIFICATIONS AND ASSOCIATED INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS CAREFULLY BEFORE USING,SPECIFYING OR APPLYING THIS PRODUCT. VISIT WWW.COOPERWHEELOCK.COM OR CONTACT COOPER WHEELOCK FOR THE CURRENT INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS. FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH ANY OF THESE INSTRUCTIONS,CAUTIONS OR WARNINGS COUID RESULT IN IMPROPER APPLICATION,INSTALLATION AND/OR OPERATION OF THESE PRODUCTS IN AN EMERGENCY SITUATION,WHICH COUID RESULT IN PROPERTY DAMAGE,AND SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO YOU ANDtOR OTHERS. General Notes: • Strobes are designed to flash at 1 flash per second minimum over their"Regulated Voitage Range". Note that NFPA-72 specifies a flash rate of 1 to 2 flashes per second and ADA Guidelines specify a flash rate of 1 to 3 flashes per second. • All candela ratin5s represent minimum effective Strobe intensity based on UL Standard?971. • Series NS Strobe products are listed under UL Standard 1971 for indoor use with a temperature range of 32°F to 120°F(0'C to 49°C)and maximum humidity of 93%(±2%). • Series NH horns are listed under UL Standard 464 for audible signal appliances(Indoor use onlyj. • "Regulated Voltage Range"is the newest terminology used by UL to identify the voltage range. Prior to this change UL used the terminology"Listed Voltage Range". �Tabie 1: UL Max Cur�enY` ��`""°�° E70 Strobe Current-Walf Mount E90 Strobe Current-Ceiling Mount E70/E90 Speaker �241575W 24MCW 24MCWH 24MCC 24MCCH Strobes � 1575cd 15cd 30cd 75cd 110cd 135cd 185cd 15cd 30cd 75cd 95cd 115cd 177cd �16-33 VDC 0.090 0.060 0.092 0.165 0.220 0.300 0.420,0.065 0.105 0.189 0.249 0.300 0.420 t �. Table 2: E70lE90 UL Reverberant dBA @ 10 Feet"" 'UL max current rating is the maximum RMS current within the listed voltage range (16-33v for 24v �watts 1/8 1/4 1/2 � 1 2 unitsj. For strobes the UL max current is usually at �E Speaker 77 81 83 86 89 the minimum listed voltage(16v for 24v units). For E Speaker Strobe 76 80 82 85 8g audibles the max current is usually at the maximum listed voitage{33v for 24v units). For unfiltered FWR �, *`dBA ratings are based on testing under UL Standard 1480. ratings,see instailation instructions. � Wiring Diagrams" SERIES E SPEAKER&STROBE OPERATE SERIES E SPEAKER STROBES SYNCHRONIZED INQEP�NDENTLY(NON-SYNC OR SYNC) WITH MULTIPLE DSM MODULES ruc*^ � C r a�. =a�._�:„� +_.. t r,e:;T: a.'.�'� Note: Figure Aee�xusc _-�� ':.;.au:r:-. �-Ob ^. -''� .-� r�.;. Sf10WSII1t8fCOi1- .,- °R °'"��e= °^ `°=" r_ �- nection to strobe A�; ,Y-. ,.1_c !F �..:, h' #�. .F� �, through sync ' +.�—��——— ——— +"'T'e�" f' � � F_ -, .� � � � � � module. Speaker —11,r—— ——— a'L, C � - portion requires 2 huu_b t'A� li�hl �: ° - separate conduc- P_ •�� _ + = 0 + __ _ �<<-�;,� a,.=, � : o>_. - .: tors to FACP. � ..._c. .?FFF:F,F� 1� i._-2�_� ._'.'Lt ..: , ..�,_.. ..�i-ni:lm of� ni�. SERIES E SPEAKER STROBE APPLIANCES SERIES E SPEAKER STROBE APPLIANCES& RSS SYNCHRONIZED WITH DSM MODULE SINGLE STROBES SYNCHRONIZED WITH PS-12/24-8CP and CLASS "A„ PS-12124-8MP�_, ,; _,_,�..-.,_��:E_ DJM - i�oa� �-0 N� : .,,. _.� - �_��_�:'� P�`,5- ;�t�m .oU^_ .,_.__'1'3 ...,LR�- �� . � F +-�_.,__ ��.� A� � - FA�P - ._.� - - - T{ :ac�:: C��.. - MLd`l`S = D� � I!Y __ _ ; ... '�'_h;;GE'_� _ c�r� I ..... F, N_�. �IF�':Vi7'� '..,..n.... ,�_ . ..-_._;[.__p�.. For wiring informatio� on the PS-24-8MC power supply, piease refer to Data Sheet#S8900. "For detail using SM or DSM Sync Module refer to Data Sheet S3000 or Instailation Instructions P83123 for SM and P83177 for DSM. For wiring information on the power supplies refer to Installation Instruetions P84662. Specifications and Ordering Information � Strobe Sync w/ Model Model Modei Agency Approvais Model Order Wail Ceiling SM,DSM or Strobe Color Color Color Mounting Op- Code Mount Mount PS 24 8�C Candeta RED White Nickel tions UL MEA CSFM FM BFP E70-24MCW-FR 9022 X - X 15/30l75l110 X - - L,O.P;Q,R,U,Y X X X X X E70-24MCW-FW 9023 X - X 15/30/75/110 - X - �L.O,P,Q,R,U,Y X X X X X E7Q-24MCW-FN 3099 X - X 15(30/75/110 - - X Q,U X X X X X E70-241575W-FR 7871 X - X 15(75 on Axis) X - - L,O,P,Q,R,U.Y X X X X X E70-241575W-FW 7876 X - X 15(75 on/Ucis) - X - L,O.P;Q,R,U,Y X X X X X E70-241575W-FN 3100 X - X 15(75 on Axis) - - � X L,O,P,Q,R,U,Y X X X X X E70-R 7866 X X - - X - - Q,U X X X X X E70-W 7868 X X - - - X - Q,U X X X X X E7d-N 3108 X X - I - - - X � Q,U X X X X X E70-24MCWH-FR 3470 X - X 135/185 X - - L,O.P;Q,R,U,Y X X X X ' E70-24MCWH-FW 3474 X - X 135/185 I - X - L,O,P,Q,R,U,Y X X X X " E70-24MCWH-FN 0059 X - X 135/185 - - X Q.0 X X X X ` E90-24MCC-FW 3166 - X X 15(30l75/95 - X - Q,U,V X X X X " E90-24M�GFR 3165 - X X 15/30/75/95 X - - � 4,U,V X X X X ' E9Q-24MCGFN 3185 - X X 15/30/75/95 - - X Q,U,V X X X X ` E90-W 7869 X X - - - X - Q:U,V X X X X X E90-R 7867 X X - - X - - Q,U,V X X X X X E90-N 31Q9 X X � - - - - X Q,U,V X X X X X E90-24MCCH-FW 3471 - X X 115l177 - X - Q,U.V X X X X ` E9Q-24MCCH-FR 3481 - X X 115/177 � X - - Q.U,V X X X X ' E90-24MCCH-FN 0062 - X X 115/177 - - X Q;U,V X X X X " 'PENDING Architects and Engineers Specifications The speaker appliances shall be Wheelock Series E Speakers and the speaker strobe appliances shall be Wheelock Series E Speaker S;robes or approved equals.The speakers shall be UL Listed under Standard 1480 for Fire Protective Service and speakers equipped with strobes shall be listed under UL Standard 1971 for Emergency Devices for the Hearing-Impaired. In addition,the strobes shail be :ertified to meet the requirements of FCC Part 15, Class B. All speakers shall be designed for a field selectable input of either 25 or 70 VRMS,with selectable power taps from 1/8 watt to 2 watts. All models shali have listed sound output of up to 87 dB at 10 feet and a listed frequency response of 400 to 4000 Hz.The speaker shall also incorporate a sealed back construction.All inputs shall employ terminals that accept#12 ta#18 AWG wire sizes. The strobe portion of the appliance shall produce a flash rate of one(1 j flash per second over the Regulated Voltage Range and shall incorporate a Xenon flashtube enclosed in a rugged LexanC�lens.The strobe shall be of low current design.Where Multi-Candela Speaker Strobes are specified, the strobe intensity shall have field selectable settings and shall be rated per UL Standard 1971 at 15/30/75/110cd or 135/185cd for wali mount and 15/30/75/95cd or 115/177cd for ceiling mount. The selector switch for selecting the candela shal� be tamper resistant. The 1575 candela strobe shall be specified when 15 candela UL Standard 1971 Listing with 75 candela on-axis is required�e.g.ADA compliance). When synchronization is required, the strobe portion of the appliance shall be �ompatible with Wheelock SM, DSM sync modules, Wheelock Power Supplies or other manufacturers panels incorporating the Wheelock Patented Sync Protocol.The strobes shali not drift out of synchronization at any time during operation. If the sync module or Power Supply fails to operate, (i.e.,contacts remain closed), the strobe shall revert to a non-synchronized flash rate. The speaker and speaker strobe appliances shall be designed for indoor surface or flush mounting. The speaker and speaker strobe shall incorporaFe a sppaker mounting plate with a grille cover which is s�cured with two screws for a level, aesthetic finish and shall mount to standard electrical hardware requiring no additional trimplate or adapter. The finish of the Series E speakers and strobe speakers shall be white, red, or nickel plate. All speaker and speaker strobe appliances shall be backward compatib�e. � �� WE ENCOURAGE AND SUPPORT NICET CERTIFICATION 3 YEAR WARRANTY S1610 E70lE90 Q2/08 � .� � .� :�� :��'�, CooperNOtificationis WheeloCk° MEDC SAFEPATH� WAVES, $��e COOPERNotification COOPERNotification � Series RSS and RSSP Strobes and Strobe Plates FiRc � �,�r _�k �� r5 #� � �-�� " � � � � � �-F v b�---�- . � � �.,, Series RSS Series RSS Series RSSWP RSS Round � r` d Description Features The Wheelock patented Series fiSS Strobe Appliances and ' Approvals include: UL Standard 1971, New York City(MEA), Series RSSP Strobe Plates have lower current draw while California State Fire Marshal(CSFM), Factory Mutual(FM), and maintaining outstanding performance, reliability and cost Chicago(BFP) See approvals by model in Specifications and effectiveness.These versatile appliances will satisfy virtually all Ordering Information requirements for indoor,wall or ceiling mount applications. • ADA/NFPA/UrC/ANSI compliant. Meets OSHA 29 Part Strobe options for wall mount models include 1575 or the 1910.165 Wheelock Patented MCW multi-candela strobe with field • Wall mount Multitiandela models are available with Field selectable candela settings of 15/30/75/110cd or the high Selectable Candela Settings of 15/30/75/110cd or 135/185cd. intensity MCWH strobe with field selectabte 135/185cd. Single Candela models are available in 1575cd Ceiling mount models include the patented MCC multi-candela . Ceiling mount Multi-Candela models are ceiling strobe with field selectable intensities of 15/30/75/95cd or the high intensity MCCH strobe with field selectable available with field selectable candela settings of 15/30/75/95cd 115/177cd. or 115/177cd. (Round or Square) All models may be synchronized using the Wheelock SM, • Strobes produce 1 flash per second over the regulated voltage DSM Sync Modules, Wheelock Power Supplies or other range manufacturers panels incorporating the Wheelock Patented . �2 and 24 VDC models with wide UL"Regulat�d Voltage"us- Sync Protocol. Synchronized strobes can eliminate possible ing filtered(DC)or unfiltered VRMS input voltage restrictions on the number of strobes in the field of view. Wheelock's synchronized strobes offer an easy way to comply • Synchronize using the Wheelock sync modules or panels with withADArecommendationsconcerningphotosensitiveepilepsy built-in Wheelock Patented Sync Protocol as well as meeting the requirements of NFPA 72. • Fast installation with IN/OUT screw terminals using#12 to#18 The Wheelock Series RSS Strobes employ a Patented Integral AWG wire Strobe Mounting Plate that can be mounted to a single gang, double gang,4"square, 100mm European backboxes or the SHBB surface backbox. If the flush backbox has side or top space between it and the finished wall,the NATP(Notification For Weatherproof Series RSS see Datatsheet S9004 Appliance Trimplate)may be used.It provides an additional.65" of trim for the Appliance.An attractive cover plate is provided for a clean, finished appearance on all models. The Series RSSP Multi-Candela Strobe Plates are a cost effective way to retrofit required wall strobe appliances to bells,horns,chimes,multitones or speakers and easily mounts to standard 4" backboxes or for surface mount use with the Wheelock SBL2 surface backbox. �L ��.��1 9�:: FM � I a IVIEA �"°��6 APPROVED S5391 151-92-[ 7125-0765�.141 7300-0785�.154 NOTE:All CAUTIONS and WARNINGS are identified by the symbol A.All warnings are printed in bold capital letters. b WARNING: PLEASE READ THESE SPECIFICATIONS AND ASSOCIATED INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS CAREFULLY BEFORE USING,SPECIFYING OR APPLYING THIS PRODUCT. VISIT WWW.COOPERWHEELOCK.COM OR CONTACT COOPER WHEELOCK FOR THE CURRENT INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS. FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH ANY OF THESE INSTRUCTIONS,CAUTIONS OR WARNINGS COULD RESULT IN IMPROPER APPLICATION,INSTALLATION AND/OR OPERATION OF THESE PRODUCTS IN AN EMERGENCY SITUATION,WHICH COULD RESULT IN PROPERTY DAMAGE,AND SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO YOU 4ND/OR OTHERS. 3eneral Notes: • Strobes are designed to flash at 1 flash per second minimum over their"Regulated Voltage Range". Note that NFPA-72 specifies a flash rate of 1 to 2 flashes per second and ADA Guideiines specify a flash rate of 1 to 3 flashes per second. • All candela ratings represent minimum effective Strobe intensity based on UL Standard 1971. • Series NS Strobe products are listed under UL Standard 1971 for indoor use with a temperature range of 32°F to 120°F(0°C to 49°C)a�d maximum humidity of 93°/a(±2%). • Series NH horns are listed under UL Standard 464 for audible signal appliances(Indoor use only). • "Regulated Voltage Range"is the newest terminology used by UL to identify the voitage range. Prior to this change UL used the terminology"Listed Voltage Range". Table 1: Average RMS Current* RSS/RSSP-Wall Mount Ceiling Mount RSS/RSSP 241575W -------� 24MCW 24MCWH ---------� 24MCC 24MCCH 24VDC Modeis 1575cd 15cd 30cd 75cd 110cd 135cd 185cd 15cd 30cd 75cd 95cd 115cd 177cd UL max` 0.090 0.060 0.092 0.165 0.220 0.300 0.420 0.065 0.105 0.189 0.249 0.300 0.420 RSS/RSSP RSS/RSSP 24VDC Wali Mount Models ' RMS current ratings are per UL average RMS method. UL max current 121575W rating is the maximum RM�tiurrent within the listed voltage range(16-33v for 24v units). For strobes the UL max current is usually at the minimum 12 vdc 0.152 listed voltage(16v for 24v units). For audibles the max current is usually at UL max* 0.255 the maximum listed voltage(33v for 24v units). For unfiltered FWR ratings, see instaliation instructions. fable 2:Audibies/Speakers for RSSP Strobe Plate Product Series Multitone Appliances AMT, MT Wiring Diagrams � SERIES RSS/RSSP APPLIANCE Homs AH, NH, HS Motor Bells MB-G6/G10 FROM + + TO NEXT PRECEDING _ APPLIANCE Speakers ET-1010/1080, E70, ET70 APPLIANCE,SYNC OR�OLR Chimes CH70 MODULE,POWER SUPPLY OP.FACP + - SERIES RSS/RSSP APPLIANCES SYNCHRONIZED WITH DSM MODULE SINGL�C�ASS"A"NAC CIRCUIT SERIES RSS/RSSP APPLIANCES SYNCHRONIZED WITH MULTIPLE DSM MODULES DSM DSM#1 STROBE 4 , � Sync NAC SYNC � Strobe NAC Cic ;l+ RSS RSS CIRCUIT r OUT our i r � - +IN1 RSS RSS RSS � DSM#2 MINUS 1 � FACP 0* Strobe NAC Cir. �Y+ RSS RSS � AUDIBLE /1 � ' MINUS 2 `� DSM#3 / .IN 2 RSS RSS RSS P SYf1C 7ROBE ,our z Strobe NAC Cir. �+ RSS RSS NAC � - CIRCUIT RETURN DSM Interconnecting wiring shown.Maximum of twenty(20) TROBE/PLATE ASSEMBLY UDIBIE&VISIBLE APPLIANCE OPERATE IN UNISON SERIES RSS/RSSP APPLIANCE SYNCHRONIZED WITH SM MODULE SINGLE CLASS"B"NAC CIRCUIT TO NEXT S M FROM APPLIANCE PRECEDING ± � OR EOLR F + STROBE APPLIANCE,SYNC Strobe - STROBE MODULE, POWER A N/+C SUPPLY OR FACP circuit Rss Rss + - 0 + - �' STROBE AUDIBLE +Audible P EOLR -Audible STROBE/PLATE ASSEMBLY SERIES RSS/RSSP APPLIANCES SYNCHRONIZED AUDIBLE&VISIBLE APPLIANCE OPERAT�INDEP�NDENTLY WITH PS-12/24-8CP or PS-12/24-8MP FROM {, + Series PS-12/24-8MP PREGEOING TO NEXT APP�IANCE OR APPLIANCE FACP . ' - OR EOI.R AS rtss OUTPUTS EOLR 1 F „ FROM T -—�r——— — —— �-TO NEXT 4-CLASS GRECEOING STROBE OR ,B. STROBE,SVNC� '—t'1 1 �'—— ——— - EOLR OR MOOUIE POWER �� AS Rss SUPPIY OR FACP /'� 2-CLASS l.i .A, + - 0 + - p STROBE APPLIANCE � AS Rss "For detail using SM or DSM Syn�Module refer to Data Series PS-12/24-8MP � Sheet S3000 or Installation Instructions P83123 for SM and P83177 for DSM. Forwiring information on the power supplies refer PS-24-8MC. Specifications and Ordering Information Square Agency Approvals Model Order Wall Ceiling Non- Strobe 24 12 Color Color Mounting Options"` or Code Mount Mount Sync Candela VDC VDC RED WHITE Round UL MEA CSFM FM BFP RSS-24MCW-FR 940 X - X 15/30/75/110 X - X - B,D,E,F,G,H,J,N,O,R,X Square X X X X X RSS-24MCW-FW 9401 X - X 15/30/75/110 X - - X B,D,E,F,G,H,J,N,O,R,X Square X X X X X RSS-241575W-FR 7471 X - X 15(75 on Auis) X - X - B,D,E,F,G,H,J,N,O,R,X 5quare X X X X X RSS-241575W-FW 7788 X - X 15(75 on Auis) X - - X B,D,E,F,G,H,J,N,O,R,X Square X X X X X RSS-121575W-FR 7476 X - X 15(75 on Axis) - X X - B,D,E,F,G,H,J,N,O,R,X Square X X X X X RSS-121575W-FW 7468 X - X 15(75 onAxis) - X - X B,D,E,F,G,H,J,N,O,R,X Square X X X X X RSS-24MCC-FW 3158 - X X 15/30/75/95 X - - X B,D,E,F,G,H,J,N,O,R,X Square X X X X ` RSS-24MCGFR 3157 - X X 15/30/75/95 X - X - B,D,E,F,G,H,J,N,O,R,X Square X X X X ` � RSS-24MCCR-FW 3160 = X X 15/30/75/95 X = = X B,D,E,F,G,H,J,N,O,R,X Round X X X X { RSS-24MCCH-FW 3461 X X 115/177 X X B,D,E,F,G,H,J,N,O,R,X Square X X X X RSS-24MCCHR-FW 3463 - X X 115/177 X - - X B,D,E,F,G,H,J,N,O,R,X Round X X X X RSS-24MCWH-FR 3465 X X 135/185 X X B,D,E,F,G,H,J,N,O,R,X Square X X X X ' RSS-24MCWH-FW 3464 X X 135/185 X X B,D,E,F,G,H,J,N,O,R,X Square X X X X ` RSSWP-2475W-FR'* 9013 X - X 180�° ��F X X X - B,D,E,F,G,H,J,N,O,R,X Square X X X X ` 75@-31°F RSSWP-2475W-FW` 3034 X - X 180@��F X X - X B,D,E,F,G,H,J,N,O,R,X Square X X X X * 75@-31°F RSSP-121575W-FR 7798 X - X 15(75 on Axis) - X X - D,E,Z Square X X X X X RSSP-24MCW-FR 9402 X - X 15/30/75/110 X - X - D,E,Z Square X X X X X RSSP-241575W-FR 7793 X - X 15(75 on Axis) - - X - D,E,Z Square X X X X X *PENDING All models sync with Wheelock SM,DSM or PS-12/24-8CP or PS-12/24-8MP. #Models are available in either Red or White.Call Customer Service for Order Code&Delivery. '"For Weatherproof Series RSS Strobe specifications see data sheet S9004. *"Refer to data sheet S7000 for mounting options. Architects and Engineers Specifications The visual notification appliances shall be Wheelock Series RSS Strobe Appliances or approved equals.The Series RSS shall meet and be listed for UL Standard 1971 (Emergency Devices for the Hearing-Impaired)for Indoor Fire Protection Service.The strobe shall be listed for indoor use and shall meet the requirements of FCC Part 15 Class B.The strobe appliances shall produce a flash rate of �ne(1)flash per second over the Regulated Voltage Range and shall incorporate a Xenon flashtube enclosed in a rugged Lexan�lens. -�II inputs shall be compatible with standard reverse polarity supervision of circuit wiring by a Fire Alarm Control Panel(FACP).When Strobe Plates are to be installed, they shall be the Wheelock Series RSSP Strobe Plate and shall have the same electronic circuitry as the Wheelock Series RSS. The Series P.�S Strobe shall be of low curre�t design.Where Multi-Candela app�iances are specified, the strobe intensity shall have field selectable settings and shall be rated per UL Standard 1971 at 15/30/75/110cd or 135/185cd for wall mount and 15/30/75/95cd or 115/177cd for ceiling mount.The selector switch for selecting the candela shall be tamper resistant.The 1575 candela strobe shall be specified when 15 candela UL Standard 1971 Listing with 75 candela on axis is required(e.g.ADA compliance). When synchronization is required,the appliance shall be compatible with Wheelock's SM,DSM Sync Modules,Whee�ock Power Supplies or other manufacturers panels with built-in Wheelock Patented Sync Protocol.The strobes shall not drift out of synchronization at any time during operation. If the sync module or Power Supply fails to operate, (i.e., contacts remain closed), the strobe shall revert to a non-synchronized flash rate.The strobes shall be designed for indoor surface of flush mounting. The Serws RSS Strobe Appliances shall incorporate a Patented, Integral Strobe Mounting Plate that shall allow mounting to single- gang,double-gang, 4-inch square, 100mm European type backboxes,orthe SHBB Surface Backbox.If required,an NATP(Notification Appliance Trimplate)shall be provided.An attaching cover plate shall be provided to give theAppliance and attractive appearance.The Appliance shall not have any mounting holes or screw heads visible when the installation is completed. The Series RSSP Multi-Candela or single candela Strobe Plate shall mount to either a standard 4 inch square backbox for flush mounting, or the Wheelock SBL2 backbox for surface mounting. All notification appliances shall be backward compatible. NOTE�.Due to continuous development of our products,specifications and offerings are subjed to change without notice in accordance with Wheelock,Inc.standard terms antl conditions. � � ! 1 1 � �� e,:.!1'�. WE ENCOURAGE AND SUPPORT NICET CERTIFICATION 3YEAR WARRANTY Made in USA SO410 RSS/RSSP 02/OS � .� � .� :�� CooperNotificationisWll@@IOCICO(MEDC SAFEPATH' WA�E� ��,,, 0 COOPERNotification COOPER Notification � Weatherproof Appliances - Series AH Audibles, AS Audible Strobes, MT Multitone Strobes, RSS Strobes and ET70 Speaker Strobes and Weatherproof Mounting Accessories , , k w� . as�„ t'" f � � ,�,.:�- �.q ...�. �� ,e Description: Designed for life safety, performance and reliability, Coop�r All models may be synchronized using the Wheelock SM, DSM Wheelock's �ost effective weatherpoof notification appliances Sync Modules, Wheelock Power Supplies or other manufacturers include: panels incorporating the Wheelock Patented Sync Protocol. The WeatherproofAppliances Series horn output of horn strobes can be independently controlled on 2-wire circuits using the Wheelock patented sync protocol. MT1NP Strobes RSSWP horn strobe models are 4-wire appliances; the strobes can be Horn Strobes •-----� ASWP synchronized while the audible can be connected to a coded fire Horns AH-24WP,AH-12WP alarm system or can be set to produce any of eight selectable Muiiitone Horn Strobes MTWP tones. Multitone Horns MT Speaker Strobes ET70WP Speakers Ei-1010 Features: All strobe models ars UL dual listed - meeting both UL1638 . Approvals include: UL Standards 1971; 1638,464 and 1480 and UL1971 requirements. As dual listed appliances, these California State Fire Marshal(CSFM)and New York City weatherproof strobes, horn strobes and speaker strobes are listed �MEA). Factory Mutual(FM)and Chicago(BFP). SPe for outdoor applications under UL 1638 as well as under UL 1971, the Standard for Safety Signaling Devices for Hsaring Impaired. agency approvals by model number on page two of this With an extended temperature range of—31°F to 150°F (-40°r document to 66°C), Wheelock weatherproof appliances meet or exceed UL • Compliance with the following requirements: NFPA, UFC, outdoortest reguirements for rain;humidity and corrosion resistance ANSI 117.1, OSHA Part 29, 1910.165,ADA while providing multiple strobe intensity options. inc{uding the highest strobe ratings available for area coverage per NFPA 72 ' �Neatherproof with extended temperature range of—4G°F to strobe spacing table�(up to 185 candela forwall mounting and 177 150°F(-40°C to 66°C)` candela for ceiling mounting). • Dual Listed strobe models(UL 1638 and UL 1971) To enable weatherproof mounting,Cooper-Wheelo�k provides the • Industry's highest strobe candela options industry's widest choice of mounting options fior surface or unique semi-flusn installation. Models are available for surface mounting ' Synchronize using the Wheelock Sync Modules or panels to Wheelock weatherproof backboxes on walls or ceilings. The W�th built-in Wheelock Patented Sync Protocol optional WP-KIT allows tha weatherproof backboxes(IOB,WPBB or • Models with field selectable tone, dBA and candela settings WPSBB)to be mounted to a recessed eleetrical box for concealed conduit installation. For semi-flush installation, the WPA and ' Wall or ceiling mounting options WFPA kits allow a customer to mount the weatherproof appliances • Surface of semi-flush mounting to a recessed electrical box without the need for an external . �N/OUT wiring termination accepting two#12-18 AWG wires weatherpr�of backbox. See the Backboxes, Plates and Gaskets Table on page three of this document for a summarization of these at each terminal mounting options and the required accessories. �rne se��es�sswP,asv�m,nnrwP ana ET�owP na�e u�app�ovai down�o-ao°F. The AH-24WP,MT-12/24 and the ET-1010 have been ULC tested and approved to -40`F,but not submitted to UL The AH-12WP has UL�ULC approval to-31`F. U� �V,.r� ` �;° , FM N!EA '��"� APPROVED �5946 15?-92-E 7125-0785�.131iASVJP) 55391 7125-0785:140(ET70WP) S2E52 %125-0785�.156(M�VVp� . '300-C-�C5-.154(RSSWPi NOTE:All CAUTIONS and WARNINGS are identified by the symboi A.All warnings are printed in bold capital letters. A WARNING: PLEASE READ THESE SPEGFICATIONS AND ASSOCIATED INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS CAREFULLY BEFORE USING,SPECIFYING OR APPLYING THIS PRODUCT. VISIT WWW.COOPERWHEELOCK.COM OR CONTACT COOPER WHEELOCK FOR THE CURRENT INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS. FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH ANY OF THESE INSTRUC710NS,CAUTIONS OR WARNINGS COULD RESULT IN IMPROPER APPLICATION,INSTALLATION ANDlOR PERATION OF THESE PRODUCTS IN AN EMERGENCY SITUATION,WHICH COULD RESULT IN PROPERTY DAMAGE,AND SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO YOU .NDIOR OTHERS. General Notes: • Strobes are designed to flash at 1 flash per second minimum over their UL Listed Regulated Voltage Range. • All candela ratings represent minimum effective Strobe intensity based on UL Standards 1971 and 1638 as indicated in candela ratings table. Wall Mount Ceiling Mount Walf or Ceiling Mount t:�' �* ,�.F � � ! � � RSSWP M7V�p RSSWP MTWp MT AH � �l�E;':.,, i �>. � � ASWP E770WP�:: �'�� -��,.ASWP E770WP � ET1010 Strabe Order Code Strabe Order Code RSSWP-2475W-FR Red 9013 RSSWP-2475C-FR Red 4338 ,q��{��e Order Code RSSWP-2475W-FW White 3034 RSSWP-2475C-FW White 4446 AH-24WP-R Red 7416 RSSWP-24MCWH-FR Red 5161 RSSWP-24MCCH-FR Red 5167 AH-12WP-R Red 7415 RSSWP-24MCWH-FW Whiie 5165 P.SSWP-24MCCH-FWWhite 5187 Harn A`f€lible Strobe Ac�c3i�Be Strc�be MT-12/24-R Red 5023 ASWP-2475W-FR Red 9012 ASWP-2475C-FR Red 4251 -�ASWP-24MCHH-FR Red 5137 ASWP-2475GFW White 4502 SP�� ASWP-24MCWH-FW White 5140 ASWP-24MCCH-FR Red 5149 ET-1010-R Red 3135 Mufti-tone St�abe ASWP-24MCCH-FW White 5157 ET-101Q-W White 3137 MTWP-2475W-FR Red 8420 �eu(ti-t!�€a�Str�be � ' AH MTWP-2475W-FW White 3112 MTWP-2475C-FR Red 4457 !UL Max.Current: MTWP-24MCWH-FR Red 5132 MTWP-2475GFW White 4478 � ' 24 VDC 12 VDC �TWP-24MCWH-FW White 5134 MTWP-24MCCH-FR Red 5102 iHigh(99)dBA � 0.080 0.192 peaker Strobe MTWP-24MCCH-FW White 5122 iMed(95)dBA i 0.043 0.108 ET70WP-2475W-FR Red 9077 SEzeaker��rot,e �Low(90)dBA ; 0.021 0.058 ET70WP-2475W-FW White 3179 ET70WP-2475C-FR Red 4452 _ -----___- -------J ET70WP-24185W-FR Red 4885 ET70WP-2475C-FW White 4454 ��UL Reverberant dBA�10 Feet ET70WP-24185W-FW White 4891 ET;OWP-24177GFR Red 4845 -'--T�: ET70WP-24135W-FR Red 4872 ET70WP-24177GFW White 4859 �atts I 1/8 1/4 ; 1/2 ! 1 I 2 ; 4 ; 8 ET70WP-24135W-FW White 4875 ET70WP-24115GFR Red 4550 �ET-101�77 80 j 83 ! 86 i 87; 92 ' 94 ET70WP-24115GFW White 4732 iET70WP 78 81 ; 84 ! 87 90; 93 '; 95 � Candela Ratings ;----------T _._--- ------ ------�- --- ! UL 1638 UL 1638 RSS,ET70WP and qs�/p Model Number Agency Approvals ; Series j UL 1971 MTWP UL Max Current - : __ i � ��cF @��F; Hi h Med Low ! Strobe On�Y) T 9_ Strobe UL�MEA'CSFM FM BFPi �2475 i 30"' 180 115 I 0.138 0.168 0.155 0.150 ', RSSWP-2475 i X X ' X X '. -----__-- _- -- 135 I 135 I 56 � 0.300 ; 0.355 i 0.340 0.335 � �RSSWP-24MCWH �X X ` ; MCWH ; ! -�-- - RSSWP-24MCCH X X ' � 185 185 77 i 0.420 I Q.480 0.465 0.460 '. ' - '. -----�--- --- - - � --------- ---__---- ---- -------- iAudib el Strobe i j 115 115 47 � 0.300 0.355 0.340 0.335 ', ;ASWP-2475 X X X X X !; MCCH - -- -- i - i 177 177 73 � 0.420 0 480 � 0.465 0.460 ! ASWP-MCWH X ` X ' --_.._..--{-- ---- -----.1- _._ � . . . _......_ __... ___..._ __._ . �--�-�- 24185 i 185 185 77 � 0.420 «* ASWP-MCCH XI j X , ( � Wall mount rating only -�- 24177 � 177 177 73 � 0.42Q � Muititone Strobe _ � ; __- --- ' -------'---- --- -----�-- ----- - - ;MTWP-2475 X ' X : X X ; �- ----�-�---- ''`MTWP-MCWH X 'i * X ` * UL Max.Current; MTWP/MT MT i ',MTWP-MCCH X X " ` ' �,audibie) 24 VDC 12 VDC -- � t I !,Horns/Audibles ! t BA ; HI STD ' HI STD i ;AH-24WP X I X� X _ X ! � �-------------.._ -r-,----- Horn � 0.108 ' 0.044 !0.177 0.034 ';AH-12WP X � X , X - X - - - --- -+ Bell ; 0.053 0.024 I 0.095 0.020 MT-12/24 t X � X ; X � X X ; ---- ---- , . - r _ March Time ; 0.104 0.038 ;0.142 0.034 ;Speaker Strobe 7 ' --._.......-------,..______ __-------- ---- -�_._._-- ode 3 Horn i O.Q91 0.035 :0.142 0.034 ;ET70WP-2475_� X � X ' X * ' ':ode 3 Tone � 0.075 0.035 ;0.105 0.021 � �ET70WP-185 I X ', ` ' X ` ' ow Whoop ; 0.098 ; 0.037 ;0.142 0.035� 'ET70WP-177 ' X i ` X ` * - ---- ' ' �iren 0.104 ' 0 036 ;0.152 0.030 1 ET70WP-115 X� X ` ! ; --- -_ �.__ � ._ _._ fHi1Lo 0.057 � 0 025 ;0.114 0.026 I ET70WP-135 X � X ' ', �.- --- �- . _ ___ `Pending Mounting Accessories � . ; ; }r- g � � \�. �♦ il��v� : �. ..o ,.: :.. �-'J� WFP WFPA 106 WPSBB WPBB ."� �WBB Gask��h:it Order Code WP-KIT 4486 Nlounting Options: ' ; Backboxes,Plates,Gasket Kits ; FEush PPates F — — —; WFPA-R Red 4698 Surface Mvunt Flush i WFPA-W White 4701 ! Exposed Conduit �Concealed Conduit �a°�}t ! WFP-R Red 4696 ---------------------�------- ' WFP-VV White 4697 RSSWP Strobes � WPSBB —�WPSBB+WP-KIT WFP i BarkEsaxes ET70WP Speaker Strobes�— IOB i �OB+WP-KIT 1NFP � 106-R Red 5046 ASWP Horn Strobes i WPBB I WPBB+WP-KIT WFPA � IOB-W White 5047 — a i WPSBB-R Red 9751 AHWP Horns � WBB j - WFP WPSBB-W 1Nhite 3033 ET-1010 Speakers ( V1lBB � - WFP � WPBB-P. Red 9014 — � WPBB-W White 4692 MTWP Multitone Horn Strobes � IOB IOB+WP-KIT WFP ; WBB-R Red 2959 Multitone Horn � IOB IOB+WP-KIT WFP ; WBB-V�i White 2960 ' '---- -� SERfES MTWP APPLtANCES SYNCHRONIZED STROBE Wiring Diagrams OPERATION WITH CODED FACP >��,�_ � e � 0 �.��t` SERIES MTWP AUDIBLE APPLIANCE AND STROBE OPERATE ;:;,r IN UNISON. RED AND BLACK SHUNT-WIRES ARE SUPPLIED. '" 3 � ._-_-,_-- 0 .��,S:n - .�w.-. :LYC'�1�. F�`hi 1 + "0 NEX:' F`'�=-? - e.- r^REi_EJIA:G � :&.,- A�PLIHN;�E PPLIAN�E �_ — — ;OR EC�K. ^�: r a�� j �:.�.�:<� � Note: Strobe circuit requires constant voltage. SERIES RSSWP/ASWP APPLIANCES SYNCHRONfZED W! + '— 0 +' '-' DSM MODULE SINGLE CLASS "A" NAC CIRCUIT _.:.�3E_:� %.U�:BLE.. DSMC i ,,rF _0 SERIES RSSWP,ASWP,AHWP,MTWP AND MT-12/24 ��`�' - � APPLIANCES ,- 1 <�=��= .- � . . � k,_ FRJI�; T,� r1E_{.T;_ .. ._ � PRECEC�C�`= + >, r��r: — — I AF:�IA'`i:;_ F .,: APr^i..iF,'�i�F_ .,,. �R _��R,F � '__ _ FAC- mr_��,:�.. I -. - -/ �r� , � 2=s- -F , — , - - Note: Models are available in Red or White. Contact Customer Service for Order Code and Delivery. #Refer to Data Sheet S7000 for Mounting Options NOTE:due to continuous development of our products,specifications and offerings are subject to change without notice in accordance with Wheelock Inc.standard terms and conditions. ARCHITECTS AND ENGIlYEERS SPECIFICATIONS General Weatherproof notification appliances shail b�UL listed for outdoor use.Weatherproof Strobe appliances shall be listed under UL Standard 1638(Standard for Visual Signaling Appiiances)for Indoor/Outdoor use and UL Standard 1971 (Standard for Safety Signaling Devices `or Hearing Impaired).The appliances shail be available for optionai wall mounting or ceiling mounting to weatherproof backboxes using ither exposed conduit or concealed conduit, or semi-flush mounting to a recessed electrical box in walis or ceilings using Wheelock Imounting accessories. Weatherproof Strobes Weatherproof Strobe applian�,es shalf produce a minimum flash rate of 60 flashes per minute over the UL Regulated Voltage Range �of 16 to 33 VDC and shall incorporate a Xenon flashtube. The weatherproof strobes shall be available with UL 1971 candela ratings up to 185 ccf for wali mounting and 177 cd for ceiling mounting. UL 1638 candela ratings up to 180 cd at 77°F shall be available. The strobes shall operate over an extended temperature range of—40°F to 150°F(-40°C to 66°C)and be listed for maximum humidity of 95% RH. Strobe inputs shall be polari�ed for compatibility with standard reverse polarity supervision of circuit wiring by a Fire Alarm Control Panel(FACP). WeatherproofAuciibles and Audible/�trobe i,ombinations Weatherproof horns and multitone audibles shail be listed for Indoor/Outdoor use under UL Standard 464.The horns shall be able to produce a continuous output or a temporal code-3 output that can be synchronized. The horns shall have at least 3 sound!evel settings. HornlStrobe combinations shall be able to be synchronized on a single NAC. Multitone audibles shali be able to produce 8 distinct tones selectable by dip switch and shall have at least 2 sound level settings.Multitone AudiblelStrobe combinations shall have independent inputs for the audible and strobe. The strobes shall be able to be synchronized. 'The audibles shall be able to be coded when operated on a separate NAC. Weatherproof Speakers and Speaker/Strobes Weatherproof speakers and speakeristrobes shall be listed for Indoor/Outdoor use under UL Standard 1480.All speakers shall provide field selectable taps for 1l8W to 8W operation for either 25 VRMS or 70 VRMS audio systems and shall incorporate a sealed back construction for extra protection and improved audibility. Speakers without strobes shall be Wheelock Series ET-1010. They shall be lis±ed to produce up to 94 dBA and shall incorporate a vandal resistant grille design. Speaker with strobes shall be Wheelock Series ET70WP.They shall be available for surface or semi-flush mounting to walis or ceilings and shall be listed to produce up to 93 dBA. Synchronization Modules When synchronization of strobes or temporal code-3 audiblss is required,the appliances shall be compatible with the Wheelock Series SM, DSM Sync Modules,Wheelock Power Supplies or other manufacturers paneis with built-in Wheelock Patented Sync Protocol.The strobes and audibies shali not drift out of synchronization at any time during operation. Series ASWP audibles and strobes shall be abie to be synchronized on a 2-wire circuit with the ability±o silence the audible if required. The strobes on Series MT muititone audible/strobe appliances shall be abie to be synchronized and shall be abie to be operated on a separate circuit from the audibies while the audible circuit is connected to a coded or conti�uous NAC. Neatherproof Mounting Accessories Weatherproof mounting options shall include surface mounting or semi-flush mounting to wails or ceilings.Surface mounted appliances shall mount to Wheelock 106, WBB, WPBB or WPSBB weatherproof backboxes using either exposed conduit or concealed conduit. For concealed conduit the wsatherproof backbox shall be mounted to a recessed efectrical box with Wheelock's WP-KIT to provide a weatherproof seal for the electrical box.Semi-fiush mounted appliances shall mount to a recessed electrical box using Wheel�ck WFP or WFPA flush plates to provide a weatherproof seal between the electrical box and the appliance. /�r�.�.-�.� � WE ENCOURAGE AND SUPPORT NICET CERTIFICATION 3 YEAR WARRANTY Made in USA S9004 WP 05l08 � ,� � .� :�� CooperNotificationis WIl2@IOCIC° MEDC SAFEPATH" WA�E� R°� COOPERNotification s� � COOPER Notification � Series SM and DSM Sync Modules Series SM or��DS��M�; �.___.._: Description Features The Wheelock Series SM and DSM Syn�Modules are utilized . Approvals include: UL Standard 1971, ULC, New York City with the SeriesAS/AH,Series NS/NS4/NH,Series RSS,Series (MEA),California State Fire Marshal(CSFM)and Chicago RSSP, Series SLM and selected strobe applications with other (gFP) Wheelock combination appliances. When used with Series AS Audible Strobes and/or Series ' Uniquely designed to accept an independent strobe and NS Horn Strobes, the SM and DSM Sync Modules provide audible input from the FACP and convert to a single output independent operation of synchronized temporal pattern(code that connects to Whee►ock's Series AS or Seriss NS family of 3) horn and synchronized strobe flash, as well as the ability to audible strobes silence the horn while maintaining the strobe flash.while using • Series SM and DSM Sync Modules can also be used to only a single pair of wires. The sync modules are available in synchronize Wheelock's Series RSS, RSSP and SLM 5ync two versions;the SM-12/24 for control of a Class B NAC circuit; Strobes and a dual output version,the DSM-12/24 for control of eithsr a . 3 ampere per circuit current handling at 12 or 24 VDC Class A or two(2)Class B NAC circuits. • Low operating current draw • Compatible with all standard fire alarm control pansls • Meets the NFPA-72 requirement for Temporal Pattern when used with the Series AS/AH and/or Series NS/NS4/NH • 3 year warranty POWERPATHCP AS/AH, NS, HS4/HS FIRE ALARM POWERPATHMP NH, RSS, RSSP, CONTROL PANEL OR SM OR DSM E w/STB, ET w/STB, (FACP) OTHER POWER CH w/STB BOOSTERS APPLIANCES SM or DSM Connection Diagram with Power Booster �L �w��M� ,A�� FM y IVI EA �� APPROVED E5946 151-92-E 7300-0785:132 Table 1:Sync Module(SM)Current Requirements(AMPS) Table2:Sync Module(DSM)Current Requirements(AMPS) UL ULC Rated Average Rated Peak Rated Inrush UL ULC Rated Average Rated Peak Rated Inrush Voltage Voltage Current Current Current Voltage Voltage Current Current Current In1 Audible In1 Audible in1 Audible �Inl/ln2 Audible In1/In2 Audible Inl/ln2 Audible 8.0 VDC �10.5 VDC 0.017 0.004 0.055 0.004 0.140 0.016 8.0 VDC 10.5 VDC 0.019 0.004 0.055 0.004 0.150 0.016 12.0 VDC 12.0 VDC 0.017 0.004 0.060 0.004 0.160 0.019 12.0 VDC 12.0 VDC 0.020 0.004 0.064 0.004 0.170 0.019 24.0 VDC 124.0 VDC 0.028 0.008 0.070 0.008 0.320 0.030 I24.0 VDC 24.0 VDC 0.035 0.008 0.080 0.008 0.342 0.030 33.0 VDC 33.0 VDC 0.038 0.010 0.080 0.010 0.440 0.040 33.0 VDC 33.0 VDC 0.045 0.010 0.090 0.010 0.470 0.040 8.0 VRMS �8.0 VRMS 0.026 0.006 �0.085 0.008 0.210 0.016 8.0 VRMS 8.0 VRMS 0.028 0.005 0.107 0.008 0.210 0.016 12.0 VRMS�12.0 VRMS�0.028 0.006 0.090 0.009 0.225 0.019 12.0 VRMS 12.0 VRMS 0.030 0.006 0.103 0.009 0.240 0.019 24.0 VRMS 24.0 VRMS 0.040 0.010 0.120 0.015 0.446 0.033 24.0 VRMS 24.0 VRMS 0.048 0.010 0.145 0.015 0.480 0.033 33.0 VRMS'31.0 VRMS 0.055 0.012 0.150 0.022 0.645 0.056 33.0 VRMS 31.0 VRMS 0.062 � 0.012 0.175 0.022 0.685 0.056 NOTE:All CAUTIONS and WARNINGS are identified by the symbol�. All warnings are printed in bold capital letters. �WARNING: PLEASE READ THESE SPECIFICATIONS AND INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS CAREFULLY BEFORE USING, SPECIFYING OR APPLYING THIS PRODUCT. FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH ANY OF THESE INSTRUCTIONS,CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS COULD RESULT IN IMPROPER APPLICATION,INSTALLATION AND/OR OPERATION OF THESE PRODUCTS IN AN EMERGENCY SITUATION,WHICH COULD RESULT IN PROPERTY DAMAGE,AND SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO YOU AND/OR OTHERS. j� WARNING:MAKE SURE THAT THE TOTAL CURRENT REQUIRED BY ALL APPLIANCES THAT ARE CONNECTED TO A SM OR DSM DOES NOT EXCEED 3.OA OR EXCEED THE RATING OF THE FIRE ALARM CONTRO�PANEL'S PRIMARY AND SECONDARY POWER SOURCES AND NAC CIRCUITS.OVERLOADING THESE SOURCES COULD RESULT IN LOSS OF POWER AND FAILURE TO ALERT OCCUPANTS DURING AN EMERGENCY,WHICH COULD RESULT IN PROPERTY DAMAGE AND SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO YOU AND/OR OTHERS. When calculating the total current,use Tables 1&2 to determine the highest value of"Rated Average CurcenY'for the SM or DSM(across the listed volt- age range),then add this value to the total current for any other appliances powered by the same source and include any required safety factors.Refer to Instruction Sheet for addtionai information. �WARNING:MAKE SURE THAT ALL FUSES USED ON NAC CIRCUITS ARE RATED TO HANDLE THE MAXIMUM INRUSH OR PEAK CURRENT FROM ALL APPLIANCES ON THOSE CIRCUITS. FAILURE TO DO THIS MAY RESULT IN LOSS OF POWER TO THE NAC CIRCUIT AND THE FAILURE OF ALL APPLIANCES ON THAT CIRCUIT TO OPERATE,WHICH COULD RESULT IN PROPERTY DAMAGE AND SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO YOU AND/OR OTHERS. Table 3: Current Consumption of the SM and DSM Modules Outpurt Circuit Description of SM/DSM Module SM DSM Ref.Fig. Module Module Class"B"with Audibte Silence (single circuit) Y 1 �Class"B"with No Audible Silence (single circuit) Y 2 Class"B"with Audible Silence (dual circuit) Y 3 Class"B"with No Audible Silence (dual circuit) Y 4 Class"A"with Audible Silence (single circuit) Y 5 Class"A"with No Audible Silence (single circuit) Y 6 Note: SM Sync Modules are rated for 3.0 amperes at 12/24 VDC; DSM Dual Sync Modules are rated for 3.0 amperes per circuit.The maximum number of interconnected DSM modules is twenty(20�. �CAUTION: Use SM or DSM Sync Modules only on NAC circuits with continuously applied voltage. Do not use SM or DSM Sync Modules on coded or interrupted NAC circuits in which the applied voltage is cycled on and off. �,CAUTION: Power Boosters may be used in conjunction with the SM or DSM Sync Modules only in the order shown below. Only one SM or DSM Sync Module shall be allowed on a NAC circuit. Do not connect Power Booster to the NAC circuit after the one SM or DSM Sync Module.Exception:The Wheelock PS-24-8MC Power Booster can be connected either before or after the SM or DSM Sync Module. Refer to Power Booster instruction manual for proper application and installation. � �� e�o�r:e� 1�5tSFflR.�CkRj . . zrxa uaouc� � .097YC f,PPtbcM� itC7.RtM f i k11 � < F �3 � a cwr., •w s.�.:re+€ � • t P �~1 J� YMG91 C/} � #� a'�t, A T . .. P .� T� . . . - :}ipM1�9RM�8,.� r •aucru ..... . .... �d4L�. 'wrrtt � �7vFix74s►c��n . ,z �on.ceu . . . _.wa.�u� - � FIG. 1 SINGLE C;LASS"B°CIKCUI 1 WI I H FFG.2 SINGLE CLASS"B"CIRCUIT W�TH NO AUDIBLE AUDIBLE SILENCE FEATURE SILENCE FEATURE (!p{ai.e'.l1G��Mt➢UfP1 E'� O UAF.@ YN�IiPP�J1.F.. crr»a.�a.€ . �y.eR�� rvwiaM�c�.�e�3 Q�.� xa m � ��re�t e+�....� w�e.r �kMtik+wcc �.se e ..... _ .. . . ' � r. xiv� ' »xa�• � • raei�i'!F � wl�oitla.et�. .� . . . . _ 'i e'pwR:�.�.TAFNt.YMY_r.. �� w�.+�m�.��. F r�ar.., �Yqffl44..!F .. .. A `�T .esYw�'�a�oKi ... •.�r.e�. „r ^ m..E yj. .. �,T t4�t�:��rw.R4.u,N6#� � ...... a....�eya ..� ♦M�.• • 1 Rw F4�:n ... ... � xew�rtW . ♦ ' ..n��e {"� 4x . . .i�lif Wi�ti •� •.�. f:ri49VNYt? �x!exc.♦ •�rw�.1 i. cd.1:M�i @ . ri FIG. 3 DUAL�LASS"B"CIRCUIT WITH AUDIBLE FIG.4 DUAL CLASS"B"CIRCUIT WITH NO AUDIBLE SILENCE FEATURE SILEN�E FEATURE ONAA MY N��RlYi044� lY.4�r�tw:Kii�j4,� LTIIbiIR@ �� yy�s�L fNYMFL n.. �k{'w< � •.� � _�. � •.y.• •6eRt ... ,.... . F •�ueaw��.r • •»,•• ....... ` ' .aeews.e� . • . ... . .. � ..-. .._�. . .Wa:t - ' ..... � . . . . .�.. . '�-�E Mi4MW4.. ^ .As w�risuwee •�e,x��; Mi±Sw�i R+s+«k <»,Y .�.e-.:,.,� FIG. 5 SINGLE CLASS"A"CIRCUIT WITH FIG.6 SINGLE CLASS"A"CIRCUIT WITHOUTAUDIBLE AUDIBL�SILENCE FEATURE SILENCE FEATURE Notes 1. Non-Sync Appliances can be installed before or after a SM or DSM. If tha Non-Sync appliance requires audible silence,four wire connection is necessary with the strobe circuit connected before the SM or DSM NAC circuit, and the audible leads connected to a silenceable NAC circuit from the FACP. 2. The audible appliance produces a momentary interruption(approximately 25ms)each time the strobes flash. 3. Circuit#2 may be omitted if oniy 1 circuit is required when using the DSM. 4. Non-Sync Audible Appliances can be installed on the audible NAC. Be aware of the current requirement for the SM or DSM module. See table 3. Specifications and Ordering/nformation R=Red Input Average * RMS current ratings are per UL average RMS method. UL max Model Order Volta e Current UL Mounting Code g @ 12 or Max" Options"' current rating is the maximum RMS current within the listed volt- VDC 24 VDC age range(16-33v for 24v units). Fcr strobes the UL max current is usually at the minimum listed voltage (16v for 24v units). For SM-12/24-R 6369 12 0.017 0.023 W audibles the max current is usually at the maximum listed voltage 24 0.028 0.038 W (33v for 24v units). For unfiltered FWR ratings, see installation DSM-12/24-R*" 6374 12 0.020 0.026 �/�/ �nstructions. *`Refer to Data sheet#S7000 for Mounting Options. 24 0.035 0.055 W *��The maximum number of interconnected DSM modules is twenty(20). The total distance from the first to the last DSM shall not exceed 1,000 feet of#18 AWG wire. Use only#18 AWG wire. �WARNING:THESE APPLIANCES WERE TESTED TO THE OPERATING VOLTAGE LIMITS OF 8-33 VOLTS USING FILTERED DC OR UNFILTERED FULL-WAVE RECTIFIED(FWR).DO NOTAPPLY 80%AND 110%OF THESE VOLTAGE VALUES FOR SYSTEM OPERATION.THE APPLICATION OF IMPROPER VOLTAGE MAY RESULT IN DEGRADED OPERATION OR DAMAGE TO THESE PRODUCTS,WHICH COULD RESULT IN PROPERTY DAMAGE AND SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO YOU AND/OR OTHERS. .Vheelock products must be used within their published specifications and must be PROPERLY specified, applied, installed, operated, maintained and operationally tested in accordance with their installation instructions at the time of installation and at least twice a year or more often and in accordance with local, state and federal codes, regulations and laws. Specification, application, installation, operation, maintenance and testing must be performed by qualified personnel for proper operation in accordance with all of the latest National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), Underwriters'Laboratories(UL), National Electrical Code(NEC), Occupational Safety and Nealth Administration(OSHA),local,state,county, province,district,federal and other applicable building and fire standards,guidelines, regulations, laws and codes including, but not limited to, all appendices and amendments and the requirements of the local authority having jurisdiction(AHJ). �WARNING:CONTACT WHEELOCK FOR"INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS" (P83123-SM 8 P83177-DSM)AND"GENERAL INFORMATION"SHEET ON THESE PRODUCTS.These documents do undergo periodic changes. IL is important that you have current information on these products.These materials contain important information that should be read prior to specifying or installing these products including: • TOTAL CURRENT REQUIRED BY ALL APPLIANCES CONNECTED TO SYSTEM SECONDARY POWER SOURCES. • FUSE RATINGS ON NAC CIRCUITS TO HANDLE MAXIMUM INRUSH OR PEAK CURRENTS FROM ALLAPPLIANCES ON THOSE NAC CIRCUITS. • COMPOSITE FLASH RATE FROM MULTIPLE STROBES WITHIN A PERSON'S FIELD OF VIEW. • THE VOLTAGE APPLIED TO THESE PRODUCTS MUST BE WITHIN THEIR RATED IN PUT VOLTAGE RANGE. • INSTALLATION IN OFFICE AREAS AND OTHER SPECIFICATION AND INSTALLATION ISSUES. • USE STROBES ONLY ON NAC CIRCUITS WITH CONTINUOUSLY APPLIED OPERATING VOLTAGE. DO NOT USE STROBE ON CODED OR INTERRUPTED NAC CIRCUITS IN WHICH THE APPLIED VOLTAGE IS CYCLED ON AND OFF AS THE STROBE MAY NOT FLASH. Architects and Engineers Specifications The sync modules shall be Wheelock Series SM or DSM Sync Modules.Series SM or DSM Sync Modules shall be the master control- lers for Wheelock Series AS/AH, NS/NS4/NH, RSS, RSSP and appliances where a synchronized audible/visual audible or visual only appliance is specified.All modules shall be UL listed under Standard 464. Series SM and DSM modules sha�l be designed to interface with Series AS Audibl�Strobe Appliances and NS Horn Strobe Appliances to produce a syn- chronized temporal (Code 3)horn as well as synchronized strobe flash on a two-wire alarm circuit. Other synchronized products are the Wheelock Series RSS, RSSP, SLM visuai only appliances and Series AH and NH Horn Appliances. �M Sync Module shall incorporate two input NAC circuits for power connection from the Fire Alarm Control Panel; one for the strobe ��AC circuit and one for the audible NAC circuit. DSM modules shall provide an additional strobe circuit inpuUoutput for control of either two Class"B" NAC circuits or a single Class"A" NAC circuit. Upon activation of the audible silence function at the Fire Alarm Control Panel,the audible signal component of Series AS Audible Strobe and/or the Series NS Horn Stobe may be silenced while maintaining strobe activation. Series SM or DSM module shall be designed and available in two versions;the SM-12/24 for control of a single Class B NAC circuit and a dual output version,the DSM-12/24 for control of either Class A two(2)Class B NAC circuits.The DSM dual circuit version shall provide the additional capability of"daisy-chaining",that is,the ability to interconnect multiple DSM's for synchronous horn and strobe operation on multiple NAC circuits. Interconnection capability shall be for a maximum of 40 NAC circuits.All modules shall operate on either 12 or 24 VDC. Rated average current requirement for the SM 12/24 shall be.017 amperes @ 12 VDC and.028 amperes @ 24 VDC.The DSM 12/24 shall be .020 amperes @ 12 VDC and .035 amperes @ 24 VDC.A single circuit SM Sync Module shall be capable of handing a 3 ampere load at 12 or 24 VDC and the dual circuit DSM Sync Module shall be capable of handling a load of 3 amperes per NAC circuit at 12 or 24 VDC. All versions shall be polarized for DC supervision and shall incorporate screw terminals for in/out field wiring of#18 to#12 AWG wire size.The SM and DSM Sync modules shall mount to a 4-11/16"x 2-1/8"deep backbox. NOTE: Due to continuous development of our products,specifications and offerings are subject to change without notice in accordance with Wheelock Inc.standard terms and conditions. �� ' WE ENCOURAGE AND SUPPORT NICET CERTIFICATION 3YEAR WARRANTY Made in USA S3000 SM/DSM 02/08 � �� .� :�� CooperNotificationisWheelock° MEDr► SAFEPATH WAVE� ��S„t�J COOPERNotification J _ � - s m • • �� ,_��_ Hangers m � Features °° � ° Fig. 1 & 2 �e p m • Permits preassembly of wire and F; � f� 2 F� 3A plain rod (#8, '/a'and'/e"), g� g� g Fig. 3 &4 �� y • Permits wire or chain drops from Fig. 38 �'�9ee D�' concrete or wood. o ° ��ket Fig.5 0 • Rod hanger available for 1'/4"and � inciudes v<-zo x��° '/e"threaded rod with or without round nead screw thread impression. � � Fig. 5 Fig. 4 � �/ Applications /�� 1./ �° � Sizing Chart STATIC QTY. PART FIG. LOAD PER NUMBER NO. DESCRIPTION LIMIT BOX 708 1 For#8 wire or '/4" plain rod 160 Ibs. 100 6A 2 For'/e" plain rod 160 Ibs. 100 AB 3A Angle bracket w/'/4" hole 160 Ibs. 100 AFAB3 3B Angle bracket with '/<"slotted 160 Ibs. 100 hole and 3/,6" mounting hole. AFAB4 3B '/<"mounting hole 350 Ibs. 50 (includes'/<-20 x'/e"round head screw) AFAB6 3B '/a"mounting hole 350 Ibs. 50 (includes'/d'2O X 3/a°round head screw) AO 4 Offset bracket w/'/<" hole 160 Ibs. 100 6T 5 For'/4" or'/a" threaded 160 Ibs. 100 rod nuts required 4TI 5 For '/4" threaded rod 160 Ibs. 100 with thread impression � 6TI 5 For'/a" threaded rod 160 Ibs. 100 � with thread impression � � Ph: 1-800-25-CRDDY' �� 202 www.erico.com - _ _- :�s� ? � _ � � - ° Y � - i _�e -_ - - Now w;rn Slalled Hex� �'3 Phiilips 6 � d2 Rabertsaa Comba Nead ��ACADDYerc(urlve __ Sizing Chart STATIC Qnr. PART FIG. LOAD PER NUMBER NO. DESCRIPTION LIMIT BOX BC 1 Beam clamp thru '/z"flange 100 Ibs. 100 BCISN375 2 Beam clamp thru '/z" flange'/e" smart nut 100 Ibs. 100 BC812M 3 '/2" to 3/4" conduit to beam thru '/z" flange 100 Ibs. 100 BC16M 3 1" conduit to beam thru '/z"flange 100 Ibs. 100 BC20M 3 1'/4" conduit to beam thru '/z" flange 100 Ibs. 100 BC24M 3 1'/z" conduit to beam thru '/2"flange 100 Ibs. 50 BC32M 3 2" conduit to beam thru 'h"flange 100 Ibs. 50 BC812MSM 4 '/i' to 3/<" conduit to beam thru '/z" flange 25 Ibs. 100 BC16MSM 4 1" conduit to beam thru '/z" flange 25 Ibs. 100 BC20MSM 4 1'/4' conduit to beam thru '/2" flange 25 Ibs. 100 BC24MSM 4 1'/2" conduit to beam thru '/z" flange 25 Ibs. 50 BC32MSM 4 2" conduit to beam thru '/2' flange 25 Ibs. 50 BC8P 5 '/z' conduit to beam thru '/z" flange 25 Ibs.* 100 BC12P 5 '/<" conduit to beam thru '/2'flange 25 Ibs.'` 100 BC16P 5 1" conduit to beam thru '/2" flange 25 Ibs.* 100 BC8PSM 6 '/z' conduit to beam thru '/2'flange 15 Ibs.'` 100 BC12PSM 6 3/4" conduit to beam thru '/z" flange 15 Ibs.* 100 BC16PSM 6 1" conduit to beam thru '/z"flange 15 Ibs.* 100 'Ultimate static load limit. � Ph: 1-800-25-CRDDY� '� www.erico.com 79 ,� �. �� - . , � � , -� _ = s --± _ `--_��_-_ - - : Beam Clamps � Features F;g. , �J � Easy installation for beam flanges '/a"to 5/a". � a Supports '/4'threaded rod, '/<"threaded � bridle rings and boxes. • Available riveted to conduit clips '/Z'thru 2". • Bright zinc finish. F�g Z N�OTE: See Misc. Components section for threaded britlle rings (p,173). Threaded hole on back and bottom. Applications - \ , Now wfrn / � � Slnlfed Ner � . N3 Phillips 8 XZ Robedmn Cam6n Nead �ACAOOYeulusrve Eliminates offset bending conduit 5 i z i n g C h a rt Static load limit 100 Ibs. PART FIG. QTl(. NUMBER NO. RIGID EMT PER BOX BC200 1 — — 50 BC200 CDOB 2 '/z" '/z" 50 BC200 CD1B 2 3/<" '/<" 50 BC200 CD2B 2 1" 1" 50 BC200 CD2.56 2 — 1'/4" 50 BC200 CD3B 2 1'/4" 1'/z" 50 BC200 CD4B 2 1'/�" — 25 BC200 CD5B 2 2" 2" 25 � Big Beam Clamp Ideal for Electrical, � IMechanical and HVAC Applications Staticloadlimit2001bs. Pn�r Qnr. NUMBER DESCRIPTION PER BOX BC400 For'/a" threaded rod or'/e" - 16 25 Ibolts to beam flange through '/<" • � . � Ph: 1-800-25-CADOY° ��• 80 www.erico.co m _ ;� � ��`�,.� � I� � _� - -- -. �.,, _ . _ �, . _ _._ ..o _ w. � _ __ � ; , , ' T-Grid ,� � � i' PATENT °� � I NUMBER 5,619,263 � � Box Hanger , a�� { �� :' Features � � 510HD Serles � = Mounts a box to T-grid One 510HD box mounting � _� in less than 30 seconds. dlp Is Induded with each �� '� � Now height atljustable for 512ND and 512HDEEP. �5 � various electrical box depths. � � i 3 Installs by hand. �� Drop wire for independent " � support from clip and/or bar. 512liD Serles � = Screws easil to tee bar for - Standard bar mounts 2'18" � y box-break off tabs for �Y*, added stability. 1'/z"deep box Mounts flush ,`��'� a Multiple box installations. with face of tile. ��- ��-. � Double tleep box installations with ° �° � 512HDXT Extension Brackets. � '� - - �{ y Not permitted for patldle fans. - �.: � o - � � 512HDEEP Series �� ; � � �•� �•� 512HDEEP with additional �� ' 512HDXT mounts 2'/B"deep � � box with 1'/�"exter�slon rin9• - - � � _� r'�. , �_. :l e o _ _ - � Applications °o � � -:; o0 �` � � `' Sizin Chart g Ultimate load limit 50 Ibs,per bar ��_SK � `; P,e►�rr anr. � ; NUMBER DESCRIPTION PER BOX � ' �14 ; 512HD$ Heavy-duty electrical box hanger 25 �`� i with box mounting clip -24" span j 512HDTC* Heavy-duty electrical box hanger 25 � � with box mounting clip -24° � � I 510HD Box mounting clip can be purchased 100 �� separately for multiple box requirements � i 510HDTC* Box mounting clip can be purchased 100 � ' separately for multiple box requirements �� :, � 512HDXT� Extension bracket 35/e" height (25 secs) 50 ��-� i 512HDEEP$ Heavy-duty electrical box hanger 25 �;,;-' with extension bracket-35/e" height �`��` ' 512HDEEPTC* Heavy-duty electrical box hanger 25 ; with extension bracket-35/e" height � �r ; *For Canadian boxes. $Tall grid compatible. � i � + � � Ph: 1-800-25-CRDOY' ��• 186 www.erico.com � ; �� I o . Box Mounting Brackets For Between Studs Features • Supports electrical boxes, plaster �° p rings or low voltage devices from ° o0 one bracket. • Accommodates up to four 4"or °� o0 4"1�6"baxes. oo , • Mounts 1'/2'or 2'/a"deep boxes. R�S16 • Eliminates the need for an electrical box on low voltage applications, �00000�00: Applications RBS24 00 0 0° ° � o° / °o 0 . � � � � (� [awProlile W/11 NOT o bu/ge M drywa/i W Ori!!Poinf lor ease a( .� lns7aHatioe SMSB Minimum of one mounting screw required on each side of the bracket. Sizing Chart PART QTY. NUMBER DESCRIPTION PER BOX RBS16 Mounts up to three 4" or 4"/�6" 25 boxes/plaster rings 16" bracket RBS24 Mounts up to four 4" or 4"/,6" 25 boxes/plaster rings 24" bracket � , � � Ph: 1-800-25-CFiDOY' �� 134 www.erico.com � r,. � � �.:.r y;� 4 ' - ,,--..�^�^g.°+..a°,�ur^�.�.�;":'x"^.°'� �`r�# F��i 7;y.1�.'�s�a"'� I{ I �. � � 4-,�,_,i �'�3! 4 11 M '„_Fd_4 . �� .. � - � � . ... ... '.. -. ' �. .,.."_'' � { i- I _:'... _. '.,.._, _ .._:..� . .__,.... . ...._�._.._ . _._� .. .. .��_ _.... . '"' ..��__..�.�__._ .. � Old Work �a�c ' sn�,�S ; Box Mount � e� � , Features ��/V`'� ; Both DSI2A } � One-piece, break-apart design is � easier to handle. S�r � � Works on drywall, lathe and plaster; � f only a drywail saw required. �� D5B F�g. � � �� Fastener instalis before the box to free up �— z-��2" ' �� your hands. �' ,� � Accommodates single or multiple gang m �'��`� boxes; for multiple gang boxes, � � use (2) DSB's. i ; �� ' � �3 Can be placed at different locations on an �_- � electrical box to allow for more clearance. F;g, z � � ' DSB ; � ; � � � :� , � Applications �< , �, , ;v.:; , . ;t.�'��.'.,-. � �,��,'-.�� 0 �i ,'� �O � �� I ° � � } ; �k 1 � + �� r � �o � y�� " Fig. 1 Fig. 2 � i � a � ' �^ � 5 iz i n g C h a rt No Load Rating-Positioning Only �� PART FIG. WALL QTY. NUMBER NO. DESCRIPTION THICIaIESS PER BOX ��«` i DS12A 1 Old work box mount Up to 1'/z' 100 sets � . , ��, ; DSB 2 Old work box mount '/4" to 1'/<" 100 sets �=s:-; "�`_ � � . i � � . � - - - Ph: 1 800 25 CRDDY, ��• 146 www.erico.com �.._:'.�� J . Box Mounting ��g� ' p � o Bracket For ° , Electric Box_ _� p p ° O Features • Easily attaches 4"and 4"/�6'outlet boxes to metal stud (HS3 switch boxes). f� z No�PR��D1 • Support leg reduces movement g '�sw�rcHBO,�r�"C� of box in wall. �� • Can be attached to metal or wood stud. o ° • Offset design antl use of CADDYJ O o #SMS8 low profile seif-tapping screws (not included) reduce dry wall bulge. ° � 0 • Delivers compliance with: NEC Article 300.4(d) when used for 4"and 4"/,6"outlet boxes to metal or wood studs. CEC Rule 12-3012 for 4" and 4"I�6� LawProrile W1LL NOT outlet boxes to metal or wood studs. O ;,°�,� Oril!Paint lor eace ol � inslallaliurt Applications s�ss 0 0 m m � 0 Sizing Chart Postionng10tnly PART FIG. BOX STUD QTY. NUMBER NO. APPLICATION SIZE(S) DEPTH PER BOX H23 1 U.S. 4"sq.&4"/+6" 2'h"&3'/�' 100 H23TC 1 Canada 4"sq.&4"/�e' 2'/:"&3'h" 100 H4 1 U.S. 4"sq.&4"/,fi" 4" 50 H6 1 U.S. 4"sq.8�4"/+s" 6" 50 H46TC 1 Canada 4"sq.&4"/�s" 4"&6" 100 HS3 2 U.S.&Canada Switch 2'/2'&3'/2' 100 � � � Ph: 1-800-25-CF�DOY' ��° 126 www.erico.com e ROMEX° NMC And MC/AC Cable Support For Studs Features • Provides secure support of NMC or �C20 MC/AC to metal/wood stud in seconds. � One fastener, four applications. • No tools required. • Delivers compliance with: NEC 300.4(d), CEC 12-618 and CEC 12-510. NOTE:When supporting NMC in Canada, FXC20 can only be used on wood stud. Applications , o � I UL�cUL Listed Sizing Chart PositioningOnly PAar ar�r. NUMBER DESCRIPTION PER BOX FXC20 NMC sizes 14-2 with 100 ground thru 12-3 with ground MC/AC cable sizes 14-2 thru 12-3 to studs O ROMEX is a registered trademark of Genera!Cable Corp. i � Ph: 1-800-25-CRDDY° � " www.erico.com 141 . • Screw G u n PATENT NUMBERS B ox B ra c ket 4��57,967&5,386,959 For Between Studs �o; Features s�B Preset • Can mount multiple 1'/i'or 2'/e"deep boxes. Notched and marked for easy identification Fiq. � and bending. ' Improved design with stamped inch markings and pilot holes accelerates precise box and conduit mounting between studs. o o°°o i� • Pilot holes allow easy box o0�°D� / ° attachment with a screwdriver. °o°o° ° TSGB • Requires only a screw gun fo install, ° Adjustable � • Reduces movement of the box when � F�g. z used with flexible conduit, ENT, MC, AC or ROMEX.� • Can be mounted on face or inside of stud, SGB (Preset) • Preset for studs 16"or 24"on center. • Can be preassembletl by the contractor to allow for greater production at thejob site. TSGB (Adjustable) • Adjustable for non-stantlard stud spacing. • Unique, one-piece, break apart design. I/'��. �,<i;,a; /.� '�y'/T . bulAe • Interlocking tab prevents accidental disassembly. °�° �;Orlll Pelnl fai eue a/ InS�BI/dllon Appiications Minimum ofone mounting screw SAI�S8 required on each side of the bracket. � a 60 \ � No more : time-consuming �•;-.'� field fabrication � , with scrap '�>`-� S i z i n g C h a rt floor track. : __2 PART FIG. STUD BOX NUMBER NO. DESCRIPTION SPACING DEPTH SGB16A' 1 Preset 16" OC 1'/Z" or 2'/a" SGB24Aff 1 Preset 24" OC 1'/z" or 2'le" TSGB16* 2 Adjustable 11"to 18" 1'/2' or 2'/e" TSGB24* 2 Adjustable 17"to 26" 1'/i' or 2'/a" Ruantity 50 per box. 'Replaces SGB16&SGB16D "Replaces SGB24&SGB24D * Preassembled brackets available-contact ERICO` I � ROMEX is a registered trademark of General Cable Corp. Ph: 1-800-25-CRDOY° � `' www.erico.com 135 � � �� E�ig � .� ,� � � � �� . �.�..Y.y�..________,�...� .� Bridle Rmgs not Plai n, Th readed re��mendedfor hi h erformance And Wood Screw �ables,seeCADDY° CABLECAT series Bridle Rings �.� � Features � When combined with other CADDY�' EA� Fasteners, Bridle Rings can be located on: � Beam Flanges up to '/<"— 2FMP28, Fig. 1 BC, BC200, M912. �A a Drop Wire —4Z34 - 6Z34. � Concrete—4TIB. ��,:;,.=:� o "C" Purlins—VF144TI. A� Fig. 2 g "Z" Purlins — 1224T1 or AF144TI. , Acoustical T-Grid—ATS41 or ATA4L � �; ��` Fig. 3 �,�:-:.,-;:; Applications `� ; � -, 0 : � � � .� S i z i n g C h a rt Ultimate static load limit 50 Ibs 4 �� R�=� � PART FIG. QTY. � � NUMBER NO. "A"DIM. STOCK DIA. PER BOX � � � 2BR8 1 '/2" #8 wire (.162) 100 � �'� ��,��: 2BR12 1 '/4" #8 wire .162 100 � �-� � ) �� -�; 2BR20 1 1'/4" #8 wire (.162) 100 � � � �. 2BR32 1 2" #8 wire (.162) 100 �� 2BRT8 2 '/z" 10-24 threaded 100 ��_�_�. 2BRT12 2 '/4" 10-24 threaded 100 �4 2BRT20 2 1'/4" 10-24 threaded 100 2BRT32 2 2" 10-24 threaded 100 - 4BRT20 2 1'/4" '/4-20 threaded 100 ^' 4BRT32 2 2" '/<-20 threaded 100 � ,i 46RT64 2 4" '/4-20 threaded 50 � 4BRT20WS 3 1'/4" #14 wood screw thread 100 -.:: j 4BRT32WS 3 2" #14 wood screw thread 100 � � I � Ph: 1-800-25-CRD�Y° , ' www.erico.com 173 - � s • . • � M C/AC Ca b l e To M eta I St u d Features = • Attaches MC or AC to metal n � stud easily. �� • Requires no special tools. �� : • Provitles fast installation. �� e� � s�pa�e 65, 75 Applications , � � , � � , � � , � � , � � , � � , � � , � � , � � � � � � , � - � � , , =:�I � � � � � , � � , � � , � � , � � , � � For concealed work check application with local inspection autl�orities. S i z i n g C h a rt No Load Rating-Positioning Only PnRr anr. NUMBER CABLE SIZE PER BOX 449 14-2 (.433-.475 O.D.) 100 449 14-3 (.453-.500 O.D.) 100 449 12-2 (.467-.510 O.D.) 100 449 12-3 (.489-.535 O.D.) 100 I � Ph: 1-800-25-CRDOY° � ' www.erico.com 71 _. _ _ _ . o e . • Cable/Conduit Series From Drop Wire Support ab�� Features YY� • Supports cable and conduit � without bentling drop wire. • Faster installation than F'g. � traditional methods. NOTE: May require detlicated drop wire/rod and EC311 (See Pgs. 34, 45, 190) — Consult local authority. � Fig.2 Applications S i z i n g C h a rt Ultimate Static Load 25 Ibs. PART FIG QTY. NUMBER NO. DESCRIP'iION PER BOX PCS1 1 Flexible cable support from 100 #8-#12 drop wire for MC/AC 14-2 through 12-3 with ground up to .600 O.D. PCS2 2 Conduit/cable support from 100 #8-#12 drop wire for '/2" and 3/4" EMT, MC/AC up to .900 O.D. � � � Ph: 1-800-25-CRDOY° �� 56 www.erico.com � e . • Cable Snap Clip Features • Supports cable from '/�6"-'/z"flange. • Works effectively with MC and AC cable ' dimensions'/a'- 1'/4"and low voltage cables from'/az°and up. • Clip "snaps"on flange and cable"snaps" into clip. This is"snappy," SC I Applications � / i S IZ I Cl g �1 1 a rt No Load Rating-Positioning Only Y PART CABLE _ QTy, NUMBER O.D. DESCRIPTION PER BOX __ ___ _ _ __ __ - __ _ SC2A .218-.281 100 SC2B .312 -.375 Low voltage, 100 SC2C .375-.437 data and 100 SC2D .468-.562 MC/AC cable to 100 SC2E .500-.718 '/,6" thru 3/�6" 100 SC2F .750-.937 flange thickness 100 SC2G .968-1.250 100 SC4A .218-.281 100 SC4B .312-.375 Low voltage, 100 SC4C .375-.437 data and 100 SC4D .468-.562 MC/AC cable to 100 SC4E .500-.718 '/�s" thru 9/32" 100 SC4F .750-.937 flange thickness 100 SC4G .968-1.250 100 SC8A .218-.281 100 SC86 .312-.375 Low voltage, 100 SC8C .375-.437 data and 100 SC8D ,468-.562 MC/AC cable to 100 SC8E .500-.718 5/�6" thru '/z" 100 SC8F .750-.937 flange thickness 100 SC8G .968-1.250 100 � � Ph: 1-800-25-CRDOY' ��• 72 www.erico.com s � I � >>� .:�"�';`� 'ya �-�� j`� � - — — , _ _, __ _ . _. __ _ _ . _ _ _._. ._. � _____ � � _ � °.� Snap On ��;�. . �ra �.n Fixture/ 6��„ � ; , Box Hanger `r►vusefr�a Features s�p�e 186 _ � Snaps easily onto tee bar. _� Hanger comes complete with box o�� 512 mounting dip and '/�-20 screw, � 00 � � Supports from acoustical tee bar as well as main structure with the use Packaged 50 per box of a dro wire. One CHB mounting P dip Is Included with 5 Dual height feature permits 1'/z"deep each No.512. electrical box to be mounted flush with tile or off-set'/a"for plaster ring. _ _ � 512A is height adjustable up to 8"allowing you to install double deep boxes, speaker 512A cases and emergency light fixtures above acoustical tee. " � Not permitted for paddle fans. �� . �� T � �i � �S �� i' B ;�: 1 Applications - ct�B D o 7 � ��0 0° CHB can be purchased separately when more than one box is requlred. S i z i n g C h a rt Screw fumished. PnRr anr. NUMBER DESCRIPTION PER BOX S3575BP50 '/4 - 20 x 3/e' round head screw 50 S102438BP* 10-24 1/2" Rnd Hd Robertson screw 50 ��? 512 Electrical box hanger- 24" span 50 , ;�� 512TC* Electrical box hanger-24" span 50 'I 51212 Electrical box hanger- 12" span 50 51220 Electrical box hanger-20" span 50 �_�__,.=,;� 51230 Electrical box hanger-30" span 50 ,:�� CHB Box mounting clip 100 =_ CHBTC* Box mounting ciip 100 512A 8" height adjustable—24" span 50 ".;; 512ATC* 8" height adjustable—24" span 50 �.; �i ;;�� Not to exceed 20 Ibs.without independent wire support to CHB. s°� �For Canadian boxes. `-,� ."� � �- � Ph: 1-800-25-CRDDY° ° �; www.erico.com 185 ' ! � � e . "Colorado Jim,� PAT5N�Ni 5BER Cable Support NEC° Compliance ° o � ° �6 For Stud o ° Features � � 0 . New easy-to-use locking tab. % �� • Cable locating ribs to maintain cable separation. \ � . Flared edges for cable protection. Applications '�� ° o oo, o � � Law A�o1lle W!!L NU7 m 6dlge M dryWall W Dnll PnInI lor ease ol o ^ . imfallalian � o 0 o Q o SMS8 Da � ., � _ � l Sizin Chart UL&cULListed g Positioning Only _ __ _ _ PART CABLES PER NUMBER CABLETYPE CABLE SiZE FASTENER CJ6 Non-Metallic 14-2, 12-2, 10-2, 14-3, to Wood Sheathed Cable 12-3 and 10-3 w/ground 6 maximum 8-2 and 6-2 w/ground 4 maximum CJfi Metai Clad {MC) 14-2, 12-2,10-2, 14-3, to Metal Cable 12-3, 10-3,14-4, 12-4 4 maximum Stud and 10-4 w/ground CJ6S 14-4, 12-2,10-2,8-2, to Furring Armored Cable(AC) 14-3, 12-3,10-3, 14-4, 4 maximum Strip and 12-4 and 10-4 w/ground Hat Channel Flexible Conduit(BX) 5I16,'/e 4 maximum CANADA ONLY CJ61N to Non-Metallic 14-2,12-2, 10-2, 14-3, Metal Stud Sheathed Cable 12-3 and 10-3 w/ground 4 maximum Quantity 100 per box/case. � O National Electric Code(NEC)is a registered frademark of the National Fire Protection Association � ' ' Ph: 1-800-25-CFIDOY' �� 140 www.erico.com s • . o Y/ ■ �\ One-Piece ��jNBd�� ... �'G� �`�ohi//i He'1-. '��A ��am6oe sn� St r u t C I a m p `A�DY Hed� � erc%S��e SCH Series �b�� Features F'g� � • One-piece installation means no screws or bolts to drop. F%g� 2 • Installs quickly and easily. Requires only a screwdriver or nut driver for installation. � • Heavy-duty construction with o a bright zinc finish. � • Size'/a'MC/AC to 4" EMT conduit. • All sizes available with load Fig. 3 distribution plate attached to screw. Applications BrightZinc Patent No. 4,429,440 Finish / OO � _ � m _ — m ` ` � / Sizing Chart CABLE STATIC QTY. � PART FIG. O.D. LOAa PER NUMBER NO. EAfiT R1GID RANGE LJMtT BOX " SCH8 1 '/z" — — 200 100 SCH12 1 'I4" '/z" — 200 100 SCH16 1 1" '/<" — 200 100 SCH2O 1 1'/4" 1" — 200 100 SCH6B 2 '/8" MCIAC — .10"–.63" 200 100 SCH8B 2 '/z" — .34"–.71" 200 100 SCH 12B 2 3/4" '/z" .57"–.92" 200 100 SCH16B 2 1" '/4" .72"– 1.16" 200 100 SCH2OB 2 1'/<" 1" 1.00"– 1.51" 200 100 SCH24B 2 1'/z' 1'/�" 1.25"– 1.74" 350 50 SCH32B 2 2" 1'/z° 1.74"–2.20" 350 50 SCH40B 3 — 2" 2.00"—2.38" 350 25 SCH48B 3 2'/z" 2'/z' 2.38"—2.88" 350 25 SCH56B 3 3" 3" 2.72"—3.50" 350 25 SCH64B 3 3'/z" 3'Iz" 3.25"—4.00" 350 10 SCH72B 3 4" 4" 3.85"—4.50" 350 10 Ph: 1-800-25-CF7DDY° "� www.erico.com 59 � � I � Multi-Function Clip — F;g. , From Drop Wire, Plain �� Threaded Rod, or Flange � Features • Attaches to#12 wire thru '/a" rod. • Fits '/e"to'/a"flanges. • Provides attachment of conduit and boxes. • Su orts#10-24 and '/4-20 threaded bridle rin s. � PP 9 � Fig. 2 Fig. 3 � , Applications � �� Fig. 4 �� : 0 o a �: 0 , ' Eliminates offset bending condult NOTE:May require tledicated drop wire/rod and EC311(See Pgs.34,45,190)—Consult local authority. S I Z I 1�1 C 1 1 a rt Load Rating refer to Instruction g Sheet for desired application. Qnr. PART FlG. FLANGE PER NUMBER N0. DESCRIPTION WIRE SQE SI� BOX __ _ __ _ _ _ 4Z34 1 Mulfi-funcfion clip #12 wire fhru'I<" '!"'la' 100 4Z4S 2 Multi-funcfian clip with'f4-20" #12 wire thru'!4" 'Ie''la" 100 stud and hex nut 4Z34812M 3 Multi-plus'li'or'1,"conduit #12 wire thru'1<" 'la''18' 100 4Z3416M 3 Multi-plus 1"conduit #12 wire thru'14° '18"3I8� 100 4Z348P' 4 Mulfi-plus'Iz'EMT conduif #12 wire thru'l+" '18"'!9' 100 4Z3412P' 4 Mulfi-plus'I�°EMT conduil #12 wire fhru'14" 'la"=1a" 100 4Z3416P* 4 Multi-plus 1"EMT conduit #12 wire thru'I,° 'la''le" 100 6Z34 1 Mulfi-function dip 'IB'rod 'Ia''1�6° 100 6Z4S 2 Multi-funcfion clip wifh'1<-20" '18°rod '18"'hb' 100 stud and hex nut 6Z34812M 3 Multi-plus'Iz'or314'conduif 'la"rod 'la"'1,6' 100 6Z3416M 3 Multi-plus 1"conduit 'la"rod 'IB"'(,o" 100 6Z348P' 4 Multi-plus'Iz'EMT conduit '18'rod 'IB"'1�6" 100 6Z3412P* 4 Multi-plus'I�°EMT conduit 'la'rod '18"I�s' 100 6Z3416P` 4 Multi-plus 1"EMT conduit '!a'rod 'IB�'l�b° 100 *When using rigid conduit on P-Series,use next size larger clip('Iz°Rigid use 12P). � �, Ph: 1-800-25-CRDOY° � ' www.erico.com 57 • • r • r Flexible Conduit and Cable Hanger Features • Bundie runs* of MC or AC or communications cables. • Can be used with flange clips or deck clip DH2. Also AO or AB, VF14, AF14, 122-123. *Refer to local authorities and NEC Article 310 for derating ampacity when flexible power cables are used. Fig. 1 Fig. 2 Applications %� �� ,,. DIM. Bridle Rinqs not recommended for high ( performance t cables,see �� CADDY° (� CABLECAT series, v Paqes 153-165. S i z i n g C h a rt Ultimate static load limit 75 Ibs.-WMX6,50 Ibs.-WMX3 NUMBER OF RUN5 ULTIMATE OF MC1AC CABLE STATIC QTY. PART FIG. THAT MAY BE 'A" LOAD PER NUMBER NO. SUPPORTED DIM. RATING BOX WMX3 1 3 1'/a" 50# 100 WMX6 2 6 13/4" 75# 100 i � Ph: 1-800-25-CRDOY° � www.erico.com 73 Column Strut Clamps , �y � � - � _� Features Y- s. • Easy to install, as both parts clip ,� to strut during installation. _ - _ • For attachment of strut inside wide :� �� - flange column or beams. • Quick to install —tightening of � only one bolt is required. • Electrogalvanized finish. ��_,�A = - s � , � z�� , � ��- � _ t-� � �, Fig. 1 �'� \ Heavy Duty ��-`'`�' � � O - � ��'°� i. � a f � ��s. �: /� � L:�`�� _ Fig. 2 Standard Q� � '�) � m m Sizing Chart PART FIG. QTY. NUMBER N0. DESCRIPTION COATING PER BOX BC23AOOOEG 1 Fits all 1'/9"x 15/e"strut EG 25 Packed in pairs. PART FIG. QTY. NUMBER N0. COATING PER BOX LBS.* INC8T5 2 EPZ 100 100 *When Used in Pairs Ph: 1-800-25-CF�DOY° www.erico.com 105 s • . s Conduit To Conduit Features • Requires no tools to install. • Available for conduit'/�"to 1" EMT and '/z"to'/a" Rigid. • Ideal as spacer between same or different size conduit. Applications Top conduit to be used for support only, not a raceway. S i z i n g C h a rt Ultimate static load limit 25 Ibs. Qnr. ' PART NUMBER CONDUIT SIZE' PER BOX 8P8P '/2" to '/z' 100 8P12P '/z" to 3/4' 100 8P16P '/z" to 1" 50 12P12P 3/<" to 3/<" 100 12P16P '/4" to 1" 100 16P16P 1" to 1" 50 "EMT. For Rigid conduit use next larger size clip ('h" rigid use 12P). Lighfiweight Trapeze �� o Features • fast, easy assembly for lightweight loads up to 100 Ibs. • Use with'/8'MC/AC to 2"conduit, i • No screws or bolts � — Bc required. ��4-2o q — Threaded Applications Rod 16M41 � � Scrap 1" '� � � Conduit - S i z i n g C h a rt Total load of trapeze must not exceed 100 Ibs. PART QTY. NUMBER DESCRIPTION PER BOX 166M 14-2 thru 12-3 MC/AC to 1" EMT 100 16812M '/2" or 3/4" Conduit to 1" EMT 100 1616M 1" Conduit to 1" EMT 100 1620M 1'/<" Conduit to 1" EMT 50 1624M 'f'/z" Conduit to 1" EMT 50 1632M 2" Conduit to 1" EMT 50 � � � �' ' ' Ph: 1-800-25-CRDOY' ��• 5g www.erico.com � �-.�...��--.� �� `� ' s �' � � '' , y , .-..;,,.. ' ��T1��\ ��L�S ��..,,.,},�.,j � � � � . .. ... .-. ^-,<-/-r .�.. , .. .. Electrical �� ° � � � ; j Component ° , Supports F;g. � Features � � Provides a positive method of Fig. 2 Fig. 3 supporting conduit and outlet boxes � E . . above acoustical tee bar. p > Available for both horizontal and � vertical support. � � Clips are available with '/4-20 thread Fig. 5 impression or plain hole. � 3 Riveted assemblies accommodate Fig. 4 MC/AC to 1"conduit. � No installation tools required for basic clip. ��:s�'w: Consult local authority for application approval. � Fig. 6 Appiications Eliminates � �� oifset m o � � �.: bending m candult � � � m i 0 Sizing Chart No Load Rating-Positioning Only PART FIG. SIDE OR T�P 4TY. NUM�ER NO. MOUNTED DESCRIPTION PER BOX ATA41 1 T '/4-20 thread impression 100 ATS41 2 S '/<-20 thread impression 100 , . r; 6MATA 3 T for MC/AC cable 100 ;� 812MATA 3 T for '/z" - 3/4" conduit 100 ��. � 8PATA 6 T for '/z" conduit 100 ` °° 12PATA 6 T for'/4" conduit 100 ' ' 16MATA 3 T for 1° conduit 100 5'�` 16PATA 6 T for 1" conduit 100 6MATS 4 S for MC/AC cable 100 812MATS 4 S for'/Z" to '/4" conduit 100 8PATS 5 S to '/z" conduit 100 12PATS 5 T for 3/4" conduit 100 16MATS 4 T for 1" conduit 100 16PATS 5 T for 1" conduit 100 Ph: 1-800-25-CRDDY° � ° ; www.erico.com 187 ��? ��,�x: a • . s Conduit Clips PAT55336 6BER Featu res F�9 � • Available for M and P series, rigid � and aluminum conduit. � Can be used with Beam Clamps for both vertical and horizontal installation of conduit. a Available with either a plain hole for � '/a" bolt or a '/4-20 thread impression. • Clips have finger close capability. 6M redesigned to work better with MC & AC cable. Fig.z Applications �e 9 Fig. 3 � I � Cor�bination � Pu�h-in Wall Clips Features • Quickly attaches pipe, conduit, Applications MC/AC and tube to wall surfaces • Just push in -there's no need to close the clip • Reduces the need to stock �� multiple products ��; [a g 9 • Lightweight, one-piece designs • Standoff design eliminates conduit bending • Provides automatic alignment with electrical box knockouts • Low-profile design minimizes snag potential • Secure with powder-actuated tools, self-tapping concrete anchors or screw guns � � � Ph: 1-800-25-CRDOY' ��• 50 www.erico.co m 0 0 . e S i z i n g C h a rt Load:M Series 100 Ibs.Vertical•25 Ibs.Horizontal P Series 25 Ibs.Vertical•15 Ibs.Horizontal PART FIG. CONDIIIT QTY. NUMBER NO. SIZE MOUNTING HOLE PER BOX 6M 1 For 6M 14-2 thru 9/3z" Plain 100 12-3 MC/AC and '/e" Flexible Conduit 812M 1 '/z"to 3/4" 9/3z" Plain 100 16M 1 1" 9/az" Plain 100 20M 1 1'/<" 9/3z" Plain 100 24M 1 1'/z" 9/3z" Plain 100 32M 1 2" 9/3z" Plain 100 812M41 1 '/z to 3/<" '/<-20 100 Thread Impression 6M41 1 For 6M 14-2 thru '/4-20 100 12-3 MC/AC and Thread Impression 3/e" Flexible Conduit 16M41 1 1" '/<-20 Thread Impr2ssion 100 20M41 1 1'/4" '14-20 Thread Impression 100 24M41 1 1'Iz" '/<-20 Thread Impression 100 32M41 1 2" 'I<-20 Thread Impression 100 8P 2 '/z" 9/az" Plain 100 12P 2 '/<" 9l3z' Plain 100 16P 2 1" 9/3z" Plain 100 8P41 2 '/z" '/<-20 Thread Impression 100 12P41 2 '/�" '/<-20 Thread Impression 100 16P41 2 1" '/<-20 Thread Impression 100 S i z i n g �h a rt No load rating-Position Only PART FIG. DESCRIPTION QTY. NUMBER NO. PER BOX WC812 3 Combination Push-in Wall Clip 100 • '�" and 3/�' EMT conduit • '�" Rigid, IMC, PVC SCH 40 • 5�" & 3/"Copper tube • MC/AC J00 - .925 O.D. P h: 1-80 0-25-CRDOY° ' www.erico.com 51 _ � s e , o Applications �i��. � Assemblies allow 1 for support from � ' most main and � substructures. � � 0 � � S i z i n C h a rt UL&cUL Listed g Cable Support _ _ _ _ _ - PART FIG. QTY. NUMBER NO. DESCRIPTIOId PER BOX 1 to 4 RUNS OF MC/AC MAC2T 2 Support 1 to 4 runs of MC/AC cable for metal stud 100 DOUBLE RUN OF MC/AC MAC2 1 Metal or wood stud and '/e" flange 100 MAC2ATA 3 Acoustical Tee 100 MAC2BC 4 '/e" thru 'h"flange 100 MAC224SM 5 '/e" thru '/4" flange 100 MAC258SM 5 5/z" thru '/z" flange 100 MAC2912SM 5 '/,s" thru 3/4"flange 100 MAC2VF14 6 '/,s" thru '/4° C purlin or vertical flange 100 MAC2123 7 Z purlin 100 MAC2A0 8 Offset bracket 100 MAC224 9 '/e" thru '/4" flange— bottom mount rotates 360° 100 MAC258 9 5/�6" thru '/2" flange— bottom mount rotates 360° 100 MAC2912 9 '/z" thru '/4" flange— bottom mount rotates 360° 100 MAC24Z34 10 #12 thru '/4" wire, plain or threaded rod & '/e" thru 3/6" flange 100 MAC26Z34 10 3/8' plain or threaded rod and 3/e" thru 9/,6" flange 100 MAC2FB 11 Through metal stud 100 Ph: 1-800-25-CRDOY° � � www.erico.com 65 . 0 r o � Flange-Mount � Conduit Clip � Fig. 1 Snap Close � o � Features ° • Available with CADDY� CONDUIT CLIP bottom mounted or side mounted, • Available for'/a"thru 2" EMT, rigid and aluminum conduit. Fiq. z � � • Requires only hammer and pliers to install. 0 • Will pivot thru 360-. Applications , .n � 5 i z i n g C h a rt FIG.1 Load 75 Ibs.•FIG.2 Load 25 Ibs. FIG.1 FIG.2 PART PART QTY. NUMBE62 NUMBER DESCRIRTION PER BOX 6M24 6M24SM '/e" MC/AC cable to '/8"to '/<"flanges 100 6M58 6M58SM '/8" MC/AC cable to 5/,6'to '/z'flanges100 6M912 6M912SM '/8" MC/AC cable to 9/�s"to 3/4'flanges100 812M24 812M24SM '/z' to '/+" conduit to '/e"to '/�"flanges 100 812M58 812M58SM '/z"to '/<" conduit to 5/,s"to '/z"flanges100 812M912 812M912SM '/z'to 3I4� conduit to 9/,s"to'/4"flanges100 16M24 16M24SM 1" conduit to '/e' to '/y" flanges 100 16M58 "°""�m- 1"conduit to 5/,6"to '/z"flanges 100 16M912 16M912SM 1"conduit to 9/,6"to'/4"flanges 100 20M24 20M24SM 1'/4" conduit to '/e"to '/<"flanges 100 20M58 20M58SM 1'/<" conduit to 5/,6'to '/2'flanges 100 20M912 20M912SM 1'/4"conduit to 9/,6"to 3/4"flanges 50 24M24 24M24SM 1'/z" conduit to '/a"to '/4"flanges 50 24M58 24M58SM 1'Iz" conduit to 5/�6"to '/z"flanges 50 24M912 24M912SM 1'h" conduit to 9/�6" to 3/4"flanges 50 32M24 32M24SM 2"conduit to '/a'to '/4"flanges 50 32M58 32M58SM 2" conduit to 5/�6"to '/z"flanges 50 32M912 32M912SM 2" conduit to 91�6"to 3/<"flanges 50 Ph: 1-800-25-CRDDY° '' www.erico.com 53 • • . • Conduit �ra Hangers 6��. From Flange, f��G�t'P,�'"QIt'I Wire or Plain Rod* s�jd�'� 56 Features - • Supports conduit (EMT, Rigitl, ENT, MC/AC and Aluminum) to rods* or flanges. -- . - _ • Can also be used for. flexible metallic - — tubing, armored cable, portable cables, - control tubes, communications cab�e, etc. • No installation tools requiretl. NOTE: May require dedicatetl KK drop wire/rod and EC311 (See Pgs. 34, 45, 190) — -Consult local authority. T��n� °Bat Wings"In 1959 'For horizontal application only. Applications - , „ Fig. 2 Fig. 1 Fig. 3 S i z i n g C h a rt FIG.1 Load 25 Ibs.• FIG.2 Load 100 Ibs.• FIG.3 Load 50 Ibs C.�DI�R �10$ �8t '/�s'$c '/e"-'/�' S/�e'��/e' �/v'-'/�' SQE #12 WIRE �181MRE '/�ROD' FLANGE FLANGE FLANGE '!z"EMT K8 K8 K8 K8 K12 K12 '/�"RIGID K8 K12 K12 K12 K12 K16 '/<"EMT K12 K12 K12 K12 K16 K16 '/<"RIGID K12 K12 K16 K16 K20** K20** 1" EMT — K16 K16 K16 K20** K20** 1" RIGID — — — K20** K20** K20'* 1'!:'EMT — K20 K20 K20 — — "K Series packaged 100 per box. KX-No load rating-positioning only Hn�s�s nn: cns�s� #�s #�o,�,�s �eox 14-2(.433-.475 O.D.) KX KX 100 14-3(.453-.500 O.D.) KX KX 100 12-2(.467-.510 O.D.) KX KX 100 � 12-3(.489-.535 O.D.) KX K8 100 � P h: 1-800-25-CRDDY° www.erico.com 55 • Through Stud Cable/Conduit Support Eliminates Conduit Rattle �o Features F;g. ' "' d� • Provides a quick means of support for � Q Q horizontal runs of Rigid, EMT, MC/AC or ENT through metal stud I � • Eliminates conduit rattling FI g � "�I "Florida Bob" Series � • Available with CADDY� 812M snap shut conduit support, as well as CADDY push � in conduit support • Installs with screw un Fig. 3 9 ' �oWP,a«,� WILC NDT 459/AR812 °°'9B � drywall Otlll Poin!!ar ease OI • One-piece spring steel ;�fla��e�� design snaps onto stud SMS8 Applications : �.6�� v � � ,a � m S i z i n g C h a rt No Load Rating-Positioning Only PART FIG. QTY. NUMBER NO. DESCRIPTION PER BOX FB6M 1 MC/AC 100 FB812M 1 '/i' or 3/4" Conduit 100 FBBP 2 '/i' Conduit 100 F612P 2 3/4' Conduit 100 459 3 MC/AC (14-2, 14-3, 100 12-2 or 12-3 AR812 3 '/2'and 3I4' EMT Conduit 100 '/z" Rigid, IMC, PVC Sch 40 5/e" and '/4" CopperTube MC/AC .700 - .925 O.D. � Ph: 1-800-25-CRDDY° ' www.erico.com 143 • . Anti-Rattle � Support For Conduit and Armored Cable Features • Permits ENT, MC and AC to be pulled thru metal stud. • Supports ENT, MC/AC, EMT 78,� or rigid conduit up to 1". • Requires a self tapping screw to install. Law Prallle WILL NOT 6ulge � drywafl � s�s$ Dril1 Peint�or ease al - inslallafion Applications 0 0 EMT ENT MC/AC 5 i z i n g C h a rt No Load Rating-Positioning Only Pa�r anr. NUMBER DESCRIPTION PER BOX 781 Supports conduit up to 1" 100 �� ' ' Ph: 1-SOQ-25-CRDDY' ��• 144 www.erico.com • . . • Combination ° �� F�9' � Box/Conduit a o DropWire 0 Hangers From Fig. 2 �Piain Hole ° ° Drop Wire/Rod � o And Beam � F,g. 3 � �° � . 0 1��2�X s�g� B18 Series St�d Features � � Fig. 4 � � • One riveted assembly. Flange _ • No conduit bends yo (beam application). e�aco`�vd;y6 ° � • 66% less Drop Wires �F�;oir UUP,00,� o - (rod/wire application). �s� °s ° " • Delivers with NEC & CEC � " Fig. 5 compliance, refer to the a o 2005 CADDY Code Compliance Book. o Fig. 6A NOTE: May require tledicated a drop wire/rod and EC311 � o° u (See Pgs. 34, 45, 190) Fiq. 68 —Consult local authority. ° For single and multiple runs om 0 of conduit. � Fig. 8 Fig. 7 Applications ;'� � ;0 � � ° � o O 0 °° o � __ o o °� °o —_` _ o;o o......::. �� r � _ v . � � Ph: 1-800-25-CRDOY' ��• 68 www.erico.com i A i . • UL&cUL Listed Sizing Chart BoxandConduitSupport PART FIG. DESCRIPTION QTY. NUMBER N0. MOUNTS 4"SQ.BOXES WITH PER BOX 812M618 1 '/�"&'/<"conduit fram#12 wire thru'/�"rod 25 812MB186 1 'h"&'/+"conduit to�Is'plain or threaded rod 25 16MB18 1 1"conduit from#12 wire thru'/+"rod 25 16MB186 1 1"conduit to'/a"plain or threaded rod 25 6MB18 1 MC,AC cable from#12 wire 25 thru'/;'flange 6MB186 1 MC,AC cable'/z"plain or threaded rod 25 812MB18A 2 '/:"&'!,"conduit plain center 25 hole for screw or threaded rod mount 16MB18A 2 1"conduit plain center hole for screw 25 orthreaded rod mount 6M618A 2 MC,AC cable plain center hole for 25 screw or threaded rod mount 812MB18S 3 '/�'&'/�"conduit with 25 '/�-20 x 9/�0"stud in center hole 812M61824 4 '/�'&'!a"conduit to'/�"thru 25 V<"flange 812MB1858 4 '/_"&'/+"conduit to Sh�"thru 25 '/�"flange 16M81824 4 1"conduit to'/a"thru'/+"flange 25 16MB1858 4 1"conduit to 5/,e'thru'h"flange 25 6MB1824 4 MC,AC cable Ye'thru'/y"flange 25 6MB1858 4 MC,AC cable 5/�e thru'/2 flange 25 *(XXX)CO 5 Factory riveted assembly for multiple conduit 25 clips. Includes mounting plate and center conduit clips pre-riveted(adtlitional conduit clips ordered separately).See Fig.6A. 6M41 6A 14-2 thru 12-3 MC/AC and'/e"flexible 100 conduit;Y<"-20 thread impression 812M41 6A '/�"to'/+"conduit; 100 '/<-20 thread impression 16M41 6A 1"conduit;'/,-20 thread impression 100 53575BP50 6B '/�-20 x'/a'round head screw 50 4WN 7 '/,^-20 thread impression washer wing nut 100 4TI24 8 '/."threaded rod to 5/�b"thru'/�"flange 100 4TI58 8 '/<"threaded rod to 5/�6°thru'h"flange 100 4TI912 8 '/."threaded rod to'/�b"thru'/,"flange 100 6TI24 8 '/B'threaded rod to Sh�"thru'h"flange 100 6TI58 8 '/a'threaded rod to 5l�6"thru'/�"flange 100 6TI912 8 '/a"threaded rod to 9/,e'thru'/,"flange 100 *To order with 618CO3 add the suffix"CO"to any catalog number figure 1 through 4 above. � Ph: 1-800-25-CRDGIr' f www.erico.com 69 e Screw OnT ��c ,�,J ' INCREqSEO�AB�E FpR C O I7 l.1 U I t - LON �1VDUIT SUP G�R� ��; Support : ►�CK�H __:-_� ___ . Features • Accommodates '/�°, '/�"and 1" 0� , EMT, Conduit and MC/AC Cable. '��0; • Alignment tab positively locates the � � 0 fastener on the stud, keeping your � conduit in line with box knock out and CADDY'F H-series brackets. • for wood or metal stud. • Delivers compliance with: NEC Article 358.30(A) which requires conduit support within 36" of an electrical box. CEC Rule 12-1404 which requires conduit support within 1 m (36") of an electrical box, CEC Rule 12-618 which requires support of armoured cable within 300 mm (12") of an electrical box. Applications Elir�nlnates o�s2t bend{ng condult °° TBoo °ooi 36"max. for conduit 1 ��mo 0 0 0 o � � 0 5 i z i n g C h a rt UL&cUL Listed Positioning Only PnRr anr. NUMBER DESCRIPTION PER BOX CS812 Attaches '/z" and 3/4" EMT, conduit, 100 MC/AC to metal or wood stud For 1'/2" deep box CS812D Attaches '/2" and 3/4" EMT, conduit, 100 MC/AC to metal or wood stud For 2'/a" deep box CS16 Attaches 1" EMT, conduit, 100 MC/AC to metal or wood stud � For 2'/8" deep box Ph: 1-800-25-CRDDI�° � � www.erico.com 127 . e . "Mounts Electrical - Boxes" Hanger ' O rp . Featu res � � °. �� ` • One bracket works for: Two box depths (1'/z"or 2'/B'deep) Two box sizes (4"or 4"/�6"sq.) � 0° •� Three wall stutl depths � � �� (2'/z", 3'/�' &4"studs) One-Plece �eslgn . • All-in-one design simplifies handling, reduces inventory and saves space. • Requires only a screw gun to install. One Sizs Fits All • V-notched on center allows for Boxes consistent positioning, ,,,,. Z,,� • Built-in support legs reduce box movement when o 0 used with EMT and is ideal for flexible conduit, ENT, � � 0 0 MC, AC or Romex� non-metallic sheathed cable. • Offset design of MEB1 and use of CADDY�' O 4°�s° #SMS8 low profile self-tapping screws (not included) reduce drywall bulge. sr�ds • Can be pre-assembled in the shop to allow for 2,,,. 3v,. a� greater efficiency at the job site. � • Plaster rings can be mounted separately eliminating the need for an electrical box for low-voltage applications. • MP Series brackets can be attached in-line to the MEB1 for low voltage applications. • Mounts on either side of stud without need to reposition box - Applications �� Lowrrorire WILL NOT bulge O M drywall �� o� /� Oril/Poinl fnr ease al `��e`'�� . insfallafian. t�v �� i O �i , UL&cUL Listed Sizing Chart PositioningOnly PaRr anr. NUMBER DESCRIPTION PER BOX MEB1 "Mounts Electrical Boxes" Hanger 25 � Romex is a registered trademark of General Cable Corp. ' ' ' Ph: 1-800-25-CRDDY' ��• �2g www.erico.com � � £ �� :� . , �� . - _ o � _ .� Hammer-On � Flange Clip F�g � Features � • Locates a "portable"'/�"hole with just a hammer, a Fits most beams and bulb tees. Fig. 2 � Applications v r `� 0 � 0 _ r � � See page 123 for more informaiion on CADDY°SPEED LINK Sizing Chart PART FIG. FLANGE QTY. STATIC NUMBER NO. THICFQdESS PER BOX LOAD LIMIT 2H4 1 3/32"9/64" 100 160 Ibs. 4H24 2 '/e"'/4" 100 200 Ibs. 4H58 2 S/,6"-'/2" 100 2001bs. 4H912 2 9/�6"'/4" 100 2001bs. � Ph: 1-800-25-CRDOY° � www.erico.com 81 s MetalStud F,g. , Fig. 2 ESG1 ESGP Punch And � � Easy Snap Grommet Grommet Features Super for • Snap one grommet into standard ce811ng track 8� 1"/3z"field punched hole, OR snap tight comers. two together into any shape factory punched hole. Fiq. 3 • Provides 360° protection for cable �i� MSP20 and makes cable pulls easier, � � • Delivers compliance with: NEC Article 300.4(b)(1) and CEC Rule 12-516. Punch Features • Cushioned handles mean less operator fatigue and more comfortable handling. • Tool design with offset handles allows punch to work in confined locations and near perpendicular walls. • Lightweight punch makes accurate location of holes easier. • Hardened steel components keep tool sharper longer—less replacement. . Punches up to 20 gauge sheet metal. • Plastic grommets snap easily into 1"/3="hole. Applications �............� � . S iz i n g C h a rt No Load Rating-Positioning Only P�vrr FIG. Qn: NUMBER NO. DESCRIPTION PER BOX ESG1 1 Easy snap grommet 100 ESG1M 1 Easy snap grommet 1000 ESGP 2 Anti-rattle grommet 100 ESGPM 2 Anti-rattle grommet 1000 � MSP20 3 Metal stud punch 1 � , � � Ph: 1-800-25-CIaDOY° �� 142 www.erico.com � - -� � -� - -_ o ; � � 3 " `� ��y �.x��- _. Hammer-On F�g� � � Flange Clip Features � � When used with CADDY�' combination conduit hanger, the conduit run lines � up with"knock-outs" in outlet box and eliminates offsets and bends. � Provitled with a'/+-20 thread impression so that the box may be quickly and securely attached to the clamp. F�g. 2 • Also available with a staked stud, '1a-20 x '/a°to provide easier attachment of outlet boxes to beams, Eliminates having to use loose screws. '1.-20 x'Ie'screws P/N S35758P50 • The CADDY combination washer-wing �a�able as separate ttem. nut (Part No. 4WN) can be used to Packaged 50 per box. attach box. (Not inclutletl.) Welght 1 Ib.per 100. a New design allows for use with cable ties Applications 2�5# �oo# � 75# 0 Indicated loads are static load limits and should not be combined. Sizing Chart PART FIG. FLANGE 4TY. NUMBER NO. THICFQVESS PER BOX M24 1 '/e"-'/<" 100 M58 1 5/,6"'/z' 100 M912 1 9/,6"'/<" 100 M24S 2 '/e"-'/4' 100 M58S 2 5/,6"-'/2" 100 � M912S 2 9/,6"'/4' 100 �. P h: 1-800-25-CRDDIr° www.erico.com 83 - i � - � �� _ � � ��~. � q� � �� - _ � �.�..._..v....�...- - -- ..._.�.w. ...�.�. - � �r�&. PATENT#5,740,994 ��,� CADDI(° CABLECAT _ F�- Wide Base Cable Support � A°g'eB'��ke� for Grea�r Field �ssemb�,pp�ons � Features pt�30p�b•�oads �� R a Provides proper support of Category 5, Category 6,fiber optic and innerduct. g Many sizes and designs available to attach to a variety of structures. ��-� 0 � � Cost effective altemative to expensive o F�9 � � p�g 2 �_ cable tray. �" � Galvanized finish on J-hooks provide ° � smoother cable pull antl greater corrosion resistance. � Complies with UL`�, cUL�, NEC� and _ EIA/TIAS""requirements for structured ;��-__ cabling systems. �_ � � FIg.3 Flg.4 0 i �i � Flg.5 ' � � , , Fig.7 � � _ �� \ � ,,�.�� Flg.6 Appiications � e m o 0 o I �. a , o a � ,� �/ 0 0 0 o a �� - -:_:.� F � � � 'I Ph: 1-800-25-CRDDY° � � www.erico.com 153 ;. .''1 �� a� _ '� $ Y ��:.�"� -,:�j ..l r -. • �� ..�'� 3` � '� r',�a.:� - _ �ti».�»'° � �, _ _ ' - .��.__�...___,a._...�__..�-.. �..�.—_ ..�..__._._�_.�.�.,4.. .',�.r ... - �s� CADDY° CABLECAT �� Wide Base Cable Support Paar F�c. Qnr. �= NU�IBER N0. DESCRIPTION PER BOX CAT12* 1 Up to 16 4-pair UTP CAT 5e or 2-strantl fiber �� optic cabie,or 10 CAT 6-3/4'dia.loop 50 ` CAT21t 1 Up to 50 4-pair UTP CAT 5e or 2-strand fiber optic �� cable or innerduct,or 32 CAT 6-15/,6'dia.loop 80 CAT32t 1 Up to 80 4-pair UTP CAT 5e or 2-strand fiber optic cable or innerduct,or 50 CAT 6-2"dia.loop 60 CAT64 1 Up to 300 4-pair UTP CAT 5e or 2-strand fiber �=� optic cable,or 185 CAT 6-4"dia.loop 25 �...�:_ CATHBA 2 Extended J-Hook angle bracket-'/<"mounting hole 40 :=� CATHBA3 2 Extended J-Hook angle bracket-3/�s'mounting hole 40 . _� CATHBA6 2 Extended J-Hook angle bracket-'la'mounting hole 40 �i CATHBA8 2 Extended J-Hook angle bracket-'/z'mounting hole 40 . _� S3575BP100 3 'I4'2O X 3I8�round head screw 100 i S3575DP100 3 '/4-20 x'1<"round head screw 100 � AFAB3 4 3/�6'mounting hole 50 }j (includes'/4'ZO X 31a'round head screw) ' AFAB4 4 '/4° mounting hole 50 (includes'l4-2O X 3I8�round head screw) �..,< AFAB6 4 '/8"mounting hole 50 � ' (includes V,-20 x'/a'round head screw) CATMTP 5 Mille-TieT""for air handling spaces(plenum) 100 ��`'• CATTS' 6 Suppart from tee grid 100 IQts For Beam Appllcations(Fteld Assemblles) � CAT KITA 7 CAT32—20 pieces 1 CATHBA Hanger-5 pieces BC200 Beam Clamps—5 pieces 1 Kit 'i CAT KITB 7 CAT21 —10 pieces I CAT32—10 pieces j CATHBA Hanger—5 pieces ;� BC200 Beam Clamps—5 pieces . � (screws included) 1 Kit � = � CAT KITC 7 CAT21—20 pieces/CATHBA Hanger-5 pieces 'J BC200 Beam Clamps—5 pieces � (screws included) 1 Kit � t Available in stainless steel ,,1 c—�P/iPs ? `_l � rth T/q 569 � '. '� � � :_� -, j � I ,� 'j `` Retainers now induded with :i I *CAT12 J-Hooks and 1 Shb", 2" and 4" 1-Hook sizes, "'•' CAT12 assemblies suitable for air handling i include bend back tab. spaces (plenum). � 1 � � ► Ph: 1-800-25-CADDY' � ` ` ��. 154 www.erico.com �f�7�in. -�f��'`r''�:-. - . � - , • � Hammer-On - ° Plain And °o � Threaded �� Fig. 2 Rod Hangers F�g� � 0 Beam Clamps o 0 Features � • Used to suspend #8 wire, '/a",'/a'plain rod or'/<"or 3/e"threaded rod from Fig. 3 Fig. 4 beam flanges '/g"to 3/4"thick. • Requires only hammer to install. Applications Che�k ` �sNS �ut The 3/B��Th Ea NutFo� , qedAo See page 118 d S iz i n g C h a rt Static load limit 200 Ibs. PART FIG. FLANGE aN NUMBER NO. THICl�IESS ROD SIZE PER BOX 70824 1 'le'-'/<" #8 wire or '/4" plain rod 100 70858 1 5/�6"'/z" #8 wire or'/4" plain rod 100 708912 1 9/�6"3/4" #8 wire or'/4" plain rod 100 6A24 2 '!a"-'14�� 3Ia" (plain) 100 6A58 2 5/�6"'/2" 318" (plain) 100 6A912 2 9/,6"3/<" '/e" (plain) 100 4T124 3 '/e'-'/4" 'J<"threaded 100 4T158 3 5/,6"-'/z" '14"threaded 100 4TI912 3 9/�6"3/<" 'l4"threaded 100 6T124 3 'le"'l4" '/a"threaded 100 6T158 3 5/�s"'/z' '!a"threaded 100 6T1912 3 9/,6"'/4" 'IB"threaded 100 6TA24 4 '!e"-'Is" '/4" or'/e" threaded* 100 6TA58 4 5/�6"-'/z' '/<" or'/B"threaded* 100 6TA912 4 9/�fi"'/4" '/4" or 3/e"threaded* 100 `Nuts required. � ' ' ' Ph: 1-800-25-CRDDY' ��, 116 www.eri co.co m i . - . . ISN Smart Nut °� Features • Snaps anywhere on 3/8-16 threaded rod • Atljustable antl removable • Eliminates excessive threading into place • Supports plumbing, HVAC, electrical . Reduces installation time . Ideal when rod ends are not accessible or for retrofit applications UPC# PART WEIGHT LOAD 782856 NUMBER DESCRIPTION PER 100 RATING 45143 ISN375 Smart Nut, 3/8-16 3.1 Ibs. 220 Ibs. thread ISSP Strut Plate �0 Features � . Allows for easy attachment of strut between existing rods • Eliminates precise cutting of strut and the need for multiple hardware pieces • For commercial and industrial applications • Bolt has locking tlesign to prevent loosening due to vibration UPC# PART QTY. WEIGHT LOAD 782856 NUMBER DESCRIPTION PER BOX PER 100 RATING - _ __ _ __ _ _ 45143 ISSPK ISN/ISSP Kit Sets" 10.4 Ibs. 220 Ibs. (for 3/8-16 threaded rod) `Order in sets of 12—1 set includes (2) ISSP375 and (4) ISN375 45144 ISSP375 StrLlt PI8t2 OC1Iy(No Hardware) 100 36 Ibs. — Applications � � �° ' ' Ph: 1-800-25-CFIDOY' ��• 118 www.e rico.co m s Floor Mounted FBS ��8,2 Box/Conduit Supports � For Concrete Forms Features • Supports electrical boxes from floor or concrete forms, F'g. 2 • Available in 12", 16" antl 18" heights. • Slot provides for 8" height adjustment. • Use FBS with CCS812 to support conduits in concrete pours. _ • CCS812 eliminates offset bending � � of conduit. F'g• 1 • CCS812 also works with TSGB and SGB Applications � 000 a �000 . 0 oaa0000 ao° o�°�b ° �� o i 5 i z i n g C h a rt UL and cUL Listed-Positioning Oniy PaRr FIG. anr. NUMBER NO. DESCRIPTION PER BOX FBS12 1 12" High box support 50 FBS16 1 16" High box support 50 FBS18 1 18" High box support 50 CCS812 2 '/z" or'/4" EMT-'/z" RIGD 100 ' ' Ph: 1-800-25-CRDDY' �� 136 www.erico.com i � - o e � o - � - �; - Pipe Sleeve 74° Positioner Features • Provides secure pasitioning of pipe � � sleeve for concrete pouring of wall and floor forms. Fig. � • Requires only a hammer to install. • Will accommodate Schedule #40, #80 and smaller wall thickness, Fig. 2 � Applications c`�r""� �.�,.v---� S i z i n g C h a rt No Load Rating-Positioning Only PART FIG. SLEEVE QN NUMBER NO. DIAMETER WALL THIClaIESS PER BOX 740 1 All Diameters 5/�s' and under 100 740 1 2"-6" Schedule #40 Pipe 100 4H58 2 6" Schedule #80 Pipe 100 4H58 2 8"-10" Schedule #40 Pipe 100 4H912 2 9"-14" Schedule #80 Pipe 100 ' ' ' Ph: 1-800-25-CADDY' ��, 204 www.erico.com 0 0 . • " CAD DY° PYRAM I D Pipe & Equipment Supports Features . Dramatically retluces installation time by replacing labor-intensive methods for supporting pipes, conduits and equipment • Supports multiple runs of pipe and conduit on roofs and below raised floors • Supports concentrated loads up to 600 Ibs • Absorbs shock and vibration • Protects roof inembrane • Metal cover protects from weather and other environmental conditions • Features an electro-galvanized finish for corrosion protection PART FlG. MAX.WORKING STRUT NUMBER N0. LOAD(LB) HEIGHT THREADS FlNISH INCLUDED? _ . _ _ _ PPRPS25H4 1 25 3-5/8" — — — PPRPS25H6 1 25 5-5/8" — — — RPS50H4EG 2 50 4" — EG — RPS50H6EG 2 50 6" — EG — RPS50AHSV* 2 50 2-1/4" — SV — RPS150T1 3 150 3-3/16" 3/8"-16 EG NO RPS150T2 3 150 4" 3/8"-16 EG YES RPS300T1 4 300 3-3/16" 3/8"-16 EG NO RPS300T2 4 300 4" 3/8"-16 EG YES RPS600T2 5 600 4" 3/8"-16 EG YES EG-Electro-Galvanized SV-CADDY'�COAT Silver 'For indoor use only. CADDY° PYRAMID 25 • Supports up to 25 Ib loads • Lightweight, all-plastic construction weighs less than 1/3 Ib o Has a small 4" x 5"footprint • UV-Rated • Handles up to three 1l2" or two 3/4" or 1" Fig. l Pipes/conduit • No tools or fasteners needed for installation � ' ' ' Ph: 1-800-25-CADOY° ��, 62 www.erico.com � • . • Flange-Mount � Conduit Clip � Push-In Fig. 1 Features • Available with CADDY' CONDUIT CLIP bottom mounted or side mounted. • Available for'/z°thru 1" EMT, rigid F�9' z and aluminum conduit. . Requires only hammerto install. � �� . Will pivot thru 360°. NOTE:When using rigid conduit on P series, use next size larger clip ('h" Rigid use 12P). Applications 25# 15# Irodicated loads are static and should not be , combined. ,� S i z i n g C h a rt FIG.1 Load 25�bs.•FIG.2 Load 15 Ibs. FIG.1 FIG.2 PART PART 4TY. NUMBER NUMBER DESCRIPTION PER BOX 8P24 8P24SM '/i' conduit to 'Ig" to '/4'flanges 100 8P58 8P58SM '/2' conduit to 5/�6"to '/2"flanges 100 8P912 8P912SM '/2' conduit to 9I16'to 3/<"flanges 100 34� 1 14i �y� 12P58 12P58SM '/<" conduit to 5/�s'to'/z'flanges 100 � 12P912 12P912SM 3/<" conduit to 9/�fi'to 3/4"flanges 100 �=K`: 16P24 16P24SM 1" conduit to '/e"to '/<"flan es 100 16P58 16P58SM 1"conduit to 5/,6" to'/z'flanges 100 16P912 16P912SM 1"conduit to 9I16�� to 3/4'flanges 50 ' ' Ph: 1-800-25-CRDOY° ��. 54 www.erico.com � � � 0 � Rod And Wire Han ers �'a g 6e��i- Features `YD��„Qn . ANGLE BRACKET suspends plain �� rotl, threaded rod or wire drops from s�p�e 115 laminated wood or concrete beams, joists, ceilings and walis. • OfFSET BRACKET suspends plain rod, threaded rod or wire drops from laminated wood or concrete beams, joists, ceilings and walls. - NOTE: - Loads indicatetl are for CADDY'� Fasteners only. Method of attachment to structure must be evaluated separately. o a � 0 O � fig. 2 Fig. 3 � Fig. 1 �� 4 Fig. 4 � . o �O O o � p O Fig. 5 �� Fig. 6 Q Fig. 7 Fig. 8 Q 0 Applications � � � � � 5 i z i n g C h a rt Static load limit 160 Ibs. PART NO. QTY. PART NO. QTY. ANGLE FIG. PER OFFSE7 FIG. PER BRACF�T NO. BOX DESCRIPTI�N BRACI�T NO. BOX 708AB 1 100 For#8 wire or 708A0 5 100 '/<" plain rod 6AB 2 100 For'/e" plain rod 6A0 6 100 4TIB 3 100 For'/<"threaded 4TI0 7 100 rod, with thread impression 6TIB 3 100 For 3/e"threaded 6TI0 7 100 rod, with thread impression 6TB 4 100 For'/4"or'/e" 6T0 8 100 threaded rod, nuts required � ' ' ' Ph: 1-800-25-CFIDOY° ��• 114 www.erico.com ,�..,..�.a.�_,_.�-:..T.�-..�� .�.-, �, �,,. :, � ; . „ :��'-� �- � � ; � � _ . � � ��_� -= - � _-___ -�;= Reversible � �' Beam Clamps Model 300 & 310 Features • Reversible for attachment to top or bottom flange. F'g� � • Malleable iron clamp with electrogalvanized r finish for enhanced corrosion protection. o Available in hot dipped galvanized finish (special order). � • Retaining strap available separately • Hardened cup point setscrew to provitle secure grip on tapered sections, . Accommodates attachment of'/4'dia.threaded rotl, bridle rings and boxes from three positions—top, bottom antl back. (Figure 3 only) F�9• z Applications � F � � �� .: __ �-! �. � � � � =i�?�� £ r� 7� j. _�• 3 _ �f'.:5� '3 �_. G ��j� � �y^� .p!. :! `�.{� °''v '.J. � �� ° , �� 1 Fig. 3 - �*- ,� � - C � RS .1 � � : � ; H i r '��.� P� � RS �_.� � Sizing Chart - - TOP MOt1NT BOTTOM MOUNT PART FlG. C MAX H P QTY. TOP BOTTOM NUMBER N0. RS IN IN PER BOX LBS. LBS. 3000037EG 1 '/e-16 'l+" 1'/�s' "/�s' 100 500 250 3000050EG 1 '/�-13 '/� 1"/��' 1'/�6" 50 950 760 3000062EG 1 sla-11 '/+" 1"hs' 1'/�6" 50 950 760 3000075EG 1 '(�-10 '/+" 1'/+" 1'/a' S0 950 760 3100037EG 2 'IB-16 1'h" 2'he' "he' S0 500 250 3100050EG 2 '/_-13 1'!1' 2'/a 1'/�s' 50 950 760 BC260025EG 3 '/<-20 '/+-20 100 250 100 � � Coating-EG NOTE:Safety factor of 3.5.Available in hot dipped galvanized finish(special order). �'� C=Flange Size H=Fastener Height � .<�� P=Fastener Width RS=Rod Size .1 � K' ' ' Ph: 1-800-25- CRDOY' � ; ��, 94 www.erico.com � „I � • i Through Stud Cable/Conduit Support Eliminates Conduit Rattle �o Fig. 1 d Features d • Provides a quick means of support for � � Q horizontal runs of Rigid, EMT, MC/AC or ENT through metal stud Fig z � � . Eliminates conduit rattling � "Florida Bob" Series � • Available with CADDYs 812M snap shut conduit support, as well as CADDY push in conduit support Fig. 3 e Instails with screw gun lowP�o,,,e WlLL NOT , 459/AR812 �u�9B M drywa/l G�l Orill Pulnt Inr ease o! • One-piece spring steel ��:r8ueiro� design snaps onto stud SMS� Applications �� o � N ,a � m S i z i n g C h a rt No Load Rating-Positioning Only PART FIG. aTY NUMBER NO. DESCRIPTION PER BOX FB6M 1 MC/AC 100 FB812M 1 '/z' or'/4" Conduit 100 Fggp 2 '/z' Conduit 100 FB12P 2 3/4' Conduit 100 459 3 MC/AC (14-2, 14-3, 100 12-2, or 12-3) AR812 3 '/i' and 3/<" EMT Conduit 100 '/�" Rigid, IMC, PVC Sch 40 5/8" and 3/4" Copper Tube MC/AC .700 - .925 O.D. r, Ph: 1-800-25-CRDOY° www.erico.com 143 e � Press-0n � � . Nail Plate ' For Wood and Metal Studs Features � • Fast press-on installation;no tools required. . Protects electrical, datacomm and plumbing. • Works on wood or metal studs, o • Meets NEC 300,4(b)(2). Also Designed to meet CEC 12-516 and 12-616. • Breakabte tabs permit multiple plates to be ganged together. 0 • Corrosion resistant zinc phosphate coating. o Applications Ga�9�pp�Ications � 0 0 0 0 0 � e 0 0 Si�e View Face View UL&cUL Listed S i z i n g C h a rt Positioning Only Pa�r _ anr. NUMBER DESCRIPTION PER BOX 304B2 Press-on nail plate 100 Ph: 1-800-25-CRDDY° � www.erico.com �29 .��aMkw . 3 ' � �.�.. � � R 1 � . �_�.. .. . �. ,._r�. , ` . �: , .. :'� ..._ . �.�.. _ .�:�. ... _ _-. _ ,..-�._ �, , � 3 I � . � Independent � . � '� Electrical Drop � ; ; Wire/Rod Securing , { Ciip � , 3 ; Features � , .:� - Prevents sway of dedicated electrical ' drop wirelrod. � � Doesn't negatively affect ceiling grid systems, � No tools required. Forgiving design , ; doesn't require exact cutting of rotl/wire. ; = Painted yellow for easy identification � � by the inspector. � ; �,-�: � Consult local authority for 2�oution1� ,; application approval. �N�3po��al� , , ��; �� : -�; � Fig. 1 � Applications F�g� � ' Floating � j Q1 Rivet ; U ' � 4 ' ' � I � i , � II� I 'I � { Sizing Chart �i PART FIG. QTY '� NUMBER NO. DESCRIPTION PER BOX ' EC311 1 Electrical drop wire securing ? clip #12 thru #8 wire 100 � EC3114Z34 2 #12 wire thru '/<" threaded rod 100 � EC3116Z34 2 3/8" threaded rod 100 � � ` "; ' ' ' ' Ph: 1-800-25-CRDOY' ' ��• 190 www.erico.com . 1 f�� 1��'�� . � ... ' - ._ � ��:.�� .__. ,_... .. '_ . .... . .... ._ ._ � IDS Series � ; Independent � � , 5upport Clips � Fig. ? ; £,., ;� Features � ' Provides a means of independent support of fixtures = � A No installation tools required 3 = Mounting hardware indu ed � l Plastic :? Spacerfor % TegularTile � ; Applications Seepage 187 � { � Fig. 2 ; _ � � _ Now Foc _ � a� Zt _ .� � ��9h�i�9 � — � � Fiq.3 � � l' �. , ��Orta� � �iBRe�nUt: � �j Orcler by adding � i �i WB suffbc� � to catalog number. � (IDSIWB) UL Listed 5 i z i n g C h a rt Static load limit 65 Ibs. i PART FIG. GRID STUD STATIC 4TY. ,: NUMBER NO. SIZE LENGTH LOAD LIMIT PER BOX , : ::j 1/4-20 STUD � IDS 1 15/�e" 5/e" 651bs. 100 'j IDS15 1 15/�6' 1'/z" 65 1bs. 100 � IDS2 1 'S/�s' 2" 65Ibs. 100 53 `3 IDS9'` 1 9/,6' S/e" 651bs. 100 �, 'i IDS95' 2 9/,6" x 5/,6' S/e" 65 Ibs. 100 :. � -;; $�Z aSTU� � 9 9) For Track Li htin i IDST' 3 15/�s" 9/�s" 651bs. 100 '� IDS9T' 3 9/�s' 9/�6" 65 1bs. 100 � IDS95T' 2 9/�6' x 5/�6" 9/�6" 65 Ibs. 100 `For Ultra Line 3500,AWW Ultra Line 3600 � (a trademark product of Chicago Metallics Corp.) �� ' � � � *For Fineline and Fineline '/a"Grids � I ' "� (a trademark product of USG Interiors,°Inc.) 'Uses identical nuts as Figure 3. � �'' ' � � Ph: 1-800-25-CFIDOY' ; � ��, ��g www.erico.com i _ �, v � _, _"� _ ��. . . . _ . _ _ _ . , _ �, . � - K a Lay I n Forstraight __ � An d Troffe r _ ��P��ures. � j Light Fixture � � � - _ � � Support Clips 5,5 � � � � � Featu res ,.:,, ; � =� Complies with The National Electrical � Code, Article 410.16 Means of Support. ' i � � Gives a positive method of supporting ' ' troffers and lay-ins. � � - Fits round or rectangular head tee bar. For stralght ; or uptumed . No installation tools required, lip foctures. ;i l � 515A � ; i ;', i I � ' 4 clips per fnc4ure , i requir�d per UL listing. `� Applications ; , 3 j � 1 { i. � - PUSH j � - , , - � :.i �`{ ';j UL&cUL Listed S i z i n g C h a rt No Load Rating-Positioning Only `; PART QN ; NUMBER DESCRIPTION PER BOX ' 515 Straight lip fixtures 100 ; 515A Upturned or straight lip fixtures 100 :;; � � 3 � ' Ph: 1-800-25-CF►DOY' ; ��. 176 www.erico.com ,_..�:� I � . . SW' {.C 1 1 V�/� Fig. 1 � � Or Conduit �� ° � � d Fig. 2 To M eta I Stu d Features � Fig. 3 �� ,� � • Fits most switch boxes— Figs. 1-3 only. �, • Fits most dry wall stutlding. ' '� . Allows the switch box to protrude , through any size tlry wall— o � �/a��, 3�a�, ��z°, S�a�Of 3/a�� Flg. 4 9 � Applications Fig. S O � o �q 00 0 o � o � o 5 i z i n g C h a rt No Load Rating-Positioning Only Pn�r Fi�. Qnr. NUMBER NO. DESCRIPTION PER BOX MFI 1 '/4-20 Thread impression 100 to metal stud MFS 2 With screw (adjustable '/4" thru '/4") 100 MFO 3 Riveted flush to stud face 100 MF250 3 Riveted for '/4' dry wall 100 MF375 3 Riveted for 3/e" dry wall 100 MF500 3 Riveted for'/�" dry wall 100 MF625 3 Riveted for 5/8' dry wall 100 MF750 3 Riveted for 3/<" dry wall 100 6MF 4 3/e" Conduit or BX to metal stud 100 812MF 4 '/z' to '/4" Conduit to metai stud 100 16MF 4 1" Conduit to metal stud 100 8PF 5 '/z' Conduit to metal stud 100 12PF 5 3/4" Conduit to metal stud 100 16PF 5 1" Conduit to metal stud 100 � � Ph: 1-800-25-CADDY' ��. 132 www.erico.com . I �.,_ �_._�� ;._. ��.� ..�_.t . ,,, .�.... - ;- � � � r 'r l J � �_1 ; i � . �: ,:, �_ _.. .._ � 9 • ' __._. , _�� . , __ .„� ... _. � , � _._�._ . _�.-.�. ' , � _, _.._.h�._ ,.. _.. ,a� Conduit/Box Support ; � �.�. Features � � �� Provides a method for attaching above r acoustical tee bars. \� . Provided with '/a-20 screw far � � � attachment to tee bar. '` z� a Has a'/4-20 threatl impression for direct attachment to an outlet box or CADDY�' � ; �x. CONDUIT CLIP. > When used in combination with a CADDY _ j_� CONDUIT CLIP and outlet box, it provides _;. ,� exact alignment—eliminating an offset �� bend in the conduit, i; :=:Consult local authority for application approval. { 3 '�-.�o i Not to be used j to hang Tee Grid � j ; i Applications ' � , �� ;� m r� � I � _;� U � �� m .. � �' � � '_ �.� :. UL&cUL Listed S i z i n g C h a rt No Load Rating-Positioning Only ;� anr. ' PART � NUMBER DESCRIPTION PER BOX � :., 4ACS Conduit/box support on Tgrids 100 { { , :i � � � `'`i � � � � Ph: 1-800-25-CRDDY° www.erico.com �89 � .�E.w a • o • ,� Signai Reference Grid Wire Clamp For Static Grounding Features • Provides a quick method to mechanically RGC support a signal reference grid wire below computer room floors. • One fastener will support#2 wire, #8 �� strandetl (.146) to#4 stranded (.280). • Fits post sizes'/4'to 1"round or square. � • Slots in fastener grip wire to provide positive contact with post. . Clamps grid wire directly to post allowing a low resistance connection across bare metal contacts. Nnw wilh • Installs easily with a screwtlriver or S'°"ed"°' X3 Phllllps& � . � i7Rabertson nUt d(IV2L Comba Head � AGADOYeztlusive Applications �, � ��\-� UL&cUL Listed 5 i z i n g C h a rt No Load Rating-Positioning Only P�T arY NUMBER WIRE SIZE POST SIZE PER BOX RGC #2 Wire, #8 Solid '/4' to 1" (.146)thru #4 round or Stranded (.280) square 100 Ph: 1-800-25-CRD�Y° � www.erico.com 205 ANGULAR FITTINGS coo EP R B-Line B156 - B161 B155 TWO HOLE CLOSED ANGL� TWO HOLE CLOSED ANGLE •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN,HDG,SS4 •Wt./C 63 Lbs.(23.6 kg) l3/16" 1 13/16" ('-0.6)A 3 /2„ � �� 33/16' \�s (ss.9) (�0.6) / \'�. \ /� (80.9) '� 0 I ��- '. � ',F A 1�/t6"� 45 � � ��e� (_0.6) B156 82�/;° � � 13/16„ i �/r 2�/2>, B157 75° (?0.6) (63.5) 2 i/2„ B158 67�/z° 56 (35.4) (63.5) B15) CO° B160 52�h_° B161 37i/z° 8363 - B369 B335 FOUR HOLE CLOSED ANGL� FOUR HOLE ADJUSTABLE HINGE •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN •Wt./C 110 Lbs.(49.9 kg) 5" �%, ��2zo� / � / I �� , � j/ �'� � �' ��rr�„�'��a� � �� xeSq� t° // . #�4.x �� a ' ��k��.- 9 � I / �, �1 B363 82�/2° I � � 4 /16„ B364 75° � 43�8" i� i �\ f (119.1) B365 67�/z° I (ill.l) —% ` B3fi6 60 95 (a3.t) B367 52�/z° `�� 411/16„ B368 45° (I19.t) B369 37�/z° 8335-1 B335-2 S�RIES TWO HOLE ADJUSTABLE HINGE THREE HOLE ADNSTABLE HINGE •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN •OSHPD approved for Seismic Zone 4 � •Wt./C 73 Lbs.(35.4 k�) •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN i � i � H / � HOLE SIZE ��y THIS HOLE ONLY / � \ ,�� , � 4t�/t�" _ � � nt�.�) %�� / � r 2�3/16,> .� �— � 213/16" (71.-4) � --f 71.4 a.,., � _,x .� ��- ( ) :.� tE C��_��, 1 t�l(""$�. _ `�,� 13 ``��F� ' 3; ;: i�, `:,. 2 /16" - - (71.4) 8335-2-3/S �/i e"� t��.�) 96 (43.2) B335-2-1/z �/16" (14.3) 94 (42.3) �3335-2-�/x ��/�6" (i�.a> 92 �ai.a� B335-2-3/a 13/16" (20.6) 90 (40.5) Reference page 58 for general fitting and standazd finish speciHcations. C9 CHANNEL NUTS & HARD WARE COOPER B-Line � '9�..�:..- 'T .0 �:_...--..._...____ _ _._. . .,___ __. . ATR ALL THREADED ROD •Available in 36°(91.�cm),72"(182.9 c�n), 120"(304.8 cm), 144"(365.7 cm)lengths •Safety Factor of 5 on recommended load •Standard finish:Zine-Plated,Stainless Steel Type 304 �`� � �. +� !li .� , ��i i�'��•a i �� 1.�� a\ � �r� o-� �� ,� i i ,4�^� �� - rdv..;�r_._ ATR i/a" 20 �2=10 (1.07> � � 12 (5.44�) � ATR Sh6" 18 400 (1.78) 19 (s.62) ATR3/s" t6 730 i3.za� 29 (i3.�s� � ATR�h" 13 1350 (6.00) 53 (24.04) ATR 5/s" 11 2160 (9.60) 89 (4037) ATR 3/a" 10 3230 (1437) 123 (55.79) ATR�/8" 9 4430 (19.93) 170 (77.I l) ATR P' 8 5900 (26.24) 225 (102.06) 8655 ROD COUPLING � ` � � r��",��,�� r;.� � �` B656 REDUCER ROD COUPLING r��'�� ' �� i r: r�,✓�Y'�� (� i�`-�i."�i i `\(�i •Load ratin;for each coupler meets All Threaded Rod value 5�,��x7 _ •Standard finish:Zinc-Plated,Stainless Steel Type 304 �``��' ��'�'�" ��^ � � �'�� ` �� B655-�/� �/a"-30 2�10 (1.07) �/s"� (..��) 19 (.86) B655-sh6 Sh6"-l8 380 (1.69) �/s" (22.z) 1.8 (.sl) B655-3/8 3/s"-16 730 (3?4) 1�/8" (28.6) 3.6 (1.63) B655-1/z lh_"-13 1350 (6.00) 13/a" (44.4) 11.3 (s.12) � B655-'/H 5/8"-11 1810 (3.05) 2�/3" (54.0) 17.6 (7.98) �� '', _- B655-3/a 3/�t"-10 2710 (12.05) 21/a" (57.l) 28.1 (12.7d) B655?/S �/8"-9 3770 (16.77) 2�h" (63.5) 57.2 (25.94) I365�-1 1"-8 4960 (22.06) 23/4° (69.8) 73.7 (33.43) � `�'�5°z� _ _��r��: i ��,n�i7�i`r7"'`i �' -' � i � � a r��`�4�� ' � �'�� '�'� � - 1 i a i'. �'(.�{� ''n ��`�:.' ��t� ,_c� �� . �� >1'�+' ��T-_;�a2': i = ,: ,�� . -:.... �E`�. r #'.i .;- t �_.:. _ _ . _ �+� 'r�%;�� 13656-3/s�x i/a 3/s"-16&i/a'-20 240� (1.07) l" (25.4) 3.7 (i.68) �� S �, .••-_;`''� BClSG-�/2 X 3/8 �h„_13&3/a"-16 610 (2.71) 1�/a" (31.7) 6.6 (2.99) �, �' B656-�/s x 1/z 5/x"-il & �/z"-13 1130 (5.02) 11/a" (31.7) 11.6 (5.26) rof�.,` "'';. �---"��,` ��`�t B656-3/a x 5/8 3/a"-10&5/8"-11 1810 (8.05) 1�/a" (38.1) 20.6 (9.34) � r ��.� B656-�/s x 3/� �/s"-9&3/a"-]0 2710 (t2.05) 13/a" (4a.d) 39.4 (17.87) .� �� ,f�,' BHR SERIES ,�� k ..� HOT RODS FOR TRAPEZE HANGERS •12"length of threaded rod completely assembled with rod ��, coupling,locking hex nuts,square washer,and channel mrt. r.,,, ��° �� + •3tandard finish:Zinc-Plated -�� ''a '�. � �� :;� �h �TMa . �j �`n y� 1 1�. �}l .'t'�j� . . f., I � � J � ��ii ii i r�i �- " '�F�. . 7 �� i . . +k . y�, . . ��'hi Y '$ f. ,,� 1 . �x'' p�; } �.. . 'Y�� . . S ti, i��*'t� �,��'�r-j°-' ��`�i`. , "�'� �� v� r• � L � � � T �i'��,: ��'�'- ��i?:�' �`�'�-� �i. ' ,�$. '� � _� .`. � .' . .v . 4 `':�.. ti� 13IIR122SLN �/ " 20 240 (I.D71 dl I (18.6) ,�`' ' , �.-, BHR1238ZN 3/s"-16 730 (3.24) 63 (?8.6j �� +�: �a:�, '� � BHR1250ZN �/?"-13 1350 (6.00) 98 (44.�3) � � '�� ,,-x, � BHR1262ZN 5/s"-11 1500 (6.67) 14A (67.1) "`` Note:Based on use with 12 ga.channel. (BHR1225,BHR1233,and BHR1250 use combo nut washers instead of square washers and channel nuts) S( Reference page 44 for genera]Fitting and standard£inish specifications. 90° ANGLE FI�'TINGS COOPER B-Line 8420-378 8420-578 B420-778 ONE HOLE CORNER ANGLE ONE HOL� CORNER ANGLE ONr HOLE CORNER ANGLE •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN •WtJC 60 Lbs.(27.2 k�) •Wt./C 85 Lbs.(33.5 k��) •Wt./C 107 Lbs.(43S k�) � 1�/8" 1�/8„ 1�/8" (47.6) (47.6) 5�/3" �7�g„ (47.6) � (200.0) 3�/3" (149.2) cys.a> ,/ � � �-� � �� ` ' �- / // , �-_ � ,i / � ,� B420-978 B101 B230 ONE HOLE CORN�R ANGL� T�VO HOLE CORNER ANGLE TWO HOLE CORNER ANGLE •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN,HDG,SS4,AL •Standard Fnishes:ZN,GRN,HDG,SS4,AL •Wt./C 129 Lbs.(58.5 kg) •Wt./C 37 Lbs.(16.8 kg) •Wt./C 37 Lbs.(16.8 kg) 1�/8„ 15/8„ (47.6) 1�/3" (413) (47.6) I 9�/s" I (zso.$) � I I \ � � i � � j / �: / � �,� � � I 21/16„ � 2�/L6" � �5�'�� ° I (58.7) � � i � � / B231 B359 B360 TWO HOLE"NO-TWIST" TWO HOLE CORNER ANGLE TWO HOLE CORNER ANGLE CORNER ANGL� •Standard Finishes:ZN,GRN •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN,HDG •Wt./C 43 Lbs.(21.8 kc) •Wt./C 53 Lbs.(24.0 kg) •Wt./C 41 Lbs.(18.6 kg) 3�� 31�,,, �� (76.2) (33.9) I � �� y y 21/4„ � ,� ' � � � cs�.i>� � � �— � 21/4" � � � � 1�/s„ 1�/s„ (�7.1) � (47.6) (47.6) 62 Reference pa�e 58 for general fitting and standard finish specifications. 90° ANGL� FITTINGS COOPER B-Line B361 B 102 B 103 TWO HOL� CORNER ANGL� THREE HOL� CORN�R ANGLE THREE HOLE CORNER ANGLE •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN •Standnrd finishes:ZN,GRN,HDG,SS4 •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN,HDG,SS4 •Wt./C 60 Lbs.(27.2 kg) •WtJC 56 Lbs.(25.4 ka) •WtJC 56 Lbs.(25.4 kQ) 15�g�, 4>> 31/z" �at.$) (101.6) (88.9) � � � � — � � � — � i � �� i � � , y � � � _ � � 41�8„ �� I (ioa.a� i�/s" � �i�:��> � �� (47.6) � � (57.1) I I� ' I I B232 8374 B529 THREE HOLE CORNER ANGLE THREE HOLE CORNER ANGLE THREE HOLE CORNER ANGLE •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN,HDG,SS4 •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN,HDG •Standard Finishes:ZN,GRN •WtJC 56 Lbs.(25.4 kg) •Wt./C 56 Lbs.(25.4 kg) •Wt./C 73 Lbs.(35.4 kg) 21/t 6„ 3>, (52.4) 15/l6" (76.2) II �I (333) I � I � �� 1�/8„ I � �� \� � (47.6) �� 4�/s" �� (123.8) � ( �- � � � � � I 315/t�" � I � (100.0) � 33/=�„ �9s.�� Zi�z„ � � 15/16" �63.5) (33.3) B 104 B 115 8558 FOUR HOL� CORNER ANGLE FOUR HOLE CORNER ANGLE FOUR HOLE CORNER ANGLE •Standv�d finishes:ZN,GRN,HDG,SS4, •Standard finisties:ZN,GRN,HDG,SS4,AL •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN SS6,AL •Wt./C 76 Lbs.(34.5 ke) •Wt./C 73 Lbs.(331 kg) •Wt./C 78 Lbs.(35.4 kg) 33/4" 1;�8>, (95.2) (41.3) 31/2„ (88.9) I iI I�I� � � I� i I� I� � � � � 21�a„ „— � � � (57.1) � � ,�� 4�ls" � � �r�l (104.8) \ � 315/16" 15/s" 31��„ � � II (�QO) (413) II (82.5) I Reference page 58 for general fitting and standazd finish specifications. 63 . Z-FITTINGS coo EP R B-Line B526 B106-52 B106-42 TWO HOLE TWO HOL� TWO HOLE OFFSET Z-SUPPORT Z-SUPPORT FOR B52 Z-SUPPORT FOR B42 •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN •Wt./C 38 Lbs.(17.2 kg) •Wt./C 40 Lbs.(181 ka) •Wt./C 44 Lbs.(20.0 kg) II 1��„ � (63) i i � � � �'� � � i �� 13/16" �` 1„ '� � " O 315�3y, (20.6) (25.4) (ss.i) 31/2„ 31�,,> �' 15/8>, (88.9) (85.9) (41.3) B106-32 B106-12 B105 TWO HOLE TWO HOLE THRE�HOLE Z-SUPPORT FOR B32 Z-SUPPORT FOR I312 Z-SUPPORT FOR B22 •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN,HDG •WtJC 51 Lbs.(23.1 kg) •Wt./C 63 Lbs.(23.6 k�) •Wt./C 51 Lbs.(23.1 kg) i � � � � ° l 5/s"� � / � � � �ai.3� 0 � 13/8" �\ 2�/16>' � (34.9) (61.9) � 3�/2„ (s8.9) 3 t��» 31��„ 88.9) (88.9) 8110 B586 B108 THRFE HOLE TWO HOLE TWO HOLE Z-SUPPORT FOR Bll Z-SUPPORT OrFSET Z-SUPPORT •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN •Wt./C 70 Lbs.(31.7 k�) •Wt./C 90 Lbs.(40.8 k�) •Wt./C 55 Lbs.(249 kd) 3�/z„ (ss.9) 3 i�,,, � � cas.�> � / � ' y � � �' � - i 2 /s"� � 0 31�? �2388) 15/3" (54.0) �—�a (33.9) � ( (4L3) s � -� � 31/2" � (88.9) 15/8" (413) Reference page 58 for general fitting and standard finish specifications. �'] FI�4T PLATE FITTINGS COOPER B-Line - . m_� M:� _. � „_ � - -..��.�:� �_ -�_-_ _LL--- , __ B200-B202-2 SQUARE WASHER 8129 •Standard finishes:ZN ,:: i�a�r�,,�, -' T`VO HOLE SPLICE PLATE GRN,HDG,SS4,SS6 AL `;�,,,,,,,c��i �. . � �. #...�.,�� '; .�;�,,� �� 5 •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN 15/8„ , . •Wt./C 37 Lbs.(16.8 k�) (413)� B200 3/S" (9.5) '/ih" (Z9) 1S �(3.1) -� � B201 �/16" (11.1) -�/8" (9.5) 18 (8.1) �� B202 9/16" (1�t.2) i/2" (12.7) 17 (7.7) �� B202-1 t�/16" (17.4) 5/8" (15.9) 16 (22) HOLESIZEA g?p�_2 13��6" (�0.6) 3/4" (19.0) 15 (6.8) 31�2'� � NO TWIST S UARF,WASHER r (ss.9)-� B�OOD-B202-2D Q � � •Standard finishes:ZN, �; `" " I � GRN,HDG,SS4,SS6,AL � , ; � � 15/8" B200D 3/8" (9.5) L5/16" �(7.9) 18 (8.1) (413)� � B201D �/ie" (1Ll) 3/s" (9.5) 18 (8.1) � �=� B202D y/i6" (14.2) �/?" (12.7) 17 (7.7) � ��% �� B202-1D 11/ia" (17.4) 5!8° (15.9) 16 (72) � HOL�SIZEA B202-2D 13/16" (20.6) 3/4" (19.0) i� (6.8) B340 B528 B141 TWO HOLE SPLICE PLATE TWO HOLE SPLICE PLATE THREE HOLE SPLIC�PLATE •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN •Wt./C 34 Lbs.(15.4 kg) •Wt./C 50 Lbs.(22.7 kg) •Wt./C 55 Lbs.(249 kQ) 53/8„ (136.5) 21��„ II 1g�8�, 15/16" (63.5) I I I (413) 31�q>> (33.3) , � I I � I� � � (82.5) � � � � ' II �� I � � I � I r 45/a" I � �I I� �i ns> B557 B341 B342 THREE HOLE SPLICE PLATE FOUR HOLE SPLICE PLATE FIVr HOLE SPLICE PLATE •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN,HDG •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN •Wt./C 50 Lbs.(22.7 kg) •WtJC 76 Lbs.(34.5 k�) •Wt./C 96 Lbs.(43.5 k�) 4�/s" (123.8)� � I 1 �,,,\ 9�/8"/''� I I (134�1) i (231.8) \ I � � � �� i � �� - i� � ` i � � 1�/8„ 15�8" (41.3) (413) Reference page 58 for general fitting and standard finish specifications. 59 FLAT PLATE FITTINGS COOPER B-Line � B138 B139 B504 TWO HOLE S�VIVEL PLAT� THREE HOLE S�VIV�L PLAT� FOUR HOLE SPLICE PLATE •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN •Wt./C 43 Lbs.(21.8 ka) •WtJC 69 Lbs.(313 kg) •Wt./C 73 Lbs.(33.1 kg) 45/8„ (117.5) 6��»� 3" ,�165.1) 31�,,, �s�s„ (�6.?) ' 3„ �ss.�) (a�.� 3i/a„ � � 1�ls" ��.z> II cs2.$) II (=t7.6) � � � � � �� i I � � I I � i i � I I I) �i I � B140 B143 B133 THREE HOLE CORNER PLATE FOUR HOLE CORNER PLATE FOUR HOLE TEE PLATE •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN,HDG,SS4 •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN,HDG,SS4 •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN,HDG,SS4,AL •Wt./C 56 Lbs.(25.4 kg) •Wt./C 75 Lbs.(34.0 kQ) •Wt./C 75 Lbs.(34.0 k�) 3�/2„ 31�,,,, (88.9) 3 ih" (ss.y)� �(83.9)� it � � � , � � � 3��,,> 53/s,> (83.9) � � (136.5) I � � � 53/s" � (136.5) � i � � � � � � � B132 8135 B142 I'IVE HOLE CROSS PLATE THREE HOLE CORNER FOUR HOLE CORNER •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN,HDG GUSSET PLATE GUSSET PLATE •Wt./C 100 Lbs.(45.3 k�) •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN,HDG •Wt./C 70 Lbs.(31.7 kg) •Wt./C 102 Lbs.(46.2 kg) 53/3" (136.Sj 31��,> (38.9)� 3��y> - � � �(38.9� � � � 31�'` � � 83.9) � 53/8" � � � 53/8" (136.5) � (136.5) � � � I I I (� Reference paoe 58 for general fitting and standard finish specifications. ANGULAR FITTINGS coo EP R B-Line _ _ .�. . . _..-, ...-.��,.�_�.� .�_�_...�_�_��_,_ ___ � 8147-B152 B243-B253 TWO HOLE OPEN ANGLE P'OUR HOLE OPEN ANGL� •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN 23/3" ��r�- a��Y� -: �� \� (603) `:: �1,r ` .�s-,� ' ��A� �'�V � � �?�3 � 7�/;� ' / / i 11/t 6" B244 15° /� �z�.o> � 3i��„ B245 22�/z� 3��/16„ � ,;i7 1'�.-�.; arv _ �,�: r o (93.6) � A � ��'��t i�A (32.5) B246 30 � � � � ' 3 /z„ `' ` 1 3�_ ��°`,�; / 1 B247 37�h° 83.9) 131-�7 �2i/�' (2Z0) B248 45° 77 (34.9) � � � B148 75° B249 52�h_° / � B14') 671h° , B250 60° � 63 (_s.6) B150 60° B251 67�h_° B151 52i/?° B252 75° B152 37�/z° B253 82�/z° B162-B165 B322-B332 TWO HOLE OPEN ANGLE TWO HOLE OP�N SHORT ANGLE •Standard flnishes:ZN,GRN •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN j�:i-i`'.:ri � :,r3 r�'�r i � 11/16" �� ,�A � " , - (?7.0) � /� �t33?2 7��,��_ A B323 �15° 13/4" � /� 5 I3324 221/?° (4=4.=t)� �3 /l6" 15�g�� `� (g�.�) B325 30° B326 371/z° (=�13) ��— );:i i�r•,�": � '` � � �� s / , 21/16" B327 45° 35 (15.9) / �� , llh6" (52.4) B328 52�/�° 131C2 30°� - (27.0) B329 60° B163 ��i�?° 59 (26.7) I3330 67i/�° B164 15° B331 75° R165 71/z° B332 321/z° B154 B522 8488 TWO HOLE OPEN ANGLE THREE HOLE 95° TWO HOLE LEG CONNECTION •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN,SS4 OPEN ANGLE FITTING •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN •WtJC 53 Lbs.(26.3 kg) •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN •Wt./C l00 Lbs.(45.3 kg) •Wt./C 54 Lbs.(24.5 k�) 1�/8„ - 3,> (�37.6) � �\ �� \ (76.2j�� 5� II$° i � � ° � � 5� � � � � �I 11/16" � � I � II (27.0) � � 25/16" �I I � �j 4�° (58.7) 35/8" � �� (92.1) 11/16" I I 31/4„,� (27.0) � (82.5) (g Reference paoe 58 for general fitting and standard finish specifica[ions. CLEVIS FITTINGS COOPER B-Line , _ . ��< <: ��^�^--'-'"- r±�....,,:, .. _._.- _„-,_ _ -_^. ..... ,. . -- ---� B169 B 164 B 167 TWO HOLE SPLICE THRE�HOL�SPLICE FOUR HOLE SPLICE CLEVIS FOR B52 CLEVIS FOR B52 CLEVIS FOR B52 •S[andard finishes:ZN,GRN •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN •S[andard finishes:ZN,GRN •Wt./C 84 Lbs.(3�.1 kg) •Wt./C 126 Lbs.(57.1 kg) •Wt./C 173 Lbs.(80J kg) i i� � �� i ,� i ��,j :� �Y :•��:-'y . �� i .s/•'" •/.�' ;�:.'�•'� � �i ;- .� •.�i� � / , 31/2" / i�, 3 1 � 5 /8" 7 /a„ (88.9) � �(136.5) � , �(184.1) �� 1/4„ (6.3) (6.3) 1/4,> (6.3) 81�� 81�1 81�2 TWO HOLE SPLICE THREE HOLE SPLICE FOUR HOLE SPLICE CLEVIS FOR B22 OR B52A CL�VIS Ia'OR B22 OR B52A CLEVIS FOR B22 OR B52A •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN •Wt./C 123 Lbs.(55.8 kg) •Wc/C 195 Lbs.(33.4 k�) •Wt./C 266 Lbs.(120.6 kg) �/�� /�� / ,� ' ,� -�:i •�•� ,��:•'i; ,�J�'i .Qj",:i � �'� ; - :��.•�•� . :�";/ . i � • 'i ;,''� i ; i -'�•i� '� 3��,,, i " ;,. � (88.9) , ,,53/8" �� / '• 7��=4>, �/4" ��(136.5) (63) � (18d1) /4„ (6.3) 1��„ (6.3) 8172-12 B172-22A 8450 FOUR HOLE SPLICE FOUR HOLE SPLICE U-WASHER CLEVIS FOR B12 CLEVIS FOR B11 OR B22A •Material:ASTM A1011 HSLAS Gr.50 •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN •Wt./C 326 Lbs.(147.3 kg) •Wt./C 406 Lbs.(184.1 kg) H // � HOLE SIZE` � � / / _ //� i /� ,/ � 15/32„ �;.% •�� i / �(I L9) �•.%j :�.;:% � / �f 5 �, �� .ej":/ /s :�/j�� ..�.�� >> c<,«o�c�.i.��_ �ai.�� , . . - , ' �'�� i�`�' e � _��`��C.: ��'��+'C r�/ �� F �[` � .., ��7�� 4 .�. � . ) j . : � F .� � i 11�7��=`��-�.� �� 7i/a" 7i/4" ��aso-�ia s��b�� .9� �a �6.3� �(lS�l.l) �(184.1) 8450-3/8 �h6" (11.1) 14 (6.3) �/4" � B45�-�/2 9/i6" (I4.3) 13 (5.8) � (63) 1�`�'� B450-5�g 11/16" (17.4) 13 (5.8) (6.3) B450-3/�t 13/i6" (20.6) 13 (5.8) ']� Reference page 58 for general fitting and standard finish specifications. PIPE CLAMPS COOPER B-Line B2000 S�RIES PIPE AND CONDUIT CLAMPS •Safety Factor of 5 •Add PA to suffix for pre-assembled pipe clamps •Indudes Combination Recess Hex Head Machine Screw and Square Nut Design Load 1 •Mateiial: 16 Ga.(1.5), 14 Ga.(1.9), 12 Ga.(2.6)ASTM A1011 33,000 PSI min.yield ! and l l Ga.(3.0)ASTM AlO11HSLA Gr.50 I •Standard finishes:ZN,HDG,SS4,SS6,AL Note:For EMT sizes 2�/2"and lareer use rigid conduit sizes. �� .. ,� - � � �_ Design Load 2 Design Load 3 � - TiTIN�VALL CO�'DUTT(TNIT) CLANIPS � ,y� ,�y� � � -,%4 � i i rii ?;ri iC�'�,1__ 1) ..�ad �3 ia-� 1J�"'`��_.a 3 �3�'d; ai�9��g ,�._��1i'1� ;= "�", .7'rSi 1,,�'� �.y�r�--' J'liit�.�i_ :{.� ��i`�'r�-�.€��-�,, ��.'" � l�'° ��'C�" �:�,�„� ��'. �a.`��'-��:` 'a B2000 �3/s" (10) 16 Ga. (1.5) �400 ��.(L78) 50 �� (22) 50 (.22) 10 (4.5) � E B2001 �/2" (15) 16 Ga. (I.5) 400 (1.78) 50 (.22) 50 (.22) 10 (4.5) R ��V B2002 3/�" (20) 16 Ga. (1.9) 400 (1.78) 50 (.22) 50 (.22) 11 (5.0) '? B2003 1" (25) 14 Ga. (1.9) 600 (2.67) 75 (.33) 75 (.33) 16 (7.2) U B2004 11/a" (32) 14 Ga. (1.9) 600 (2.67) 75 (.33) 75 (.33) 19 (8.6) _, � B200� 1�/z" (40) 12 Ga. (2.6) 800 (3.56) 125 (.56) 125 (.56) 28 (12.7) �� B2006 2" (50) 12 Ga. (2.6) 800 (3.56) 125 (.56) 125 (.56) 33 (14.9) .a�. RIGID CONDUIT OR PIPE CLAMPS ' �`t-�- `� �r ` r,�` �.°r�a" tx"�`�`�� '` �.."" � � ,� , '°''��x � iYi_ii J 1 (�"aJ`T:'� 1) ..��0 7� a i 1� I .ii 1 P'�� J��.'fCi l�'`Y �n :��i ��.'a : L' 3'�i�:a?�i. �fvai, ':�lim�I +t`?- ! 1�iG, l�' 7,1i� � i'� J:�ii �`'f l,�i ��=R B2001 3/8„ (10) 16 Ga. (LS) 400 (1.73) 50 (.22) JO (.'�2) 10 � (4.5) B2008 �h" (15) 16 Ga. (1.5) 400 (1.78) SO (.22) 50 (.22) ll (5.0) B2009 3/a" (20) 14 Ga. (l.9) 600 (2.67) 75 (33) 75 (33) 15 (6.8) B2010 1" (25) 14 Ga. (1.9) 600 (2.67) 75 (33) 75 (.33) 16 (7.2) B20ll li/a" (32) 14 Ga. (1.9) 600 (2.67) 75 (33) 75 (.33) 20 (9.1) 52012 1�/2" (40) 12 Ga. (2.6) 800 (3.56) 125 (.56) 125 (.56) 30 (13.6) B2013 2" (50) l2 Ga. (2.6) 800 (3.56) 125 (.56) 125 (.56) 34 (15.4) B2014 2�/2" (65) 12 Ga. (2.6) 800 (3.56) 125 (.56) 125 (.56) 38 (17�) B2015 3" (80) 13 Ga. (2.6) 800 (3.56) 125 (.56) 125 � (S6) 44 (t9.9) B2016 3�h" (90) 11 Ga. (3.0) 1000 (4.45) 200 (.89) 150 (.67) 61 (27.6) B2017 4" (100) 11 Ga. (3.0) 1000 (�.45) 200 (.89) 150 (.67) 66 (29.9) B2018 4�/2" (115) ll Ga. (3.0) 1000 (4.45) 200 (.89) 150 (.67) 70 (31.7) B2019 5" (125) 11 Ga. (3.0) 1000 (4.45) 200 (.89) 150 (.67) 77 (34.9) B2020 6" (150) 11 Ga. (3.0) 1000 (4.45) 200 (.89) 150 (.67) 100 (45.3) B2021 7" (]75) 11 Ga. (3.0) 1000 (=4.45) 250 (1.11) 200 (.89) 115 (52.1) B2022 8" (200) 11 Ga. (3.U) 1000 (4.45) 250 (1.11) 200 (.89) 128 (58.0) B2130 l0 (254) 11 Ga. (3.0) 1000 (4.45) 250 (i.11) 200 (.89) 160 (72.6) B2132 12" (305) 11 Ga. (3.0) 1000 (4.45) 250 (1.11) 200 (.s9) 185 (83.9) � 112 Reference paae 110 for general fittin�and standard Finish specifications. PIPE CLAMPS COOPER B-Line � B2000 SERIES O.D.PIPE AND CONDUIT CLAMPS Design Load 1 •Safety Factor of 5 # •Add PA to suffix for pre-assembled pipe clamps I •Other sizes available upon request •Includes Combination Recess Hex Head Machine Screw and Square Nut. O.D. •Material: 16 Ga.(1.5)> 14 Ga.(1.9), 12 Ga.(2.6)ASTM A1011 33,000 PSI min.yield ,� and 11 Ga.(3.0)ASTM AlO11HSLA Gr.50 �� •Standard finishes:ZN,HDG,SS4 i i i i i � �\ � Design Load 2 f � Design Load 3 O.D. O.D. CLA�IPS . __... ��,. ' g �'��r ' � � � '�1'�}�3 .� ': i��i"'�'��.� i3�t�i��7�'�� ; �).("i a�XY'fi jl� i��`�'i{xC� ; \'��•�. . f° i �-- y�. . a�i f�rr ' d'-"1i�,��1a�9 . �n�✓�, � i� ��t'ft'�'�tli'�' _ �.1 jt� .:��.i �i 1�1�"�� £ �� ';7�1i 7`P�`��• � ��'Y`�+ ��d" - b0 � f33U23 � i/a" � (6.3) � i1a"-20 � 16�� " �(I.5) l20 (.Sa) 30 (.13) 30 (.13) 8 (3.b) � B2024 3/s" (9.5) �/a"-20 16 (1.5) 300 (1.33) 40 (.18) 40 (.18) 8 (3.6) � B2035 i/z" (12.7) i/a"-20 16 (1.5) 400 (7.78) 50 (.22) 50 (.22� 9 (4.l) C° 82026 5/s" (15.9) �ia'°-20 16 (is> a00 (i.�s> 50 (.zz> 50 (.22> 10 �a.s> U � 3� B2027 3/�" (19.0) �/4"-20 16 (1.5) 400 (1.78) 50 (.22) 50 (.2'?) 10 (4.5) o B2028 7/s" (22.2) 1/�t"-20 16 (1.5) 400 (t.78) 50 (22) 50 (22) 11 (5.0) a B2029 1" (25.4) 1/4"-�0 14 (1.9) 500 (2.23) 75 (33) 75 (33) 15 (6.8) _, ___a B2030 11/a" (28.6) 1/a"-20 14 (t.9) 600 (2.67) 75 (.33) 75 (.33) 15 (6.8) B2031 1�/a" (31.7) �/a"-20 14 (1.9) 600 (2.67) 75 (33) 75 (33) 16 (73) B2032 l3/s" (34.9) i!a"-20 14 (1.9) 600 (2.67) 75 (33) 75 (33) l7 (7.7) B2004 1�/2" (38.1) �/4"-20 14 (1.9) 600 (2.67) 75 (33) 75 (33) 18 (8.2) B2011 15/s" (4l3) i/4"-20 14 (1.9) 600 (2.67) 75 (33) 75 (.33) 19 (8.6) B2005 13/a" (=W.4) 5/16"-13 12 (2.6) 800 (3.56) 125 (.56) 125 (.56) 29 (13.1) B203( 1�/8" (47.6) 5/tc�"-lA l2 (2.6) 800 (3.56) 125 (.56) 125 (.56) 30 (13.6) B2037 2 (50.8) s/�6"-18 12 (2.6) 300 (3.56) 125 (.56) 125 (.56) 30 (13.6) B2038 2�/8" (54.0) 5/16"-18 12 (2.6) 800 (3.56) 125 (.56) 125 (.56) 32 (14.5) B2039 2i/a" (57.1) s/ib"-18 12 (2.6) S00 (3.56) 125 (.56) 125 (.56) 32 (14.5) B2013 23/8" (603) s/16"-18 12 (2.6) 800 (3.56) 125 (.56) 125 (.56) 34 (15.4) B2041 2ih" (63.5) 5/i6"-18 12 (2.6) 800 (3.56) 125 (.56) 125 (.56) 35 (15.9) B2043 25/8" (66.7) 5/16"-18 12 (2.6) 800 (3.56) 125 (.56) 125 (.56) 35 (15.9) B2043 23/�" 169.8) 5/ib"-18 12 (2.6) 800 (3.56) 125 (.56) 125 (.56) 38 (17.2) B2014 2�/8" (73.0) 5/16"-18 12 (2.6) 800 (3.56) 125 (.56) 125 (.56) 38 (17.2) B2045 3 (76.2) 5/i6"-18 12 (2.6) 800 (3.56) 125 (.56) 125 (.56) 38 (17.2) B2046 3�/8" (79.4) 5/16"-18 12 (2.6) 80U (3.56) 125 (.56) 125 (.56) 39 (17.7) B3047 3�/a° (82.5) 5/te"-18 12 (2.6) 800 (3.56) 125 (.56) 125 (.56j 41 (i8.6) B2048 33/s" (85.7) 5/ih"-18 12 (2.6) 800 (3.56) 125 (.56) 12S (.56) 43 (19.5) B2015 3�/?" (88.9) s116"-18 12 (2.6) 800 (3.56) 125 (.56) 125 (.56) 44 (20.0) B2050 35/8" (92.1) 5/t6"-18 11 (3.0) 1000 (4.45) 200 (.89) 150 (.67) 54 (24.5) B3051 33/4" (95.2) 5/16"-18 ll (3.0) 1000 (4.4�) 200 (.89) 150 (.67) 57 (25.8) B2052 3�l8" (41.3) 5/t6"-18 11 (3.U). 1000 (4.45 200 (.89) 150 (.67) 55 (25.0) B2016 �1 (101.6) Sh6"-13 11 (3.0) 1000 (a.45) 200 (.89) 150 (.67) 57 (25.8) B2054 4i/S" (104.8) 5/le"-18 11 (3.0) 1000 (4.45) 200 (.89) 150 (.67j 61 (27.7) B2055 4�/4" (107.9) 5/16"-18 11 (3.0) 1000 (4.45) 200 (.89) 150 (.67) 62 (28.1) B2056 43/8" (lu.l) 5/i6"-IA 11 (3.0) 1000 (4.45) 200 (.89) 150 (.67) 64 (29.0) � B2017 4�/z" (114.3) 5/16"-13 11 (3.0) 1000 (4.45) 200 (.89) 150 (.67) 66 (299) B2058 45/8" (117.5) 5/16"-18 ll (3.0) 1000 (4.45) 200 (.89) 150 (.67) 66 (29.9) 114 Reference page 110 for�eneral fitting and standard Finish specifica[ions. PIPE CLAMPS COOPER B-Line B2000 SERIES > O.D.PIPE AND CONDUIT CLAMPS •Safety Factor of 5 •Add PA to suffix for pre-assembled pipe clamps •Other sizes available upon request •Includes Combination Recess Hex Head Machine Screw and Square Nut. •Material: 16 Ga.(1.5), 14 Ga.(1.9), 12 Ga.(2.6)ASTM A1011 33,000 PSI min.yield and 11 Ga.(3.0)ASTM AI O1IHSLA Gr.50 Design Load 1 •Standard finishes:ZN,HDG,SS4 # I iiiii i O.D. ,� _ 'i, , � i� O.D. Design Load 3 � ';,'� . b Design Load 3 n O.D. CLAMPS � F �i� �1�3r . � �!�'1�� ', ��a!Yy ��t��i�"ii� 3)C�ai ��'4� �).,�� ,�iY�r � ° 1'�° �-r t; � �A��'i Y`�'i r�le�` �'S-�'�,� 'u%-f'i"�-I� -� �'��s � i� I; }��'h�� :` �1�� dh' ��I'� ��G�'v� � ,�� 1"�h a Y-°�`' � �k 9ta � � i 3 a `�� r � r- 3 '� n � . _ �,:.. :. .. : . � _.. . - . . _ _ , .._.: ,..- '--'-�__ ,. . ,:. �_�_:� ��__. __ ....:�.. . _. "_ .. .�: � .. . :.. . ....�._, w 13?059 d3/a" �(l?O.bj s/�6"-13 ll (3t)� 1000 (4.45) 300 (.591 150 (.67) 6b (30.8)� � B2060 4�/S" (123.8) 5/16"-18 11 (3.0) 1000 (4.45) 200 (.89) 150 (.67) 69 (313) � B2018 5 (137.0) 5/16"-18 11 (3.0) 1000 (4.45) 200 (.89) 150 (.67) 70 (31.8) x B2062 Si/8" (130.2) 5/16"-18 11 (3.0) 1000 (4.45) 200 (.89) 150 (.67) 70 (31.8) � B2063 Sila" (133.3) 5/i6"-18 11 (3.0) I�00 (4.45) 200 (.89) 150 (.67) 70 (31.8) � B2064 53/8" (136.5) 5/i6"-18 11 (3.0) 1000 (4.45) 200 (.89) 150 (.67) 77 (34.9) B2019 Si/2" (139.7) 5/16"-18 11 (3.0) 1000 (4.45) 200 (.89) 150 (.67) 78 (35.4) B2066 55/8" (142.9) 5/16"-18 11 (3.0) 1000 (4.45) 200 (.89) 150 (.67) 83 (37.6) B3067 5?/a" (146.0) S/16"-13 11 (3.0) 1000 (4.45) 200 (.89) I50 (.67) 34 (38.1) B2068 5�l8" (149.2) 5/i6"-18 11 (3.0) 1000 (4.45) 200 (.89) 150 (.67) 85 (38.6) B2069 6" (152.4) 5/16"-13 ll (3.0) 1000 (4.45) 200 (.39) 150 (.67) 87 (39.5) B2110 6118" (155.6) 3/S"-16 11 (3.0) 1000 (4.45) 250 (l.11) 200 (.89) 94 (42.6) B2ll1 6�/�" (153.7) 3/8"-16 11 (3.0) 1000 (4.45) 250 (111) 200 (.89) 96 (43.5) B2ll2 63/s" (161.9) 3/s"-16 11 (3.0) 1000 (4.a5) 250 (1.11) 200 (.s9) 98 (�+.4) B2113 6�M_" (165.1) 3/8"-16 11 (3.0) 1000 (4.45) 250 (1.11) 200 (.39) 99 (4=1.9) B2020 65/s" (168.3) 3/s"-16 ll (3.0) 1000 (4.45) 250 (1.11) 200 (.89) l00 (45.4) B2115 63/4" (171.4) 3/8"-16 ll (3.0) 1000 (4.45) 250 (1.11) 200 (.89) 102 (46.3) B311fi 6�/8" (174.6) 3/R"-16 11 (3.0) 1000 (4.45) 250 (l.11) 200 (.89) 104 (47.2) B2117 T' (177.8) 3/8"-16 ll (3.0) 1000 (�i.45) 250 (l.ri) 200 (.39) 106 (431) B2118 71/s" (181.0) 3/8"-16 11 (3.0) 1000 (4.45) 250 (l.11) 200 (.89) 108 (49.0) B2119 7�/a" (184.1) 3/8"-16 11 (3.0) 1000 (4.45) 250 (1.11) 200 (.89) ll0 (49.9) B2120 73/8" (1873) 3/s"-16 11 (3.0) 1000 (4.45) 250 (l:ll) 200 (.89) 112 (50.8) B2121 7�/?" (190.5) 3/s"-16 11 (3.0) 1000 (4.45) 250 (I11) 200 (.89) 114 (51.7) B3021 75/8" (193.7) 3/s"-16 ll (3.0) 1000 (4.45) 250 (1.11) 200 (.89) 115 (52.2) B2123 73/4" (196.8) 3/8"-16 11 (3.0) 1000 (4.45) 250 (1.11) 200 (.89) 117 (53.1) B2124 7�lx" (200.0) 3/s"-16 11 (3.0) 1000 (4.45) 250 (l.li) 200 (.89) 119 (54.0) B2125 8" (2032) 3/8"-16 11 (3.0) 1000 (4.45) 2_50 (1.11) 200 (.89) L1 (54.9) B2126 81/8" (206.4) 3/8"-16 11 (3.0) 1000 (4.45) 250 (l.11) 200 (.89) 123 (55.8) B2127 8�/a" (209.5) 3/s"-16 ll (3.0) 1000 (4.45) 250 (L11) 200 (.89) 125 (56.7) B2138 83/8" (212.7) 3/R"-16 Il (3.0) 1000 (4.45) 250 (i.11) 200 (.89) 126 (57.2) B3129 8�/z" (215.9) 3/8"-16 11 (3.0) 1000 (4.45) 250 (1.11) 200 (.89) 128 (58.1) B2022 85/s" (219.1) 3/x"-16 ll (3.0) 1000 (4.45) 250 (l.il) 200 (.89} 128 (58.1) B2130 103/a" (273.0) 3/s"-16 11 (3.0) 1000 (4.45) 250 (1.11) 200 (.89) 160 (72.6) R2132 123/4" (323.8) 3/8"-16 11 (3.0) 1000 (4.45) 250 (l.u) 200 (.89) 185 (83.9) � Reference page 110 for general fittin�and standard finish speciFications. 11$ BEAM CLAMPS COOPER B-Line B211 B213 ZEE BEAM CLAIVIP I-BEAM CLAMP •Design Load 600 Lbs.(2.67 kN) •Desi�n Load 900 Lbs.(4.00 kN) when used in pairs when used in pairs •Safety Factor of 5 •Safety Factor of 5 •1"(?5.4)Max.F7ange Thickness •�/8"(22.2)Mas.Flange Thickness a •i/�"-13 Setscrew included •�/?"-13 Setscrew included � •Sold in pieces •Sold in pieces V •Order�!�"-13 HHCS and Channel •Order 1/z"-13 x 21/a"HHCS and Nut separately Channel Nut separately � •Standard finishes:ZN,HDG •Material:Malleable iron � •Wt./C 66 Lbs.(29.9 k�) •Standard Finishes:ZN,GRN � I i 11�z'� •Wt./C 95 Lbs.(43.1 k�) �� (38.!) � `J� � , , ; � � � / ' 11/2,> . ��e� '3/8" ��-=--�� (38.1) � (9.5) - 3�/a" � � (82.5) 2l/2„ (63.5) B355 B212-1/4 BEANI CLANIP I-I3EANI CLAMP •Design Load 1200 Lbs.(5.34 kN) •Design Load 600 Lbs.(2.67 kN) when used in pairs when used in pairs •Safety Factor of 5 •Safety Factor of 5 •5/s"(159)Max.Flange Thickness •�/s"(22.2)Max.F1an�e Thickness •Sold in pieces •3/s"-16 Setscrew included •Order�/?"-13 x 11/z"HHCS and •Sold in pieces Channel Nut separately •Standard finish:ZN _ •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN,HDG,SS4 •Wt./C 41 Lbs.(18.6 kg) ' � _ •Wt./C 30 Lbs.(13.6 kQ) 15/8" �/s"(22.2) F'�;, _" - (413) I.D. �'��".--�"� �/a"THICK S�s„ / � '(63) (15.9) i ��' _ - - _ � - 127/32" 2„ (46.8) (50.8) ��,> 1�/4„ (63) (31.7) B212_3�g 8435 I-B�AM CLANiP BEAM CLAMP •Design Load 1000 Lbs. (4.45 kN) •Design Load 900 Lbs. (4.00 kN) when used in pairs when used in pairs •Safety Factor of 5 •Safety Fac[or of 5 •11/s"(28.6)Max.F1anee Thickness •2�/s"(54.0)Max.F7ande Thickness •�/?"-13 Setscrew included •�/�"-13 x 2"Setscrew included •Sold in pieces •Sold in pieces •Standard finishes:ZN,HDG •Standard finish:ZN •Wt./C 62 Lbs.(28.1 kc) •WY./C 82 Lbs.(37.2 k�) - � � � r' I � i " II i� 11/4"(31.7) `� ' � �- " j i � •.�-" _--"' �i ' I.D. �- � �3/8"� ��'�11/4„ 3/8"THICK , i i(9.5)}-.� % (31.7) -' � (9.5) `, i � �' '�i �� =-' � 2�Is„ ___ _ �'��; ' ��3.0> 1 , " ` �,i � 2„ � � 2„ (50.8) '�11/`�" (50.8) (31.7) 1�( Reference pa�e 98 for general fit[ing and standard finish specifications. B22 CHANNEL GOOPER B-Line � _ �...� .5.,:_ u_�.:. ____..�-- _ : - - .=- _ _ _ B22 •Thickness: 12 Gauge(2.6 mm) •Standard len�ths: 10' (3.05 m) &20'(6.09 m) •Standard finishes:Plain,Dura-Green,Pre-Galvanized, Hot-Dipped Galvanized,Stainless Steel Type 304 or 316,Aluminum •Weight: 1.90 Lbs./Ft. (2.83 k;/m) 15/8'> 3�8,� (41.3) 3�g,� (9S) (9.5) ��8�, � � (22.�� 9/32,> \ � Y - � (7.1) \ � 15/s" X X \ �\ (413) 7252 �\ � �is.a> \ Y 13�16" (20.6) SECTION PROP�RTIES '�� #�`'��- '` ; � ��''� �� _ � :� .�5{`t�'?;�`�'.. �k�r ii ai i1 � �C;'S��i , 3 F�t'i�� '1l�t�i(ai`(!'r ��ata�j�` � � `t�liti' ai �; ,:��.� ;; ,. . :� .. �. : � � iii � f�7'i1 �.rr"'�ifili:. li'it'a'.'..�af ��.1 � �l�fi'il,"i�i�r 1��` , �C�°��`f�fiTi fl�) � 1 iY`1'��i� IA�l�"'ii'�I� ��j �-`;.�x"_(a�Ti�1 J��. — �� t •° .' I �1��-t� ' $ c'� �.w�° '� ,� S > r--- '' ufi < r t_ � � F ,- �:,. _��,'-i:��.��i z_�4i ) '- =iia �� ,� a�� .�. �oi , aii_r i'a��..r-� ui � i yia .� �ii C�i� �ie�: , �!'-,z... . :�� . . .� . - . �. � B22 � 1910 (z.8a) .562 (3.62) .1912 (z96) .2125 (3.a8)� .583 (�.��)� .2399�(y.��» .2953 (�.ba) .653 (i.ab) �{: B22A 3.820 (5.69) 1.L4 (7.25) .9732 (4051) .5989 (9.81) .931 (236) .4798 (19.97) .5905 (9.68) .653 (1.66) B22X 6.649 (9.89) 1.956 (12.62) 4.1484(172.67) 1.7019 (27.89) 1.456 (3.70) 1.1023 (45.88) L2027 (19.71) .751 (1.91) Calculations of section properties are baszd on me[al thicknesses as determined by the AISI Cold-Fomied Steel Design IVtanual. \ Y \ \ I S/8„ � �ai.$) \ � \ � 3,,�„ \ X X �g2.5> � \ Y 13/16>, (20.6) BZZA 15�8„ Wt.3.80 Lbs./Ft.(5.65 kg/m) (413) � 20 Reference pabe 14 for general fittind and standard finish speciFications. CHANNEL HOLE PATTERNS COOPER B-Line B22TH (TH TYPE CHANNF.L) •For beam loads use 90%of Channel Loadin;Char[ �/16" DIA.HOLES / (14.3) B ; ��r 1 r.,%��1 = �'�t`�t��t - /� ,� �/ ��lr��, � ��i�Y�:t�fY",� "_ 1t .i �iiiii `�,1-t.JJ ar�� I f �i ; � .. . _ . . _Y. _ �� . 1332T1I l2 Ga. (2.6) 1'/e" (11.3) 1.7fi (_'.62) /� B 1�/8"TYP. /� (47.6) � /� ./ is/i6" H � (23.8) � l3/16"� (20.6) B11K06 THRU B56K06 (K06 TYPE KNOCKOUT CHANNEL) •For beam loads use 90%of Channel Loading Chart � i� ' ��' ��a�' � � l � a _. .__"k�-.:: - ' � .� � -1 ii�J�l i 1 . _ j -� _ � � c. ' _� . i ,v • h''��"�i'`iS` ��3�a+.71 1;. j"x`1i�i�� B11K06 ��, 12Ga. (2.6) � 3��/a�T��(82.5) 3.05 � (�t.54) � B12K06 12 Ga. (2.6) 2�/16" (6L9) 2.47 (3.67) 6"TYP. �� B22K06 12 Ga. (2.6) 15/a" (413) 1.90 (2.83) (152.4) � _ B24K06 14 Ga. (1.9) 15/s" (41.3) 1.40 (2.08) / B26K06 16 Ga. (1.5) 15/8" (413) 1.12 (1.66) 3"TYP. �� - B32K06 12 Ga. (2.6) 13/s" (34.9) 1.70 (2.53) (�6•?) B42K06 12 Ga. (2.6) 1" (25.4) 1.44 (2.14) � � / �� B52K06 12 Ga. (2.6) 13/16" (20.6) 1.27 (1.89) / �/s" DIA.K.O. H (22?) B54K06 14 Ga. (1.9) 13/i6" (20.6) .97 (1.44) � � B56K06 16 Ga. (1.5) 13/i6" (20.6) .35 (1.26) UL B22SHA (BACK TO BACK SH TYPE CHANNEL) / •For beam loads use 90%of Channel Loading Chart �/16"x 1�/8"SLOTS / (14.3) (28.6) � / �,.''� '�E}„ ,�� ,�-, . 1 ra;�~i1 d �{ •,'��3,rrj�„:" � :� / / . � ♦ / j / �ti�' -. 91�y C.;C� l�,- �'' ry i"'t�i�,. � 1� �� '��Ti� / B22SF�A 1?Ga. ("_'.61 3�/�" (82.5)-`�"3.64 (5.42) � � 2"TYP. / � (50.8) � / / / / � / H / � � � Reference page 14 for general fitting and standard finish specifications. 41 CHANNEL HOLE PATTERNS COOPER B-Line B11SH THRU B56SH SH TYPE CHANNEL •For belm loads use 90%of Channel Loadin�Chart �.�, { �i �F��-� �f � �� , �. , l { 5 t / � �i�A�i�>' : 1{i�'.aa � � 1n .^8.,.°��t .�'7 i� �''��I"�,.: �� 131151I l� Gs. ��("'.6) 3i/-t" (5'S) ?.97 (-t.42) � B12SH 12 Ga. (2.6) 2�/i5" (61.9) 239 (3.55) � B22SH 12 Ga. (2.6) 15/s" (413) 1.82 (2.71) �� I324SH 14 Ga. (1.9) 15/s° (4t.3) 134 (199) / B26SH 16 Ga. (1.5) 15/8" (413) 1.07 (1.59) �" (50.8) / B32SH 12 Ga. (2.6) 13/s" (34.9) 1.62 (2.41) �P� � � 9�16"x 11/s"SLOTS / (ld3) (23.6) B42SH 12 Ga. (2.6) 1" (25.4) 136 (2.02) �/� B52SH 12 Ga. (2.6) 13/16" (20.6) 119 (1.77) H / B54SH 14 Ga. (1.9) 13/l6" (20.6) .91 (l35) � B56SH 16 Ga. (1.5) 13/16" (20.6) .80 (1.19) B11S THRU B56S � _ S TYPE CHANNEL •For beam loads use 90%of Ch�nnel Lo�din�Chart �� '(f; ; �'�� / / . � / f',t'i t �j`itlP�. ��III��'Ifl��: - �""".5 r_ �311i1 '��i, {�I�d,L�.L 7��731 .�' / - B11S 12 Ga. (3.6) 3i/a" (�`-'.5) �94 (d37) �/ •' B12S 12 G�t. (2.6) 2�/t[�" (61.9) 236 (3.5t) / B22S 12 Ga. (2.6) 15/8" (41.3) 1.79 (2.66) 4" (101.6) / B24S 14 Ga. (1.9) 15/s" (413) 132 (196) TYP. / B26S 16 Ga. (1.5) 15/8" (41.3) 1.06 (L58) / 13/3?"x 3"SLOTS B32S 12 Ga. (2.6) 13/8" (3=4.9) 1.59 (236) // (103) (76.2) I B42S 12 Ga. (2.6) 1" (25.4) 1.33 (1.98) � � B53S 12 G3. (2.6) 13/16 (20.6) 1.16 (1.72) H B54S 14 Ga. (1.9) 13/ib" (20.6) .39 (132) � B56S 16 Ga. (1.5) 13/te" (20.6) .79 (1.17) B11H17/8 THRU B56H17/8 H17/3 TYPE CHANNEL •For be�m loads use 90%of Channel Loadin;Chart 0 �Y�� '' ��'' �� " / ,,p.� f B / i I .'1 ' 1 .�y�7 IIM1II i ��I_��i��,�111�.'� / B11H17/8 � 12 Ga. (2.6) 3i/a' (82.5) 3.00 (�.46) 0 � B12H17/8 12 Ga. (2.6) 2�/i6" (61.9) 2.42 (3.60) B/// B22H17/8 12 Ga. (2.6) 15/s" (413) 1.85 (2.75) 0� B24H17/8 14 Ga. (1.9) 15/a" (413) 1.36 (2.02) / B26H17/S 16 Ga. (t.5) 15/a" (4t3) 1.09 (L62) i�/s"(47.6) � B33H17/8 12 Ga. (2.6) 13/s" (34.9) 1.65 (2.45) �P� /� y/t6" DIA.HOL�S R42H17/S 12 Ga. (2.6) 1„ (25.4) 1.39 (2.07) �� B /� (1a.3) B52H17/8 12 Ga. (2.6) 13/16" (20.6) 1.22 (1.81) H i B54H17/8 14 Ga. (1.9) 13/�6" (20.6) .93 (138) � B56H17/S 16 Ga. (1.5) 13/i5" (20.6) .82 (1.22) � 40 Reference page 14 for general fittinb and standard Finish specifications. I I PDST BASES G00�B-Line ..� .�.�� _ .__ _ ,- _ __ B279 B279SQ B279F'L POST BASE FOR B22 POST I3ASE FOR B22 POST BASE FOR B22 •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN •Wt./C 3l4 Lbs.(142.4 kg) •Wt./C 314 Lbs.(142.4 k;) •Wt./C 230 Lbs.(1043 kg) 3/4"(19.0) 111/16" DIA.2 HOLES 3/4" (19.0) (42.8) � DIA.4HOLES �� ll�/16" 3/4 (19.0) I' I� 1>>/16" � � � DIA.4 HOLES � 19��,> (`�?.8) \ (42.3) 15/3" ` � (41.3) � � I5�8„ 6 � �(4L3) � � (4I3) (is2.�) � � 41��„ 6�/a" L � 6" (�o�.�)� ��g)/�. �zo3�z� �iss.�>� � � %� (152.4)�/ _ �/ 3 /8„ 6'> -___,� 6„ (79.4) cls2.a> 3>, (1s2.4) (76.2) B280 B280SQ B280FL POST BASE FOR B22 POST BASE I�'OR B22 POST BASE FOR B22 •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN,HDG,SS4,AL •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN,HDG,SS4,AL •Standard fmishes:ZN,GRN,HDG,SSd •Wt./C 392 Lbs.(177.8 kQ) •Wt./C 392 Lbs.(177.8 kg) •Wt./C 312 Lbs.(141.5 kg) 111/16" 1 ll/16„ �a2.s� �� I 111/16" � 3/4"(19.0) (42. ) 3/4"(19.0) I �I ��g� DIA.2 HOLES DiA.4 HOLES 3/=4"(19.0) �� I � � � � 31/2" DIA.4 HOLES � 31/Z" � 6„ ; ' � �gg.9, � 9 � � � (33.9) / (is2.a)� �� I� � 3�/z„ i � 61/�„ (s8.$) ' 4 /�+" � � 6„ �ioz9) �4�/a„ 8" �isa.�) � � �2os.z) �' 6�> ' (t52.a)�� (io�.9) 6„ ��/�3i/s„ (152.4) 3„ �(152.4) (79.4) (76.2) B281A B281ASQ B281AFL POST BASE TOR B22A,B,C,ETC. POST BASE I+OR B22A,B,C,ETC. POST BASE FOR B22A,B,C,ETC. •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN •Wt./C 330 Lbs.(149.7 k�) •Wt./C 330 Lbs.(149.7 k�) •Wt./C 250 Lbs.(113.4 kg) 3/�t" (19.0) DIA.4 HOLES 35�16 � 3/4"(19.0) �g�•1� DIA.2 HOLES I 35/16" 15/8" � 35/16„ 3/`�"(19.0) A, I (84.1) (41.3) (84.1) DIA.4HOL.ES �� IS�s„ � �� (41.3) 6" � i� � � � � 15/8„ - (ts2.a) I � 4�/�" \ 6�/a„ ! i � 6" �to�.9> 4�/=t" � 8" (iss.�� (ai.$) �� B (152.4)�\�107.9) 6 (203.2)\ �. �.-�(.152.4) �� 31�g�, -- 6" ��y.a� (tsz.a) 3>> (�5.2) Reference page 58 for general fi[ting and standard t7nish specifications. $3 POST BASES COOPER B-Line - - __ _ s2s1 BZSISQ B281TL POST BASE FOR B22A,B, C,ETC. POST BAS�FOR B23A,B,C,ETC. POST BASE FOR B22A,B,C,ETC. •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN,HDG •Standard tinishes:ZN,GRN,HDG,SS4 •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN •Wt./C 400 Lbs.(181.4 k�) •Wt./C 400 Lbs.(181.4 kg) •Wt./C 320 Lbs.(145.1 kg) 3/4"(19.0) DIA.4 HOLES 35/16" � (84.1) � 3/a"(t9.o) � 3/a"(i9.o) �� 35/t6>, M �35/16" I y (84.1) DIA.4 HOLES � I DIA.2 HOLES � 3i�,» i �sa.i) '� ,I � � (8s.9) I � � 31/2„ � (83.9) � � � � � � � � � � i 3��2„ 6" i� � �,�„ � � � �� (ss.9) (ts�.a> �I � 6" � , � 6 /a„ � (107.9) /�/-� 8„ (158.7) (152.4)�� (107.9) (" � � � (203.2) i�isz.a) ��3i/s„ 6" (152.4) (79.4) 3" (76.2) B281M 82811VISQ B570 POST BASE FOR B22-2PL POST BASE FOR 822-2PL POST BASE FOR FOUR •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN CHANNEL COMBINATIONS •Wt./C 470 Lbs.(213.2 kg) •Wt./C 470 Lbs.(213.2 k�) •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN 39/16" •Wt./C 397 Lbs.(130.1 kg) (90.5) � � I �� il 3/a" (19.0) II I I 1��/16" il DIA.4 HOLES � 5 il �a�.g� 31�,,> � I �� 1 /a,> (4l3) 3/4"(19.0) � � (88.9) � I DIA.4 HOLES � 31��+� 315�3�„ 0 � � � � (83.9) I (87.9) 114'>t_` � il � '6�, I � %4" \� (6.3)�- __.i�(1�2.4) �� 6„ 6>, cto�.9) / 4�/`�" ^ / l (�0�.9) 6 �-+� / /(152.4) (152.4)�/ � 3" �is2.a) G_ � 6 (76.2) 3/a"(19.0) 6>, ��j 3„ (152.4) DIA.4 HOLES (152.4) (76.2) B570A B278 B585 B300 POST BASE FOR FOUR POST BASE FOR B32 POST BASE FOR B22A POST BASE CHANNEL COMBINATIONS •Stand•ard finishes:ZN,GRN •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN •Material:Mallesble Iron •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN •Wt./C 238 Lbs.(130.6 k�) •Wt./C 97 Lbs.(44.0 kg) •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN •Wt./C 550 Lbs.(249.5 ka) i� 31/2" �h6"(ii.i � �a�3) � II p (85.9) DIA.4 �I I � II II �,� 3/4„ � HOLES 3��„ I (101.6) (19.0) i 1/4" � � � -�- � �� - (88.9) � I� 0 � 3/s"(9.5) (6.3) � I�� 6„ 0� � � ��I� e 13�a SUNK TO �(152.4) (�.4) 3/a"(19.0)DIA. 5„ ° � 3�/l6" � 9/16„ 6>> �� (i..�.o) , 5>, Lii/16" ��.$) � ��a.a> 3„ (152.4) 3 �iz�.o) 3�/2„ (a2.g) �„ \ I (76.2) /a"(19.0) (88.9) (177.3) �'�`2�/16„ DIA.4 HOLES (52.4) 84 Reference page 58 for general Fittinb and standard finish specifications. BEAM CLAMPS COOPER B-Line -�--,- __��_.�1 _�. _ - _ _ _ _ B441-22 B441-22A B314 BEANI CLAMP BEANT CLAMP BEAM CLANIP •Desi�n Load 1200 Lbs.(5.3d kN) •Design Load 1200 Lbs.(5.34 kN) •Design Load 900 Lbs.(4.001:N) when used in pairs when used in pairs when used in pairs •Safety Factor of 5 •Safety Factor of 5 •Safety Factor of 5 •3/a"(19.0)Max.Flange Thickness •3/=t"(19.0)Max.Flange Thickness •S/s"(15.9)Max.Flanae Thickness •For use with 13/i6"(20.6)to 15/s"(413) •For use with 1�/s"(413)to 3i/a"(82.5) •For use with channel 15/s"(41.3) � high channel high cham�el in heiaht a� •Recommended Torque: •Recommended Torque: •Setscrew included � I50 in-Ibs.(16.9 N•m) 150 in-]bs.(16.9 N•m) •Sold in pieces. n m •Sold in pieces •Sold in pieces •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN,HDG,SS4 � •Other flanae thickness variations •Other flan�e thickness variations •Wt./C 105 Lbs.(47.6 kg) y are available,contact B-Line are available,contact B-Line Engineering for sizes Engineering for sizes •Standard finishes:ZN,HDG,SS4 •Standard finishes:ZN,HDG,SS4 •Wt./C 87 Lbs.(39.4 kb) •Wt./C 93 Lbs.(42.2 kb) 31/8" 23�g„ 3�/3" 23/8" (79.4)--� (60.3) (79.4) (603) -��-1' � . � :r- i�� (25.d) � �� 13/4„ 33/8" 5„ �aa.4) 3�1��„ �ss.�� \ �„ �i2�.o> `'� i/a" �a�.3� 13/a„ (25.4) (44.4) 1��+ l/4„ (6.3) (63) (63) B441Z-22 I3441Z-22A BEAM CLAMP BEAM CLAMP •Design Load 1200 Lbs.(534 kN) •Design Load 1200 Lbs. (5.34 kN) when used in series when used in series •Safery Factor of 5 •Safety Factor of 5 •Sold in pieces •Sold in pieces •For use with 13/i6"(20.6)to 15/s"(413) •For use with 15/s"(41.3)to 3i/a"(82.5) hieh channel lugh channel •Recommended Torque: •Recommended Torque: 150 in-]bs.(16.9 N•m) 150 in-lbs.(16.9 N•m) •Standard finishes:ZN •Standard finishes:ZN •WtJC 95 Lbs.(431 kb) •Wt./C 101 Lbs.(45.8 kg) 1" 1" (25.4) (25.4) \� � � � 3�/8" ; � 3i/s" ,%� ' (79.4�� '� (7).4) �� , � 1/q" �" �� J' (63) i� I G.r 45�g>> � (117.5) � 45/8„ 1��+� (117.5) 23��» (6.3) (69.9) 43/s„ (�ii.i> Reference pa�e 98 for general fitting and standard Finish specifications. 1 QS B54 CHANNEL & COMBINATIONS COOPER B-Line i _ _ _ _ B54 •Thickness: 14 Gauge(1.9 mm) •Standard len;ths: 10'(3.05 m) &20' (6.09 m) •Standard finishes: Plain,Dura-Green,Pre-Galvanized, Hot-Dipped Galvanized, Stainless Steel Type 304 or 316,Aluminum •Weight: .97 Lbs./Ft. (1.44 kg/m) t 5/s„ 3�8„ (413) 3 /8'> (9.5) 7�s�� (9.s>� � � � ��?,2� y/32>, �� (7.l) \ � (20161'�� X � \ � Y �� 13/16" (8.7) (20.6) �P:� -= '` .-,-., .!, �rr� a i � a � -< � - SECTION PROPERTIES ��`�- } �> � �.1'�` _ �' �,��+:� ; .. . �� _ � , •, }�� ; ,.. : �-, , . . +Y"' - �1a''7`�: i;�(ii�t'iail��_ t.;f�iiii 1 r iSll;::`� i��iiif�ii.`� ;�^'��i�-x. 9 �:ii'"� x a- ; , .. . �F� �._ �i�;1iTi(i ;. 'r e�i�!- i�;"'"�3 (i`"'xr. 91�T7�p -� �sl(�I�lii ' �.� .. , �_. •- �jr � �9� � � t �� T j ��j` �a }d Y.�,�°ti� �3�iCla� t;�� 'i oi�IiiK'�� {`°'�j�:ia e�""i �3 J ; .,$'�,f„ ..� i�i'-� 1;'�jiii .tir>>3 (`i+� t �r_' =�aoi �+iw s.. aii;°` ,.�di.� �i =t�� !i�� 1�'i`�" ii� ��ir '. a�i �'� �' BSd �L016 (1St) .299 (1.93) .0263 (1.09) .0560�� (.92) �.297 (�>>) llu6 t-�6o1� .L361 (?.�3) 60S (1.55) �'� B54A 2.032 (3.02) .598 (3.86) .1226 (510) 1510 (2.47) .453 (1.15) .22L� (9.12) .2722 (4.46) .608 (1.55) >n�: n��i#� Calculations of section propeities are based on metal thicknesse.s as determined by the AISI Cold-Fornied Stee]Design Manual. � � �\ \ \� \� I.24I \ � � (31.5) � �� y � � Y 2�/�6" � � Y �\\ � \ X =ti.3) � � ` <>1 1'/s" \� � ��O 3�/a„ � � (41.3) \ � X (82.5) Y Y 13/16'-i 13/ib" Y 15/8„ (20.6) 5 (20.6) 13/16" (�11.3) 1 /8" (20.6) l3/16>, (41.3) j5�g�� (20.6) (41.3) 15�8 � (413) B54A B54B3 B54B4 Wt. 1.94 Lbs./Ft. (2.89 kg/m) Wt.291 Lbs./Ft.(433 kg/m) Wt.3.88 Lbs./Ft.(5.77 kg/m) � 34 Reference paee 14 for general fitting and standard finish specifications. _ __ . B54 BEAM & COLUMN LOADING DATA coo EP R B-Line BF,ANI LOADING �= i � ; a `" � {J i i q�i t i � i �i i � �+ � 3t. : s �n r�� y� C �'r` -' �,.� �.•, �.a� a?Y � � .�:�(x 1�'�"�:,i i� �� ria '. 1aliS�T ii��ia�"li'�i 9 � af�i� '- �3i��1',¢i"Fgf' �'�i I�y��C"' � 'sE ;� € '3fi ii�'�i� �.ij�� 1�1T , .�\ -. A��3�� 3i'iiii ;�s�'i`�� ; ��i1`P- , "�?`` . . . ,. . . ..,_ __�.... . .,_ .. .. . „ � 12 (30�i li�-t � S70 (3870) .027 (.68) 370 (3870) 370 (3870) B54A 870* (3870) .005 (.13) 870* (3870) 870* (3870) 24 (609) �Sa 465 (2068) .108 (2.74) 430 (1913) 287 (1276) 1354A 870* (3870) .043 (1.09) 870`� (3870) 870* (3870) 36 (914) B�4 310 (1379) .243 (6.17) ]91 (849) 127 (565) B54A 832 (3701) .ldl (3.58) 832 (3701) 591 (2629) 43 (1219) �Sa 233 (1036) .432 (iQ)7) 108 (480) 72 (320) 1354A 624 (2775) .250 (635) 499 (2219) 332 (1477) 60 (�52a� B54 136 (s2�� .676 U�.i�) 69 �30�> 46 (2oa) B54A 499 (2219) .391 (9.93) 319 (1419) 213 (947) 72 �1829j I354 155 (689) .973 (24.71) 48 (2l3) 32 (�42) B54A 416 (1850) .563 (14.30) 222 (987) 148 (658) 84 (2133) B5a 133 (591) 1.324 (33.63) 35 (155) 23 (102) B54A 357 (]583) .766 (19.45) 163 (725j 109 (485) 96 (2438) B54 116 (.516) 1.730 (43.94) 27 (120) 18 (80) B54A 312 (1388) 1.001 (25.42) 125 (556) 83 (369) ��g ��3� BSd 103 (458) 2.139 (55.60) 21 (93) 14 (62) B54A 277 (1232) 1.267 (3218) 98 (436) 66 (293) 120 (3048> R54 93 (a�3) 2.703 (6s.6s> 17 (�5) ll (a9� 1354A 250 (1112) 1.564 (39.72) 80 (356) 53 (236) Based on simple beam condition using an allowable design stress of 25,000 psi(l72 MPa) in accordance with MFN[A,with adequate lateral bracin�(see _ pa�e 11 for further explanation).Actual yield point of cold rolled steel is 42,000 psi.To determine concentrated load capacity at mid span,multiply uniform load by 0.5 and corresponding deflection by 0.8.'kFailure determined by weld shear. COLUMN LOADING ]1�'��s+��9i�n�3�J��Y uo J'.r �11` ��11r 3 ,{�;f1`Itiu�i�"�yf��Yl��(1.!)�°�t'if a it� ��Y��-; '� � r.i x 4'. h�F _ ��n�t�� N�'�i"� t�'rt�r�`r' �,�:r;r�� ;, � , � t3`9�! �(,e:�l � �b�f�'r f�fl�.� �Ct i� {+i�" - ; �`�„�`"� �, ,„�-, { fi�.�� m r� ��„�f<-F�.. a� '.r - .,� '�`� V �w ,s� a 1.� " ��le��., ��i�tii� 9�� ti jv� ' ��w5�.,�;_ '� ° � diC', �E 9.��c° jt�s t.a+ o �� 12� � � (305) �;`� 6156 �('?75I6) 2536 (11503) 6?8-1 (27952) 6032 (26831) 5857 (260�3) BSaA 12763 (56772) d060 (13060) 12835 (57093) 12645 (56248) 12�01 (55607) 24 (609) B�'� 5464 (24305) 2254 (10026) 5763 (25635) 4968 (22099) 4300 (19127) I354A 12135 (53979) 3857 (17157) 12420 (55247) 11663 (51879) 11087 (49317) ( 36 (914) B�a 4300 (19127) 1816 (8078) 5043 (22432) 3076 (13683) 2136 (9501) B�4A 11087 (49317) 3549 (15787) 11728 (52169) 10026 (44598) 8729 (38828) 48 (1219) B54 2703 (12023) 1341 (,5965) 3920 (17437) 1730 (7695) 120) (5342) B54A 9620 (4279z> 3169 (iao�6) 10759 (a785s) 7734 (s4ao2) 5571 (z4781) 60 (t5za) B54 1730 (7695) 995 (=w26j 2621 (n659) 110T�* (4924) 769** (3a2o) B�dA 7734 (34402) 2745 (12210) 9514 (42320) 5134 (22837) 3566 (15s62) 72 (1829) B54 1201 (5342) 763 (3394) 1820 (8096) 769** (3420) 534'�a` (2375) B54A 5571 (24781) 2291 (10191) 7992 (3555U) 3566 (15862) 2476 (11014) 84 (2133) B54 883** (3928) 603 (2682) 1337 (5947) 565** (2513) - - B54A 4093 (is2o6� 1913 (sso9> 6200 (2�5�9) 2620 (1165a� 1319** (so91� 96 (2438) B54 676�''k (3007) 487 (2166) 1024*:k (4555) - - - - B54A 3134 (13941) 1616 (7188) 4747 (21116) 2006** (8923) 1393** (6196) 108 (2743) B�4 534** (2375) 401 (178�j 309** (3598) - - - - B54A 2476 (I1014) 1330 (6138) 3751 (16635) 1585** (7050) 1100** (4893) 120 (3048) B54 - - 336 (1494) 655'k`� (2913) - - - - q � B54A 2006** (8923) 1190 (5293) 3038 (13513) 1284** (5711) - - �*Where the slendemess ratio KL exceeds 20Q and K=end fixity factor,L=actual length and r=radius of�yration. r Reference pa�e 14 for general fitting and standard Finish speciFications. 3$ MISCELLANEOUS FITTINGS COOPER B-Line B203-B206 & B220-B223 B283-B286 CHANNEL END CAPS TYPE X � CHANNEL END CAPS •Material:ASTM A1011 CS Type B P'� •Material:ASTM A 1011 33,000 PSI min.yield •Standnrd finishes:ZN,GRN,HDG,SS4,AL f��''�lU •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN •�� L �� ` � :* '. 1 r .�r - fi\ 1 � � 1�� 1_ V L r'1J � B�03 " B42 1.015 (25.8) �6 (2.7) � B204 B54 .827 (21.0) 5 (2.2) .: 8205 B22 1.640 (41.6) 10 (4.5) ` � � ��'� �` � B206 B32 1.390 (35.3) 8 (3.6) �"�� ' �;e� �ff�'�,:, ✓,, � ', y� ;i � i��f:�� '�`�"':'-� B220 B52 .827 (21.0) 4 (1.8) I3283 }3�2 I��/sz„ �-�0 5) '�/�z" (19.8) 6 (3.7� B221 B12 2.452 (623) 15 (6.8) B284 B54&B56 119/32" (40.5) '-5/3?" (19.8) 6 (2.7) B222 B11 3.265 (82.9) 20 (9.1) B2S5 B22 119/3z" (405) l 19/3z" (40.5) 13 (5.9) B223 B24 1.640 (41.6) 10 (a.$) B286 B24&B26 119/3z" (ao.5) 119/3?" (ao.$) 14 (6.3) B287 & B288 B3322,83332, B3342,83352 CHANNEL END CAPS ANCHOR�ND CAPS TYPE Y •Material:ASTM A1011 33,000 PSI min.yield •Material:ASTM A1011 33,000 PSI min.yield •Standard finishes:ZN,GRN •Standard finishes:ZN �� 3/s"(9.5) �� DIA.HOLE � � % 1�y�3,,,,��119/32'> `� 25�8„ (40.5) (40.5) ��(66.7) � � � �'� �� \�\ 113/16" � B (46.0) �"� �H ' _ i �' � -. "�. ��_v �� :��k+ i`l��"��a"ff��' �� J �'J� 1�� tl�;j� 1 h�r'- �x. i � . , �#�,�`,� . M .. . i`�pa j��tir 3,��K'C`�'�'�ff�'. lAA1 `�� . B3332 [3??� 1.270 (32.2) L�/�6'� t�OZ) 15 (68) - -;� - _n�_== B3332 B32I 1.000 �25.a� l�/��" (30.2> 15 (6.8) B2A7 B22 13 (5.9) B3342 B42I .645 (16.4) 1�/4" (31.8) 15 (6.8) B288 B24 14 (6.3) I33352 B52I .460 (IL7) IS/16" (33.3) 15 (6.8) 8322 Bg22A BA52 PLASTIC END CAP PLASTIC END CAP PLASTIC END CAP FOR B22&B24 FOR B22A&B11 FOR B53 •Material:Soft White PVC •Material:Soft White PVC •Material:Soft White PVC •Wt./C 3 Lbs.(1.3 kg) •Wt./C 5 Lbs.(2.2 kg) •Wt./C 2.5 Lbs.(1.1 kg) •Available in colors:Wlute(W), •Available in colors:White(W), •Available in colors:White(W), Yellow(Y),Black(BLK),Gray(GRY), Yellow(Y),Black(BLK),Gray(GRY), Yellow(Y),Black(BLK),Gray(GRY), Green(GRN) Green(GRN) Green(GRN) / � _ // // j� / � /� //_ � // /// �/ � i�/a„ 11/�„ 1 i/a" �3�.�> (3i.�> (31.7) �� V � g( Reference paae 58 for general fitting and standard finish specifications. �I FIB�RGLASS COOPER B-Line _ _ BFP22 THRU BFV22SH •Channel len�ths: 10 Ft.(3.05 m)and 20 Ft.(6.09 m) •Fiberglass strut meets specification of ASTM D-4385 Levels III and IV. B � �� B �'� / � / � � '� BrP22 � BFP22Hi�/s � RFP22SH � BFV22 BFV22H1�/s BFV22SH � Solid Back 9h6"(14.3)holes 9/16"(1�.3)x�/s"(22.2)slots 1�/s"(47.6)on centers 2"(�0.8)on centers 1 ri A t�v3- � +�TV.",'��1 �9 :� �a i � i � , �,�r.� , 13/16„ s• �� —�►{ ('0.6)I�-- '�'-�- a 5�� I I3�P32�* Poly�ster Re;in Solid Back Gray .63 (.94) � BFV22* Vinyl Ester Resin Solid Back Beige .63 (•94) 15�g„ BFP22H1�/a'^ Polyester Resin Holes in Back Gray .60 (.89) (413) BFV22H1�/s'" Vinyl Ester Resin Holes in Back Beige .60 (.89) � BFP22SH'k Polyester Resin Slots in Back Gray .61 (.91) BFV22SH* Vinyl Ester Resin Slots in Back Beige .61 (.91) �I5�8>, *Insert-10 for 10'-0"(3.05 m)len�th or-20 for 20'-0"(6.09 m)length (413) BFP22A BFV22A � •Channel Lengths: 10 Ft.(3.05 m)and 20 Ft.(6.09 m) 13/16" •Fiber�lass stn�t meets specification of � I � �`�'�� ASTM D-4385 Levels III and IV. �� L / � 15/3,> �3FP�?A (413) SFV22A 31/q�� Solid Back to Back � 82.5) .. , ; 1 a.td-'j;;r� � ��`�e�� z �i��_ � ` �. " ,� �- f`�- � �� - � �., ,_ : �.a , . , � . , � � � . t. �;, � s,-�,,. , � 11I'P��`� PolyesterResin BackToBack Gray �1.15 (1.71) � ��5�3„ BFV22A'� VinylEsterResin BackToBack Beige 1.15 (1.71) (41.3j *Insert-10 for 10'-0"(3.05 m)length or-20 for 20'-0"(6.09 m)length WAI2NING: Appropriate protective clothing and respiratory Published des;gn loads on page 162 are based on usage at protection device should be worn when field 70°F�zi°C)and must be reduced for continuous exposure to cutting or grindin�fiberglass. higher temperatures.Refer to the chart below for high tem- perature applications. .,��,• ��II1• �i i. �. � ��• Field Cutting Sealant Kits 75°F (24°C) l00% - 1�0°r (38°C) 90% RSKO10 ....Pint Sealin�Kit(473 cm�) 125°F (53°C) 7�% "�-:�:x� includes sealant and brush applicator 150°F (66°C) 68% �: F,��_ •Seals exposed fibers after field cuttin�. • 175°F (79°C) 60% •UV resistant• 200°F (93°C) 5?% 1(2 Reference page 160 for general fitting and standard Finish speci6cations. il CHANNEL NUTS & HARD WARE coo�B-Line .��,. �, . - - _ _- _ __ - -- _ � ..�.,. ..: .� - �_ _-_ _. � _ _ H X HEAD CAP SCR�WS SLOT�T D TLAT HEAD 1VIACHINE SCRE�VS •Standard finish:Zino-Plated,Stainless Steel •Standard finish:Zinc-Plated ,� - � ' , �'�� , - , 1.,,9 'si 1>;r'' ' ��1� (�° . . ��,.' ; '- �i/a"x 4?"I3�ICS 1.3 (.�9) i/a"Y i/�"SFHNIS Li (.50) /4"x /4"HHCS 1.4 (.63) ��4"X 5/S"SF'FIMS 1.2 (.54) ila"x 1"HHCS 1.7 (.77) �/a"s 3/a"SFIII�IS 1.4 (.63) I/a"x 11/�"FII�CS 2.1 (.95) Sh6"x 1"SFHMS 2.8 (1.27) �/a'°x ii/,"HHCS 2.4 (i.o9) 3/s°,Y 1�/,,'SFHNIS 5.6 (2.sa) Sh6"x 1"HHCS 2.8 (1.2�) 3/x°�x 2°�SFHNIS 6.7 (3.oa) sh6"x P/a"HHCS 3.2 «��) s�8��Y�i/a"SFHl�IS 7.3 (3.31) � 5/16"X 11/2"HHCS 3.8 (1.72) 3/Re�X?lh"SFIIMS 79 (3.58) 3/S"x 3/�"HI�CS 3.4 (1.54) 3/s"x 1"HHCS 4.1 (1.s6) 1/z"s 1"SrHNIS 5.9 (2.67) -/8"x 1 /4"HHCS 4.7 (2.13) 1/z"x 11/�"SFHNIS 7.0 (3.i7) 3/s"x l�h"HHCS 5.2 (236) 1/z"s 11/z"SFHNIS 3.3 (3.76) 3/s"x 13/a"HHCS 59 ('.67) lh"x 21/z"SFHIVIS 13.8 (6.26) 3/S"X 2"HHCS 7.0 (3.17) /a"x 21/a"HHCS 7.8 (=�.sa) SHHMS 3/s"x 21/a"HHCS �•5 �-i•85� SLOTTED (CONIBINATION R�CESS) 1/z"x�/8"HHCS 8.0 (3.63) HEX HFAD MACHINE SCR�WS �h"x 1"HHCS 8•4 �3�g�> •Standard finish:Zinc-Plated,Stainless Steel 1/z"x 111a"HHCS 9.2 (4.17) 1!z"x 11/a"HHCS 10.1 (4.58) i/z"x 13/�"HHCS 12.0 (5.�+t) ih"s 2"HHCS 13.2 (5.99) . �. , ih"x 2ih"HHCS 16.0 (7.26) ' ' ; '. � r ��+ ��"�� ' � a� � � - �;�-+ i �� , �. . .,tt t � (��.< ��'�r5�� -t SRHMS �ia°X;i�°;sxii��s , 1.2 �sa> f�`` ��' �7 , SLOTTED ROUND HEAD MACHINE SCREVVS �/a"x 1"SIIfIMS IS (.6s) ��c,„c�' •Standard finish:Zinc-Plated i/:�"x li/a"SAHI�IS 1.8 (.80) � r,. il4"x 1�h"SIIIINIS 2A � (91) �'�� -.:�: , Sh6"x 1"SHHNiS 2.6 (1.18) � >' Sh6"x 1�/a"SFIHNIS 3.1 (1.40) ��=.`, � s/i6"x li/�"SFIIIIVIS 3.4 (LS=F) � ? �� 3/s"x 1�/a"SHHMS 4.6 12.08) �m. , ; �,�,�� 3/s"x 11/z"SI�II�IS 5.3 (2.40) � �;., ; 1 r,ri a�,'C ��1;Cr ; �� '� ... �, . . ___ "" lia��X li��sRii�is .9 c.��> CNPSS 1/�"x 3/a"SRHMS 1.2 (.s4> SQUARE HEAD CONE POINT SET SCREWS •Standard finish:ZN i/a"x 1"SRHNIS 1.5 (.6s) i/a"x li/a"SRi�MS 1.7 (.77) i�a"x 1th"SFtHMS 1.9 (.s6) 5/t5"x 1"SRH1ViS 2.5 (1.13) � '' �� , a. ��.rt �,'a,�. �� s/i6"x 1�/a"SRHMS 29 (t31) `� �`�� `�� : ' "�`�� s� '" � s�`s�'aw�! y'�' ..�x?w.. � •" . s/r6"x 1�/x"SRHMS 33 (1.4)) � 3/s"x 1�/z"CNPSS �4.7 (2.13) 3/s"x 1"SRHNIS 4.0 (1.81) 3�g»x 2"C1VI'SS 6.0 (2.72) 3/s"x 11/a"SRHl�[S 4.5 (2.�4) t/,+�x 11/z"CNPSS 9.2 (4.17) 3/R"x li/z"SRHMS 5.1 (2.31) i/z"x 2"CNPSS llA (5.17) 3/s"x 2"SRHMS 6.3 (�.�6) t�,»�21/z"CNPSS 13.7 (6.21) 3/8"x 21/a"SI2IIl�IS 7.1 (3.22) 5/g"x 2"CNPSS l9A (8.62) 3/s"x 21/z"SRHMS 7.7 (-i.4)) s/s"x 21/z"CNPSS 22.6 (10.25) Reference page 44 for general fitting and standard finish specifications. $3 CHANNEL NUTS & HARD WARE COOPER B-Line _. .,- -_ _ Y:;:�.�__.� ��.� _. � Note:See page 50 for resistance to slip � � &page 51 for pull-out strength. 700 200 500 S�RI�S SERIES SERI�S SPRING NUT ,�� a�r. a-'�`°`{� _ � '� .�� , ; ._� ':�'�'. � 3.:". �-,�^ -- ' z�7 _ N721 #3-32 � B11 &B12 i/a" �(6.3) � 7A (3.17)� N221 #8-32 B22,B24,B26,B32 �/a" (6.3) 7.0 (3.17) N531 #8-32 B42,B52,B54,B56 1/a" 6.3) 7.0 (3.17) N727 #10-32 Bi] &B12 1/a" (63) 7.0 3.17) N227 #10-32 B22, B24,B26,B32 t/a" (63) 7.0 (3.17) N527 #10-32 B42,B52,B54,B56 1/a" (6.3) 7.0 3,17) N7�2 #10-24 B11 &B12 �/a" (63) 7.0 (3.17) N222 #10-24 B22 B24 B26,B32 i/a" (6.3) 7.0 (3.17) N522 #10-24 B42,B52,B54,B56 i/a" (6.3> 7.0 (3.17) N724 1/a-20 B 11 &B 12 I/a" 6.3) 6.7 3.oa) N224 1/a-20 B22,B24,B26,B32 1/a" (63) 6.7 (3.04) N524 �/a-20 B42,B52,B54,B56 �/a" 6.3) 6.7 (3.04) N723 5/t6-18 B11 &B12 i/�" (63) 6.7 (3.04) N223 5/16-18 B22,B24,B26,B32 �/a" (6.3) 6.7 3.04) N523 s/ib-18 B42,B52,B54,B56 1/=t° (6.3) 6.7 (3.04) N728 3/s-16 B11 &B12 3/8" (9.5) 9.3 (4.22) N228 3/s-16 B22,B24,B36,B32 3/s" (9.5) 9.3 (4.22> N528 3/s-16 B42,B52,B54,B56 3/s° (9.5) 93 422) N726 �/16-14 B ll &B 12 3/8" 9.5) 8.8 (3.99) N226 �/tt�-14 B22,B24,B26,B32 =�/s" (9.5) 8.8 3.99) N526 �/16-14 B42,B52,B54,B56 3/s" (9.5) 8.8 (3.99) N725 ih_-13 Bll &B12 1/z" (12.7) 11.6 (5.26) N225 i/�-13 B22,B24,B26.B32 i/z" (12.7) 11.6 (5.26) N525 1/z-l3 B42,B52,B54,B56 3/a" T� (9.5) 8.8 (3.99) N755 5/s-il Bli &B12 ih,> (12.7) 16.4 7.�t) i"� ' N255 5/s-11 B22 B24 B26 B32 �/2" (12.7 16.4 (7.44) e- : N555 5/s-11 B42,B52,B54,B56 3/a" (9.5) 10.2 (4.62) �'= ' N775 3/a-10 B11 &B12 �/2" (12.7) 14.5 (6.58) ' N275 3/a-10 B22,B24,B26,B32 lh_" (12.7) 14.5 (6.58) � N575 3/a-10 B42,B52,B54,B56 3/s" 9.5) 8.8 3.99) y� ::' N778 �/s-9 B ll &B 12 ih„ (12.7) 12.5 (5.67) °' ` � r N278 �/s-9 B22,B24,B26,B32 1/z" (12.7) 12.5 (5.67) ; � , . k,,,. . Nletric Threads �Y" BNIS-6L M6 x 1 B11&B12 i/a" (63) 69 (3.13) ��_W�.y_ BMS-6M M6 x 1 B22,B24,B26,B32 �/�t" (63) 6.9 (3.13) I3MS-6S M6 x 1 B42,BS?,B54,B56 i/�" (63) 69 (3.13) BNIS-SL M8 x 1.25 B11 &B12 �/4" (6.3) 6.7 (3.04) BNIS-8NI M8 x 1.25 B22,B24,B26,B32 i/a" (6.3) 6.7 (3.04) BMS-85 M8 x 1.25 B42,B52,B54,B56 �/a" (63) 6.7 (3.04) BMS-lOL M10 x 1.5 B11 &B12 3/R° (9.5) 9.6 (4.35) BMS-lOM M10 x 1.5 B22,B24,B26,B32 3/s" (9.5) 9.6 (435) BNIS-lOS Ml0 x 1.5 B42,B52,B54,B56 3/s" (9.5) 9.6 (4.35) BMS-12M M12 x 1.75 B22,B24,B26,B32 3/s" (9.5) 9.2 (4.17) BNIS-12S M12 x 1.75 B42,B52,B54,B56 �/s" (9.5) 9.2 (4.17) BMS-D-13L M12 x 1.75 Bl1 &B12 llz" (12.7) 12.2 (5.53) BMS-D-LNI M12 x 1.75 B22,B24,B26,B32 �/?" (12.7) 12.2 (5.53) Note:For mini channel nut information see page 181. � Reference page 44 for general fitting and standaz-d finish specifications. q,� CHANNEL NUTS & HARD WARE COOPER B-Line ,�,.� u�� _-- _ � Note:See pabe 50 for resistance to slip NUT WITHOUT SPRING � r�a;e 51 for plln-ou�Stre�Qrn. �� , _� 1 li:: 9�i"5"°��i�� ` ��a� � o� �..K` i `�i��"�(+�at5 r:_ ��,��i x - '�'.j . �-` - ��1.? �� N221�V0 #3-32 All sizes exeept B62&�872 � �/a" � (6.3)�� 7.0 (3 17)� N227W0 #10-32 All sizes except B62&B72 �/a" (6.3) 7A (3.17) N232�V0 #10-24 All sizes except B62&B72 i/a" (6.3) 7.0 (3.17) N224W0 �/a-2p All sizes except B62&B72 �/a" (6.3) 6.7 (3.04) N223W0 5/tb-13 :111 sizes except B62&B72 i/a" (6.3) 6.7 (3.04) N228W0 3/s-16 All sizes except B62&B72 3/s" (9.5) 9.3 (4.22) N226W0 �/tb-14 All sizes except B62&B72 3/x" (9.5) 8.3 (3.99) N225W0 �/2-13 B11,B12,B22,B24,B26,B32 �/z„ (12.7) 11.6 (5.26) N525W0 lh_-13 B42,B52,B54,B56 3/s" (9.5) 8.3 (3.99) N255W0 5/s-ll B11,B12,B22,B24,B26,B32 �/2" (12.7) 16.4 (7.4�1) NSSSWO 5/s-1 l B42,B52,B54,B56 3/s" (9.5) 10.2 (4.62) N275W0 3/�-10 BI1,B12,B22,B24,B26,B32 �/2° ft2.7) 14.5 (6.58) N575W0 3/=t-10 B42,B52,B54,B56 3/s" (9.5) 8.3 (3.99) N278W0 �/a-9 B11,B12,B�2,B24,B26,B32 i/z" (12.7) 12.5 (5.67) Metric Threads I3MS-6 M6 x 1 All sizes except B62&B72 i/=t" (6.3) 69 (3.13) BMS-8 M8 x 1.25 All sizes except B62&B72 �/a" (63) 6.7 (3.04) BMS-10 M10 x 1.5 All sizes except B62&B72 3/s" (9.5) 9.6 (435) BNIS-12 M12 x 1.75 All sizes except B62&B72 3/s" (9.5) 9.2 (4.17) BMS-D-12 M12 x 1.75 B11,B12,B22,B24,B26,B32 i/z" (12.7) 12.2 (5.53) � �.! �^ , r �' ` r �� Note:For mini channel not inforination see pabe 181. ,�, r.i � (� �� ; � `'; r-.`: � u ` ,�:, fa, „;�,; �i�.1#., I � I 46 Reference page 44 for general Ftting and standard finish speci6cations. CHANNEL NUTS & HARD WARE COOPER B-Line � Note:See pa�e 50 far resistance to slip &page 51 for pull-out streneth. TWIRL-NUT�" Patented ` t��,sri� i i7'it'.:Y t i�t ;_ !�Sr.(��i �{, t ��''' 'a�i 'I aiii'�3i _:f ;�� '� - 1`,j� - . .a _ ., . . . _ _ - __. .'_ _ .. „ TN321 #8-32 All size5 except lit�3 L B72 �' � � (G 3i 7.0 (3.17) TN227 #10-32 All sizes except B62�B72 �/a" (6.3) 7A (3.17) TN222 #10-24 Ali sizes except B62&B72 1/a" (6.3) 7A (3.17) TN224 �/a-2p All sizes except B62&B72 �/a" (63) 6.7 (3.04) TN323 5/ib-18 All sizes except B62&B72 i/=t" (6.3) 6.7 (3.04) TN228 3ls-16 All sizes exce t B62&B72 3/s" TN226 �/�6-14 All sizes excePt B62&B72 3��„ (9.5) 93 (4.22) P (9.5) 3.8 (3.99) TN225 �/z-13 Bll,B12,B22,B24,B26,B32 �/,>, (12.7) 11.6 (5.26) TN525 1/'-13 B42,B52,B54,B56 3/a" (9.5) 8.8 (3.99) TN255 5/s-11 B11,B12,B22,B24,B26,B32 �/z" (12.7) 11.0 (4.99) BMT-6 M6 x 1 All sizes except B62&B72 i/t" (6.3) 69 (3.13) BM1'-g MS x 1.25 All sizes except B62&B72 �/a" (63) 6.7 (3.04) NIetric B1V[T-10 M10 x LS All sizes exce t B62&B7? 3 Threads P ��" (9•5) 9.6 (a.35) BMT-12 M12 x 1.75 All sizes except B62&B72 3/s" (9.5) y,2 �4,�� BNIT-D-12 M12 x 1.75 B 11,B 12,B22,B24,B26,B32 i/z" (12.7) 12.2 (5.53) � � Note:See page 50 for resistance to slip \�� &page 51 for pull-out stren�th. FN NUT ` I�',ia�'r�,� J!3 7`� Z7rr-_ ��r�-�d"-li ,��r:1 r` >,{`�` - .�,��w1+9-�,�,,i`�'t� fit_F .� :�-#a�'� i' r, 1�I, {'�' - - r � � � FN��4 �/t-20 A11 sizes except B62&B72 .31 � (Z�) 5.4 (2.=45)� �� ; F� FN228 3/s-16 All sizes except B62&B72 .31 (7.9) 5.4 (2.45) � `,� BFN-6 M6 x 1 All sizes except B62&B72 31 (7.9) 5.4 (2.45) +; ;� Nletric BFN-S MS x 1.25 All sizes exce t B62&B72 31 -�; Threads P (7.9) 5.4 (2.45) ' �_� BFN-lA Ivi10 x 1.5 All sizes except B62&B72 .31 (7.9) 5.4 (2.45) � ~� °� A." , e r I_'� �� I ,...,..��_.._:�:J Note:See page 50 for resistance to slip &pabe 51 for pull-out stren�th. STUD TWIRL NLJT � ��+,rir, i li3"�`fi;��r= d ait'�(.li Si�i��;�P�(' �7 � 19idC�r >> ar rv �- �i , , : � � �,�� z�,��t. :��. '. . ..o,� ('� ' , '�� :� � ��'�) Y �'��_' � STN224-* i/a-20 All sv�,�xc�pt lih2& 13 i2 '/�' ' � t6.3) 8.1 (3.66) STN228-'k 3/s-16 All sizes except B62&B72 3ls" (9.5) 12.9 (S.AS) STN225-* 1/?-13 Bll,B12,B22,B24,B26,B32 i/'" (t2.7) 18.2 (8.23) STN525-°k 1/?-13 B42,B52,B54,B56 3/s" (9.5) 15.4 (6.96) *Note:Add stud length in inches(-�/a, 1, 1�/a, 1 ih_) � 4$ Reference pa�e 44 for general fittinb and standa�-d finish speciFications. ' o � � — : Quality Electrical Metallic Tubin � g , � . .._^ : � .. . . ... .. .. .. - ... . . �� h __� - - ::� � .. :... . . � � .. �.�71�.�.:1 . .. _. � �' �. , . .„ .. . ,... �i,.w. . ..r .-: k '� �� i fi�.V� `:� . . . . - x,r.:a E-Z to Install � `' � YL � . i F.x F y `a i l.. � y � 1 _ , ... _ ... .. . � .... ... , �-e .. „ . �y� ... . -- . . .. .` c ,: _. . ..; _ . .. .. � . -: , '.� : .. ., _ � -. ". -" - `, � . �_ . . ..� . . � :.� � -.,.. �.,. . . . �..:� , '�-.�� .,.�-�:.,��. � . . . . . ..- - ...-.�i. _-- . . . . � ' . '� '. I - �i:�'� .. � ' , �:�....h , �+r� _ . - . ��Jc�v-_X`` � -.e . �._ .. � _`�� . � . i � _ � �C•�•�' �'�� . . T . � . ..,. _ . �, . . _, .'� w-. «:��" P� � . 2`�. 1 _ � .�--FM S � _- . � �p �-.�y _� ��.. _. � �r ... . y�� , y.. �� .'��A_s�ai�"" ' _� y�.,°M1^b` i 5� '+. '�* � �5�� d y'tw��,�.�` - . {3� � � �� ' _ .'�'�. r . a s'��' . . . ��.�� 7 . "�,�, _ , . , _ ,�. . . e« �"� . . ! , w 3 ��_ ''`� ic�.'�s a �' i � _� -� - _ �c ° ,�,..��:� ,� � � � _. ,M �-.�� , , �{�-- � �� _ Allied EMT combines strength with ductility, 04�� ; �a Jci::�� . �� `�2.� .; ��.. .,� � �; resulting in faster and easier installations. ` `�`xY �.��'�``� EMT provides easy bending, cutting and �`�`�' joining while resisting flattening, � 7 :- �� y,;� ��, kinking and splitting, creating smooth, " � � �-�� 3 ` �� 1�� continuous raceways for fast wire puliing. �� '4 ' ` �� ` ��°��'��'4� ''��'� � Allied E-Z Pull° EMT has a special low E �` �r� �� "" '' `a'��i��`; a�'� �'=�-- � "'"°` ��'�� - friction ID coating that greatly improves the �� " --,; s lip properties between conduit and wire. ��: r �� , � �,� ,. , ' With E-Z Pull, wire pulls through the conduit .� . t' ��' u�<<x� smoothl and easil . , �, ,a �,� v v E-L Wire Pulling ,; ; .!i ,... .:. KVIIIK-FIT° EMT � �`� k F � `��,.. .; ��... ; _ .�. �.r--a� :. � �,��,..� �,� ,.�.��"'�.�� _ �� _��.Y�.�-_,�.� ; �,�,�,,.�.��° ; �,�-°'�� - � � � � � � � An innovation from the conduit leader � Allied's Kwik-Fit EMT has an integral steel set-screw coupling formed on one end of each length of EMT. Specifying U.L. listed Kwik-Fit EMT ensures an alf steel system — both conduit � ■ and coupling for excellent strength and ground return, as well ;,,w as economy. Contact Allied for detailed specifications on � 1e � Kwik-Fit EMT. Available in trade sizes2-4. TUBE & CONDUIT ' � _:�;_ �._...., ..._.�.�_ _�..�. ;� __�.,.:� __. �� _� , t _� ...._a �..�__� - -s ... ,._: .. ., , � v _. . .�_._ . _ . ....�.�___. __ .. �_...._ .�� .;j AI I ied E-� PlJ LL° S �cific�tions p '9V�Fr4CTURED FdR L�1Vd'a LlF'E Weights and Dimensions for Electrical Metallic Tubing h„�ed EMT is precision manufactured from Nominal Trade Size Approx. Wt. Per Nomina!Outside Wa�� Quantity ln high grade mild strip steel for exceptional Designator i00 Ft. (30.5M) Diameter' Masier Bundle durability and long-lasting life. Thickness Allied EMT is hot galvanized using U.S. Metric Ib. kg. in. mm in. mm ft. m Allied's patented in-line Flo-Coat�process. ii2 16 30 13.6 0.706 17.9 0.042 1.07 7000 2135.0 This process combines zinc, a conversion coating, and a clear organic polymer top-coat 3�a 21 as 2o.s o.s22 23.4 0.049 1.25 5000 1525.0 to form a triple layer of protection against 1 27 67 30.4 1.163 29.5 0.057 1.45 3000 915.0 COffOSI0f1 alld abf2SlOf1. 1_1/4 35 101 45.8 1.510 38.4 0.065 1.65 2000 610.0 E1N1 SNlfL,DItl�IG 1-1/2 41 116 52.6 1.740 44.2 0.065 1.65 1500 457.5 Allied EMT greatly reduces electromagnetic 2 53 148 67.1 2.197 55.8 0.065 1.65 1200 366.0 fields, effectively shielding computers and sensitive electronic equipment from the 2-1�2 63 216 98.0 2.875 73.0 0.072 1.83 610 186.1 electromagnetic interference caused by 3 78 263 119.3 3.500 88.9 0.072 1.83 510 155.6 power distribution systems. For further information, visit our website for a free 3-i/2 91 2as 158.3 a.000 101.6 o.os3 2.�1 370 112.9 download of the GEMI (Grounding and 4 103 393 178.2 4.500 114.3 0.083 2.11 300 91.5 ElectroMagnetic Interference) analysis software and related research papers. �Outside diameter tolerances: +/-.005 in.(.13mm) for trade sizes 1/2(16mm)through 2(53mm); F+ULL C��9E5�6N33 ST.4l1I�►�t4��3� +/-.010 in.(25mm)for trade sizes 2-1/2(63mm); Cd3Nd�Llr�lN�f' +/-.015 in.(.38mm)for trade size 3(78mm); +/-.020 in.(.51 mm)for trade sizes 3-1/2(91 mm)and 4(103mm). Allied EMT is listed to Underwriters NOTE:Length=10 ft.(3.05m)with a tolerance of±25 in.(6.35 mm) Laboratories Safety Standard UL 797 and meets ANSI C80.3, which have been adopted as federal specifications in lieu of Weights and Dimensions for Kwik-Fit EMT WWC 563. EMT is recognized as an Nomina! Trade Size A rox Wt. Per Nomina!Outside Quanti Jn P��ipment grounding conductor by NEC Designafor i00 Ft. (30.5M) Diameter' wa�� Master Bundle tion 250-118. Documentation for Thickness ��npliance with NEC Article 250 is also U.S. Metric Ib. kg. in. mm in. mm ft. m available in the GEMI (Grounding and Electro- Magnetic Interference) analysis software and 2 53 �aa s�.i 2.is� 55.8 o.oss 1.65 500 152.4 related research studies found at the 2_1�2 63 2is 9s.o 2.875 73.0 0.072 1.83 35o ios.& www.alliedeg.com website. 3 78 263 119.3 3.500 88.9 0.072 1.83 300 91.5 Installation of EMT shall be in accordance 3-1/2 91 349 158.3 4.000 101.6 0.083 2.11 250 76.3 with the National Electrical Code and the 4 103 393 178.2 4.500 114.3 0.083 2.11 250 76.3 UL listing information.Allied EMT is listed in category FJMX. �Outsidediametertolerances: Master bundles conform to NEMA +/-.005 in.(.13mm) for trade size 2(53mm); +/-.010 in.(.25mm)for trade size 2-1/2(63mm); Stalld2fd RN2. +/-.015 in.(.38mm)for trade size 3(78mm); +/-.020 in.(.51mm)for trade sizes 3-1/2(91mm)and 4(103mm). S�E'C/,FJCATION�.ATA NOTE:Length=10 ft.(3.05m)with a tolerance of±.25 in.(6.35 mm) To specify Allied EMT, include the following: Electrical Metallic Tubing shall be equal to that manufactured by Allied Tube& Conduit Corporation. EMT shall be hot galvanized steel O.D. with an organic corrosion resistant For more information, contact Allied at(800) 882-5543, I.D. coating and shall be produced in or visit our website at www.alliedeg.com accordance with U.L. Safety Standard#797 and ANSI C80.3 and shall be listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory with follow-up service. Where Kwik-Fit EMT is used it shall also meet U.L. Safety Standard #514-B. It is noted that these U.L. and ANSI U� . standards have been adopted by the federal � Allied Tuhe 6 Londuit govemment and separate military Regislered1o1509001:20a0 ,�..��L,�f�Cay��n5, n� �On9er eX�sl. FileNumhersA2106,A165l,A1176B L A�LIEd ELECTRI�AL 6�'OUP www.alliedeg.com •Allied Tube&Conduit •AFC Cable Systems"•Cope'Cable Tray• Power-StruT°Metal&Fiberglass Framing E-Z Pull,Allied Tube&Conduit,AFC Cable Sys[ems,Cope,Power-Strut,and Tyco are trademarks or registered[radema�ks of ryco and/or its afliliates in the United States and in other countries.All other b�and names,product names,or trademarks be/ong to their respective owners. � HU98ELL, � , _ _ I RACO Steel Boxes and Covers 0 ,��-' %�` ;i ^��,,.,�'y; � ' ;� �.---___ _�__. �.�__..__ _��._�.�_ .�__ _��___..�._—_-_ __�� ....��..__ �� .�,.�...� , ...�,��':�..'i � __ .. -_ � :� if � w . .. . � F� � � .. . .. .. ��I4r�'�' _ - L� !I s� � + I . ., i � - z +,.':r, � �� '�""```�"�`� p ,f � ( �,� ,'.� L~� � � � - T�I 4 "��" '�; � • ¢ ,f� �:,� �- � �s.� { . � ., � ��s,� + �� ...� � I = � � �� 4� �'�. � . M. �, �I�° . �� '�� ' ' �. � _� , �j��^�'si�,� . s' 1 R2'-� �r� * � ._ . .. t � + � ��. I -._:__, �. � � ' t � � �. I ", .- .� . _ _ . ✓- ��e _xS . ��`q��, ._. ' l�. �� , rv . � Tiart^„� .. . . . .. �i. � ,j; -�; �... . . �, '. . b _ . . ' �� >t � r 3. , .� � - �;,� S a b t �3 i S 's��r� �.i ±,r'�� ..i� � ��_.� �r�°-'�. � .� �� ., � �t'` �� :i ` ,��r,� �� ■ � _._s.... �,` �� a�. �y,; � HUBBELL� ,._, . ..� . . � T� ^� �....�.A�� ..:� .�� I j .�.v..._..� � 1 '�� _?�` ' i��_ ._ . ' I^ ' � <�I _ . _ _' _ _ _ _ _ "- .";� - Applications: Steel Boxes TKO� Provides Reliable with metallic or nonmetallic cover � I� RACO� hi h- ualit steel boxes: Grounding Path plates, also 4x4 and octagon boxes � �i 9 q Y Are used in branch circuit wiring Independent tests conducted by may be used in bearing and non- - UL prove that the TKO@ passes the bearing wood stud and steel stud _ to splice wires wails with ratings not exceeding same high-current fault test used _ , Accommodate wiring devices, to test grounding bushings and two hours. such as switches and receptacles ground lugs The surface area of individual metal- > Most may also serve as fixture : RACO�TKO� knockout is UL lic outlet or switch boxes shall not supports exceed 16 square inches through a Listed, providing bonding without - Provide excellent protection the use of bonding jumpers fire rated wall. The aggregate surface for wiring system or devices ,- Suitable for bonding without any area of the boxes shall not exceed Must be closed with a cover, additional bonding means around 100 square inches per 100 square light fixture canopy or wallplate concentric (or eccentric, TKO) feet. Boxes located on opposite sides of walls or partitions shall be Permit access to conductors knockouts where used in circuits separated by a horizontal distance for maintenance above or below 250V of 24 inches. � Allow for branch circuit runs This knockout does not impair the The metallic outlet or switch boxes � Provide two-hour fire rating for 4x4 electrical connection to ground shall be securely fastened to the or smalier wall opening Most RACO° Boxes Have At studs, and the opening in the wall- Product Features: Outlet Boxes Least One Tapped #10-32 board facing shall be cut so that the for Fixture or Fan Support Grounding Hole clearance between the box and the These high-quality boxes The products that do not have wallboard does not exceed 1/8 inch. a grounding hole are: plenum 'Reference: UL Fire Resistance Are listed to support lighting fixture boxes catalog numbers 226 Directory (Orange Book) canopies or fans and 239 Standard Material: Steel Covers, Feature oversized #10 screws Product Features: Outlet And Switch Boxes to provide strength and rigidity Combination Screw Heads -- � Steel boxes and covers are made Product Features: > Cover and clamp screws have of .0625 inch thick pre-galvanized Patented TKO� Knockouts combination slotted/Phillips heads sheet steel TKO° knockouts offer greater flexi- Self-tapping screws provide Handy Box covers are made of bility with RACO� patented combi- for 100% thread engagement .030 inch thick galvanized sheet nation 1/2" and 3/4" knockout Metallic Boxes: Fire Resistance steel Stock just one product instead Rating Wall Penetrations* of two or three Listed single- and double-gang One product for the installer metallic outlet and switch boxes to carry � HUBBELL n ,�i � - - ,� � �� ,t .,�,,� -- _ _� _ _ __ -� , _ -�,-, , �--.-, � �� j I t.l_-i�'i �., ' , 1��=' 1�� 'i �'-_, � �� Compliances j�� RACO°steel boxes and covers gen- �~�� _ erally carry the following compliance '- ratings. Check specific catalog For installation guidelines and to learn ': pages for individual compliances. more about RACO products, visit the � UL Listed —Standard 514-A, NEMA website at http:Uwww.nema.org. - file E195978 ("QCIT" Category) The National Electrical Manufacturers � Boxes are listed for their Electrical Association (NEMA) website is a Applications (electrical codes), UL valuable electrical resource providing Green Book the information you need - quickly. Standards and technical information, Boxes are listed for mechanical installation guides, industry news and properties, including the Two-Hour economic trends, events/meetings, the Fire Rating, (building codes) UL latest electoindustry, and legislative and Orange Book regulatory information for more than = CSA Certified —C22.2 #18, fifty-one product areas ranging from CSA File LR-1082 arc welding to x-ray machines can > U.S. Federal Specification and be found with just a few clicks of Standards W-J-800 your mouse. ANSI/NEMA OS1 NEMA, celebrating its 75th : Federal Manufacturer's number anniversary in 2001, is the leading trade association in the United States 28488 representing the interests of electro- Reference Data industry manufacturers. Founded in TKO° knockout U.S. Patent 1926 and headquartered near 4,640,433; Canada Patent Washington, D.C., its 500 member 1,260,597 companies manufacture products � Ceiling fan outlet box U.S. used in the generation, transmission Patent 4,892,211; Canada Patent and distribution, control, and end- 1,324,360; Mexico Patent 166,125 use of electricity. Annual shipments of these products total $100 billion. Far-side support (#978) U.S. Patent 4,898,357 BOX-LOC� U.S. Patent 5,408,045 MEXICO Patent 186848 Adjust-A-Brace° U.S. Patent 5,330,137 and 5,927,667 U.S. Steel Stud box Support (#978) 4,898,357 U.S. W.P. self tap holes 4,898,453 U.S. and 4,906,206 U.S. � HUHHELL ' ro � �_ i� � - _ � _ . t� .:� �,:: — - -- - - - — — — - �T - �1 � -'�,�j � �� , �� ','� 'i � �", i {� � ,_ � i�� _'� � � i , I • �� ,�, ,i I Wiring Capacity: Steel Outlet (a) Box Volume Caiculations. The (2) Clamp Fill. Where one or And Switch Boxes; Cubic Inches volume of a wiring enciosure (box) more internal cable clamps, whether _______—_-- _- shall be the total volume of the factory or field supplied, are present Maximum Number of Conductors assembled sections, and, where in the box, a single volume allowance , or Minimum Size Box Required - used, the space provided by plaster in accordance with Table 370-16(b) � National Electrical Code Article rings, domed covers, extension rings, shall be made based on the largest 370-16 etc., that are marked with their vol- conductor present in the box. No ume in cubic inches or are made allowance shall be required for a The purpose of NEC Article 370-16 from boxes the dimensions of which cable connector with this clamping is to determine the maximum con- are listed in Table 370-16(a). mechanism outside the box. ductor count or the minimum box size required for an application. It (1) Standard Boxes. The volume (3) Support Fittings Fill. Where also may be used to determine how of standard boxes that are not one or more fixture studs or hickeys many other conductors may be marked with a cubic inch capacity are present in the box, a single vol- added without exceeding the Code- shall be as given in Table 370-16(a). ume allowance in accordance with prescribed limit. Most applications Table 370-16(b) shall be made for have determined the number of (2) Other Boxes. Boxes 100 each type of fitting based on the conductors. The question that then cubic inches (1,640 cu. cm3.) or less, largest conductor present in the box. remains is the smallest (minimum) other than those described in Table size box that is permitted. The rules 370-16(a), and nonmetallic boxes (4) Device or Equipment Fill. of Article 370-16 are to be used to shall be durably and legibly marked For each yoke or strap containing determine the Code-recognized limit. by the manufacturer with their cubic one or more devices or equipment, inch capacity. Boxes described in a double volume allowance in accor- Selection of an outlet or junction box Table 370-16(a)that have a larger dance with Table 370-16(b) shall be for use in an electrical circuit work cubic inch capacity than is designat- made for each yoke or strap based must take into consideration the ed in the table shall be permitted to on the largest conductor connected maximum number of wires permitted have their cubic inch capacity to a device(s) or equipment support- in the box. Safe electrical practice marked as required by this section. ed by that yoke or strap. demands that wires not be jammed into boxes because of the possibility (b) Box Fill Calculations. The (5) Equipment Grounding of nicks, abrasions or other damage volumes in paragraphs (1) through (5) Conductor Fill. Where one or more to the insulating material, creating below, as applicable, shall be added equipment grounding conductor(s) the potential for ground faults or together. No allowance shall be enter(s) a box, a single volume short circuits. required for small fittings such as allowance in accordance with Table _ — _ locknuts and bushings. 370-16(b) shall be made based on Article 370 - Boxes and Fittings the largest equipment grounding con- (1) Conductor Fill. Each ductor present in the box. Where an 370-16. Number of Conductors in conductor that originates outside additional set of equipment grounding Outlet, Device, and Junction the box and terminates or is spliced conductors, as permitted by Section Boxes, and Conduit Bodies. Boxes within the box shall be counted once, 250-74, Exception #4, is present shall be of sufficient size to provide and each conductor that passes in the box, an additional volume free space for all enclosed conduc- through the box without splice or allowance shall be made based on tors. In no case shall the volume of termination shall be counted once. the largest equipment grounding the box, as calculated in (a) below, The conductor fill, in cubic inches, conductor in the additional set. be less than the fill calculation as cal- shall be computed using Table 370- culated in (b) below. The minimum 16(b). A conductor, no part of which Feprinted with permission from the NFPA 70-1999.National volume for conduit bodies shall be as leaves the box, shall not be counted. Eiecr�icaicode�,Copyright�1999.National Fire Protection calculated in (c) below. Exception: Where an equipment Association,ouincy,MA02269.This reprinted material is not grounding conductor or not over me complete and official position of the NFPA on the reference The provisions of this section shall not four fixture wires smaller than subject which is represented only by the standard in its entireTy. apply to terminal housings supplied #14, or both, enter a box, frOm NationalElectrical Code°,and NEC",are registered vademarks with motors. See Section 430-12. a domed fixture or similar canopy of the National fire Protection Association,Duincy,MA. and terminate within that box, Boxes and conduit bodies enclosing it shall be permitted to omit these conductors, size #4 or larger, shall conductors from the calculations. also comply with the provisions of Section 370-28. ��. 9 HUBBELL -..e� I . — t� ,�}� u ,t ��..�.__�._,��.�. � �� . i' �. ' , .�.Ili -�,I� � ' i .i �� -^r . {'�_� �:1�_'! i — �':, j 1-i '.�_�� I ' , I " : i 1�,1�i�..�l. r, �I MOST OFTEN REQUESTED ARTICLES OF THE HOW RACO� PRODUCTS HELP COMPLETE 1999 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE� THE INSTALLATION - �;: 250-97 (d) Method of Bonding Service Equipment— This Article is used to ensure that there is ground - Bonding Jumpers. Bonding jumpers are not required continuity when a concentric or eccentric knockout for concentric and eccentric knockouts if they are listed is encountered. A bonding jumper is not required when -- for the purpose. using any of the RACO`� patented TKO° knockout boxes, Catalog Numbers 189, 232, etc. 370-27 (a) Boxes at Lighting Fixture Outlets. Boxes Device boxes use #6-32 screws to secure devices such to support light fixtures must be listed for fixture support. as snap-switches and receptacles. They are not suitable Exception: Device boxes are allowed to support wall for support of other than very lightweight lighting fixtures, mounted fixtures not over 6 Ibs. such as some wall-bracket types. See Article 410-16. All RACO� 4" and 4-11/16" square boxes are listed for fixture support. 370-27 (b) Floor Boxes. Boxes listed specifically for this Only boxes that are UL Listed for the application application shall be used for receptacles located in the may be fastened into the floor. RACO�floor boxes floor. Exception: Boxes located in elevated floors of show are in Section E of this catalog. windows and similar locations where the authority having jurisdretion judges them free from physical damage, moisture and dirt. 370-27 (c) Boxes at Fan Outlets. Boxes that support For any ceiling outlet that is intended to have a ceiling ceiling fans must be listed for that purpose. (paddle) fan installed, a UL Listed outlet box rated for ceiling fan support must be installed. RACO° offers a complete line of products designed for various applications and mounting needs. 410-10 Space for Conductors. Canopies and outlet When calculating the minimum cubic inch requirements boxes taken together shall provide adequate space so for an outlet box, the canopy may be included in the that fixture conductors and their connecting devices can calculation at the discretion of the Authority Having be properly installed. Jurisdiction. If the canopy of the fixture/fan is marked with the cubic inch capacity, then the additional volume must be accepted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. 410-16 (a) Means of Support- Outlet Boxes. Fixtures All outlet boxes that are intended to be used with fixtures greater than 50 pounds cannot be supported by a fixture are tested in accordance with UL Standard 514-A. box unless the box has been listed for a heavier load. 410-56 (f) Receptacles in Raised Covers. Receptacles The intent of the additional support screw is to prevent installed in cover shall not be secured solely by a single the device from coming loose. A loose device could cause screw. Exception: Devices, assemblies or box covers a safety hazard to personnel while inserting or removing listed and identified for such use. Note that this does a plug. not apply to wall plates. � HUBBELL p -� _., _-,e� ..� �.. � .. __. ;:°i � � 1 � u�� {ii �f 1 -- �� j' {� , ,` ,1? I � I° t i,7, �� i - � �� MOST OFTEN REQUESTED ARTICLES OF THE 1999 HOW RACO PRODUCTS HELP COMPLETE �t ' `' NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE� THE INSTALLATION � i 422-18 Support of Ceiling Fans. Unless otherwise marked, a UL Listed outlet box listed for , (a) Ceiling Fans 35 Ibs. or Less. Listed ceiling fans that ceiling fan support can support a maximum of 35 pounds. – do not exceed 35 pounds in weight, with or without All of RACO° steel fan outlet boxes use hardened #10-32 accessories, shall be permitted to be supported by outlet screws for support of the fan. Captive star lock-washers boxes identified for such use and supported in accor- prevent the screws from loosening, providing a safe and dance with Sections 370-23 and 370-27. secure installation. (b) Ceiling Fans Exceeding 35 Ibs. Boxes may support heavier loads when so listed, or the fan shall be support- ed independently of the outlet box. See Section 370-23. 800-52 (c) Installation of Communications Wires, When power and voice/data are brought to one enclosure, Cables and Equipment— Electric Light or Power a means of dividing the wiring is required. Voltage dividers Circuits. Communications conductors shall not be placed are available on the following box types: 4"and 4-11/16" in any raceway, compartment, outlet box, junction box, square boxes, three- and four-gang switch boxes, or similar fitting with conductors of electric light or power masonry boxes, and gang boxes. circuits or Class 1 circuits. � l ` ti ,� � 1 __ __��,.� � � !�` 1 {�_j ^It'! s'�� 1�1 '1 ' � �— '' �T I 1 , _ _ ... �� . _ _ a+ � ' ', . ..__ ._ .: : �._ .,` _ _.._` _ . _. _ __ ___ ...: , � i';t i',"':! I i�'-., fi STEEL BOX SELECTION CHART � ,.-I� CU.IN. 42.0 30.3 29.5 21.5 27.0 18.D 16.5 � �� -,��— �'`� �-- , - `� CONDUIT `, )e �; � � � ��° aJ�, U\ l �;'°"C� '� ?`,) STEEL C� °'�' '�^ ', �(;':�° � ; % �f� ,1 �p J � �'� :) ;, � �,) �o � �% �';`'�?';� a � �� BOXES ' ' '' 4-11/16"Sq. 4"Sq. 4-11/16"Sq. 4"Sq. 4"Sq. Switch Handy 2-1/8"Deep 2-1/8"Deep 1-1/2"Deep 2-1/8"Deep 1-1/2"Deep 3-1/2"Deep 2-1/8"Deep CU.IN. 15.5 14.D 13.0 12.5 6.0 �� : �j�� CONDUIT ' 3''' ',� ;� �� °� C J°�' I�/i �J� -.� �° � ;� i�� u;) � � � STEEL �,i �o�-� 3 �� ' �, '.� � —� ., ��' - �� , BOXES `�% �o > % ��r; 4"Oct. Switch Handy Switch 4"Rnd.Pan 1-1/2"Deep 2-3/4"Deep 1-7/8"Deep 2-1/2"Deep 1/2"Deep STEEL BOX SELECTION CHART CU.IN. 30.3 21.5 21.0 18.0 15.8 15.5 14.0 12.5 4.0 - —c - - � � _ - - p ,� � V � _B � � �� o CQOLE � �, o d� ya lpa�l � vQO ae I i �ja� lpx�1 ,' � .I m �, � �� i � � �r ;. __ � m,� �� , ��l; � STEEL �� , ;� ° ,� � �� - �� ` �,\, �,_ 9 ti' `� - BOXES �� _� — � �`� � 4"Sq. 4"Oct. 4"Sq. Switch Switch 4"Oct. Switch Switch 3-1/2"Rnd.Pan 2-1/8"Deep 2-1/8" 1-1/2"Deep 3-1/2"Deep 2-9/64"Deep 1-1/2"Deep 2-3/4"Deep 2-1/2"Deep 1/2"�eep � HUH9ELL m __ _m - � � .� M i"� .,� , � ' i °_. ��v 4�� ' ' -1 1_ _ ,�,. -- --I, - .v- - --- - - � � � . . . . ^!'�� Calculate The Minimum Size Box 4.Each wire commg into the box and This example requires a minimum of r� connecting to a device counts as 12.0 cubic inches. Part (1) of Section 370-16(a) of the `' National Electrical Code describes one wire of that size. p Exam le #2: - Cable Boxes: This 3''' the detailed way of counting wires, S.Fixture studs, cable clamps and example will illustrate how the mini- as well as clamps, fittings or devices hickeys are to be counted as one mum size is determined for a box (i.e., switches, receptacles, combina- regardless of how many there may with cable clamps fed by two #12-2 tion devices) - by establishing an be. If a box contains two cable nonmetallic sheathed cables and equivalent conductor value for each. clamps, the total is only to be supplying a 15A duplex receptacle. Those values are added together to increased by one. After supplying the receptacle, the get a total number of conductors. 6.Where devices are mounted in the conductors are extended to other The minimum size box is the smallest box, the total conductor count outlets. one in Table 370-16(a) that can must be in-creased by two for Circuit conductors 4 accommodate that number each mounting strap. Ground conductors 1 of conductors. Example #1: - Conduit Boxes: Cable clamps 1 1.No matter how many ground wires Supply power to a switch that will Device (receptacle) 2 come into a box, they only count control a remote light with #14 con- Total 8 as one conductor within the box. ductors. Metal conduit and fittings Using the Box Fill Table below, 2.Any wire running unbroken through will be used as the wire way. You read across the line "deductions" the box counts as one wire. must provide space for four conduc- to column 8, then down to the 3.Each wire coming into a splice tors and one switch, totaling 6. Read minimum cubic inches required device (crimp or twist-on type) is across the line "Deductions" in the for#12 conductor. This example counted as one wire. Box Fill Table to column 6, then requires a minimum of 18.0 read down to the minimum cubic cubic inches. inches required for #14 conductor. BOX FILL TABLE DEDUCTIONS 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 #18(1.50) 9.00 10.50 12.00 13.50 15.00 16.50 18.00 19.50 21.00 #16(1.75) 10.50 12.25 14.00 15.75 17.50 19.25 21.00 22.75 24.50 Volume ��4(2.00) 12.00 14.00 16.00 18.00 20.00 22.00 24.00 26.00 28.00 Required per Conductor #12(2.25) 13.50 15.75 18.00 20.25 22.50 24.75 27.00 29.25 31.50 Size per �10(2.50) 15.00 17.50 20.00 22.50 25.00 27.50 30.00 32.50 35.00 Deductions #8(3.00) 18.00 21.00 24.00 27.00 30.00 33.00 36.00 39.00 42.00 #6(5.00) 30.00 35.00 40.00 45.00 50.00 55.00 60.00 65.00 70.00 � � HLJBBELL / � . '� � 4 ;1 I _ -�� ✓�.�fl ��j . w.,».... � a...y....�.,.,�_:� _ _ .—,__ _ ' _ _ _— ,;,,.'.., . — T� .;�7 �� a��' ��?a� ^��' � � �-�; '1 i �� I�I ' I ' '-1 i . , .� ._�. _ . .._. __. .. , � � �I �__ .:.____ ._,._ _ �_� ._. ._ _ __. __,..: .___ ..._ .. ..__ _ _._ __ . ._._ _.. ___ . . .-,-i � BRACKETTECHNICAL DATA ' ' 1 BRACKET TYPE "A° "B" "D" "FA" "FH" "FM" "J" °LB" "MS" "TS" "W" "I LENGTH 6-7/16" 1-61/64" 6-1/4" 5-1/2" 7-3/B" 6-7/8" 2-3/8" 1-31/32" 4-1/2„ 7" 6-25/32" �;'%"; i WIDTH 5/8" 2" 21/32" 2-1/4" 1-9/16" 1-9/16" 2-23/32" 3-3/64" 1-t/2" t-t/16" 1-1/16" :i;,7 OFFSET 3/8" 3!8" 1/4" 17/64" 1 5/16" FOR METAL ,/ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ � FOR WOOD �/ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ "A" Bracket ��B" Bracket ;i "D" Bracket "FA" Bracket i°� Positions _ �== Face mounts '-- Allows box to `� Allows box I' °�' handy box �� ` � : �;�, ^ �,�.00�� on front edge be mounted on a o1 �� to be flush ' � against face ,o o �;; ,-•,, of wood stud. either side of �` , � mounted to ' and side of ° v Use when � � ' ' stud. '� stud or joist. ,�_.� stud. Very rigid. � space between ; ° ° studs is limited. ° ,o "FH" Bracket "J" Bracket "LB" Bracket �G Side-mount '°: ��\ Spurs, slotted : Face mounts —�=G "FM" Bracket y � �''� holes for toe- ;�� I on front ed e a� bracket with � , ��_� 9 ?�n° hooks that '° ��' Mounts on s� i� � /J nailin Gau in <°~ � ,: ;,, � � g g g � ° °.'-,', of wood stud. ',,, ;; � -'��'� drive into face ,''_�� flat side of ��3 notches at 3/8" �� p �y � Use when �; of stud. .p, ' stud. and 1/2". space between "W" Bracket studs is limited. ' BOX-LOC�"MS" ' "TS" Bracket r = -` ;� Positions box 5/8" offset to ` °� %�� Bracket =, � Side-mount bracket for octagon, � �'� °,o,� away from side clear narrow ° �`��;;�� Positions box � ��; square, switch and handy boxes. � ' � of stud to clear door molding. J� �/'_ `, �= the trim moldin � _ ,o-,, on either side Gauging tabs and recessed nailing 9 � ' of stud. � -� spur. Very rigid. of a door frame. CLAMP TECHNICAL DATA AND STUD TYPE RACEWAY TYPE CLAMP TYPE ARMORED CABLE (BX) METAL CLAD CABLE NONMETALLIC FLEXIBLE CONDUIT INTERLOCKING (MCI) STEEL ALUMINUM STEEL ALUMINUM SNEATHED CABLE STEEL ALUMINUM "L" TYPE #14-2 to#10-3 w/ground "X" TYPE #14-2 (.444 in #14-2 (.444 in outer diam.) to outer diam.) to .425 to .600 .425 to .600 3/8"trade size 3/S" trade size largest size to largest size to outer tliam. outer diam. fit in clamp fit in clamp "#9 OR AOL" TYPE #14-2 w/ground "BN" TYPE #14-2 to#10-3 w/ground °�" TYPE #14-2 w/ground or#12-2 w/ground I .�j�-= .a_�- \ � o ��,�� ...-i,i- � o ,_ �,I � r�=;1 0 �m � � a� m—z , � � � '' ``� j.� `� � o v ,� H � Q .i::. � \ � 9 ' V' _ .I \.,/ � �l � � �� '...�� . "L"TYPE "X"TYPE "#9 OR AOL"TYPE "BN"TYPE "O"TYPE KNOCKOUTS AN� PRIOUTS PLASTER EARS O KO O K'O �v O �^v � • o i-ne"-► CONDUIT i��•-- CONDUIT <zir�z"� �7/75•f5/B"—ti 0 oO ��'� 3/4" TKO ,-,,,2•-. CONDUIT CONDUIT CABLE PRIOUTS FLAT-BOTTOMED ONE-SCREW EAR TWO-SCREW EAR O KO KO Aiways in pairs. CABI.E PRIOUTS Adjustable plaster ears are included on Eliminate chance many switch boxes and one octagon HUBBELL � of cable being cut. box. They are set forward 1/32". :3 . ,,� �. ; _ ` � � ,;- - { � ' _ 1 � ' .�.�_1 i-i/2" DEEP W�•.- r• Applications Octagon boxes can be used '.'°� in the installation of ceiling or "="i wall lighting fixtures =� _ �e _ �, Extension rings provide a �- ° �� 1 means for adding additional � 'a o° \1`� ' `a/�m°�\,� a--�0�1 ' �e �`) � cubic capacity or as an outlet � Q � v � 0�J � `� '� 'm�) � � .?,�I box for surface conduit � � (� a - � � � �a O, .. a �___-. Product Features Combination screw heads provide � for faster installation RACO°offers a variety of labor saving mounting brackets that 110 112 119 111 allow for easy positioning of box ___ __ __ ____ _ _ ____ _ -----,-� along studs or joists � �_ -,I; ; ,' ,.�.. i I.� - 1-�,—�`� -1J, � ' '1 See Box Selection section in the � . .� front of this catalog for complete 3-i/2" OCTAGON BOX - 7-1/2" DEEP - DRAWN description of bracket types and WITN CONDUIT KO'S — 11.8 CUBIC INCHES features KNOCKOUTS MAX. RECOMMENDED DESCRIPTIDN UPC SUPPORT LOADS Compliance CATALOG gRACKET & SIDES BOTTOM STD. BAR CEILING fAN FIXTURE NUMBER SETBACK COND. CONU. PK�' CODE (DYNAMIC) (STATIC) u� — File E195978 LBS. LBS. 110 — 4-1/2" t-1/2" 50 n�miil No 50 3-1/2" OCTAGON BOX - Y-1/2" DEEP - URAWN WITH NONMETALLIC SHEATHED CABLE CLAMPS- 11.8 CUBIC INCHES KNOCKOUTS MAR. RECOMMENDED CATALOG DESCRIPTION SIDES BOTTOM STp UPC SUPPORT LOAUS BRACKET & BAR CEILING FAN FIXTURE NUMBER SETBACK CABLE CONU. CONU. PK�' CODE (DYNAMIC) (STATIC) LBS. LBS. ��z — 4 2-1/2" 1-1/2" 50 — No 50 119 TS brkt.,1/2" 4 1-1/2" 1-1/2" 25 — No 50 3-1/2" OCTAGON EXTENSION RING - 1-t/2" DEEP - DHAWN WITH CONOUIT KO'S - 11.8 CUBIC INCHES CATALOG DESCRIPTION KNOCKOUTS STD. UPC NUMBER BRACKET & SIDES BOTTOM PKG. BAR SETBACK COND. COND. CODE 111 Extension ring 4-1/2" — 25 iomm 3-1/2"OCTAGON BOXES DIMENSIONS � CATALOG A g � D E o° NUMBER 110 3-7/16" 1-9/16" — — — � o � �� 172 3-7/16" 1-9/16" — — — 0 0�o o I �� V�� 119 3-7/16" 1-9/16" 7-5/32" 1/2" 1-1/4" ° �, 111 3-7/16" 1-9/16" — — — � P B-►I �0 1�-- O E � F � 9 HU9BELL , ,. ,�:._' �', � i` �. ; i � I ' :' , I °. _..�.�.._..,... 1-i/2" D E E P � Application � Octagon boxes are used in `—' `—J ° o� J � l . � � _, - the installation of ceiling or wall => �� -� ��, `�a / � ; �H', ) � ;. j :; lighting fixtures (�� J � � �'.�°. `-� �J 1,�� r'-'j — � ;�:'_=� Product Features \ j s •, °lJ a � � � Combination screw heads provide - �� Y - for faster installation 125,8125 ��l 126 ° � 127,8127 � -- � RACO° offers a variety of labor � � �. � "� o��\� m � ,�� k t that -� t' brac e s savin moun in �. 9 9 ',�. � �- a �. �� allow for easy positioning of box �, � � � �' a along studs or joists � -� � `� ��-' e� See Box Selection section in the ' front of this catalog for complete 15$ � 161 description of bracket types and _ _ features I , - I i � r 3 , - . ', ��. I � � '1 � ;��' 1 1 , -- ------__ � -- --- ----___,i Compliance - _- - -—-- --.. --- - -- --- u� - File E195978 4" OCTAGON 80X — 1-1/2" DEEP — UflAWN WITH CONDUIT KO'S — 75.5 CUBIC INCHES KNOCKOUT5 MAX. RECOMMENDED DESCRIPTION SIDES BOTTOM UPC SUPPORT LOADS CATALOG STD. BRACKET & BAR CEILING FAN FIXTURE NUMBER SETBACK CONO. COND. PK�' CODE (DYNAMIC) (STATIC) LBS. LBS. 125 — 4-1/2" 5-1/2" 50 — No 50 8125 — 4-1/2" 5-1/2" 50 loiaml No 50 4-3/4" 3 ��2 50 — No 50 126 — 2-3/4" 2-1/2" 3-1/2", 127 — 2-3J4" 2-3/4" 50 — No 50 2-1/2" 3-1/2", 9�2� — 2-3/4" 2-3/4" 50 Ia�um1 No 50 15a J brkt.,3/8"or1/2" 4—t/2" 5-1/2" 50 imBUii No 50 161 TS brkt.,1/2" 3-1/2" 5-1/2" 50 i�mlil No 50 4"OCTA60N DIMENSIONS CATALOG A g C D E f o NUMBER ,ti o '� 125,8125 4" 1-9/16" — — — — � o � �� 126 4" 1-9/16" — — — — 0 0�o o � I �� V�� 127, 8127 4" 1-9/16" — — — — ° ( `, 158 4" 1-9/16" — 1/2" — 3-1/8" V" � P a I o � 161 4" 1-9/16" 7-5/32" 1/2" 1-1/4" — —+I o �E F � 9 /�. HIJHBELL �, ��.: .� _ . ..__ �% { . .�� j:: � �1 1-1/2" D E E P -.�......J._--_-�__ ; Applications '�.,,,-� �� '' � � � a �1 � � ; Octagon boxes are used in �� g � �' 3 � ` �° �a � � � �:�mQ n ' the installation of ceiling or wall �;1 l' :� �-' �'�°�� ' ,�;� � `• 'i lighting fixtures - � . 3 � '- e �-J \' , - Extension rings provide a means �� _ , a ,�,. � ' �� ,� for adding additional cubic 12g�g12g 130 324 146, 8146 � capacity or as an outlet box for ', !:7, ,�� surface conduit � - ' �� i � , a , Product Features ,�a �� l I' �y 11• ° �' e\ l0al� S 0 J�'�I1\I RACO� offers a variety of labor ) � mJo a I � �,.�i ' J � L � � � a saving mounting brackets that 9, e � : t�_. a � a l l o w f o r e a s y p o s i t i o n i n g o f b o x �� ,� along studs or joists 145 150 160,8160 � 164,8164 � See Box Selection section in the _ _ _ _ _ front of this catalog for complete - , • i i,� �3 i� - i =� � -.;� 1' - l description of bracket types and '_ __- _--— - - '-- -= _ --- !_ � features 4" OCTAGON EXTENSION RINGS — 1-1/2" DEEP — DRAWN Fixture bar hanger allows box to WITH CONDUIT KO'S — 15.5 CUBIC INGHES be located anywhere along length CATALOG DESCRIPTION KNOCKOUTS STD. UPC of bar NUMBER BRACKET & SIDES BOTTOM pK�, BAR SETBACK COND. COND. CODE = RACO°324 inciudes a 3/8" trade sized stud to accommodate �28 Extension ring a-vz�� — 50 — fixture stem 8128 Eztension ring 4-1/2" — 25 9�uu 130 Extension ring 2-1/2",2-3/4" — 50 �� - Combination screw heads provide for faster installation q�� OGTAGON WITH BAR HANGER - 1-1/2" DEEP - DHAWN Compliances WITH CONDUIT KO'S — 75.5 CUBIC INCHES KNOCKOUTS MAX. RECOMMENDED 9� - File E195978 DESCRIPTION UPC SUPPORT LOADS CATAL06 STD. BRACKET & SIDES BOTTOM BAR CEILING FAN FIXTURE > S�l� - File LR-1082 (128, 8128, 130) NUMBER SETBACK COND. COND. PK�' CODE (DYNAMIC) (STATIC) LBS. LBS. 3/8"Stud,adj. 324 14-1/4"to 22-1/2" 4-1/2" 4-1/2" 25 Icv'III No 10' "UL Rated at 50 Ibs. 4"OCTAGONBOXES 4" OCTAGON BOX - Y-1/2" �EEP - DRAWN WITH NONMETALLIC SHEATHED CABLE CLAMPS - 15.5 CUBIC INCHES �ti o- KNOCKOUTS MAX. RECOMMENDED ' � DESCRIPTION SIUES 80TTOM UPC SUPPORT LOAUS C V� CATALOG STD. o BHACKET & BAR CEILING FAN FIXTURE I NUMBEH SETBACK CABLE COND. COND. PK�' CODE (OYNAMIC) (STATIC) 0 0�' o o � I � � LBS. LBS. � � C v� — — 146 4 2-1/2" 1-1/2" 50 No 50 \ P B� oo � 8146 — 4 2-V2" 1-1/2" 50 IGi41il No 50 �\ -1 Slde holes, �� 145 1/8"&1/4" 4 2-1/2" 1-1/2" 50 No 50 o � 150 Ears 4 2-1/2" 1-1/2" 50 i�uul No 50 E J brkt.,3/8" F 160 or t/2" 4 2-1/2" t-1/2" 50 — No 50 J brkt.,3/8" 8160 0��2�� 4 2-1/2" 1-1/2" 50 iuiriii No 50 164 TS brkt.,1/2" 4 1-1/2" 1-1/2" 50 — No 50 8164 TS brkL,1/2" 4 1-1/2" 1-1/2" 50 �L7�ul No 50 DIMENSIONS CATALOG A g � D E F NUMBER 146,8146 4" 1-9/16" — — 145 4" 1-9/16" — — HUBBELL� 9 150 4" 1-9/1 6" _ — _ — 160,8160 4" 1-9/16" 1/2" 3-1/8" . � 164,8164 4" 1-9/16" 7-5/32" 1/2" 1-1/4" ' � :� � — _i _ � .� ._ i �.,: , � " ' . i i , .. 1 �., �I . _ . . _ ' 1-i/2" DEEP Application �� _�--�-- " �: e Octagon boxes are used in the � �-� 1 � "' 9,�� m � � installation of ceiling or wall �� ' ��"�� - � � „Y:�(� � ;- , lighting fixtures '� � � � � � � � Pi�- �� — (t� ,�k�r'�. � .V�'.�'�, C 3 ; �' Product Features '-��'' � � r _ ! �.�� 1 :' RACO°offers a variety of labor 296-1 296 326,8326 saving mounting brackets that ° allow for easy positioning of box �� - � ��-�-�; \ ;a � along studs or joists � a,�om�\ � ��mQ;�• y�J�� m'�� o See Box Selection section in the t.J ° �� ° � Z ' o •�I front of this catalog for complete _,�` . � � =��'-' a � � description of bracket types and — —� a° features 153 � 155 15� - Fixture bar hanger allows box to __ ___. _ -._ . __ be located anywhere along length =i i'., �j' >>;� , , !'�� 1 ',` i,'=•�� 1' -� � of bar --- -- _—' . . - - - - --- -=---- - -- __ = RACO°326, 8326 includes 3/8" trade sized stud to accommodate 4�� OCTAGON CEILING FAN ANO FIXTURE BOX - 1-1/2" OEEP - DRAWN WITH NONMETALLIC SHEATHEU CABLE CLAMPS - 15.5 CUBIC INCHES fixture stem MAX. RECOMMENDED KNOCKOUTS UESCRIPTION UPC SUPPORTLOADS RACO�296, 296-1 C01IIIlg CATALOG BRACKET & SIDES BOTTOM ST�� BAR CEILING FAN FIXTURE fan boxes have lock-washers NUMBER SETBACK PK�� CODE (DYNAMIC) (STATIC) to prevent the high-strength, CABLE COND. COND. LBS. LBS. hardened screws from loosening z96'1 — 4 2-v2° i-�i2° 20 — 35 �5 from vibration z96 — 4 2-v2° �-v2° s� n;u��i 35 �5 = 296, 296-1 include mounting hardware and instructions 'Packaged in a stackable, chipboard box suitabie for sheif display Compliance 4" OCTAGON WITH BAR HANGER - 1-1/2" DEEP - �HAWN � � - File E195978 �N�TH NONMETALLIC SHEATHED CABLE CLAMPS - 75.5 CUBIC INCHES KNOCKOUTS MAX. RECOMMENDED DESCRIPTION SIDES BOTTOM UPC SUPPORT LOADS 4"OCTAGON BOXES CATALOG gRACKET & ST�' BAR CEILING FAN FIXTURE � NUMBEH SETBACK CABLE COND. COND. PK�' CODE (DYNAMIC) (STATIC) o LBS. LBS. ° 3/8"Stud,adj. 326 14-1/4"to 22-1/2" 4 2-1/2" — 25 — No 10" o � �� 3/8"Stud,atlj. 0 0�o o I � � 8326 14-1/4"to 22-V2" 4 2-1/2" — 25 I[i�au No 10' o � �� 'UL Ratetl at 50 Ibs. � P B� oo � 4" OCTAGON BO% - 1-1/2" DEEP - DflAWN WITH ARMORE� CABLE/METAL GLADlFLEX CLAMPS - 15.5 CUBIC INCHES D KNOCKOUT MAX. RECOMMENDED �4 QO E F DESCRIPTION SIDES BOTTOM UPC SUPPORT LOADS CATALOG gRACKET & STD. gAR CEILING FAN FIXTURE NUMBER SETBACK CABLE COND. COND. PK�' COOE (DYNAMIC) (STATIC) LBS. LBS. 153 — 4 2-1/2" t-1/2" 25 luim No 50 155 TS brkt.,1/2" 4 1-1/2" 1-1/2" 50 Im�m No 50 J brkt.,3/8" �57 0��2�� 4 2-t/2" t-1/2" 50 ¢u:iil No 50 DIMENSIONS CATALOG A g � D E F NUMBER 296,296-1 4" 1-9/16" — — — — 153 4" 1-9/16" — — — — � 155 4" 1-9/16" 7-5/32" t/2" 1-1/4" — 157 4" 1-9/16" — 1/2" — 3-1/8" HU6BELL n m 1 . ._, . 5 i ,,; l }, ;I _ .,_ � � , 3 1-1/2" A N D 2-1'/8" D E E P --�-� �-�� -�. ,r: Application ��\ _ , ; Octagon boxes are used in �\�/� � -�` � �-� n ' the installation of ceiling or wall Y��0 , "'�� \J � lighting fixtures �"�� ,_�� 1 �" �� :''',:�� -- � ��. � ��; "�� _``.'`i Product Features � ' Fixture bar hanger allows box to � ''I be located anywhere along length �_� 325, 8325 � 165 i.;� . J�, I -. . � ' �,.� of bar .�1 �� ,�, ��: �° a'� o i'� � �� RACO° 325, 8325 box includes � )9!..� �1 ,��L; ;� ��J J 1 3/8" trade sized stud to J �� .., � ° accommodate fixture stem r�j � �`'�� Compliance 166 167 299 u� - File E195978 _ - - , . _. _, _ � 4"OCTAGON BOXES I I i ' I l� 3 t �,'_' � i _ , ; 4" OCTAGON BOX WITH BAR HANGER — 1-7/2" DEEP — DRAWN ,t o� WITH ARMORED CABLE/METAL CLAD/FLEX CLAMPS — 15.5 CUBIC INCHES , n� � V� KNOCKOUTS MAX. RECOMMENUED U° DESCRIPTION SIDES BOTTOM UPC SUPPORT LOADS 0 0�o o I � c CATALOG STD. BRACKET & BAR CEILING FAN FIXTURE a ^ � �� NUMBER SETBACK CABLE COND. COND. PK�' CODE (DYNAMIC) (STATIC) �� LBS. LBS. � P o 3/8"Stud,adj. _ _ a� o � 325 14-t/4"—22-U2" 4 2-1/2" 25 No 10' 3/8"Stud,adj. 8325 14-1/4"—22-1/2" 4 2 1/2" — 25 ui�ulil No 10' D E F 'UL Rated at 50 Ibs. 4" OCTAGON BOX — 2-1/8" DEEP — DRAWN WITH CONDUIT KO'S - 21.5 CUBIC INCHES KNOCKOUTS MAX. RECOMMENDED CATALOG DESCRIPTION SIDES BOTTOM STD. UPC SUPPORT LOADS BRACKET & BAR CEILING FAN FIXTURE NUMBEH SETBACK COND. COND. PK�' CODE (DYNAMIC) (STATIC) LBS. LBS. 165 — 4-1/2" 5-1/2" 50 — No 50 3-1/2" 166 — 4-3/4" 2-3�4�� 50 — No 50 2-1/2", 2-3/4" �67 — 2-3/4" 3-1/2" 50 Idiari No 50 4" OCTAGON BOX — 2-1l8" DEEP — DRAWN WITN NONMETALLIC SHEATHEO CABLE CLAMPS — 27.5 CUBIC INCHES KNOCKOUTS MAX. RECOMMENUED CATALOG DESCRIPTION SIDES BOTTOM STD. UPC SUPPORT LOADS BRACKET & BAR CEILING FAN FIXTURE NIJMBER SETBACK COND. CABLE COND. PK�' COUE (DYNAMIC) (STATIC) LBS. LBS. pgg — 4" 2-1/2" 1-1/2" 50 — No 50 'Packaged in a stackable, individual chipboard box suitable for shelf tlisplay DIMENSIONS CATALOG A g C D E F NUMBER 165 4" 2-1/8" — — — — 166 4" 2-1/8" — — — — 167 4" 2-1/8" — — — — 9 299 4" 2-1/8" — — HUBBELL . �, a . _ ._� -'r, i : ia � ,;. , >:, ; 2-i/8" DEEP Application ° I �= Octagon boxes are used in the � � __ - installation of ceiling or wall ° � �aa�\ , a Qo i� � ;�,- _ lighting fixtures �:.`� �v t� �y � � `� rr � -- -' j� Product Features '°�� . � a � � - RACO° offers a variety of labor � saving mounting brackets that 175 ,J ° 177 �.�___ i � _. . . . � _.� allow for easy positioning of box , � . .�,� : 1X L71 alon studs or oists �'"�laa r` � � �-��-•�'a-�-- '` 9 1 (� �.� lV �c� `a � � , See Box Selection section in the 9 ��% � ' o ' e' y � ' , 0 'i. front of this catalo g for com plete � � � � ��' description of bracket types and � features 176 294-1 294 Combination screw heads provide for faster installation = 1, i -I � - I i �J=_�� `�� i . -�� a' �• � � RACO�294, 294-1 ceiling --- ----- --- -_- _--__ ._____-. _ _-------- --- fan boxes have lock-washers t0 revent the hi h stren th, 4" OCTAGON BOX - 2-7/8" OEEP - DRAWN P 9 g WITH NONMETALLIC SHEATHED CABLE CLAMPS - 21.5 CUBIC INCHES hardened screws from loosening from vibration KNOCKOUTS MAX. RECOMMENDED �ESCRIPTION SIDES UPC SUPPORT LOADS COITI liance CATALOG BRACKET & BOTTOM STO. BAR CEILING FAN FIXTIIRE P NUMBER SETBACK CABLE COND. COND. PK�' CODE (DYNAMIC) (STATIC) u� - File E195978 LBS. LBS. 175 — 4 2-V2" 1-1/2" 50 lu��,lil No 50 177 TS brkt.,1/2" 4 1-1/2" 1-1/2" 25 — No 50 176 J brkt.,5/8" 4 2-1/2" 1-1/2" 25 ir��ul No 50 4" OGTA60N CEILING FAN AN� FI%TUNE BOX - 2-1/S" DEEP - OBAWN WITH NONMETALLIC SHEATHED CABIE CLAMPS - 27.5 CUBIC INCHES KNOCKOUTS MAX. RECOMMENDED DESCRIPTION UPC SUPPORT LOADS CATALOG BRACKET & SIDES STD. BAR CEILIN6 FAN FIXTURE NUMBER BOTTOM PKG. SETBACK CONU. CODE (DYNAMIC) (STATIC) CABLE COND. LBS. LBS. 294-1 FA brkt.,1/2" 2 2-1/2" 1-1/2" 10 — 35 75 294 FA brkt.,1/2" 2 2-1/2" 1-1/2" 10' mmiil 35 75 'Packaged in a stackable, chipboard box suitable for shelf display 4"OCTAGON BOXES DIMENSIONS � CATALOG A B C D E F � NUMBER — — — — 175 4" 2-1/8" 0 177 4" 2-1/8" 7-5/32" 1/2" 1-1/4" 0 0�' o o I ��' V�c 176 4" 2-t/8" — 1/2" — 3-1/8" ° � 294,294-1 4" 2-1/8" 5-1/2" 1/2" 2-1/4" — `C P B� o � 0 � 00 E F � HUBBELL y e� _ ' � ,ir� , � '�_ I � ,i_ J'`. .�. ':'� __ i t,i _^� 1 1�:-�'� . . .._ .�s._�.�._..�......�.....�<� .,. Applications = Covers are used to close an � � � � � � ,a outlet box � � �' m ; •1 Switches or receptacles may be � � �'�� installed into octagon boxes by ��;�`� using covers 729 or 731 ``'!��-i 722,8722,8722-5 724, 8724, 8724-5 729 731,8731-5 � - Raised covers are used for � � � mounting lighting fixtures ,_ _ _ _._ I - 5" Round closure plates are ° � \ designed for use in dry locations �� • i (:�� i o % for closure at unused ceiling � �' outlets � -�" --� — Product Features 727,732,737 5652-1 5653-1 5654-1 Rugged metallic construction -.-- _. . � - _ _ _ __ __.- � 5�� Round covers feature state- ' ' ' ' ' � i _ , ,' � � , I , -f _. ��: ,, ; _ , ___ __ _----- __ _ ____ _ - — -- ----_:---_ _�,. _ __ - of-the-art powder coat paint finish which provides a light texture finish a�� OCTAGON ANO ROUND COVERS and scratch resistance __ _____. _______ MAX. RECOMMENDED Compliances CATALOG DESCRIPTION CU. STD. UPC SUPPORT LOADS Op NUMBER IN. PKG. BAR CEILING FAN FIXTURE — File E195978 CODE (DYNAMIC) (STATIC) sp. — File LR-1082 (722, 729, 731� — LBS. LBS. 722 Flat, blank — 100 No No ROUND CLOSURE PLATES 8722 Flat, blank — 100 �or�d� No No CAT.N0.5652-1 CAT.N0.5653-1 8722-5 Flat, blank — 50` londl No No 724 Flat, 1/2" KO — 100 — No No 3/16'HOLES g�p4 Flat, 1/2" KO — 100 loe�tll No No 3/16HOLE � g7p4-5 Flat, 1/2" KO — 50' �eo�ul No No 2� 729 Flat, toggle switch — 50 lomm No No 731 Flat, duplex receptacle — 50 �u��ui No No + + g731-5 Flat, duplex receptacle — 50` �o'A�� No No ° 737 Raised 1/2", open, ears 2-3/4" O.C. 3.0 50 Iolml No 50 I 727 Raised 5/8", open, ears 2-3/4" O.C. 3.8 100 — No 50 � 5.,�,• � I�— s-va^ 732 Raised 1", open, ears 2-3/4" O.C. 6.5 25 — No 50 CAT.N0.5654-1 '5 Bundles of 10 aie^no�e 5" ROUND STEEL CLOSUflE PLATES CATALOG CoLOH DESCRIP710N PKG. STD. UPC NUMBER TYPE PKG. BAR CODE 5652-1 Off-white Screw & universal Shrink 10 u;Nm mount strap (2) 8 3 2 screws, direct � 5653-1 Off-white mount to fixture outlet box Shrink 10 il!imil 5-1/4" 5654-1 Off-white Fixture stud & universal Shrink 10 u:iam mount strap �� 9 /`. HUB9ELL _ �� .. ._.�. _. .... ._. ��-� �:, � , � ;-�• ; _ � ._ � __� _ 1-1/4" AND 1-1/2" DEEP Applications I � . �<-�� e� <-�L�- Boxes are installed in ceilings �, 0�l a �` `m i� i ' a(_' a o ;. ;;' or walls for lighting fixtures, �. o�mm `% �(�„o �) U „��m o �.i�{ switches or receptacles �a m�� ,� m( ; , ° °C �o ; T. : `, �� `/� � . U rj, - Square boxes are used where � _Vv � ,�o e � multiple conductor runs are split J` ° , into two or more directions to 185 190,8190 191,8191 bring power to a number of ; __ �� , o�-�•�� o �_ >e - �:�e electrical devices ��-m .r, ��, o-� � �, � �,J �`. U a , Drawn boxes are ideal for exposed �a ��'O �j ,��,�o(�a°�jj� �J , )oO �a �a ��e work applications � J°�_ � �; °�� '� i°�.� ��o `� v � � � �O � Product Features '`� -v� � � �� J �=-; � - Combination screw heads provide 192,8192 189,8189 181 204 for faster installation _ _. - Thru-the-wall box is designed for � � ' i " � � ' � 'i ; ' .-' '. 1 � , � shallow wall applications and --_ --- --- _. ----- _ ---- ------ ----- --_= allows for attachment of wall 4�� SQUARE - 1-1/4" �EEP - DRAWN plate to both faces of box WITH CONDUIT KO'S - 18.0 CUBIC INCHES DESCRIPTION KNOCKOUTS UPC � T{��° knockouts offer greater CATALOG gRACKET & SIDES BOTTOM ST�' BAR flexibility with RACO� patented NUMBER SETBACK COND. CONU. PK�' CODE combination 1/2" and 3/4" 185 — 10-i/2" 5-1/2" 50 ��::11�� knockout TKO° knockouts allow for 4" SQUARE - 1-1/2" DEEP - DRAWN design and installation flexibility WITH CONUUIT KO'S - 27.0 CUBIC INCHES DESCRIPTION KNOCKOUTS UPC CATALOG STD. Compliances BRACKET & SIUES BOTTOM BAR i u� - File E195978 NUMBER SETBACK COND. COND. PK�' CODE I � 190 — 12-1/2" 5-1/2" 50 All RACO�single gang, two aiso �z-iiz° a-vz° 5o ��,�� gang, 4" square, and single 19� — 8-3/4° i-vr�, 4-3/4° 50 — gang gangable U.L. listed steel 8191 — — — z5 °°f1° boxes are acceptable for use e-�i2�� _ 19z — 4-3/4" 3-1/2", 2-3/4" 50 in 2-hour fire rated walls. For additional information, consult 8192 — — — eo �m�� U.L. "Fire Resistance Directory" or the U.L. website at www.ul.com 4" SQUAHE - 1-1/2" DEEP - WELDED WITH CONDUIT KO'S - 21.0 CUBIC INCHES �� DESCRIPTION KNOCKOUTS UPC Per U.L. 514-A, suitable for use CATALOG gRACKET & SIUES BOTTOM STD. BAR without a bonding jumper in circuits NUMBER SETBACK COND. COND. PK�' CODE above or below 250 volts a-v2�� i 189 — 4-TKO" 3-1/2",2-TKO'9 50 — 4"SQUARE BOXES � 8189 50 ICi�iYl � 1 S1 — S-3/4" 1-1/2",4-3/4" 50 — a• �3-3/8" �l 4" SQUARE - THRU-THE-WALL BOX - 1-1/2" DEEP - DRAWN `I � " � WITH CONOUIT KO'S - 22.5 GUBIC INCHES � DESCRIPTION KNOCKOUTS UPC o � � CATALOG BRACKET & SIDES BOTTOM CU. STD. BAA (� NUMBER SETBACK COND. COND. �N. PKG. CODE m p o�o o m (( )) 204 — 8-t/2", 4-3/4" — 21 50 — � ° oo � � DIMENSIONS � #8-32TAP CATALOG A g � 2-HOLES N U M B E R 185 1-1/2" — — 190,8190 1-1/2" — — � 191,8191 1-1/2" — — 192,8192 1-1/2" 189, 8189 1-1/2" — — HUBBELL y _ _ �8� �-��2�� ,�. 204 1-1/2" — — - - 1 _ � 1 1"l�� ' �� , _. � , . ,� � ..� i { 1-1/2" DEEP __�..4..�..._ 1 �y Applications ° _ � •9. �,.c� � Boxes are installed in ceilings _ -��' , °"� �� n.�J'� : or walis for lighting fixtures, � �' -'��)°°� ��oo �1 � � switches or receptacles ° �,°;� �o � �C� �� ° �� a o(� � � Square boxes are used where _�"-��\' ��' �° m i multiple conductor runs are split ' '�� ° '�� into two or more directions to •�' � •o' m ��. - �'�� bring power to a number of 9• 1s7, ;,� 208,82os =:�--.° 193 0�� _ � � ,, electrical devices $197 ,°-,�J �1 ,"i` 0� ,., •�`oo P� o ° � ��o Product Features �`) � ° _�'`.!9 , °�% � - RACO° offers a variety of labor _��° �-�`_ ° �o_��v saving mounting brackets that � �: allow for easy positioning of box s� 196,8196 �m 199 227 BOX-LOC� along studs or joists � See Box Selection section in the �, : �,- : i � .��` I� ;� � - ;: ; ,, � , ; ,. front of this catalog for complete -- ---'- ---_ _ --- '_ _ ----_ -----.-: description of bracket types and q�� SQUARE BRACKETED BOXES - 1-1/2" DEEP - WELDED features WITH CONOUIT KO'S - 21.0 CUBIC INCHES BOX-LOC° (MS) Bracket Box is CATALOG DESCRIPTION KNOCKOUTS STp UPC BRACKET & SIDES BOTTOM BAR a snap to install. Place the bracket NUMBER SETBACK COND. COND. PK�' CODE on the open side of the stud first. � �g� FH, flush 6-1/2", 3 -TK03 3-1/2", 2 -TKO" 25 — Slots in the bracket engage the lip � 8197 FH, riusn s-vz^, 3-TKO� s-v2°, 2 -TKO'' 2a u�ma of the stud and actually crimp it as� Zoa w,riusn s-vz°, 3 -TKO� 3-1/2°, z -TKO� z5 — you press the bracket on the stud. � $zoa w,siusn s-ii2°, 3-TKO�° s-v2°, 2 -TKO'° za �u�� Barbed hooks dig into the flat side � 1g3 B, flush 6-1/2", 4-TKO'3 3-1/2", 2 -TKO� 25 — of the stud, quickly locking it � �g6 FM,flush 6-1/2", 3 -TKO'y 3-1/2", 2 -TKO" 25 — into place �i g�96 FM,flush 6-1/2", 3 -TKO'v 3 1/2", 2 -TKO" 25 Ii��uii1 ' T{��° knockouts offer greater 199 FM, flush 6-3/4" t-1/2", 4-3/4" 25 — flexibility with RACO� patented � ZZ� BOS�LOCm�rns� 6-�iz°, 3 -TKO�y s-vz°, 2 -TKOi9 z5 o-.uem combination 1/2" and 3/4" knockout - TKO° knockouts allow for DIMENSIONS design and installation flexibility NUMBER A B � ------------ _.----- —_ ---- Compliances is�,ais> >-v2�� -sia° a-sie�� u� - File E195978 2os,azoa 1-v2�� 6-13/16" 5-15/16° 193 1-1/2" 2" 6" � All RACO�single gang, two iss, siss �-v2° s �is° 4-3/8° gang, 4" square, and single 1g9 �-�i2�� s-�ia�� a-sis�� gang gangable U.L. listed steel zz� i-vr� a-5is° s-vr� boxes are acceptable for use in 2-hour fire rated walls. For a��S(IUARE 80XES additional information, consult � U.L. "Fire Resistance Directory" � "� or the U.L. website at www.ul.com 33/8' � Per U.L. 514-A, suitable for use �� A � without a bonding jumper in circuits °� o� � C above or below 250 volts - m o o�o o � � �° �e � C II #8-32 TAP LI 2'NOLES HUH6ELL . e� - , � i , ; -� �') i i. 1 � i - 1-1/2" DEEP ' Applications - �� „- ' �!` Boxes are installed in ceilings �� °'� � � ��'�y �/�, ' �� .� or walls for lighting fixtures, !��°°�o °�°� vo ° .L'J� �1 '� `, o a o ;,'�� switches or receptacles � d 1 0� �_ o a_ �• T _a ,,� � � �� _,�- ,f' � Square boxes are used where �� multiple conductor runs are split °o'' into two or more directi�ns to 213 0� 219 224 'a - ` ; bring power to a number of ' ;� � - electrical devices ��oo �e � o��o��o Product Features o � � ' ° � RACO° offers a variety of labor ^a� �� saving mounting brackets that � � allow for easy positioning of box �° 218,8218 229 BOX-LOC� along studs or joists See Box Selection section in the � � ; ;� �. i _ { _ , � front of this catalog for complete --------- - ---- _ _-- - __ _ __ -- ; description of bracket types and features 4" SQUAHE — 1-1/2" DEEP — WELDED WITH ARMONED CABLElMETAL CLAU/FLEX CLAMPS — 21.0 CUBIC INCHES ' BOX-LOC° (MS) Bracket Box UESCRIPTION KNOCKOUTS UPC is a sna to install. Place the CATALOG sTO. BRACKET & SIDES BOTTOM BAR P NUMBER SETBACK CABLE COND. CONU. PK�� CODE bracket on the open side of the stud first. Slots in the bracket �i 213 — 4 2 1�TKO9 �-v2" ao — engage the lip of the stud and 2_�i2�� actually crimp it as you press � 21s FH,ti�sn a i -TKO9 �-v2^ z5 — the bracket on the stud. Barbed 2-ii2��, hooks dig into the flat side of the � lla s,riusn a 1 -TKO� 1-u2° 25 — stud, quickly locking it in place � Zi$ FM, riusn 4 � ,/TKO� ��i2" 25 — Combination screw heads z_i�2��, provide for faster installation � azi s FM, tiusn a i _TKO� 1-�/2° 25 ��:mmi TKO° knockouts offer greater , 22y Box-�oc�� a 2-ii2��, i-v2° 25 u;�ami � (MS) flush 1 —TKO" flexibility with RACO'� patented combination 1/2" and 3/4�� knockout DIMENSIONS - TKO° knockouts allow for CATALOG A g c NUMBER design and installation flexibility 2i3 �_�i2�� — — — --- -___-- Compliances zis �-v2�� s-�is° a-sla° u� - File E195978 zi9 i-ii2�� -sia° 4-3/8° 224 1-1/2" 2" 6" , All RACO� single gang, two 229 i_ii2�� a-eia° s-vz° gang, 4" square, and single gang gangable U.L. listed steel a��SQUARE BOXES boxes are acceptable for use � in 2-hour fire rated walls. For ^ additional information, consult ��3-3/a' U.L. "Fire Resistance Directory" �� A � or the U.L. website at www.ul.com � n � Per U.L. 514-A, suitable for use o� o� v without a bonding jumper in circuits m o o�o o � � above or below 250 volts � ° � � C u NB-32TAP O2-HOLES HU6BELL g _ _/. �-: � � , ��" ' � _ j . . , _ -,_, ' i-1/2" DEEP - - Applications �a � � - . `. _ ; Boxes are installed in ceilings '� - '�; J � I or walls for li htin fixtures, alm o r� (l� � � �'' 9 9 ��a oo �° �oo � switches or receptacles �� ' ° � °_ � a � v .� �° �. ;. -� e � � `� � Square boxes are used where � � �• Ji multiple conductor runs are split � into two or more directions to 2�1,8211 0 0 220,8220 _ 225 �� bring power to a number of o �'�o;'. j�a J electrical devices �oo�� o��a �o Product Features °r�Q� � ° ' � 1 `,��✓ o � � RACO� offers a variety of labor - - � saving mounting brackets that �� allow for easy positioning of box 223 228 BOx-�OC� along studs or joists __� . . _ .. _. __ - _ i See Box Selection section in the ; - , �- � - ;`j � �: ; r, , � , _ , � _ ' � ; , front of this catalog for complete __'- --- '-- ---- ---- - -__. --_ --- __---------- - :_ ______._.; description of bracket types and features 4" SQUARE - 1-t/2" DEEP - WELDED WITH NONMETALLIC SHEATHED CABLE CLAMPS - 21.0 CUBIC INCHES " B�X-L�Ci° (MS) Bracket Box UESCRIPTION KNOCKOUTS UPC CATALOG STD. is a snap to install. Place the NUMBER BRACKET & SIUES BOTTOM PKG. BAR bracket on the open side of the SETBACK CABLE CONU. COND. CODE ' stud first. Slots in the bracket � 2>> — 4 2 1/TKO" �-�i2° ao — engage the lip of the stud and a-iiz��, actually crimp it as you press � 8211 — 4 2 -TKO° �-1i2° 5o ie11�'i the bracket on the stud. Barbed � Zzo FH,tiusn 4 1 1/TKO`-0 �-��z° 2a — hooks dig into the flat side of the stud, quickly locking it in place � s2zo FH, flush 4 � �/TKO° �-1i2" 25 'oe"�i i Combination screw heads z-v2��, _ Iprovide for faster installation � zz5 B,ffush 4 1 -TKO°� �-�ir� ze TKO° knockouts offer greater � 22s FM,tiush 4 1 1/TKO`� 1-�i2" 25 ioum flexibility with RACO'� patented sox-�ocy 2-u2��, combination 1/2" and � 228 (MS) flush 4 1 -TKO°� �-��2�� z5 �onu� 3/4" knockout TKO� knockouts allow for DIMENSIONS design and installation flexibility CATALOG ---__-——----_------- - A B C Compliances ` NUMBER zii,a2ii i-v2° — — u� - File E195978 220,a2zo i-v2° �-sia° 4-3/8° All RACO°single gang, two z25 �-�i2" 2" s�� gang, 4" square, and single 223 i-�/2" s-�ia° 4-3/8° gang gangable U.L. listed steel 228 �-1re" 4-5/8° 5-v2° boxes are acceptable for use in 2-hour fire rated walls. For a��SQUARE BOXES additional information, consult � � � 4�� U.L. "Fire Resistance Directory" 3-3/8" or the U.L. website at www.ul.com �I � A � � Per U.L. 514-A, suitable for use � without a bonding jumper in circuits �� o� �j above or below 250 volts = p� m oo�oo m= 1l 1) � � �P c o � e � d0-32 TAP 2-HOLES 9 / HUB6ELL J I ._ _ �°' `�� ', ' ' �; ' . . . _: _ 2-1/8" DEEP M�N Applications �=��;'� s° ,-� �� ? Boxes are installed in ceilings � �a, � I " �;ve �,00 ° �-' �;oo � or walls for lighting fixtures, '�� '� �° ` ' ��` �( °'�- � �;,- \ oC, � � � ;-, � o�,�, �� o�,,��e �'� : switches or receptacles U� � _ (�':� �_ (��` � � �'�� Square boxes are used where ``�"` —'-� ��'`� multiple conductor runs are split o, 232,8232 244 231 8231 �, 233,8233 NE`�'� 1 into two or more directions to � � � 1 _�C>�` . �� .".I C� ' bring power to a number of � - - �G j °G� �°` , - �°� � e a e electrical devices �,� ,��.(� �j° �(,C ,-�o - .'�� '� � �� I o Joo Product Features --�� _ �� )�C'�� .@ a v � � O O.yJ� , O� RACO° offers a variety of labor �° NE`�'�.��i"" ,\��J ,- saving mounting brackets that ,1 .�� allow for easy positioning of box � 235,8235 236 �'�, 237 238 along studs or joists 1�2" &3/4�� TKO� BOX-LOC° _ � See Box Selection section in the , � ; � � i �� ;', � � , _ , i front of this catalog for complete ---. _ --- --- -__- : __ ---- ; description of bracket types a�� SpUARE — 2-1/S" DEEP — WELDED and features WITH CONDUIT KO'S — 30.3 CUBIC INCHES ° BOX-LOC° (MS) Bracket Box CATALOG DESCRIPTION KNOCKOUTS STD. UPC BRACKET & SIDES BOTTOM BAR is a snap to install. Place the NUMBER SETBACK CONO. COND. PK�' CODE bracket on the open side of the �i 232 — 8-t/2��, a-rKO� s-ii2°, z-TKO° z5 — stud first. Slots in the bracket � gZ32 — 8-t/2��, 4-TKO�` 3-v2°, 2-rKOv 25 mm�ui engage the lip of the stud and 231 — 8-3/4° i-vz°, 4-3/4�� za — actually crimp it as you press the g231 — 8-3/4" 1-1/2", 4-3/4° z5 �o�a�m bracket on the stud. Barbed hooks 233 — 8-1° 3-vz°, 2-3/4° z5 — dig into the flat side of the stud, 8233 — 8-1° s-ii2°, 2-3/4�� 25 i�s�m quickly locking it in place � 235 rs, tiusn s-v2°, 3-TKO" s-ii2��, 2-TKO� 25 — Combination screw heads � 8235 TS, flush 6-1/2", 3-TKO" 3-1/2", 2-TKO° 25 ioieiiil provide for faster installation 236 FM, flush 6-3/4" 1-1l2", 4-3/4" 25 I�1,111 ' TK�° knockouts offer greater � 237 FM, flush 8-1/2", 4-TKO'` 3-1/2", 2-TKO� 25 iunm flexibility with RACO`� patented � 238 BOX-LOC" a-v2°, a-TKO� 3-vz°, 2-TKO° zs �o,u�� (MS) flush combination 1/2" and 3/4° knockout 4" SQUARE - 2-1/8" DEEP - DRAWN WITH CONDUIT KO'S - 30.3 CUBIC INCHES TKO° knockouts allow for desi n and instailation flexibilit DESCRIPTION KNOCKOUrs uPc J Y CATALOG gRACKET & SIUES BOTTOM STD. gAR __--___------ __________._--__---- Compliances NUMBER SETBACK COND. COND. PK�' CODE u� - File E195978 �i 244 — 8-1/2", 4-TKO 2-1/2", 2-3/4" 25 ib!�uil All RACO° single gang, two DIMENSIONS gang, 4" square, and single CATALOG gang gangable U.L. listed steel NUMBER a e c boxes are acceptable for use z3z,a2az 2-1/8�� — — in 2-hour fire rated walls. For z3i,azsi 2_iis�� — — additional information, consult 233, 8233 z-�is�� U.L. "Fire Resistance Directory" 235,8235 2-�ia�� 7-5/32�� a-5iis�� or the U.L. website at www.ul.com 236 2-1ia" 7-5/8" 4-3/8�� Per U.L. 514-A, suitable for use 238 2-�ia° 4-5/8° s-vz° without a bonding jumper in circuits Zaa 2-va° — — above or below 250 volts a��SQUARE BOXES � a• 3-3rE' �I � A 1 .� o� —� � � m oo�oo �e HLIBBELL �� Q � n v � d tl832 TAP 2-HOLES k- � �� r i I "'. I I � .. ._ , . �� 1-i/2" AND 2-i/8" DEEP, PLENUM BOXES - - - � Applications ,{ Plenum boxes are used in above- `�;1 ceiling applications where air-tight enclosures are required ;: ;;", <-�=,`= .�:�� i;:_'1,. � Square boxes are used where �, _ ,.� � ; „ multiple conductor runs are split �! � ;! �� - �� : , �� into two or more directions to �1 -'�; ;� �� 'L) � ' �;� bring power to a number of � % , �'� ��;�_., � _ � electrical devices V Product Features To maintain plenum seal, both RACO� 226 and 239 do not provide ground screw holes 226 239 762 Cover gasket is PVC foam material ___T— _ _ � _. _.____ _- _ _ � Compliance .��I I� -,= l , _ �� i ;�,' ;�.�{�.� , ! II'�i�� :1, , �` � � �� --- -- -- -- __- __ ,' _ . _ _ __ U� - File E195978 4" SQUAHE PLENUM — BOXES & COVER — 1-1/2" & 2-1/8" DEEP — DRAWN WITH CONDUIT KO'S CATALOG DESCRIPTION KNOCKOUTS CU. STD. UPC BRACKET & BAR NUMBER SETBACK SIDES BOTTOM �N. PKG. CODE 226 1-1/2" Deep 8-1/2" 3-t/2" 21.0 50 — 4-3/4" 2-3/4" 239 2-1/S" Deep 8-1/2" 3-1/2" 30.3 25 — 4-3/4" 2-3/4" Gasketed coverfor 762 4" square boxes — — — 50 — 4"SQUARE BOXES � DIMENSIONS �I!- ` CATALDG I 3-3f9' A 8 C NUMBER �� 226 1-1/2" — — � � 239 2-1/8" — — e� o� � m o a�o o � �° � � C II IB-]2 TAP U 2-HOLES I I � HLJBHELL A �, ` i �� r�y��i � . .� . _, �._� .- _ . ___ _. 2-i/8" DEEP I Applications �, � °� ' J �y,° = BOX@S 81'e IIlSt8��0C� IIl C@I�IIIgS OI" I��'� ��mo� � � � ��jma� o � � a/"�oe� � walls for lighting fixtures, switches �° a 1 � 0 7 ;T`� ' or receptacles � ' � i v o � ��'- � �`� -° =i Square boxes are used where , � multiple conductor runs are split � � into two or more directions to 242 _ 240, 8240 _ 241, 8241 ' bring power to a number of � � — electrical devices � �` �(�°°�9 a V, ��j ° NE� Product Features ° °� �� n, o� l� � �, �,' `�'` RACO� offers a variety of labor , saving mounting brackets that � � allow for easy positioning of box 243 248 along studs or joists BOX-LOC� ,� • See Box Selection section in the ,, i ` - �:, , i :� i � ! � �' �1 : I'- i front of this catalog for complete -- - - � - -- --- - !- - description of bracket types and features a�� SpUARE — 2-1/8�� DEEP WITH NONMETALLIC SHEATHED CABLE CLAMPS — 30.3 CUBIC INCHES � B�X-L�C�° (MS) Bracket Box DESCRIPTION KNOCKOUTS UPC is a snap to install. Place the CATALOG gRACKET & SIDES BOTTOM STD. BAfl bracket on the open side of the NUMBER SETBACK CABLE COND. COND. PK�� CODE stud first. Slots in the bracket � 242 — 4 2 �/TKoi 1-u2�� 25 — engage the lip of the stud and actuall crim it as ou ress the � 24a Ts, fiusn 4 2 ��2 ' i-v2° 25 — Y P Y P i -TKOx bracket on the stud. Barbed hooks 2_v2�� dig into the flat side of the stud, � $Zao rs, tiusn a i -TKO� �-vz° 25 i��am quickly locking it in place � = Combination screw heads provide a�� SQUAHE — 2-1/8�� DEEP for faster installation �N�TN ARMORED CABLE/METAL CLAO/FLEX CLAMPS — 30.3 CUBIC INCHES DESCRIPTION KNOCKOUTS UPC ° T{�� knockouts offer greater CATALOG gRACKET & SIDES BOTTOM STD. BAR flexibility with RACO� patented NUMBER SETBACK CABLE COND. COND. PK�� CODE combination 1/2" and � zai Ts, flush 4 2��2 ' � �-vz° 25 — 3/4" knockout 1 —TKO� TKO° knockouts allow for � e2a1 Ts, flush 4 1 1/TKO" �-1i2" 25 '��"' design and installation flexibility BOX-LOC� 2-1i2��, - -------------------------------�i 243 (MS) flush 4 1 —TKO« 1-1/2" 25 ��lil,l Compliances i 248 — 4 4-1/2", r 1-1/2" 25 iuoiiii : u� - File E195978 � 2 -TKo All RACO° single gang, two gang, 4" square, and single DIMENSIONS gang gangable U.L. listed steei CATALOG A B c NUMBER boxes are acceptable for use zaz z-1is�� — — in 2-hour fire rated walls. For zao, s2ao z-va° �-�i3r� a-5i�s° additional information, consult Z4� 82ai z-vs�� -5i3z�� 4-5/16�� U.L. "Fire Resistance Directory" 243 2-va° 4-5/8° 5-vz° or the U.L. website at www.ul.com Zas z-iie° — — � Per U.L. 514-A, suitable for use without a bonding jumper in circuits 4"SQUARE BOXES above or below 250 volts � � <• 3-3/8" �I I� " �I a� o� � C m oo�oo �e � ,.. �9 �° o � c HUHBELL . . " II IB-32TAP �� 2-HOLES �� !� j 1 � � _� a�:'.�1 1 ..� _n :r,';,�. — - - -- -� „�. Applications � ° Covers are used to close an / / � � �� outlet box `J -� � Raised device covers are used for o �' mounting switches or receptacles ;_;�� "�' �>� Product Feature 752,8752, 753,8753, 756-759, 767, _ ,:� � Angled mounting slots compensate 8752-5 8753-5 8756,8767 .-�; up to 12° for box misalignment v ;�-- I �� / ' Compliances I � u� — File E195978 � ' SP• — File LR-1082 ° � • 787,8787 768, 771, 773-775, 772 785-786 782,8768-8782 ; � . I—��j { '�j ,-� ; 's ;: � __ i . ' i .- 4" SQUAHE COVEHS MAX. RECOMMENUED UPC SUPPORT LOADS CATALOG DESCRIPTION CU. STO. gAR CEILING FAN FIXTURE NUMBER IN. PKG. CODE (DYNAMIC) (STATIC) LBS. LBS. 752 Flat, biank — 50 — No No 8752 Flat, blank — 50 o�.�i'�I No No 8752-5 Flat, blank — 50' fiomil No No 753 Flat, 1/2"KO in center — 50 — No No 8753 Flat, 1/2"KO in center — 50 a�'��i�l No No 8753-5 Flat, 1/2"KO in center — 50' ��i'i No No 767 Raised 1/2", open, ears 2-3/4" O.C. 3.0 25 — No 50 8767 Raised 1/2", open, ears 2-3/4" O.C. 3.0 25 n��ii No 50 756 Raised 5/8", open, ears 2-3/4" O.C. 4.0 100 — No 50 8756 Raised 5/8", open, ears 2-3/4" O.C. 4.0 100 �ii�i:i No 50 759 Raised 3/4", open, ears 2-3/4" O.C. 5.0 25 Biiulil No 50 757 Raised t", open, ears 2-3/4" O.C. 6.8 25 eamil No 50 758 Raised 1-1/4", open, ears 2-3/4" O.C. 8.5 25 — No 50 '5 Bundles of 10 4" SQUARE COMBINATION - DEVICE AND TILE COVERS - SINGLE DEVICE CATALOG DESCRIPTION CU. STD. UPC NUMBER IN. PKG. BAR CODE 787 Flat — 50 — 8787 Flat — 50 io�ul 777 flaised t/4" 1.5 100 — 8771 Raised 1/4" 1.5 25 mmmi 772 Raised 1/2", drawn 3.5 100 — 8772 Raised 1/2", drawn 3.5 50 iu�uilil 782 Raised 1/2", tile 3.5 25 — 8782 Raised 7/2", tile 3.5 25 iu'��iii 768 Raised 5/8" 4.5 50 — 8768 Raised 5/8" 4.5 50 wsilll 773 Raised 3/4" 5.5 5Q — 8773 Raised 3/4" 5.5 50 lu�ul 774 Raised 1" 7.5 25 �o�iiii 775 Raised 1-1/4" 9.5 25 — 8775 Raised 1-1/4" 9.5 25 ioNUi 785 Raised 1-t/2" 11.3 25 — � 786 Raised 2" 14.5 25 HUB9ELL, ... ..i_. _i __. ._.� _ _ �� , ' .�....._J..._�...__....,.,.�.v.....�.__«....3 , .. .. .� �_ _ �_, � _� i_-_�_ ! � ��.�.,l � Applications Covers are used to close an � ' outlet box Raised device covers are used for _ u a ° / _ - mounting switches or receptacies a o o ° - Product Feature � � Angled mounting slots compensate � � up to 12° for box misalignment o m m Low Voltage Partitions ° o � 9 Applications = Low voltage partitions may be added to conduit-type boxes to 777-7s1, 769, divide power from voice/data 797 s769-s7s1 7s5,796 7�$ � Must be used with raised covers - --- ---- ------ -- ------ Product Features � - = - -- - �-- __.___ --- ----- -------- --- a Partition divides 4" square boxes into two compartments 4" SQUARE COMBINATION DEVICE ANO TILE COVERS TWO DEVICE " Use with two-device covers which CATALOG DESCRIPTION CU. STD. UPC have a slot for the partition NUMBER IN. PKG. BAR CODE � Partition is scored, so it can be 791 Fiat - 5o ie'�� broken at the proper depth of box 77� Raised 1/4��,drawn s.o ao - 778 Raised 1/2",tlrawn 5.5 50 - and cover combination 8778 Raisetl 1/2",drawn 5.5 50 tlopi � Helpful hint: Assemble the box �ss Raised 5/8°,drawn �.s ao - with the partition in place before s7ss Raised 5/8°,drawn �.s 50 �o,�ei breaking off at the scored tab. This »9 Raised 3/4��,drawn s.s eo - will prevent you from breaking off s��s Raised 3/4",drawn s.a 50 �oom� more tab than needed �go Raisetl 1°,drawn i z.o ze �oa�� Compliances � �si Raisetl 1-1/4",drawn 15.0 25 - u� - File E195978 a�s� Raisetl 1-1/4°,drawn i 5.o z5 �c�,n� File LR-1082 795 Raised 1-1/2°,welded 15.5 25 - s�' 796 Raised 2",welded 20.5 25 - 4" SQUARE BOX LOW VOLTAGE PARTITIONS - FOR 1-1l2" 8 2-1/8" DEEP CATALOG pESCRIPTION STD. UPC NUMBER PKG. BAR COUE For 1-1/2"Deep Box and 2-Device Raised Cover': 706 1/4", 1/2", 3/4"ar 1" (777, 778, 8778, 779, 8779, 780) 25 - 708 1-1/4", 1-1/2", or 2" (781, 8781, 795, 796) 25 - For 2-1/8"Deep 8ox and 2-Device Raisetl Cover:' 707 1/4", 1/2", 3/4"or 1" (777, 778, 8778, 779, 8779, 780) 25 - 709 1-1/4", 1-1/2", or 2" (781, 8781, 795, 796) 25 - ' Boxes, covers, and partitions must be ordered separately ' For 1-1/2" deep box with 5/8" cover, partition not available " For 2-1/8" deep box with 5/8" cover, use#708 partition .lAw+ �� HU69ELL _. . -- . ,..:,�.. �---,-�-T-.=.�m ,�� '; ;�� ;_ � , ;� . .33 ._rw��?-,__.a � ._ -.:. , _� _ __ .��:i ( „�- Application _ e �-� �Q ` �--= e ': �— e � ° .,�%° � Exposed work covers are used to e;�� ° \I° � a' =%�� 0.�-1'(�' 0 ° `° o (� °; support switches or receptacles � � � I °' �� ¢ � � r� independent of the box (box must � � � � m a � � �� , m � C,il2 , still be used) '�� a� _-" `'� ° '� =-�� ¢ Q , m � m _ - Product Features 800 803 902 907 801, 906 - For easy mounting, RACO� $11�$12 900 series covers include ,�� `�;, ,�� :� ;�'e ��,�;� additional hardware for mountin ,0 � e 'm '`� �o � 9 I � �, the receptacle(s) % � � ' I �� I � ' R�1�.�� 9�� 581"12S COV21"S f7100t e. � �m � � � � ¢- �� o o �� m NEC ^rticle 410-56(I) for mounting � � �� I� � ,� 'v e o the device with more than 810 813 gpg L 814 915 809 one screw = Hardware and cover are packed , , _, ' in a poly-bag with printed catalog _.._._. -_ - -- -_ _- --- __-__- _— __ number, compiiances and installa- tion instructions 4" SQUARE SURFACE COVERS — RAISED 1/2" - Heipful Hint: Remove a portion of CATALOG UESCRIPTION CU. STD. UPC the GFCI receptacle ear to mount NUMBER IN. PKG. BAR COUE , 800 1 Toggle switch, crushetl corners 5.8 25 m�mlil device to 4' square cover Compliances 902 1 Dap9ex rececptacle, crushed corners 5.8 26 1¢�mrl u� - File E195978 so� 2 oupiex receptacles �.s 2s ia�ii SA• - File LR-1082 $o� 1 Receptacle i.aos° dia. 7.3 �o �� 811 30A locking 1.719" dia. 7.3 10 IBmNI 812 20A Receptacle 1.594" dia. 7.3 10 ��d�!i 906 1 Dup. & 1 toggle switch 7.3 10 �e'�ii�ii 810 30-50A Feceptacle 2.141" dia. 7.3 10 io:�i�'i 813 30-60A Receptacle 2.625" dia. 7.3 10 istoi'i 808 1 GFCI 7.3 10 �o��i� 814 1 GFCI & 1 toggle switch 7.3 10 le:mlil 915 1 GFCI & 1 duplex receptacle 7.3 10 rz,ml�1 809 2 GFCI 7.3 10 �o'��i� I w � HUBHELL .. _�. _ _ __—� -� � : _� �.� �W..___. 1-1/2" DEEP Application �. Extension rings provide a means for adding additional cubic capacity or as an outlet box for surface conduit _ =� ��° �� -�>z Product Feature �;'d' -� f��a� ^ �� 1J ,\ ' 0 �� - `:° �,I ^I' �, �°e c �. Combination screw heads rovide I ' , , �� ' ° p �e � �. 0 0 _.___ for faster installation �; _ ;`j �; �� o � ;1° � �� -�� Compliance - u� - File E195978 4"SQUARE EXTENSION RINGS � 201, 8201 202 203, 8203 187 � <• 3-3/B' ' _ ._ '. .__ . - __..- � r� �� .�..- .. �I . .. ; : . -. -_ _J I � " � _- - ' ` __ "- ____ _ __ '___ —__ __ r 4" SQUARE EXTENSION RINGS — 1-1/2" DEEP — DRAWN e� o� I � WITH CONDUIT KO'S — 22.5 CUBIC INCHES m o o�o o " � CATALOG DESCflIPTION KNOCKOUTS STD. UPC �� e � � NUMBER BRACKET & SIDES BOTTOM pK�, BAR SETBACK COND. COND. CODE 201 — 12-1/2" — 50 — � P-HOLES BZO� - �Z-��Z�� - Z�J ILIII�iI 202 — 8-3/4" — 50 — 203 — 8-1/2", 4-3/4" — 50 — 8203 — 8-1/2", 4-3/4" — 50 �o��'� 187 Attaches to switch boxes 8-1/2", 4-3/4" — 50 IBlill DIMENSIONS CATALOG A 8 C NUMBER 201, 8201 1-1/2" — — 202 1-1/2" — — 203, 8203 1-1/2" — — 187 1-1/2" — — .,�► i HU6BELL m < _. . _ _ ,� L '-i � ; . i ' , a � 1-i/2" AND 2-1/8" DEEP — - -----� � � Applications ' c��=e c��--�� c�o` � � = Boxes are used for a wide variety ,; � ' a�J �l1 ,� �. J —1 o J �� J "0 �I � ¢ �j of industrial applications where �,o ��,� ��' �l, ' � �,e � 1, ' '�° ,� ;,,°� ';� ° � larger- sized conductors or wiring �' ��i��a `,� `'' `-' �` °� •�; ` � a � '� �>. „'' � devices are needed and more � "�;� I ��L�J v ��;=� � � _"' �! volume is required - - 245 246 247 0 257,8257 - Drawn boxes are ideal for exposed •a . G�_ E.N '-I' work applications (surface � `,� �, mounted wiring) ��=_= ��<� o�� -' � p� „��`^-. - , -- �� o ,l� i� p o -` �� , ��a ^(��°°''j')° o °,.�,;° ; _ PPOC�UCt F@8tU1'eS �� \ a��,°� '� � � '�.��n' .V� ° _ �,��II��° � o ' i�� ' = RACO`�offers a variety of labor �, , � � � '`"_ � ° °, �; �� saving mounting brackets that J`J � --�� ° c � ° ` allow for easy positioning of box ,� e m along studs or joists 258 259 255,8265 254 266 BOX-LOC � See Box Selection section in the - i - front of this catalog for complete - --— - --- - ---- -- ---- - - -- J description of bracket types and features 4-11/16" SQUARE BOXES - 1-1l2" OEEP - DRAWN WITH CONDUIT KO'S - 29.5 CUBIC INCHES Combination screw heads DESCRIPTION KNOCKOUTS UPC rovide for faster installation CATALOG STD. P NUMBER BRACKET & SIDES BOTTOM PK� BAR SETBACK COND. COND. CODE � TKO� knockouts offer greater 245 — 12-1/2" 3-1/2", 2-3/4" 25 — flexibility with RACO° patented 246 — 10-3/4" 3-7/2", 2-3/4" 25 — combination 1/2" and 247 — 8-1/Z",4-3/4" 3-1/2",2-3/4" zs — 3/4" knockout TKO° knockouts allow for q-�1/�6" SQUARE BORES - 2-1/8" DEEP - WELDED design and installation flexibility WITH CONDUIT KO'S - 42.0 CUBIC INCHES DESCRIPTION KNOCKOUTS UPC Compliance CATALOG gRACKET & SIDES BOTTOM STD. BAR > u� - File E195978 NuMSER SETBACK COND. COND. PKG' CODE 1-1/2", 2-3/4", � 257 — 2-1/2", 10-TKQ`� 2-TKO 25 — � Per U.L. 514-A, suitable for � 8257 — 2-1/2", 10-TK031-1/2"�2-3/4", Z5 icoml use without a bonding jumper in � 2-TK0 circuits above or below 250 volts Y5g — 8-1" s-i�z°, 2-3/4° zs — 259 — 6-11/4" 3-1/2", 2-3/4" 25 — 265 — 4-3/4", 4-1" 3-1/2", 2-3/4" 25 — 8265 — 4-3/4", 4-1" 3-1/2", 2-3/4" 25 Io�Biul �i 254 FM hrkt. 2-1/2", 7-TKO° 2_TKO'2 3�4 25 imaim � 266 BOX-LOC' 2-1/8",� 1-1/2'32-3/4", 25 IG�li�l � MS flush 10-TKO 2-TKO 4-11/16"S�UARE BOXES DIMENSIONS � CATALOG A B � � a-nne� NUMBER — — 2-3/d' � A � 245 1-1/2" — — � 246 1-1/2" 0 0 � � 247 1-1/2" — — (`� o �' _ 257, 8257 2-1/8" — — �J n 258 2-1/8" m oo�oo � _ v — — � o � ° ^ 259 2-1/8" — — � �J 265, 8265 2-1/8" � � 254 2-1/8" 7-5/8" 5-1/16" AB-32 TAP Z 66 2'��$�� 2-HOLES 9 HUHBELI __.. __ ,.._. __ e z,j ' �'_� �� _ , - �] - - -- 1-1/2" AND 2-1/8" DEEP Applications =��'��'� ;��"�`�v � � � Extension rings provide �� ° o e '�° �� ' e l� ° %, _ a means for adding additional �-'' ��; �;', � °, �� cubic capacity or as an outlet �i' - �CS� �-' �;'-:�. - box for surface conduit Covers are used to close 250 262 832,8832 833,8833-5 an outlet box - � __ Raised device covers are used for � �, , , mounting switches or receptacles m Product Feature Angled mounting siots compensate o ' up to 12°for box misalignment Compliances 829, 835 837-839, 842-843 898-899 u� - File E195978 - :_ � : _ . , _ _ _ , SP• - File LR-1082 _ . ,_ - -` 4-11/16" SQUARE EXTENSION - 1-1/2" DEEP - DRAWN c WITH CONDUIT KO'S - 29.5 CUBIG INCHES � 411/16' z-aia� CATALOG DESCRIPTION KNOCKOUTS STD UPC NUMBER BRACKET & SIDES BOTTOM pK�, BAR � " � SETBACK COND. COND. CODE I � 250 — 8-1/2". 4-3/4" — 25 — � o � 1 � ^ � 4-11/16" SQUARE EXTENSION - 2-1/8" UEEP - �RAWN m °°L�� ` WITH CONDUIT KO'S - 43.0 CUBIC INCHES � � p CATALOG DESCRIPTION KNOCKOUTS STD UPC o �„ � NUMBER BRACKET & SIDES BOTTOM pK�. BAR � SETBACK COND. COND. CODE � k8�32TAP 262 — 8-1/2". 4-3/4„ 25 Itailii 2-HOLES 4-11/16" SQUARE COVERS MAX. RECOMMENDED CATALOG CU. STD. UPC SUPPORT LOADS DESCRIPTION BAR CEILING FAN FIXTURE NUMBER IN. PKG. CODE (DYNAMIC) (STATIC) LBS. LBS. 832 Flat, blank — 50 — No No 8832 Flat, blank — 50 �� No No 833 Flat, 1/2"KO centered — 50 loann No No 829 Raised 1/2", open, ears 2-3/4" O.C. 3.0 25 — No 50 835 Raised 5/8", open, ears 2-3/4" O.C. 4.0 25 — No 50 8833-5 Flat, 1/2"KO centered — 50' ��I�I No No '5 Bundles of 10 4-11/76" SQUARE COMBINATION DEVICE AND TILE COVERS - SINGLE UEVICE CATALOG DESCRIPTION CU. STD. UPC NUMBER IN. PKG. BAR CODE 837 Raised 1/2" 3.5 25 — 843 Raised 5/8" 4.5 25 — 838 Raised 3/4" 5.5 25 — 839 Raised 1" 7.5 25 — 842 Raised 1-1/4" 9.5 25 — 898 Raised 1-1/2" 11.0 20 — 899 Raised 2" 16.0 20 — OIMENSIONS CATALOG A B C NUMBER HUBBELL ?SO �-�I2�� - - 262 2-1/8" — — _� — ,� i i � ' ' '?, , .. _ ' _�. _, .. -. ._. ..___�__I I i � � r Applications a , _- �� .� z,_ $-, � �� —� ''' Raised device covers are for � ;, I �'� �� mounting switches or receptacles � ' �`,�� _ ��' � Exposed work covers are used to o ' �'� � � m �� _ � ;=�'i support switches or receptacles � independent of the box 818-820, 8s5 s7oRAC 972 979 887 �', 840,841 !_3 Product Features RACO°900 series covers ,, .o , „�', .: �, ; 0�m., ,� >�,'`� ---� meet NEC Articie 410-56(f) for ' ,,,� � � ' ° � � mounting the device by more d than one screw m ' D �� `-uY m m �> ea = R^Ci�� SCI"ICS C�vers include !' � � ' � � �i� �' ' la a o 2 � additional hardware needed for ggg 87g 856 s57 85s 959 mounting the device(s) = Hardware and cover are packed _ in a poly-bag printed with catalog --- _ --_ � -�� ---=. :_ -- —._— __ number, compliances and installation instructions 4-17/16" SQUARE COMBINATION DEVICE AND TILE COVERS - TWO OEVICE CATALOG DESCRIPTION CU. STD. UPC Covers are availabie for mounting NUMBER IN. PKG. BAR CODE one or two devices sai Raised 1/2° a.5 ze G��o�� Compliances a�s Raised 5/S�� .s 25 — u� — File E195978 sao Raised 3/4° e.e 2e = 819 Raised 1" 12.0 25 SP• — File LR-1082 eZO Raised 1-1/4° ia.o 25 — 885 Raised 1-1/2" 15.5 20 — 4-11/16" SQUARE SURFACE COVERS - RAISE� 1/2" - 10.3 CUBIC INCHES CATALOG STD. UPC NUMBER DESCRIPTION PKG. BAR CODE 870RAC 1 Toggle switch 10 ¢�Elu 972 1 Duplex receptacle 10 ��il 979 2 Duplex receptacles 10 ¢��[ul 887 20A Receptacle 1.594" dia. 10 e�ui 888 30-60A Receptacle 2.625" dia. 10 �� 878 30-50A Receptacle 2.141" dia. 10 ��ii 856 1 Decorator dev. or GFCI 10 ��i 857 2 Decorator dev. or GFCI 10 ¢a[ul 858 1 Toggle & 1 GFCI 10 [u[til 959 1 Duplex & 1 GFCI 10 ��i� 4-11/i6" SQUARE BOX LOW VOLTAGE PARTITIONS - FOR 1-1/2" & 2-1/8" DEEP CATALOG STD. UPC DESCRIPTION NUMBER PKG. BAR CODE For 1-1/2"tleep box and 2-device ralsed cover. 706 1/2", 3/4"or 1" (841, 840, 819) 25 — 708 1-1/4"or 1-1/2" (820, 885) 25 — For 2-1/8"deep box antl 2-device raised cover:' 707 1/2", 3/4"or 1" (841, 840, 819) 25 — 709 1-1/4"or 1-1/2"(820, 885) 25 — ' Boxes, covers antl partitions must be ordered separatery ' For 2-1/8" deep box with 5/8" cover, use #708 partition ' Partitions are useable, but not UL listed in 4-11/16" sq. box HUBBELL � � : �'1 _, , - ---�- �-----�-�--. - 1-1/2" A N D 1-7/8" D E E P APplications -� �-> �c-- � ` Handy Boxes, also called utility �' -m�`�� ^� aJ� �� ,m' _ boxes, are used for convenience �! e '�� ° a '�� L� -a'� ` outlets, switch boxes or small �� 1 � ° p p� ;'� �', ',� - - junction boxes -- �� • They are popular for exposed 650,s65o 655 sso,ssso work applications (surface -- mounted wiring) �-� a ��=� � �, , '� > The NEC requires that surface- �, ��,,� � m � ,Q,� ;a�� mounted wiring be enclosed �, Q', � /� '° � -� `� r� with a protective covering such �, , �',� L� `� � .,� as EMT conduit ��:- �� ° ` � Product Features 611 663,8663 662 661 • RACO�offers a variety of labor _________ ___�_,_, saving mounting brackets that - , i�=-� - - � - -� , -- allow for easy positioning of box -'-- --'- �-- — ' - _ _:_-_._�, along studs or joists 4" z 2" HANDY BOXES - 1-1/2" DEEP - WELUED � See Box Selection section in the WITH CONDUIT KO'S - 11.5 CUBIC INCHES front of this catalog for complete CATALOG DESCRIPTION KNOCKOUTS STD. UPC description of bracket types NuMSeR BRACKET & PK� BAR and features SETBACK SIOES ENDS BOTTOM CODE 650 — 6-1/2" 2-1/2" 3-1/2" 50 — Compliances 8650 — 6-1/2" 2-1/2" 3-1/2" 50 n'a!m u� - File E195978 655 B hrki.. 1/4" 3-1/2" 2-1/2" 3-1/2" 5D — gp• - File LR-1082 (611 only) 4" x 2" HANDY BOXES - 1-7/8" UEEP - DRAWN All RACO� single gang, two WITH COHDUIT KO'S - 73.0 CUBIC INCHES gang, 4�� square, and single CATALOG DESCRIPTION KNOCKOUTS STD. UPC NUMBER BRACKET & PK� BAR gang gangable U.L. listed steel SETBACK SIDES ENDS BOTTOM CODE boxes are acceptable for use 660 — 6-1/2�� 2-v2�� s-v2�� o — in 2-hour fire rated walls. For 8660 — 6-1/2�� 2-v2° 3-ii2° 5o mmr� additional information, consult sii Ground screw incl. 6-1/2° 2-�iz�� s-v2° so — U.L. "Fire Resistance Directory" 663 — 4-3/4�� z-sia�� z-sia�� 50 — or the U.L. website at www.ul.com 8663 — 4-3/4�� z-sia° z-sia° 5o a�ar� 662 TS brkt., 1/2" 3-V2" 2-1/2" 3-1/2" 50 [B¢lu 661 A brkt., 5/8" 3-1/2" 2-1/2" 3-1/2" 50 �aPi STEEL HANDY BOXES DIMENSIONS c CATALOG A B � NUMBER � A i 650,8650 1-1/2" — — 0 655 1-1/2" — — o f � � 660,8660 1-7/8" — — m �o 0 0 ( ) m < n 611 1-7/8" — — �v �J 663, 8663 1-7/8" — — � � �j 662 1-7/8" 7" 2-3/S" �I 661 1-7/8" 6-7/16" 2-11/32„ � -#6-32 TAP 2-HOLES 2.1/8' � � HUBBELL � �� — - -; , . , _ � ' -= 'l � , - — - _ , , ' 1-1/2", 1-7/8" AND 2-1/8" DEEP -- ----- .-- ,-� `� '' o �';;� Applications � �° �� 0� ��' ) °' �,� �':� � •i� � � I��;�-) �� Handy Boxes, also called utility �� -a'� � �° ° J ,l 'I J� �� boxes, are used for convenience �' � '� l) '� '� �l. ' _ �;� -; outtets, switch boxes or small � � ' junction boxes � � , r , � = They are popular for exposed 67oRac,ss7o 67a 678 s7t -', work applications (surface- � �.,, �° % mounted wiring) `; °',� ;,� ° � � ' a � The NEC requires that surface- �; � L' �� ;I m � � �� I : ��'� �.� � mounted wiring be enclosed �' � _� with a protective covering such �'� � �� _ �' ''�� as EMT conduit - Extension rings provide a 653 665 sa0 s8o means for adding additional cubic capacity or as an outlet - '- - box for surface conduit - " ," _ ' -— , — -�- �-- _� _: � , - ----- Product Features 4" x 2" HANDY BOXES - 2-1/8" �EEP - WELOEU ° f3AC�� oifers a variety of labor WITH CONDUIT KO'S - 16.5 CUBIC INCHES saving mounting brackets that CATALOG DESCRIPTION KNOCKOUTS STD. UPC allow for easy positioning of box NUMBER BRACKET & PK� BAR along studs or joists SETBACK SIDES ENDS BOTTOM CODE 670RAC — 6-1/2" 2-1/2" 3-1/2" 50 — See Box Selection section in the ss�o — s-iiz° z-vr� s-vz° ao o�m�� front of this catalog for complete 674 — 4-3/4�� z-sia° 2-3/4° 5o u�� description of bracket types s�a TS brkt., vz° s-vz° 2-1i2° 3-v2° 50 �m�:� and features s�i A brkt., 5/8° s_iiz�� z-vz� s-iiz�� 50 o�a�.� Compliances U� - File E195978 4" x 2" HANDY BOX EXTENSION - 1-1/2" DEEP - WELDEO WITH CONDUIT KO'S - 11.5 CUBIC INCHES /�� f�/�C�°single gang, tW0 CATALOG DESCRIPTION KNOCKOUTS STD. UPC NUMBER BRACKET & PKG. BAR g811g, 4�� square, and single SETBACK SIDES ENDS BOTTOM CODE gang gangable U.L listed steel 653 — 6-1/2° z-uz° — 25 ��m�� boxes are acceptable for use in 2-hour fire rated walls. For q�� x 2" HANDY 80X EXTENSION - 1-7/8" DEEP - DRAWN additional information, C011SU�t �N�TH CONDUIT KO'S - 13.0 CUBIC INGHES U.L. "Fire Resistance Directory" CATALOG DESCRIPTION KNOCKOUTS sTO. uPc NUMBEH BRACKET & PK� BAR or the U.L. website at www.ul.com SETBACK SIDES ENDS BOTTOM CODE 665 — 6-1/2" 2-1/2" — 50 ��a'�i� STEEI HANDY BOXES � 3-3/4" x 1-9/76" INDUSTRIAL HANDY BDX & COVER - 1-1/2" DEEP - DRAWN WITH CONDUIT KO'S - 7.3 CUBIC INCHES � A -. DESCRIPTION UPC CATALOG gRACKET & KNOCKOUTS STO. gAR 0 � � NUMBER SETBACK SIDES ENDS BOTTOM PKG� CODE 0 � 640 6-1/2" 2-1/2" 3-1/2" 50 m �o 0 0 � m < n 880 Blank cover& captive serews — 50 — �� OIMENSIONS � � CATALOG A B � NUMBER � -X6-32 TAP - - 2-HOLES 670� 86�� 2'��8" z-ve° 674 2-1/8" 678 2-1/8" 7" 2-3/8" 671 2-1/8" 7" 2-3/8" 653 1-1/2" — — 665 1-7/8" — — HUB6ELL � � _ � -�, : �-: � _ ..��._u...�._,�y.:� _ ,� . :._ _ _ �� Applications ,,, - Handy Box covers are used � �� to close a Handy Box �J - - Covers also may be used as � = single-gang wall plates - Product Features 860 861 865 _ = RACO'� Handy Box covers are _ designed to match the contours � � of the box � � Cover corners are rounded � ,� = All covers have captive screws < Handy Box covers are Ssa 863,867 2-5/16" x 4-3/16" Compliances � , --�- _ - -- - - - — -- = U� - File E195978 (Cat. #861 - -- -- - - -- - --- -�- --------' not UL Listed) File LR-1082 4" x 2" HANDY BOX COVERS — 2-5/i6" WIOE x 4-3/76" LENGTH SP. CATALOG STD. UPC NUMBER DESCRIPTION pKG. BAR CODE 860 Blank 25 �'�iil 861 1/2" KO centered 25 Italil 865 Toggle switch 25 a311ii 864 Duplex receptacle 25 u'�� 863 Single receptacle 1.406" tlia. 25 malil 867 20A Receptacle 1.594" dia. 25 Itullii � I i I i /�. I i HUB6ELL _ �„ -- �, � � � ' � _ , � - - - - - SINGLE-GANG - 1-1/2" AND 2" DEEP Application � , Switch boxes are used to house "J a � wiring devices such as switches a -�o � ° - o or outlets , �'' � T ^' - Product Features - � > o = Gangable switch boxes offer the � �� , � " ��, � ° , ° , option of constructing a box to ;'� � o _ ' hold two or more devices `'' ° a0o ° a10 Plaster ears allow box to be used L� � ;� e a in °old work° applications �, e D Compliances �o ° o o � � u� - File E195978 420, 8420 445 All RACO�single gang, two -- -- -- --- - -- ------ --- gang, 4" square, and single -- ' - - -.- ., ------- � gang gangable U.L. listed steel __-_ - __- _ _- ____- ____ _ _ _�_ --.— __- � boxes are acceptable for use in 2-hour fire rated walls. For 3" x 2" SWITCH BOX - 1-1/2" DEEP - GANGABLE additional information, COflSU�t W�TH CONDUIT KO'S - 7.5 CUBIC INCHES U.L. "Fire Resistance Directory" CATALOG DESCRIPTION KNOCKOUrs sro. uPc NUMBER BRACKET & PKG gpR or the U.L. website at www.ul.com SETBACK SIDES ENDS BOTTOM CODE 400 Ears — 2-1/2" 1-1/2" 20 ��i��i'i 3" x 2" SWITCH BOX - 1-1/2" DEEP - NONGANGABLE WITH NONMETALLIC SHEATHED CABLE CLAMPS - 7.5 CUBIC INCHES CATALOG DESCRIPTION KNOCKOUTS STD. UPC NUMBER BRACKET & SIUES ENDS BOTTOM PK� BAR SETBACK COND. CABLE COND. COND CODE 410 Ears — 4 — — 50 oonnl 3" x 2" SWITCH BOX - 2" DEEP - GANGABLE WITH CONDUIT KO'S - 10.0 CUBIC INCHES CATALOG DESCRIPTION KNOCKOUTS STD. UPC NUMBER BRACKET & PK� BAR SETBACK SIDES ENDS BOTTOM CODE 420 Ears 4-1/2" 2-1/2" 2-1/2" 50 — 8420 Ears 4-t/2" 2-1/2" 2-1/2" 50 ttuoul 3" x 2" SWITCH 80X - 2" DEEP - GANGABLE WITH NONMETALLIC SHEATHEO CABLE CLAMPS - 10.0 CUBIC INCHES CATALOG DESCRIPTION KNOCKOUTS STD. UPC NUMBER BRACKET & SIDES ENDS BOTTOM pK�, BAR SETBACK COND. CABLE COND. CONU CODE 445 Ears — 4 — 1-1l2" 50 — STEEL SWITCH BOXES OIMENSIONS 2' � q CATALOG A NUMBER 0 0 400 1-1/2" 0 C ,� � � 410 1-1/2" 420, 8420 2" � �, m P 445 2" C � � � 0 0� „ HUBBELL ._.,.. _. .r.-:e� _ � . ' _- - , ' ,a � .7 SINGLE-GANG - 2", 2-1/8" AND 2-1/4" DEEP - M\N Application •,.;�t�;-o� so r , , ` � � ,' o Switch boxes are used to house i � L� li�:� �`� �1� 'f I � o - wiring devices such as switches �O �' ,. � , , , ; or outlets ?��,o �� _ �' —.J 1 a+ . o Product Features � ' o• `-' � _ = Gangable boxes offer the option 3 �'`°�'° '��:,__f{� o ° ' � of constructing a box to hold 440 °-- 513 °`,a , ° 471, 8471 two or more devices ° ' Beveled corner boxes are 4'� °�' �>� � designed to prevent the clamp � �- m .e - screws from protruding into ° Q �� back wall �� e � � � 0 = Piaster ears allow box to be used 473 487 in "old work" aPPlications --_--------- ------------------__---------- Compliances . - __ ,_ _. �_ ,- .: ---_.:� — __-'-- ---- _ _ :-_____ --- u� - File E195978 (Cat. #513 -� - - - -� not UL Listed) 3" x 2" SWITCH BOX – 2" OEEP – GANGABLE WITH ARMOREO CABLE/METAL CLAO/FLEX CLAMPS – 10.0 CUBIG INCHES All RACO�single gang, two afl 4�� s uare, and sin �A CATALOG OESCRIPTION KNOCKOUTS STD. UPC g g' a g NUMBER BRACKET & SIOE ENDS BOTTOM PK� BAR gang gangable U.L. listed steel SETBACK COND. CABLE COND. COND CODE boxes are acceptabie for use aao Ears — 4 — 1-1/2�� eo - in 2-hour fire rated walls. For additional information, COf1SU�t 3" X 2" SWITCH BOX — 2-1/8" DEEP '— NONGANGABLE — °SNAP IN CLIP" U.L. ��Fire Resistance Directory�� "OLD WORK" WITH CONDUIT KO'S — 11.0 CUBIC INCHES or the U.L. website at www.ul.com CATALOG DESCRIPTION KNOCKOUTS STD. UPC NUMBER BRACKET & SIDES ENDS BOTTOM PK�• BAR SETBACK CODE STEEL SWITCH BOXES 513 ��d Work With Snap In Z_1/2" 1-1/2" 2-1/2" 24 t�mPl � z° � n Clips And Ears o 0 3" X 2" SWITCH BOXES – 2-1/4" DEEP – GANGABLE – BEVELED CORNERS 0 WITH NONMETALLIC SNEATHEU CABLE CLAMPS – 10.5 CUBIC INCHES C � � OESCRIPTION KNOCKOUTS CATALOG STD. UPC �` � m P NUMBER BRACKET & SIUE ENDS BOTTOM PK� BAR v SETBACK COND. CABLE COND. COND CODE C � � � 471 Ears = 4 = 1-1/2" 50 — 8471 Ears 4 1-1/2" 50 m�� o � o� 473 Level humps — 4 2-1/2" 1-1/2" 20 Nal!I 487 Old work, Griptite — 4 — 1-1/2" 20 a¢i:� OIMENSIONS CATALOG A NUMBER 440 2" 471, 8471 2-1/4" 473 2-1/4" 487 2-1/4" I A�. i HUB6ELL _ _.m � t _ �� ` s� �" ��i -- --- -- --- SINGLE-GANG - 2-1/2" DEEP Application �� _ 'I,- o ,, ' � � Switch boxes are used to house '� � ,� .� �'� � I � � � wiring devices such as switches �� ; ' ��1 % •�� ' ° or outlets ' ' - Product Features �'° � ' = - RACO° offers a variety of labor 500,503,8500 501 504,505, 8504 saving mounting brackets that _v allow for easy positioning of box ,\, _� , � / along studs or joists o J �� , �°' See Box Selection section in the e Q , � � ` ` ` � " \J �. front of this catalog for complete - jf0 description of bracket types and � M�N \ �-�°7 so features 502 506 509 508 Gangable switch boxes offer the option of constructing a box � � = `:, ,� to hold two or more devices - --- - .--- ---- -- - ---- ---'---- _ ___ - - ---- -------= Plaster ears allow the box to be 3�� x 2° swircH soxes - z-iiz�� DEEP — GANGABLE used in "old work" applications WITH CONUUIT KO'S — 12.5 CUBIC INCHES Compliances CATALOG gRACKET & N KNOCKOUTS STD. BAR u� - File E195978 NUMBER SETBACK SIDES ENDS BOTTOM PK�� CODE 500 Ears 4-1/2" 2-1/2" 2-1/2" 50 — All RACO� single gang, two ssoo Ea�S a-i/2° z-�/2" 2-i/2° so m��r� gang, 4" square, and single soa Ears 4-1/2" 2-3/4" 2-1/2" so — gang gangable U.L. listed steel 5oi Without ears a-i/z° z-i/z" 2-�/2" 5a mmri � boxes are acceptable for use soa Ts b�kt., i/z° z-i/r �-i/z" z-ilz" 50 = in 2-hour fire rated walis. For s5oa TS brkt., 1/2" 2-1/2" 2-1/2° z-�/2" �o �om�:� . additional information, consult soa TS brkt., 1/2° z-i/z" z-s/a�� z-i/2° 50 U.L. "Fire Resistance Directory" soz B brkt., 5/8" 4-1/2" 2-1/2° z-i/2° io — or the U.L. website at www.uLcom 5U6 Old work,Tigergrip — 2-1/2" 2-1/2" 20 �4mol 5�9 Old work — 2-1/2" 2-1/2" 20 ietlml 3" x 2" SWITCH BOX — 2-1/2" DEEP — NONGANGABLE WITH CONDUIT KO'S — 12.5 CUBIC INCHES CATALOG DESCRIPTION KNOCKOUTS STD. UPC NUMBER BRACKET & pKg, BAR SETBACK SIDES ENDS BOTTOM CODE 508 Old work — 2-1/2" — 20 �e�l STEEL SWITCH BOXES D I M E N S I 0 N S ° CATALOG A g � � z�� NUMBER �r n � 500, 8500 2-1/2" _ _ ♦ � 503 2-1/2" � ° � f I 501 2-1/2" — — / ° �S� I , , 504, 8504 2-1/2" 7-5/32" 2-5/16" m �o 0 0 � � m p 502 2-1/2" 2" 4" \ m , o �z� � 506 2-1/2" — — o ° o_� 508 2-1/2" — — d 509 2-t/2" — — d � HUB6ELL -_ , . . ._..2, , , _ � � � �� SINGLE-GANG - 2-1/2" DEEP __ _ Application - m '��: �� _ � Switch boxes are used to house �9 '� wiring devices such as switches � _ `� � o o i i � or outlets \�� _� °,� " ° 'o ° � ° ° � ' - i Product Features - ; - � �� I � ��_ - ;-� '�a RACO� offers a variety of labor 519, 8519 528, 8528 � 531,8531 540 529� :; saving mounting brackets that .� � '-"� allow for easy positioning of box ° o,°� . , � , along studs or joists � �. q�� Ir �� 1� •� See Box Selection section in the , front of this catalog for complete _ M`N a a� � � description of bracket types and � a � ° � • ` ° features Q517 5� 512 596 545 - Gangable switch boxes offer the _________. option of constructing a box to - - - _ - ,-_ . : ; _. -, � , hold two or more devices — ---- ._ ._. - ---' —�__ _�_ -- - ._�_. � '-_ _ _.._; Plaster ears allow box to be used 3�� x z�� SWITCN BOXES — 2-1/2" DEEP — GANGABLE 111 "old work�� applications WITH NONMETALLIC SHEATHED CABLE CLAMPS — 12.5 CUBIC INCHES Compliances CATALOG DESCRIPTION KNOCKOUTS STD. UPC = u� - File E195978 NUMBER BRACKET & SIDE EN�S BOTTOM PK� BAR SETBACK COND. CABLE COND. COND CODE . All RACO�single gang, two sis Ears — 4 — 1-1/2° 50 — gang, 4" square, and singie esis Ears — 4 — 1-1/2�� 50 0;�� gang gangable U.L. listed steel 52s Level bumps — 4 z-vr� i-ii2° 50 — boxes are acceptable for use e5zs Level bumps — 4 2-v2�� 1-vz° 50 �a�� in 2-hour fire rated walls. For 531 T5 brkt., ii2�� — a 2-ii2�� -ii2° so — additional information, consult $531 TS brkt., v2° — a 2-v2° �-vz° 5o m�o�� U.L. "Fire Resistance Directory" sao B 6rkt., 1/4° — a 2-vz° i-vz° 50 — or the U.L. website at www.ul.com szs Long brkt., 5is° — a 2-vz° �-vz° 5o m�or� 517 Oldwork,Tigergrip 4 — — 1-1/2" 2p arei7 512 Old work 4 — — 1-1/2" 20 os'ool 3" x 2" SWITCH BOXES — 2-1/2" UEEP — NONGANGABLE WITN NONMETALLIC SHEATHED CABLE CLAMPS — 12.5 CUBIC INCNES CATALOG DESCRIPTION KNOCKOUTS STD. UPC NUMBER BRACKET & SIDE ENDS BOTTOM pK�, BAR SETBACK COND. CABLE COND. COND CODE 596 Without ears — 4 2-1/2" 1-1/2" 50 — 545 Old work — 4 2-1/2" — 20 nmol STEEL SWITCH BOXES OIMENSIONS ��Z' CATALOG A g C � NUMBER Io A 519, 8519 2-1/2" ° } � � 528, 8528 2-1/2" — — o �S� I , , 531,8531 2-1/2" 7-5/32" 2-5/16" m ro 0 0 � :� m P 540 2-1/2" 13-1/32" 5-3/64" � ° �?� � 529 2-1/2" 13-1/32" 5-3/64" II � °� 517 2-1/2" — — I�, 0 596 2-1/2" — — lf 545 2-1/2" — — � � Hueee�� b � - - { ,, ,: j _ --- ---- - SINGLE-GANG - 2-1/2" DEEP ,� Application ' __ : �' Switch boxes are used to house �� wiring devices such as switches '�0 , � o o e f � - or outlets " �_ _ a�� . � _- - - Product Features � � , RACO� offers a variety of labor 518,8518 524, 8524 522, 8522 - saving mounting brackets that _ aliow for easy positioning of box along studs or joists ;�� „ See Box Selection section in the � � � n . � , front of this catalog for complete �; ��, description of bracket types and features 523,8523 526 Gangable switch boxes offer the ---_----_--_--_-______—_- - _____-_---- --_ _- —__--__ option of constructing a box to - '- � � -'- � , - - .- . -�, _ hold two or more devices - _ _. ,__- --- - -- -- -��_�_._-.__� -° Plaster ears allow box to be used 3�� x s�� SWITCH BOXES - 2-1/2" DEEP - GANGABLE In �bld work° applications WITH ARMORED CABLE/METAL CLAD/FLEX CLAMPS – 12.5 CUBIC INCNES Compliances CATALOG DESCRIPTION KNOCKOUTS STD. UPC u� - File E195978 NUMBER BRACKET & SIUE ENDS BOTTOM PKG BAR SETBACK CON�. CABLE COND. COND CODE ;_ All RACO� single gang, two 5i8 Ears — 4 — 1-1/2° so — gang 4" square, and single gang $sis Ears — 4 — 1-t/2° 5o a,�� gangable boxes U.L. listed steel aza TS brkt., vz° — a z-vz° i-vz° ao — boxes are acceptable for use in 85za TS brkt., 1/2° — a 2-1i2�� i-v2�� eo e��r�� 2-hour fire rated walls. For additional 5zz Long B, 5ia�� — a z-ii2�� -iiz�� 50 — information, consult U.�. "Fire aszz Long B, 5/8° — a z-vz° �-vz° 50 ooeu� Resistance Directory" or the sza oid work,Griptite — 4 — 1-1/2" so — U.L. website at www.ui.com $523 Old work,Griptite — 4 — 1-1/2" 50 uscYl STEELSWITCHBOXES 3" x 2" SWITCH BOX – 2-1/2" DEEP – NONGANGABLE � WITH ARMORED CABLE/METAL CLAD/FLEX CLAMPS – 72.5 CUBIC INCHES �"2" DESCRIPTION KNOCKOUTS UPC � CATALOG gRACKET & SIDE ENDS BOTTOM STD. BAR � A NUMBER SETBACK COND. CABLE COND. COND PK�� CODE Io 0 1 � 526 Old work — 4 — — 20 Ictiul 0 �5� � f ° ( o � � - m p DIMENSIONS ° [?] � CATALOG A B � o � o_� NUMBER � 51 S, 8518 2-1/2" — — 524, 8524 2-1/2" 7-5/32" 2-5/16" 522, 8522 2-1/2" 13-1/32" 5-3/64" 526 2-1/2" 1-3/8" 3-13/32" � HUBBELL si J �� i , _ , _ ra SINGLE-GANG - 2-3/4" AND 2-27/32" DEEP -- — ----------� Application ':`; Switch boxes are used to house wiring devices such as switches -;:;'-=;; or outiets ,-=; Product Features ° - '� .�, � ' , �:' , ,' _ �' � o � � � � RACO'�353, 355 and 8355 are � o a ;'� �� '�' " � I-�'� II�- � �(�i � '� ��4 . extra-wide for ease of GFCI �,i � +,; _ � � ) �� ' .�-a device installation �-J�� I-`-�, � _ _ J_, = RACO� offers a variety of labor � � saving mounting brackets that allow for easy positioning of box along studs or joists = See Box Selection section in the 353 355,8355 560, 565,8560 561 562 front of this catalog for complete _ _—_- _.__—_____ ._. _ description of bracket types - - - _ _._ _ _ _ - _ _ - _ and features ' � ' < Piaster ears allow the box to be 3�� x z-�is° swircH sox - z-z�ias�� DEEP - NONGANGABLE used ifl ��old work�� applications WITH ARMORED CABLE/METAL CLAD/FLEX CLAMPS — 15.8 CUBIC INCHES COIT1pI18f1C@S �i CATALDG DESCRIPTION KNOCKOUTS STD. UPC u� - File E195978 NUMBER BRACKET & SIDE ENDS BOTTOM PK� BAR SETBACK COND. CABLE COND. COND CODE All RACO� single gang, two asa s brkt., nails — 4 — 1-1/2�� 50 ��o�� gang, 4" square, and single gang gangabie U.L. listed steel 3" x 2-1/8" SWITCH BOX — 2-27/32" DEEP — NONGANGABLE boxes are acceptabie for use W�TH NONMETALLIC SHEATNED CABLE CLAMPS — 15.8 CUBIC INCHES in 2-hour fire rated walls. For CATALOG DESCRIPTIDN KNOCKOUTS STD. UPC additional information, COf1SU�t NUMBER BRACKET & SIDE ENDS BOTTOM pK� 8AR SETBACK COND. CABLE COND. CONU CODE U.L. "Fire Resistance Directory" 355 s b�kt., nails — 4 — 1-1/2�� 50 — or the U.L. website at www.ul.com $355 S brkt., nails — 4 — 1-1/2�� zo ��;� CAT.N0.353,355,8355 3" x 2" SWITGN BOXES — 2-3/4" DEEP — GANGABLE � Zve, � —►{ Zz��aZ„ � WITH CONDUIT KO'S — 14.0 CUBIC INCHES � CATALOG �ESCRIPTION KNOCKOUTS STD. UPC NUMBER BRACKET & PK� BAR SETBACK SIDES ENDS BOTTOM CODE C S � 560 Ears 4-1/2" 2-1/2" 2-1/2" 50 — � m = 8560 Ears 4-1/2" 2-1/2" 2-1/2" 50 o�ull � � � , 565 Ears 4-1/2" 2-3/4" 2-1/2" 50 — 561 Without ears 4-1/2" 2_1/2" 2_1/2" 50 — 562 TS brkt., 1/2" 2-1/2" 2-1/2" 2-1/2" 50 — STEEL SWITCH BOXES c UIMENSIONS � Z CATALOG A B � �r n NUMBER Io , f � � 560, 8560 2-3/4" — — ��S� 565 2-3/4" — — � � � ` 562 2-3/4" 7-5/32" 2-5/16" m �000G � � a 561 2-3/4" 7-5/32" 2-5/16" o C ? ]� � I � , HUHBELL b _..� - ;h - - . + , - -- . '.---- SINGLE-GANG — 2-3/4" AND 3-1/2" DEEP Application �- ; '° �� = a ' ' , ' 'i��°,� �; Switch boxes are used to house � ,��: ,; , •. •:= wiring devices such as switches j'� � �° _ (�,, �`, �i�. T� or outlets �,, � ° � _; -� � �7 = Product Features � ' � RACO°offers a variety of labor 567 564 570RAC saving mounting brackets that ,`�.a �_: - _ allow for easy positioning of box '� '�- _, <- along studs or joists �' �� See Box Selection section in the li� ��i, ; . e^; , i�l � ��! ' � front of this catalog for complete ��, e ' description of bracket types ,, =—" - ' � and features � � 574 590, 591, 8590 592 Plaster ears allow the box to be used in "old work" applications r=- _ - = -- _._ - _ _ Compliances ---- ---- -= --__ __. . _ _ ___ _ ' u� — File E195978 3" x 2° SWITCH BOXES - 2-3/4" DEEP - GANGABLE WITH NONMETALLIC SHEATHED CABLE CLAMPS - 14.0 CUBIC INCHES All RACO°single gang, two 8f1 4�� s uare, and sin �2 CATALOG DESCRIPTION KNOCKOUTS STD. UPC g g� a g NUMBER BRACKET & SIDE ENDS BOTTOM PK� BAR gang gangabie U.L. listed steel SETBACK COND. CABLE COND. COND CODE boxes are acceptable for use ss� Ears a-vz�� a 2-ii2�� 1-vz° so a�� in 2-hour fire rated walls. For sea rs brkc., 1i2° z-vz° a z-�iz° i-ii2° 5o a�� additional information, consuit U.L. ��Fire Resistance Directory" 3" x 2" SWITCH BOXES - 2-3l4" OEEP - GANGABLE or the U.L. website at www.ul.com W�TH ARMORED CABLElMETAL CLA�/FLEX CLAMPS - 14.0 CUBIC INCHES CATALOG OESCRIPTION KNOCKOUTS STD. UPC NUMBER BRACKET & SIDE ENOS BOTTOM PK� BAR . SETBACK COND. CABLE COND. GOND CODE 570RAC Ears 4-1/2" 4 2-1/2" 1-1/2" 50 — 574 TS brkt., 1/2" 2-1/2" 4 2-1/2" 1-1/2" 50 osuPl 3" z 2" SWITCH BOXES - 3-1/2" DEEP - GANGABLE WITH CONDUIT KO'S - 18.0 CUBIC INCHES CATALOG DESCRIPTION KNOCKOUTS STD. UPC NUMBER BRACKET & PK� BAR SETBACK SIUES ENDS BOTTOM CODE 590 Ears 4-1/2" 4-1/2" 1-1/2" 50 — 8590 Ears 4-1/2" 4-1/2" 1-1/2" 50 o,ur,l 591 Ears 4-3/4" 4-3/4" 1-1/2" 50 n.¢Pa 592 Without ears 4-1/2" 4-1/2" 1-1/2" 50 — STEEL SWITCH BOXES DIMENSIONS CATALOG I`"Z�� NUMBER A B C �r- n � 567 2-3/4" — — I o � 564 2-3/4" 7-5/32" 2-5/16" 0 570RAC 2-3/4" — — / o C S ] �N ' 574 2-3/4" 7-5/32" 2-5/16" m lo 0 0 � � � � — — � 590,8590 3-1/2" � �?� � 591 3-1/2" — — ° � °� 592 3-1/2" — — � HUBBELL� � _ --e, `. ..,.�-'--: �.-.-: --___, 1 i , "� , � - _ ;�� SINGLE-GANG - 3-1/2" DEEP - -- --- - Application � _- • - Switch boxes are used to house � �o � � i `= ','' c= `"� wiring devices such as switches ' - i4,' �i'� , Q ,I �� ' � � . . �. or outlets ., ro� - � - �.� e :-� Product Features � - - - ' - �� < RACO°offers a variety of labor 601,8601 605 603 ` saving mounting brackets that allow for easy positioning of , ' " c;ti __._. box along studs or joists ; �;, � :i , o - See Box Selection section in the ''; �1s� � , front of this catalog for complete ' �-�� ,_�� description of bracket types ;� " and features 60o so4,sso4 Gangable switch boxes offer the option of constructing a box to - - - _.,_ . _ - �._-- hold two or more devices __ v___ _- _ . -___� -- _- — ---- ------�_ . Plaster ears allow the box to be used in ��old work�� a lications 3" x 2" SWITCH BOXES - 3-1/2" UEEP - GANGABLE PP WITH NONMETALLIC SHEATHED CABLE CLAMPS - 18.0 CUBIC INCHES Compiiances CATALOG DESCRIPTION KNOCKOUTS STD. UPC u� - File E195978 NUMBER BRACKET & SIDE ENDS BOTTDM PK� BAR SETBACK COND. CABLE COND. COND CODE Ali RACO�single gang, two soi Ea�s a-vz° 4 2-1/2° i-vz° z5 — gang, 4" square, and single 8601 Ears 4-1/2° a 2-vr� i-vz° z5 �e�� gang gangable U.L. listed steel sos TS brkt., v2° a-vz° a 2-v2° �-v2° zs �aa�� boxes are acceptable for use sos e brkt., 5ia° a-v2° a 2-vr� 1-v2^ 2s — in 2-hour fire rated walis. For additional information, COf1SU�t 3" x 2" SWITCH BOXES - 3-7/2" DEEP - GANGABLE U.L. ��Fire Resistance Directory" W�TH ARMORED CABLE/METAL CLA�/fLEX CLAMPS - 18.0 CUBIC INCHES or the U.L. website at www.ul.com CATALOG DESCRIPTION KNOCKOUTS STD. UPC NUMBER BRACKET & SIDE ENUS BOTTOM PK� BAR SETBACK COND. CABLE COND. COND CODE 600 Ears 4-1/2" 4 2-1/2" 1-1/2" 25 — 604 TS brkt., 1/2" 4-1/2" 4 2-1/2" 1-1/2" 25 — 8604 TS brkt., 1/2" 4-1/2" 4 2-1/2" 1-1/2" 25 e�:on STEEL SWITCH BOXES D I M E N S 10 N S �2. CATALOG A B C NUMBER � " � 601, 8601 3-1/2" — — Io 605 3-1/2" 7-5/32" 2-5/16" o � 5 � � � 603 3-1/2" 1-31/32" 4„ m ( o o � �, m P 600 3-1/2" — — o � n 604,8604 3-1/2" 7-5/32" 2-5/16" C?J� � o � HUHBELL 9 ",M _ _ zj %i � I — --- --- TWO-GANG — 2-1/8" DEEP , Applications ��`° ° °�� e o ^�=' 'J �—�� 1. � \ e ° � `° `a o � � � installers can save time and cut � ��me�� ^ t% � e � � � � \ � u � r� o o�i�. ('�o o�1°m � o a�Jia a oC.� installation costs with two-gang �- �mU ;J° �i 1� %� � z m� f9 m ��° —i� /'� n� r o �l \J a � `' � �' switch boxes � JO'; � �� L :�;� ' ��o u m - These larger capacity boxes are m� °° � r � ,, "� - ideal for today's designs where 680 6s3 � 68� �I 685 there is a need to install two - devices at one location _ -- Drawn boxes are ideal for exposed R x,; -y r ' �• --� work applications (surface 1� i n ' -� ��-. , �.J --: mounted wiring) � � ' " ' (� ��-� Product Features -`"� -"� 681, 685 bracketed boxes are set 871 872 873 back 1/2" eliminating the need for _____._____ a plaster ring = -- -- -- — - ----- ----- --- _ _._ _- - RACO� offers a variety of labor -- : - ----- -' - _ ---- - --� --- - ---- -=-�.__u.:.� saving mounting brackets that q�� SQUARE TWO DEVICE SWITCH BOX — 2-1/8" DEEP — DRAWN aliow for easy positioning of box WITH CONUUIT KO'S — 30.3 CUBIC INCHES along studs orjoists UESCRIPTION KNOCKOUTS UPC CATALOG gRACKET & SIDES BOTTOM ST�' BpR See Box Selection section in the NUMBER SETBACK COND. COND. PK�' COOE front of this catalog for complete 680 — 12-1/2" 5-1/2" 25 u'�ulil description of bracket types 683 — 8-1/2°, 4-3/4�� s-ii2��, z-sia° 2s u�u�� and features 681 TS brkt., 1/2" 9-1/2" 5-1/2" 25 uIDUI Covers are unpainted and manu- sss TS brkt., iir� s-3ia�� 3-1/2°, z-sia° za �r��u factured from pre-galvanized steel Compliances q�� SQUARE — TWO-DEVICE WALL PLATES* � = u� - File E195978 CATALOG sro. uPc NUM6ER DESCRIPTION PKG. BAR CODE All RACO° single gang, two s�i 2 Toggle switches 25 �� gang, 4" square, and single s�z 1 Dup. & 1 Toggle switch 25 a�m�� gang gangable U.L. listed steel s�s 2 Duplex receptacles z5 ��:�� boxes are acceptable for use in 2-hour fire rated walls. For 'Cover face surface is 1/4" from wali when installed additional information, consult U.L. "Fire Resistance Directory" DIMENSIONS or the U.L. website at www.ul.com CATALOG A B c o E NUMBER TWO-GANGSWITCHBOXES 680 4" 4„ 2_1/8„ — — E 683 4" 4" 2-1/8" — — ^ 681 4" 4" 2-1/8" 7" 4-9/32" :8-32TAP 685 4" 4" 2-1/8" 7" 4-9/32" 2-HOLES I � ° �1 ° o � � � 0 00�0o m m � � � o � � —► 1-13/16" � � HUBBELL � _ - .-.:�.e� '_ ___ ._. _ ._ I { v 1 I I MULTI-GANG - 2-1/2" DEEP — Applications Installers can save time - and cut installation costs with - multi-gang switch boxes Q � J � These larger capacity boxes are �� p- �� `° `' -�' "_-� ideal for today's designs where j � � °ry o :+ there is a need to install more than `� � ': � `y �� '� two devices at one location - Product Features RACO° offers a variety of labor saving mounting brackets that allow for easy positioning of box along studs or joists 6s6 687 971 See Box Selection section in the __._ _ front of this catalog for compiete = - - _ " -' description of bracket types and -- - — -- - --- --- -- -- --�---� features MULTI-UEVICE SWITCH BOXES — 2-1/2" OEEP — WELDED Compliance WITH CONDUIT KO'S u� - File E195978 (Cat. #971 caTa�oc DESCRIPTION KNOCKOUTS UPC BRACKET & CU. IN. STO. BAR not UL Listed) NUMBER SETBACK SIDES ENDS BOTTOM CAP. PKG. CODE 686 3-Gang 2_��2�� p_3/4" 6-1/2", 6-3/4" 3-1/2", 3-3/4" 47.8 10 mmrJ 1/2" setback 687 4-Gang 2-1/2", 2-3/4" 8-1/2", 8-3/4" 4-1/2", 4-3/4" 63.5 10 nnori 1/2" setback 971 Low voltage _ _ — — 25 — partition MULTI-GANG SWITCH BOXES DIMENSIONS � A � � c � NUMBER A B C D E 1 f �.—.� � 686 5-9/16" 3-3/4" 2-1/2" 7-5/8" 5-31/32" - � 687 7-3/8" 3-3/4" 2-1(2" 7-5/8" 7-25/32" � — � � 7!B'� � � M6-32TAP 2-HOLES 1-13/16" PER GANG � � HU6BELL _ � & A " I � � j �.. . . _' ��, . . :_ .__.. �.. ' .:.' �" .. ,....� ,.-, .: . . � _ : �._ ._.-. .. : .: .� . . .-�;� . � .-� . _ 1-5/8" AND 2-1/2" DEEP , �, : Application 0 . `°' m' ��,�0'' �� = ' ,;�. ' '�� ,��„�, , �� Gang boxes are used where ;J�j w,�, � � � a � � - a number of wiring devices are � � -�� '� � --�-�'"� � ' � - �!�, to be centrally located gg1 952 958 Product Features �� Gang boxes save time in N� � ," NE� � _ ;,� � _ installation - no need to � ,� � }�. _�� gang boxes together w� -° s:� -" 941 942 Have 1/2" and 3/4" concentric KO's for use with a wide variety N�� - ' Ka N� _ -"_ _ NE�1 °'� - - of wiring methods � �� r _ ; _ -_ _ - Bottom KO pattern -3-1/2" -- - - - `' � �:_ and 2-3/4" 943 944 945 Accept two styles of covers - -- -- ----- --, - -. - . flat and 3/4" raised device cover � � '' ' " - = Device covers also fit next smaller - • ----- - _- ----__ __ - -=--- ----- -.._ -- ----- -- -- bOX, i.e. three-gang cover fits GANG BOXES - 1-5/8" & 2-1/2" DEEP - WELDE� two- or three-gang box WITH CONDUIT KO�s Use low voltage partitions CATALOG N0. OF DEPTH WIOTH KNOCKOUTS CU. STD. BAR #974 or #949 NUMBER GANGS TOP & BOTTOM' SIDES• BACK �N. PKG. CODE Compliance 9si 2 1-5/8" 6-13/16" 8-conc. 4-conc. 3-1/2", 2-3/4" 47.0 5 - 952 3 1-5/8" 8-5/8" 10-conc. 4-conc. 6-1/2", 4-3/4" 60.0 5 [t�ul u� - File E195978 953 4 1-5/8" 10-7/16" 12-conc. 4-conc. 6-1/2", 4-3/4" 72.8 5 4f�� 954 5 1-5/B" 12-1/4" 14-conc. 4-conc. 6-1/2", 4-3/4" 85.8 5 - 955 6 1-5/8" 14-1/16" 16-conc. 4-conc. 6-1/2", 4-3/4" 98.5 1 - 956 7 1-5/8" 15-7/8" 18-conc. 4-conc. 6-1/2", 4-3/4" 111.5 1 - 957 8 1-5/8" 17-11/16" 20-conc. 4-conc. 6-1/2", 4-3/4" 124.5 1 - 956 9 1-5/8" 19-1/2" 22-conc. 4-conc. 6-1/2", 4-3/4" 137.3 1 - 941 2 2-1/2" 6-13/16" 4-3/4", 4-conc. 4-conc. 3-1/2", 2-3/4" 70.0 5 t�mla 942 3 2-1/2" 8-5/8" 8-3/4", 2-conc. 4-conc. 6-1/2", 4-3/4" 90.0 5 t�i�� 943 4 2-1/2" 10-7/16" 4-3/4", 4-conc. 4-conc. 6-1/2", 4-3/4" 110.0 5 «�ul 944 5 2-1/2" 12-1/4" 6-3/4", 4-conc. 4-conc. 6-1/2", 4-3/4" 130.0 5 t��id� 945 6 2-1/2" 14-1/16" 6-3/4", 6-conc. 4-conc. 6-1/2", 4-3/4" 150.0 25 t[ieiii "1-5/8" deep boxes, concentric KO's are 1/2" 8 3/4" '2-1/2" deep boxes, concentric KO's are 3/4" & 1" STEEL GANG BOXES �" �I OIMENSIONS � 1 CATALOG NO. OF A g C , r'� �-� NUMBER GANGS �/ °� � 951 2 1-5/8" 6-3/8" 6-13/16" � °�' ° ` � 952 3 1-5/8" 8-3/16" 8-5/B" �o � N � � � 953 4 1-5/8" 10" 10-7/16" 954 5 1-5/$" 11-13/16" 12-1/4" � e ��B-32TAP 955 6 1-5/8" 13-5/8" 14-1/16" c a-HOLES 956 7 1-5/B" 15-7l16" 1 5-7/8" 957 8 1-5/8" 17-1/4" 17-11/16" 958 9 1-5/S" 19-1/1 6" 19-1/2" 941 2 2-1/2" 6-3/S" 6-13/16" 942 3 2-1/2" 8-3/16" 8-5/8" 943 4 2-1/2" 10" 10-7/16" 944 5 2-1/2" 11-13/16" 12-1/4" 945 6 2-1/2" 13-5/8" 14-1/16" � HUBHELL �� i � ' ' { , xa.- .'�� _..�_-. �3 . - �- JJ s � .: , ,� ` . m __._._._�__.___..�_ __l.��..� Application "�' Gang box covers permit the ' mounting of devices - Product Feature a = Device covers also fit next smaller - m box, i.e. three-gang cover fits � '.,' ° � �'"' two- or three-gang box '�� :�, Compliance ° ' u� — File E195978 (Cat. #974 Q J � and 949 not UL Listed) 846 823 974 __ - -_ --_ - _. u , ._ . , � -, - PLAT, BLANK COVERS FOR GANG BOXES CATALOG NO. Of WIDTH CU. STD. UPC NUMBER GANGS IN. PKG. BAR CODE 844 2 7-1/16" — 5 — 845 3 8-7/8" — 5 — 846 4 10-11/16" — 5 — 847 5 12-t/2" — 1 — 848 6 14-5/16" — 1 — 849 7 16-1/8" — 1 — 850 8 17-15/16" — 1 — 851 9 19-3/4" — 1 — � DEVICE COVERS FOR GANG BOXES RAISED 3/4" CATALOG NO. OF W�DTH CU. STD. UPC NUMBER GANGS IN. PKG. BAR CODE 821 2 7-1/16" 10.0 5 — 822 3 8-7/8" 15.3 5 omoi 823 4 10-11/16" 20.3 5 Il�llil 824 5 12-1/2" 25.5 5 — 825 6 14-5/16" 30.5 1 — 826 7 16-1/8" 35.5 1 — 827 8 17-15/16" 40.8 1 — 828 9 19-3/4" 45.8 1 — LOW VOLTAGE PARTITION FOR GANG BOXES CATALOG DESCRIPTION STD. UPC NUMBER PKG. BAR CODE 974 For 1-5/8" Oeep 25 — �`!�7 949 For 2-1/2" Deep 25 — � � � HUBBELL _ ._� ._-:..::.- -._:.'�o - - -,., ?; " -- - - , - - ,�-�,,. Applications v� (� ,� ;�YJ � `��, � � � ''' �) �:� ��;� � eo Concrete rings are used with G „ .� 0 \( , � � �� ` �. _� poured deck (floor) in high-rise � � .�, � � l% ` ��' �r� �� `'v 'J, � � � , construction -� � ,� \� %' " �, ,, These boxes are installed on \ ° � ��-�_" � wooden or steel Concrete forms. 273, 274,275, 284 *280 SHOWN =- After the forms are removed, the 276, 279 GORILLA-RING'" WITH 918 BARS - box is flush with the concrete � �� , � ___ : RACO� Ceiling Fan Concrete , �o n �� . Ring 284 is listed for support �� /(�-� ° of ceiling fans °n �� °�1��L� � . ° Product Features `J `J �° �� Flat sides provide excellent $90 891 892 893 contactforlocknuts � External ears are used to nail _ - _ _ _ -- _ _ the ring to the wood form The top cover is removable CONCRETE RINGS for before-pour work MAX. RECOMMENDED Ears on inside of box are SUPPORT LOADS CATALOG DEPTH KO SIZES N0. CU. STD. UPC CEILING FAN FIXTURE for fixtures NUMBER ROWS KO's IN. PKG. BAR CODE (DYNAMIC) (STATIC) Waxed fixture ears prevent LBS. LBS. concrete from interfering with 270RAC z�� 1iz�� a sia�� Single 24.5 25 — No 5a the threads 271 2-1/2" 1/2" 8 3/4" Single 30.8 25 — No 50 Variety of cover plates Z7z 3" 1/2" & 3/4" Single 37.0 25 — No 50 are available Z�� 3" 3/4" & 1" Single 37.0 25 — No 50 273 3-1/2" 1/2" & 3/4" Double 43.0 20 — No 50 Cover plate must be ordered 27$ 3-iiz° 3ia° a i�� s�n9ie 43.0 zo — No 50 separately with all (except 280 Z�a a�� v2° & sia�� Double 49.3 20 — No 50 which includes a 891 cover) Z�y a° 3/4° & i° Double as.s 20 — No ao RACO° concrete rings Z�s s° v2�� & aia" Double 61.5 �o — No 50 Compliance f 2�s 6" 1/2" & 3/4" Double 74.0 10 — No 50 u� - File E195978 284 4" 1/2" &3/4" Double 49.3 6 — 35 75 HUNG CEILING BOR — 3-Y/2" DEEP CATALOG DESCRIPTION CU. STD. UPC NUMBER IN. PKG. BAR CODE 280 3/8" Stud, 6-1/2", 8-3/4" KO's" 43.0 20 — 918 30" Lonc� bars for hung ceiling box — 40 — 'Order bars separatery STEEL CONCRETE RINGS CONCRETE RING — BACK PLATES/COVERS AND AOAP7ER RING xa-azscaews CATALOG DESCRIPTION KNOCKOUTS O.D. STD. UPC ASSEMBLED NUMBER DIAM. PKG. BAR CODE ° 890 — 3-1/2", 2-3/4" 4-1/2" 25 — B 8 �4 �� 891 3/8" Stud 2-1/2", 2-3/4" 4-1/2" 25 — 0 0 � � � gg2 Flat, blank — 4-1/2" 25 — A A � � Joins Oct. Ext. ring to concrete ring 0 0 893 — 4-1/2" 50 — Inclutles two retained screws � B B � A KNOCKOUT LOCATIONS 3-112" KNOCKOUT A B SIZE 1/2" and 3/4" KOs 1/2" 3/4" 3/4" and 1" KOs 3/4" 1" HU66ELL � � - �� ,� = i ; - , r: , ., . , � � 2-1/2" A N D 3-1/2" D E E P _��...___..�...,..,::..�.�:ii �, Applications � `� {� � _,� i; Masonry boxes are designed to � ,�� _ ,�; � accommodate the mounting of � �.;��'P �' �� ° �° � =� switches or other devices in '�� : k; J•�� `� 4 • �� -� ,� masonry walls = � �� = i::� 2-1/2" deep box is used 690 691 � e 692 � on 4" block - o� c_� � Lc� c_c� 3-1/2" deep box is used `�c�� .�� _c`7 . � c� � �� ° on 6" and 8" block � '�, - ° - — �� ° -- 'i�i n Product Features � �'i�; �,;, �o�JJ�� ' �� Rugged welded construction does � � ' �` ;'-� C�� , � �� not fall apart during construction ' ° 0 = Available from one- to six-gang 695,8695 696 697 971 in 2-1/2" or 3-1/2" depths — ----- ---------------, Rectangular shape fits square - cuts in block -_ __ -_- __=- ----- _ __ _ - ----- --- — �--� = Have 1/2° and 3/4�� concentric MASONRY BOXES – 2-1/2" UEEP – NONGANGABLE KO's for use with a wide variety W�TH CONUUIT KO'S of wiring methods CATALOG N0. OF KNOCKOUTS CU. STD. BAR NUMBER GANGS WIDTH ENDS BOTTOM �N. PKG. CODE Large volume design allows for additional work room inside sso 1 1-31/32° z z �s.o 25 — the box 691 2 3-25/32" 4 4 31.8 25 — 692 3 5-19/32" 6 3 47.8 10 — Device ears are formed inside ssa 4 7-13/32° s a 63.5 �o — the box, preventing mortar from ssa 5 9-7/32�� io 5 79.5 io — getting in the device holes sso 6 11 1/32�� z 6 95.3 i — Low voltage partition 971 will � fit all 2-1/2�� or 3-1/2�� depths MASONRY BDXES – 3-7/2" UEEP – NONGANGABLE Standard wall plates cover W�TH CONDUIT KO�s the box CATALOG NO. OF KNOCKOUTS CU. STD. UPC NUMBER GANGS WIDTH IN. PKG. BAR Compliance ENDS BOTTOM CODE 695 1 1-31/3 2" 4 2 22.5 25 — u� - File E195978 (Cat. #971 asss 1 1-31/32° 4 z 22.5 zs e�6�� not UL Listed) sss 2 3-25/32�� 8 4 45.0 io mrnr, 697 3 5-1 9/3 2" 12 3 67.3 10 a�Ri� 698 4 7-13/32" 16 4 89.8 10 — 699 5 9-7/32" 20 5 112.3 10 — 965 6 1-11/32" 24 6 134.8 1 — LOW VOLTAGE PARTITION FOR MASONRY BOXES CATALOG DESCRIPTION STD. UPC NUMBER PKG. BAR CODE 971 For 2-1/2" or 3-1/2" deep boxes — 25 STEEL MASONRY BOXES p I M E N S I 0 N S � A � � � � CATALOG NO. OF A B NUMBER GANGS 1 � � 690 1 1-31/32" 2-1/2" - - � 691 2 3-25/32" 2-1/2" - 692 3 5-9/16" 2-1/2° " m " ^ 693 4 7-13/32" 2-1/2" (( �� — — �J 694 5 9-7/32" 2-1/2" 1 960 6 1-11/32" 2_1/2" I 695,8695 1 1-31132" 3-1/2" 7/B"---+� � N6-32 TAP 2-HOLES 7-73l1fi" PERGANG 696 2 3-25�32�� 3-��2�� 697 3 5-9/16" 3-1/2" 698 4 7-13/32" 3-1/2" ,'HLJHBELL � 699 5 9 7/32" 3-1/2" - � 965 6 1-11/32" 3-1/2" ( ...t .��,,, r.. y ' ..,_.__�__y...�,,. ,......,.:,=J _ _ u �:- _ .� .n _ d~ �i _. -.n � .� :. �" ' Application Adjustabie bar hanger allows box to be placed between ceiling joists - _ or wall studs quickly and easily = Product Features J Both RACO° 920 and 922 bar ---`� - -- ��s'� fixture hangers allow box to be _._��- ' ° �" _- �- ___ located anywhere along length ri j � � of bar RACO� 920 includes 3/8" trade size stud to accommodate fixture stem 922 Clip installs in 1/2" knockout 920,8920 922 located in bottom (back) of box _-___.- ___-___________.______—__—_—________—____._._____, RACO�box must be ordered = ' - separately -= --- -_ _.�._:. _- -- ---- _ , Box Installation ADJUSTABLE BAR HANGERS Bar hangers attach to octagon MAX. RECOMMENDED orsquare boxesthrough center CATALOG STD. UPC SUPPORT LOADS DESCRIPTION BAR CEIUNG FAN FIXTURE 1I2�� knockouts NUMBER PKG. CODE (DYNAMIC) (STATIC) = Remove the knockout LBS. LBS. - Remove the screw and fixture 9zo sia�� Stud, adj. 14-1/4° co zz-vz�� 50 — No io• 8920 3/8" Stud, adj. 14-1/4" to 22-1/2" 50 �m�'i No 10' stud (or clip) from bar hanger yZ2 ci�p, adj. 14-1/4° to zz-vz° 50 — No �o� Place the stud inside the box and replace the screw 'UL Rated at 50 Ibs. � When box is located accurately between the joists, tighten the screw securely Compliance - u� - File E195978 .... � HUHHELL _ �. - — �� ' !1 . � � ._ � �.--,,__� : .�.. : '3 _,-- - - -�-_ - __�_--�__ -____ _._--' Far Side Box Support Application , - Prevents installed box from '� I "floating" in wall cavity :;; � ;. , Far Side Box Support Features = _ - , - = Snaps into hole in back of box - - = Easy to cut to fit depth of cavity � -` � � __ BOX-LOC�Application � �� " -_ Allows any box to be attached to � - - either side of a metal stud quickly and easily BOX-LOC°Product Features 97$ BOX-LOC� < Patented spring steel design INSTALLED 980 97$ < Installs in seconds without tools — —-- — -- -_- ---- : Mounts on either side of stud - - -- - _ = Repositions easily -- -- _ ' - - --- - ; Bracket may be added to any sox-�oc° METAL STUO CLIP RACO� 4" or 4-11/16" square steel CATALOG STD. UPC box— simply tap the bracket NUMBER �ESCRIPTION pKG. BAR CODE with a hammer and the barbed sao Spring-steel bracket 5o rr.�m�� hooks hold it in place BOX-LOC°also fits RACO° 7220 FAR SIDE BOX SUPPORT and 7232, 4" square PVC boxes CATALOG DESCRIPTION STD. UPC BOX-LOC� is a snap to install. NuMSeR PKG. BAR CODE Place the bracket on the open side s�a i-�ia�� Rigid, plastic support 50 - of the stud first. Slots in the brack- et engage the lip of the stud and actually crimp it as you press the bracket on the stud. Barbed hooks dig into the flat side of the stud, locking it in place � , HU6BELL ,--�--�.-�-.� --- -- { � ' { ; ��_,___._._w. .. ____. - --; _ ,. ,_ _ _ _ �_1�_ _, , _� _— � -. �_. ... Ad just-A-BraceT""Application ____.-------�-------• �, � Adjust-A-BraceT"" is used to (� , !I� mount electrical outlet boxes g;i ! ��---,�.--�-°-�°`r`�-� between studs �— -- - Adjust-A-BraceT"" ADJUST-A-BRACETM Product Features 985 Time saver for the installer � - = One brace will handle different �` m types and depths of boxes— 4" or 4-11/16" � Gives the freedom to choose the location GRIP-LOKT" No preset locations 970RAC 977, 8977,8977-5 = Ruler marks are stamped on -- - - _ ,; the brace for consistent outlet " `' � � ' ' � �:� ' � box placement every time — - -- _.___ .- - -- --- _ __ __ �:_._ -- � __ _:__ . . _ - --' "Old Work Saddle" Application AOJUST-A-BRACE`" OUTLET BOX SUPPORT The "Old Work Saddle° #970 is CATALOG pESCRIPTION STD. UPC designed to be used with 2-1/2" NUMBER PKG. BAR CODE deep switch boxes that have 98s For �s° on center studs z5 ��i 986 For 24" on center studs 25 n¢ul plaster ears "Old Work Saddle" Product Feature SWITCH BOX SUPPORT "OLD WORK SADDLE" #970 installs into the 1/2" bottom CATALOG STD. UPC conduit knockout. When the box NUMBER DESCRIPTION pKG. BAR CODE is slipped into the hollow wall, Mounts sw�ccn boxes witn piaster the bracket springs out behind 970RAC ears in noiiow waiis or ceiiin9s �o '°'6"" �,; the wall. Tighten the screw and the box is rigidly in piace GRIP-LOK`""OLD WORK" SWITCH BOX SUPPORT GRIP-LOKTMApplication CATALOG DESCRIPTION STD. UPC NUMBER PKG. BAR CODE The GRIP-LOKT"" Support IS Supplied as a pair. Use pair to mount switch box designed to be used with any deep 977 with plaster ears in hoilow wall, 1-7/8" long legs ioo pairs _ switch box that has plaster ears Supplied as a pair. Use pair to mount switch box 8977 with plaster ears in hollow wall, 1-7/8" long legs 100 pairs ¢uurl GRIP-LOKT"^Product Feature Supplied as a pair. Use pair to mount switch box = Simply slip GRIP-LOKT"' between 8977"5 w�tn piaster ears in hoilow wall, 1-7/8" lon ieqs 100 pairs• m�:uu� box and wall, then bend tabs into the box '4 Bundles of 25 Compliances SWITCH 80X ACCESSORIES �� - File E195978 (not 970RAC) CATALOG FOR RACO STD. UPC DESCRIPTION ` �Q - C 22.2 #18 NUMBER SWITCH BOXES PKG. BAR CODE Certified for Canada aio, a2o, 440, aa5, 500, 503, 961 Plaster Ears - 506, 508, 526, 545, 560, 565, 100 iorra (not 970RAC, 977) Open Style w/screws 567, 570RAC, 590, 600, 601 Plaster Ears - 962 Clipped Style w/serews 150, 400, 591 100 locfl 963 Plaster Ears - 471, 487, 517, 518, 519, 523 100 imri 1 Screw Style w/screws Old Work Griptlte Clip 964 W/screws 523 100 m�ai Old Work Tigergrip Clip 966 W/screws 487, 506, 517 100 iao�r.l i � i , FiU66ELL ii;a _ r`� � � �I ...i 1 '] i ( .a ... ...� ✓ ,. .��:.�.. ,� , �r ..�1 � �:_. .._., ,. .�..—._.�..._ .._..._�.._.__._._:j _ Grounding Applications ' , Grounding accessories provide ' a safe electrical path to ground to help prevent shock ' N� N�N � N� � Grounding screws thread into 982 994 996, 8996-1 984 997 the box and provide a means of #14 WIRE 8983-1, 983 #14 WIRE - fastening the ground conductor #�2 WIRE - Ground wires fasten to the box and are then connected to wiring �='� �r--,. J system or wiring device "�?,_-�--=-=Y-�`--�� ;�� \ f = RACO�6" and 8" ground `y�~ pigtails feature 4-way (slotted, 992 993 998, phillips, hex-head) combo 10-32 N� 973, 975, #14 WIRE #12 WIRE $99a-1 8973-1 8975-1 captive screw Ground clips provide a quick F` � ,� _ - method of fastening a ground - ---- - -- -- -- —== ---------------------------- conductor to the edge of a steel outlet box GROUNDING PIGTAILS CATALOG Ground clips are designed for NUMBER STD. UPC use with solid No. 14, 12, and WIRE LENGTH DESCRIPTIDN PK� BAR 10 gauge copper conductor 6" a" cooe or No. 12 and 10 gauge ysZ 994 #14 Solid insulatetl copper wire, captive 4-way combo 1000 — aluminum conductor head green dye flnish ground screw one end (25 pc. bundles) #12 Solid insulated copper wire, captive 4-way combo Only one solid ground wire 983 996 head green dye finish ground screw one end (25 pc. bundles) 1�00 — to.be instalied per ground clip #12 Solid insulated copper wire, captive 4-way combo head 8983-1 8996-1 green tlye finish ground screw one end, poly bag 40 bags' It'alil Compliance (10 pcs per poly bag) u� - File E195978 (975 only) #14 Solid bare copper wire, captive 4-way combo head _ 984 997 green dye finish ground screw one end (25 pc. buntlles) 1000 #14 Stranded insulated copper wire, captive 4-way 992 combo head green dye finish ground screw one end, 500 — spade terminal one end (100 pc. bundles) #12 Stranded insulated copper wire, captive 4-way 993 combo head green dye finish ground screw one end, 500 — spade terminal one end (100 pc. bundles) GROUNDING SCREWS AND CLIPS CATALDG STD. UPC NUMBER DESCRIPTION PK� BAR CODE 998 4-Way combo head green tlye finish ground screw for 10-32 1000 II'OIIII tapped hole, clam shell package (100 pcs per clam shell) 8998_� 4-Way combo head green dye finish ground screw for 10-32 50 bags` irfmi tappetl hole, poly bag (10 pcs. per bag) 973 Slottetl head green tlye finish ground screw for 10-32 tapped �000 a�im hole, clam shell package (100 pcs per clam shelq 8973-1 Slotted head green dye finish ground screw for 10-32 tapped 50 bags' IE�im hole, poly bag (10 pcs. per bag) 975 Green tlye finish ground clip for#14-#10 AWG copper, 1000 It�llil clam shell package (100 pcs per clam shell) $9�5 1 Green tlye finish ground clip for#14-#10 AWG copper, poly bag 50 bags' iranu (10 pcs. per bag) 'Order standard package bag quantities only, not per piece � i 0 HUH9ELL b - ��,.�1 _�� , � � ; ; _ .�.�..._.,.�,---- ' _-v . �._ � _� ..�. y � :_ ., �' , � __ . , Add-A-Depth Applications �! Add-A-Depth ring or"goof-ring° - is designed to act as a barrier between combustible wall surfaces o -= - and the wiring system _ � For single and two-gang device boxes There is no UL standard for this product � Subject to acceptance by an o electric inspector The NEC Code States: 2709, 370-20. in Wall or Ceiling 976 2710 <� In walls or ceilings of concrete, ---,-.- .—_—_ .____.— — ___ ___ __�__.__ ___,-_-_-. tile, or other non-combustible ' _ �LL � ' -` _ material, boxes shall be instalied ' `— - .-_- -_:__ _ --: ---- - -----_�_---------: so that the front edge of the box ppD-A-DEPTH RING EXTENDS SWITCH BOX SET T00 UEEP IN WALL will not set back of the finished surface morethan 1/4 inch CATALOG DESCRIPTION sro. uPc NUMBER PK6. BAR COUE (6.35 mm). In walls and ceilings Atljustment range va°-i° constructed of wood or other 976 rwo �-1ia° screws included z5 m�nu combustible material, boxes shall be flush with the finished surface CABLE PROTECTOR or project there from CATALOG STD. UPC Nailing Spur Applications NUMBER DESCRIPTION pKG. BAR CODE Protects nonmetallic sheathed 27os Naiiin9 spurs, s°H x i-v2�w x ii�s°o, v2° spike ioo �iui�i cable or raceway type wires run- z�io Nailing spurs, 3"H x i-vr�w x v�s°o, v2° spike 200 - ning through wood studs, joists, rafters or similar structural wood members from accidental nail, screw or drill penetration No naiis required Compliance u� - File E195978 (except 976) � � 0 HUHBELL � -�,3-�- — �-i y _ i . � . , .— — _ ` Y �� . BOX FIRESTOP PRODUCTS ------ - - - Applications RACO�WALL-GUARD firestop �,�N M�N M�N '�`� � products are used in applications s� s° s0 °; where electrical boxes are _— - ,__ ' positioned back to back or less ��v^�- � � �o�; � � � than 24" apart in wall cavities C°1 _ �I - , The 1999 UL Fire Resistance ' ` - � _ _ ; __ ± �N � Directory (Orange Book) mandates = - _ - { �'- �_ that "metallic boxes located on : � ' �« _ =� - "" �--" opposite sides of walls or partitions ' — - - - � � �°=--- �---� shall be separated by a minimum horizontal distance of 24 inches. This separation distance between metallic boxes may be reduced 903 90a s05 when Wall Opening Protective — --— _—_------ ______ Materials (CLI� are installed with � - � � � - - -. : - = the metallic boxes" --- —--� ------ --- --- -- ---- - ------ -- — InternaVlnsert Pad Only one pad is required for Compliance Product Features a 1 or 2 hour fire rating , O � Using predetermined cut lines, pads . No additional putty is needed can be cut and inserted on the to plug the end of each electrical inside of any 3" x 2", 4" x 2" tube or conduit at its connection or 4" x 4" steel electrical box to box - When exposed to fire, RACOm WALL-GUARD inserts expand, WALL-GUARO FIRESTOP BOX — INTERNAL/INSERi PADS forming a "char° that will seal off CATALOG PAD FULL PAD STD. UPC the opening and prevent the spread NUMBER DESCRIPTION SIZE CULI�N.E PK�' CODE of flames 903 Each patl—for (1) 4" box, (2) 4" x 2" boxes 4" x 4" 3.5 20 ¢�[m Limit the temperature rise on the or �z� 3�� x z" boxes unexposed surfaces 904 Each pad —for 3" x 2" switch box only 3' x 2" 1.8 20 ¢onil Easy to install using provided self adhesive strip WALL-GUARO FIRESTDP BOX — EXTERNAL PAD Highly intumescent CATALOG PAD sro. urc NUMBER DESCRIPTION SIZE PKG. BAR ° Non-conductive CODE = Dielectric breakdown voitage 22V/mil 9os Soft pliable, putty-patl �^ X s° zo ��a�� (ASTMD149) External Pad Product Features RACO�WALL-GUARD putty pads are applied to the outside of any steel or nonmetallic electrical outlet or switch box ° Soft, pliable material is easy to work with and conforms to contour of any shape box Help reduce sound transmission through walls .... , HUBBELL m ' � ' " ` , `,- !-'; ; ,____ M�N 4" SQUARE, 4-11/16" SQUARE, HANDY BOXES So ` Applications �� - \��C7 \\�� G° e r ° RACO Surface Mount Boxes are � -° �m ;�� ° � � '`J �'�m � m- (� L) ) ` ��' specifically designed for exposed m°n �o O 0� 0 ° ° _� �'Jm �° °� ° �J o U ;' '� ;� i � I m work, flush mount applications � � � .J �"° �� ° � � / � � � � ` � �) `J where an alternative to conduit O= , grounding is required Boxes are instalied on walls or 189SM 191SM � 192SM 232SM 650SM - ' ceilings to support lighting fixtures, �� C7 � � Q o0 ---- ;'•, <` ° - switches or receptacles .,; � �� l ,� ,L% , �° Q , � � '.,�� •1� °�? ° l> >�° ° Square boxes are used where �; , 'J � '' `� , � , multiple conductor runs are split �i �� , � U �� '` � a v e ° � into two or more directions " --�� ;� � ° �� to bring power to a number of electrical devices 660SM 663SM 670SM 257SM 258SM Handy boxes are used to house - wiring devices such as switches �_` f ' " � ' --- ---_ _---- ------ - -��. --- -- -___� --- - - or outlets and as small junction boxes MASONRY BOXES — 2-1/2" DEEP — NONGANGABLE - WITH CONOUIT KO'S Product Features uPc CATALOG KNOCKOUTS CU. STO. BAR Raised ground screw emboss on NUMBER DESCRIPTION DEPTH IN. PKG. SIDES COND. BOTTOM CONU. CODE bottom of box eliminates ground iBSSM Welded �-vz° s-�iz", 4-TKO z-vr�, 2-TKO zi.o 50 o��Em screw/surface interference when �g�SM Drawn 1-1/2" 8-3/4" 1-1/2", 3-3/4" 21.0 50 e�[m mounted on flat surface �g2SM Drawn 1-1/2" 8-t/2", 4-TKO 2-1/2", 2-3/4" 21.0 50 ��tiil All RACO Surface Mount Boxes 232SM Weldetl 2-1/3" 8-1/2", 4-TKO 2-1/2", 2-TKO 30.3 25 no¢CI include a pre-assembled 3-way ground screw and 8" long, #12 stranded pigtail saving both time 4" x z�� SURFAGE MOUNT HANDY BOXES wirx coNOUir Ko�s and labor for the installer CATALOG KNOCKOUTS CU. STU. UPC C0111 liance NUMBER DESCRIPTION DEPTH IN. PKG. BAR p SIDES ENUS BOTTOM u� - File E195978 COND. COND. COND. CODE 650SM Welded 1-1/2" 6-1/2" 2-t/2" 2-1/2" 11.5 50 o�bm 660SM Drawn 1-7/8" 6-1/2" 2-1/2" 2-1/2" 13.0 50 ustui 6635M Drawn 1-7/8" 4-3/4" 2-3/4" 1-3/4" 13.0 50 oteol 670SM Weided 2-1/8" 6-1/2" 2-1/2" 2-1/2" 16.5 50 o�ei 4-11/16" SQUAflE SURFACE MOUNT BOXES WITH CONDUIT KO'S CATALOG KNOCKOUTS CU. STD. UPC NUMBER DESCRIPTION DEPTH IN. PKG. BAp SIDES COND. BOTTOM COND. CODE 189SM Welded 1-1/2" 8-1/2", 4-TKO 2-1/2", 2-TKO 21.0 50 o�ieiil 257SM Weltled 2-1/8" 2-1/2",10-TKO �-��2 ' � 3�4 42.0 25 Aucul 2-TKO 258SM Welded 2-1/8" S-1" 2-1/2", 2-3/4" 42.0 25 m'�tul � � � Hueee�� i i 3M Electrical Tape Chart I .�• ' ii 1• ii� '�� .ii .�� i ' �• '� � 3/4"x 66'(19 mm x 20,1 m) Scotchm Super 33+'" _ � _ Insulates splices up to 600V. Repairs 3/4"x 44'(19 mm x 13,4 m) cable jacketing.Resists W rays,abrasion, 105°C 3/4"x 20'(19 mm x 6,0 m) ProfessionalGrade � 7 mil Vnyl Electrical Tape* ''� corrosion,alkalies and acids.Flame 221°F 3/4"x 36 yd(19 mm x 32,9 m) retardant.UL Listed and CSA Certified. 1"x 36 yd(25,4 mm x 32,9 m) 1-1/2"x 36 yd(38 mm x 32,9 m) Thick,heavy duty vinyl protects cable and 3/4"x 66'(19 mm x 20,1 m) .Q�_ 3/4"x 44'(19 mm x 13,4 m) Scotch�Heavy - provides faster build-up.Insulates splices 3/4"x 36 yd(19 mm x 32,9 m) Duty Grade Vnyl � = up to 600V. Repairs cable jacketing. 105°C 8.5 mil 1"x 36 yd(25,4 mm x 32,9 m) Eiectrical Tape Resists UV rays,abrasion,corrosion, 221°F � 1-1/2"x 36 yd(38 mm x 32,9 m) Super 88` � alkalies and acids. flame retardant. 1-1/2"x 44'(38 mm x 13,4 m) UL Listed and CSA Certified. 2"x 36 yd(51 mm x 32,9 m) 9 fade-resistant colors identify and mark Scotchm Professional __��=� phases/cables. Insulate splices up to 600V. 3/4"x 60'(19 mm x 18,2 m) Grade Color Coding �=.--•_��,� Repair cable jacketing. Aesists W rays, 7 mil �05°C 1/2"x 20'(12 mm x 6,1 m) Vnyl ElecVicai �#� abrasion,corrosion,alkalies and acids. 221°F 3/4"x 66'(19 mm x 20,1 m) Tape 35* flame retardant. UL Listetl and 1/2"x 20'(12 mm x 6,1 m) " CSA Certified. Extra-thick,heavy tluty vinyl protects 1/2"x 36 yd(13 mm x32,9 m) 1 cable and provides faster build-up. ScotcM Extra Heavy 3/4"x 36 yd(19 mm x 32,9 m) Insulates splices up to 600V. Repairs 80°C Duty Grade Vnyl 10 mil 1"x 36 yd(25,4 mm x 32,9 m) Electrical Tape 22* ;�� cable jacketing. Resists W rays,abrasion, 1�6�F 1-1/2"x 36 yd(38 mm x 32,9 m) �`,��'_ corrosion,alkalies and acids. Flame 2"x 36 yd(51 mm x 32,9 m) retardant.U�Listed and CSA Certified. 3M'"Highland" � Bundles cable and pull wire.Insulate g0°C 3/4"x 60'(19 mm x 20,1 m) Medium Grade Vnyl __� } , splices up to 600V.Flame retardant. 7 mil 7g4°F 3/4"x 66'(19 mm x 20,1 m) Electrical Tape' � UL Listed and CSA Certified. 3M'"Temflex'" - -- 3/4"x 60'(19 mm x 18,2 m) Buntlle cable,wire pull and repair cable Economy Grade 80°C 3/4"x 36 yd(19 mm x 32,9 m) Vnyl Electrical Tape � � jacketing. Fiame retardant. UL Listed 7 mil 176°F 3/4"x 66'(19 mm x 20,1 m) �� and CSA certified. 1"x 66'(25,5 mm x 20,1 m) 3/4"x 66'(19 mm x 20,1 m) 3M'"Temflex'" 1-1/2"x 44'(38 mm x 13,4 m) Insulate and repair mining cable jacketing. Mining Grade Ynyl 80°C 1-1/2"x 66'(38 mm x 20,1 m) Electrical Tape � �' _ Flame retardant. Printed for use in 7 mil 176°F 3/4"x 66'(19 mm x 20,1 m) 17�P MSHA-approved splicing kits. 1-1/2"x 44'(38 mm x 13,4 m) 1-1/2"x 66'(38 mm x 20,1 m) . i � . � � . �• � �, i• �� .i� .�• � • �• •� �• 1"x 30'(25 mm x 9,1 m) Scotchm Professional Insulate and splice solid dielectric cables continuous: 3/4"x 30'(19 mm x 9,1 m) Grade Linerless - �°'"= through 69kV. Linerless,high-volt�ge 90°C/194°F 1-1/2"x 30'(38 mm x 9,1 m) Rubber 5plicing t ' insulating,thermally conductive, 30 mil short-term: 2"x 30'(50 mm x 9,1 m) Tape 130C* _._ self-bonding rubber. 130°C/266°F 1"x 10'(25 mm x 3,05 m) t"x 15'(25 mm x 4,6 m) Scotchm Professional continuous:90°C 3/4"x 30'(19 mm x 9,1 m) � ,. : :�_" Insulate and splice solid dielectric cables 1"x 20'(19 mm x 25 m) Grede Linered /194°F short Rubber Splicing � � through 69kV. Linered, insulating, 30 mil term:130°C/ 1"x 30'(25 mm x 9,1 m) Tape 23 ,�� thermally conductive,seff-bonding rubber. Z66�F 1-1/2"x 30'(38 mm x 9,1 m) = 2"x 30'(50 mm x 9,1 m) Scotch�Medium continuous: Splice and insulate cables and 3/4"x 15'(19 mm x 4,57 m) Grade Lineriess 90°C/194°F Rubber Splicing connections. General purpose,linerless 30 mil short-term: 1-1/2"x 15'(38 mm x 4,57 m) Compound 2242* rubber insulating tape. 130°C/266°F 2��x 15'(51 mm x 4,6 m) * � �� MADE IN USA Many 3M Electrical Products including electrical tapes,are ROHS Compliant. (Not all tapes 2re US tapes) To check the compliance status of a 3M Electrical Product,go to www.3m.com/electrical I � i i 3M Electrical Tape Chart � .i� ' �� 1• �I i ��i ,i i .i� 1 • � ' �• '� �� 3/4"x 66'(19 mm x 20,1 m) Scotchm Super 33+'" � =^ Insulates splices up to 600V. Repairs 3/4"x 44'(19 mm x 13,4 m) cable jacketing.Resists W rays,abrasion, 105°C 3/4"x 20'(19 mm x 6,0 m) Professional Grade � 7 mil Vnyl Electrical Tape'` '"� corrosion,alkalies and acids.Flame 221°F 3/4"x 36 yd(19 mm x 32,9 m) � retardant.UL Listed and CSA Certified. 1"x 36 yd(25,4 mm x 32,9 m) 1-1/2"x 36 yd(38 mm x 32,9 m) Thick,heavy duty vinyl protects cable and 3/4"x 66'(19 mm x 20,1 m) .�� 3/4"x 44'(19 mm x 13,4 m) Scotch�Heavy - provides faster build-up.Insulates splices 3/4"x 36 yd(19 mm x 32,9 m) Duty Grade Vnyl ° up to 600V. Repairs cable jacketing. 105°C 8.5 mil 1"x 36 yd(25,4 mm x 32,9 m) Electrical Tape Resists UV rays,abrasion,corrosion, 221°F * � 1-1/2"x 36 yd(38 mm x 32,9 m) Super 88 # - alkalies and acids. Flame retardant. 1-1/2"x 44'(38 mm x 13,4 m) UL Listetl and CSA Certified. 2"x 36 yd(51 mm x 32,9 m) 9 fatle-resistant colors identify and mark Scotch°Professional ��; phases/cabies. Insulate splices up to 60DV. 3/4"x 60'(19 mm x 18,2 m) Grade Color Coding �_ ; Repair cable jacketing. Resists W rays, 105°C 1/2"x 20'(12 mm x 6,1 m) �nyl Eiectrical abrasion,corrosion,alkalies and acids. �mil 22��F 3/4"x 66'(19 mm x 20,1 m) Tape 35* �i Flame retardant. UL Listed antl 1/2"x 20'(12 mm x 6,1 m) '� CSA Cer[ified. _ Extra-thick,heavy duty vinyl protects 1!2"x 36 yd(13 mm x32,9 m) Scotch°Extra Heavy �;�� cable and provides faster build-up. 3/4"x 36 yd(19 mm x 32,9 m) Duty Grade Ynyl Insulates splices up to 600V. Repairs 10 mil a�� 1"x 36 yd(25,4 mm x 32,9 m) * ? cabie jacketing. Resists UV rays,abrasion, 176°F Eiectrical Tape 22 �-� corrosion,alkalies and acids. Flame 2'1x 36 yd651�m3m x 32,93m)9 m) retardant.lJL Listed and CSA Certified. 3M'"Highland'" ..�� `�� Bundles cable antl pull wire.Insulate Medium Grade Vnyl �=a � splices up to 600V.Flame retardant. 7 mil 90°C 3/4"x 60'(19 mm x 2D,1 m) Electrical Tape* -� �,.� UL Listed and CSA Certified. 194°F 3/4"x 66'(19 mm x 20,1 m) 3M"Temflex'" 3/4"x 60'(19 mm x 18,2 m) Bundle cable,wire pull and repair cable Economy Grade 80°C 3/4"x 36 yd(19 mm x 32,9 m) �nyl Electrical Tape �` � ±- jacketing. Flame retardant. UL Listed 7 mil 776°F 3/4°x 66'(19 mm x 20,1 m) �� and CSA certified. 1"x 66'(25,5 mm x 20,1 m) 3/4"x 66'(19 mm x 20,1 m) 3M'"Temflex'" 1-1/2"x 44'(38 mm x 13,4 m) � Insulate and repair mining cable jacketing. Mining Grade Vinyl 8�°C 1-1/2"x 66'(38 mm x 20,1 m) Electrical Tape Flame retardant. Printed for use in 7 mil 176°F 3/4"x 66'(19 mm x 20,1 m) ��P � " MSHA-approved splicing kits. 1-1/Z"x 44'(38 mm x 13,4 m) 1-1/2"x 66'(38 mm x 20,1 m) . I i . � � .�i:+. �.a;'�.;;.�.ni H Ic.,�1+. li ii ` i� w.i n� .i• 1 • i ' i' 'i r' 1"x 30'(25 m m x 9,1 m) Scotch°Professional Insulate and splice solid dielectric cables continuous: 3!4"x 30'(19 mm x 9,1 m) Grade Linerless -- through 69kV. Linerless,high-voltage 90°C/194°F 1-1/2'x 30'(38 mm x 9,1 m) 30 mil Rubber Splicing �� insulating,thermally conductive, short-term: 2'x 30 (50 mm x 9,1 m) Tape 130C" self-bonding rubber. 130°C/266°F 1 x 10 (25 mm x 3,05 m) 1"x 15'(25 mm x 4,6 m) Scotchm Professional -- continuous:90°C 3/4"x 30'(19 mm x 9,1 m) Insulate and splice solid dielectric cables 1"x 20'(19 mm x 25 m) Grade Linered /194°F short through 69kV. Lineretl, insulating, 30 mil 1"x 30'(25 mm x 9,1 m) Rubber Splicing E � thermally conductive,self-bonding rubber. term:130°C/ 1_1/2"x 30'(38 mm x 9,1 m) Tape 23 _` .`� 266°F 2°x 30'(50 mm x 9,1 m) Scotchm Medium continuous: Grade Linerless � Splice and insulate cables and 90°C/194°F 3/4"x 15'(19 mm x 4,57 m) � connections. General purpose,lineriess 30 mii 1-1/2"x 15'(38 mm x 4,57 m) Ru6ber Splicing* rubber insulating tape. short-term: 2��x 15'(51 mm x 4,6 m) Compound 2242 130°C/266°F * //t MADE IN USA Many 3M Electrical Products including electrical tapes,are ROHS Compliant. (Not all tapes are US tapes) To check the compliance status of a 3M Electrical Product,go to www.3m.com/electrical I I t�,i�>1`/J,--_ ;�:��KtF:fr:= �-.��,�,; :-,; 1 CouncilAvenue P.O. Box 608 � Wheatland Tube Company Wheatland, PA16161-0608 ��i ' 800.257.8182 :s� __ _ __ _ _ _ _ _ _ � Wheatland Galvanized '"`�'"".'""eat'and.�°m Electrical MetallicTubing (EMT) -Steel General Applications Specifications Steel Electrical Metallic Tubing is manu- Wheatland Galvanized Steel Electrical Wheatland Galvanized Steel Electrical factured from mild steel tube. It has an Metallic Tubing, National Electrical Metallic Tubing is manufactured in accurate circular cross section, a uniform CodeO (NECO) 2005 Article 358, can be accordance with the latest edition of the wall thickness, a defect free interior sur- installed indoors or outdoors, in dry or wet following: face, and continuously welded seams. locations, exposed or concealed, in all The exterior surface is thoroughly and kinds of atmospheric conditions, and in American National Standards Institute - evenly coated with zinc using an inline hazardous locations,when in accordance American National Standard for Steel galvanizing process, so that metal-to- with the NECO and providing it will not be Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT), ANSIO metal contact and galvanic protection subject to severe physical damage dur- C80.3 against corrosion are provided. Addition- ing and after installation and is properly ally, the exterior is protected by a clear protected against corrosion. Underwriters Laboratories Standard for zinc chromate coating. The interior sur- Also, it provides mechanical protection Electrical Metallic Tubing - Ste.el, UL face is coated with organic lubricating for the conductors while reducing Electro- 797 coating to reduce friction during wire in- Magnetic Field (EMF) exposure and sertion and retard corrosion. shielding against Electro-Magnetic Inter- National Electrical CodeO 2005 - ference (EMI). Article 358 (1999 NECOO Article 348) Wheatland's EMT and its associated tu- bular fittings are produced in nominal trade Federal Specification - W1N-C-563 sizes from 1/2 to 4. EMT is produced in standard lengths of 10 feet (3.05 m). -� ' The above Federal specification may still `'' ` � be referenced, however the federal gov- Bundles of finished EMT are wrapped with u s� � ; ' ernment has canceled it and adopted the color coded special light weight filament =_ � *�`� � r� UL 767 and ANSI C80.3 standard and will tape. Black tape identifies trade sizes � � , � � ; no longer maintain a separate standard. 1/2 and 1 1/2, Red tape identifies 3/4 and `4 :� + � =� ` Electrical MetallicTubingwas covered un- 1 1/4, and Blue tape 1. Trade sizes 2 ti _~ ` � ` ; g;' der WW-C-563. and larger are not bundled. �'y.. ' � � '�i '��1 � �� Additional inform i n n h i I n ,�i � � �;' ato o t e ttes a d Wheatland EMT is a UL Listed product. { � 3 designations of standards or requirements Each length of tubing has a label affixed L -� f � � �'� that have been used for the investigation containing UL Listing information and a � � �' of products in a specific category can be bar code. Each length is identified with � L � }: � found in the Underwriters Laboratories W hea t lan d's name, Logo, t he le t ters � � � ,� Inc.�, Genera! In forma tion for E lec trrca l °EMT' clearly and durably marked once � =:. � �` N Equipment Directory. The UL product cat- per 1 0 foo t (3.0 5 m) leng t h, a U.L, lis ting � � � .�� egory for E M T is F J M X. number and the words, "Consult manu- �_ ,�� facturer for installation instructions". On July 25, 2001 the past UL requirement to Galvanized Steel Electrical Metallic Tub- embed the letters "EMT" into the surface ing is an approved equipment grounding of the tube was changed to require only conductor under the 2005 NECO Sec- durably marking the tube with the letters tion 250.118(4). The NECO establishes "EMT" at a minimum of 1/8 inch (3 mm) the minimum requirements for a safe elec- high. trical installation. Because of the varied environments in which electrical equip- ment is installed, local amendments are often added. Always consult local Made in U.S.A. codes prior to any installation. �1`� Certificate Numbers: ��} Wheatland, PA 007172 `` �� Chicago, IL 008952 � ��` Little Rock,AR 009081 -_:__ _ :: , -- - - - -- _ -__ __. _ _._. _. - _- - - - __.. - EMT_Spec_Sheet_2005rev.pmd ;��+,{'�:" --�, ,, ';� 1 Council Avenue P.O. Box 608 �� Wheatland Tube Company Wheatland, PA16161-0608 �f��x',� 800.257.8182 �.�tto _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ www.wheatland.com Electrical Metallic Tubing - Steel WEIGHTSAND DIMENSIONS Trade Metric Weight Outside Inside Wall Size Designator 10 Unit Lengths Diameter(1) Diameter(2) Thickness(2) Ib kg in. mm in. mm in. mm '/z 16 30 13.6 0.706 17.93 0.622 15.80 .042 1.07 3/4 21 46 20.9 0.922 23.42 0.824 20.93 .049 1.25 1 27 67 30.4 1.163 29.54 1.049 26.64 .057 1.45 1'/4 35 101 45.8 1.510 38.35 1.380 35.05 .065 1.65 1'/2 41 116 52.6 1.740 44.20 1.610 40.89 .065 1.65 2 53 148 67.1 2.197 55.80 2.067 52.50 .065 1.65 2'/2 63 216 98.0 2.875 73.03 2J31 69.37 .072 1.83 3 78 263 119.3 3.500 88.90 3.356 85.24 .072 1.83 3'/z 91 349 158.3 4.000 101.60 3.834 97.38 .083 2.11 4 103 393 178.3 4.500 114.30 4.334 110.08 .083 2.'11 Notes:Applicable tolerances Length: 10 Ft. (3.05 m)+/-1/4 in. (+/-6.35 mm) (1)Outside Diameter: 1/2-2+/-0.005 in. (16-53+/-0.13mm), 2-1/2+/-0.010 in. (63+/-0.25 mm), 3+/-0.015 in. (78+/-0.38 mm) ,3-1/2-4+/-0.020 in.(91 -103+/-0.51 mm). (2)For information only, not a UL 797 requirement. PACKAGI NG Bundle Trade Metric Ta e Quantity Quantity Weight Volume Size Designator C or Per Bundle Per Lift Per Lift Per Lift Feet Meters Pieces Bundles Feet Meters Pounds Kilograms Cu. Ft. Cu. m '/2 16 Black 100 30.5 - 70 7000 2134 2100 952.6 31.7 0.9 '/4 21 Red 100 30.5 - 50 5000 1524 2300 1043.3 36.1 1.0 1 27 Blue 100 30.5 - 30 3000 914 2010 911.7 36.5 1.0 1'/4 35 Red 50 15.2 - 40 2000 610 2020 916.3 38.2 1.1 1'/Z 41 Black 50 15.2 - 30 1500 457 1740 789.3 37.9 1.1 2 53 - - -- 120 - 1200 366 1776 805.6 46.7 1.3 2�/Z 63 - - - 61 - 610 186 1318 597.7 41.5 1.2 3 78 - - - 51 - 510 155 1341 608.4 48.9 1.4 3'/� 91 -- - - 37 - 370 113 1291 585.7 48.6 1.4 4 103 - - - 30 -- 300 91 1179 534.8 50.0 1.4 The quantity per Lift conforms to the National Electrical Manufacturers Association Standards Pubiication RN-2 Packaging of Master Bundles for Steel Rigid Conduit, Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC), and Electrical Metallic Tubing. -- - - __.. -- - _,. --- - _ _ :.:-. - - - - ,- -- _ _ _ - - - - _ -- EMT_Spec_Sheet_2005rev.pmd Smoke Detectors and Modules: 29�1J Intelligent Plug-in Photoelectric Smoke Detector �951J Intelligent Thermal Detector 5600 Mechanical Heat Detector InnovairFlex Intelligent Non-Relay Photoelectric Duct detector Intelligent Detector Bases M300MJ,M300RJ and M300DJ Series Monitor Modules M300CJ,and M300RJ Series Control Modules M�OOX Isolation Module � � jci-6935:B1 2951 J(A) and 2951 TJ(A) /) -�i � Intelligent Plug-In Photoelectric �ohnson �� Smoke Detector with FlashScanO �OntfO�S General � Johnson Controls intelligent plug-in smoke detectors with inte- 4`� gral communication provide features that surpass cornentional >�`�� _ detectors. Detector sensitivity can be programmed in the con- �� trol panei software. Sensitivity is continuously monitored and reported to the panel. Point I�capability allows each deteo- � � tor's address to be set with decade address switches, provid- , ,_; � ��,�•%" ing exact detector location for selective maintenance when ,w,� chamber contamination reaches an unacceptable level. The , �� '-� 2951J photoelectric detector's unique optical sensing chamber � is engineered to sense smoke produced by a wide range of 2951J with 6210LPJ base combustion sources. Dual electronic thermistors add 135°F (57°C) fixed-temperature thermal sensing on the 2951TJ. 2951J and 2951TJ detectors are compatible with the IFC2- 640, IFG320,and IFC2-3030(FA�P). �� FlashScanO(U_S. Patent�,539,389)is a communication pro- �'�`�� tocol that greatly increases the speed of communication between analog intelligent devices. Intelligent devices com- municate in a grouped fashion. If one of the devices in the �,;� � �,"' ��v'� group has new information, the panel's CPU stops the group poll and concentrates on single points. The net effect is �� . response speed greater than five times that of earlier designs. �� 'y� 2951TJwith 6210LPJ base Features • Sleek,low-profile design. • Addressable-analog communication. Stable communication technique with noise immunity. $pecifications • Low standby current. Size: 2.1" (5.3cm) high x 4.1"(10.4cm) diameter installed in • Two-wire SLC connection. 8501 base,6.1"(15.5cm)diameter installed in B210LPJbase. • FlashScan (IFC-320, IFG2-640, IFC-3030, IFG2-3030)and Shipping Weight: 5.2oz.(147g). classic CLIP systems compatible. Operating Temperature: 2951J, 0°C to 49°C (32°F to • Rotary, decimal addressing (1-99 on CLIP systems, 1-159 120°F); 2951TJ, 0°C to 38°C (32°F to 100°F). Low tempera- on FlashScan systems). ture signal for 2951 TJ at 45°F+/-10°F(7.22°C+/-5.54°C). • Optional remote,single-gang LED accessory. Operating Altitude:to 10,000 feet. • Dual LED design provides 360°viewing angle. UL/ULC Listed Velocity Range: 0-4000 ft/min. (12192 m/ • Visible bi-color LEDs blink green every time the detector is min.),suitable for installation in ducts. addressed, and illuminate steady red on alarm (FlashScan Relative Humidity: 10%-93%noncondensing. systems only). Thermal Ratings: Fixed-temperature setpoint 135°F(57°C). • Remote test feature from the panel. • Walk test with address display(an address on 121 will blink DETECTOR SPACING AND APPLICATIONS the detector LED: 12-[pause]-1(FlashScan systems only). Johnson Controls recommends spacing detectors in • Built-in functional test switch activated by external magnet. compliance with NFPA 72. In low airtlow applications with • Built-in tamper-resistant feature. smooth ceiling, space detectors 30 feet (9.144m) for ceiling heights 10 feet(3.148m) and higher. For specific information • Sealed against back pressure. regarding detector spacing, placement, and special • Constructed of off-white BayblendC�, designed to commer- applications refer to NFPA 72. System Smoke Detector cial standards,and offers an attractive appearance. Application Guide, document A05-1003, is available at • 94-5V plastic flammability rating. systemsensor.com • SEMS screws for wiring of the separate base. 2951 J and 2951 TJ are listed for use in ducts, but the they are • Optional relay,isolator,and sounder bases. NOT listed for use inside duct smoke detector housings. See Duct Application Smoke Detectors Guide, document A05- 1004, available at systemsensor.com, for details on pendant- mount applications. ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS Voltage Range: 15-32 volts DC peak. jci-6935:B1•05/08/09—Page 1 of 2 stanaay currer,t �max. avy.�: sooua, @ 2av�c �or,e com- product Line Information munication every five seconds with LED enabled). NOTE:'A"suffix indicates ULC listed model. LED Current(max.):6.5mA @ 24VDC('ON'). 2g51J(A):Low-profile intelligent photoelectric sensor. Must be BASES AVAILABLE mounted to one of the bases listed below. NOTE: °A"suffix indicates ULC Listed model. 2951TJ(A):Same as 2951J but includes a built-in 135°F B210LPJ(A):6.1"(15.5cm)diameter. (57°C)fixed-temperature thermal device. B501J(A):4.1"(10.4cm)diameter. BASES 6501BH-2(A) or B5016HT-2(A): Sounder base assembly. B710LP:Standard U.S.low-profile base. Includes 8501 base. B210LPJ:Standard U.S.low-profile base,pkg.of 10. B224RB(A) Relay Base: Screw Terminals, up to 14AWG :B210LPJA:Standard U.S.low-profile base,ULC listing. (2.Omm2); Relay Type, Form-C; Rating, 2.OA @ 30VDC resis- tive, 0.3A @ 110VDC inductive, 1.OA @ 30VDC inductive; g501J:Standard turopean fiangeless base,pkg.of 10. Dimensions, 62" (15.748cm) x 1.2" (3.048cm) x 1.2" :6501JA:Standard European fiangeless base,ULC listing. (3.048cm). B5018H-2(A):Sounder base,includes 6501(A)base. 8224BI(A)Isolator Base: Dimensions,6.2"(15.748cm)x 1.2" g501 BHT 2(A):Same as 8501 BH-2(A),but includes temporal (3.048cm) x 1.2" (3.048cm); Maximum, 25 devices between sounder. isolator bases. B224RB(A):Intelligent relay base. Installation 622481(A):Inteiligent isolator base. Isolates SLC from loop 2951J plug-in detectors use a separate base to simplify instal- shorts. lation,service,and maintenance. A special tool aliows mainte- ACCESSORIE'S nance personnel to plug in and remove detectors without using F110:Retrofit replacement flange for older style bases. Con- a ladder. verts older high profile base for use with FlashScan detectors. Mount base on an electricai backbox which is at least 1.5" RA400Z:Remote LED annunciator. 3-32VDC. Fits U.S.sin- (3.81 cm)deep. Suitable mounting base boxes include: gle-gang electrical box. Supported by B210LPJ(A)and • 4.0"(10.16cm)square box. B501J(A)bases only • 3.5"(8.89cm)or 4.0"{10.16cm)octagonal box. SMK400E:Surface mounting kit provides for entry of surface • Single-gang box(except relay or isolator base). wiring conduit. For use with 6501J(A)base only. • With B5016H-2 or B501BHT-2 base, use a 4.0" �10.16cm) RMK400:Recessed mounting kit. Foruse with 6501J(A)base square box. only • With B224RB or B22461 base, use a 3.5"(8.89cm)octago- SM6600:Surface mounting kit for use with B210LPJ(A). nal box,or a 4.0"(10.16cm)octagonal or square box. NOTE: 1) Because of inherent supervision provided by the SzC BCK-2006:BIack detector covers,box of 10. For use with loop, end-of-line resistors are not required. Wiring "T-taps" or 2951J oniy. branches are permitted for sryle 4 (C/ass B') wiring. 2) When M02-04-OO:Test magnet. using relay or sounder bases, consult data sheet (M500XJ) for device limitations between isolator modules and isolator bases. M02-09-OO:Test magnet with telescope stick. XR26:Detector removal tool. Allows installation and/or Agency Listings and Approvals removal of FlashScan Series detector heads from base in high ceiling installations. These listings and approvals apply to the modules specified in this document. In some cases,certain modules or applications T55-127-010:Detector removal tool without pole. may not be listed by certain approval agencies, or listing may XP-4:Extension pole for XR2B. Comes in three 5-ft.sections. be in process. Consult factory for latest listing status. • UL Listed:S1948 • ULC Listed: S24130 • MEA Listed:225-02-E Vol.8 • FM Approved • CSFM:7272-0554:145 • Maryland State Fire Marshal:Permit#2136 FlashScanO is a registered trademark of Honeywell International Inc. Bay- blendO is a registered trademark of Bayer Corporation. 002009.All rights reserved.Unauthorized use of this document is strictly pro- hibited. This document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. w" We try to keep our product intormation up-to-date and accurate. �� We cannot cover all specific applications or anticipate all requirements. -. All specifications are subject to change without notice. "�` Made in the U.S.A. For more information,contact Johnson Controls Field Support Center. 507 East Michigan Street,Milwaukee,WI 53202 www.johnsoncontrols.com Page 2 ot 2-jci-6935:B1•05/08/09 JCI-6936:A2 5951 J Series t� -,I � Intelligent Thermal (Heat) Detectors �ohnson � �� with FlashScanO Controls General Johnson Controls 5951J Series intelligent plug-in smoke ,�� '� � � �° � 5�,u�^, �. d;�k�a�'��,�..,�: y detectors with integral communication provide features that � �° � surpass conventional detectors. DetE:ctor sensitivity can be �'�� programmed in the control panel software.Sensitivity is contin- � ;, uously monitored and reported to the panel.Point ID capability ° allows each detector's address to be set with decade address �bs36°�,,°9� `''� switches,providing exact detector locations for selective main- �� tenance when chamber contamination reaches an unaccept- � � �� able level. 5951J Series thermal dete�ctors use an innovative ,'� � ` `�� °"` thermistor sensing circuit to produce 1,35°F/57°C fixed-temper- �' S951J Series in B210LPJ base ature(5951 J)and rate-of-rise thermal detection(5951 RJ)in a low-profile package. 5951 HJ provides, fixed high-temperature detection at 190°F/88°C.These thermal detectors provide cost • Plugs into separate base for ease of installation and main- effective, intellige�t property protection in a variety of applica- tenance. Separate base allows interchange of photoelec- tions.5951J Series detectors are compatible with the JCI IFC- tric,ionization and thermal sensors. 200, IF�-400, IFC-640, IFC-1010/-20�!0, IFC-3030,and IFC2- . SEMS screws for wiring of the separate base. 3030 Fire Alarm Control Panels(FACF's). • Constructed of off-white BayblendC�, designed to commer- FlashScan�(U.S. Patent 5,539,389) is a communication pro- cial standards,and offers an attractive appearance. tocol that greatly enhances the speed of communication � g4-5V plastic flammability rating. between analog intelligent devices. Intelligent devices commu- ni�ate in a grouped fashion. If one of the devices within the • Remote LED output connection to optional RA400Z remote group has new information, the panel's CPU stops the group ��D annun�iator. poll and concentrates on single points. The net effect is • Optional sounder,relay,and isolator bases. response speed greater than five times that of earlier designs. . Optional recesssd (RMK400) or surface (SMK400) base mounting kits. Features • Sleek,low-profile,stylish design. Specifications • State-of-the-art thermistor technolo�gy for fast response. Size:2.1"(5.3 cm) high x 4.1" (10.4 cm)diameter installed in • Rate-of-rise model(5951 RJ), 15°F Q8.3°C)per minute. B501 base, 6.1" (15.5 cm) diameter installed in 6210LPJ • Factory preset at 135°F(57°C);high-temperature model at base. 190°r(88°C). Shipping weight:4.8 oz.(137 g). • Addressable by device. Operating temperature range:5951J Series,5951 RJ:—20°C • FlashScan�(IFC-640, IFC-3030) and classic CLIP system to 38°C (-4°� to 100°F); 5951HJ: —20°C to o6°C (-4°F to (IFG200, IFC-400, IFC-1010/-2020, IFC-640, IFC-3030, ��F)� IFG2-3030)compatible. Detector spacing: UL approved for 50 ft. (15.24 m)center to • Rotary, decimal addressing (1 —99 on current classic sys- center. FM approved for 25 x 25 ft.(7.62 x 7.62 m)spacing. tems, 1 —159 on FlashScan�systems). Relative humidity: 10%—93%noncondensing. • Two-wire SLC connection. Thermal ratings: fixed-temperature setpoint 135°F (57°C), • Visible LEDs"blink"every time the unit is addressed. rate-of-rise det�ction 15°F (8.3°C) per minute, high tempera- • 360°-field viewing angle of the visual alarm indicators (two ture heat 790°F(88°C). bi-color LEDs). LEDs blink green in Normal condition and turn on steady red in Alarm. ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS: • Integral communications and built-in device-type identifica- Voltage range: 15-32 volts DC peak. tion. Standby current (max. avg.): 200 µA @ 24 VDC (without • Remote test feature from the panel. communication); 300 µA @ 24 VDC (one communication • Built-in functional test switch activated by external magnet. every 5 seconds with LED enabled). • Walk test with address display(an address of 121 will blink LED current(max.):6.5 mA @ 24 VDC("ON"). the detector LED 12-(pause)-1). Bases available: • Low standby current. 6210LPJ:6.1"(15.5 cm)diametec • Listed to UL 521. B501J:4.1"(10.4 cm)diameter. • Backward-compatible. • Built-in tamper-resistant feature. 85016H or 65016HT: Sounder base assembly. Includes 6501 base. • Designed for direct-surface or electrical-box mounting. � B224R6 Relay Base: Screw terminals: up to 14 AW.� (2.0 • Sealed against back pressure. mm2).Relay type: Form-C. Rating: 2.0 A@ 30 VDC resistive; JCI-6936:A2•8/19/08—Page 1 of 3 0.3 A@ 110 VDC inductive; 1.0 A@ 30 VDC If1CIUCtIVe. REM07EANNUNC!ATOR Dimensions:6.2"(15.748 cm)x 1.2"(3.048 cm). + - B22461 Isolator Base: Dimensions: 6.2" (15J48 cm) x 12" + _ _—� (15.748 cm). Maximum: 25 devices between isolator bases. —� � � See Note 2 under Installation. / / � � / ' 3 3 � 3 ,� � Applications Control i � � � Panel ' � ` � ' j� Use thermal detectors for protection of property. For further ' ; information, go to systemsensor.com for manual 156-407-00, � Applications Manual for System Smoke Detectors, which pro- - � � � -------------------- �----- � vides detailed information on detector spacing, placement, + -______ sr��E�oP„on,a�w,R,NC____� ___________ zoning,wiring,and special applications. 6"'w�2.'�' Wiring Diagram Installation The 5951J Series plug-in intelligent thermal detector uses a separate base to simplify installation, service, and mainte- 683�tle,. m, - - ' nance.Installation instructions are shipped with each detector. �� -� ��,�� $._9 �-.`�� Mount base(all base types)on an electrical backbox which is I�y �,13� �; ,� at least 1.5"(3.81 cm)deep. Suitable boxes include: • 4.0"(10.16 cm)square box. �3� — ��5� �3��l '�� '� �_ ; • 3.5"(8.89 cm)or 4.0"(10.16 cm)octagonal box. � 2_1 � 2 � 0,�-;� , _ __ — :� ,, � _ — , ; . _ , = %! -- • Single-gang box(except relay or isolator base). �_ - __ _ _-_-- • With B501 BH or B501 BHT base, use a 4.0" (10.16 cm) square box. Address dial on back of detector • With B224R6 or B22481 base,use a 3.5"(8.89 cm)or 4.0" (10.16 cm)octagonal box,or a 4.0"(10.16 cm)square box. NOTE: 1) Because of the inherent supervision provided by the SLC loop,end-of-line resistors are not required. Wiring'T-taps"or branches are permitted for Style 4 (C/ass "B') wiring. 2) When using relay or sounder bases, consult JCI-60084 (M500XJ) for device limitations between isolator modules and isolator bases. Agency Listings and Approvals These listings and approvals apply to the modules specified in this document.In some cases,certain modules or applications may not be listed by certain approval agencies,or listing may be in process. Consult factory for latest listing status. • UL Listed:S2375 • ULC Listed:S24131 • MEA Listed:383-02-E Vol.III • FM Approved • CSFM:7270-0554:133 Page 2 of 3—JCI-6936:A2•8/19/08 Product Line Information STI9605: High-profile, surface-mount, smoke detector guard, "A"suffix indicates ULC Listed model. wire.* STI 9604: Flush-mount heat detector guard,wire.' 5951J Series: Intelligent thermal detector.Must be mounted to one of the bases listed below. STI 9610:Surface-mount heat detector guard,wire.` 5951J SeriesA:Same as 5951J Series but with ULC Listing. `For dimensions and additional information on STI Steel Web Stoppers,see data sheet JCI-60087. 5951 RJ:Intelligent thermal detector with rate-of-rise feature. 5951 RJA:Same as 5951 RJ but with ULC Listing. STI8200-SS: Flush-mount stainless steel smoke detector guard(compatibility pending). 5951 HJ:Intelligent high-temperature thermai detector. STI8230-SS: Surtace-mount stainless steel smoke detector 5951 HJA:Same as 5951 HJ but with ULC l.isting. guard(compatibility pending). BASES: 6210LPJBP:Standard U:S.low-profile base,pkg.of 10. 6210LPJA:Standard U.S.low-profile base,ULC Listing. B501JBP:Standard European flangeless base,pkg.of 10. B501JA:Standard European flangeless base,ULC Listing. 6501 BH(A):Sounder base,includes 6501(A)base. B501 BHT(A): Same as 6501 BH(A), but includes temporal sounder. 6224RB(A):Intelligent relay base. B22461(A): Intelligent isolator base. Isolates SLC from loop shorts. ACCESSOR/ES: F110: Retrofit replacement flange for older style high profile bases.Converts bases for use with FlashScan�detectors. RA400Z(A): Remote !FD annunciator. 3—32 VDC. Fits U.S. single-gang electrical box. Supported by B210LPJBP(A) and 6501 J(A)bases only. SMK400: Surface mounting kit provides for entry of surtace wiring conduit.For use with B501J(A)base only. RMK400: Recessed mounting kit. For use with 6501J(A)base only. SMB600:Surface mounting kit for use with 6210LPJBP(A). BCK-2006:Black detector covers,box of 10. M02-04-01:Test magnet. M02-09-00:Test magnet with telescope stick. XR26: Detector removal tool. Allows installation and/or removal of FlashScan� Series detector heads from base in high ceiling installations. T55-127-000:Detector removal tool without pole. XP-4:Extension oole for XR2B.Comes in three 5-ft.sections. DETECTOR GUARDS: NOTE: Some guards listed below may not be applicable to 5951J Series. STI9601: Low-profile, flush-mount smoke detector guard, wire." STI9602: Low-profile, surface-mount, smoke detector guard, wire.' FlashScar� is a registered trademark oi Honeywell International Inc.Bay- STI9609: High-profile, flush-mount, smoke detector guard, blend0 is a registered trademark of Bayer Corp. wire.` �008.All rights reserved.Unauthorized use of this document is strictly pro- hibited. This document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. We try to keep our product information up-to-date and accurate. �� We cannot cover all specific applications or anticipate all requirements. M�•:.,;�-�..-::a�:.-:2�� All specifications are subject ro change without notice_ ��""` � �� Made in the U.S.A. For more information,contact Johnson Controls Field Support Center. 507 East Michigan Street,Milwaukee,WI 53202 www.johnsoncontrols.com Page 3 oi 3—JCI-6936:A2•8/19/08 JCI-60220:A 5600 Series �� -�' 1 Mechanical Heat Detectors )ohnson � �� Controls �� GENERAL � �F, System Sensor's 5600 Series mechanical heat detectors offer `�s�" a low-cost option for property protection against fire and for � �� r = ��:�° �.;.. non-life-safety installations, where smoke detectors are inap- �� ', , �� '� � �� '�� propriate. �� ` Multiple configurations. The 5600 Series offers a fuil line of ��o��" �� .� ` configurations to accommodate a broad range of applications. �,� �x�°�,��,; , � Both single- and dual-circuit models are offered, each avail- able for low- and high-temperature ratings with either fixed- � � '!�- ` temperature or combination fixed-temperature/rate-of-rise � �� (ROR)activation. The ROR element of the fixed/ROR models sss,Pr�,;�, is restorable,to accommodate field-testing the unit. � � Installation flexibility. To satisfy a variety of installations, the 5600 Series easily mounts to single-gang and octagonal back- boxes. These models also accommodate 4" (101.6 mm) square backboxes when used with a plaster ring. The mount- For models 5601,5603,5621,5623: 100°F(38°C). ing bracket is reversible to allow for flush- and surface-mount For models 5602,5604,5622,5624: 150°F(65.6°C). backbox installations. Visual identification. The 5600 Series provides clear mark- Alarm temperature: ings on the exterior of the unit to ensure that the proper detec- r=or models 5601,5603,5621,5623: 135°F(57°C). tor is being used. Alphanumeric characters identify the For models 5602,5604,5622, 5624: 194°F(90°C). activation method, as well as the temperature rating, in degrees Fahrenheit and Celsius. Fixed temperature models Rate-of-Rise Threshold: 15°F (8.3°C) per minute (models are identified "FX", while combination fixed/rate-of-rise units 5601,5602,5621,5022 only). are marked "FX/ROR". The 5600 Series also provides a col- Operating Humidiry Range:5%to 95°%RH noncondensing. lector as a post-activation indicator. Once the detector has Input Terminals:non-polarized, accept 14 to 22 AWG (2.0 to been activated, the collector drops from the unit to allow easy 0.33 mm2). identification of the specific unit in alarm. Dimensions:diameter with mounting bracket:4.57"(116 mm); FEATURES height with mounting bracket: 1.69"(43 mm). • Multiple configurations available: Weight:6 oz.(170 grams). —Fixed-temperature (non-resettable) or combination fixed Mounting Options: 3.5" (88.9 mm) octagonal backbox; 4" (non-resettable)/rate-of-rise(self-restoring). (101.6 mm) octagonal backbox; single-gang backbox; 4" —Low-temperature and high-temperature ratings. (101.6 mm) square backbox with a square-to-round plaster ring. —Single-circuit and dual-circuit. • Easy-to-read alphanumeric identification of detector rype ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS and temperature rating. • External collector provid�s visual indication of activation. Operating Voltage Contact Ratings(resistive) • Reversible mounting bracket for flush- and surface-mount 6-125 VAC 3.o A installations. 6-28 VDC 1.0 A 125 VDC 0.3 A • Flexible mounting capabilities:single-gang,3.5"or 4"octag- 250 VDC 0.1 A onal,4"(101.6 mm)square with plaster ring. � • Easy-to-use terminal screws provide a more positive wiring Mechanical heat detector shall be a System Sensor 5600 connection. Series model number , Listed to Underwriters Labora- tories UL 521 for Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling • Low-profile design to coordinate with room aesthetics. Systems.The detector shall be either a single-circuit or a dual- circuit type,normally open.The detector shall be rated for acti- AGENCY LISTINGS AND APPROVALS vation at either 135°F (57°C) or 1sa°F (90°C), and shall acti- Listing information not available. Consult manual for lists of vate by means of a fixed-temperature thermal sensor, or a compatible UL-Listed devices. In some cases,certain modules combination fixed-temperature/rate-of-rise thermal sensor. or applications may not be listed by certain approval agencies, The rate-of-rise element shall be activated by a rapid rise in or listing may be in process. Consult factory for latest listing temperature, approximately 15°F (8.3°C) per minute. The status. detector shall include a reversible mounting bracket for mount- ing to 3.5-inch (88.9 mm)octagonal,4-inch(101.6 mm)octag- SPECIFICATIONS onal, single gang, and 4-inch (101.6 mm) square backboxes with a square-to-round plaster ring. Wiring connections shall PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS be made by means of SEMS screws that shall accommodate 14 —22 AWG wire. The detector shall contain alphanumeric Maximum installation temperature: JCI-60220:A•5/23/08—Page 1 of 2 markings on the exterior of the housing to identify its tempera- restorable,to allow for field-testing.The detectors shall include ture rating and activation method. The rate-of-rise element of an external collector that shall drop upon activation to identify combination fixed-temperature/rate-of-rise models shall be the unit in alarm. ORDERING INFORMATION Model* Circuit Temperature Activation UL Protected Spacing, Rating 10 (3.048 m)Ceiling 5601 Single 135°F(57°C) Fixed-Temperature/Rate-of-Rise 50 ft.x 50 ft.(1524 m x 15.24 m) 5602 Single 194°F(90°C) Fixed-Temperature/Rate-of-Rise 50 ft.x 50 ft.(15.24 m x 1524 m) 5603 Single 135°F(57°C) Fixed-Temperature 25 ft.x 25 ft.(7.62 m x 7.62 m) 5604 Singie 194°F(90°C) Fixed-Temperature 25 ft.x 25 ft.(7.62 m x 7.62 m) 5621 Oual 135°F(57°C) Fixed-Temperature/Rate-of-Rise 50 ft.x 50 ft.(15.24 m x 15.24 m) 5622 Dual 194°F(90°C) Fixed-Temperature/Rate-of-Rise 50 ft.x 50 ft.(15.24 m x 15.24 m) 5623 Dual 135°F(57°C) Fixed-Temperature 25 ft.x 25 ft.(7.62 m x 7.62 m) 5624 Dual 194°F(90°C) Fixed-Temperature 25 ft.x 25 ft.(7.62 m x 7.62 m) NOTE:Refer to NFPA 72 guidelines for spacing reductions when ceiling heights exceed]0 feet(3.048 m). �Add an A'to part number 7or ULC model. Previous ORDER Previous ORDER HD-601 5601 HD-621 5621 HD-602 5602 HD-622 5622 HD-603 5603 HD-623 5623 HD-604 5604 HD-624 5624 WIRING DIAGRAMS ;�-� Single-Circuit Models i i + �� Co�trol r� �'�,��\I EOL� i Panel ;� � \ 1 � \ SJ �� j _ �--'i � OR � � � 6931wir1_wmt i � 1 y i j '� �� i `� Auxiliar \ ', 1 � Device � ; �'�, � • � EOL �� I Control ; i " �->,-----i �' \ ---�', ,� � Panel �l � I Auxiliary� � L' `�� Au x i l i ary; � ; `� �� ',Device j� � � Device ' � � � ---- � ---- , �� --, � - , , ___._____ �� OR - ssa,w�rzwmr Auxiliary� , ��Auxilfary; Dual-Circuit Models Device I �, � 'Device ! ,�� 002008.A�I rights reserved.Unauthorized use of this document is strictly pro- hibited. This document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. � We try to keep our product information up-to-date and accurate. �� We cannot cover all specific applications or anticipate all requirements. FM.� '� All specifications are subject to change without notice. �:a,�:�,��:a�''"'�.�,"� Made in the U.S.A. For more information,contact Johnson Controls Field Support Center. 507 East Michigan Street,Milwaukee,WI 53202 www.johnsoncontrols.com Page 2 of 2—JCI-60220:A•5/23/OS I jci-60432:A InnovairFlex ti �,I i Intelligent Non-Relay Photoelectric �ohnson �� Duct Smoke Detector Controls Generai The JCI InnovairFlex DNR intelligent non-relay photoelectric duct smoke detector and DNRW watertight non-relay photoelec- � �~s '�� ` � ` �- � '� tric duct smoke detector feature a pivoting housing that fits both �-� square and rectangular footprints capabie of mounting to a � 3 �� ''�" ��' � �A� � �� .��p� -�. � ��, round or rectangular duct. $ � � �� DNRW duct smoke detector,with its NEMA-4 rating, is listed as � !' ' � � � �� `� a watertight enclosure providing protection against falling dirt, � � ��'� � �' � �fG�� "> � � ��'� � �� 3 � ��F�� . rain, and windblown dust, splashing and hose directed water, �- �, ailowing operators to use the detector in the most extreme envi- �� -, � ��,,,, �� ronments. �"'�''� � �y �°"� � � ��`�,, These units sense smoke in the most challenging conditions, �; ' ' operating in airflow speeds of 100 to 4,000 feet per minute,tem- peratures of -4 degrees F to 158 degrees F, and a humidity ! 5 range of 0 to 95 percent(non-condensing.) �� °��°� °�'��°^�'�� '� An improved cover design isolates the sensor head, which Specifications allows for ease of maintenance. A cover tamper feature indi- cates a trouble signal for a removed or improperly installed sen- Size: (Rectangle) 14.38 in �37 cm) Length; 5 in (12.7 cm) sor cover. The JCI InnovairFlex housing provides a 3/4-inch Width,2.5 in(6.6 cm)Depth conduit knockout and ample space to facilitate easy wiring and Size:(Square)7.75 in(19.7 cm)!ength;9 in�22.9 cm)Width; mounting of a relay module. 2.5 in(6.35 cm)Depth The JCI Innovairrlex duct smoke detector can be customized to Weight: 1.6 Ib(0.73 kg) meet local codes and specifications without additional wiring. Environmental Rating:N�MA-4(DNRW)only The new InnovairFlex product line is compatible with all previous Operating Temperature Range: -4 degrees F to 158 degrees Innovair models,including remote test accessories. F(-20 degrees C to 70 degrees C) Features Storage Temperature Range: -22 degrees F to 158 degrees F(-30 degrees C to 70 degrees C) • Photoelectric,integrated low-flow technology Operating Humidity Range: 0°ro to 95°o relative humidity • Air velocity rating from 100 fUmin to 4,000 ft/min (0.5 m/s to (non-condensing) 20.32 Ms) Air Duct Velocity: 100 to 4,000 fUmin(0.5 to 20.32 m/s) • Versatile mounting options: square or rectangular configura- t�on Accessories • Broad ranges for operating temperature (-4� to 158F) and JCI provides system flexibility with a variety of accessories, humidity(0%to 95%non-condensing) including two remote test stations and different means of visible • Patented sampling tube installs from front or back of the and audible system annunciation.As with our duct smoke detec- detector with no toots required tors,all duct smoke detectors accessories are UL listed. • Cover tamper signal • Increased wiring space with a newly added 3/4" conduit ACCESSORY CURRENT LOAD�AT 24 VDC knockout • Available space within housing to accommodate mounting of Device ( Standby Alarm a relay module • Easily accessible code wheels on sensor head (sold sepa- RA400Z OmA 12 mA Max rately) • Clear cover for convenient visual inspection RTS451/ OmA 12mA Max RTS451 KEY • Remote testing capability • Requires com line power only • Accommodates the installation of an addressable relay mod- AgenCy LISt111gS alld ApprOVa1S ute, sold separately, (FRM-1) for applications requiring a Consult product manual for lists of compatible UL-Listed form-C relay devices. In some cases, certain modules may not be listed by certain approval agencies, or listing may be in process. Con- sult factory for latest listing status. • UL Listed: S911 • ULC�isted:S911 • CFSM Listed:3242-1653:209 jci-60432:A•02/27/09—Page 1 of 2 Product Line Information DNR:Intelligent non-relay photoelectric low flow smoke detector housingOrder 2951 J detector separately. DNRW: Watertight intelligent non-relay photoelectric low flow duct smoke detector housing.Order 2951 J detector separately. 2951J:Addressable low-profile photoelectric smoke detector DCOIL:Remote test coil required with RTS451/RTS451 KEY DSTi:Metal sampling tube duct width up to 1 ft(0.3m) DST1.5: Metal sampling tube duct widths up to 1 ft to 2 ft(0.3 to 0.6 m) DST3: Metal sampling tube duct widths up to 2 ft to 4 ft(0.6 to 12 m) DST5: Metai sampling tube duct widths up to 4 ft to 8 ft(1.2 to 2.4 m) DST10:Metal sampling tube duct widths up to 8 ft to 12 ft(2.4 to 3.7 m) DH4000E-1:Weatherproof enclosure ETX:Metal exhaust tube duct,width 1 ft(0.3 m) M02-04-00:Test magnet P48-21-00:End cap for metai sampling tubes RA400Z:Remote annunciator alarm LED RTS451:Remote test station RTS451 KEY:Remote test station with key lock Important Notes • The use of either RTS451 or RTS451 KEY requires the instal- lation of an accessory coil, DCOIL, sold seperately. Please refer to the DNR or DNRW installation manual for more infor- mation. • The RTS451 /RT8451 KEY test coil circuit requires an exter- nal 24VDC power supply which must be UL listed. �02009.All rights reserved.Unauthorized use of this document is strictly pro- hibited. This document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. y We try to keep our product information up-to-date and accurate. We cannot cover all specific applications or anticipate all requirements. ' All specifications are subject to change without notice. �___ � Made in the U.S.A. For more information,contact Johnson Controls Field Support Center. 507 East Michigan Street,Milwaukee,WI 53202 www.johnsoncontrols.com Page 2 of 2—jci-60432:A•02/27/09 JCI-60056:A Intelligent Bases J HNSON iB210LPJ A), 622461(A), B224RB(A), B501J(A), CONTR LS 6501 BH(A), 6501 BH-2{A), 6501 BHT(A), !B5016H'f'r2(A), Mounting Kits, and Accessories � General �� w � ��°� `' *a� �� E" �:=j ��,, Intelligent mounting bases and kits provide a variety of ways to � �� , � �^`�� ;�� A� �.. �„�� _ , install Johnson Controls detectors in any application. Intelligent ,_ °� ° e � detectors can be mounted in either flanged or flangeless bases � �� .� �,�,� '�� , � � depending on junction box selection (see Junction Box Seleo- � �°` �,�� ; ,,1��. tion Guide).Across this product line,detectors plug in easily to � � �� a, � th� base with SEMS screws; and models employ various 12 to �- �� "� Rela ease � 22 AWG wire ranges. Flangeless Mounting Base� Y Relay,isolator,and sounder bases can be used to meet local code requirements. Relay bases provide one Form-C contact � s�_ � ��'�� °` relay for control of auxiliary functions such as door closure and � � � ��'' E � elevator recall. Isolator bases allow loops to continue to operate s.: under fault conditions and automaticaliy restore when the fault is * ��' � � 4 " �� removed. Sounder bases are available in temporal and non- � �� 3'�� `�� temporal pattern versions depending on whether the signal is to � � ��r . be used for evacuation purposes. Flanged Mounting Base Recessed Mounting The RMK400 recessed mounting kit provides the most aes- thetically pleasing installation. Surface mounting boxes are ��d ,�� available when flush mounting isn't possible. �,�� h.�� ' ��° � Specifications �, � - �r� ; - � � , �� Diameter: For 8501J: 4.1" (104 mm). For 822481, 8224R8, �`� ��t� �� 3 � �°�� 8210LPJ: 6.1" (155 mm). For 85018H, 85018H-2, 85018HT, � ��<� �� z;��" �� 85018HT-2:6.0"(152 mm). Standard Sounder Base Flangeless Surface Mounting Wire gauge: for 822481, 8224R8: 14 to 24 AWG. For 8210LPJ,8501J, 85018H, 85018H-2, 85018HT, 85018NT-2: Maximum ripple voltage: 10%of supply voltage. 12to18AWG. Temperature range: For 822481, 8224R8, 85018H, 85018H- Startup capacitance:2Q0 NF. 2, 85018HT, 85018HT-2: 32°F to 120°F (0°C to 49°C). For Set time: for 85018H and B501BHT, 6 to 15 seconds. For 8501J and 8210LPJ,32°F to 150°F(0°C to 66°C). 85018H-2 and B5018HT-2,0.75 to 5 7 seconds. Humidity range: 10%to 93%RH,non-condensing. Sound output: greater than 90 dBA measured in anechoic System temperature and humidity ranges: This system room at 10 feet (3.048 m), 24 volts. 85 dBA minimum in UL meets NFPA requirements for operation at 0°C to 49°C(32°F to reverberant room. 120°F); and at a relative humidity (noncondensing) of 85% at 30°C(86°F)per NFPA,and 93%±2%at 32°C±Z°C�gg_6°F± Recessed Mounting Kit 1.1°F)per ULC.However,the useful life of the system's standby The RMK400 can be used with drywall or suspended ceilings. batteries and the electronic components may be adversely The aesthetically pleasing design can be used with standard affected by extreme temperature ranges and humidity. There- junction boxes—suitable for use with 4.0" (10.16 cm) octago- fore, it is recommended that this system and all peripherals be nal, 50 mm, and 60 mm junction boxes connected to flexible installed in an environment with a nominal room temperature of conduit. Note that junction boxes are not included in the kit.As 15°C to 27°C(60°F to 80°F). an application example,with the B501J base,the RMK400 pro- vides a simple installation solution in applications that demand a Electrical Ratings lower-profile smoke detector. FOR 6224R8,a2248i: Agency Listings and Approvals Operating voltage: 15 to 32 VDC(powered by SLC). Standby ratings:<500 uA maximum @ 24 VDC. The listings and approvals below apply to intelligent bases as noted. In some cases, certain modules or applications may not Set time(B224R6 only):short delay 55 to 90 msec; long delay be listed by certain approval agencies, or listing may be in pro- 6 to 9 seconds. cess.Consult factory for latest listing status. Reset time(6224RB only):20 msec maximum. Listing information to be provided in upcoming edits. Consult Relay characteristics (6224RB only): two-coil latching relay; panel manuals for lists of compatible UL-Listed devices. All one Form-C contact;ratings(UL/CSA):0.9 A@ 125 VAC,0.9 A bases have been previously listed for use with various panels. @ 110 VDC,and 3.0 A@ 30 VDC. FOR 65016H,85018H-2,eSO�aHr,Bso�aHr-2: Product Line Information External supply voltage: 17 to 32 VDC INTELLIGENT BASES Standby current: 1.0 mA maximum. 6507J: Flangeless mounting base. Alarm current: 15 mA maximum. 6501JA: Flangeless mounting base,ULC Listed. JCI-60056 A•11/30/06—Page 1 of 2 �—�°6210LPJ: Flanged mounting base. B224BI: Isolator base. 6210LPJA: Flanged mounting base, UlC UL Listed. B224BIA: Isolator base,ULC Listed. 6501 BH: Standard sounder base. MDUNTING KITS AND ACCESSORIES 65016HA: Standard sounder base,ULC Listed. RMK400: Recessed mounting kit. 6501 BHT: Temporai tone sounder base. SMK400: Surface mounting kit,flangeless. B501 BHTA: Temporal tone sounder base,ULC Listed. SMB600: Surface mounting kit,flanged. 6501 BH-2: Standard sounder base, UL 864 9th edition compli- F110: Retrofit flange for B501 B, 6524. ant. 6501BH-2A: Standard sounder base, UL 864 9th edition com- �`400Z: Remote LED annunciator. pliant, ULC Listed. RA400ZA: Remote LED annunciator,ULC Listed. -��-°-°-°� B501BHT-2: Temporal tone sounder base, UL 864 9th edition M02-04-01: Detector test magnet. compliant. M02-09-00: Test magnet with telescoping handle. 6501 BHT-2A: Temporal tone sounder base,UL 864 9th edition XR26: Detector removal tool(T55-127-000 included). compliant,ULC Listed. XP-4: Extension pole for XR2B(5 to 15 ft/1.524 to 4.572 m). 6224RB: Relay base. T55-127-000: Detector removal head. B224RBA: Relay base,UL�Listed. BCK-2006: Black detector kit. Junction Box Selection Guide 4.0"Sq. Single- with 3.0" Base Models Gang 3.5"Oct. 4.0"Oct. 4.0"Sq. mud ring 50 mm 60 mm 70 mm 75 mm B501J No Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes No -��-� --m;� 6210LPJ Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No 6224R6 No Yes Yes Yes No No I Yes Yes Yes 622461 No Yes Yes Yes No No No Yes Yes B501BH,65016H-2 No No No Yes No No No No No ---- ,`° 6501 BHT,6501 BHT-2 No No No Yes No No No No No NOTE:Box depth contingent on base and wire size. P.efer to National Flectric Code or applicable local codes for appropriate recommendations. System Sensor�is a registered trademarks of Honeywell Internationai Inc. 002006 by Johnson Controls Inc.All rights reserved.Unauthorized use of this document is stnctly prohibited. This document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. We try to keep our product information up-to-date and accurate. We cannot cover all specific applications or anticipate a�l requirements. All specifications are subject to change without notice. Johnson Controls 507 East Michigan Street Milwaukee,WI 53202•www.johnsoncontrols.com Page 2 of 2—JCI-60056 A•11/30/06 �o�-s�2o:B ��-� M300MJ, M301 MJ, �, . M302MJ & M300DJ �;--.-_��___ �ohnson '` ,�� Monitor Modules with FlashScan� Controls General Four different monitor modules are availabie for Johnson Con- �h��,�� :. trols' intelligent control panels for a variety of applications. Monitor modules supervise a circuit of dry-contact input , � ,� �� y�"o�,�, `� �� T devices,such as conventional heat detectors and pull stations, � � �� , � � � or monitor and power a circuit of twawire smoke detectors ° '� � � ; � " ��°� (M302MJ). �� , . �«_�rFO��«,,. �� _� -�---3� M300MJ is a standard-sized module(typically mounts to a 4" �<�� [10.16 cmJ square box)that supervises either a Class A(Style ` �;.;., ; D)or Class B(Style B)circuit of dry-contact input devices. ... r M301 MJ is a miniature monitor module (a mere 1.3" (3.302 "`"` � cm) H x 2J5" (6.985 cm) W x 0.5" (1.270 cm) D) that super- �` "� ��p �� vises a Class B (Style B) circuit of dry-contact input devices. ,'� 6��,��w^� �� Its compact design altows the M301 MJ to often be mounted in � � �� ' � a single-gang box behind the device it monitors. �� '� e '.:� �a�.�i� .,,� ' ��. M302MJ is a standard-sized module that monitors and super- vises compatible two-wire, 24 volt, smoke detectors on a Class A(Style D)or Class B(Style B)circuit. �----�M300DJ is a standard-sized dual monitor module that moni- M300MJ(Type H) tors and supervises two independent two-wire Style B (Class B)dry-contact initiating device circuits(IDCs)at two separate, A) Initiating Device Circuit. A 47K ohm End-of-Line Resistor consecutive addresses in intelligent,two-wire systems. (provided) terminates the Style B circuit. No resistor is FlashScanO(U.S. Patent 5,539,389) is a communication pro- required for supervision of the Style D circuit. tocol that greatly increases the speed of communication between analog intelligent devices.Intelligent devices commu- M300MJ OPERATION nicate in a grouped fashion. If one of the devices within the Each M300MJ uses one of the available module addresses on group has new information,the panel CPU stops the group poll an SLC loop.It responds to regular polls from the control panel and concentrates on single points. The net effect is response and reports its type and the status (open/normal/short) of its speed greater than five times that of other designs.protocols. Initiating Device Circuit (IDC). A flashing LED indicates that the module is in communication with the control panel. The � M300MJ Monitor Module LED latches steady on alarm(subject to current limitations on the loop). • Built-in type identification automatically identifies this device as a monitor module to the control panel. M300MJ SPECIFICATIONS • Powered directly by two-wire SLC loop.No additional power Nominal operating voltage: 15 to 32 VDC. required. Maximum current draw: 5.0 mA(LED on). • High noise(EMF/RFI)immunity. • SEMS screws with clamping plates for ease of wiring. Maximum operating current: 375µA(LED flashing). • Direct-dial entry of address: 01 — 159 on FlashScan sys- Maximum IDC wiring resistanCe: 1,500 ohms. tems;01 —99 on CLIP systems. ,01 —99 on . EOL resistance: 47K ohms. • LED flashes green during normal operation (this is a pro- Temperature range: 32°F to 120°F(0°C to 49°C). grammable option) and latches on steady red to indicate Humidity range: 10%to 93%noncondensing. alarm. The M300MJ Monitor Module is intended for use in intelligent, Dimensions: 4.5" (11.43 cm) high x 4" (10.16 cm) wide x two-wire systems, where the individual address of each mod- �•25" (3.175 cm) deep. Mounts to a 4" (10.16 cm) square x ule is selected using the built-in rotary switches. It provides 2•125��5.398 cm)deep box. either a two-wire or four-wire fault-tolerant initiating Device Cir- cuit(IDC)for normally-open-contact fire alarm and supervisory M301 MJ Mini Monitor Module devices. The module has a panel-controlled LED indicator. . guilt-in type identification automatically identifies this device The M300MJ can be used to replace M500MJ modules in as a monitor module to the panel. existing systems. • Powered directly by two-wire SLC loop.No additional power M300MJ APPLICATIONS required. Use to monitor a zone of four-wire smoke detectors, manual • High noise(EMF/RFI)immunity. fire alarm pull stations, waterflow devices, or other normally- . Tinned,stripped leads for ease of wiring. open dry-contact alarm activation devices. May also be used . Direct-dial entry of address: 01 — 159 on FlashScan sys- to monitor normally-open supervisory devices with special tems;01 —99 on CLIP systems. ,01 —99 on . supervisory indication at the control panel. Monitored circuit may be wired as an NFPA Style B(Class B)or Style D (Class jci-6720:6•01/21/09—Page 1 014 I • LED flashes during normal operation;this is a programma- 3 1415 0 � ; AD� D� 0 � ; ble option. � �g Z�I I 2 � • LED latches steady to indicate alarm on command from 3 �Z ��,3�L�1 , �4��3 i control panel. - ��i\��j4i LOOP �4 The M302MJ Interface Module is intended for use in intelli- 10�__/ 5� � ��5 � gent, addressable systems, where the individual address of 9 8 � 6 9 g 7 6 each module is selected using built-in rotary switches. This TENS ONES module ailows intelligent panels to intertace and monitor two- '� ' j ,:� �'�� wire conventional smoke detectors.It transmits the status(nor- �� mal,open,or alarm)of one full zone of conventional detectors � back to the control panel. All two-wire detectors being moni- � � � r tored must be UL compatibie with the module. The M302MJ O I. y� O � U can be used to replace M502MJ modules in existing systems. w ) � � ? � j � " m M302MJ APPUCATIDNS ( Use the M302MJ to monitor a zone of two-wire smoke detec- � tors. The monitored circuit may be wired as an NFPA Style B �v' (Class B)or Style D(Class A)Initiating Device Circuit.A 3.9 K u L � � ohm End-of-Line Resistor(provided)terminates the end of the The M301 MJ Mini Monitor Module can be installed in a single- Style B or D (class B or A) circuit (maximum IDC loop resis- gang junction directly behind the monitored unit. Its small size tance is 25 ohms). Instali ELR across terminals 8 and 9 for and light weight allow it to be installed without rigid mounting. Style D application. The M301 MJ is intended for use in intelligent, two-wire sys- M302MJ OPFRAT/ON tems where the individual address of each module is selected using rotary switches. It provides a two-wire initiating device Each M302MJ uses one of the available module addresses on circuit for normally-open-contact fire alarm and security an SLC loop.It responds to regular polls from the control panel devices. The M301 MJ can be used to replace M501 MJ mod- and reports its type and the status (open/normal/short) of its ules in existing systems. Initiating Device�ircuit (IDC). A flashing LFD indicates that the module is in communication with the control panel. The M301 MJ APPLICAT/ONS LED latches steady on alarm(subject to current limitations on Use to monitor a single device or a zone of four-wire smoke the loop). detectors,manual fire alarm pull stations,waterflow devices,or M302MJ SP�CIFICATIONS other normally-open dry-contact devices. May also be used to Nominal operating voltage: 15 to 32 VDC. monitor normaliy-open supervisory devices with special super- visory indication at the control panel. Monitored circuiUdevice Maximum current draw: 5.1 mA(�ED on). is wired as an NFPA Style B(Class B) Initiating Device Circuit. Maximum IDe wiring resistance: 25 ohms. A 47K ohm End-of-Line Resistor(provided)terminates the cir- cuit. Maximum operating current: 270µA(�cD flashing). M301MJ OPERATION EOL resistance: 3.9K ohms. Each M301 MJ uses one of the available module addresses on External supply voltage(between Terminals T3 and T4): an SLC loop.It responds to regular polls from the control panel DC voltage: 24 volts power limited. Ripple voltage: 0.1 Vrms and reports its type and the status (open/normallshort) of its maximum.Current:90 mA per module maximum. Initiating Device Circuit(IDC). Temperature range: 32°F to 120°f(0°C to 49°C). M301MJ SPECIFICATIONS Humidity range: 10%to 93%noncondensing. Nominal operating voltage: 15 to 32 VDC. Dimensions: 4.5" (11.43 cm) high x 4" (10.16 cm) wide x Maximum operating current: 375µA. 1•25" (3.175 cm) deep. Mounts to a 4" (10.16 cm) square x 2.125"(5.398 cm)deep box. Maximum IDC wiring resistance: 1,500 ohms. eo�resistance: a�K onms. w��"� M300DJ Dual Monitor Module Temperature range: 32°F to 120°F(0°C to 49°C). The M300DJ Dual Monitor Module is intended for use in intelli- Humidity range: 10%to 93%noncondensing. gent, two-wire systems. It provides two independent two-wire initiating device circuits (IDCs) at two separate, consecutive Dimensions: 1.3" (3.302 cm) high x 2.75" (6.985 cm) wide x addresses. It is capable of monitoring normally open contact 0.65"(1.651 cm)deep. fire alarm and supervisory devices;or either normally open or Wire length: 6"(1b.24 cm)minimum. normaliy closed security devices. The module has a single panel-controlled LED. M302MJ Interface Module NOTE: The M300DJ provides two Class 8 (Style 8) IDC circuits ONLY. Class A (Style D) IDC circuits are NOT supported in any • Supports compatible two-wire smoke detectors. application. • Supervises IDC wiring and connection of external power M300DJ SPECIFICATIONS source. • High noise(EMF/RFI)immunity. Normal operating voltage range: 15 to 32 VDC. • SEMS screws with clamping plates for ease of wiring. Maximum current draw: 6.4 mA(LED on). • Direct-dial entry of address: 01 - 159 on FlashScan sys- Maximum operating current: 750�A(LED flashing). tems,01 -99 on CLIP systems. Maximum IDC wiring resistance: 1,500 ohms. Page 2 of 4—jci-6720:6•01/21/09 _ EOL resistance: 47K ohms. Temperature range: 32°to 120°F(0°to 49°C). Humidity range: 10%to 93%(non-condensing). Dimensions: 4.5" (11.43 cm) high x 4" (10.16 cm) wide x 2.125"(5.398 cm)deep. M300DJ AUTOMATIC ADDRESSING The M300DJ automatically assigns itself to two addressable ra��nte eTYrf!!'^y :7:�' .11° ..�7^yl^8� 8.�.�.fBSS. �Of cXc.^1NI� 'f :~€ M300DJ is set to address"26",then it will automatically assign itself to addresses"26"and"27". NOTE:"Ones"addresses on the M300DJ are 0,2,4, 6, or 8 only Terminals 6 and 7 use the first address,and terminals 8 and 9 use the second address. QCAUTION: Avoid duplicating addresses on the system. Installation M300MJ, M302MJ, and M300DJ modules mount directly to a standard 4"(10.16 cm)square,2.125" (5.398 cm)deep, elec- trical box.They may also be mounted to the SMB500 surface- mount box. Mounting hardware and installation instructions are provided with each module. All wiring must conform to applicable local codes, ordinances, and regulations. These modules are intended for powpr-limited wiring only. The M301 MJ module is intended to be wired and mounted without rigid connections inside a standard electrical box. All wiring must conform to applicable local codes,ordinances,and regulations. Agency Listings and Approvals In some cases, certain modules may not be listed by certain approval agencies, or listing may be in process. Consult fac- tory for latest listing status. • UL:S1570 • ULC:S8643 • FM Approved • CSFM: 7300-0554-131(M300MJ, M301 MJ, M302MJ); 7300-0554-144(M 300 DJ) • MEA:457-99-E Vol.3 Product Line Information � NOTE:'A'suffix indicates ULC-listed model. M300MJ(A): Monitor module. M301 MJ(A): Monitor module,miniature. M302MJ(A): Monitor module,two-wire detectors. M300DJ(A): Monitor module, dual, two independent Class B circuits. SM6500: Optional surface-mount backbox. NOTE: See rnstailation instructions and refer to the SLC Wiring Manual,PN 51870. jci-6720:6•01/21/09—Page 3 of 4 i � FlashScanOO is a registered trademark of Honeywell International Inc. 002009. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use of this document is strictly prohibited. This document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. We try to keep our product information up-to-date and accurate. We cannot cover all specific appiications or anticipate all requirements. ��:� All specifications are subject to change without notice. Made in the U.S.A. For more information,contact Johnson Controls Field Support Center. 507 East Michigan Street,Milwaukee,WI 53202 www.johnsoncontrol;.com Page 4 of 4—jci-6720:6•01/21/09 JCI-6724:B M300CJ & M300RJ � -,� Control and Relay Modules �ohnson / �,� a with FlashScanO COfltf0�5 General M300CJ Control Module: The M300CJ Addressable Control Module provides Johnson Controls intelligent control panels a circuit for Notification Appliances (homs, strobes, speakers, � ��<��,�� etc.)or to monitor a telephone circuit.Addressability allows the M300CJ to be activated,either manually or through panel pra � � �—� � �,� `� gramming,on a select(zone or area of coverage)basis. � '�� °� '""'�� i �� ---� M300RJ Relay Module: The M300RJ Addressable Relay �*�'F��Pr�t` ,�,,, ;a Module provides the system with a dry-contact output for acti- , � „o�,,;;�,fz�„ x�,,: vating a variety of auxiliary devices, such as fans, dampers, control equipment,etc.Addressability allows the dry contact to """' g" be activated, either manually or through panel programming, ��, � """�� on a select basis. � � �`�� `: � FlashS�anO(U.S. Patent 5,539,389) is a communication pro- � �� tocol that greatly enhances the speed of communication , �� `� �. �.� between analog intelligent devices.Intelligent devices commu- �� nicate in a grouped fashion. If one of the devi�es within the � ��°��a�� `�� ° , .��.. �.� group has new information,the panel CPU stops the group poll and concentrates on single points. The net effect is response speed greater than five times that of other designs. Features M300CJ • Built-in type identification automatically identifiss these devices to the control panel. • The M300CJ is configured for a single Ciass B (Style Y)or Internai circuitry and relay powered directly by two-wire �lass A(Style Z)Notification Appliance Circuit. • SLC loop. The M300CJ module requires power(for horns, ' The M300RJ provides two Form-C dry contacts that switch strobes,etc.),audio(for speakers),or a telephone riser(for xogether. handsets). • Integral LED "blinks" green each time a communication is Operation received from the control panel and turns on in steady red Cach M300CJ or M300RJ uses one of 159 possible module when activated. addresses on a SLC loop (99 on CLIP loops). It responds to • LED blink may be deselected globally(affe�ts aii devices). regular polls from the control panel and reports its type and • High noise immunity(EMF/RFI). status, including the open/normal/short status of its Notifica- • The M300CJ may be used to switch?4-volt NAC power, tion Appiiance Circuit (NAC). The LED blinks with each poll audio(up to 70.7 Vrms)or telephone. received. On command, it activates its internal relay. The M300CJ supervises Class B(Style Y)or Class A(Style Z)noti- • Wide viewing angle of LED. fication or control circuits. • SEMS screws with clamping plates for wiring ease. Upon code command from the panel,the M300CJ will discon- • Direct-dial entry of address 01— 159 for FlashScan loops, nect the supervision and connect the external power supply in 01 —99 for CLIP mode loops. the proper polarity across the load device. The disconnection • Speaker,audible/visual,and telephone appli�ations may be of the supervision provides a positive indication to the panel wired for Class B or A(Style Y or Z). that the control relay actually turned ON. The external power supply is always relay isolated from the communication loop so Applications that a trouble condition on the external power supply will never interfere with the rest of the system. The M300CJ is used to switch 24 VDC audible/visual power, Rotary switches set a unique address for each module. The high-level audio (speakers),or control telephone devices.The address may be set before or after mounting. The built-in M300RJ may be programmed to operate dry contacts for TYPE CODE�not settable)will identify the module to the con- applications such as door holders or Air Handling Unit shut- trol panel, so as to differentiate between a module and a sen- down,and to reset four-wire smoke detector power. sor address. NOTE:Refer to the SLC Manual(PN 51870) for details regarding releasing applications with the M300CJ. $pecifications for M300CJ Construction Normal operating voltage: 15 to 32 VDC. • The face plate is made of off-white heat-resistant plastic. Maximum current draw: 6.5 mA(LED on). • Controls include two rotary switches for direct-dial entry of Average operating current: 350µA direct poll (CLIP mode), address(01-159). 375µA group poll(FlashScan�mode)with LED flashing. JCI-6724:B•12/11/08—Page 1 of 2 External supply voltage(between Terminals T3 and T4): PrOdUCt �.Itl@ �t1f01'111at1011 maximum 80 volts(RMS or DC). NOTE:'A"suffix indicates ULC Listed model. Drain on external supply: 2 mA maximum (using internal EOL relay). M300CJ(A): Intelligent Addressable Control Module. EOL resistance: 47K ohms. M300RJ(A): Intelligent Addressable Relay Module. Temperature range: 32°F to 120°F(0°C to 49°C). A2143-20: Capacitor,required for Class A(Style Z)operation of speakers. Humidity range: 10%to 93%non-condensing. SM6500: Optional Surtace-Mount Backbox. Dimensions: 4.5" (114.3 mm) high x 4" (101.6 mm) wide x 1.25" (31.75 mm) deep. Mounts to a 4" (101.6 mm) square x C6500: Control Module Barrier—required by UL for separat- � 2.125"(53.975 mm)deep box. ing power-limited and non-power limited wiring in the same e,_ junction box as M300CJ. � Specifications for M300RJ NOTE:For installation instructions,see the following documents: Normal operating voltage: 15 to 32 VDC. • M300CJ Installatron document 156-3750. Maximum current draw: 6.5 mA(LED on). • M300RJ lnstallation document 156-3751. Average operating current: 230µA direct poll(CLIP mode), ' JCI SLC Wiring Manual,document 51870. 255µA group poll(FlashScanO mode)with LED flashing. EOL resistance: not used. Temperature range: 32°F to 120°F(0°C to 49°C). Humidity range: 10%to 93%non-condensing. Dimensions: 4.5" (114.3 mm) high x 4" (101.6 mm) wide x 1.25" (31.75 mm) deep. Mounts to a 4" (101.6 mm) square x 2.125"(53.975 mm)deep box. Contact Ratings FOR BOTH M300CJ AND M300RJ MODELS Load Application Maximum Current Description Voltage Rating Resistive Non-Coded 30 VDC 3.0 A Resistive Coded 30 VDC 2.0 A Resistive Non-Coded 110 VDC 0.9 A Resistive Non-Coded 125 VAC 0.9 A Inductive Coded 30 VDC 0.5 A (UR=Sms) Inductive Coded 30 VDC 1.0 A (UR=2ms) Inductive Non-Coded 125 VAC 0.5 A (PF=0.35) NOTE:Maximum(Speakers):70.7 V RMS,50 W Agency Listings and Approvals In some cases, certain modules may not be listed by certain approval agencies, or listing may be in process. Consult fac- tory for latest listing status. • UL:S1570 • ULC:S1570(A version only) • FM Approved • CSFM:7300-0554:131 • MEA:457-99-E Vol.3 FlashScanOO is a registered trademark ot Honeywell International Inc. 002008. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use of this document is strictly prohibited. This document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. � We try to keep our product information up-to-date and accurate. We cannot cover all specific applications or anticipate all requirements. . �� All specifications are subject to change without notice. � "' Made in the U.S.A. For more information,contact Johnson Controls Field Support Center. 507 East Michigan Street,Milwaukee,WI 53202 www.johnsoncontrols.com Page 2 of 2—JCI-6724:6•12/11/OS JCI-601 14:A M500XJ �� + 1 Fault Isolator Module �ohnson �� Controls General ��_ _ � �____ The Johnson Controls M500XJ Fault Isolator Module is used \ with the IFC-3030, IFC2-3030, IFG2020/-1010, IFC-640, �O /1 �O � IFC2-640, IFC-400, IFC-320, IFG200,and fG2000 to protect `� the system against wire-to-wire short circuits on the SLC —�°�--� loops. � Features � p • Powered by SLC loop directly,no external power required. I CAUTION:DE£NERGIZE • Mount in standard 4.0" (10.16 cm) square (2.125" [5.398 UN�TPRIOR?OSERVIGNG cm]deep)junction boxes. • Integral L�D blinks to indicate normal condition. Illuminates i steady when short circuit condition is detected. � E • High noise(EMF/RFI)immunity. `^J � • Wide viewing angle of LED. • SEMS screws with clamping plates for ease of wiring. %— -Z� �� • Opens SLC loop automatically on detection of short, pre- � � O �� venting the short from causing failure of the entire loop. • Automatically resets on correction of short. , • Supports Style 4,6,or 7 wiring. 1`�- MSOOXJ Applications The Fault Isoiator Modules should be spaced between groups of sensors in a loop to protect the rest of the loop. Use to iso- Construction late short circuit problems within a s�ction of a loop so that other sections can continue to operate normally. The M500XJ The face plate is made of off-white plastic. Includes yellow supports a maximum of 25 devices in-between isolators, LED indicator that pulses when normal and illuminates steady except when using relay bases. when a short is detected. NOTE:ON LOADS PER RELAY BASE AND ISOLATORS/ISOLA- TOR SASES: the maximum number of addressable devices Operation between isolators(or 622461 isolator bases)is 25 devices. Automatically opens circuit when the line voltage drops below j— 25 DEVICES—� four volts. Fault Isolator Modules should be spaced between - � groups of addressable devices (maximum 25, see notes on Module — Module j or . 'z-------- ' or Page 1) in a loop to protect the rest of the loop. If a short ease ' _ " ' ease occurs between any two isolators,then both isolators immedi- szzasaa,wm� detector module ` ately switch to an open circuit state and isolate the groups of sensors between them. The remaining units on the loop con- i 6224R6 relay bases draw more current than all other intelli- tinue to fully operate. I gent devices. When cal�ulating the 25-device maximum: In Style 4 loops, the M500Y.J is generally used at each T-tap B224RB represents 2.5 devices(see example on page 2) branch, to limit the effect of short circuits on a branch to the NOTE: ON MAXIMUM NUMBER OF DEVICES: See the SLC devices on that branch. The LED indicator is on continuousiy Manual (p/n 51870) for information on loss of addresses due to during a short circuit condition. current limitations. Each module or base added reduces the capacity of address positions in an SLC. Requirements differ as The M500XJ Fault Isolator Module automatically restores the applied to relay bases(see note above). shorted portion of the communications loop to normal condi- tion when the short circuit condition is removed. Installation • Mount on a standard 4" (10.16 cm) mounting junction box which is at least 2.125"(5.398 cm)deep. • Terminal screws are provided for"in and ouY'wiring. • Installation instructions are provided with each module. • Surtace-mount box is available as an option. JCI-60114:A•4/8/OS—Page 1 of 2 � - Specifications .Architectual/Engineering Operating voltage: 15—32 VDC(peak). Specifications Current range: 5 mA for LED latched in alarm. Fault Isolator Modules shall be provided to automaticatly iso- Standby current: 400 NA maximum, plus supervision cur- late wire-to-wire short circuits on an SLC loop.The Fault Isola- rent. tor Module shall limit the number of modules or detectors that may be rendered inoperative by a short circuit fault on the S�C Pulsing current: 30 mA for 15 mS(CMX-1,CMX-2, FCM-1). Loop. If a wire-to-wire short occurs, the Fault Isolator Module Temperature range: 32°F to 120°F(0°C to 49°C). shall automatically open-circuit (disconnect) the SLC loop. When the short circuit condition is corrected, the Fault Isolator Relative humidity: 10%to 93%. Module shall automatically reconnect the isolated section of Weight: 150 grams(5 oz.). the SLC loop. The Fault Isolator Module shall not require any address-setting,and its operations shall be totally automatic. It Agency Listings and Approvals shall not be necessary to replace or reset an Fault Isolator Module after its normal operation. The Fault Isolator Module In some cases, certain modules may not be listed by certain shall mount in a standard 4.0" (10.16 cm)deep electrical box, approval agencies, or listing may be in process. Consult fac- in a surface-mounted backbox, or in the Fire Alarm Control tory for latest listing status. Panel. It shall provide a single LED which shall flash to indi- • UL:S1570 cate that the Isolator is operational and shall illuminate steadily • ULC: S8643 to indicate that a short circuit condition has been detected and isolated. • FM Approved • CSFM:7165-0554:149;7170-0554:150;7300-0554:152 Product Line Information M500XJ: Isolator Module. M500XJA: Isolator Module.Canadian(ULC)version. SMB500: Surface Mount Backbox Examples of Device Counts (see notes under Applications) STARTS -� NEXFCOt1NT '��.Module'—>; � �:ModuEe'��. detector with detector with module N standard base retay base a COUNTS AS...� + 3.5 + 1 = 5.5 Q 3 (2.5+�) (less than 25 total) ! 002008.All rights reserved.Unauthorized use of this document is stnctly pra hibited. This document is nol intended to be used for installation purposes. We try to keep our product information up-to-date and accurate. We cannot cover all specific applications or anticipate aIl requirements. �. All specifications are subject to change without notice. Made in the U.S.A. For more information,contact Johnson Controls Field Support Center. 507 East Michigan Street,Milwaukee,WI 53202 www.johnsoncontrols.com Page 2 of 2—JCI-60114:A•4/8/OS Fire Alarm System Miscellaneous Equipment: CAB-4 Series Cabinets BAT Series Batteries Powerpath NAC Power Suppli�es � " JCI-6857:A1 CAB-4 Series Cabinets �� ,� Backboxes with Locking Doors �ohnson ��,,,�� Cl(1"�f't}�S � • General AII CAB-4 cabinets for fire alarm control panels are fabricated from 16-gauge steel. The cabinet assembly consists of two basic parts: a backbox and a locking dooc Cabinets are avail- ��,,,. able in either black or red, with or without LEXAN�windows. � �,.,�"'�� f ' The LEXAN model provides a tasteful combi�ation to accent the `� decor of the finest lobby setting. � }� ` ;�� ° a � , f �� • • The key-locked door is provided with a pin-type hinge, two �� -�-='�� keys and the necessary hardware to mount the door to the � __ backbox. • The backbox has been engineered to provide ease-of-entry ,,,,,� for the installer. Knockouts are positioned at numerous �;:. � points to aid the installer in bringing a conduit into the endo- � . sure with a minimum of hardship. • Right- or left-hand hinges, selectable in the field. Door opens 180°. • Cabinets are arranged in four standard sizes, A (one tier) through D(four tiers), plus a mini cabinet(AA,one tier with- out a battery compartment).See Orde�ing Information. • A trim ring option is available for semi-flush mounting. • Chassis bridge available for assembling multiple CHS-4 chassis external to the backbox. IFC-640 in "B"sized Ordering Information CAB-4 cabinet A complete cabinet assembly consists of:a door,a backbox,an SBB-A4: Backbox assembly,one tier, BLACK. optional battery plate, and an optional semi-flush trim ring. For SBB-A4R: Backbox assembly,one tier, RED. each cabinet required, order one "DR" door and one "SBB" backbox.The BP-4 or JBP2-4 battery plate is required for each TR-A4: Accessory semi-flush-mount trim ring,one tier(opening cabinet assembly that mounts batteries and/or a power supply in 24.062"[61.118 cm]W r.20.062"[50.958 cm]H), BLACK. the lower position of the cabinet. The optional trim ring is an NOTE:Black trim rings are used with red or black cabinets. attractive"picture frame"-style black metal ring. gp_4: Battery panel for IFC-640 and IFC-3030. Used to cover M/Nl"LIA"SIZE, ONE TIER: battery and power supply when lower position is used in back- JDR-AA4: Door assembly, LEXAN window,one tier(no battery box. compartment),BLACK. JBP2-4: Battery panel for IFC2-3030. Used to cover battery and power supply when lower position is used in backbox. JDR-AA4R: Door assembly, LEXAN window, one tier(no bat- tery compartment), RED. TWO TIERS, "B"SIZE: JDR-AA4B: Door assembly, solid door, one tier (no battery JDR-B4: Door assembly, LEXAN window,two tiers, BLACK. compartment),BLACK. JDR-64R: Door assembly, LEXAN window,two tiers,RED. JDR-AA46R: Door assembly, solid door, one tier (no battery JDR-646: Door assembly,solid door,two tiers,BLACK. compartment),RED. JDR-B46R: Door assembly,solid door,two tiers,RED. SBB-AA4: Backbox assembly, one tier (no battery compart- ment),BLACK. SBB-B4: Backbox assembly,two tiers, BLACK. SBB-AA4R: Backbox assembly, one tier (no battery compart- SBB-64R: Backbox assembly,two tiers, RED. ment),RED. TR-B4: Accessory semi-flush-mount trim ring, two tiers (open- TR-AA4: Accessory semi-flush-mount trim ring, one tier (no �ng 24.062"[61.118 cm]W x 28.562"[72.548 cm]H), BLACK. battery compartment). NOTE:B/ack trim rings are used with red or black cabinets. NOTE:Black trim rings are used with red or black cabinets. BP-4: Battery panel for IFC-640 and IFC-3030. Used to cover ONE TIER, "A"S/ZE: battery and power supply when lower position is used in back- box. JDR-A4: Door assembly, LEXAN window,one tier,BLACK. JBP2-4: Battery panel for IFC2-3030. Used to cover battery JDR-A4R: Door assembly,LEXAN window,one tier, RED. and power supply when lower position is used in backbox. JDR-A4B: Door assembly,solid door,one tier, BLACK. THREE TIERS, "C"SIZE: JDR-A46R: Door assembly,solid door,one tier, RED. JDR-C4: Door assembly, LEXAN window,three tiers,BLACK. JDR-C4R: Door assembly, LEXAN window,three tiers, RED. JDR-C4B: Door assembly, solid door,three tiers, BLACK. JDR-C4BR: Door assembly,solid door,three tiers, RED. JCI-6857:A1•12/27/07—Page 1 ot 4 SBB-C4: Backbox assembly,three tiers, BLACK. JBP2-4: Battery panel for IFC2-3030. Used to cover battery SBB-C4R: Backbox assembly,three tiers,RED. and power supply when lower position is used in backbox. TR-C4: Accessory semi-flush-mount trim ring, three tiers(open- ACCESSORIES: ing 24.062"[61.118 cm]W x 37.187"[94.455 cm]H), BLACK. yyC-2: Wire channel. Provides a pair of wire trays to neatly NOTE:8/ack trim rings are used with red or black cabinets. route wiring between CHS chassis. BP-4: Battery panel for IFC-640 and IFC-3030. Used to cover CB-1: Chassis bridge. Provides a bridge between CHS Series battery and power supply when lower position is used in back- chassis. box. DP-1 B: Biank dress panel,covers one CAB-4 tier, BLACK. JBP2-4: Battery panel for IFC2-3030. Used to cover battery ADP-4B: Annunciator dress panel. and power supply when lower position is used in backbox. FOUR TIERS, �°D°�SIZE: Agency Listings and Approvals JDR-D4: Door assembly,LEXAN window,four tiers, BLACK. These listings and approvals below apply to the CAB-4 Series JDR-D4R: Door assembly,LEXAN window,four tiers, RED. Cabinets. In some cases, certain modules or applications may JDR-D46: Door assembly,solid door,four tiers,BU1CK. not be listed by certain approval agencies, or listing may be in process.Consult factory for latest listing status. JDR-D46R: Door assembly,solid door,four tiers, R�D. . UL Listed:file S1570(except AA size). SBB-D4: Backbox assembly,four tiers, BLACK. . ULC Listed:file ML118(except AA size). SBB-D4R: Backbox assembly,four tiers,RED. • MEA approved:files 317-01-E Vol. II(except AA size). TR-D4: Accessory semi-flush-mount trim ring, four tiers(open- . CSFM approved (except AA size):files 7165-0554:143(IFC- ing 24.062"[61.118 cm]W x 45.812"[116.363 cmJ H),BLACK. 640), 7170-0554:142 (IFC-640), 7165-0554:149 (IFC-3030), Note:Black trim rings are used with red or black cabinets. 7170-0554:150(IFC-3030). BP-4: Battery panel for IFC-640 and ifC-3030. Used to cover • FM approved(except AA size). battery and power supply when lower position is us�d in back- box. � - :�� x. . , � n.,._, �..�..�:�.. .,. �.. .,:..� �- ._�_ F._..��a � Cabinet Dimensions and Features ��.oyr� �s.�s>> 5.156" ! Z,qq' CA84keyhole wml -"��_ ' __�Y_' � 5.93' Knockouts on ( ;��5•os2> � �25 ' top of cabinets. I �--r--�-- ;.--.;ozso ! * (2.858 cm) ' 7.12" Height of —� --------i�;�o.sa5 cm) I (7s.osa) mounting bolt o.� � :�r� _1____ --- after installation �1•27°R1� � � KNOCKOUTS: t - ----� — j 5.93' Inner ��'; 0.875"?222 : �(15.062) KByh01@ � �' Dutec F I dimensions o�' , I> >z� �z esa; � ---�-- �---�---- (127 cm) ' � � Top kr,oc!cout: Inner 1_375";3 49) Outer 1.7�0"(4.45) ;......_.________2a°�so.se} •i I s.2is° z.oss" �.-- 24.125"�ot28 �j !110.16�; � � (13254)'.i5.24) � ) -- ;�y.�_____..10"'i40.64) �� ' \ � � / . . �r..._.. � ' . __ �-_ � I ---- -- ..� _* . . .� ,, I , j 1J ��G �c j � k� __i_._. � � � t.o'25' : ��.i .. ,, �cAn SIZE ; � � �a.,s� ; s.szs° 'Y.4':1 zo.� ��° CABINET � ; i�� ,,.2s,�� ,�, : 0.373"tli2. ' ;�t.t21 � p � � (28.653) ��-� �i , (C.79i I , 20" � ' i I p�/ I ' i�0.8Cj � n ;_I_.. _.t ' i I i : �' '�---�19 0 4a.�3) ----'�i Cm � \ I I I ----- I I : I ' � ! } I i ,�_ � + \ cab-aa-2oo3.wmt � ' �� 2.56" % 225";5721 —+ ; . �.... (5.51) �ower knoC�ouc� Inner 0.875"(2221 Outer t.t 25"j2.86) Page 2 of 4—JCI-6857:A1•12/27/07 ?op knoca�iut Inner t.375..:'s.49) Outer 1.7�0'1A.45i � :a- - 24"f60.96) ._-_-_._....---+' � 5.218" 2C63" < 24.125"i6L2E) � 5�,�___ � �13254) (52a) I � , 16"(40.E4) + �.� . ,� .__- ----__ __._- � ----- ----- -- ..I.. � l �� r� ,-��-- 1 i� Y�1 �;��. 54.025" ��AAf1 S�ZE ' � i 1.625 ' ' � �a.62"i1174) i r4.13) 1t^ �39" . (35.024) CMB�N ET �� 0 313"d�a. :� ' (35.37�I ..�----i---- ( �u.,9 (2?.54) � � I , ' � � •' ' , ; � a , � � _ ; c�m2 =_ . ___.. _ . _ _ _ ab-ea-2ooa,Hmr . '°.5"(49.531 --�.-.; .- ?.56�. (6.5':). 2.25"(5.72)' � Lewer knockout� Inne�0.975"(2221 Oute�1.125"i2.861 Top knockout. Inner 1.375'�3.a9� ONer 1750"(445i ;. za°�so.ss7 -�i ! s.z,e' z.oss° � - t.o25" rto'o) � --.. 24J2�'(61 28) �. ;. 4 .,V_.___16"(40.64) ---.-. ' (4.13 \ �.(13 2541 (5.24) ) .� -- ._-_.__--- --i ----- -- - -- - I- . ; ��- - 'f 1 1 � !i i i � I i !�I � 'e� ' - � `h ! -I- , � , , ; , � � �� ca f7 i�, i '9.s25' ' CABINET ' i�! 19781" i ; -z,s,; ' � ' , ' i i; � r5o.za1 I -�_ �.. ,- ; �i � � ' ' �' '8.625,. 28.625": ! ' I�' � 21 f,S! i; 28.5" � (7271) ' u ��j 0.313"dia. (i2.39) ' . � ' �!I (��'�) . i�V.. • ; I i I i � � � 5! I ' i�O G Y ±- � � _- �V , , i I ; ; !I . .___ 13.5'{49.53) ... .t__.2.25' ' �� I I I f5.72) i � : � �� ' � � ��m� i � � i �, ' ± -- --' 1 . �. caGb4-2003.wmf . .. ----- - 2.$6� �r 2.25"15J2) -, . �. ; (6.�1) % i ro I�wer knoCkouts � �nner,�.675'.1222) O�ter 7_t^_5'12.86j Top knockout. Inne�1.375"(3.49i . . Outer 1.?50';4»51 �. :t �24"(60.96) -._. -•: i 5 278" 2.063" i 0.16) 1.625' '��-- 24.125"(61.281 - t � �� ;(13?541' (524) . �4,��____ 16"(40.64) i�3) �•-_ -+. -- i�__ --� * . - \ � i .�� ; � i � e� ;; <« � ��< �_,_ i' � «C�� SIZE ' ' ;i� � J I , � �s.s2s� , � � ' ; CABINET �; ;j; '"�'' � � + � j ; �i� ' � � � * I i j ;s.szs„ I '� i 28.094" ! ��1.47} '�I �, ''j (71.36j �.. j !i � I � � i , � i, f I I i � � � �8.525" J I � � � !21.911 3i 25" I . I �: I 37 125 � ��4.62; � : � ; �� . 94.31� I..t... � ! ; � 0.373"die. ; � -� � ,, � '. �� i0.,9) �'�. i; � i / ;ji � �I i � � , �� 1 O �J•. '- �F. ! I^'.; .�i i', � .�t---- 19.5"(49.53I �"~i i�25� ��. j �� : ` ;i,5.72; � \ j i �': 2.25" i i � I �� i; (572} ;; �Cllt� _.. I i� i ` � � � L ' _ --� , �. . _ � ----- --_ _ _ _-_ • `__� cab c42003.wmf --...-_ 2.56��1 �f (O.�J�,�. TY��.[BE IOw-¢f WiOCkIX1t9� Inner 0.875`(2.22j Outer 1.125";2.d^1 JGI-6857:A1•12/27/07-Page 3 of 4 Top knockout�. inner 1.375"I3.491 Outer t.'S0"t4.451 � ... �• . 24°(60.96) —=.� 'I 5218` 2.063.. ;�... �10 to; 24.125"(6L28) ':--4 ..,.- --16"(40.64J .-. .r � ��q�5�. 41325a��, �524) ___a ; . . . � � � ....�. i , . .__` +______________ i � W i�, ;/ � i; "D" S 1 Z E � �', I 8.625.. ' i CABINET ;I; I ;2,q,� � ; � ;�� --+ -;- ; ;; i i ';; i �s.szs• ' ; i;; � rzi.s�) ', ' i I j � ' i I II 'I' 37 037" � � * ! �� I I � (94.06) I8.525' � � � Z 91; : ; i � j I j� ; � � � ;_ I � a5.875"i � I I i i! 45.75" '8.62�" (i?o5?I� � 'i i (i16.21) �{?t.91) ', ! � �i� � -.� ' .i. . i i i Q'si3'dia, �� ! � � i� �C i9j i ', I � \}�� , � �'o'' e�� - - i- � a i, , ti� � i �,'!— 19.5"(49.53) —�� 2.25" I j �\ ' i \ �;(5.721 � i �\ ' � I 2.25" ; � j \ i � ;s.�z� i; (cm1 I ; ; i � , i ' � \\ � i � ! �� ' ---� -- �� . ; cab-da-2oos.w+nt ' 256" � � 1551� i� FJII�IOwB�N��O::kpU1S � Inner 0.8?5"(222i � w � Outer 1.t25"12d'o� i i ��'��Q.��. i Ll ;. ._ . ...a,..a e �_ . � _,2 —____—_ 685�bp4 wmf The BP-4 Battery Dress Panel covers the Main Power Supply and the batteries in the ca6inet "D"sized cabinet Only one BP-4 or JBP2-4 is required per 3 with solid door. cabinet unless an AA cabinet is used(no Solid door option available batfery compartment). on all sizes in black or red. LEXANO is a registered trademark of GE Plastics,a subsidiary of General Electric Company. 002007.All rights reserved.Unauthorized use of this document is strictly pro- hibited. This document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. -°� We try to keep our product information up-to-date and accurate. We cannot cover all specific applications or anticipate all requirements. � �.�<.�� All specifications are subject to change without notice. �:��`�� Made in the U.S.A. Johnson Controls 507 East Michigan Street,Milwaukee,WI 53202•www.johnsoncontrols.com Page 4 of 4—JCI-6857:A1•12/27/07 JCI-6933:A1 BAT Series Batteries J� -,� Sealed Lead-Acid or Gell Cell �ahnson ��,}�,i �antrols General � BAT Series Batteries feature a new part-numbering/listing sys- tem — providing an improved method of delivery for Johnson Controls-approved sealed lead-acid batteries for all your fire alarm system needs. Multipte brands of batteries are now ;i offered under generic part numbers, reducing backorder situa- tions and permitting us to deliver these products in a more �� timely fashion. Johnson Controls has approved the multiple � brands listed below as possible product shipped for a given part , numbec Please note that any incoming orders for"PS Series' �"` �� . batteries will be converted to the equivalent BAT Series part numbers. Features ��" 6933��;��` • Provide secondary power for control panels. • Sealed and maintenance-free. • o�ercnar9e Procected. Agency Listings and Approvals • Easy handling with leakproof construction. The listings and approvats below apply to BAT Series Batteries. • Ruggedly constructed, high-impact case (ABS, polystyrene, �n some cases, certain modules may not be listed by certain or polypropylene,depending on models). approval agencies,or listing may be in process. Consuit factory for latest listing status. • Long service life. • Compact design. • UL Recognized Components: files MH19884 (8 & 8 Bat- tery), MH2O727 (UP�, previously Jolt), MH2O845 (Power- Sonic). Part Number Reference 6933key1ibi PREVIOUS CURRENT BATfERY ALTERNATES APPROVED: Part Number Part Number DESCRIPTION manufacturers and P/Ns shipped under BAT PMs PS-612 Discontinued N/A N!A PS-695 Discontinued N/A. N/A PS-1242 BAT-1250 12 V,5 AH,sealed. BP5-12(B&B Battery);PS-1250(Power-SOnic); SA1250(Jolt)to be replaced with U81250(UPG). PS-1250 BAT-1250 12 V,5 AH,sealed. BP5-12(B&B Battery);PS-1250(Power-Sonic); SA1250(Jolt)to be replaced with UB1250(UPG). PS-1270 BAT-1270 12 V,7 AH,sealed. BP�'12(B&B Battery);PS-1270(Power-Sonic); SA1272(Jolt)to be replaced with U61270(UPG). PS-12120 BAT-12120 12 V, 12 AH,sealed. BP12-12(B&B Battery);PS-12120(Power-Sonic); SA12120(Jolt)to be replaced with UB12120(UPG). PS-12170 BAT-12180 12 V, 18 AH,sealed. PS-12180(Power-Sonic);SA12180(Jolt)to be replaced with U612180(UPG). PS-12180 BAT-12180 12 V, 18 AH,sealed. PS-12180(Power-Sonic);SA12180(Jolt)to be replaced with U612180(UPG). PS-12250 BAT-12260 12 V,26 AH,sealed.. BP26-12(B&B Battery);PS-12260(Power-Sonic); SA12260(Joit)to be replaced with UB12260(UPG). PS-12550 BAT-12550 12 V,55 AH,sealed. PS-12550(Power-Sonic);XSA12550(Jolt)to be replaced with U612550(UPG). PS-12600 BAT-12550 12 V,55 AH,sealed. PS-12550(Power-Sonic);XSA12550(Jolt)to be replaced with UB12550(UPG). PS-12750 Discontinued N/A N/A PS-121000 BAT-121000 12 V, 100 AH,gell cell. PS-121000(Power-Sonic);XSA121000A(Jolt)to be replaced with U6121000!UPG). JCI-6933:A1•5/5/08—Page t of 10 POWER-SONIC „�„,a Nominal Discharge DIMENSIONS Capacity Current Height over Nominal @ @ Width Depth ��9M terminal �✓eight Voltage 20 hr.rate 20 hr.rate MODEL V A.H. mA in. mm. in. mm. in. mm. in. mm. Ibs. kg. PS-1250 12 5.0 250 3.54 90 2.76 70 4.02 102 4.21 107 4.1 1.9 PS-1270 12 7.0 325 5.94 151 2.56 65 3.70 94 3.86 98 5.7 2.6 PS-12120 12 12 600 5.94 151 3.86 98 3.70 94 3.86 98 8.8 4.0 PS-12180 12 18 875 7.13 181 2.99 76 6.57 167 6.57 167 12.5 5.8 PS-12250 12 25 1300 6.89 175 6.54 166 4.92 125 4.92 125 18.7 8.5 PS-12550 12 55 3000 10.25 260 6.60 168 8.20 208 9.45 240 39.7 18.0 PS-121000 12 100 5000 12.00 305 6.60 168 8.20 208 9.45 240 65.7 29.8 Characteristic Discharge Curves Effect of Temperature on Capacity �2o°io ��-_ ��-- 7- - 6.5 13 I � i I � I � 100% � I ----- •0.5 C i > i ---� - 0.1 C 6.0 12 - " � � � "° 5.5 11 � 80% � -- --�- ' - -..-�-0.25Ci j _ t oC � I I"'-'�-0.6 C i � 5.0 10 o2scnsc osc U 60% - - --+---'-2C I 00 4.5 9 o sc n I i � � � � i ;� _ U 40% i i --i , �I 4.0 8 o i' � I , I� � I �'I3 ,r 3c zc ic g 20/o •' �-. --l-�--�-� I I I o '� __� � i � 1 2 3 5 10 20 30 60 2 3 5 10 20 30 ��o I� � i _ �-minutes--+--hours� -20° -10° 0° 10° 20" 30° 40° 50° 60° Discharge Time @ 20°C(68°F) 100% Temperature(Degrees C.) - 1 __.-,___-r. r . i � � j � '- Charging is NOT gp�a � � necessary unless o � o I I , i �DO%of capacity � I ��:�� is required. � so�io i��-' � at left: � o I I I i li �� I (41 F) " Charging before PS�727�0� ' 70/0 1_ use is necessary � rt � � ��I �- � to help recover Shelf-Life °' I ' I I `°"�Pa�"Y. and Stora e � so�io ' -- g � �--'� � - '� � I 'I I _�� :-:. Charge may Q 50% I �--- , � tail to restore �j 40°C ; 30 C '� � I � 20°C i �. full capacity. ° . __i-- I (H � t � (ES°F� I � DONOT € 40/o� -L 6 F �et banenes 3 ' - -- �--;- �� I � i i � i reach this state. 0% I�.I_____�.- �_--i �__ 1 - _ � 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 Standing Period(Months) 14.OV i �� -��--- i . c rture 20°C(68°F) � �i �3.0 V Ambient Tempera -� , � -- �= ! i � I � m iz.ov .. ��- , i af/eff: � � i ! PS-1210000 � i i !; I � I - ---- ' � > 11.0 V I i � � -� -- f_ J. � : ; , C--i Discharge � ,o.o v � --�_.-i ' i I I , 2IoA} �oA 5;°A� Characferistics � � 50A� i I . I I , , 9.O V I Final e t t +.-- �-� - B.OV � � � � �3 _-- g 200A - AI -� � I� � + �� 1 � � 100 Volta --��r - - - -- - ; �m --��-+-_ +-�+�-� � 1.2 2.4 6 '2 24 36 48 1 2 4 6 8 10 20 40 MINUTES--------�-----HOURS Discharge Time Page 2 of 10-JCI-6933:A1•5/5/08 B & B BATTERY Terminal Dimensions Nominal Capacity(AH) Weight Model V Standard Optional L W H TH 20 hr 10 hr 5 hr 1 hr kg Ibs Type Pos. Type Pos. mm in mm in mm in mm in BP5-12 12 5.00 4.75 4.25 3.00 1.86 4.10 T1 3 T2 90 3.54 70 2.76 102 4.02 106 4.17 BP7-12 12 7.00 6.65 5.95 4.20 2.60 5.73 T2 5 T1 151 5.94 65 2.56 93 3.66 98 3.86 BP12-12 12 12.00 11.40 10.20 7.20 4.03 8.89 B1 5 T1 151 5.94 98 3.86 94 3.70 98 3.86 BP26-12 12 26.00 24.70 22.10 15.60 9.40 20.73 81 7 T2.11 9 175 6.89 166 6.54 125 4.92 125 4.92 Charging Procedure 6933bbchtbl Temperature Maximum Charging time 0.1 CA, Charging compensation 20°C h Application Charging method voltage at coefficient of ccurre'nt ( , Temp(°C) 20°C(V/cell) charging vokage ��A) 100% 50% (mVl°C/cell) discharge discharge For standby Constant witage and 225-2.30 -3 0.3 24 20 �power source constant current 0-40°C For cycle charging(with current (32-104°F) service resUiction) Z.40-2.50 -4 0.3 16 10 Temperature compensation of charging voltage is not needed�en using the batteries�+thin 5°C to 35°C range. Discharge Time:for Model BPS-12 Final 5 min 10 min 15 min 30 min 1 hr 3 hr 5 hr 10 hr 20 hr Voltage Battery Output Power(W):for Model BPS-12 Constant Power Discharge 10.80 V 180.8 133.1 106.6 63.5 36.39 14.57 10.05 5.62 2.94 Characterisfics at 25°C/77°F 10.50 V 209.2 1442 111.5 65.9 37.48 14.87 1020 5.70 3.00 for BP5'72 1020 V 222.3 149.4 115.0 67.4 38.16 15.00 1026 5.73 3.01 _ 9.90 V 232.3 152.9 117.6 68.3 38.61 15.10 10.29 5.75 3.02 "g 9.60 V 240.0 156.0 120.0 69.0 39.00 1520 10.32 5.75 3.02 m Discharge Time:for Model BP7-12 Final 5 min 10 min 15 min 30 min 1 hr 3 hr 5 hr 10 hr 20 hr Voltage Battery Output Power(W):for Model BP7-12 Constant Power Discharge 10.80 V 253.1 186.3 149.3 88.8 50.95 20.40 14.07 7.86 4.11 Characteristics af 25°Cl77°F 10.50 V 292.9 201.8 156.2 92.2 52.47 20.81 14.28 7.98 4.20 for BP7'72 1020 V 311.2 209.1 161.0 94.3 53.42 21.00 14.36 8.02 4.22 � 9.90 V 3252 214.1 164.7 95.6 54.06 21.15 14.41 8.04 4.23 a 9.60 V 336.0 218.4 168.0 96.6 54.60 21.27 14.45 8.04 4.23 � Discharge Time:for Model BP12-12 Final 5 min 10 min 15 min 30 min 1 hr 3 hr 5 hr 10 hr 20 hr Voltage Battery Output Power(W):for Model BP12-12 Consfant Power Discharge 10.80 V 433.9 319.4 256.0 152.3 87.34 34.98 24.12 13.48 7.05 Characteristics at 25°G77°F 10.50 V 502.2 346.0 267.7 158.1 89.96 35.68 24.48 13.68 7-20 for BP12-72 10.20 V 533.6 358.5 276.0 161.7 91.57 36.00 24.61 13.75 723 _ 9.90 V 557.5 367.1 282.4 164.0 92.67 3625 24.70 13.79 7.25 a 9.60 V 576.0 374.4 288.0 165.6 93.60 36.47 24.77 13.79 7.25 � Discharge Time:for Model BP26-12 Final 5 min 10 min 15 min 30 min 1 hr 3 hr 5 hr 10 hr 20 hr Voltage Battery Output Power(W):for Model BP26-12 Constant Power Discharge 10.80 V 940.0 692.0 554.6 330.0 189.23 75.79 52.25 2920 15.26 Characteristics at 25°Cl77°F 10.50 V 1088.0 749.7 580.0 342.5 194.91 77.30 53.04 29.64 15.60 for BP26'72 10.20 V 1156.0 776.7 598.0 350.3 198.41 78.00 53.33 29.79 15.67 _ 9.90 V 1208.0 795.3 611.8 355.2 200.79 78.54 53.52 29.88 15.71 L � 9.60 V 1248.0 811.2 624.0 358.8 202.80 79.01 53.68 29.88 15.71 m JCI-6933:A1•5/S/08-Page 3 of 10 B � B BATTERY BP5-12 Battery Discharge Characteristics(25°C/77°F) - —,-- 13.0 12.0 7 � 71 0 I ~ � I ��O.B5A 0.475A 025A � oo i ' I 25A BP7-12 Battery Discharge � 90! '3A Characteristics(25°C/77°F) W 8.0 I I _ I �/ 13.0 ij I 15A 10A 5A -- 7.0 12.0 7 2 3 5 10 20 30 60 2 3 5 70 20 30 j j � minutes I hours I w � �io � DISCHARGE TIME BPO��s�� '1.19A 0.665A 0.35A � 10.0 f �1.75A J I . Z I I 42A � 90 -r--f-- - -- BP12-12 Battery Discharge W � � % i Characteristics(25°C/77°F) 80 I ; 2'^ '^^ '" � I TT� �o� 13.0 1 2 3 5 10 20 30 60 2 3 5 70 20 30 - minutes I hours � I �-- - -_--- �Z� � DISCHARGETIME BP07d�sm > Iw � ¢ ii o i o � ` ; j A��A 1 14A -06A BP26-12 Battery Discharge > '0° � �� Characteristics(25°C/77°F) J I? I y�zn � 9.0 —_ /, _ —._ i _ 13.0 __ i � � ; �� — — � � �z.o � BA — -- I 364 24A (12A I I �I~ � � I I � i W �-�1 2 3 5 10 20 30 60 2 3 5 10 20 30 Q �� ! minutes � hours � �- r.-- � i I �'a.42A 2 47A 1.3A BP12dis.tif � 10.0� 6.SA DISCHARGE TIME � I I Z I � I I I�s.sn � gpi_— _ ¢ I I W I F- / 8.0 � 78IA 52A 26A �.o -- __1.'_._._L— 1 2 3 S 70 20 30 60 2 3 5 10 �20 30 � minutes I hours � BP26dis.nf DISCHARGE TIME BP05-12 BP26-12 BP12-12 �A �s ;� �s y�.�� .�s:a _ �� .� .. �, . , . a � . , �, m � ��_ '� " - � �� a � o�p �, - � a �� , , �� . ., Page 4 of 70-JCI-6933:A1•5/5/08 UPG BATTERY U81250 has the same specifications as previous Jolt SA1250; SA 1272 to be replaced with U81270(specs/diagrams pending). UB1250 (previously SA1250) Diagrams SA1272 Diagrams UB1250/SA1250 discharge current vs,time SA1272 discharge current vs,time 3 5 � g � l �nr � �r� � � t �e{�°�) av�e�toe�} � � �� aa°c{aaa°�> s� � � � s� � � �o 2a 3? �' �mMj�iU�- �" 4mk�i 10 5 5 3 3 } 1 0 �t7 4 2 7 5 itt 2CF 3ft Sfl it�4 2Qt 0 47f� l 2 3 5 10 �3] :�F 10a 290 �:,._zmLtS-h'�--tA1--� (�---i^uhe-�--�t--�j 6933up01.0� c�� 6933up03.u� ��g�� UB1250/SA1250 discharge characteristics(25°C/77°F) SA1272 discharge characteristics(25°C/77°F) i3 _ 11 "�� . ,�. �. ._ . ,.„�� .,_,_ �-`._., -,.__ -�... -..,-. � 12 _ � 1Y -- 1 � � ' � c .� t� � �� i � > i�. � �- - U�..4TJt.02SM1 � � � - - '�L8'S� -� m � �' ' .� 4 �� f s.a tssa�en � � �, . � € r>n` iv. �a� � � aaw��i� rsa � � r g a o f 2 3 5 1 i1 ��3p @J� 2 3 5 t+7 27 3�➢� 1 '? S 5 t0 2C!9J A) 2 3 i 14Y 21�0 I"--e.n{n ��1' �� I, mlr.� ` �'---� 6933up02�if Q'65C.tidi98 TSIYB 6933up04��f Q��g'�'9pg UB1250, SA1250 Specifications SA1272 Specifications • Nominal voltage: 12 V. • Nominal voltage: 12 V. • Nominal capacity(20 hr):5.0 AH. • Nominal capacity(20 hr):7.2 AH. • Dimensions: total height 107 mm (4.21"); container height • Dimensions:tota�height 100 mm(3.94");container height 94 101 mm(3.98");length 90 mm(3.54");width 70 mm(2.76"). mm(3.70");length 151 mm(5.95");width 65 mm(2.56"). • Weight:approximately 1.83 kg{4.03 Ibs). • Weight:approximately 2.66 kg(5.85 Ibs). • Container material:UL94HB ABS,UL94V-0 ABS. • Container material:UL94HB ABS, UL94V-0 ABS. • Internal resistance(25°C,77°F): -32 m. • Internal resistance(25°C,77°F): -22 m. • Discharge eapacity under different temperatures: • Discharge capacity under different temperatures: 40°C: -102% 40°C: - 102% 25°C: -100% 25°C: -100% 0°C: -85% 0°C: -85°/ • Capacity 25°C/77°F. • Capacity 25°C/77°F: 20 hr @ 0.25 A:5.0 AH. 20 hr @ 0.36 A:7.2 AH. 5hr@0.8A:4.OAH. 5hr@ 1.15A:5.76AH. 1 hr @ 3.0 A:3.0 AH. 1 hr @ 4.32 A:4.32 AH. 1 C@ 5.0 A:2.5 AH. 1 C@ 7.2 A:3.6 AH. • Charging voltage(25°C,77°F): • Charging voltage(25°C,77°F): Standby use: 13.65 V±0.15 V. Standby use: 13.65 V±0.15 V. Cycle use: 14.7 V±0.3 V. Cycle use: 14.7 V±0.3 V. • Maximum discharge current:60 A(5 sec). • Maximum discharge current:90 A(5 sec). • Maximum charging current: 1.5 A. • Maximum charging current:2.16 A. • Self-discharge residual capacity(25°C,77°F): • Self-discharge residual capacity(25°C, 77°F): After 3 months: -90%. After 3 months: -90%. After 6 months: -82%. After 6 months: -82%. After 12 months: -70%. After 12 months: -70%. JCI-6933:A1•5/Si08-Page 5 of 10 UPG BATTERY Same specifications as previous Jolt models; packaging and part numbers are the only changes. U612120 (was SA12120) Diagrams UB12180 (was SA12180) Diagrams U612120/SA12120 discharge current vs.time UB12180/SA12180 discharge current vs.time s s � � � a V9) 2 (Fr Y �, €Y'G{3�"Fj�... .. 4£i�G(9fM`F; ,� E1`C{32`Fj Ac7'C{3fl4"f� t t }I b�7 50 1 � � � 20 �y 27 ae F' (�n} �tl �" (frin)1D 5 5 3 3 1 1 tl SLMJ 1 3 '9. 5 ttl 20 97 5U i41D J7t� U ff34 1� 2 3 5 %1 2tl 90 50 N�7 20L1 �---e„�Rt-.L {;�:--:� �...._#mAE-r�--fAR-� ,I_ 6933upO5.tif ��e� .: 6933up07.ti1 t,^�ng� U612120/SA12120 discha�ge characteristics(25°C/77°F) UB12180/SA12180 discharge characteristics(25°C/77°F) ,a � ,a � t2 � t1 1� � 'Z ~ i , t} � �S m - i $t y} � � t � � i � . �- - �i.09&�.BA � %�` �� f.d?ASlti4� � 1° ,L_LI � � . , � �a }` � , , E � 8M 3dA 3tA 12A. � 43A Ss.M1 3�l 8A. F � � Q a I o � a s � w aa s� so z � s �+.r zu a� i � � s 4n zo�a es z s s �c, �a so � �,� �.-�� (..-�,�� --�{ 6933upO6.ti1 [Y��@�{fYg �� 6933up08.�i� Q'�i5a..^�'f)e f�fY@ UB12120, SA12120 Specifications UB12180, SA12180 Specifications • Nominal voltage: 1�V. • Nominal voltage: 12 V. • Nominal capacity(20 hr): 12.0 AH. • Nominal capacity(20 hr): 18.0 AH. • Dimensions:total height 100 mm(3.94");container height 94 " • Dimensions: total height 167 mm �6.58"); container height mm(3.70");length 151 mm(5.95");width 98 mm!3.86"). 167 mm(6.58");length 181 mm(7.13");width 76 mm(2.29"). • Weight:approximately 4.10 kg(9.04 Ibs). • Weight:approximately 6.06 kg(13.36 Ibs). • Container material: Ul94HB ABS, UL94V-0 ABS. • Container material:UL94H6 ABS,UL94V-0 ABS. • Internal resistance(25°C,77°F): -14 m. • Internal resistance(25°C,77°F):-13 m. • Discharge capacity under different temperatures: • Discharge capacity under different temperatures: 40°C: -102% 40°C: -102% 25°C:- 100% 25°C: -100% 0°C: -85% 0°C: -85% • Capacity 25°C/77°P. • Capacity?5°C/77°F: 20 hr @ 0.6 A: 12.0 AH. 20 hr @ 0.9 A: 18.0 AH. 5 hr @ 1.92 A:9.6 AH. 5 hr @ 2.88 A: 14.4 AH. 1 hr�7.2 A�7.2 AH. 1 hr @ 10.8 A: 10.8 AH. 1 C@ 12.0 A:6.0 AH. 1 C Q 18.0 A:9.0 AH. • Charging voltage(25°C,77°F): • Charging voltage(25°C,77°F): Standby use: 13.65 V±0.15 V. Standby use: 13.65 V t 0.15 V. Cycle use: 14.7 V±0.3 V. Cycle use: 14.7 V±0.3 V. Maximum discharge current: 120 A(5 sec). • Maximum discharge current:300 A(5 sec). Maximum charging current:3.6 A. • Maximum charging current:5.4 A. Self-discharge residual capacity(25°C,77°F): • Self-discharge residual capacity(25°C,77°F): After 3 months: -90%. After 3 months: -90%. After 6 months: -82% After 6 months: -82%. After 12 months: -70% After 12 months: -70%. Page 6 of 10-JCI-6933:A1•5/5/OS UPG BATTERY Same specifications as previous Jolt models; packaging and part numbers are the only changes. U612260 (was SA12260) Diagrams U612550 (was SA12550) Diagrams U612260/SA12260 discharge current vs. time U612550/SA12550 discharge current vs. time � � � s 3 3 ,� 2 �C��'1 M3`C€74%`f} 'h� � p'�(37"F) � 4a`Cd2(kt'FI � t � � 96 39 � � � � F' ImIR}1.6 F= ¢en�b}1Q 5 � � 3 �\ 1 � f� 5ft0 4 2 3 5 tfl� 1t�30 SO 1cTt �1�5 pI_ yait t 2 3 S� til fil 3E� Stl iCHl �lU ��.wg�q1_.L'_fRp--:1 I"--#n,qp {pj-�� _�_ 6933up09.Uf (;a1FCe�iY 6933up11.tif GUtffiflt UB12260/SA12260 discharge characteristics(25°C/77°F) UB12550/SA12550 discharge characteristics(25°C/77°F) ,� °-- ia ..-_. _ � �s �i � � ' �s � `� „ � � '�� „ � , � ' ` - - ��„�� ' _ _ - _� �;� 7E� 14 ` . � „ t�. &SA <1��tiR � � � � 33!Y 13 7�A9.lLt G � t97k, t?7A 5'bk "A � t[i�l NJA � A h- � � 9 0 Q 1� 2 9� 5 t0� 37 3� fi� 2 3 f 1� ?tl�3Q 1 2 3 5 itl� ;+�1 37 @'1 2 3 5 ti7 El.^s0 { �� -�1 ft-m,� j �-�I 6933up10.tif QSut13F�qc TRT� 6933up12.�ii {}j5^{g�s jgflg U612260, SA12260 Specifications U612550, SA12550 Specifications • Nominal voltage: 12 V. • Nominal voltage: 12 V. • Nominal capacity(20 hr):26.0 AH. • Nominal capacity(20 hr):55.0 AH. • Dimensions: total height 125 mm(4.92"); container height 125 • Dimensions: total height 234.5 mm (9.23"); container height mm(4.92");length 166 mm(6.54");width 175 mm(6.89"). 216.�mm(8.52");length 229 mm(9.02");width 138 mm(5.43"). • Weight:approximately 8.80 kg(19.40 Ibs). • Weight:approximately 19.0 kg(41.8 Ibs). • Container material: UL94HB ABS,UL94V-0 ABS. • Container material:UL94H6 ABS,UL94V-0 ABS. • Internal resistance(25°C,77°F):-10 m. • Intemal resistance(25°C,77°F):-8 m. • Discharge capacity under different temperatures: • Discharge capacity under different temperatures: 40°C: - 102% 40°C: -102% 25°C: -100% 25°C:-100% 0°C: -85% 0°C: -85% • Capacity 25°C/77°F: • Capacity 25°C/77°�: 20 hr @ 1.3 A:26.0 AH. 20 hr @ 2.75 A:55.0 AH. 5 hr @ 4.16 A:20.8 AH. 5 hr @ 8.8 A:44.0 AH. 1 hr @ 15.6 A: 15.6 AH. 1 hr @ 33.0 A:33.0 AH. 1 C@ 26.0 A: 13.0 AH. 1 C@ 55.0 A:27.5 AH. • Charging voltage(25°C,77°F): • Charging voltage(25°C,77°F): Standby use: 13.65 V�0.15 V. Standby use: 13.65 V�0.15 V. Cycle use: 14.7 V±0.3 V. Cycle use: 14.7 V±0.3 V. • Maximum discharge current:300 A(5 sec). • Maximum discharge current:600 A(5 sec). • Maximum charging current:7.8 A. • Maximum charging current: 16.5 A. • Self-discharge residual capacity(25°C,77°F): • Self-discharge residual capacity(25°C,77°F): After 3 months: -90%. After 3 months: -90%. After 6 months: -82%. After 6 months: -82%. After 12 months: -70%. After 12 months: -70%. JGI-6933:A1•5/5/08-Page 7 of 10 UPG BATTERY Same specifications as previous Jolt models; packaging and part numbers are the only changes. UB121000 (XSA121000A) Diagrams UPG Summary Diagrams U6121000/XSA121000A discharge current vs.time Summary discharge characteristics � � � ,:'I � � d�+) z 'o ,,�' I _ , � a�a��cw'�� ' .; ,,, i - ---- - - }I � Z �� I�-3C�2C �� O.6C 0.25C 0.17C 0.09C 0.05C I 3q ��; �„k�.,! � � 27 ~ ' ( � � �"' t��F�j 10 � . . , v .. :o � .. ; r.� _ � �minutes �� 3 hour • `� 6933up15.wmf � DISCHARGE TIME Summary discharge current vs.time curve(25°C/77°F) , I T--- u 9]0 t 2 3 5 1�.0 1f1 S6 5�1 NJ+] 2t7p� 3 OJ i Zo � ! �'� ; I � I ! � � � __— �—� _ '___; _ i � �4--5mlip�.---s�a:—{.A} _� i j i I , i- — I _. I 6933up13.ti� �U�k G �o - -'�--'-- ' � � - i � ; I i U812f000/XSA12f000A discharge characteristics(25°C/77°F) —- : , ; ' � + ; iI i � +� � � I � � � ' � � Q �° i ! � � ! � � iz r�o — � � I .,� � j � � O I 1` - -�- �-G ti � i � �� I ! � �54. � -- ; . i °oo i- _ = i I ' i G � �� s�� dCtR. YSh 16A c s —_ � _.. .�_ i ' B � i :GG L�G G ''s� �JOA � i �ei2B��1�e�1� so F" 9 � I I i I � so�o a'o do�ca i I I I I I p � II i 1 � 5 5 1��.��. XI 97 OCI 2� 3 5 1fl 2i)3f1 � � ; ;ac so w:; za� =cc , a , s •o is x.» sc �u�� ro� � �`---�rlr—+.� I,--*� � ma-..---------��-----�----AmPeres------ 6933up1A.wmf pISGHARGECURRENT 6933up14.�if �jyyy�3.T�yg U6121000 (XSA121000A) Diagrams 1 a �1f49*Pd%+�91i t ' � ��rV�1��nda�pq at�,i{"� • Nominal voltage: 12 V. �� II'��'"�ill�� • Nominal capacity(20 hr): 100.0 AH. • Dimensions: total height 221 mm(8.70"); container height 214 mm(8.43");length 329 mm(12.95");width 172 mm(6.77"). ' : ' '°'� � r�- � � ' l,.�c�-^+'"" • Weight:approximatety 34.00 kg(74.81bs). �aP-�� .- • Container material: UL94H6 ABS,UL94V-0 ABS. ��°' �� • Internal resistance(25°C,77°F): -6.5 m. '� � • Discharge capacity under different temperatures � ` 40�C. - ��2�o � . ...�;�gp IP9 25°C:-100% 0°C: -85% • Capacity 25°C/77°F: ' 20 hr @ 5.0 A: 100.0 AH. " 5hr@16.0A:80.0AH. ^ a.��.� „� �k. � .T:�� _= .�. 1 hr C� 60.0 A:60.0 AH. �„ �:�:. � .: - � , . .� .....::- - 1 C@ 100.0 A:50.0 AH. • Charging voltage(25°C,77°F): Standby use: 13.65 V t 0.15 V. Cycle use: 14.7 V±0.3 V „ �� • Maximum discharge current:600 A(5 sec). ' • Maximum charging current:30 A. • Self-discharge residual capaeity(25°C,77°F): �'� �� After 3 months: -90%. After 6 months: -g2%. �.�'>' After 12 months:-70%. Page 8 of 10—JCI-6933:A1•5/5/OS UPG BATTERY Same specifications as previous Jolt models; packaging and part numbers are the only changes. Charging Procedure: UPG Battery 6933uDChtbl Temperature Maximum Charging time 0.1 CA, Charging compensation 25°C h Application Charging method voltage at coefficient of ccur elnt ( ) Temp(°C) 25°C(V/cell) charging voltage (�A) 100% 50% (mV/°C(cell) discharge discharge For standby Constant voltage and 225–2.30 –3�3 0.3 T>_24 T>_20 power source constant current (-1.8 mV/°F/cell) 0–40°C For cycle charging(with current _5 (32–104°F) service restriction) 2.40–2.50 S_2 g mV/°F/cell) 0.3 16<T<24 10<T<24 Temperature compensation of charging voltage is not needed�en using the batteries�ithin 5°C to 35°C range. � ,,�► JCI-6933:A1•5/5/OS—Page 9 of 10 � Batteries display trademarks of the manutacturer. 002008.All rights reserved.Unauthorized use of this document is strictly pro- hibited. This document is not intended to be used tor instaliation purposes. We try to keep our product information up-to-date and accurate. We cannot cover all specific applications or anticipate all requirements. Ali specitications are subject to change without notice. Made in the U.S.A. For more information,contaCt Johnson Controls Field Support Center. 507 East Michigan Street,Milwaukee,WI 53202 www.johnsoncontrols.com Page 10 of 10—JCI-6933:A1•5/5/08 COOPER Notification � POWERPATHT"' NAC POWER SUPPLIES * PS-6 PS-8 Description The PS-6 and PS-8 Power Supplies are UL Listed under UL The Wheelock Series PS-6 and PS-8 are 24VDC, filtered and Standard 864, 9th Edition to be used with any 24 voit Listed regulated, supervised remote power supply/batiary chargers are Regulated notification appliances. They inciude the capability used for supervision and expanded power driving�apability of Fire to synchronize Wheelock strobes and horns and to silence the Alarm Notification Appliance Circuits. The PS-6 provides 6 amps of horn signal when horn/strobes are operating on two wires. power distributed across 4 outputs,while the PS-8 provides 8 Amps across 4 output. In addition the PS-8 provides additional room in the chassis for accessories lik�an Addressabie Control Module,with mounting studs. Features The Power Supplies may be conneeted to any 12V or 24V(FWR or Approvals DC)Fire Alarm Control Panei(FACP)by using a Notifi�ation Appliance •Approvals Inciude: UL Standard 8�4, 1481 Circuit(NAC)or a"Ory Contact". Primary appli;.ations include NAC • Pending:California State Fire Marshal(CSFM}, New expansion (supports ADA requirements) and auxiliary power to York City(MEA),Factory Mutual(FM},Chicago(BFP) support system accessories.This unit provides filtered and regulated See Approvals by model in Specification and Ordering 24VDC, up to four(4)Class"B°, two(2)Class"A", or two(2)Class �nformation "B" and one(1) Ciass "A" Notification Appliance Circuits. With the .�ompliant with NFPA 72 optional plug-in PS-EXP module the unit supports (8) Class "B" or (4)Class"A"Notification Appliance Circuits.Additionally,an auxiliary power output of 2.5 Amps(disconnectsd upon AC power loss or an �nputs alarm condition)or up to 0.240 A of constant power on the PS-8 and • 120VAC,50/60Hz,4.25 Amps(PS-6/8)and 5.32 Amps 0.075 A of constant power on the PS-6. (PS-8)Operating Power in Alarm The Wheelock Power Suppiies can accommodate 7 or 12 AH batteries '240VAC,6�Hz,2.42 Amps(PS-6E and 3.22 Amps(PS-8E) ` inside its lockable chassis. Using an external battery cabinet it can Operating Power in Alarm charge up to 33 AH batteries(pending UL testing). Two FACP NAC •24VDC Battery Backup Connection circuits or two"Dry"contact initiating�ircuiis can be connected to the •Two!2}, 12V or 24V NAC Initiating Circuits(8-33V at 5mA) inputs.These inputs can then be directed to control supervision and FWR or DC power delivery to any combination of the four(4)outputs.Each output .Two(2}"Dry"Contact initiating Circuits is rated at 3,0 Amps(Class"B°)or(Class"A")and can be programmed .Accepts two(2)Class"A"or two(2)Class"B"circuit inputs to generate a steady or Code 3 Temporal Horn sound and a strobe . g�i�t in battery charger for sealed lead acid or gel type output under alarm condition.Total load for the PS-6 and PS-8 NAC batteries circuits must not exceed the power supplies rated outqut. The Power Suppliesunder non-alarm condition provides independent supervision for Class "A" and Class "B" FAGP NAC circuits. In the event of circuit trouble,the FACP will be notified via the POWERPATH steered input(IN1 or IN2). In addition there are two sets of trouble reporting terminals, one used for AC power loss reporting and the other for all troubles.The AC power loss reporting, on the common trauble terminals and on fN1 or IN2, ca� be delayed for either 30 seconds or 170 minutes. The AC power loss terminals �vill always report the trouble within 1 second after loss of AC power. � '� � FM L ` NIEA ��-'�� APPROVED 15i.s2-E ...Features contrnued on next page Outputs • NAC outputs are 24VDC,3.0 Amps each, power lirnited • 8 Amps on PS-8 and 6 Amps on the PS-6 total alarm current • Capable of four(4),Glass"B"circuits •Capable of two(2)Class"A"circuits •Capable of one(1)Class"A"circuit and two(2)Class"B"circuits • Capable of(8)Class"B"or four(4)Class"A"circuits with optionai PS-EXP module •Temporal(Code 3),constant voltage output,Wheelock Sync output or True input to output follower mode • Built-in Wheelock synchronization mode that can be fed to any or ail of the output circuits • Input and output can be synchronized with"IN>OUT SYNC" mode(SM, DSM,2nd POWERPATHT"'or FACP with synchronization protocol is required) •Audible silence capability • Filtered and electronically regulated output •2.5 Amp auxiliary power limited output with reset capability.(Removed upon AC loss or alarm.Automatic reset 30 seconds after AC power returns or the alarm condition is over)or 0.075 Amps(PS-6)or 0.240 Amps(PS-8)of auxiliary power limited output which remains on during AC loss or an alarm condition when configured for 24 hour bat:ery backup Supervision • Compatible with 12V or 24V(FWR or DC)FACP • Signaling appliance circuits are supervised and steered to either IN1 or IN2 • 10K Ohm, 1 Watt(�1/heelock Model#MPEOL}End of Line Resistor(EOLR)for supervision of all outputs •37 distinguishable trouble diagnostics •AC loss trouble reported over a separate set of contacts{delay of 1 secondj •Aii troubles are reported over the common trouble contacts{AC ioss can have a delay of 30 seconds or 170 minutes) •Automatic switchover to standby battery when AC faiis •Thermal and short circuit protection with auto reset • Input and output status LED indicators •AC fail supervision • Battery presence and!ow battery supervision • Ground Fault Detection,with diagnostics to indicate which circuit fault is on • Latching LED's for NAC trouble annunciation and Diagnostic trouble LED's(latching can be disabled) Power • Not Battery Dependent •Automatic switch over to standby batteries when AC fails • Supports seated lead acid or gel type batteries •Fused battery protection •Thermal and short circuit protection with auto reset • Supports both 7AH or 12AH batteries in the same cabinet � II ! ; ; s � � , POWERPATHT"' Operating Modes(refer to Installation Manual): Normal Mode:Provides constant 24 VDC output upon initiation by a voltage to input IN1 or IN2 or by a con;act opening on DRY1 or DRY2.The unit returns to standby mode when the input is deactivated. Wheelock Sync Mode: Provides signals for synchronization of patented Wheelock audible and strobe notifi�ation appliances. Audibles can aiso be silenced in this mode while the strobes continue to flash. In>Out Sync Mode:Accepts a synchronization signal on the input to provide a coded output or synchronized output. This signal may come from a FACP, another POWERPATH or a Wheelock SM or DSM synchronization module.Caution: Do not use strobes on coded output circuits. True Input Foilower Mode:Accepts a coded signal on the input to provide a coded output with the same timing as the input. The signal may come from a FACP, another POWERPATH or other coded source. Caution: Do not use strobes on coded output circuits. Temporal Mode: Codes the output voltage in a code-3 temporal pattern to drive audible appliances such as horns, bells or chimes. Caution: Do not use strobes on coded output circuits. Specifications and Ordering lnformation Model Number Order �nput Voitage/Current Approvais Code UL MEA CSFM FM BFP PS-6 105530 6 amp,red enclosure X ' ' ` ' PS-6B 100257 6 amp, black enclosure X ` ` ` ` PS-8 105531 8 amp,red enclosure X ` ' ' " PS-8B 105830 8 amp, black enclosure X ` � ' ' PS-EXP 105334 4 class B or 2 class A expansion module ` ' ` " " Input Circuit fnput Voltage and Current �Input voltage Range 8 to 33 VDC X=Approved Input Current @ 12 VDC I 0.005 amps `= Pending Input Current @ 24 VDC 0.005 amps Output Circuit Output Voltage and Current Four(4)Class B or !Two(2)Class A or One(1)Class A and Two(2}Class"B"or 24 VDC @ up to 3 amps per curcuit 8 Class B or 4 Class A (o tional PS-EXP module necessa Continuous duty up to 3 Amps per circuit, up to 4 Amps maximum per panel �Standby Gurrent 0.129 Amps Alarm Current 0.129 Amps Primary PS-6(120 VAC models) 105 to 130 VAC,50/60 Hz C 4.25 Amps Primary PS-8(120VAC models) 105 to 130 VAG 50/60 Hz @ 5.32 Amps Primary PS-6E(240 VAC models) 210 to 260 VAC,50/60 Hz @ 2.42 Amps Primary PS-8E(240 VAC models) 210 to 260 VAC 50/60 Hz C 3.22 Amps ' Secondary Power Charging Capacity 32 Amp hours @ 0.750 Amps per hour Enclosure can house up to two 12 AH batteries Aux Output jCP Mode PS-6 up to 75 mA PS-8 up to 25Q mA MP Mode 2.5A during non alarm Dimensions Comments PS-6/PS-6B 17"H x 13"W x 3.5"D Small profile PS-8/PS-8B 17"H x 15"W x 5.5"D Additional room for modules PS-EXP 4.3"H x 3.7"W x 1"D Plu s into main cb an all madels � Architects and Engineers Specifications The pov��er supply shall be Wheelock POWERPATH'"'Series PS-8,or equivalent.The unit shall be stand alone po�ver supply intended for powering fire alarm notification appliances via its own Notification Appliance Circuit(s)(NAC).The unit shall be UL&64 Listed for power limited operation of outputs and comply with NFPA 70(NEC),article 760. The power supply shall support a full 8A of notification power even if the battery is in a degraded mode and onfy AC power is connected. The power supply shall be activated by a standard Notificatian Appliance Circuit(NAC)from any Fire Alarm Control Panel(FACP)or a "Dry contacY'opening.The units shall be 8 ampere,24 VDC,regulated and filtered,supervised remote power supply/charger.It shall operate over the voitage range of 8 to 33 VDC or FWR.The primary application of the unit shali be able to expand fire alarm system capabilities for additional NAC circuits to support ADA requirements and to provide auxiliary power to support system accessories or functions.The power supply shall provide four Class`B",two Class"A",or two Class"B"and one Class"A"NAC circuit(s). Eight Class"B"or r=our Class "A"circuits shaii be available with an optional PS-EXP module.The PS-8 unit shall supply up to 240 mA of auxiliary power that is available during both non-alarm and alarm or auxiliary power of not less than 2.5A at 24 VDC during non-alarm. The power supply shaii be capable of charging batteries of up to 33 ampere hours per NFPA 72 at maximum rate of 0.750 Amps per hour. Input activation options shall be from not less than two NAC circuits or Dry Contact ciosures.These inputs shali have the capability of being directed to any combination of the four NAC circuit outputs.Each NAC circuit output shali be rated at 3 amperes for Class"B" appiications or 3 amperes each for Class"A".The outputs snall be programmable to generate a steady or Temporal(Code 3)output and or a synchronized strobe or horn output.The power supply shall provide independent loop supervision for either Class"A"or Class "B"FACP NAC circuits and shall have the capability to"steer"aii alarm or trouble conditions to either incoming NAC circuit.The units shall have common troubie terminals.The power supply shall be powered from a 120 VAC source with a current consumption of xx amperes max.The unit shall incorporate short circuit protection with auto reset.The power suppiy shaii incorporate a built in battery charger for lead acid or gel type batteries with automatic switchover to battery back up in the event of AC po�ver failure.The charger shali incorporate fused protection for the batteries and have the ability to report low battery and/or no battery condition(s). Standby current for battery back up shall be 0.129 Amps max.The power supply sha�l have the ability to latch trouble LED's so the circ�it in trouble can be identified.The cabinet dimensions shall be 17"H x 15"W x 5.5" D. The power supply shall be Wheelock POWERPATHT"'Series PS-6,or equivalent.The unit shali be stand alone power supply intended for powering fire alarm notification appliances via its own Notification Appliance Circuit(s)(NAC).The unit shall be UL 864 Listed for power limited operation of outputs and comply with NFPA 70(NEC),article 760. The power suppiy shall support a �ull 6A of notification power even if the battery is in a degraded mode and only AC power is connected. The power supply shall be activated by a standard Notification Appliance Circuit(NAC)from any Fire Alarm Control Panel(FACP)or a "Dry contacY'opening.The units shall be 6 ampere,24 VDC,regula:ed and fiitered,supervised remote power supply/charger. It shall operate over the voitage range of 8 to 33 VDC or FWR.The primary application of the unit shall be able to expand fire alarm system capabilities for additional NAC circuits to support ADA requirements and to provide auxiliary power to support system accessories �r functions.The power suppiy shail provide four Class"B",two Class"A",or two Class"B"and one Class"A"NAC circuit(s). Eight Class"B" or Four Class"A"circuits snail be available with an optional PS-EXP module.The PS-6 unit shall suppiy up to 200 mA of auxiliary power that is availab�e during both non-alarm and alarm or auxiliary power of not less than 2.5A at 24 VDC during non-alarm. The power supply shall be capabie of charging batteries of up to 33 ampere hours per NFPA 72 at a maximum rate of 0.750 Amps per hour. Input activation options shail be from not less than two NAC circuits or Dry Contact closures.These inputs shall have the capability of being dirscted to any combination of the four NAC circuit outputs. Each NAC circuit output shall be rated at 3 amperes for Class�`B" appiications or 3 amperes each for Class"A".The outputs shall be programmable to generate a steady or Temporal(Code 3)output and or a synchronized strobe or horn output.The power supply shall provide independent loop supervision for either Class"A"or Class "B"FACP NA�circuits and shali have the capability to"steer"ali alarm or troubie conditions to either incoming NAC circuit.The units shall have common trouble terminals.The power supply shall be powered from a 120 VAC source with a current consumption of xx amperes max.The unit shali incorporate short circuit protection with auto reset.The power supply shali incorporate a built in battery charger for lead acid or gel type batteries with automatic switchover to battery 5ack up in the event of AC power failure.The charger shall incorporate fused protection for the batteries and have the ability to report low battery and/or no battery condition(s). Standby current for battery back up shall be 0.130 Amps max.The power supply shall have the ability to latch trouble LED's so the circuit in trouble can be identified.The cabinet dimensions shall be 17"H x 13"W x 3.5" D. A VdARNING:PLEASE READ TH�S�SPECI�ICATiONS ANC WSTALLATION INSTRUCTICNS CARcFULLY BEFORE�•SING,SPECIFYING OR APPLYING THIS PRODUCT.FAILURE TO GCMP�Y VNITH ANY OF THES�WSTRUCTIONS,CAUTIONS AND l^lARNIN�S COULD RESULT IN fMPROPER APPLfCATIGN,INSTALLA- TION NNDJOR OPERATION OF TH�S�PRQDUCTS IN AN EMERGENCY SITUATION,WHICH�.OULD RESULT IN PROPERTY DAMAGE,AND jERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO YOU AND/OR OTHERS. NOTE:Due to continuous development of our products,specifications and offerings are subject to change without notice in accor- dance with Wheelock I�c.standard terms and conditions. �r�� WE ENGOURAi�E AND SUPPORT NICET CERTIFICATION 1 YEAR WARRANTY Made in USA S9104 PS-6&8 Q6l03 � �� .� :�r �� _ //'`\ r CooperNotiiicationis Wheelock° MEDC SAFEPATH� WAVE� �� COOPERNotifieation � Fire Alarm Control Equipment and Annunciators: IFC-320 Intelligent Fire Controller NCM-W,NCM-F Network Communication Modules UDACT Universal Digital Alarm Communicator LCD-80 Liquid Crystal Display LCD-160 Liquid Crystal Display XP6-C Six Circuit Supervised Control Module � �,' ,I I � 1 3 ; i F i I I ( � � � jci-7112:a 1 IFC-320 � ,� Intell�gent Addressable ��"'��O("� „��,� i Fire Alarm System ��f�f r� General .vbPly� , As a stand-alone small-to-medium system, or as a large net- ��P�� work,the IFC-320 meets virtually every application requirement. �� Designed with modularity and for ease of system planning,the � „� IFC-320 can be configured with just a few devices for small � � building applications,or for a large campus or high-rise applica- � - tion. Simply add additional peripheral equipment to suit the application. NOTE:Unless called out with a version-specific"C"or"E"at the end of the part number, "IFC-320" refers to models IFC-320, IFC-320C, and IFC-320E;similarly, `;1CPU-320"refers to models JCPU-320,JCPU-320C,and JCPU-320E. Features • Listed to UL Standard 864,9th edition. I • One isolated intelligent Signaling�ine Circuit(SLC)Style 4,6 r or 7. I FC-320 • Up to 159 detectors(any mix of ion,photo,thermal,or multi- sensor) and 159 modules (N.O. manual stations, two-wire smoke,notification,or relay).318 devices maximum. FLASHSCAN�INTELLIGENT FEATURES: • Standard 80-character display. • Poll 318 devices in less than two seconds. • Network option— 103 nodes supported (IFC-200, IFC-400, . Activate up to 159 outputs in less than five seconds. IFC-320, IFC-640, IFC2-640, IFC-1010/2020, IFC-3030, IFC2-3030, JNCA/JNCA-2 Network Annunciator, IFW Intelli- ' Multicolor LEDs blink device address during Walk Test. gent Fire Workstation)using wire or fiber-optic connections. • Fully digital,high-precision protocol(U.S. Patent 5,539,389). • 6.0 amp power supply with four Class A/B built-in Notification • Manual sensitivity adjustment—nine levels. Appliance Circuits(NAC). Selectable System Sensor,Whee- • Pre-alarm intelligent sensing—nine levels. lock,or Gentex strobe synchronization. • Day/Night automatic sensitivity adjustment. • Built-in Alarm,Trouble,and Supervisory relays. • Sensitivity windows: • VeriFireO Tools offline program option. Sort Maintenance . lon-0.5 to 2.5%/foot obscuration. Reports by compensation value(dirty detector), peak alarm � photo-0.5 to 2.35%/foot obscuration. value,or address. • Autoprogramming and Walk Test reports. • Laser(VIEW�)-0.02 to 2.0%/foot obscuration. • Optional universal 318-point DACT. • Acclimate - 0.5 to 4.0%/foot obscuration. I • 80-character remote annunciators(up to 32). • HARSHT"'-0.5 to 2.35%/foot obscuration. • EIA-485 annunciators,including custom graphics. • Drift compensation(U.S.Patent 5,764,142). • Printer interface(80-column and 40-column printers). • Degraded mode — in the unlikely event that the JCPU-320 microprocessor fails,FlashScan detectors revert to degraded • History file with 800-event capacity in nonvolatile memory, operation and can activate the JCPU-320 NAC circuits and plus separate 200-event alarm-only file. alarm relay. Each of the four built-in panel circuits includes a • Alarm Verification selection per point,with tally. DisablelEnable switch for this feature. • Autoprogramming and Walk Test reports. • Multi-detector algorithm involves nearby detectors in alarm • Positive Alarm Sequence(PAS)Presignai. decision(U.S. Patent 5,627,515). • Silence inhibit and Auto Silence timer options. • Automatic detector sensitivity testing(NFPA-72 compliant). • March time/temporal/California two-stage coding/strobe • Maintenance alert(two levels). synchronization. • Seif-optimizing pre-alarm. • Field-programmable on panel or on PC, with VeriFire Tools program check,compare,simulate. • Full QWERTY keypad. • Charger for up to 90 hours of standby power. • Non-alarm points for lower priority functions. • Remote ACK/Signal Silence/System ReseUDrill via monitor modules. • Automatic time control functions,with holiday exceptions. • Surface Mount Technology(SMT)electronics. • Extensive,built-in transient protection. • Powerful Boolean logic equations. jciJt 12:a1•07/22/OS—Page 1 of 8 VIEW(VERY/NTELLIGENT EARLY WARN/NG) RELEASING FEATURES: SMOKE DETECTION TECHNOLOGY: • Ten independent hazards. • Revolutionary spot laser design. • Sophisticated cross-zone(three options). • Advanced intelligent sensing algorithms differentiate between • Delay timer and Discharge timers(adjustable). smoke and non-smoke signals(U.S.Patent 5,831,524). • Abort(four options). , • Addressable operation pinpoints the fire location. • Low-pressure CO2 listed. • No moving parts to fail or filters to change. HIGH-EFFICIENCY OFFLINE SWITCH/NG • Early warning performance comparable to the best aspiration systems at a fraction of the lifetime cost. 3.0 AMP POWER SUPPLY(6.0 A/N ALARM): ACCLIMATE • 120 or 220/240 VAC. LOW-PROFILE/NTELLIGENT MULTI-SENSOR: ' Displays battery currenVvoltage on panel{with display). • Detector automatically adjusts sensitivity levels without oper- ator intervention or programming. Sensitivity increases with heat. • Microprocessor-based technology; combination photo and thermal technology. • FlashScan or classic mode compatible with IFC2-640, IFC- 320. • Low-temperature warning signal at 40°F t 5°F (4.44°C t � 2.77°C). � HARSH NOSTILE-AREA SMOKE HEAD: • Provides early warning of smoke detection in environment where traditional smoke detectors are not practical. • The detector's filters remove particulates down to 30 microns in size. • Intake fan draws air into photo chamber,while airborne parti- cles and water mist are removed. • Requires auxiliary 24 VDC from system or remote power supply. Up to 32 Remote Displays SLC Intelligent Loop 1 DEVICES _ � �� p F !"' - - - - ° ° +#� y�.{y,ry{�.r �' � tpp�p"�'� 2957TNJ FlashSranC Acclimate"" ��---- 7351J PlashScanC VIEW�^� JBG-12LX M300MJ M3�A,J XP6110 FDU-80 FDU-60 F7X-P2J FlashScart'�HARSHTM ♦ � I!O Modules 295 iJ FlashScan�photo "�' � � .�� etc. IDC Relay Contact FDU-80` ac ;� EIA-485 E -'- ,, � G � �' EIA-485 2048 annunciatodcontrol points i � �� r"�� t .--. __— J z_�...� [ . . . . i ;� � � � �y° ' � � °` � � � � � -' = ' _ � °I(�� ■ ■ � — - �" �—I �k i . . . � � ACM-8R ACM/AEM-24AT LDM32 IFG320 Relay Control LED Annunciator Custom Graphics i Optional 318 point UDACT Dual phone L � lines to Central E/A-232 Terminal Station Sample E�a-2s2 :� —�—a � � � System PRN Printer CRT-2 Terminal Options �711261k.wm1 Page 2 of 8—jci-7112:a1•07/22/OS FlashScan, Exclusive New Field Programming Options World-Leading Detector Protocol Autoprogram is a timesaving feature of the IFC-320.It is a spe- At the heart of the IFC-320 is a set of detection devices and cial software routine that allows the IFC-320 to "learn" what device protocol — FlashScan (U.S. Patent 5,539,389). Flash- devices are physically connected and automatically load them in Scan is an all-digital protocol that gives superior precision and the program with default values for all parameters. Requiring high noise immunity. less than one minute to run,this routine allows the user to have In addition to providing quick identification of an active input almost immediate fire protection in a new installation, even if device,this new protocol can also activate many output devices only a portion of the detectors are installed. in a fraction of the time required by competitive protocols. This Keypad Program Edit (with KDM-R2) The IFC-320 has the high speed also allows the IFC-320 to have the largest device exclusive feature of the product line of program creation and per loop capacity in the industry—318 points—yet every input editing capability from the front panel keypad, while continuinq and output device is sampled in less than two seconds. The to provide fire protection.The architecture of the IFC-320 soft- microprocessor-based FlashScan detectors have bicolor LEDs Ware is such that each point entry carries its own program, that can be coded to provide diagnostic information, such as including control-by-event links to other points. This allows the device address during Walk Test. program to be entered with independent per-point segments, while the IFC-320 simultaneously monitors other (already Intelligent Sensing installed)points for alarm conditions. VeriFire Tools is an offline programming and test utility that can Intelligent sensing is a set of software algorithms that provides greatly reduce installation programming time,and increase con- the IFC-320 with industry-leading smoke detection capability. fidence in the site-specific software. It is Windows0-based and These complex algorithms require many calculations on each provides technologically advanced capabilities to aid the reading of each detector, and are made possible by the very- installer.The installer may create the entire program for the IFC- high-speed microcomputer used by the IFC-320. 320 in the comfort of the office,test it, store a backup file,then Drift Compensation and Smoothing: Drift compensation bring it to the site and download from a laptop into the panel. allows the detector to retain its original ability to detect actual smoke, and resist false alarms, even as dirt accumulates. It gelow: Autoprogram function. reduces maintenance requirements by allowing the system to automatically perform the periodic sensitivity measurements required by NFPA 72. Smoothing filters are also provided by software to remove transient noise signals, such as those ' AUTOPRQGRAM PLEASE WAIT caused by electrical interference. Maintenance Warnings: When the drift compensation per- formed for a detector reaches a certain level,the performance of the detector may be compromised, and special warnings are given.There are three warning levels: (1) Low Chamber value, usually indicative of a hardware problem in the detector; (2) �1:84 DETS, 15 tv1QDS Maintenance Alert, indicative of dust accumulation that is near BELLS: 04 but below the allowed limit;(3)Maintenance Urgent,indicative of dust accumulation above the allowed limit. Sensitivity Adjust: Nine sensitivity levels are provided for alarm detection. These levels can be set manually, or can change automatically between day and night.Nine levels of pre- = - � � �� ... �= �'=:� alarm sensitivity can also be selected, based on predetermined ''`'`'��""``°�``°"` """"` �-� `"' ' � a�►c ��a� ��.� � ��- a��e� �a�a��a� tevels of alarm. Pre-alarm operation can be latching or self- �� ,� „;. restoring,and can be used to activate special control functions. �'":°"'" �� '� ��'�°�' �� Self-Optimizing Pre-Alarm: Each detector may be set for �` ��" �' �� u= �a�'�� '"�"=t-�"-`°-""�� "Self-Optimizing° pre-alarm. In this special mode, the detector '�"'"'"°""'"`""`°"` "learns° its normal environment, measuring the peak analog r,a,a„��,,, a,,, readings over a long period of time, and setting the pre-alarm � �� x� t�*�� •�,.�� '"-��. level just above these normal peaks. ��, ``"""° �� fm�, �� Cooperating Multi-Detector Sensing: A patented feature of t g,,,. �--r; `�m�� ' intelligent sensing is the ability of a smoke sensor to consider �`�F ' ��e� �.�� „�.,�.�.�., o � readings from nearby sensors in making alarm or pre-alarm t�,,,,,;.,,.�, �,KK,,,,�„N decisions.Without statistical sacrifice in the ability to resist false `""'"""� P«aA �`f.ah t � alarms, it allows a sensor to increase its sensitivity to actual �a � � smoke by a factor of almost two to one. ^� � � ` ��.�..�.t�.��.�.�..�� »�„. ,3�, �-�-- ___ 6856�ool.tif VeriFire Tools System Programming screen jci-7112:a 1•07/22/08—Page 3 oi 8 JCPU�32� TB70:DC Power(24 VDC,power-limited);Non-Resetlable,Resettable. J7:Network/Service Connection(NUP), Board Diagram TB11:EIA-485 Connection(supervised);Terminal Mode,ACS Mode. Power-limited,supervised. T812:EIA-232 Connection;Printer,PC/Terminal(CRT). J2:USB A VeriFire Tools Connection. J3:USB B VeriFire 7oo/sConnection. All NAC circuits are power-limited,supervised z<vNON- ew�ansreen+.ei�•.ass "' 4E3E' -V�EScT ftEC %MIT ACS PRINTER PC'CRT NJP� U58A USe3 �� p e1rv Z^4[COCEfi O 0 'E- - - - - Q `� rt ii NENlORK O �'O ' . a a ♦ '�x v..�: vx H • � � SL�i T89 �J8 81�0 8.=_. B 1�1 T� J7 !2 `—'J3 T613 T69:NACN1 �'" T813:SLC Loop#7 LEDs 11,12 " + � - (supervised,power-limited). �uo Fnu_r Q �Isw� ,.� � At IeR: Q 8B ,�s0 Fz� �`—� SW1:Ground Fault De[ection Enable/Disable. � �Pt � T68:NAC#2 3 r LEDs 13,14 - `A� TB3 F2:15 A Slo-Blow Fuse,P/N 12057. � J8:Zone Coder Connection. �p7;Ground Fault 1^YSa B� ��EO3 T63:Battery Connection;over-current protected, Jumper(SLC#11. �� ^ �Rr� non-power-limited. TB� FAL:T T87:NACk3 - LEDs 15,16 • LED3:Earth Fault - (general board �rae 9round fault). ��o a�� TB6:NAC#4 -�9 o I � LEDs 17,18 ^�6 �I � LED10:SLC loop T81:AC Power Ground Fault. Connection io (non-power-limited): g�g Hot,Neutral,and � � O O � � v T81 Earth Ground. � tiO TBS:Relays Supervisory, I TBS J � � O O O Sewrity : i �� O � O O O O suvv � ' I�aR,, �e Sc^ = � � J6:Auxiliary Trouble Input. J5:Security Tamper Switch. j""'.:�'"1:} WS SW6 SW7 �a 8 g.:[�.LED1J6 JS � � ��TB4 0�� i� �� :•KErono:: :J7 4€4�d 0 4'P:�p�� p ^�a"� TRO�'8�- SW:1 2 � 4 LEDs:8 7 6 5 4 3 Y `.,,_�«,,.w„ T64:Alarm Relay,Trouble Relay. SW1,SW2,� System switches. J7:KDM-R2 LEDt:Power On(AC or battery) Output relays;power-limited only it SW3,SW4: "No Keyboard Connection LED2:Signals Silenced connected to a power-limited source. Disable-Enable Operation": LED3:Point Disabled switches for Backup SWS Acknowledge LED4:S stem Troubie �iizooro.wmi Alarm,NACs SW6 Sifence Y 1-4 respectively. SW7 Reset LEDS:Supervisory LED6:Security LED7:Pre-Alarm LEDB:Fire Alarm Network Diagram � -�;; i; �'' RP Im �� i [....._I.L____.__.� IFW Block Diagram R� NOTI•FIRE•NET �s�� , = �— za�- � Sample Node Configurations JPRN I FC-320 �� IFC2-640 KEY.� JPRN ��-��F °CO°°°NFN Twisted-Pair Wire � —� ACS NFN Dual Fiber-Optic Link '��QO�''; ( �� Other interfaces __ FDU-80 �I ACS � �� ,�� @, _ (I � ��,� �.�� . ,.,..,.,,., ---� _'..__- JPRN OPTIONAL I F W Style 7 Connection �—�, - `-.'��g-'� JPRN .��o�°_6_8 _ � JNCA-2 — ACS �. Page 4 of 8—jci-7112:a1•07/22/08 Placement of Equipment Configuration Guidelines in Chassis and Cabinet The IFC-320 system ships assembled; description and some The following guidelines outline the IFC-320's flexible system options follow. design. IFC-320: The standard, factory-assembled IFC-320 system Wiring:When designing the cabinet layout,consider separation �ncludes the following components: one CPU-320 control panel of power-limited and non-power-limited wiring as discussed in mounted on chassis (120 V operation —ships with grounding the IFC-320 Installation Manual. cable, battery interconnect cables, and document kit); includes It is critical that all mounting holes of the IFC-320 are secured one integral KAPS-24 integral power supply mounted to the with a screw or standoff to ensure continuity of Earth Ground. CPU-320; one primary display KDM-R2 keypad/display; and one cabinet for surface or semi-flush mounting.Purchase batter- Networking:If networking two or more control panels,each unit ies separately.One or two option boards may be mounted inside requires a NCM-W (wire) or NCM-F (fiber) Network Control the IFC-320 cabinet;additional option boards can be utilized in Module. The NCM-W/-F can be installed in any option board remote cabinets. position(see manual). Option boards can be mounted in front IFC-320R: Same as IFC-320 above,but in red enclosure. of the NCM modules. IFC-320C: Same as IFC-320 above, but with ULC listing. See Canadian applications manual addendum 52858. KDM-R2 Controls and Indicators IFC-320E: Same as IFC-320 above,but with 240 V operation. Program Keypad:QWERTY type(keyboard layout). BMP-1: Blank module for unused module positions. 12 LED Indicators: Power; Fire Alarm; Pre-Alarm; Security; TR-320: Trim ring for the IFC-320 cabinet. Supervisory; System Trouble; Signals Silenced; Points Dis- abled;Control Active;Abort; Pre-Discharge;Discharge. Membrane Switch Controls:Acknowledge/Scroll Display; Sig- nal Silence;Drill;System Reset;Lamp Test. LCD Display: 80 characters (2 x 40) with long-life LED back- light. � � ° � SLOT 1:CPU,KAPS-24,and primary display. i i � ; � S�OT 2:CPU,KAPS-24,and primary display. �.a i�% SLOT 3:Mounting location, Keypad/display � option board. unit attaches to �� chassis rails. '� °' � � � � m i\ �Panel ships factory- \\, � assembled,with chassis installed with CPU, �' \ � KAPS-24,and KDM-R2. \,\ � �� \ �\ Equipment Placement \ �>>Zchswmf in IFC-320 Chassis jci-7112:a1•07/22/08—Page 5 of 8 Option Modules 5951J: FlashScan thermal detector 135°F(57°C). FCPS-24S6/-24S8: Remote six-amp and eight-amp power sup- 5951 RJ: FlashScan thermai detector 135°F(57°C)with rate-of- plies with battery charger.See FCPS-24S6/-24S8 technical bul- rise5951 NJ: FlashScan 190°F (88°C) high-temperature ther- 1 letin JCI-6927. mal detector. DH300PL: Low-flow FlashScan photo duct detector with hous- COMPATIBLE DEVICES,ElA-232 PORTS ��g. JPRN-6: 80-column printer.See JC1-6956. DH300RPL: Low-flow FlashScan photo duct detector with relay VS4095/S2: Printer, 40-column, 24 V. Mounted in external and housing. backbox. 2951TMJ: FlashScan Acclimate low-profile multi-sensor detec- CRT 2: Video dispiay terminal. tor. COMPATIBLE DEVICES,E/A-485 PORTS FTX-P2J: rlashScan HARSH Hostile Area Smoke Head. ACM-24AT: ACS annunciator—up to 90 points of annunciation 7351J: FlashScan VIEW laser photo detector. with Alarm or Active LED, Trouble LED, and switch per circuit. 6224RB: Low-profile relay base. Active/Alarm LEDs can be programmed (by powered-up switch B224BI: Isolator base for fow-profile detectors. selection)by point to be red,green,or yellow;the Trouble LED is B210LPJ: Low-profile base.Standard U.S.siyle. always yellow. See JCI-6862. AEM-24AT: Same LED and switch capabilities as ACM-24AT, B501J: �uropean-style,4"(10.16 cm)base. expands the ACM-24AT to 48,72,or 96 points. See JCl-6862. 6501 BH: Sounder base,includes 6501 base above. ACM-48A: ACS annunciator—up to 96 points of annunciation M300MJ: FlashScan monitor module. with Alarm or Active LED per circuit.Active/Alarm LEDs can be M300DJ: FlashScan dual monitor module. programmed(by powered-up switch selection)in groups of 24 to M302MJ: FlashScan two-wire detector monitor module. be red,green,or yellow.Expandab�e to 96 points with one AEM- 48A. See JCI-6862. M301 MJ: FlashScan miniature monitor module. AEM-48A: Same LED capabilities as ACM-48A, expands the M300CJ: FlashScan NAC control module. ACM-48A to 96 points.See JCI-6862. M300RJ: FlashScan relay module. TM-4: iransmitter Module. Includes three reverse-polarity cir- JBG-12LX: Manual fire alarm station,addressable. cuits and one municipal box circuit; mount on I�C-320 chassis MSOOXJ: Isolator module. or remotely. XP6-C: FlashScan six-circuit supervised control module. FDU-80: Remote LCD display, 80 characters, with LEDs.See JCI-6820. XP6-MA: FlashScan six-zone interface module;connects intel- ligent alarm system to two-wire conventional detection zone. LDM: Lamp Driver Modules LDM-32,LDM-E32,and LDM-R32; XP6-R: FlashScan six-relay(Form-C)control module. remote custom driver modules. See LDM technical bulletin. ACM-8R: Remote Relay Module with eight Form-C contacts. XP10-M: FlashScan ten-input monitor module. Can be located up to 6,000 ft. (1828.8 m) from panel on four wires.See ACM-8R technical bulletin. RPT-485 Series: Repeater, isolator and/or fiber-optic modem; repeats EIA-485 over twisted pair or converts to fiber-optic medium.See RPT technical bulletin. SCS: Smoke control stations SCS-8,SCE-8, with lamp drivers SCS-8l, SCE-8L; eight (expandable to 16) circuits. See SCS technical bulletin. UDACT: Universal Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter, 636 channel. UZC-256: Programmable Universal Zone Coder provides posi- tive non-interfering successive zone coding. Microprocessor- controlled, field-programmable from IBMC�-compatible PCs (requires optional programming kit). See UZC-256 technical bul- letin. COMPAT/BLE/NTELLIGENT DEVICES BEAMHK: Heating kit for transmitter/receiver unit of rS6- 200(S)below. BEAMHRK: Heating kit for use with the reflector of FSB-200(S) below. BEAMLRK: Long-range accessory kit,FSB-200(S)below. BEAMMRK: Multi-mount kit,FSB-200(S)below. BEAMSMK: Surface-mount kit,FSB-200(S)below. FSB-200: Intelligent beam smoke detector.See DN-6985. FSB-200S: Intelligent beam smoke detector with integral sensi- tivity test. 1951J: �ow-profile FlashScan ionization detector. 2951J: Low-profile FlashScan photoelectric detector. � 2951TJ: Low-profile FlashScan photoelectric detector with 135°F(57°C)thermal. Page 6 of 8—jci-7112:a1•07/22/08 OTHER OPTIONS DPI-232: Direct Panel Interface,specialized modem for extend- ing serial data links to remotely located FACPs and/or peripher- als;mount on IFC-320 chassis. NCM-W: Network Communications Module, Wire. Order one NCM per network node (JCPU-640, JCPU2-640, JNCA, or JNCA-2). NCM-F: Network Communications Module, Fiber. Order one NCM per network node (JCPU-640, JCPU2-640, JNCA, or JNCA-2). IFW-W: Intelligent Fire Workstation (network control station), Wire. UL-Listed graphics PC with mouse, 17" color flat-screen LCD monitor. Order as necessary for network systems. Each IFW consumes one of 103 network addresses. IFW-F: Intelligent Fire Workstation (network control station), Fiber. UL-Listed graphics PC with mouse, 17"color flat-screen LCD monitor. Order as necessary for network systems. Each IFW consumes one of 103 network addresses. BAT Series: Batteries. IFC-320 utilizes two 12 volt, 18 to 200 AH batteries.This series of products replaces the previous PS Series. JCI-LBB: Battery Box (required for batteries Iarger than 25 AH). JCI-LBBR: Same as above,but red. � r1� jci-7112:a1•07/22/08—Page 7 of 8 SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS System Capacity Temperature and Humidity Ranges • Intelligent Signaling Line Circuits.........................................1 This system meets NFPA requirements for operation at 0 — • Intelligent detectors .........................................................159 49°C/32—120°F and at a relative humidity 93%±2%RH(non- • Addressable monitor/control modules..............................159 condensing) at 32°C ± 2°C (90°F t 3°F). However, the useful life of the system's standby batteries and the electronic compo- • Programmable internal hardware and output circuits ..........4 nents may be adversely affected by extreme temperature ranges • Programmable software zones...........................................99 and humidity. Therefore,it is recommended that this system and • Special programming zones...............................................14 its peripherais be installed in an environment with a normal room • LCD annunciators per JCPU-320/-320E............................32 temperature of 15—27°C/60—80°F. • ACS annunciators per JCPU-320/-320E......................32 addresses x 64 points Agency Listings and Approvals The listings and approvals below apply to the basic IFC-320 Specifications control panel. In some cases,certain modules may not be listed • Primary input power,JCPU-320 board: 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz, by certain approval agencies,or listing may be in process.Con- 3.0 A.JCPU-320E board:220/240 VAC,50/60 Hz,1.5 A. sult factory for latest listing status. • Total output 24 V power:6.0 A in alarm. • UL Listed:file S1570 NOTE: The power supply has a total of 6.0 A of available power. ' ULC Listed:file S635 This is shared by all internal circuits. • CSFM:7165-0554:153;7170-0554:154 • Standard notification circuits(4): 1.5 A each. • MEA:128-07-E Vol.4 • rour-wire detector power: 1.25 A. • City of Chicago • Non-resettable regulated power outputs: 1.25 A each. • Battery charger range: 18 AH—200 AH. Use separate cabi- $tandards net for batteries over 25 AH. The IFC-320 complies with the following UL Standards and • Optional high-capacity(25—120 AH) battery charger: CHG- NFPA 72�ire Alarm Systems requirements: 120. —UL 864��ire). • rloat rate:27.6 V. —UL 1076(Burglary). —LOCAL (Automatic, Manual, Waterflow and Sprinkler Cabinet Specifications Supervisory). IFC-320 cabinet dimensions: BACKBOX, OUTSIDE: 18.240" —AUXILIARY (Automatic, Manual and Waterflow) (requires (46.33 cm) height, 5.77" (14.656 cm) deep. WITH DOOR: 4XTMF). 18.870" (47.93 cm) wide x 18.469" (46.911 cm) high x 5.817" —REMOTE STATION (Automatic, Manual and WaterFlow) (14.775 cm) deep. BACKBOX, INSIDE: 18.120" (46.025 cm) (requires 4XTMF). inner width,5.175"(13.145 cm)inner depth. —PROPRIETARY(Automati�,Manual and Waterflow). Not applicable for FM. —EMERGENCY VOICE/ALARM. Acclimater^^, HARSHT"', NOTI•FIRE•NETT"", and ONYXWorksT"' are trademarks; and FlashScanC�, NIONOO, NOTIFIER�, ONYXOO, UniNetOO, VeriFireO,and VIEWO are registered trademarks of Honeywell International Inc.MicrosoftOO and WindowsOO are registered trademarks of Microsott Corporation. EchelonOO is a registered trademark of Echelon Corporation. IBMOO is a registered trademark of IBM Corporation. 002008. All rights reserved. Unauthonzed use of this document is strictly prohiblted. This document is not intended to be used for i�stallation purposes. We try to keep our product information up-to-date and accurate. We cannot cover alt specific applications or anticipate all requirements. �.. All specifications are subject to change without notice. � Made in the U.S.A. For more information,contact Johnson Controls Field Support Center. 507 East Michigan Street,Milwaukee,WI 53202 www.johnsoncontrols.com Page 8 ot 8—jci-7112:a1•07/22/08 JCI-686':A1 NCM-W, NCM-F � -,i Network Communications Modules �Qht1S411 �/,,��` �ontrols General 6 �,�.,:�, _ x� The Network Communications Module (NCM) provides the � � , F� IFC-640, IFC-3030, and IFC2-3030 Fire Alarm Control Panels '�° � �� and JNCA and JNCA-2 Network Control Annunciators with a �� means to connect to NOTI•FIRE•NETT"'. Two types of NCM � �� ' � �� are available: NCM-W for connecting nodes with twisted-pair �' ° ' g wire,and NCM-F for connecting nodes with fiber-optic cable. `�<�`� �� - ': �� ,�� y'e�' �� NCM-W Features �,� � � � e` • Supports twisted-pair wire medium. �' ��` �� • NFPA Style 4(Class B)operation or NFPA Sryle 7(Class A) ` �� - , � =' z � ,� ' operation. -� • Two programmable data thresholds. � � �,�, �,� � • Transformer coupling provides electrical isolation between �� :, � �,�� -y nodes. � � ° � �� • Pluggable terminal wiring with strain relief. �, �� ' ��: � • Pluggabie service connector(feeds signal directly through)in x� ` �� "° �"�`�� ' � . ��, the event that power must be removed from a node. �,�-:� • 312.5 Kbaud transmission rate. � '� � � �:� '�,� � • �dt8 IS fBgBllef8lBC�3T @flCl'1 flOd@. � � li��i 4 �� I '��,j�' `+� �r4�� • Two network ports to allow simultaneous connection to fire alarm control panel and to programming computec • Enables software and database upload/download over NCM-W NOTI•FIRE•NETT"'. • 312.5 Kbaud transmission rate. • Repeaters are available to increase signal. • Data is regenerated at each node. • Repeaters may be utilized to switch media type. • Two network ports to allow simuitaneous connection to fire • Up to 3,000 feet(914.4 m)between nodes in a poinr.-to-point alarm control panel and to programming computer. fashion(actual distance varies with wire quality). . Enables software and database upload/download over NCM-W Interconnections: When wiring consecutive NCM-W NOTI•FIRE•NETT"'. boards, wiring may enter or exit at Port A or Port B. NCM-W NCM-F Interconnections: When wiring consecutive nodes/ port-to-port wiring is not polarity sensitive; use of Port A or Port repeaters,fiber cable must exit one board on Transmit(TX)and B is arbitrary.An NCM-W may be connected to any of the follow- enter the next node/repeater on Receive (RX). The fiber-optic ing devices: MIB-W, MIB-WF, NAM-232W, NCM-W(in another Pair (RX, TX) from Port A of one node/repeater may be con- panei),IFW-W network connection, RPT-W, RPT-WF. nected to either Port A or Port B of another node/repeater. An NCM-W Switch Functions: The NCM-W provides two sets of NCM-F inay be connected to any of the following devices: switches to simplify network setup. Enable ground fault detec- MIB-F, MIB-WF, NAM-232F, another NCM-F, IFW-F network tion by setting"ON"switch SW103(Channel A); switch SW101 connection, RPT-F, RPT-WF. (Channel B).Activate on-board end-of-line resistors by setting °orv° switch SW100 (Channel A�; sw�ccn io2 (Channel B). COmmon Specifications NOTE: �orrect configuration is dependent on network design; referfo the NOTI•FIRE•NETT""manual. Temperature and humidity ranges: This system meets NFPA For further information and diagrams, refer to the NCM Installa- requirements for operation at 0°C to 49°C(32°F to 120°F); and tion Document,51533. at a relative humidity (noncondensing) of 85% at 30°C (86°F) per NrPA, and 93%±2%at 32°C ±2°C (89.6°F± 1.1°F) per NCM-F Features ULC. However, the useful life of the system's standby batteries and the electronic components may be adversely affected by • Supports fiber-optic medium. extreme temperature ranges and humidity. Therefore, it is rec- • NFPA Style 4(Class B)or Style 7(Class A)operation. ommended that this system and all peripherals be installed in an environment with a nominal room temperature of 15°C to 27°C • Data is immune to all environmental noise. (60°F to 80°F). • Optical isolation prevents ground loops. • NOTI•FIRE•NETT"'fiber-optic medium. MIX1119 WIP@ 111CI Fibe!' • Fiber type: 62.5/125 micrometers (multimode); or 50/125 on the �ame Network micrometers(multimode). • Maximum attenuation is 8 dB with 62.5/125 um cabie and 42 In some networks, it may be necessary to mix twisted-pair wire dB with 50/125 um cable. and fiber-optic cable.There are two solutions: • Wavelength (1): 820 nanometers (use standard 850 nm ' �n any network, an RPT-WF inay be used as an interface fiber). between wire and fiber. • Connectors:STO style. JCI-6861:A1•1/28/08—Page 1 of 2 • In a network that uses an IFC-1010/2020, a MIB-Wf may • ULC Listed:file CS118. be used as the interface between wire and fiber. • CSFM approved: files 7165-0554:143 (lFC-640), 7165- 0554:149 (IFC-3030), 7170-0554:142 (NFS-640), 7170- Mounting 0554:150(IFC-3030). Both NCM-W and NCM-F can be installed in any standard chas- ' FM approved. sis such as the CHS-4L, CHS-M2, CHS-M3 or CHS-4N (see • MEA approved: file 317-01-E2 (NCM-W, lFC-640), 345-02- panel sheets). Additionally, the NCM-W can be door-mounted E2(NCM-W, IFC-3030). on the ADP-4B dress panel on a single-space blank plate (BMP-1>for mounting in an cA6-a series cabinet. Product Line Information A enc Listin s and A rovals NCM-W: Network Communications Module, twisted-pair w�re J Y 9 PP intertace. The following listings and approvals apply to the NCM. In some NCM-F: Network Communications Module, fiber-optic cable cases,certain modules or applications may not be listed by cer- interface. tain approval agencies,or listing may be in process.Consult fac- tory for latest listing status. • UL Listed:file S635. Diagnostic LED Indicators A HI(green):Illuminates to indicate the NCM-W Port A is set for high threshold(NCM-W only).B HI(green):Illuminates to indicate the NCM-W Port B is set for high threshold (NCM-W only). RCD A (green): Illuminates when the NCM is receiving data from NOTI•FIRE•NETT"'on Port A.RCD B(green): Illuminates when the NCM is receiving data from NOTI•FIRE•NETT"'on Port B. STATA (yellow): Illuminates when the NCM has not received valid data from NOTI•FIRE•NETT"'on Port A for at least 16 sec- onds. STATB(yellow): Illuminates when the NCM has not received valid data from NOTI•FIRE•NETT""on Port B for at least 16 seconds. RECON (yellow): Illuminates when a reconfiguration on NOTI•FIRE•NETT"' is in progress. PULSEi (green): Illumi- nates when the NCM is transmitting NOTI•FIRE•NETT"' is in progress. RESET (yellow): Illuminates when the microcontroller fails.POWER(green):Illuminates when+5 VDC is available. NCM-W (detai/J NCM-F (detai/J `��',;. fe ��RMB EG TERMA - I I Channel A&8 Connectrons I ' � 3Y c2 ��`�� ° ' (��J = �a / � �. f J ; Z, ..,,✓,. ' I �^.. �J ,-__ 't� EFltiTH�,hi 6-�H A� � � \/ x,:� �I O , �- ChanneFA&8 ' "3� Ground Fault Detection switches � �� Connections and Network EOL Termination � � �� -L�f Resisfor switches + i ! � ; I � RX � � TX ' RX I I TX :�eotoi �Dioo I - J203 J202� J201 J200 A HI e HI Network Connection� / PoRS(NUP) � �,� �� L D5 I.Oi J3 .I2 u H�:�a J3 J2 Dragnostic � � � �� a� LEDs � RCDA RCDB Network Q n RCDA RCDB ,� � � ' eoa �eo2 �A � � � �EO� Connection o n, I � ��'' a � � � Ports(NUPJ � o �a STATA STATB � ; STATA aTATB � ' � � �eos Eos �`- � � � �, � � �..,,. � �- I �w> � �. RECON PULSE7 `� � �j� RECON PULSE1 Q : � � � eoi e�a < ; �EO -oa � f,.,., ° , � � � � Diagnostic � � � �RESET POWER � �j LEDS �'�,RESET POWER �� I,.' \ r 6861ncmw.wmf 6861nanf.wmt � :��.�a �' ��.',�'�. I � � NOTI•FIRE•NETTM'is a trademark of Honeywell International Inc. ST�is a registered trademark of AT&T. 002008.A�I rights reserved.Unauthorized use of this docume�t is strictly pro- hibited. This document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. We try to keep our product information up-to-date and accurate. We cannot cover alI specific applications or anticipate all requirements. All specifications are subject to change without notice. �'� Made in the U.S.A. Johnson Controls 507 East Michigan Street,Milwaukee,WI 53202•www.johnsoncontrols.com Page 2 of 2—JCI-6861:A1•1/28/OS jci-60047:b U DACT �� -,�i `��Universal Digital Alarm )ohnson 1 ! Communicator Transmitter COfitf0�5 • General � The Universal Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter � � (UDACT) is designed for use on the Johnson Control's Fire Alarm Control Panels. When used in conjunction with the J8� JNCA-2 network control annunciators the UDACT can report J �,,,�,�„�_ OO �, �O the status of all control panels on NOTI•FIRE•NETT"^. The f .„. �^'°�� UDACT transmits system status to UL listed Central Station 3 �° � � n ^��`w Receivers via the public switched telephone network. �� U Eo�P NOTE: The UDACT can also be used with legacy panels. Please � "'"` refer to the UDACT manual for more information. u�Q _ The UDACT is compact in size and may be mounted externally in a separate cabinet. EIA-485 annunciator communications ❑°°""R °`°""`"�` bus and regulated 24-volt connections are required. O `�E"`�' °��`F The UDACT is capable of transmitting the status of software aena TEST MooE zones(Alarm and Trouble),System Trouble,Panel Off-Normal, ��Q�� Supervisory, Bell Trouble, Low Battery, and AC Fail. The O O O Q O UDACT is capable of transmitting all of the zone and point sta- tus associated with each panel. �� When the UDACT is used with the IFG2020/1010, IFC-3030, 0��0 IFC2-3030, and JNCA-2 it is capable of reporting up to 2,040 ° O points. Reporting may be in the form of points or zones (refer ° �s� to the UDACT manual for specific reporting parameters). The � UDACT / first 568 points transmitted may be programmed for a variety of types, including fire, watertiow, supervisory, etc. Remaining points transmitted are for fire alarm only. NOTE:Descriptions regarding point capacity, listed above,are for � Annunciation of UDACT Troubles including: loss of phone receivers which receive in Ademco Contact ID format. See chart lines,communication failure with either Central Station,total on page 2 for compatible receivers. communications failure. • Troubleshoot Mode converts keypad to DTMF touchpad. Features • Individual LEDs for: Power, EIA-485 Loss, Manual Test, Kissoff, Comm Fail, Primary line Seize, Secondary Line • Maximum of 14 point trouble messages transmitted per Seize and Modem Communications. hour. • Open Collector relay driver for Total Communications Fail- • Dual phone lines. ure or UDACT trouble. • Dual telephone line voltage detect. • Real-time clock. • Surtace Mount Technotogy. • Extensive transient protection. • Compact in size:6.75"x 4.25"(17.145 x 10.795 cm). • Simple EIA-485 intertace to host panel. • Built-in programmer. • a��it-�r,a-�nara�cer red�-seqment��a�spiay. Agency Listings and Approvals • Manual Test Report function. In some cases, certain modules may not be listed by certain • Manual Transmission Clear function. approval agencies, or listing may be in process. Consult fac- • Mounts in a separate enclosure(ABS-8R6 or UBS-i l. tory for latest listing status. • Communicates vital system status including: • UL Listed:S635 —Independent zone fire alarm. • ULC Listed:CS100 —Independent zone non-fire alarm. • MEA:317-01-E4; 345-02-E Vol. II;232-06-C Vol. II —Independent zone trouble. • CSFM:7170-0554:154;7165-0554:149;7170-0554:150 —Independent zone supervisory. • FM Approved —AC(mains)Power Loss(programmable). —Low Battery and Earth Fault. Communication Formats —System Off-Normal. • 3+1 Standard •4+1 Standard •4+2 Standard —12 or 24 hour test signal. • 4+1 and 4+2 Ademco Express •Ademco Contact ID —Abnormal Test Signal per new UL requirements. NOTE:Ademco Contact ID must be used for independent zone —EIA-485 Communication Bus Failure. reporting. jci-60047:b•03/27/09—Page 1 of 4 Type Mode Feature Ordering Information Ademco Contact ID format only) Use Type Mode to identify UDACT: Universal Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter. reports to Central Station as: Includes operating and programming instructions, and mount- • Fire Alarm • Burglary ing hardware. • Supervisory • 24 hour Non-Burglary MCBL-7: DACT phone cord,7 ft(2.13 m)long(two required). • Pull Station • High Temperature ABS-8R6: Metal enclosure for externally mounting UDACT • Heat Detector • Low Temperature up to 6,000 ft./1828.8 m from host FACP 9.94" H x 4.63" W x • Waterflow • Low Water Pressure 2•50"D(cm:25.248 H x 11.760 W x 6.350 D). • Duct Detector • Low Water Level UBS-1: Metal enclosure. Includes viewing window and • Flame Sensor • Pump Failure optional relay mounting capability. • Smoke Zone R-10E: SPDT Form-C relay. Contacts rated for 10 A@ 115 VAC.Connects to open collector relay driver. Electrical Specifications R-20E: DPDT Two Form-C relays. Contacts rated for 10A @ 115 VAC.Connects to open collector relay driver. Standby current:40 mA. FBD-1: Ferrite bead kit.Use for remote mounting only. Current while communicating:75 mA. ROM1-UDACT: EPROM upgrade kit. Maximum current while communicating and with open collec- tor output activated: 100 mA. Voftage:Regulated 24 volts. Range:21.2 to 28.2 volts. � � ABS8R � o for remote mounting ° [9.94"(25.2476cm)H x 4.63"(11.7602cm)W x p 2.5"(6.35cm)D) a � � o � � � 0 � � ° o �m� 1��aos 5 � � a� a ��r,t w..� �� - �y�_ � i: � �� , � � � r �� i , , � ..,,,, UDACT shown in UBS-1 Page 2 of 4—jci-60047:b•03/27/09 � �_ . , i � � Osbome Silent ITI Radionics Sescoa SurGuard Format# Ademco FBI Hoffman (Addresses 16&42) 685(1) 9000t CS 3j 00 CP220F6 Mo�Zs 600(5;500 3(�jR M(9-2 0 4+1 Ademco Express X X X 1 4+2 Ademco Express X X X(8) X 2 3+1/Standard/1800/2300 X X(2) X X(4) X X(5,6) X X 3 (NOT USED) 4 3+1/Standard/1900/1400 X X(2) X�4) X X X 5 (NOT USED) 6 4+1 /Standard/1800/2300 X X(2� X X(4) X X(5) X X 7 (NOT USED) 8 4+1/Standard/1900/1400 X X(2) X�4) X X X 9 (NOT USED) 'A 4+z/Standard/1900/2300 X X(2) X X(4) X X(5) X X B (NOT USED) C 4+2/Standard/1900/1400 X X(2) X(4) X X X D (NOT USED) E Ademco Contact ID X X X X F (NOT USED) 1.)With 685-8 Line Card with Rev.4.4d software. 2.)With 9002 Line Card Rev.9035 software or 9032 Line Card with 932oA software. 3.)Rev.4.0 software. 4.)FBI CP220F6 Rec-11 Line Card with Rev.2.6 software and a memory card with Rev.3.8 software. 5.)Model 6500 with Rev.600 software. 6.)Model 6000 with Rev.204 software. 7.)With Rev.B control card at Rev. 1.4 software and Rev.C line card at Rev. 1.5 software. 8.)Model 2 only. 9.)Version 1.62 software. � jci-60047:b•03/27/09—Page 3 of 4 � NOTI•FIRE•NETTM'is a trademark of Honeywell International Inc. �02009.All rights reserved.Unauthorized use of this document is strictty pro- hibited. This document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. '""� We try to keep our product information up-to-date and accurate. °,�� We cannot cover all specific applications or anticipate ail requirements. >:, ,� All specifications are subject to change without notice. _ '-�"� Made in the U.SY A. For more information,contact Johnson Controls Field Support Center. 507 East Michigan Street,Milwaukee,WI 53202 www.johnsoncontrols.com Page 4 of 4—jci-60047:b•03/27/09 jci-3198:b LC D-80 t, ��i i Liquid Crystal Display �ohnson � �� Controls General t;t::.,,, ; The LCD-80 is an 80-character,backlit LCD display annunciator � � for the Johnson Controls' IFC-3030/IFC2-3030, IFC-2020/1010, IFC-640/IFC2-640, IFC-400, IFG200, and FG2000 fire alarm ' control panels, or the JNCA/JNCA-2 network control annuncia- tor.Up to 32 LCD-80s may be connected onto the two-wire EIA- 485 port. The LCD-80 has two basic modes of operation, "Ter- minal°and"ACS"mode. � „, �� ...,. NOTE: The LCD-80 can also be used with Legacy panels. Please refer to the L�D-80 manual for more information. � '"' � Common Features � �, • Listed to UL Standard 864,Ninth Edition • 80-character backlit Liquid Crystal Display(20 characters x 4 ' � lines). • Control switches fo� 5ystem Acknowledge, Signal Silence �� 4 and System Reset. { '�� • Time and date display field. '�'��A�-'�`�� • Enable Key switch and phone jack options. • Can be remotely located up to 6,000 ft. (1828.8 m)from the LCD-80 with JABF-1 B control panel. • Local piezo sounder with alarm/trouble resound. '�"grmllla� MOC�@ • Flushisurface/panel mount option. In "Terminal" mode, the LvD-80 mimics the IFC-2020/1010, ACS Mode IFC-S40/IFC2-640, IFC-400, IFG200, and JNCA/JNCA-2 dis- plays. Up to 32 LCD-80s can annunciate and provide remote When operated in"ACS" mode, the LCD-80 provides vectored reset, acknowledge, and silen�e of the control panel from annunciation capability. Individual devices/zones can be remote locations. installer-defined to only display at specific locations . Displays device type identifiers. EXAMPLE:A maintenance office receives only non-alarm point . Device and zone custom alpha lab�ls. activations. These inputs could be sump pump on, high water, . Time/date and Device address. backup AHU on,low temperature in freezer,etc. • Alarm/trouble count. • May operate in addition to CRT. • Custom"normai"message. • No programming necessary. LCD-80 displays time,date,and custom messages received from the panel or network annun- • European option:first alarm/last alarm/alarm count, ciator • Field-programmable messages from CRT or PC-compatible . The IFC-3030 does NOT use LCD-80 in terminal mode. computer(PK-LCD-80 Programming Kit required). LCD-80 is 8.25" (20.96 cm) high, 4.375" (11.11 cm) wide, • EIA-485 interface:up to 32 per system. • and 1.75"(4.45 cm)deep. • Printer output port: EIA-232, compatible with JPRN Series . Up to LCD-80s may be used on one EIA-485 circuit. printerS. NOTE: Musf have sufficient regulated 24 volt power. Certain • Field-programmable messages in nonvolatile memory in two Johnson Controlssystems may have limits to the amount of LCD- options: 128 points, 40 character labels; or 256 points, 20 80s with ACK/STEP,Signal Silence,and Reset switches. character labels. • LCD-80 mounts with any CHS-4 chassis slot. • Internal nonvolatile clock for time and date in ACS mode. NOTE: The IFC-3030 o erates with the LCD-80 in ACS mode � The LCD-80 may display ali FC-2000 circuits. Alternately, it P may display up to 192 AIM-200 points and two rows of mod- only. ules. • Up to 32 LCD-80s may be used in a continuous 4-wire loop (verify sufficient 24 VDC available). • Each may have ACK/STEP, SIGNAL SILENCE, and SYS- TEM RESET switches. • Displays all analog,addressable points. • No programming required for LCD-80s. jci-3198:b•03i24/09—Page 1 of 4 The LCD-80 in ACS Mode 6,000 ft.(1828.8 m)maximum total wire length �: EIA-485 EIA-485 EIR-4$5 __ _ __ _ , {2 wires) (2 wires} (2 wires) ' 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC ' (2 wiresj {2 wires) (2 wires) _ , I TO -- — TO _ ' Tp - PRN PRN PRN PRINTER PRINTER PRINTER IFC-320, IFC2-640, IFC-640, IFC2-3030, IFC-3030, JNCA,JNCA-2 connecting to LCD-80 The LCD-80 in Terminal Mode _ ___ __ __ _ _ ', � 6,O�J0 ft.(1828.8 m}maximum wire length ' Terminal Mode between eacn ' EIA-485 (2 wires) _ , _ __ 24 VDC -' '�_-. - ' i ! (2 wires} _ _ _ � I _ � � EIA-232 � Terminal Mode EIA-485 retum(2 wires) � Printer Port I �—,�. —1. i . , ,:._ ,, PRN Printer IFC-320, IFC2-640, IFC-640, IFC2-3030, IFC-3030,JNCA, JNCA-2 connecting to LCD-80 t Related Options � �� PK-LCD80(available for download): Off-Line Programming f l o ,o Kit for LCD-80. Allows PC programming messages when LCD- �0 80 is used in the ACS mode. JABF-1 DB: Semi-flush box with alternative smoked-glass door, any keylock. The JABF-i B Backbox ADP-46:Annunciator Dress Plate, black. Allows panel mount- ing of up to four LCD-80 modules in a CAB-4 Series cabinet. The JABF-1 DB is a semi-flush-mount backbox for the Johnson Controls ADT-LCD-80 Series Annunciator. The JABF-1 DB JABF-1 B: Annunciator Flush Box, 9.938" (25.24 cm) high, mounts one ADT-LCD-80. It includes an attractive smoked-glass 4.625" (11.75 cm)wide, and 2.5" (6.35 cm)deep. Order JAKS- door with Johnson Controls keylock. 1 B key switch and JAPJ-1 B phone jack if desired. Can also be Dimensions,BOX only: 9.938"(2524 cm)high,4.625"(11.75 mounted in JABF-26 or JABF-46 annunciator backboxes. cm)wide,2.5"(6.35 cm)deep. JABS-1TB: Deep Surface Backbox(mounts one LCD-SO). Dimensions,DOOR only: 10.713" (27.21 cm) high, 6.0" �AKS-1 B: Key Switch (black) to enable/disable controls when (15.24 cm)wide,0.75"(1.9 cm)deep. mounted in JABF or JABS-1 TB. JPRN-6: 80-Column Serial Printer(see JPRN data sheet). Page 2 of 4—jci-3198:b•03/24/09 Agency Listings and Approvals These listings and approvals apply to the modules specified in this document. In some cases, certain modules or applications may not be listed by certain approval agencies,or listing may be in process.Consult factory for latest listing status. • UL Listed:S635 • ULC�isted:CS100 • MEA:290-91-E;289-91-E;345-02-E: • CSFM:7120-0028:156 • FM Approved � �r"* jci-3198:b•03/24/09—Page 3 of 4 � � i � , � � 002009. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use of this document is strictly prohibited. This document is not intended to be used for instaltation purposes. We try to keep our product information up-to-date and accurate. We cannot cover all specific applications or anticipate all requirements. All specifications are subject to change without notice. Made in the U.S.A. For more information,contact Johnson Controls Field Support Center. 507 East Michigan Street,Milwaukee,WI 53202 www.johnsoncontrois.com Page 4 of 4—jci-3198:b•03/24/09 JCI-6940:A1 LCD-160 �� -,� Liquid Crystal Display ,�QfYt1501"t �� . �t�tl�('t��S General The LCD-160 is a 640-character Liquid Crystal Display(LCD) annunciator and remote control for the IFC-3030/IFC2-3030 � {;ui' Fire Alarm Control Panel(FACP).The LCD-160 will mimic the � � � � top portion(160 characters)of the IFC-3030/IFC2-3030's 640- character dis la .This rovides the event and re ro rammed P Y p P P 9 custom messages as displayed on the main panel. The full ;� �a�� screen contains soft key functions,and can display other panei � � �� , �,� information. � � � ��"� �" ��° � � �,� "`�'� y LCD-160 Features � ��-. �� -�' � � • 640-character Liquid Crystal Display with backlit controL `m" A"' ` � ' `� • On-board input, output, and status indicators to support �� — "` diagnostics. �� y� e� _� °-�;° • Software upgrades and foreign-languages character sets via serial port from a panel or other device using the Remote Data Port(RDP)interface.Upgrades do not require the replacement of any programmable devices. • Rubberized keypad. • Input for JAKS-1 key switch. • Fits in two ACS annunciator module locations. 'Gy4ocovjp� • Display and Control�enter(DCC)participation/indication. : RDP BUS W/R/NG SPECIFICATIONS RDP Interface Wiring distance: 4000 feet �i2isz m� at 18 AWG (0.78 mm2) between the panel and the last device on the RDP bus Any communication between the control panel and any RDP (subject to system's power restrictions). device,such as the LCD-160,occurs over an RDP interface. yy�ring size: 18 to 12 AWG (0.78 to 3.1 mm2) twisted-pair • RDP interface communication is supervised by the FACP cable,with characteristic impedartce of 120 ohms±20%. and the LCD-160. Wire resistance: Limit total wire resistance to 100 ohms on • RDP bus can drive up to 32 RDP devices.The FACP must the RDP bus, and 10 ohms on the RDP device power circuit. be at one end of the bus; the last RDP device on the circuit Unloaded resistance between RDP connectors must be must have an enabled end-of-line resistor. greater than 1 K ohm.A remote power supply is required if total • Each LCD-160 on the bus requires a non-resettable 24 power wiring resistance exceeds 10 ohms. VDC power connection. The power circuit is inherently NOTES:1)DO NOT RUN CABLE adjacent to,or in the same con- supervised and a loss of power registers as a communica- duit as: 120 VAC service;`noisy"electrical circuits that are power- tion failure at the control panel. ing mechanical bells or horns;audio circuits above 25 Vrms;motor • The LCD-160 can be powered by a regulated remote power control circuits;SCR power circuits;or non-power-limited circuits. supply listed for fire-protective signa�ing use. If the 24 VDC 2)Refer to LCD-160 Manual,document no.51850,if RDP devices power comes from a non-power-limited source, it must are to 6e mounted in SEPARATE CABINETS or powered by remain separate from the power-limited RDP bus. REMOTE POWER SUPPLIES. TEMPERATURE/HUM/D/TY RANGE: Specifications This system meets NfPA requirements for operation at 0— Input supply voltage(T62): Regulated, filtered 24 VDC via 49°C/32—120°F and at a relative humidity 93%±2%RH non-resettable power supply interface listed for fire-protective �noncondensing)at 32°C±2°C(90°r±3°F). However,the signaling use. Sources can be: panels with integrated power useful life ot the system's standby batteries and the electronic supplies, main power supplies (AMPS-24, etc.), auxiliary components may be adversely affected by extreme tempera- power supplies (APS-6R, etc.); or a compatible accessories output. If RDP devices are to be powered by separate power ture ranges and humidity. Therefore,it is recommended that supplies, a common reference connection must be estab- this system and its peripherals be installed in an environment lished. with a normal room temperature of 15—27°Cl60—80°F. Data communications port(T81): Power-limited RDP inter- face. Current draw: Standby cur�ent:0.300 A with backlight on, 0.075 A with backlight off. Alarm current:0.325 A witn back- light on,all LEDs active. I �, JCI-6940:A1•11!29/07—Page 1 of 4 LCD-160 Interface and Indicators Supervisory: Scroll/display a list of associated events. The liquid crystal display is 40 characters wide and 16 lines Trouble: Scroll/display a list of associated events. deep, and displays all programming screens and other infor- Other Event: Scroll between prealarm and disabled events. mation. The keypad is functional only when an entry is For complete information on key functions and effects on dif- requested by the system. Enter or change fields and issue ferent panels, refer to the LCD-160 Manual and panel manu- commands on the display by using the two types of keys on als. the keypad:fixed function and soft keys. Soft keys are the six keys to the right and left of the display. Fixed function keys are the ten keys labeled on the front of Use them to select commands that appear on the display for the LCD-160, operating at all times on all screens unless oth- each different screen. Refer to the screens in the LCD-160 erwise noted. With both an active command center and DCC Manual for descriptions of the applicable soft keys. enabled at the panel, Acknowledge, Signal Silence, System Reset, and Drill require permission before they can be pro- STATUS LED/ND/CATORS cessed. Power (green) illuminates when AC power is within normal Acknowiedge: Press to respond to any�vent or trouble sig- operating limits. nal.If enabled,silences the LCD-160 piezo sounder.Sends an Fire Alarm(red)illuminates when at least one fire alarm event acknowledge message to the panel. exists. It will flash if any of these events are unacknowledged. Signal Silence: Press to send a system silence command to pre-Alarm(red)illuminates when at least one pre-alarm event the panel, with the particular silencing action information exists. It will flash if any of these events are unacknowledged. stored at the FACP Verification screen appears on networked displays. Security (blue) illuminates when at least one security event exists. It will flash if any of these events are unacknowledged. System Reset: Press to send a system reset command to the panel,with the particular reset action information stored at Supervisory (yellow)illuminates when at least one supervi- the FACP Verification screen appears on networked displays. sory event exists. It wili flash if any of these events are unac- knowledged. Drill: Press(hold for two se�onds) to activate all silenceable fire output circuits. System Trouble (yellow)illuminates when at least one trou- ble event exists. It will fiash if any of these events are unac- Lamp Test: Press to test the LED indicators and the piezo,or knowledged. display firmware version numbers. Other Event(yeflow)(future release). Fire Alarm: Scroll;display a list of associated events. Security: Scroll/display a list of associated events. i�J4 fiiiiiii ��a '�;'� �� y J3 i.z J1 IU� � i LCD Il•'�2 BACKLIGHT LC D-160 KEY SWITCH J2 i--.z LCD - 19`—"2o ( I o:'� c�a �u� ��+ V`�PGWER I7r1 i;77777�� 0 I l - Ih �� ;:,��7� i7��OCt� I `.�� .�_SVDCOUT r STATUS i y;�;;:nunnmm�niinnnn j � o �OMMCtr IN T62 1ED11 � _ ° ° corlydoN ouT ' _ � RDP 1 ° = - TB1 ac�� I�IICRG;Att (,i�,i!i,im;immniininiintij �DP+ � LED74 � ,n ;ri, i� �i r,cj-- RGP- RECElVc +��- 7.1 .,�7� ]7^'CO[G� . SW17� LED 12 REF E '","`,'''[i TRANSMtT °° REF ? LED 13 EFRTH o n n �� Page 2 of 4—JCI-6940:A1•11/29/07 Signals Siienced (ye!!ow) illuminates if notification appli- work controi to alternate network control centers.This protocol ances have been silenced. It flashes if some,but not all,of the atlows for a "request for control" from another networked NACs have been silenced. panel, which will be accepted or rejected from the current Point Disabled (yellow)illuminates when at least one device DCC. A 15-second time-out allowance provides for an auto- has been disabled. It will flash until all disabled points have matic passing of control in the event there is no response from been acknowledged. the originai DCC. If the IFC-3030/IFC2-3030 panel associated with an LCD-160 has been programmed to participate in DCC, Controls Active (green) iliuminates when the LCD-160 all remote displays with Local Control ON will automatically assumes control of the node as a primary display. participate. DIAGNOSTIC LED/NDICATORS Status, LED11 (green), biinks wnen me �c�-�so is on. v�s�- Agency Listings and Approvals ble to the installer/troubleshooter only. These listings and approvals apply to the LCD-160. In some Receive, LED12 (green), blinks when data is received from cases, certain modules or applications may not be listed by the panel.Visible to the installer/troubleshooter only. certain approval agencies, or listing may be in process. Con- suit factory for latest listing status. Transmit, LED13 (green), blinks when data is transmitted to . UL:S635 the panel.Visible to the installer/troubleshooter only. • ULC:CS100 Microfail, LED14 (yellow), illuminates if the microcontroller fails.Visible to the installer/troubleshooter only. • MEA:232-Oo-E,Vol.3 • CSFM:7120-0028:227 Event Handling and the Display and Control Center Product Line Information LCD-160: 640-character Liquid Crystal Display annunciator. UL and ULC require that when multiple command and control centers are installed,only one operator at any location can be Backboxes in control at any given time for functions such as acknowledge, The following backboxes can be surface- or semi-flush- silence, and reset. This is called the Display and Control Cen- mounted to provide an enclosure for remote mounting. Use ter(P�C). DCC operation provides a mechanism to pass net- With 1/2"(1.27 cm)conduit in the provided knockouts. JABS-2D(black)and JABS-2DR(red): surface- or semi- RDP Bus Wire Runs flush enclosure for remote mounting. Mounts an LCD-160 directly to the enclosure's hinged dress plate. The JABS-2D LCD-160 Power and JABS-2DR do NOT support the instaliation of the JAKS-1 rACP key-switch or JAPJ-1 phone ja�k. Not for use in Canadian 12 to 18 AWG '� (3.1 to 0.78 mm�) LCD-160 applications. Optional trim ring TR-ABS2D for semi-flush i ' � non-resettable mounting. Dimensions, box: 12.0° (30.480 cm) H x 12.0" � � � � (30.480 cm)W x 3.797";9.644 cm)D(NOTE:The black JABS- �. ,e' I o� 2D is slightly deeper). Dimensions, door:12.0" (30.480 cm) Two-wire RDP Bus - - - - - H x 12.0"(30.480 cm)W x 1250"(3.17�cm)D. 4000 feet(1219.2 mj max. ' ' ' ' ' JABS-4D(black)and JABS-4DR(red): surface- or semi- �€ power-limited and flush enclosure for remote mountin Mounts an LCD-160 and supervised 9• two annunciators directly to the enclosure's hinged dress plate. The JABS-4D and JABS-4DR do NOT support the installation of the JAKS-1 key-switch or JAPJ-1 phone jack. Dimensions,box:11.97"(30.40 cm)H x 19.87"l50.47 cm)W Sample Screen: Point Event Display ACKNOWLEDGED TROUBLE ELEVATOR LOBBY EAST WING FIFTN FLOOR Z239 SMOKE (PHOT4) 11�58�45A WED JUN 26, 2�03 L03D002 EVENT COUNTS FIRE ALARMS:�O� PREALARM:��O TROUBLE:001 SUPERVZS4RY�000 SECURITY�00� DISABLE�00� � 11=58�46A WED JUN 26, 2003 - I �` SIGNAL SILENCE �� MORE INFORMATION SYSTEM RESET � � �� '�ul �� PROGftAM MENU � JCI-6940:A1•11/29/07—Page 3 of 4 x 3.5" (8.89 cm) D. Dimensions,door:11.97" (30.40 cm)H x 19.87"(50.47 cm)W x 1.250"(3.175 cm)D. JABF-2B: black flush enclosure for remote mounting. Mounts an LCD-160 directly to the enclosure's dress plate. Not for use in Canadian applications. Includes a painted black metal trim plate [11" (27.94 cm) high x 10.625" (26.99 cm) wide] and adhesive-backed annunciator label. 9.938" (25.24 cm) high x 9.188"(23.34 cm)wide x 3.75"(9.525 cm)deep. JABF-4B: black flush enclosure for remote mounting of one LCD-160 and two annunciator modules directly to the enclo- sure's dress plate. Knockouts are provided for use with 1/2" (127 cm) conduit. Includes a painted black metal trim plate (11"(27.94 cm)high x 19.375"(49.21 cm)wide�and an annun- ciator label.9.938"(2524 cm)high x 17.75"(45.09 cm)wide x 2.5"(6.35 cm)deep. CAB-4 and CAB-3 Series cabinets: are surface- or semi- flush-mounted, in sizes to accommodate one to four rows of equipment plus batteries (up to two 25 AH batteries). Four sizes are available. Doors are ordered separately, and feature reversible hinges to mount doors on the left or right side.Doors also open a full 180°. Keylocks are included. For dimensions and further information, see data sheets for CAB-4 Series(JCI-6857)and CAB-3 Series. ACCESSORIES DP-DISP: Dress Panel Display for cabinet mounting of an LCD-160. LCD-160 mounts directly to the dress panel, which hinge-mounts to the top tier of a CAB-3/-4 Series backbox. ADP-46: Annunciator Dress Panel-4B (black) for cabinet mounting of an LCD-160. LCD-160 mounts directly to the dress panel, which hinge-mounts to the tier of a CAB-3/-4 Series backbox. TR-ABS2D: (black)optional trim ring for semi-flush mounting JABS-2D(R). VP-26(black)and VP-2: Vented Dress Panel for use with the ADP-46 dress panel installed in the top tier of a-3/cabinet. It covers the gap between the dress panel and top of the cabi- net. JAKS-1 B(black)and JAKS-1: Annunciator Key Switches provide access securiiy for the control switches on the LCD- 160.Key-switch kit includes key,hardware,and an annunciator label. 002007.All rights reserved.Unauthorized use of this document is strictly pro- hibited. This document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. We try to keep our product information up-to-date and accurate. We cannot cover all specific applications or anticipate all requirements. Ail specifications are subject to change without notice. �`� ��,<�a Made in the U.S.A. For more information,contact Johnson Controls Field Support Center. 507 East Michigan Street,Milwaukee,Wt 53202 www.johnsoncontrols.com Page 4 of 4—JCI-6940:A1•11/29/07 JCI-6924:A1 XP6-C � -�� S�x Circu�t Supervised Control )ohnson �,�� Module and SYNC-1 Accessory Card ��r{}�S � General The XP6-C six-circuit supervised control module provides � intelligent alarm systems with supervised monitoring of wiring , �s�:; to load devices that require an extemal power supply to oper- � - °- ate,such as horns, strobes,or belia Each module is intended � ��``� ` � ��' ��. for switching applications involving AC DC or audio, which " require wiring supervision. Upon command from the control ��° � �� panel, the XP6-C will disconnect the supervision and connect �°° the extemal power supply across the load device. '� � The first module is addressed from 01 to 154 while the remain- ing modules are automatically assigned to the next five higher addresses. Each XP6-C module has terminals for connection to an external supply circuit for powering devices on its notifi- cation appliance circuit(NAC).One or multiple power supplies � or amplifiers may be used. NOTE:Provisions are included for disabling a maximum of three � unused addresses. � Each XP6-C module features a short-circuit-protection monitor $„� �` ;� to protect the external power supply against short-circuit con- '�.y � � ,k ditions on the NAC.When an alarm condition occurs,the relay ��. � which connects the external supply to the NAC will not be ` allowed to close if a short-circuit condition currently exists on � the NAC. Additionally, an algorithm is incorporated to find shorts when the module is active. The XP6-C module will Alarm current: 35 mA (assumes all six NACS have been close ali circuits that are not shorted to find the NAC with the switched once and all six LEDs solid ON). problem. Temperature range:32°F to 120°F(0°C to 49°C)for UL appli- Each XP6-C module has panel-controlled green LED indica- cations;—10°C to+55°C for EN�4 applications. tors. The panel can cause the LEDs to blink, latch on,or latch off. Humidity: 10% to 85% noncondensing for UL applications; 10%to 93%noncondensing for EN54 applications. The SYNC-1 accessory card provides the XPo-C with additional functionality with compatible System Sensor Dimensions: 6.8"(172.72 mm)high x 5.8"(147.32 mm)wide SpectrAlertC�and SpectrAlert Advance0 audio/visual devices. x 125"(31.75 mm)deep. Shipping weight: 1.1 Ib. (0.499 kg)including packaging. Features Mounting options: CHS-5 chassis, BB-25 cabinet, BB-XP • Six addressable Siyle B {Class B) or three addressable cabinet, CAB-3/CAB-4 series backboxes and doors, or EQ Style D(Class A)outputs that function as notification appli- Series cabinet. ance/speaker/telephone circuits. Wire gauge: 12 AWG (3.31 mm2) to 18 AWG (0.821 mm2), • Removable 12 AWG (3.31 mm2) to 18 AWG (0.821 mm2) grounded. plug-in terminal blocks. XP6-C is shipped in Class B position; remove shunt for • Status indicators for each point. Class A operation. • Unused addresses may be disabled(up to 3). Maximum SLC wiring resistance: 40 or 50 ohms, panel • Rotary address switches. dependent. • FlashScanO or CLIP operation. Maximum NAC wiring resistance:40 ohms. • Optional SYNC-1 accessory card for SpectrAlert and Spec- power rating per circuit:63 W@ 70.7 VAC(UL applications trAlert Advance devices. only);�2.5 W Q 25 VAC. • Mount one or two modules in a BB-XP cabinet(optionai). Current ratings: • Mount up to six modules on a CHS-6 chassis in a CAB-3 . 3.0 A@ 30 VDC maximum, resistive, non-coded. Series, CAB-4 Series, EQ Series, or BB-25 cabinet (optional). • 2.0 A@ 30 VDC maximum, resistive, coded. • Mounting hardware included. • 1.0 A@ 30 VDC maximum, inductive(UR=2 ms),coded. • 0.5 A@ 30 VDC maximum, inductive(VR=5 ms),coded. Specifications • 0.9 A@ 70.7 VAC maximum (UL only), resistive, non- Standby current: 2.25 mA (SLC current draw with all coded. addresses used; if some addresses are disabled, the standby • 0.7 A@ 70.7 VAC maximum �UL only), inductive (PF = current decreases). 0.35),non-coded. JCI-6924:A1•12/28/07—Page 1 of 6 Compatible devices: See the documentation for your panel, SYNC-1:Optional accessory card for synchronization of com- and the JCI Device Compatibility document. Contact Johnson patible System Sensor SpectrAlert horns, strobes, and horn/ Controls. See also list of devices compatible with SYNC-1 strobes. below. BB-XP: Optional cabinet for one or two modules. Dimen- sions, DOOR: 9.234" (23.454 cm) wide (9.484" [24.089 cm� SYNC-1 Accessory Card including hinges), x 12.218" (31.0337 cm) high, x 0.672" The SYMC-1 accessory card is designed to operate with the ��•�068 cm) deep; BACKBOX: 9.0" (22.860 cm) wide (9.25" XP6-C. It works with the SpectrAlert and the SpectrAlert I23.495 cm]including hinges),x 12.0"(30.480 cm)high x 2.75" Advance series of horns, strobes, and horn/strobes to provide (6.985 cm); CHASSIS (installed): 7.150" (18.161 cm) wide a means of synchronizing the temporal-coded horns; synchro- overall x 7.312" (18.5725 cm) high interior overall x 2.156" nizing the one-second flash timing of the strobe; and silencing f 5.4762 cm)deep overall. the horns of the horn/strobe combination over a two-wire cir- BB-25: Optional cabinet for up to six modules mounted on cuit while leaving the strobes active. Each SYNC-1 accessory CHS-6 chassis (below). Dimensions, DOOR: 24.0" (60.96 card is capable of synchronizing six Class B circuits or three cm) wide x 12.632" (32.0852 cm) high, x 1.25" (3.175 cm) Class A circuits. deep, hinged at bottom; BACKBOX:24.0" (60.96 cm) wide x Maximum load on a loop:3 A. 12.550"(31.877 cm)high x 5.218"(132537 cm)deep. Operating temperature:32°F to 120°F(0°C to 49°C) CHS-6: Chassis, mounts up to six modules in a CAB-3 Series (see ), CAB-4 Series jsee JCI-6857) cabinet, or EQ Series Wire size: 12 to 18 AWG(3.31 to 0.821 mm2). cabinet. Operating voltage range: 11 to 30 VDC FWR, filtered or unfiltered. Refer to notification appliance installation inscruc- Agency Listings and Approvals tions for number of notification appliances and wire size. These listings and approvals apply to the modules specified in Compatible AN devices: The SYNC-1 Accessory Card is this document. In some cases,certain modules or applications compatible with all System Sensor SpectrAlert and SpectrAlert may not be listed by certain approval agencies, or listing may Advance Audio Visual Devices that have synchronization be in process.Consult factory for latest listing status. capability. Other manufacturers may be supported as well. Please refer to the latest Device �ompatibility Document, ' UL Listed:S635(S3705 SYN�-1) PN 51922. • ULC Listed:S635/CS118(XP6-CA) NOTE: `SpectrAlert and SpectrAlert Advan�e products utilizing ' MEA Listed:43-02-E /226-03-E(SYNC-1) SYNC-1 module below. • FM Approved(Local Protective Signaling) • CSFM:7300-0028:219 7300-1653:160(SYNC-1) Product Line Information • Maryland State Fire Marshal: Permit#2106(XP6-C) XP6-C:Six-circuit supervised control module. XP6-CA:Same as above with ULC Listing. � � �, I !s � _ ` ' � � SYNC-1 ��!N ;;� � �}` / Module setup:Before installing the i—'r—;� �--,_ _ � � accessory card on the XP6-C module, I �#-�r�r �� add the shunt to the board where `�'r� ,� 'ib'I indicated if any horns are required to ; sound in temporal pattern. �� ; F Parts included with SYNC-1:Two ��___ shunts,four screws,and two standoffs. F+� See installation instructions for details on �~� � _�___� ' � ;� mounting and wiring the accessory card � I� I.� " and module. XP6-C �g� �—�\ � �-� � � � �-s �\ ---�_ —� 692QSync.wmf Figure 1 Mounting the SYNC-1 accessory card to the XP6-C module Page 2 of 6—JCI-6924:A1•12/28/07 Wiring Diagrams EXTERNAL POWER � � SUPPLY C + m PN EOLN-1 vlc VIO / _ °•� � 1-� �-� } E � ; e � x 47K } I �• � PN R<7� � T i .°-� y a a � ��• � � (+) (+) '1.; e r- z m �a �yi� il I��. • >e�• as',• ��m ,�� I �L- y:o: �= � � �,� a�s s i �' ''I--II--J�� w�s�m ac � l�'1� • ., ?��• � _ a: ��na��- _ . - �:� � .o�s�� Slae� POWER{IMITEO ' r � � 8 SUPERVISED TpP OF TO ��,,�f � FROMPANEI J I� OR PRC`VIOUS�r� �� u• � DEVICE - �¢ • TONEY.T�� CcVICE /� � - _ X :pA41.1UNICATICN IME.32 VDG MAk. SEE PANEL MF�+VA!�OR WIRE kEQUIR[MEVTC. NOTE:EOL relay coil connections must be made using EOL relay connector assemblies on T10—T16 in event that all NACs on the PCB have dedicated supplies. Figure 2 Example of Class B, Style Y NAC configuration with a single supply dedicated to a single NAC EXTERNAL POWER � SUPPLV PNRd]K (-� �-) 97K �y I I + � � PNftd7K (_)�,l-l' ( > - �v �� ' ,l„K ��+}� �+� * �� + VIO VIO \+� t+� + F � � U Y�• I s ~�PNEOLR-1 � � • r�.�• I '�•�• REO I ~� �s�• � • .� � c Y r• BLK �I ;"�� : =�i o• I � ;'s N• � �0 w• + � a e<• I voy�• � ~ �I� z..is�.EZ� � PO6NER-UP.:I?"tL` � � R SUPERVISeC :OP�rF TO •� FROMPA�E� \ I a• OR PRE`iICUS �i� • I" • oewce �.� � I rovFxr f ` A o�vice��i�� c``, �7 riv^`� COMF,:UNIGATIJY l INE 37 V!J�AtP% - V SEEFHNELMAfJJ4!Fi;k IMRF_RFQUIRFMENT� Figure 3 Example of Class B, Style Y NAC configuration with a single supply shared by two NACs JCf-6924:A1•12/28/07—Page 3 of 6 � � I EXTERNAL VOWER f SUPPLY � EOL0.-t - �I (Tl'P) RED VIO VIO /_�' l_� 8LK l l � � + '�~ �}�`—'�}� 6I • � �� If '{I O + ~�tl I 1 �,.0~• y .- 1 z i C• • • �—, _��• �F . vYr• �s�• '��p � �n ¢B�Y L-11J N • 3 s c s � I �. (� �a�;• � I I �.w• � • ¢e<• n F I � �m o s �. • U .mGSe�e<rm ?OWEF-LI�dITED �`L�- �,�'`�.,�E�� R c�ipFRVISF� 10V OF TO 0 � FROMPANEL �� REMOVEJkUfYT OR?kEVIOUSr� oo .;. � � � GORCLASSA. oewce ' .� � I TQNEXi� I �� JEYICE /� � O COMAIUNI.^,ATInN LIN�,.'.2`iDC MAF%. E i'PNEL A1A!JUAL FOR WIRE RE!::1�REMFN'S. Figu�e 4 Example of Class A, Style Z NAC configuration with a single supply dedicated to a single NAC ° �� E��R� ' I W C� I°��/r')'P� I ftED VIO JIO I(_�' i_` 3LK � '` � �� --'t+��~ � I� �: + �~ � �.a: E%TERNAL + — �` �� v I�-• (-� �') I POWER - . . � a'�'• � ,� �� iSUPPLY ��. ~� :�s• � ' � � �• al•-�e E � I I >o c• _ � LL• o e �+�� v _ --__ '.—_ F��._ �o`�� -crm v �• (i�I A�s'aeiF�� m FOWERi1MfTED \ �� m I � ��-_. &SUPEkVISED TC?O�TO �� . � � \ FROMPAhE� � REAADVEaNLry7 ORPRE`.'IOUF � o PoRClASSA. eevir_ I: ro�Ex_�: _ _:J 4 � � a �EVIIE } �;QMRI:;NICHTION�INE,s2\'D::MW(. - �?a.fici�4'ANl1kL FnR 4vIRF REQJ!n^EMFn�rs Figure 5 Example of Class A, Style Z NAC configuration with a single supply shared by 2 NACs Page 4 of 6—JCI-6924:A1•12/28/07 �. HIGH�LEVELftETURN + ---------- 4-WIRESUPERVISED -�------------------ i � SEEPANEt1NS:A:.!FiION AUDIO + 1.^P^iUA�FORWIRING AMP�IFIE2 - I �NSTRJCTlONS ' .�-) -��-) 1SI T I T t I �� ,� � �� U ' c— `'� c'� ��u• o PN R-OlK � 4JK • F.t�• • i o!• � P �• I �• � �6�• a Y�• <�~ j O x• ��• � Z� i • > ..• N. ' (� oa o,s j � ww�s � ai� o I I g e:'<• I • I I w•�• � �: �J .,n�`sie'� P.�NER_�.��d�TG�. Y a �iv.s�� RSUPERVISED TuPOFTO I �liF• � FROMPANEL _ �\ SLf.� m . ^R PRJVIOUS � c � EVICc � SLC� roNex;�� s�c- � OE�9CE /� � � l�/ CnM11A,?��11GATI(:N LINE.:i?Vpf.MA%. I `/ SE£PANFL�!n.ntUAL 4'02 W'IKC NE:]L�i{+tMCNfS. Figure 6 Example of Class B, Style Y audio NAC configuration MIGM{EVELRETURN + ----- 4-VJ�RESUPERVISED - -- � AU�IO +� � AMPLIFIER -� (—) i-1 � ; + � i � � ; + �� c��,�—' ��},—� + �: �� + _,-: �.,�m Stt-anr:ec vdsn�.%,noro �-1 •1- c I�`s'e MarcVnL FOH 4WRIrvG ,I � � a I�_• � i1t5'nUC*IJHS m a��• (i� :o=o �mlalm 2 s�o . • � ;s c• � '�,TI u• a.c o ` W:�: �� I� aB�E�c(:T m �F •• ..��in�lE�.� � uOYJER-:IMITEU ' �- 3SuFERVISED TO?OFTO I�IR�� FROM PANEL _ SlC« �� R[MCYE SNUMi Oft>ReJIC�VS� � SLC- Is • rOF?C✓155� r,e:ice �;c+ ror�Exr j�>� s�'- I,I'� � o_vicE �' �Yy F O CO"dMVNI;:ATIGN'�,INE JZ VC�F/AX. LLJ - SL[PAN[�M/.Nt%Ai FOF WIFE REQ'vIR[RIE.kiS. Figure 7 Example of Class A, Style Z audio NAC configuration JCI-6924:A1•12/28/07—Page 5 of 6 . EXTERNAL 1� POWER SUPPLY DETAILVIEWA-A — + �, TO / ^ +e PS• NAf, o� ryP� �5� .�Hk� FS� NAC � T3 T4 T5 ;�p_ �� T1 �3 � �a4�-5 i �BOT.NAL+�FS. +��B �o • T�4 • It5 T �T71�T`2 • • • PCB #2 �r,� PCB #1 �00 ODC NOTE:Supply is shared by NACs+0 and+1(on PCB ul)as well as+3, +4,and+5(on PCB#2).Refer to Figure 2 through Figure 5 for typical NAC wiring.Make certain that the lip on the long power supply jumper engages the retaining tab on Ti0 or T16 as shown in detail view A-A. Figure 8 Example of multiple boards sharing the same external power supply � � FlashScanO is a registered trademark of Honeyweil lnternational Inc. 002007.All rights reserved.Unauthorized use of this document is strictly pro- hibited. This document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. � We try to keep our product information up-to-date and accurate. �� We cannot cover all specific applications or anticipate all requirements. _ All specifications are subject to change without notice. Made in the U S.A. � For more information.contact Johnson Controls Field Support Center. 507 East Michigan Street,Milwaukee,WI 53202 www.johnsoncontrols.com Page 6 of 6—JC�-6924:A1•12l28/07